diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv index 8f3a59f31f..e056558ed7 100644 --- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -EXO front intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Exodus\n\n1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)\n * First genealogy (1:1–6)\n * Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)\n * Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)\n * Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)\n * Second genealogy (6:14–27)\n * Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)\n * The plagues (8:1–11:10)\n2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)\n3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)\n * The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)\n * Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)\n4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)\n * Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)\n * The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)\n * The covenant described (20:18–23:33)\n * The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)\n * Design of the dwelling and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; dwelling functions (25:1–31:18)\n * The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)\n * The covenant described again (34:1–35)\n * Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)\n * The cloud (40:34–38)\n\n### What is the book of Exodus about?\n\nExodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.\n\nThe book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the dwelling. The dwelling was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the dwelling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Exodus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?\n\nMoses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was the most powerful nation at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people, and they should worship him.\n\n### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?\n\nThe book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Jewish Passover?\n\nThe Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt.\n\n### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?\n\nThe law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the dwelling.\n\n### What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” ([19:6](../19/06.md) ULT)?\n\nIsrael was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world; the other nations worshiped many false gods.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThis phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more.\n\n### Pharaoh’s stubborn heart\n\nBetween chapters 4 and 14, there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn, without saying anyone made him so ([7:13](../07/13.md), [7:14](../07/14.md), [7:22](../07/22.md), [8:19](../08/19.md), [9:7](../09/07.md), [9:35](../09/35.md)); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn ([8:15](../08/15.md), [8:32](../08/32.md), [9:34](../09/34.md)); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn ([4:21](../04/21.md), [7:3](../07/03.md), [9:12](../09/12.md), [10:1](../10/01.md), [10:20](../10/20.md), [10:27](../10/27.md), [11:10](../11/10.md), [14:4](../14/04.md), [14:8](../14/08.md), [14:17](../14/17.md)).\n\n### Why are the details of the construction of the dwelling in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?\n\nIn Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the dwelling was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40 in the description of the actual construction. This showed that the people were to be careful to do exactly as God commanded.\n\n### Are the events in the order that they actually happened?\n\nMost, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.\n\n### What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?\n\nThe book of Exodus presents God as living in the dwelling among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him.
-EXO 1 intro cj55 0 # Exodus 01 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

This chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Israel’s growth

Israel grew in number. This was in fulfillment of the covenant God made with Abraham. It also caused the Egyptians great concern that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against such a large number of people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### End of the famine

It is obvious that some time has passed since the beginning of the famine which brought the Israelites into Egypt. Yahweh appears to be punishing the Hebrews for not returning to the Promised Land but instead choosing to stay in Egypt. No return attempt is recorded to have been made. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”

This number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons. +EXO front intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Exodus\n\n1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)\n * First genealogy (1:1–6)\n * Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)\n * Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)\n * Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)\n * Second genealogy (6:14–27)\n * Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)\n * The plagues (8:1–11:10)\n2. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)\n3. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)\n * The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)\n * Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)\n4. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)\n * Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)\n * The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)\n * The covenant described (20:18–23:33)\n * The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)\n * Design of the Dwelling and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; dwelling functions (25:1–31:18)\n * The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)\n * The covenant described again (34:1–35)\n * Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)\n * The cloud (40:34–38)\n\n### What is the book of Exodus about?\n\nExodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.\n\nThe book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the Dwelling. The dwelling was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the Dwelling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Exodus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?\n\nMoses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was a very powerful nation in the region at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people and that they should worship him.\n\n### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?\n\nThe book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Jewish Passover?\n\nThe Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?\n\nThe law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the Dwelling.\n\n### What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” ([19:6](../19/06.md) ULT)?\n\nIsrael was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world; the other nations worshiped many false gods.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThis phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more.\n\n### Pharaoh’s stubborn heart\n\nBetween chapters 4 and 14, there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn, without saying anyone made him so ([7:13](../07/13.md), [7:14](../07/14.md), [7:22](../07/22.md), [8:19](../08/19.md), [9:7](../09/07.md), [9:35](../09/35.md)); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn ([8:15](../08/15.md), [8:32](../08/32.md), [9:34](../09/34.md)); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn ([4:21](../04/21.md), [7:3](../07/03.md), [9:12](../09/12.md), [10:1](../10/01.md), [10:20](../10/20.md), [10:27](../10/27.md), [11:10](../11/10.md), [14:4](../14/04.md), [14:8](../14/08.md), [14:17](../14/17.md)).\n\n### Why are the details of the construction of the Dwelling in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?\n\nIn Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the Dwelling was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40 in the description of the actual construction. This showed that the people were careful to do exactly as God commanded.\n\n### Are the events in the order that they actually happened?\n\nMost, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.\n\n### What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?\n\nThe book of Exodus presents God as living in the Dwelling among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him.\n
+EXO 1 intro cj55 0 # Exodus 01 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.\n\n- v. 1-7: Jacob’s family grows\n- v. 8-22: Pharaoh oppresses the Israelites and tries to limit the Israelites’ growth\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Israel’s growth\n\nIsrael grew in number. This was the beginning of God’s fulfilling his promises to Abraham. It also caused the Pharaoh to worry that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, with the result that the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against so many people. Pharaoh tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”\nThis number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons.\n- Starting from verse 7, the terms **Hebrews** and **sons of Israel** both refer to the Israelite nation or people group.\n- God blesses the Hebrew midwives for lying to the wicked Pharaoh. Translators should not attempt to hide this. They showed that they feared God by disobeying a wicked order in order to preserve the lives of God’s people. They “acted wisely toward him” (or shrewdly, see [1:10](../01/10.md)) by lying to foil Pharaoh.\n- Pharaoh is a specifically Egyptian word for their kings (and queens).
EXO 1 1 h51f writing-background 0 Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 1 1 fxbx figs-go הַ⁠בָּאִ֖ים…בָּֽאוּ 1 The words translated as **came in** could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 1 1 e65z translate-names יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…יַעֲקֹ֔ב 1 **Jacob** and **Israel** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -20,70 +20,66 @@ EXO 1 8 eu8y writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם 1 This introduces a new eve EXO 1 8 d20y writing-participants מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ 1 The story begins with the new king. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 8 t6jd figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 arose over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 8 dnkw figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 1 9 aku3 figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Here, **Behold** draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +EXO 1 9 aku3 figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֗ה 1 **Behold** draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 1 9 x65i figs-possession עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 his people The people whom the king rules over and who are also part of his group (probably shared ethnicity, tribe, or clan) rather than the Israelite group are spoken of as if they belonged to the king. This is an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 1 9 t7s1 עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: (1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or (2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2. -EXO 1 9 jik8 מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “more than we are” -EXO 1 9 njuf figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Beginning from **behold** and extending to the end of [verse 10](../01/10.md) is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 1 10 hiq4 figs-exclusive נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה…שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔י⁠נוּ…בָּ֖⁠נוּ 1 let us The word **us** is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +EXO 1 9 jik8 מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “and much greater than us” +EXO 1 9 njuf figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Beginning from **behold** and extending to the end of [verse 10](../01/10.md) is a direct quotation of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 1 10 hiq4 figs-exclusive נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה…שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔י⁠נוּ…בָּ֖⁠נוּ 1 let us The word **us** is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 1 10 wkvf grammar-collectivenouns ל֑⁠וֹ…יִרְבֶּ֗ה…וְ⁠נוֹסַ֤ף…הוּא֙…וְ⁠נִלְחַם…וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה 1 let us Here, **him, he**, and **himself** refer to the Israelite people. The pronouns agree grammatically with the singular “people” in the original. This occurs in many places in Exodus. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 1 10 il4u grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־יִרְבֶּ֗ה וְ⁠הָיָ֞ה כִּֽי־תִקְרֶ֤אנָה מִלְחָמָה֙ 1 The king suggests a combination of two hypothetical events: 1. There are even more Israelites, 2. There is a battle. These are followed by a series of undesirable consequences: 3. The Israelites join an enemy, 4. The Israelites attack the Egyptians, 5. The Israelites leave Egypt. While the series of consequences is also technically hypothetical, the king’s language indicates that if 1-2 happen, then 3-5 are certain. Use language that makes it clear that the first two events are hypothetical and that the next three are consequences that could be expected if the first two events happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 1 10 jc1h וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 leave the land Alternate translation: “and he leaves Egypt” -EXO 1 10 ni77 figs-quotemarks הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of what the king said comes to an end. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 1 11 y2mi שָׂרֵ֣י 1 taskmasters **Overseers** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. EXO 1 11 o926 מִסִּ֔ים 1 Here the plural means groups. Alternative translation: “work crews” EXO 1 11 l9lj לְמַ֥עַן עַנֹּת֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠סִבְלֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 to oppress them with hard labor Alternate translation: “to force the Israelites to do hard work for the Egyptians” EXO 1 11 pkz4 עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 store cities These were places where the leaders put away food and other important things to keep them safe. Alternative translation: “cities in which to put away things to keep them safe” EXO 1 11 dy34 figs-possession עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 The possessive is objective; storage of goods is what occurs in the cities. Alternate translation: “cities for storing things”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 1 12 c1fy grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ יְעַנּ֣וּ אֹת֔⁠וֹ כֵּ֥ן יִרְבֶּ֖ה וְ⁠כֵ֣ן יִפְרֹ֑ץ 1 This sentence expresses a result that is the opposite of what the king expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 1 12 pdfk figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **dread** in another way. Alternate translation: “And they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whenever they saw an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 1 13 j1q6 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 made…work rigorously Here, **rigor** is a noun used to modify the verb **enslaved**. **Rigor** could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And the Egyptians harshly made the sons of Israel work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 1 14 mx6v figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 made their lives bitter The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 1 12 pdfk figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **dread** in another way. Alternate translation: “And they were very afraid of the face of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in their country. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the growing Israelite population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 13 j1q6 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 made…work rigorously Here, **rigor** is a noun used to modify the verb **enslaved**. **Rigor** could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And harshly, the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 1 14 mx6v figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ אֶת־חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 made their lives bitter The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if their daily lives were bitter food that was difficult to eat. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And they made their lives very difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 1 14 jre2 figs-abstractnouns בַּ⁠עֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind **slavery** in another way. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 1 14 cuq7 translate-unknown בְּ⁠חֹ֨מֶר֙ 1 mortar This was a wet glue or mud put between bricks or stones that held them together when it dried. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 1 14 cuq7 translate-unknown בְּ⁠חֹ֨מֶר֙ 1 mortar Mortar is a mixture of lime with cement, sand, and water, used in building to bond bricks or stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 1 14 h5dx translate-unknown וּ⁠בִ⁠לְבֵנִ֔ים 1 **Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 1 14 gzq7 אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ׃ 1 All their required work was hard See how you translated this in [verse 13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard” -EXO 1 14 ct02 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ…בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 These two pronouns refer to the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 1 14 acj5 writing-pronouns חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם…עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם…עָבְד֥וּ 1 These three pronouns refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 1 14 tqyl figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 1 14 ct02 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ…בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 Here, **they** and **them** refer to the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 1 14 acj5 writing-pronouns חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם…עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם…עָבְד֥וּ 1 Here, **their** and **they** refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 1 14 tqyl figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 See how you translated **rigor** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 1 15 yoaj writing-newevent 0 This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 1 15 hhw1 לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת 1 midwives **Midwives** were women who helped a pregnant woman give birth to a baby. -EXO 1 15 h8f8 translate-names שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 Shiphrah…Puah **Shiphrah** and **Puah** are Hebrew women’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 1 15 h8f8 translate-names שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 Shiphrah…Puah **Shiphrah** and **Puah** are women’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 1 15 h59t writing-participants שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 The midwives are introduced here as new participants in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 1 16 t8f5 וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר 1 **And the king said**, is combined with “spoke” from [verse 15](../01/15.md) in the ULT because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. This may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say twice that the king spoke or said words, you may leave one off. -EXO 1 16 yovg figs-quotemarks בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙ אֶת־הָֽ⁠עִבְרִיּ֔וֹת וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה 1 This is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 1 16 t8f5 וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר 1 In the UST, the phrase and **the king said**, is combined with “spoke” from [verse 15](../01/15.md) (ULT) because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. Having two speech verbs may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say that the king spoke or said words twice, you may leave one off. EXO 1 16 zfcv figs-youdual בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙…וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן…וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן 1 The king is speaking to the two midwives, so the form of **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as they give birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it was associated with birth. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the birthing process” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 16 nms7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה 1 These two statements are hypothetical conditions (starting at **if**) with instructions for what the midwives should do in each situation (starting at **then**). Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations connected to instructions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 1 17 gy7k grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠תִּירֶ֤אןָ 1 Use a conjunction or other language structure that expresses contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 1 17 gy7k grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠תִּירֶ֤אןָ 1 **But** introduces a contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 1 18 y9g5 לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֔ת 1 midwives Women whose work is to help other woman give birth to a baby are called **midwives**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md). -EXO 1 18 qw7h figs-quotemarks מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים 1 This is a direct quote of the king’s question. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 1 18 y73k figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר לָ⁠הֶ֔ן מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים 1 This could be translated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and he asked them why they were letting the sons live.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 1 18 y73k figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר לָ⁠הֶ֔ן מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate this quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked them why they were letting the sons live.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 1 18 q1sy מַדּ֥וּעַ עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה וַ⁠תְּחַיֶּ֖יןָ אֶת־הַ⁠יְלָדִֽים 1 Why have you done this, and let the baby boys live? Alternate translation: “Why have you not killed the baby boys?” EXO 1 18 o97u figs-youdual עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ן 1 This **you** is plural. The king is speaking to the two midwives. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 1 19 ocgl figs-quotemarks כִּ֣י לֹ֧א כַ⁠נָּשִׁ֛ים הַ⁠מִּצְרִיֹּ֖ת הָֽ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת כִּֽי־חָי֣וֹת הֵ֔נָּה בְּ⁠טֶ֨רֶם תָּב֧וֹא אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ן הַ⁠מְיַלֶּ֖דֶת וְ⁠יָלָֽדוּ 1 This is a direct quote of the midwives’ response. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 1 19 qbvy grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י לֹ֧א כַ⁠נָּשִׁ֛ים הַ⁠מִּצְרִיֹּ֖ת הָֽ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת כִּֽי־חָי֣וֹת הֵ֔נָּה בְּ⁠טֶ֨רֶם תָּב֧וֹא אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ן הַ⁠מְיַלֶּ֖דֶת וְ⁠יָלָֽדוּ 1 The midwives give a reason, **the Hebrew women are not like the Egyptian women**, and then they expand on that reason, **for they are lively** (or energetic), with the result that **before the midwife comes to them, they have given birth.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 1 19 cxu1 figs-synecdoche וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֤רְןָ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹת֙ 1 It may not make sense in your language to say that multiple people said something, so you may need to translate it in the singular (see UST). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 1 19 cxu1 figs-synecdoche וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֤רְןָ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹת֙ 1 Here, **midwives said** means that a midwife spoke representing the thoughts of the group. It may not make sense in your language to say that multiple people said something, so you may need to translate it in the singular (see UST). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 1 19 wl8h הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹת֙ 1 These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md). EXO 1 20 eh25 לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 midwives These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md). EXO 1 20 fj18 writing-background וַ⁠יִּ֧רֶב הָ⁠עָ֛ם וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד 1 midwives This sentence gives background information about the events at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 1 20 h133 figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּ֧רֶב…וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ מְאֹֽד 1 The people increased in numbers These words mean similar things and are used together to emphasize their numeric growth. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 1 20 eo1p grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יֵּ֥יטֶב אֱלֹהִ֖ים לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 This phrase is more logically connected to the statements in verse 21. It describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a general statement. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 1 21 de53 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־יָֽרְא֥וּ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת אֶת־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 This is the reason for what God did. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 1 21 pbve grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בָּתִּֽים 1 This describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a specific statement. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 1 20 eo1p grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יֵּ֥יטֶב אֱלֹהִ֖ים לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 This phrase is more logically connected to the statements in verse 21. It describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a general statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 1 21 de53 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־יָֽרְא֥וּ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת אֶת־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 This is the reason for what God did. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 1 21 pbve grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בָּתִּֽים 1 This describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a specific statement. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange verses 20-21 so that the reason (verses 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 1 21 jx9c בָּתִּֽים 1 he gave them families Alternate translation: “households” EXO 1 22 ld1j figs-explicit כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ 1 You must throw every son…into the river This order was given in order to drown the male Hebrew children. The full meaning of this may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “You must dispose of each new baby boy in the river so he will drown” or “Drown each baby boy in the river when he is born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 1 22 a6b2 figs-quotations וַ⁠יְצַ֣ו פַּרְעֹ֔ה לְ⁠כָל־עַמּ֖⁠וֹ לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 From **You shall** to the end of the verse is a direct quote of Pharaoh’s speech. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh commanded all of his people to throw every baby boy into the river, but to let every girl live.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 1 22 stag figs-youdual תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ…תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 The uses of the word **you** here refer to all the Egyptians. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 2 intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 02 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter


### Covenant

God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.


### Moses’ heritage

In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Identification of participants

* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.

### Ironic situations

* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.
* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but God had not yet sent him for that mission. +EXO 2 intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 02 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-10: Moses’ birth and early life\n- v. 11-15: Moses’ attempted intervention and flight\n- v. 16-22: Moses settles in Midian\n- v. 23-25: God sees the Israelites’ plight\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nAt the end of the chapter, God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Identification of participants\n\n* Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.\n\n### Moses’ heritage\n\nIn the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian. \n\n### Ironic situations\n\n* While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.\n* Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but the people rejected him at this point (see Acts 7).
EXO 2 1 wvj9 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 Now A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 1 riy7 writing-participants אִ֖ישׁ…בַּת 1 These are new participants. They remain unnamed until [Exodus 6:20](../06/20.md) where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 1 mp7m figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי 1 Here, **took a daughter** is an idiom for marrying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 2 2 s49k ט֣וֹב 1 Alternative translations: “pleasing” or “fine” EXO 2 2 q4c0 grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶא…וַֽ⁠תִּצְפְּנֵ֖⁠הוּ 1 Hiding the boy was a result of seeing that he was good. Alternative translation: “Since she saw … she hid him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 2 2 j2es translate-numbers שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה 1 3 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 2 3 t2gj translate-unknown תֵּ֣בַת גֹּ֔מֶא 1 papyrus basket This is a basket made from a tall grass that grows by the Nile River in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 2 3 t2gj translate-unknown תֵּ֣בַת גֹּ֔מֶא 1 papyrus basket The **ark** is a basket made from a tall grass (**papyrus reeds**) that grows by the Nile River in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 2 3 tn3y figs-explicit וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠זָּ֑פֶת 1 sealed it with bitumen and pitch You could explicitly state that this was to keep out water. Alternate translation: “and she daubed it with bitumen and with pitch to keep water from getting into it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 2 3 wpb6 translate-unknown וַ⁠תַּחְמְרָ֥⁠ה 1 sealed This means that she applied a waterproof coating. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 2 3 ym3k translate-unknown בַ⁠חֵמָ֖ר 1 bitumen This is a sticky black substance made from oil. It can be used to keep out water. Alternate translation: “with tar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -92,7 +88,7 @@ EXO 2 3 y8gq translate-unknown בַּ⁠סּ֖וּף 1 reeds These **reeds** wer EXO 2 4 av8b וַ⁠תֵּתַצַּ֥ב אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק 1 at a distance This means she stood far enough away so that she would not be noticed, but close enough to see the ark. Use a word that expresses this sort of distance in your language. EXO 2 4 uf14 figs-abstractnouns מֵ⁠רָחֹ֑ק 1 This probably means somewhere in the reeds where she could see the basket, but no one would see her. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distance** in another way. Alternate translation: “not far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 2 4 ruvb translate-kinship אֲחֹת֖⁠וֹ 1 Here, the actions of **his sister** show that she was older. If your language uses a different term for siblings based on their relative ages or the gender of the siblings or both, use one that means “a boy’s older sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-EXO 2 4 z1cy grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠דֵעָ֕ה מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה לֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is her purpose in being close by. Alternative translation: “in order to learn what would happen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 2 4 z1cy grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠דֵעָ֕ה מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה לֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is her purpose in being close by. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “in order to learn what would happen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 2 5 m3i0 figs-go וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶד 1 **Came down** may be literal or figurative, as important places are often considered to be in a higher place. This means she came from her home, probably Pharaoh’s palace. If a perspective is required for Pharaoh’s daughter, you may choose go or come as works best in your language. “Come” is better as the scene is at the river and she comes to the scene location. However, you also need to consider your language’s way of introducing new participants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 5 y26h writing-participants וַ⁠תֵּ֤רֶד בַּת־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 The **daughter of Pharaoh** is introduced here as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 5 jjke writing-participants וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתֶ֥י⁠הָ 1 These women are introduced here as new participants; however, they are not mentioned again after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -101,39 +97,34 @@ EXO 2 5 bi7s וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתֶ֥י⁠הָ 1 her attendants These were the EXO 2 5 am7g writing-pronouns וַ⁠תִּקָּחֶֽ⁠הָ 1 It is not clear who is meant by **she** here, either Pharaoh’s daughter or the servant. It is likely that Pharaoh’s daughter remains the subject. Alternative translation: “and she took the ark from her slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 2 6 g9n6 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּה 1 Behold The word **behold** signals the surprising information that follows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 2 6 tyub grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠תַּחְמֹ֣ל עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 The text does not state exactly what caused her to have compassion on the baby. If a reason must be provided in your language, it should be connected to either his crying (this is the better option) or that he was a “good” baby ([verse 2](../02/02.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 2 6 jg0d figs-quotemarks מִ⁠יַּלְדֵ֥י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים זֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. It seems to have been said loud enough for the baby’s sister to hear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 2 7 rnpl figs-quotemarks וְ⁠קָרָ֤אתִי לָ⁠ךְ֙ אִשָּׁ֣ה מֵינֶ֔קֶת מִ֖ן הָ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק לָ֖⁠ךְ אֶת־הַ⁠יָּֽלֶד 1 This is a direct quote of the baby’s sister. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 2 6 jg0d figs-quotemarks מִ⁠יַּלְדֵ֥י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים זֶֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. It seems to have been said loud enough for the baby’s sister to hear. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 7 x5ja וְ⁠קָרָ֤אתִי לָ⁠ךְ֙ אִשָּׁ֣ה מֵינֶ֔קֶת מִ֖ן הָ⁠עִבְרִיֹּ֑ת 1 This is a suggestive question. The child’s sister is hopeful that Pharaoh’s daughter does not yet have a plan for the baby beyond saving his life. However, it is still a true question, for without Pharaoh’s daughter’s permission, the child’s sister will not be able to fetch the woman. If your language has a way of forming questions that are also suggestions, use it here. EXO 2 7 d7aj מֵינֶ֔קֶת…וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק 1 nurse Here, **nursing** or **to nurse** means to feed with milk from the breast. -EXO 2 7 tqq9 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק לָ֖⁠ךְ אֶת־הַ⁠יָּֽלֶד 1 This is the purpose of the sister’s proposal. Alternative translation: “And she could nurse the infant for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 2 7 tqq9 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠תֵינִ֥ק לָ֖⁠ךְ אֶת־הַ⁠יָּֽלֶד 1 This is the purpose of the sister’s proposal. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternative translation: “And she could nurse the infant for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 2 8 ab1m figs-go לֵ֑כִי…וַ⁠תֵּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 The girl left Pharaoh’s daughter to go to the child’s mother. The girl was almost certainly on foot. Use verbs of motion that express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 2 8 d007 figs-quotemarks לֵ֑כִי 1 This is a direct quote. Pharaoh’s daughter commands the baby’s sister. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 9 u554 writing-participants לָ֣⁠הּ 1 The child’s mother is reintroduced as a participant. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. Alternative translation: “to the baby’s mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 2 9 xp5x figs-quotemarks הֵילִ֜יכִי אֶת־הַ⁠יֶּ֤לֶד הַ⁠זֶּה֙ וְ⁠הֵינִקִ֣⁠הוּ לִ֔⁠י וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י אֶתֵּ֣ן אֶת־שְׂכָרֵ֑⁠ךְ 1 This is a direct quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 9 mogg שְׂכָרֵ֑⁠ךְ 1 This refers to payment that Pharaoh’s daughter would give to the mother in exchange for her service of nursing the baby. EXO 2 9 hqsa figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּקַּ֧ח…וַ⁠תְּנִיקֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 The mother’s acceptance of the deal is implied. You could make it explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 2 10 zj8h grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יִגְדַּ֣ל הַ⁠יֶּ֗לֶד וַ⁠תְּבִאֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 she brought him **And the child grew older** marks an unspecified amount of time. He would have stayed with his mother at least until he was weaned (no longer feeding on his mother’s milk). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 2 10 j7n1 וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן 1 he became her son Alternate translation: “and he became the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter” EXO 2 10 h7to grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן וַ⁠תִּקְרָ֤א שְׁמ⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 These events were likely simultaneous, because her act of naming him may have been what made him become **as a son to her**. Consider using a conjunction that does not make a great separation between these events. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) EXO 2 10 nh2m מֹשֶׁ֔ה וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ 1 Because I drew him from the water Translators may add a footnote that says, “The name Moses sounds like the Hebrew word that means ‘draw out.’” -EXO 2 10 ityq figs-quotations וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ 1 **For** begins a direct quotation. It could be stated indirectly. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. Alternate translation: “because she said she drew him out of the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 2 10 ityq figs-quotations וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ 1 **For** begins a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “because she said she drew him out of the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 2 11 tyol grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יִּגְדַּ֤ל מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א 1 A significant amount of time has passed; later texts state that Moses was 40 years old at this point. Alternative translation: “Many years later, once Moses was grown, he went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 2 11 p7gx writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ 1 This introduces a new event in the story. In your language, use a phrase that indicates a new event occurring after significant time has passed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 11 uy39 figs-go וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א 1 The UST supplies a probable location that he **went out** from; it could also have been simply out from the Egyptian area or out to the work area or cities. Use go or come as appropriate in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 11 swn3 מַכֶּ֥ה אִישׁ־עִבְרִ֖י 1 striking a Hebrew Alternate translation: “hitting a Hebrew” or “beating a Hebrew” -EXO 2 12 m9bn figs-merism וַ⁠יִּ֤פֶן כֹּה֙ וָ⁠כֹ֔ה 1 He looked this way and that way These two opposite directions have the combined meaning of “everywhere.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He looked all around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 2 12 m9bn figs-merism וַ⁠יִּ֤פֶן כֹּה֙ וָ⁠כֹ֔ה 1 He looked this way and that way These two opposite directions have the combined meaning of “everywhere.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He looked all around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 2 12 rmgn figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּךְ֙ 1 The context makes clear that Moses struck the Egyptian hard enough or repeatedly until Moses killed him. Consider using a word that indicates a deadly blow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 2 13 qn45 figs-go וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ 1 He went out See how you translated this in [Exodus 2:11](../02/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 13 wqrm translate-ordinal הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 The ordinal number here could mean “the next day” (UST) or simply on some day following the events of the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 2 13 rgn1 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּ֛ה 1 behold Here, **behold** shows that Moses was surprised by what he saw. You can use a word in your language that will give this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 2 13 i4d6 לָֽ⁠רָשָׁ֔ע 1 the one who was in the wrong Based on Moses’ question, this means the aggressor or the man wrongfully attacking his neighbor. Alternate translation: “the man who was guilty of starting the fight” -EXO 2 13 duob figs-quotemarks לָ֥⁠מָּה תַכֶּ֖ה רֵעֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 14 qb2n figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 Who made you a leader and judge over us? The man is not asking a question, he is using this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 2 14 afne figs-quotemarks מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 14 k6s5 figs-irony הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 Are you planning to kill me as you killed that Egyptian? The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) EXO 2 14 l62d figs-rquestion הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 Again, the man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do you think you can kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 2 14 d2ja הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me” -EXO 2 14 lyqh figs-aside אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר 1 It is likely this is something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) +EXO 2 14 lyqh figs-aside וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר 1 **Certainly the thing is known** was likely something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. If this would be confusing in your language, you might introduce it as a thought. Alternate translation: “and thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 2 14 vfw5 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר 1 It may be clearer to present what was likely a thought Moses had as an indirect quotation. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 2 15 yutr וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Pharaoh most likely delegated this task. Alternative translation: “and he sought to have Moses killed” (note that the passive form will not work in every language) EXO 2 15 l5rc figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י 1 His **face** means his presence. Alternate translation: “from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -151,14 +142,12 @@ EXO 2 17 z17m grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יָּ֤קָם 1 helped them EXO 2 18 omzv figs-go וַ⁠תָּבֹ֕אנָה 1 The daughters came from the well to their father, probably on foot. You can use either come or go, whichever is more natural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 18 t78y translate-names רְעוּאֵ֖ל 1 **Reuel**, a name or perhaps a title, is used of the man only here and in Numbers 10:29. He is otherwise called “Jethro.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 2 18 juqu writing-participants רְעוּאֵ֖ל 1 The priest of Midian was mentioned in [v. 16](../02/16.md) in a background statement but is a new character starting here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 2 18 lukb figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִהַרְתֶּ֥ן בֹּ֖א הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 This is a direct quote. You could use an indirect quotation such as “and he asked how they were able to return so quickly that day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 2 18 lukb figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִהַרְתֶּ֥ן בֹּ֖א הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and he asked how they were able to return so quickly that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 2 18 hq6y figs-go בֹּ֖א 1 Alternative translation: “in returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 2 19 r01g figs-quotemarks אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י הִצִּילָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠יַּ֣ד הָ⁠רֹעִ֑ים וְ⁠גַם־דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ לָ֔⁠נוּ וַ⁠יַּ֖שְׁקְ אֶת־הַ⁠צֹּֽאן 1 This is a direct quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 19 w57e אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י 1 Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses. EXO 2 19 hvb4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Here, **hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 2 19 a7v2 figs-idiom דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ 1 This expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 2 20 x9yb figs-rquestion וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ 1 Why did you leave the man? These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 2 20 p6xh figs-quotemarks וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ קִרְאֶ֥ן ל֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠יֹ֥אכַל לָֽחֶם׃ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 20 mb8w writing-pronouns ל֖⁠וֹ 1 Here, **him** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 2 20 hal8 figs-synecdoche לָֽחֶם 1 Here, **bread** is used to refer to food in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 2 21 zvr1 וַ⁠יּ֥וֹאֶל מֹשֶׁ֖ה לָ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֑ישׁ 1 Moses agreed to stay with the man Alternate translation: “Moses agreed to live with Reuel” @@ -169,9 +158,9 @@ EXO 2 22 q7d8 גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִ EXO 2 23 fjkt writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יָּ֨מָת֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian. The king of Egypt died.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 23 ym88 writing-background 0 Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 2 23 csg2 וַ⁠יֵּאָנְח֧וּ 1 groaned They **groaned** because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply” -EXO 2 23 x84a figs-personification וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם 1 their pleas went up to God The cries of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. Alternate translation: “and their cries arose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 2 23 x84a figs-personification וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 their pleas went up to God The **plea** of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God heard their pleading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 2 24 sja4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙ 1 God called to mind his covenant This a common biblical way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 3 intro n6ze 0 # Exodus 03 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nGod is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Yahweh\n\nThe name Yahweh is sacred in the Hebrew religion. It is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. It is by this name that he is known. Yahweh means “I am.” Some translations use all capitals to set this apart, “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Participants\n\n“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.
+EXO 3 intro n6ze 0 # Exodus 03 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\nThis chapter is one conversation in which Yahweh begins to commission and send Moses to rescue the Israelites.\n\nThis chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nGod is so holy that people can not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Yahweh\n\nThe name Yahweh is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. Yahweh is probably related to the phrase “I am” which he tells Moses in verse 14. Some translations use all capitals to set this apart: “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Participants\n\n“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same, while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is.\n
EXO 3 1 gqvh writing-newevent וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה 1 This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 3 1 oqcr writing-background 0 Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 3 1 l7x6 figs-possession כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. **Jethro** is a **priest** who serves the Midianites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -181,15 +170,14 @@ EXO 3 2 p0nt וַ֠⁠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ EXO 3 2 x5ci יְהֹוָ֥ה 1 Yahweh This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. EXO 3 2 d3tf grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠סְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ אֻכָּֽל 1 behold The word **behold** here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that what follows is a surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 3 2 jmz0 figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 3 fpww figs-quotemarks אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 3 3 fpww figs-quotemarks אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 3 jbue figs-abstractnouns אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for something strange that someone sees, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **sight** in another way. Alternate translation: “unusual thing that I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 3 4 ue8v יְהוָ֖ה…אֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 These terms both refer to the same being, since God’s name is Yahweh. -EXO 3 5 jg97 figs-quotemarks אַל־תִּקְרַ֣ב הֲלֹ֑ם שַׁל־נְעָלֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 3 5 prv9 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא 1 set apart This is the reason Moses must stop coming close to the burning bush and take off his sandals. Your language may need to put the reason before the commands, as in, “The place on which you are standing, it is holy ground, so you must not come close to here. Take your sandals off from on your feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 3 5 prv9 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא 1 set apart This is the reason Moses must stop coming close to the burning bush and take off his sandals. If it would be more natural in your language, you could put the reason before the commands, as in, “The place on which you are standing, it is holy ground, so you must not come close to here. Take your sandals off from on your feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 3 6 sxk8 אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב 1 the God of your father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob All of these men worshiped the same God. Alternate translation: “the God of your father, of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob” EXO 3 6 fgym figs-quotemarks אָנֹכִי֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יַעֲקֹ֑ב 1 This a direct quotation. The UST continues the quotation from verse 5 rather than including an additional “he said.” This may be more natural in some languages. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the direct quotation with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 6 l5sy אָבִ֔י⁠ךָ 1 your father This could mean (1) “your father,” if it means “your father,” then it refers to Moses’ own father (2) “your ancestor,” if it means “your ancestor,” then the phrases following it clarify who “your father” refers to: it refers to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In most cases, it will be best to translate it as “your father,” i.e. Amram, Moses’ father. -EXO 3 6 lfbb grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁה֙ פָּנָ֔י⁠ו כִּ֣י יָרֵ֔א מֵ⁠הַבִּ֖יט אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 Reason: **for he was afraid from staring toward God** Result: **And Moses hid his face** Some languages may need to put the reason before the result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] and [Exodus 33:20](../33/20.md)) +EXO 3 6 lfbb grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁה֙ פָּנָ֔י⁠ו כִּ֣י יָרֵ֔א מֵ⁠הַבִּ֖יט אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 Reason: **for he was afraid from staring toward God** Result: **And Moses hid his face** If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] and [Exodus 33:20](../33/20.md)) EXO 3 7 nl33 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues through the end of [verse 10](../03/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 7 xoz0 figs-idiom רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי 1 The Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Here, “see” is repeated in Hebrew. This expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having **seen** how his people were suffering. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 7 tpk0 figs-possession אֶת־עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 There are two possessives here: 1) “affliction of … people”: This is an event-related possessive where the people are the objects of affliction. They are treated badly as slaves. 2) “my people”: This one is more difficult as it involves both ownership and the possessive of social relationship. God views his people as his possession, and he is also in relationship with them as their God because they are descended from Abraham, though at this time they may not know God as theirs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -199,7 +187,7 @@ EXO 3 7 xx7r נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו 1 taskmasters Alternate translation: “ EXO 3 7 ofxt כִּ֥י 1 Here, **surely** is intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength. EXO 3 7 mfn2 grammar-collectivenouns נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו…מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 These pronouns, **him** and **his**, refer to the Israelites as a group in the singular. They agree with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. If necessary, change “him” to “them” or change “his” to “hers” or “its” (depending on grammatical gender of “people.”) Alternate translation: “those who oppress them … their anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 3 7 hkcj figs-possession מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: **his**) are the subjects of **anguish.** Your translation should express that they are deeply distressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 3 7 ui28 figs-explicit מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 It is implied that they are deeply distressed because they are treated badly as slaves. You may make this explicit. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 3 7 ui28 figs-explicit מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 It is implied that they are deeply distressed because they are treated badly as slaves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his anguish from his slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 3 7 zth8 figs-abstractnouns מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **anguish** in another way. Alternate translation: “how distressed they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 3 8 a1yv grammar-connect-logic-result 0 Verse 8 contains God’s intended result from his acts of seeing and hearing, expressed in both verses 7 and 9. You may need to expressly mark this, for instance by introducing verse 8 with something like “Therefore,” and verse 9 with something like “Again, because.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 3 8 xy36 figs-go וָ⁠אֵרֵ֞ד 1 God is figuratively expressing that he is descending from heaven to earth to intervene. God is always everywhere, but this phrase means that his special attention will be directed to this situation. Use whatever form of come or go is appropriate in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -214,21 +202,16 @@ EXO 3 8 q94i figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and go EXO 3 8 l1as figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 9 a2kf figs-parallelism 0 This verse parallels [verse 7](../03/07.md). Yahweh is restating that the Israelite’s plight has gotten his attention. This creates emphasis and connection to what Yahweh will do with what Moses will do as Yahweh’s appointed leader. If this repetition would confuse your readers consider a paragraph break at the start of this verse to separate the two parallel statements or use some other strategy of emphasis and connection that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 3 9 tp2v figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֛ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -EXO 3 9 uup9 figs-personification צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 the shouts of the people of Israel have come to me Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 3 9 uup9 figs-personification צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 the shouts of the people of Israel have come to me Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 3 9 gwou figs-abstractnouns רָאִ֨יתִי֙ אֶת־הַ⁠לַּ֔חַץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִצְרַ֖יִם לֹחֲצִ֥ים אֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **oppression** in another way. Alternate translation: “I have seen how the Egyptians are oppressing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 3 10 y4m1 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠עַתָּ֣ה 1 **And now** functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “So then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 3 10 spwh figs-quotemarks מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of what the Yahweh said starting in [3:7](../03/07.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 11 y8cr figs-rquestion מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 Who am I, that I should go to Pharaoh…Egypt? Moses uses this question to tell God that he, Moses, is not the right person for the task. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 3 11 ax7w figs-quotemarks מִ֣י אָנֹ֔כִי כִּ֥י אֵלֵ֖ךְ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה וְ⁠כִ֥י אוֹצִ֛יא אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 3 12 ykp3 figs-quotemarks כִּֽי־אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִמָּ֔⁠ךְ וְ⁠זֶה־לְּ⁠ךָ֣ הָ⁠א֔וֹת כִּ֥י אָנֹכִ֖י שְׁלַחְתִּ֑י⁠ךָ בְּ⁠הוֹצִֽיאֲ⁠ךָ֤ אֶת־הָ⁠עָם֙ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם תַּֽעַבְדוּ⁠ן֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים עַ֖ל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 12 xugf figs-youdual תַּֽעַבְדוּ⁠ן֙ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 3 13 wcf9 figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֣י בָא֮ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠אָמַרְתִּ֣י לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם וְ⁠אָֽמְרוּ־לִ֣⁠י מַה־שְּׁמ֔⁠וֹ מָ֥ה אֹמַ֖ר אֲלֵ⁠הֶֽם 1 This is a direct quotation containing two second-level quotes within it. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 13 lqms grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֣י בָא֮ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠אָמַרְתִּ֣י לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם וְ⁠אָֽמְרוּ־לִ֣⁠י מַה־שְּׁמ֔⁠וֹ 1 Moses presents God with a hypothetical situation here. The three events (**go, say, say**) are part of one hypothetical event. You should translate this in a way that makes it clear that this is a future, not-yet-real event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 3 13 jq42 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Moses uses it to introduce what he views as a probable future occurrence. Alternative translation: “Now” EXO 3 13 e03n figs-go בָא֮ 1 In your language, use **go** or “come” as makes most sense for Moses’ hypothetical action of going from the mountain to where the Israelites are. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 3 13 m9uy figs-quotesinquotes אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. However, you may also choose to translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that the God of their fathers has sent me to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 3 13 ru0a figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “The God of your ancestors” or “The God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 13 vfsk figs-quotemarks מַה־שְּׁמ֔⁠וֹ 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 13 bkei grammar-connect-logic-result מָ֥ה אֹמַ֖ר אֲלֵ⁠הֶֽם 1 Moses is asking God what he should do as a result of the hypothetical situation he presented. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 3 14 cli8 אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה 1 God said to Moses, “I AM THAT I AM.” This is God’s response to Moses’ question about God’s name. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “God said to Moses, ‘Tell them that God says his name is “I AM THAT I AM.”’” EXO 3 14 b6vk אֶֽהְיֶ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽהְיֶ֑ה 1 I AM THAT I AM This could mean: (1) this whole sentence is God’s name or (2) God is not telling his name but something about himself. By saying this, God is teaching that he is eternal; he has always lived and always will live. @@ -239,7 +222,7 @@ EXO 3 15 ubw7 וַ⁠יֹּאמֶר֩ ע֨וֹד אֱלֹהִ֜ים אֶל־מ EXO 3 15 i6lg figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quotation begins that continues until [the end of chapter 3 at verse 22](../03/22.md). This section contains four levels of quotations as God tells Moses to tell the Israelite elders a specific message from God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 15 l962 figs-quotesinquotes יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם אֱלֹהֵ֨י אַבְרָהָ֜ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֛ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹ֖ב שְׁלָחַ֣⁠נִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם זֶה־שְּׁמִ֣⁠י לְ⁠עֹלָ֔ם וְ⁠זֶ֥ה זִכְרִ֖⁠י לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. It may be possible to translate it as an indirect quotation, but you will need to be careful to correctly change the pronoun persons. Alternative translation: “You must tell the Israelites that Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, sent you to them. This is his name forever, and this is his memorial from generation to generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 3 15 d91k figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 15 ixcb figs-merism לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 The repetition of **generation** is indicating “to each and every generation” which figuratively means "for all people at all times.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 3 15 ixcb figs-merism לְ⁠דֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 The repetition of **generation** is indicating “to each and every generation” which figuratively means “for all people at all times.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 3 16 ec3v figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 General Information: This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 16 usas figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֤י אֲבֹֽתֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 16 xqy9 אַבְרָהָ֛ם יִצְחָ֥ק וְ⁠יַעֲקֹ֖ב 1 the God of your ancestors, the God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of the Israelites’ ancestors. They all worshiped the same God. @@ -259,13 +242,13 @@ EXO 3 17 za9l זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with Alternate translation: “full of” EXO 3 17 rtr5 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 17 msf8 figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 18 cy2z figs-idiom וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 **Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternative translation: “And they will pay attention to your voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 3 18 j24k writing-pronouns לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩ 1 They will listen to you The word **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 3 18 w742 figs-synecdoche לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 3 18 j24k writing-pronouns לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩ 1 They will listen to you Here, **your** and **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 3 18 w742 figs-synecdoche לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 3 18 r74o figs-possession וְ⁠זִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 3 18 eep7 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 3 18 eep7 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 3 18 ot9r figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 18 idp7 figs-youdual וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 General Information: If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 3 18 i47o figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. If your language makes this distinction, verify that you used the correct form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +EXO 3 18 i47o figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 3 18 d85b translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 3 19 qf46 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 unless his hand is forced The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. There are two further difficulties: (1) Whose hand (power) is being referred to, (2) does the negative mean “not unless” or “not even?” Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not unless” for the negative (3) “not even if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not even” for the negative (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 20 nuzx grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י 1 God says this will be a result of the king of Egypt’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I will send out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -281,64 +264,51 @@ EXO 3 21 hfrr figs-possession בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Th EXO 3 21 s45u הָֽ⁠עָם־הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you” EXO 3 21 uz3c figs-youdual תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 21 wymx figs-go תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 Alternate translation: “leave” or “go out” or “come out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 3 21 j9qz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א…רֵיקָֽם 1 The double negative, **not … emptily** is used to mean “full.” Alternate translation: “[go] with many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -EXO 3 21 kt7b figs-litotes לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם 1 will not go empty-handed This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite meaning. Alternate translation: “you will go with your hands full of good things” or “you will go with many valuable things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +EXO 3 21 j9qz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א…רֵיקָֽם 1 The double negative, **not … emptily** is used to mean “full.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “[go] with many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 3 21 kt7b figs-litotes לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם 1 will not go empty-handed Here Yahweh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “you will go with your hands full of good things” or “you will go with many valuable things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 3 22 w2av וּ⁠מִ⁠גָּרַ֣ת בֵּיתָ֔⁠הּ 1 any women staying in her neighbors’ houses The word, **sojourning** means living somewhere other than one’s native land, usually temporarily. It is unclear both who the sojourning (visiting) women are and in whose house they are sojourning, leaving several possibilities. Most translations which make a decision about who they are identify both the temporary resident and her host home as Egyptian. This makes sense as the Israelites will be plundering the Egyptians. If it is possible to leave this ambiguous in your translation, that would be best. EXO 3 22 fmfu figs-youdual וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֗ם עַל־בְּנֵי⁠כֶם֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠נִצַּלְתֶּ֖ם 1 Each of these is a plural **you.** If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 22 h38j figs-quotemarks מִצְרָֽיִם 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s word which started in [verse 15](../03/15.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 intro kap5 0 # Exodus 04 General Notes

## Potential Translation Issues

### Quotations

* There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.

### Order of events

* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).
* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.

### Thus says Yahweh

The first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.

### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone

The encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:

* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.
* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.
* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.

## Study Concepts in this Chapter

### Moses does not understand

Although Moses believes in Yahweh, he does not trust in him. This is because Moses lacks understanding. Moses tries to believe the things he is asked to do are done by his own power. Yahweh is trying to get Moses to trust that these things are Yahweh’s doing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Children of God

This chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])

### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart

Scholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over whether Pharaoh plays an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 4 intro kap5 0 # Exodus 04 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-17: Moses hesitates to obey so Yahweh gives Moses signs to prove his commission\n- v. 18-28: Moses goes back to Egypt\n- v. 29-31: Moses and Aaron meet with the Israelite leaders and tell them what Yahweh said\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n### Quotations\n\n * There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex, and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper locations.\n\n### Order of events\n\n* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).\n* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verses 18-19 and 27 in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter, is unclear.\n\n### Thus says Yahweh\n\nThe first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.\n\n### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone\n\nThe encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:\n\n* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.\n* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])\n* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.\n* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Children of God\n\nThis chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])\n\n### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over how Pharaoh has an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EXO 4 1 j4yg וַ⁠יַּ֤עַן מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֹּ֔אמֶר 1 if they do not believe Here, **answered and said** is a Hebrew expression which does not convey any extra information. Unless your language naturally uses a similar structure, it is better to translate one verb and omit the other. Alternate translation: “Moses answered” -EXO 4 1 b3xv figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 1 b3xv figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation.There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 1 pq8x figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י 1 See [3:18](../03/18.md). Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 1 neto figs-quotesinquotes לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you could translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has not appeared to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 4 1 fu2x וְ⁠הֵן֙ 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “Listen to me.” -EXO 4 2 qmvk writing-pronouns אֵלָ֛י⁠ו…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Alternate translation: “to Moses … And Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 2 r3f9 figs-quotemarks מ⁠זה בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 2 p8sg figs-quotemarks מַטֶּֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 3 jgir figs-quotemarks הַשְׁלִיכֵ֣⁠הוּ אַ֔רְצָ⁠ה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 2 qmvk writing-pronouns אֵלָ֛י⁠ו…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Here, **him** and **he** refer to Moses. Alternate translation: “to Moses … And Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 3 zycd figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 Here, “face” figuratively represents the snake itself. Alternative translation: “from the snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 4 g6bk וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 take it by the tail Alternate translation: “and pick it up by the tail” or “and grasp it by the tail” -EXO 4 4 mqpc figs-quotemarks שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 4 bzmp grammar-connect-time-sequential שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 This direct quotation is interrupted by Moses obeying Yahweh. This is probably a tightly ordered sequence of events where Yahweh paused and then continued speaking immediately after Moses obeyed. The quote resumes in [verse 5](../04/05.md), and there is more discussion there about how to handle the resumption. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 4 4 m86n וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מַטֶּ֖ה 1 became a staff Alternate translation: “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff” EXO 4 5 l4tn figs-quotemarks לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This continues the direct quotation from the first part of [verse 4](../04/04.md). It may be more natural to reorganize verses four and five to keep the quote together. If you rearrange like this, Moses picking up the snake/staff should come after the full quotation. However, it is better to do something similar to the UST, which restates that Yahweh is speaking and provides some implied directives from Yahweh to make a complete sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 5 m4fk figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 4 5 zbfr writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ…אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 5 oqi5 writing-pronouns אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ 1 This pronoun refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 5 m4fk figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 4 5 zbfr writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ…אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 Here, **them** and **their** refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 5 oqi5 writing-pronouns אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 5 jr8m אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 the God of their ancestors, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of their ancestors. They all worshiped the same God. -EXO 4 6 b9m8 figs-quotemarks הָֽבֵא־נָ֤א יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠חֵיקֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 6 ep52 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה 1 behold This word, **behold**, is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 4 6 pw7g figs-simile כַּ⁠שָּֽׁלֶג 1 as white as snow The word **like** (ULT) or “as” (UST) here is used to compare how Moses’ hand looked. You may not have a word for snow in your language. If so, consider an alternative that describes something very white. You may need to make the whiteness explicit. Alternate translation: “that made it look white like wool” or “that made it look white like the sand on the beach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 4 7 kv9r figs-quotemarks הָשֵׁ֤ב יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ אֶל־חֵיקֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 7 prr9 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּה 1 This word is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -EXO 4 8 q9qb figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הָיָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s speech resumes here and continues through the end of [verse 9](../04/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 8 well figs-personification וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְע֔וּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֣ת הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הָ⁠אַחֲרֽוֹן 1 Here each **sign** is spoken of as if it had a **voice** with which it could speak. If this imagery would not make sense in your language, you may need to translate this in a way that makes explicit that the signs are meant to be proof that God sent Moses. Alternative translation: “and are not convinced that God has appeared to you by seeing the first sign, then they will be convinced by seeing the second sign.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -EXO 4 8 gxlg writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…יִשְׁמְע֔וּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 8 well figs-personification וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְע֔וּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֣ת הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הָ⁠אַחֲרֽוֹן 1 Here each **sign** is spoken of as if it had a **voice** with which it could speak. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way that makes explicit that the signs are meant to be proof that God sent Moses. Alternative translation: “and are not convinced that God has appeared to you by seeing the first sign, then they will be convinced by seeing the second sign.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 4 8 gxlg writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…יִשְׁמְע֔וּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 Here, **they** refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 8 lsb3 לֹ֣א יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 pay attention Alternate translation: “they do not acknowledge … then they will acknowledge” or “they do not accept … then they will accept” -EXO 4 9 q82r writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֡ינוּ…יִשְׁמְעוּ⁠ן֙ 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 9 q82r writing-pronouns יַאֲמִ֡ינוּ…יִשְׁמְעוּ⁠ן֙ 1 Here, **they** refers either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 9 jsvb figs-metonymy לְ⁠קֹלֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 See [3:18](../03/18.md). Alternate translation: “to what you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 4 9 hlym figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הָי֥וּ לְ⁠דָ֖ם בַּ⁠יַּבָּֽשֶׁת 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s speech from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 10 aazp figs-quotemarks בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ⁠י֒ לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּ֛ם מֵ⁠אָ֥ז דַּבֶּרְ⁠ךָ אֶל־עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ כִּ֧י כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן אָנֹֽכִי 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 10 t8i9 בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. Alternate translation: “Please” EXO 4 10 w12a לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 have never been eloquent Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker, not now, not before” EXO 4 10 opes אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים 1 This expression means “a man who uses words well,” in other words, an eloquent man who can speak well and convincingly. -EXO 4 10 pk0l figs-merism גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 These phrases simply mean “in the past.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 4 10 wsl4 figs-123person עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 4 10 pk0l figs-merism גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 These phrases simply mean “in the past.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 4 10 wsl4 figs-123person עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). If this is confusing in your language, you could make who he means plain. Alternate translation: “me, your servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 4 10 bv64 figs-doublet כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 I am slow of speech and slow of tongue These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “not good at public speaking”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 4 10 zm3y figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 slow of tongue Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 4 11 xpgf figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the [next verse](../04/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 11 ks2m figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒ 1 Who is it who made man’s mouth? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Is it not I, Yahweh, who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 e1y6 figs-rquestion מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר 1 Who makes a man mute or deaf or seeing or blind? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make people able to speak or hear or to see or to be blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 uq7j figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה 1 Is it not I, Yahweh? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 12 kkr1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will be with your mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 4 12 kg7l figs-quotemarks תְּדַבֵּֽר 1 After this phrase, the direct quote from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 13 zy9m figs-quotemarks בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ֑⁠י שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 13 brer בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. See what you did in [verse 10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Please” EXO 4 13 s8nl שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 In translating this phrase, it is important to make clear that Moses is asking Yahweh to send someone else. Here he is not accepting Yahweh’s commission. -EXO 4 13 y4a7 figs-synecdoche בְּ⁠יַד 1 This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 4 13 y4a7 figs-synecdoche בְּ⁠יַד 1 This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 4 14 uy2v figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה 1 This means that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 4 14 ifax writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 14 zn40 figs-quotemarks בְּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 17](../04/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 14 ifax writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 Here, **he** refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 14 okko figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י 1 Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 14 e0js translate-kinship אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 4 14 y5ed figs-idiom דַבֵּ֥ר יְדַבֵּ֖ר 1 In Hebrew, the word **speak** is repeated. This means he speaks well. English cannot convey this by doubling, so the meaning of the repetition was translated in the ULT in this case. If your language can say something like “speaking speaks” to mean “speaks well,” consider it; otherwise, translate the meaning similarly to the ULT or UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -349,27 +319,23 @@ EXO 4 14 ew4h figs-metonymy בְּ⁠לִבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 he will be glad in his EXO 4 15 u97f figs-metaphor הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 put the words to say into his mouth Words here are spoken of as if they were something that can be physically placed in a person’s mouth. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the message that he is to repeat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 4 15 q9cf figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ 1 I will be with your mouth The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 15 v57x figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם…תַּעֲשֽׂוּ⁠ן 1 with his mouth These refer to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one or, if not, use a plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 4 16 mnsp figs-simile לְ⁠פֶ֔ה 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 4 16 gn5v figs-simile תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥⁠וֹ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִֽים 1 you will be to him like me, God The word **like** here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 4 17 mq82 figs-quotemarks תַּעֲשֶׂה־בּ֖⁠וֹ אֶת־הָ⁠אֹתֹֽת 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 17 hm47 figs-explicit הַ⁠מַּטֶּ֥ה הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 Yahweh assumes that Moses will know that by **this staff**, he means the one that Moses said he had in his hand in [v. 2](../04/02.md) and with which God told him to do a miracle in vv. [3](../04/03.md)–[4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])


+EXO 4 16 mnsp figs-simile לְ⁠פֶ֔ה 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 4 16 gn5v figs-simile תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥⁠וֹ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִֽים 1 you will be to him like me, God The word **like** here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 4 17 hm47 figs-explicit הַ⁠מַּטֶּ֥ה הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 Yahweh assumes that Moses will know that by **this staff**, he means the one that Moses said he had in his hand in [verse 2](../04/02.md) and with which God told him to do a miracle in [verses 3-4](../04/03.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n EXO 4 18 j2ix writing-participants יֶ֣תֶר 1 Jethro is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative here. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 18 cbop figs-go וַ⁠יֵּ֨לֶךְ 1 Because the setting has shifted back to Jethro’s home, some languages may need to use “come” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 4 18 b6mf translate-kinship חֹֽתְנ֗⁠וֹ 1 father-in-law This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may use a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 4 18 wlit writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 Alternate translation: “and Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 18 g1h1 writing-pronouns ל⁠וֹ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “to Jethro” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 18 uvqk figs-quotemarks אֵ֣לֲכָה נָּ֗א וְ⁠אָשׁ֨וּבָה֙ אֶל־אַחַ֣⁠י אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 18 b6mf translate-kinship חֹֽתְנ֗⁠וֹ 1 father-in-law This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. If your language uses a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father use the one for wife’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +EXO 4 18 wlit writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 Here, **he** refers to Moses. Alternate translation: “and Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 18 g1h1 writing-pronouns ל⁠וֹ֙ 1 Here, **him** refers to Jethro. Alternate translation: “to Jethro” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 4 18 urt0 figs-metonymy אַחַ֣⁠י 1 Here the term **brothers** refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 18 gq2g figs-idiom וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 4 18 yay3 figs-explicit לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 4 18 i807 figs-quotemarks לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 18 yay3 translate-blessing לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) EXO 4 19 wwr8 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֤ה אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֙ 1 The timing and situation for Yahweh speaking to Moses here is not specified. Some conjecture that it was part of the narrative of the encounter with Yahweh from the previous verses but placed after his request to Jethro for an unknown reason. Another speculation is that Moses delayed returning to Egypt (either by his own choice, Yahweh’s instructions, or someone else delaying him) and Yahweh came and told him again (the UST explicitly offers this optional translation). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 4 19 aosm figs-quotemarks לֵ֖ךְ שֻׁ֣ב מִצְרָ֑יִם כִּי־מֵ֨תוּ֙ כָּל־הָ֣⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים הַֽ⁠מְבַקְשִׁ֖ים אֶת־נַפְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 19 clfj הַֽ⁠מְבַקְשִׁ֖ים אֶת־נַפְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ 1 This means they were seeking to end his life, that is, to kill him. -EXO 4 20 fua6 writing-participants בָּנָ֗י⁠ו 1 Moses’ second son is not introduced until [18:4](../18/.04.md) but had already been born before they left Midian. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 4 20 zi5m figs-123person וַ⁠יָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָ⁠ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 It is clear from [verse 24](../04/24.md) and [25](../04/25.md) that his family went with him, so you may need to translate as “they returned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 4 20 fua6 figs-extrainfo בָּנָ֗י⁠ו 1 Moses’ second son is not introduced until [18:4](../18/.04.md) but had already been born before they left Midian. It is not necessary to make this explicit here, if it would confuse your readers you could add a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +EXO 4 20 zi5m figs-123person וַ⁠יָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָ⁠ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 It is clear from [verse 24](../04/24.md) and [25](../04/25.md) that Moses’ family went with him. If this is confusing in your language, you may need to change from **he** to “they” **returned**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 4 20 a1s5 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יָּ֖שָׁב אַ֣רְצָ⁠ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 After the incident on the road in verses [24-26](../04/24.md). Moses’ family is not mentioned again until [18:2](../18/02.md), which says that Moses sent them back, so it may be better to make a translation similar to the UST, which only commits to the family starting on the way to Egypt. This option has the further benefit of allowing for the several events that happen before Moses gets to Egypt. The ULT’s **toward** is another way of giving space in the translation for the next several events. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 4 20 f26l figs-explicit מַטֵּ֥ה הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The phrase **the staff of God** refers to the staff that God told Moses to take with him in v. [17](../04/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 4 20 f26l figs-explicit מַטֵּ֥ה הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The phrase **the staff of God** refers to the staff that God told Moses to take with him in [verse 17](../04/17.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 4 20 m4uj figs-explicit מַטֵּ֥ה הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 The book describes this staff as **the staff of God** because God appointed it as his instrument so that Moses could do miraculous works through it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Make sure your translation does not lead people to think the staff was a magic wand or shaman’s staff that had its own power or power from Moses or that the staff gave Moses the ability to command God. In every instance where miracles happened, first God told Moses to do something with the staff, then Moses obeyed, and then God caused a miracle. Alternate translation: “the staff that God had told him to bring because God intended to work powerfully through it when Moses stretched it out.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 4 21 lva8 figs-quotemarks בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 This begins a direct quotation that continues to the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It contains up to fourth-level quotations. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 21 oajf רְאֵ֗ה 1 Most translations and interpretations of the verb **see** take it to mean something like “see that you do.” @@ -399,16 +365,14 @@ EXO 4 25 sftg writing-participants צִפֹּרָ֜ה 1 **Zipporah** is introdu EXO 4 25 a36h translate-unknown צֹ֗ר 1 flint knife This was a flake or a sharp piece of a hard gray rock that was used as a knife.. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 4 25 nkxn translate-unknown עָרְלַ֣ת 1 The**foreskin** is the retractable fold of skin which covers and protects the end of the penis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 4 25 l6sr figs-euphemism לְ⁠רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 to his feet It is possible that the word **feet** may have been a more respectful way to refer to the genital area of the body. However, that possibility is not high enough that you should translate it either literally as genitals or with another euphemism meaning genitals in your language. If you have a word that means primarily feet or legs, but could in some cases also euphemistically mean genitals, you may consider it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 4 25 iuzw figs-quotemarks כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 25 b2t3 figs-metaphor כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י 1 you are a bridegroom to me by blood The meaning of this metaphor is unclear. It was probably a known saying in that culture. Alternate translation: “You are related to me by this blood” or “You are my husband because of blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 4 26 ceqk grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 God **relented** as a result of Zipporah’s action. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 4 26 o4zt writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 Alternate translation: “Yahweh relented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 26 k136 writing-pronouns מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 As in [4:24](../04/24.md), this could mean either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 4 26 r8hj figs-quotations חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים 1 This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Use a form from your language for quoting a portion of what someone previously said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 4 26 o4zt writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 Here, **he** refers to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “Yahweh relented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 26 k136 writing-pronouns מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 As in [4:24](../04/24.md), **him** could refer to either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 4 26 r8hj figs-quotations חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים 1 This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Use a form from your language for quoting a portion of what someone previously said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 4 26 abmg figs-quotemarks חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים לַ⁠מּוּלֹֽת 1 It is not clear if the quotation includes **because of the circumcision** or if that is a comment explaining the quotation. Translations are divided in where they end the quotation, but most exclude **because of the circumcision**, and it is best to follow that unless a locally respected translation includes it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 27 xk6b writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 Yahweh said to Aaron You may want to add a word that marks the beginning of a new part of the story, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 4 27 qxpc writing-participants אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 **Aaron** is introduced as a new participant. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 4 27 fply figs-quotemarks לֵ֛ךְ לִ⁠קְרַ֥את מֹשֶׁ֖ה הַ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑רָ⁠ה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 27 wy4n figs-possession בְּ⁠הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 at the mountain of God See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 4 27 tfn2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק 1 This was a traditional way of greeting which showed love. You can make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 4 28 ad9x שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ 1 These are a bit awkward to translate in English, so the UST adds more information. Other languages may not have the same difficulty. @@ -418,31 +382,28 @@ EXO 4 30 bm2x figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 in the sight EXO 4 30 x1v3 הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). EXO 4 31 glp2 הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). EXO 4 31 q1er פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 had observed the Israelites Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites” -EXO 4 31 g83a translate-symaction וַֽ⁠יִּקְּד֖וּ וַ⁠יִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ 1 they bowed their heads Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 5 intro kea2 0 # Exodus 05 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### A slave’s work

The Egyptians were known for making their slaves do a lot of work. The Israelite slaves were forced to make a specific number of bricks every day. In this chapter, they were required not only to make these bricks, but also to gather straw, one of the raw materials needed in order to make those bricks.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses does not seek permission to leave, asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

### Titles

The leaders are given different titles in this chapter. The ULT uses “taskmasters” and “foremen.” Many cultures will not have these types of titles. Generic expressions like “Egyptian leaders” and “Hebrew leaders” may be necessary. +EXO 4 31 g83a translate-symaction וַֽ⁠יִּקְּד֖וּ וַ⁠יִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ 1 they bowed their heads This action was an expression of thankful worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 5 intro kea2 0 # Exodus 05 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-5: Moses gives Pharaoh Yahweh’s message\n- v. 6-21: Pharaoh makes the Israelites work harder\n- v. 22-23: Moses asks Yahweh why things went badly\n
EXO 5 1 q0zv writing-newevent וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 The time phrase, **and afterward**, marks a transition in the narrative. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternative translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 1 q9kn grammar-connect-time-sequential וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 After these things happened It is unclear how long Moses and Aaron waited before they went to see Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 5 1 cudx figs-go בָּ֚אוּ 1 In this instance, depending on how they have to set scenes, some languages may need to use “came in.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 5 1 tsnv writing-participants פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Pharaoh is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative for the first time since chapter 2. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 5 1 jarm figs-quotemarks כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There is a second-level quotation fully contained within this portion which is addressed elsewhere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 5 1 ckml figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 5 1 tsnv writing-participants פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Pharaoh is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative for the first time since chapter two. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 5 1 jarm figs-quotemarks כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ לִ֖⁠י בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There is a second-level quotation fully contained within this portion which is addressed elsewhere. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 1 lu3i כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 5 1 u2vt וְ⁠יָחֹ֥גּוּ 1 festival for me This is a celebration to worship Yahweh. Alternative translation: “so they can worship me with eating and drinking” EXO 5 2 v4c1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר 1 Why should I…let Israel go? The result here is exactly as God has said; therefore, a contrastive transition word is reasonable but not required, given the immediate human context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 5 2 fq6i figs-quotemarks מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל לֹ֤א יָדַ֨עְתִּי֙ אֶת־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠גַ֥ם אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹ֥א אֲשַׁלֵּֽחַ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 2 lqwt מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a god. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just revealed his name to Moses). -EXO 5 2 wpff grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 5 2 wpff grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 5 2 c653 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 listen to his voice Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 2 ma6b וְ⁠גַ֥ם 1 This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely” EXO 5 3 dt39 figs-123person וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 It may not make sense in all languages for multiple people to speak. Since Aaron was appointed as Moses’ spokesman, consider the alternative translation: “Aaron replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 5 3 ru1w figs-quotemarks אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים נִקְרָ֣א עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה נָּ֡א דֶּרֶךְ֩ שְׁלֹ֨שֶׁת יָמִ֜ים בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֗ר וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ פֶּ֨ן־יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ בַּ⁠דֶּ֖בֶר א֥וֹ בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 3 y9ip אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים 1 God of the Hebrews This term, **The God of the Hebrews**, is also used for Yahweh, the Israelites’ God. -EXO 5 3 kclj figs-exclusive עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙…יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ 1 Here, **us** (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It excludes Pharaoh and his people. Some languages may need to consider whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +EXO 5 3 kclj figs-exclusive עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙…יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ 1 Here, **us** (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It excludes Pharaoh and his people. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 5 3 gfs5 figs-metonymy בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 or with the sword Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 5 4 cb7w figs-quotemarks לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 4 kl1i figs-rquestion לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו 1 why are you taking the people from their work? Pharaoh uses this rhetorical question to express his anger toward Moses and Aaron for taking the Israelites away from their work. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Stop distracting the people from doing their work!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 5 4 fiw9 figs-youdual לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This **your** could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 5 nqbe figs-aside וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. Pharaoh may have been commenting to himself, or he may have only thought this statement silently; either way, it led to his next actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) +EXO 5 5 xm4z grammar-connect-words-phrases וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +EXO 5 5 nqbe figs-aside וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה הֵן־רַבִּ֥ים עַתָּ֖ה עַ֣ם הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם אֹתָ֖⁠ם מִ⁠סִּבְלֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 This statement by Pharaoh may have been him commenting to himself, or he may have only thought this statement silently; either way, it led to his next actions. If this would be confusing in your language, consider stating it in a way that clarifies that his statement or thoughts here impacted his next actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 5 5 todi הֵן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. EXO 5 5 c53k figs-youdual וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one, or if not, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 6 ar9m וַ⁠יְצַ֥ו פַּרְעֹ֖ה…אֶת־הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים בָּ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠אֶת־שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Pharaoh may have sent a messenger or messengers to the taskmasters and officers or spoken to one or a few representatives of them at his court rather than speaking to them directly. Alternative translation: “And … Pharaoh gave an order to the taskmasters among the people and officers. He said,” @@ -450,48 +411,41 @@ EXO 5 6 zd4m הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֣ים 1 taskmasters **Taskmasters** were E EXO 5 6 gsdx שֹׁטְרָ֖י⁠ו 1 **Officers** were probably Israelite slaves who were in charge of the other Israelites but who answered to the Egyptian taskmasters. EXO 5 6 dxih לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** is a way of introducing a direct quotation in Hebrew; most translations can omit it without harm. EXO 5 7 k6io figs-youdual לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן 1 This command was given to multiple people; if your language distinguishes between singular and plural forms when giving commands, make sure this is a plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 7 kfhw figs-quotemarks לֹ֣א תֹאסִפ֞וּ⁠ן 1 Verses 7-9 are a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate the start here with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 7 p9nx figs-idiom כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֑ם 1 you must no longer give This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “as you used to do” or “as was done previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 5 8 izkf figs-youdual תָּשִׂ֣ימוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 8 ro25 translate-unknown הַ⁠לְּבֵנִ֜ים 1 **Bricks** are blocks made of clay or mud with straw in them. They are hardened in the sun or in another manner before they are used for building. See how you translated in [1:14][../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 5 8 dlzx figs-idiom תְּמ֤וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁם֙ 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 5 8 vd10 figs-quotemarks נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לֵ⁠אלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. It is a quote of Moses and Aaron. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 9 xca1 figs-idiom וְ⁠אַל־יִשְׁע֖וּ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵי־שָֽׁקֶר 1 Here words are spoken of as if they could be looked upon. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternative translation: “and not listen to words that are lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 5 10 ozzn writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֨צְא֜וּ 1 This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 10 x4bi נֹגְשֵׂ֤י 1 taskmasters **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [5:6](../05/6.md). See [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/06/zd4m]] EXO 5 10 zvxx כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This is the same quotation introduction as is used when Yahweh gives a direct command. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 5 10 c12s figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֖ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It might be helpful in some languages to translate **thus says Pharaoh** as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 5 10 mkom figs-quotesinquotes אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי 1 This is the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 5 10 ad73 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between “I” and “you.” Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 5 10 ad73 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between **I** and **you.** Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 5 10 si2e figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants to take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 10 gb4d figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 I will no longer give you **You**is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 11 ewg6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ 1 The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between “I” and “you.” See [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/10/7zfp]] for more info. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 5 11 ewg6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ 1 The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between **I** and **you.** See the previous verse. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 5 11 xe4i figs-youdual אַתֶּ֗ם 1 you can find…your workload Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 11 w918 figs-rpronouns אַתֶּ֗ם…לָ⁠כֶם֙ 1 You yourselves must go The repetition of **you** emphasizes that the Egyptians will no longer help the slaves. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -EXO 5 11 g5vb figs-doublenegatives כִּ֣י אֵ֥ין נִגְרָ֛ע מֵ⁠עֲבֹדַתְ⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָֽר 1 your workload will not be reduced This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “for you must continue to make the same number of bricks as before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -EXO 5 11 ucrc figs-quotemarks כִּ֣י אֵ֥ין נִגְרָ֛ע מֵ⁠עֲבֹדַתְ⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָֽר 1 After this phrase (at the end of the verse), the direct quotes end. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing first-level (and second-level if you made both levels direct quotes) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 5 12 s9dk figs-hyperbole בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 throughout all the land of Egypt This is a generalization used to show the extra effort Israel made to meet Pharaoh’s demands. Alternate translation: “to many places throughout Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 5 11 w918 figs-rpronouns אַתֶּ֗ם…לָ⁠כֶם֙ 1 You yourselves must go The repetition of **you** (as **your**) emphasizes that the Egyptians will no longer help the slaves. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 5 11 g5vb figs-doublenegatives כִּ֣י אֵ֥ין נִגְרָ֛ע מֵ⁠עֲבֹדַתְ⁠כֶ֖ם דָּבָֽר 1 your workload will not be reduced If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “for you must continue to make the same number of bricks as before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 5 12 s9dk figs-hyperbole בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 throughout all the land of Egypt This is a generalization used to show the extra effort Israel made to meet Pharaoh’s demands. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many places. Alternate translation: “to many places throughout Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 5 12 q7y7 translate-unknown קַ֖שׁ 1 stubble **Stubble** is the part of a plant that is left over after harvest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 5 13 th6x וְ⁠הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֖ים 1 taskmasters **Taskmasters** were Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [Exodus 5:6](../05/06.md). EXO 5 13 ikkf writing-participants וְ⁠הַ⁠נֹּגְשִׂ֖ים 1 The change of subject is emphasized here. If your language has a way of specifically focusing on the actor in a narrative, use it here. See the UST for how that is done in English. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 5 13 d86r figs-quotemarks כַּלּ֤וּ מַעֲשֵׂי⁠כֶם֙ דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמ֔⁠וֹ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר בִּ⁠הְי֥וֹת הַ⁠תֶּֽבֶן 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 13 a5ja דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמ֔⁠וֹ 1 **Day by day** means “daily.” Alternative translation: “the daily task” EXO 5 14 h4uo נֹגְשֵׂ֥י 1 **Taskmasters** are Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. See how you translated this in [Exodus 5:6](../05/06.md). EXO 5 14 unbc figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֻּכּ֗וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the taskmasters beat the officers of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 5 14 eq22 figs-rquestion מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 Why have you not produced all the bricks required of you…in the past? The taskmasters used this question to show they were angry with the lack of bricks. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are not producing enough bricks, either yesterday or today, as you did in the past!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 5 14 nk4i figs-quotemarks מַדּ֡וּעַ לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם לִ⁠לְבֹּן֙ כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 14 oh6o figs-youdual כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 Here, **you** and **your** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 14 emq7 figs-synecdoche כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 cried out Here, **you** and **your** do not simply refer to the officers; they refer to the groups of Israelite workers the officers are in charge of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 5 14 emq7 figs-synecdoche לֹא֩ כִלִּיתֶ֨ם חָקְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 cried out Here, **you** and **your** do not simply refer to the officers; they refer to the groups of Israelite workers the officers are in charge of. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have your teams not finished their required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 5 14 liz8 figs-idiom כִּ⁠תְמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 This is a Hebrew idiom meaning “in the past.” Here it specifically refers to the time before the Egyptians stopped giving the Israelites straw. See how you translated this in [5:7](../05/07md) Alternative translation: “before” or “previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 5 14 zklg גַּם־תְּמ֖וֹל גַּם־הַ⁠יּֽוֹם 1 This time expression refers to more recent days, ones since the Egyptians stopped providing the straw to the Israelites. EXO 5 15 bk9h writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּבֹ֗אוּ 1 This begins a new scene, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. The officers have gone to where Pharaoh is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 15 thlj figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹ֗אוּ 1 You will need to decide if go or come is the better translation in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 5 15 en1t figs-quotemarks לָ֧⁠מָּה 1 This begins a direct quote that continues to the end of the [next verse](../05/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 15 m2nz figs-123person לַ⁠עֲבָדֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 Here, the Israelite officers use the term **your servants** to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 5 16 yeql figs-activepassive תֶּ֗בֶן אֵ֤ין נִתָּן֙ לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 The text does not specify who is not giving them straw. From the context, the taskmasters and, by implication, Pharaoh himself are the ones not doing this. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternative translation: “You are not giving your servants any straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 5 16 qp5j figs-123person לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֔י⁠ךָ…עֲבָדֶ֛י⁠ךָ 1 Here, the Israelite officers use the term **your servants** to refer to themselves in the third person as a way of showing humility. It is also possible that they mean to include all the Israelites. Either option is valid if your language must state who is meant by “your servants.” Alternate translation: “to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 5 16 hsa6 writing-pronouns אֹמְרִ֥ים 1 they are still telling us, ‘Make bricks!’ **They** refers to the Egyptian taskmasters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 5 16 civf figs-quotemarks וּ⁠לְבֵנִ֛ים…עֲשׂ֑וּ 1 **Make bricks** is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 5 16 hsa6 writing-pronouns אֹמְרִ֥ים 1 they are still telling us, ‘Make bricks!’ Here, **they** refers to the Egyptian taskmasters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 5 16 m0go וְ⁠הִנֵּ֧ה 1 **And behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. EXO 5 16 xrly figs-activepassive עֲבָדֶ֛י⁠ךָ מֻכִּ֖ים 1 The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 5 16 ff2k figs-euphemism וְ⁠חָטָ֥את עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 The Israelites are indirectly accusing Pharaoh of doing wrong. To translate this, consider polite or indirect ways of making accusations in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) @@ -501,43 +455,37 @@ EXO 5 17 zlkc figs-exclamations נִרְפִּ֥ים אַתֶּ֖ם נִרְפּ EXO 5 17 a8o2 figs-quotemarks נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 Here the king is quoting another person’s speech. This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 18 x9j7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠תֶ֖בֶן לֹא־יִנָּתֵ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The subject could be “I” (as in Pharaoh) or “we” (as in the Egyptians or Pharaoh and his taskmasters) or “my people.” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 5 18 z6wt figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶ֑ם…תִּתֵּֽנּוּ 1 Here, **you** means all the Israelites or the officers as representatives of all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 5 19 x6pp grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵ֧י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ 1 You may need to reorder the events in this verse in your language to put the reason before the result. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 5 19 i3ot figs-quotemarks לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation of what Pharaoh said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation of another person’s speech. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 5 19 l9d2 figs-rpronouns אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 when they were told Here the officers are both the subject and object, because they are thinking about their own situation. Different languages have different methods of marking this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 5 19 x6pp grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵ֧י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 5 19 l9d2 figs-rpronouns אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 when they were told Here the officers are both the subject and object, because they are thinking about their own situation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 5 19 j6f9 וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ…אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “knew that they were in trouble, because the king said” or “perceived themselves to be in danger, because the king said” EXO 5 20 ve3z writing-newevent וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙ 1 palace A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 20 s9d2 writing-pronouns וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙…לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם בְּ⁠צֵאתָ֖⁠ם 1 Here, **they** and **them** refer to the officers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 5 21 jsbv figs-quotemarks יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט אֲשֶׁ֧ר הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו לָֽ⁠תֶת־חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם לְ⁠הָרְגֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 21 kv0v יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 The Israelite officers used this form to curse Moses and Aaron. EXO 5 21 vfit figs-youdual עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 **You** refers to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 21 j3zp figs-metaphor הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 you have made us offensive The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 5 21 d592 figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 have put a sword in their hand to kill us Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 5 22 pm0l figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֑ר 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 22 g4d5 figs-rquestion לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי 1 Lord, why have you caused trouble for this people? This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I thought you sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 5 23 v2k2 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 to speak to him in your name Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 23 fzir figs-idiom וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ 1 In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 5 23 ce6s figs-quotemarks עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that began in the [previous verse](../05/22.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 6 intro we5k 0 # Exodus 06 General Notes

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Repetition of events:

Most of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, reminds Moses of God’s promises and power.

### Referring to God

A name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.

### Other possible translation difficulties:

With little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.

## Study Concepts in this Chapter

### Promised Land

According to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

### God and his people

In verse 7, note mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him. -EXO 6 1 ip5i figs-quotemarks עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 6 intro we5k 0 # Exodus 06 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-13, 28-30: Yahweh repeats his commissioning of Moses after the bad events recorded in chapter 5\n- v. 14-27: Genealogy of Moses and Aaron\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Repetition of events:\n\nMost of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, Yahweh reminds Moses of his promises and power.\n\n### Referring to God\n\nA name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.\n\n### Other possible translation difficulties:\n\nWith little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.\n\n## Study Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Promised Land\n\nAccording to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### God and his people\n\nIn verse 7, note the mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him.
+EXO 6 1 ip5i figs-quotemarks עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 1 lu95 grammar-connect-time-sequential עַתָּ֣ה 1 This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 6 1 ece6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 my strong hand Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 1 utnn figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1), which is the most common interpretation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 6 1 vdno figs-parallelism כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Instead, if it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 6 1 vdno figs-parallelism כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 6 1 sdon מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “from Egypt” EXO 6 2 wse5 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו 1 There is a transition here. Before this verse, Yahweh was answering Moses’ question more directly. At the beginning of this verse, Yahweh is reintroduced as “God” because he begins to make a clarifying statement about himself and his relationship with the Israelites and their ancestors as well as his plans for the Israelites. Much of this section repeats what Yahweh has already told Moses. You may want to consider a section break before this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 6 2 kcty figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 8](../06/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 3 l81y translate-transliterate בְּ⁠אֵ֣ל שַׁדָּ֑י 1 I appeared to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob **El Shaddai** is a title for God that many scholars think means “almighty.” You will need to decide if you will transliterate the term into your language or translate the meaning. Either approach has broad support. Alternative translation: “as the strongest God of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) EXO 6 3 m27p figs-activepassive וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם 1 I was not known to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but they did not know me by my name Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 6 3 e36z וּ⁠שְׁמִ֣⁠י יְהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א נוֹדַ֖עְתִּי לָ⁠הֶֽם 1 This statement is very difficult to understand as God’s name, Yahweh, is used throughout Genesis, including by Abraham and others. There are many theories about what it means; the view followed by the UST is that now God is revealing to the Israelites a fuller meaning of his divine name than what Abraham and others knew. Alternate translation: “but my name Yahweh was not understood by them” EXO 6 4 zxvc figs-quotations לָ⁠תֵ֥ת לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֶת־אֶ֣רֶץ כְּנָ֑עַן 1 This is the content of the covenant promise from God to his people. Some languages may need to make this part a direct quotation. To do so, begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I said, ‘I will give you the land of Canaan’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 6 4 gkkc figs-parallelism אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽ⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents” or “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 6 4 gkkc figs-parallelism אֶ֥רֶץ מְגֻרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־גָּ֥רוּ בָֽ⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the land they lived in as temporary residents” or “the land that was not their home but where they lived as foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 6 5 l3yc נַאֲקַת֙ 1 groaning Here, **groaning** means making sad sounds because of pain and suffering. EXO 6 5 aiey וָ⁠אֶזְכֹּ֖ר אֶת־בְּרִיתִֽ⁠י 1 **I have remembered my covenant** means God is going to take action. Alternative translation: “I will keep my promise” EXO 6 6 rgh0 grammar-connect-logic-result לָ⁠כֵ֞ן 1 God is now telling Moses to deliver a message to the Israelites of what God is going to do because of everything that he said in verses 2-5. The reason-result relationship is strongly marked here, so translations should make sure to use a connector that marks verse 6-8 as a result of verses 2-5. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 6 6 yv14 לָ⁠כֵ֞ן אֱמֹ֥ר לִ⁠בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֘ל 1 say to the Israelites This is a command from Yahweh to Moses. Alternate translation: “So Yahweh told Moses to say to the Israelites” -EXO 6 6 yg2d figs-quotemarks אֲנִ֣י 1 This begins a second-level quotation that continues to the end of Yahweh’s speech at the close of [verse 8](../06/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 6 we3z figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֗ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 6 6 oqnw figs-synecdoche מִ⁠תַּ֨חַת֙ סִבְלֹ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians made the Israelites do. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 6 6 oqnw figs-synecdoche מִ⁠תַּ֨חַת֙ סִבְלֹ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 This refers to all the hard work the Egyptians made the Israelites do. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the hard work the Egyptians force you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 6 6 xyn4 figs-metaphor בִּ⁠זְר֣וֹעַ נְטוּיָ֔ה 1 Here, **arm** is a figurative way of referring to Yahweh’s power, influence, and capacity for action. **Outstretched** means that he is using that power. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “by my great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 6 6 efx1 וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 Here, the term **judgments** refers to the plagues that God is about to send to harm Egypt and the Egyptians. Each plague is a response to Pharaoh’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “and by [greatly] harming the Egyptians” EXO 6 7 o3lb figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֥ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם…וִֽ⁠ידַעְתֶּ֗ם…אֱלֹ֣הֵי⁠כֶ֔ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -545,13 +493,10 @@ EXO 6 7 xsdh figs-synecdoche מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת סִבְל֥וֹת מִצְר EXO 6 8 h9ho figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…לָ⁠כֶ֛ם 1 Here every occurrence of **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 6 8 g9ru translate-symaction נָשָׂ֨אתִי֙ אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י 1 I swore This is an action that signifies making an oath. Raising the hand may not have the same meaning in your culture, so you may need to use a different symbolic oath-taking action in your translation or simply translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “I promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 6 8 i3vj מוֹרָשָׁ֖ה 1 This means the Israelites will own the land. Alternate translation: “as your own land” -EXO 6 8 ipnm figs-quotemarks אֲנִ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh ends. Both the first-level and second-level quotes end. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level and second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation and a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 9 aalj grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠לֹ֤א שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה קָשָֽׁה 1 In some languages it will be necessary to put the reason for the people not listening before the result. Alternate translation: “but because of shortness of spirit and because of hard service, they did not listen to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 6 9 eph2 מִ⁠קֹּ֣צֶר ר֔וּחַ 1 Here, the people’s **spirit** is spoken of as something that could be measured. By calling it “short,” the author is saying they did not have very much motivation or hope. Alternate translation: “because they had no hope” EXO 6 10 tpw4 לֵּ⁠אמֹֽר 1 This is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if it is unnatural. -EXO 6 11 pi7a figs-quotemarks בֹּ֣א דַבֵּ֔ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרָ֑יִם וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 11 fxf2 figs-quotations וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This statement tells Moses what to discuss with Pharaoh. Some languages may need to covey this information as a direct quotation. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “and say, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 6 12 rsag figs-quotemarks הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 12 h7o0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by the words **before the face of Yahweh**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 12 iiui הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 12 k7hl figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 If the Israelites have not listened to me, why will Pharaoh listen to me, since I am not good at speaking? Moses asked this question in hopes that God would change his mind about using Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -580,24 +525,20 @@ EXO 6 24 rkz9 translate-names קֹ֔רַח אַסִּ֥יר וְ⁠אֶלְקָ EXO 6 24 i6o7 translate-names הַ⁠קָּרְחִֽי 1 This was the name of the clan of people descended from Korah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 25 zvg2 translate-names וְ⁠אֶלְעָזָ֨ר…אַהֲרֹ֜ן…פּֽוּטִיאֵל֙…פִּֽינְחָ֑ס 1 Phinehas These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 25 fck8 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 These were the heads of the fathers’ houses Here, **heads** represents family leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 6 26 dqm8 figs-quotemarks הוֹצִ֜יאוּ אֶת־בְּנֵ֧י יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרַ֖יִם עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a direct quotation of what Yahweh said earlier. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation of a previous remark. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 26 ft6y translate-unknown עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their groups of fighting men The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. Alternate translation: “by their groups” or “by their divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 6 27 o7xp grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠הוֹצִ֥יא 1 This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 6 27 o7xp grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠הוֹצִ֥יא 1 This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 6 28 xssl writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠י֨וֹם 1 This marks a transition from the record of the genealogy back to the narrative. Consider placing a section break at the start of this verse. Alternate translation: “One day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 6 29 i50m figs-quotemarks לֵּ⁠אמֹ֖ר 1 Here, **saying** is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if unnatural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 6 29 vogm figs-quotemarks אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֑ה דַּבֵּ֗ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹה֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י דֹּבֵ֥ר אֵלֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 30 zyqs figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 30 nf3w figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 I am not good…why will Pharaoh listen to me? Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 6 30 qvxf figs-quotemarks הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 30 y4g2 הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 30 vzhq figs-metaphor אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “I always fail to speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 7 intro r9we 0 # Exodus 07 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Miracles

When Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions.

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:

- Moses as God to Pharaoh
- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs
- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion
- Up to third-level quotations

-EXO 7 1 r18p figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 5](../07/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 7 intro r9we 0 # Exodus 07 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-9: The end of Yahweh’s re-sending of Moses and Aaron to Pharaoh\n- v. 10-13: Pharaoh’s first refusal, the sign of the snakes\n- v. 14-25: First plague: the Nile turns to blood\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Miracles\n\nWhen Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that he was not willing to obey Yahweh’s instructions.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Include:\n\n- Moses as God to Pharaoh\n- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs\n- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion\n- Up to third-level quotations\n\n
+EXO 7 1 r18p figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 5](../07/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 1 gy1t רְאֵ֛ה 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Listen carefully” EXO 7 1 dn1s figs-metaphor נְתַתִּ֥י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהִ֖ים לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה 1 I have made you like a god This means Moses would represent the same authority to Pharaoh as God did to Moses. See how you translated the very similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause Pharaoh to consider you as a god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 1 z163 figs-metaphor וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֥ן אָחִ֖י⁠ךָ יִהְיֶ֥ה נְבִיאֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a prophet, because Aaron will actually be the one who proclaims to Pharaoh what Moses tells him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron your brother will act like your prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 2 l44v translate-kinship אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 7 2 hdwo figs-quotations וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Some languages may need to make this a direct quote. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. See what you did in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 7 2 hdwo figs-quotations וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Some languages may need to make this a direct quotation. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. See what you did in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 7 2 p9p7 מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “from Egypt” EXO 7 3 adsq figs-metaphor אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **hard**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. **hard** here. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 3 vtt1 figs-doublet אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י 1 many signs…many wonders The words **signs** and **wonders** mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine them.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -605,19 +546,16 @@ EXO 7 4 ar0l figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **you** means Moses and A EXO 7 4 e2kv figs-metonymy יָדִ֖⁠י 1 put my hand on The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 4 b6h8 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **on Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 4 nilu אֶת־צִבְאֹתַ֜⁠י אֶת־עַמִּ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 These phrases refer to the Israelites in three different ways; they do not refer to three different groups of people. Here, **armies** is the same word translated “hosts” in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “the armies of my Israelite people” -EXO 7 5 cg3n grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠יָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. In some languages the result will have to be placed after the cause, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 7 5 cg3n grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠יָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 7 5 npd6 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל 1 reach out with my hand on This phrase represents God’s great power. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 7 5 dguc grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠הוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 7 5 d1hq figs-quotemarks מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 At the end of this verse, the direct quote that began in [verse 1](../07/01.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. Note that the UST is reordered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 7 6 iii5 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ…עָשֽׂוּ 1 This repetition emphasizes the statement. Some languages can use repetition for emphasis; others will need to use another way of expressing emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 7 5 dguc grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠הוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 7 6 iii5 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ…עָשֽׂוּ 1 This repetition emphasizes the statement. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 7 7 liir writing-background 0 This verse contains background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 7 7 g7i5 translate-numbers שְׁמֹנִ֣ים…שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים 1 Aaron eighty-three years old Alternate translation: “eighty … eighty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 7 7 zoou figs-idiom בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה…בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה 1 The phrase **a son of**, followed by a number and then **years**, is an idiom that refers to their age. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 8 pwph writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This verse marks the beginning of new sections, both major and minor. The major story of the plagues and Exodus itself unfolds from here until after Pharaoh’s army is defeated at the Red Sea. The next minor event is the miracle of the rods becoming snakes. Either by using particular forms that your language uses to mark transitions or by making a section break and heading, this transition should be marked for readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 7 8 p2kf לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. -EXO 7 9 b0jl figs-quotemarks כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 9 jt9z figs-quotations כִּי֩ יְדַבֵּ֨ר אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם פַּרְעֹה֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 When Pharaoh says to you, ‘Do a miracle,’ then you will say to Aaron, ‘Take your staff and throw it down before Pharaoh, so that it may become a snake.’ The two quotations in this verse could be stated as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “When Pharaoh tells you to do a miracle, then you will tell Aaron to take his staff and throw it down before Pharaoh so that it may become a snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 7 9 ye9j figs-quotemarks תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 9 r0tp figs-quotemarks קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. The second level may either end after **Pharaoh** or at the end of the verse. If you did not decide to make it an indirect quotation, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 9 p3xh לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. EXO 7 9 ms5o figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 These pronouns are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -625,78 +563,69 @@ EXO 7 9 ogk9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **b EXO 7 10 ehm9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 10 kv93 עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **his servants** does not refer common servants but probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court. EXO 7 11 mqde לַֽ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים וְ⁠לַֽ⁠מְכַשְּׁפִ֑ים…חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 Here, **magicians** probably describes both **wise men and sorcerers** rather than being a third group. See translationWords articles for each term. +EXO 7 12 m4uw אִ֣ישׁ 1 swallowed up Alternate translation: “magician” EXO 7 12 u6np וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע 1 swallowed up Alternate translation: “ate up” or “devoured” -EXO 7 12 m0kw grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע מַטֵּֽה־אַהֲרֹ֖ן אֶת־מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a surprising and amusing twist which was not what the magicians expected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 7 12 m0kw grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע מַטֵּֽה־אַהֲרֹ֖ן אֶת־מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a surprising and amusing twist which was not what the magicians expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 7 12 prnp figs-personification מַטֵּֽה…מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם 1 It may be necessary in some languages to translate the word **staff** as “snake,” since it had turned into one. This may be true if it would not make sense in the target language to say (because it is not living) that a staff swallowed or ate something. It may also may not make sense in some languages to speak of the snakes as staffs once they have been transformed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 7 13 g42f figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note that this is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn, as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 13 wekf כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST. EXO 7 14 d27r figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֖ד לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Pharaoh’s heart is hard Now Yahweh speaks of Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude as if Pharaoh’s **heart** were **heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs **heavy** here. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh is defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 14 qiyx writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 7 14 t79b figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 18](../07/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 15 ecby הִנֵּה֙ 1 **Behold** is used to draw attention to information that follows. EXO 7 15 c5np יֹצֵ֣א הַ⁠מַּ֔יְמָ⁠ה 1 when he goes out to the water There are various theories as to what Pharaoh would go down to the Nile to do, but there is no need to speculate or specify in the translation. EXO 7 16 yqp7 וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Say to him Alternate translation: “Say to Pharaoh” -EXO 7 16 i4yt figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 18](../07/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 16 uvxe figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֤י הָ⁠עִבְרִים֙ 1 Yahweh claimed the Hebrews (Israelites) as his own. They worshiped him. This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 7 16 d16q figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻ֖⁠נִי בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה לֹא־שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַד־כֹּֽה 1 This is a third-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. Alternatively, you could translate it as an indirect quotation as in the UST. If you do this, take care to adjust the pronoun person (second/third) as appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 7 16 cwox וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to the information that follows. In some languages, it will not be translated. EXO 7 17 j1ev כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 strike the water This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 7 17 mywj figs-quotesinquotes בְּ⁠זֹ֣את 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 18. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. It is possible that the third-level quote actually ends before or after **Behold,** in which case, in the rest of the quote **I** refers to Moses, not Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 7 17 mywj figs-quotesinquotes בְּ⁠זֹ֣את 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 18. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. It is possible that the third-level quotation actually ends before or after **Behold,** in which case, in the rest of the quote **I** refers to Moses, not Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 7 17 jjm3 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Look at this” EXO 7 18 bsjn grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בָאַ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְאֹ֑ר 1 His warning,**the river will stink**, will happen because the fish die. Alternate translation: “and because of that the river will stink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 7 18 nx0q grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם לִ⁠שְׁתּ֥וֹת מַ֖יִם מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר 1 In some languages you will need to put the reason before the result. Alternative translation: “In order to find water to drink from the river, the Egyptians will exhaust themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 7 18 nx0q grammar-connect-logic-goal לִ⁠שְׁתּ֥וֹת מַ֖יִם 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternative translation: “in order to find water to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 7 18 rgl0 figs-rpronouns וְ⁠נִלְא֣וּ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 Here, **themselves** refers back to the subject (**the Egyptians**) to indicated that the Egyptians are the object of the verb as well. Use a natural form in your language to show that the Egyptians are both subject and object. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians will exhaust the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 7 18 grwh figs-quotemarks מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands ends. Depending on your decisions about the embedded quotation levels, you may have up to three levels of quotations that need to be closed here. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation and quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 7 19 jima figs-quotemarks אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֡ן קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם וְ⁠הָ֤יָה דָם֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 7 19 gwc2 figs-quotemarks קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 19 ysi7 figs-merism עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם ׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 This list is meant to expand on and reinforce the idea of all of the water in Egypt. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations of the blood are not limited to these specific places, but to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 7 19 wxp2 בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ 1 throughout all Alternate translation: “in every part of” EXO 7 19 msxp figs-possession וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים 1 This possessive show composition. Alternate translation: “and in containers made from wood and in containers made from stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 7 20 zy18 figs-explicit בַּ⁠יְאֹ֔ר 1 in the river The name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 7 20 zy18 figs-explicit בַּ⁠יְאֹ֔ר 1 in the river If it would be helpful to your readers, the name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 7 20 mj8v figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means in their sight. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 22 n7kr translate-unknown חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 7 22 qdc7 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 22 sbic כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST and how you handled this in [7:13](../07/13.md), where the same sentence appears. EXO 7 23 atdk figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖⁠וֹ גַּם־לָ⁠זֹֽאת 1 This is an idiom meaning Pharaoh did not think about the meaning of the miracle he had just seen. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And he did not consider what even this meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 7 24 m6zn figs-hyperbole כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 All the Egyptians The word **all** here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. Alternate translation: “many of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 7 24 m6zn figs-hyperbole כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 All the Egyptians The word **all** here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. However, it does indicate that all the Egyptians who wished to drink water had to dig or had to have dug for them. Alternate translation: “many of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 7 25 bn5h writing-newevent וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 7 25 gjyb figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 This means seven days later. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 25 dg56 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 8 intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 08 General Notes

## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each
- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter
- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is


### Lifting up the hand and staff:

In the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.


## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. +EXO 8 intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 08 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-15: Second plague: frogs\n- v. 16-19: Third plague (first that magicians cannot imitate): gnats\n- v. 20-32: Fourth plague: flies\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain; translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each\n- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter\n- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians, but it is not specified how or why that is\n\n\n### Lifting up the hand and staff:\n\nIn the next few chapters, God will instruct Moses or Aaron or both to raise his hand or staff or both hand and staff. The narrative will then record who will raise his hand or staff or both. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand, and the narrative may say that Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit, and they can both be mentioned, or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.\n
EXO 8 1 tf7b figs-quotations בֹּ֖א 1 This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 1 v6ll כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 8 1 lndc figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה 1 Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 8 1 kure figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This begins a third-level quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 8 2 s7y1 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 8 1 lndc figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה 1 Here, **Thus** begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 8 1 kure figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 8 2 s7y1 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 8 2 aei8 הִנֵּ֣ה 1 Here, **behold** is an interjection meant to focus the attention of the listener on what comes next, in this case a dire warning. Alternate translation: “look out” EXO 8 3 vgby figs-merism בְּ⁠בֵיתֶ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲדַ֥ר מִשְׁכָּבְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠עַל־מִטָּתֶ֑⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠בֵ֤ית עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠תַנּוּרֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠מִשְׁאֲרוֹתֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the frogs’ location is not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 4 okok figs-quotemarks 0 Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 5 wll3 figs-quotemarks אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים וְ⁠הַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 4 okok figs-quotemarks 0 Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 5 ley6 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 It may be helpful to translate this first quotation indirectly to avoid having two levels of quotations in this verse. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to say to Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 5 dqsb figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים וְ⁠הַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation if you chose to make **Say to Aaron** a direct quotation. In that case, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 5 ejcx יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 8 5 z19q figs-merism עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים 1 This list is meant to convey the idea of all the water in Egypt where frogs might live. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations are not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. This is made clear in [8:6](../08/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 6 wf3a figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ 1 It is implied that Moses told Yahweh’s instructions to Aaron. You may choose to make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 8 6 nrbq figs-explicit יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 It is implied that Aaron was holding his staff as instructed. You may choose to make this explicit. See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. Alternate translation: “his hand holding his staff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 8 6 j1w7 figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶת־יָד֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל מֵימֵ֣י 1 Aaron would not have been able to reach his hand over all the water in Egypt. He likely stretched his hand over some nearby portion of the Nile, symbolizing all the water of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 8 6 drmg figs-explicit וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ 1 [Verse 3](../08/03.md) has specified from where the frogs will come. Here it is implied, but you may make it explicit as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 8 6 rxze grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ 1 There were so many frogs that the text uses the collective singular. If that does not make sense in your language, you may simply use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 8 6 wf3a figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ 1 It is implied that Moses told Yahweh’s instructions to Aaron. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 8 6 nrbq figs-explicit יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 It is implied that Aaron was holding his staff as instructed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. Alternate translation: “his hand holding his staff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 8 6 j1w7 figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יֵּ֤ט אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶת־יָד֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל מֵימֵ֣י 1 Aaron would not have been able to reach his hand over all the water in Egypt. He likely stretched his hand over some nearby portion of the Nile, symbolizing all the water of Egypt. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 8 6 drmg figs-explicit וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ 1 [Verse 3](../08/03.md) has specified from where the frogs will come. Here it is implied, but if it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 8 6 rxze grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ 1 There were so many frogs that the text uses the collective singular. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you may simply use the plural, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 8 6 j83d figs-metaphor וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ וַ⁠תְּכַ֖ס אֶת־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This means that there were frogs everywhere in Egypt. The image is like that of a blanket smothering the entire country. (Or more directly, like one giant, nation-sized frog sitting on top of the entire land). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 8 7 n02y translate-unknown הַֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ים בְּ⁠לָטֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 See how you translated these in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 8 mhn3 וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 Then Pharaoh called for Moses and Aaron Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron” or “And the king summoned Moses and Aaron” -EXO 8 8 nfe3 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 It is implied that Moses and Aaron came to Pharaoh between the time when he called them and when he spoke to them. You may need to make that explicit. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for Aaron, and after they came, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 8 8 pc7e figs-quotemarks הַעְתִּ֣ירוּ אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠יָסֵר֙ הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖⁠נִּי וּ⁠מֵֽ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י וַ⁠אֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠יִזְבְּח֖וּ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 8 nfe3 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 It is implied that Moses and Aaron came to Pharaoh between the time when he called them and when he spoke to them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for Aaron, and after they came, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 8 8 tx3t figs-quotations אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠יָסֵר֙ הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖⁠נִּי וּ⁠מֵֽ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 In some languages you may have to make the content of Pharaoh’s prayer to Yahweh a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation markings if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “to Yahweh saying, ‘Please take away the frogs from Pharaoh and from his people.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 8 8 qku4 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וַ⁠אֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠יִזְבְּח֖וּ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This promise is conditional on the frogs going away. Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Once the frogs are gone, I will let the people go, and they may sacrifice to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 8 9 bm7x figs-quotemarks הִתְפָּאֵ֣ר עָלַ⁠י֒ לְ⁠מָתַ֣י ׀ אַעְתִּ֣יר לְ⁠ךָ֗ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּֽ⁠לְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔ לְ⁠הַכְרִית֙ הַֽ⁠צֲפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמְּ⁠ךָ֖ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּתֶּ֑י⁠ךָ רַ֥ק בַּ⁠יְאֹ֖ר תִּשָּׁאַֽרְנָה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 8 qku4 figs-hypo וַ⁠אֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠יִזְבְּח֖וּ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This promise is conditional on the frogs going away. Use a natural form in your language for hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Once the frogs are gone, I will let the people go, and they may sacrifice to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) EXO 8 9 khfd figs-irony הִתְפָּאֵ֣ר עָלַ⁠י֒ 1 Moses speaks with false humility here. He is ironically pointing out Pharaoh’s powerlessness before Yahweh. Alternate translation: “You can choose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) EXO 8 9 g0lu figs-merism לְ⁠ךָ֗ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּֽ⁠לְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔…מִמְּ⁠ךָ֖ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּתֶּ֑י⁠ךָ 1 These lists mean “for everyone” and “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that Moses will ask for a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 10 g5e7 figs-quotemarks לְ⁠מָחָ֑ר 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 10 tvjo figs-quotemarks כִּ⁠דְבָ֣רְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 A direct quote begins here that continues to the end of the next verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 10 ofw3 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּי־אֵ֖ין כַּ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 This knowledge is the goal of Yahweh’s granting a respite from the frogs. In some languages you may need to place this at the end of [verse 11](../08/11.md), after Moses says the frogs will leave. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 8 10 d1wp figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **our** refers to the Israelites’ God, excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +EXO 8 10 ofw3 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּי־אֵ֖ין כַּ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 This knowledge is the goal of Yahweh’s granting a respite from the frogs. In some languages you may need to place this at the end of [verse 11](../08/11.md), after Moses says the frogs will leave. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 8 10 d1wp figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **our** refers to the Israelites’ God, excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 11 zwqo figs-merism מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּ֣תֶּ֔י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עֲבָדֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as was its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 11 ttyr figs-quotemarks רַ֥ק בַּ⁠יְאֹ֖ר תִּשָּׁאַֽרְנָה 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that started in the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 12 jjv2 שָׂ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “Yahweh had set” EXO 8 12 nxyi writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֛ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן 1 A minor scene shift occurs here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 13 rwe1 figs-merism מִן־הַ⁠בָּתִּ֥ים מִן־הַ⁠חֲצֵרֹ֖ת וּ⁠מִן־הַ⁠שָּׂדֹֽת 1 This list means “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -704,47 +633,46 @@ EXO 8 14 a03n חֳמָרִ֣ם חֳמָרִ֑ם 1 Literally, the Hebrew says EXO 8 15 lv2n figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַכְבֵּד֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 he hardened his heart Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:14](../07/14.md), but note there that the state of Pharaoh’s heart is reported, whereas here Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 8 15 b47h כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 just as Yahweh had said that he would do Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had said Pharaoh would do” EXO 8 16 cikq writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 8 16 s5gh figs-quotations אֱמֹר֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it may be helpful to translate one of the parts as an indirect quotation so that you do not have to have two levels of quotations here. See the UST. Alternate translation: “[And Yahweh told Moses] to tell Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 8 16 xh9e figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation (unless you translated one portion as an indirect quotation). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level (or first-level) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation (within a quotation). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 16 s5gh figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹר֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 **Say to Aaron** starts a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it may be helpful to translate one of the parts as an indirect quotation so that you do not have to have two levels of quotations here. See the UST. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to tell Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 16 joxz נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ 1 This is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs that occur throughout this section of plague judgment. EXO 8 16 kpr5 מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ 1 This refers to Aaron’s staff. See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 8 16 w5el translate-unknown לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם 1 We do not know exactly what this word means. It is probably a tiny (as in dust-particle size), biting insect. You should choose a different insect here than the one in the next plague ([8:21](../08/21.md)-8:31). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 17 l9wj וַ⁠יֵּט֩ אַהֲרֹ֨ן אֶת־יָד֤⁠וֹ בְ⁠מַטֵּ֨⁠הוּ֙ וַ⁠יַּךְ֙ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 Again, this is one action or motion, but it is described with the two verbs, **stretched** and **struck**, that occur throughout this section of plague judgment. See how you translated it in the [previous verse](../08/16.md). EXO 8 17 l784 יָד֤⁠וֹ בְ⁠מַטֵּ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 8 17 nhgt translate-unknown הַ⁠כִּנָּ֔ם…כִנִּ֖ים 1 Again, we do not know this term for certain, so see how you translated it in [8:16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 17 grs3 figs-gendernotations בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 This term, **man**, includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 8 17 grg5 figs-hyperbole כָּל־עֲפַ֥ר הָ⁠אָ֛רֶץ…בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This extraordinary statement is used to emphasize the extent and severity of the plague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 8 17 nhgt translate-unknown הַ⁠כִּנָּ֔ם…כִנִּ֖ים 1 Again, we do not know what this term refers to for certain, so see how you translated it in [8:16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 8 17 grs3 figs-gendernotations בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 Here **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 8 17 grg5 figs-hyperbole כָּל־עֲפַ֥ר הָ⁠אָ֛רֶץ…בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This extraordinary statement with the repeated **all** is used to emphasize the extent and severity of the plague. If this would be unnatural in your language use a natural way to communicate that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 8 18 wga0 translate-unknown הַ⁠חַרְטֻמִּ֧ים בְּ⁠לָטֵי⁠הֶ֛ם 1 See how you translated these in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 18 ii85 translate-unknown הַ⁠כִּנִּ֖ים…הַ⁠כִּנָּ֔ם 1 See how you translated this term in [8:16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 18 mnj5 figs-gendernotations בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 This includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 8 18 mnj5 figs-gendernotations בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 Here **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 8 19 kcs9 translate-unknown הַֽ⁠חַרְטֻמִּים֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 19 lk2k figs-synecdoche אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִ֖ים הִ֑וא 1 This is the finger of God The words “finger of God” represent the power of God. Alternate translation: “This is the powerful work of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 8 19 lk2k figs-synecdoche אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִ֖ים הִ֑וא 1 This is the finger of God The words “finger of God” represent the power of God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is the powerful work of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 8 19 z1w2 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 8 19 rp3i writing-pronouns אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 It is possible that **them** refers to the magicians here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 8 19 rp3i writing-pronouns אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **them** may refer to the magicians or to Aaron and Moses. Alternate translation: “to the magicians’ warning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 8 19 gjgg כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Some languages will need to place this before the thing that Yahweh predicted, as in the UST. EXO 8 20 j5n8 וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּב֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 stand in front of Pharaoh Alternate translation: “and present yourself to Pharaoh” EXO 8 20 frfn writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fourth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 20 syv2 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 20 vnym הִנֵּ֖ה 1 **Behold** is used to draw attention to important information that is next. In some languages and translation styles, it will make the most sense to omit this, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully” -EXO 8 20 uypa figs-quotations כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This phrase opens a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. However, you may also consider making the opening portion an indirect quote so that you do not have a quote inside of a quote for the next verses. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 8 20 uypa figs-quotations כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This phrase opens a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. However, you may also consider making the opening portion an indirect quote so that you do not have a quote inside of a quote for the next verses. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 20 eqd2 כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 Let my people go This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 8 20 a7l7 figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This phrase opens a second-level direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md), unless you made **thus says Yahweh** an indirect quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 20 fgl3 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻֽ⁠נִי 1 This is the purpose of the people being let go. Alternate translation: “so they can serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 8 20 a7l7 figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This phrase opens a second-level direct quotation which continues until the end of [verse 23](../08/23.md), unless you made **thus says Yahweh** an indirect quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 20 fgl3 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻֽ⁠נִי 1 This is the purpose of the people being let go. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “so they can serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 8 21 hitq הִנְ⁠נִי֩ 1 The expression **behold me!** is used to draw attention to important information that is next. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully” -EXO 8 21 hwcl grammar-collectivenouns הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of flying, biting insects traveling in a group. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 8 21 l5z7 translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 8 21 hwcl grammar-collectivenouns הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of flying, biting insects traveling in a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 8 21 l5z7 translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** probably refers to the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 21 foli figs-merism בְּ⁠ךָ֜ וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֧י⁠ךָ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֛ וּ⁠בְ⁠בָתֶּ֖י⁠ךָ…בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙…וְ⁠גַ֥ם הָ⁠אֲדָמָ֖ה 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 22 mv8w grammar-connect-logic-result לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 General Information: This is the result of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 8 22 mv8w grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 General Information: This is the goal of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 8 22 apum grammar-collectivenouns עָרֹ֑ב 1 This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md). Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 8 22 qb9h translate-unknown עָרֹ֑ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 22 refq grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֛י אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠קֶ֥רֶב הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This is the goal of treating the Israelites differently. In some languages you may need to put this phrase the beginning of the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 8 22 refq grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֛י אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠קֶ֥רֶב הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This is the goal of treating the Israelites differently. In some languages you may need to put this phrase the beginning of the verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 8 22 a28h אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠קֶ֥רֶב הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 Here, **am** could be connecting **I** and **Yahweh** or it could be connecting **I, Yahweh** and **in the middle of the land**. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am in the middle of the land” -EXO 8 23 oxr5 figs-abstractnouns פְדֻ֔ת 1 This is a noun derived from a verb meaning “to buy back.” Very broadly, it can mean “to save or rescue.” See the next note regarding textual variants for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 8 23 oxr5 figs-abstractnouns פְדֻ֔ת 1 This is a noun derived from a verb meaning “to buy back.” Very broadly, it can mean “to save or rescue.” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **redemption**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the next note regarding textual variants for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 8 23 tf4j translate-textvariants פְדֻ֔ת 1 Many translations follow the Septuagint here, which uses the word “division.” A minor change to the Hebrew would also produce the word translated “treat differently” in the [previous verse](../08/22.md). Alternate translation: “a division” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) EXO 8 23 u4gs עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 Yahweh’s people, that is, the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” EXO 8 23 rg2c עַמֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 Pharaoh’s people, that is, the Egyptians. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” -EXO 8 23 tb24 figs-quotemarks לְ⁠מָחָ֥ר יִהְיֶ֖ה הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃ 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations of Yahweh that started in [8:20](../08/20.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. You may not have three levels if you made any level an indirect quote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 24 gw3c figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 The UST supplies a brief sentence filling in the gap between Yahweh’s command to Moses and the onset of the plague. Some languages will need something like that to make the progression of events clear. Alternate translation: “Moses obeyed the instructions Yahweh gave him, and Pharaoh responded as Yahweh had said he would. And Yahweh did so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 8 23 tb24 figs-quotemarks לְ⁠מָחָ֥ר יִהְיֶ֖ה הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃ 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotations of Yahweh that started in [8:20](../08/20.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. You may not have three levels if you made any level an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 24 gw3c figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 The UST supplies a brief sentence filling in the gap between Yahweh’s command to Moses and the onset of the plague. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly to make the progression of events clear. Alternate translation: “Moses obeyed the instructions Yahweh gave him, and Pharaoh responded as Yahweh had said he would. And Yahweh did so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 8 24 lk5s writing-newevent וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 There is a minor scene change here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 24 ut0f translate-unknown עָרֹ֣ב 1 There are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 24 dg0k figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹא֙ 1 Some languages may need to translate this as "going" rather than "coming." Alternate translation: “and … went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -752,45 +680,39 @@ EXO 8 24 tmcf figs-merism בֵּ֥יתָ⁠ה פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בֵ֣ית EXO 8 24 nd6e figs-activepassive תִּשָּׁחֵ֥ת הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב 1 the land was ruined because of the swarms of flies If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The swarms of flies devastated the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 8 24 ngue figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of the insects. Alternate translation: “because the insects were everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 25 e7l0 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א 1 This happened during the plague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -EXO 8 25 ciy5 figs-quotemarks לְכ֛וּ זִבְח֥וּ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם בָּ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 25 gj2w figs-youdual לֵֽ⁠אלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 Here, **your** is plural. It could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) if your team decides it means Moses and Aaron; otherwise use a plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 8 26 tvnj figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [8:27](../08/27.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 26 e9wk תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם…תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 We do not know what about their sacrificing was an **abomination** to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause. EXO 8 26 idkt figs-exclusive נִזְבַּ֖ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ…נִזְבַּ֞ח…יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 26 i7dy figs-rquestion וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 will they not stone us? Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 8 26 gy7d figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 right before their eyes The express **before their eyes** is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 27 ju3u figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֖ךְ…וְ⁠זָבַ֨חְנוּ֙…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ…אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we**, **our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -EXO 8 27 clc3 figs-quotemarks אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 After the phrase **to us**, the direct quote of Moses’ argument to Pharaoh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 28 p3pd figs-quotemarks אָנֹכִ֞י אֲשַׁלַּ֤ח אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ וּ⁠זְבַחְתֶּ֞ם לַ⁠יהוָ֤ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙ בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֔ר רַ֛ק הַרְחֵ֥ק לֹא־תַרְחִ֖יקוּ לָ⁠לֶ֑כֶת הַעְתִּ֖ירוּ בַּעֲדִֽ⁠י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 28 qxes figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 8 28 mla2 אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” EXO 8 28 hnud figs-idiom הַרְחֵ֥ק…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 In Hebrew, **far** is repeated to emphasize (with **not**) that they are absolutely not to go too far. If your language does not use repeating words like this, express the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 8 29 kgkx figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֜י יוֹצֵ֤א מֵֽ⁠עִמָּ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠הַעְתַּרְתִּ֣י אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠סָ֣ר הֶ⁠עָרֹ֗ב מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֥י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֖⁠וֹ מָחָ֑ר רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם לִ⁠זְבֹּ֖חַ לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 29 h94t הִנֵּ֨ה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. Alternate translation: “Know this” EXO 8 29 jirm translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֗ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 29 yvcl figs-123person מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה…פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Moses may be using the third person to refer to Pharaoh to show respect, because the king appears to be relenting. If use of the third person is not a way of showing respect in your culture or is not a valid way of addressing an individual at all, you may need to change the form. Alternate translation: “from you … you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 8 29 la3z figs-merism מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֥י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֖⁠וֹ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 29 bf85 figs-doublenegatives אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 you must not deal deceitfully any more by not letting our people go This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “you must begin to deal truthfully with us and let our people go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 8 29 bf85 figs-doublenegatives אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 you must not deal deceitfully any more by not letting our people go If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you must begin to deal truthfully with us and let our people go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 8 29 hh4q רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל 1 But you must not deal deceitfully Alternate translation: “But you must not deceive us” or “But you must not lie to us” EXO 8 30 tull writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 There is a minor scene shift here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 31 rj50 translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 31 iyhn figs-merism מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֣י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 This list means “from everyone and everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 31 mb4r figs-hyperbole לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד 1 This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 8 31 mb4r figs-hyperbole לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד 1 This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that emphasizes thoroughness or complete lack of the swarm. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 8 32 sb5l figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֤ד פַּרְעֹה֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Pharaoh hardened his heart Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 9 intro hqw8 0 # Exodus 09 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. +EXO 9 intro hqw8 0 # Exodus 09 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n- v. 1-7: Fifth plague (first that does not affect Israelites): disease kills livestock\n- v. 8-12: Sixth plague: boils\n- v. 13-35: Seventh plague: hail\n -v. 27-35: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n- animals are affected in both the fifth and seventh plagues, in the fifth, the word is specifically related to domestic animals (livestock) while the word used in the seventh is more general
EXO 9 1 se3f writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ 1 General Information: A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 9 1 p1oj figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 9 1 maqa figs-quotemarks אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a second-level direct quote begins which continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains one more level of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 9 1 fo4o figs-quotesinquotes וְ⁠דִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 You may want to translate the second-level quote beginning with **Thus says Yahweh** as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 9 1 p1oj figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 9 1 fo4o figs-quotesinquotes וְ⁠דִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 You may want to translate the second-level quotation beginning with **Thus says Yahweh** as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 9 1 w0lg כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 9 1 x4bd עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” -EXO 9 2 l7ld figs-parallelism כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְ⁠עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽ⁠ם 1 if you refuse to let them go, if you still keep them back These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 9 2 l7ld figs-parallelism כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְ⁠עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽ⁠ם 1 if you refuse to let them go, if you still keep them back These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 9 3 fltr הִנֵּ֨ה 1 The word **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “look out” EXO 9 3 ume2 figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 then Yahweh’s hand will be on your cattle Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 3 cjt9 figs-123person יַד־יְהוָ֜ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **the hand of Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “My hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 3 tn3z figs-youdual בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 on your cattle While the word **your** here is not plural, the next verse shows that it refers to all the people of Egypt who owned cattle. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, you may want to use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 9 3 v8ur figs-merism בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽ⁠חֲמֹרִים֙ בַּ⁠גְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 9 3 m1fk grammar-collectivenouns בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר…וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 These (**cattle** and **flock**) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 9 3 m1fk grammar-collectivenouns בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר…וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 These (**cattle** and **flock**) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 9 3 f5sr figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֥ד 1 Here the plague is spoken of as if it weighed a lot. This means it would be very bad. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “severe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 4 x12r figs-123person יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. You should do the same as you did in the [previous verse](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 4 lp3t figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Israel’s cattle Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -798,22 +720,19 @@ EXO 9 4 u60c grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **Israel** EXO 9 4 fs25 figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Egypt’s cattle Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 4 k5rx דָּבָֽר 1 Alternate translation: “animal” EXO 9 4 xk5d מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Alternate translation: “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel” -EXO 9 4 cbsz figs-quotemarks וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמ֛וּת מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל דָּבָֽר 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotes of Yahweh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of levels of quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 5 vqz2 וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד 1 fixed a time Alternate translation: “And Yahweh made an appointed time” EXO 9 5 w8gk לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 This marks the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted in translation if your language does not use a similar form. However, in this sentence it is the only verb related to speech, so you may need to translate it similarly to the way the UST does.
. -EXO 9 5 dh4h figs-quotemarks מָחָ֗ר יַעֲשֶׂ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה בָּ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 5 pxb1 figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 Yahweh is speaking here. Therefore, you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 9 6 gt3n figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה 1 It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. You may need to make that explicit in your translation in some languages. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 9 6 gt3n figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה 1 It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 9 6 cx5i figs-hyperbole כֹּ֖ל מִקְנֵ֣ה 1 All the cattle of Egypt died This is exaggerated to emphasize the seriousness of the event. There were still some animals alive that were afflicted by later plagues. However, it may be best to translate this with the word “all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 9 6 gy7t figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 cattle of Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 9 6 i0bl figs-litotes וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד 1 This emphatic negative statement could be stated positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +EXO 9 6 i0bl figs-litotes וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 9 7 md84 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֗ה 1 behold Again, **behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “and listen” -EXO 9 7 rtny figs-litotes לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד 1 This emphatic negative statement could be stated positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +EXO 9 7 rtny figs-litotes לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 9 7 kkuc figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 7 sfor grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **Israel** is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 9 7 j51j figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּכְבַּד֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 his heart was stubborn Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “But Pharaoh was defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 8 brm6 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 kiln A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the start of the sixth plague scene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 9 8 ik2i figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹן֒ 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 8 luhg figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶם֙…חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 **You** and **your** refer to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use dual form (if you have one) or plural forms (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 9 8 ydar קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “Each of you fill both your hands with” EXO 9 8 u5wn פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” @@ -834,20 +753,18 @@ EXO 9 11 k9uu figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין 1 H EXO 9 11 lpmq translate-unknown הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין…הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֔ין 1 To have **boils** means to have a condition where the skin is red, hot, and painful, the skin breaks open, and puss and blood come out. See how you translated this in [9:9](../09/09.md). However, this time only **boils** is used, without the description (“bursting blisters”) that is in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 12 p5m5 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This phrase means that it was God who made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 13 ifs8 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the seventh plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 9 13 zsvl figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 13 zmrt figs-metonymy וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּ֖ב לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה 1 Here, **before the face of** means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stand in Pharaoh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 13 dxww figs-quotations וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 After **and say to him**, a second-level quote begins which continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. However, it may be useful to translate this short quote frame as an indirect quotation, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 9 13 hsl6 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 9 13 zi15 figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 **Let** is the first word of a third-level direct quote which continues until the end of [9:19](../09/19.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a third-level quotation. If you chose to make the second-level quote an indirect quote, then this one would only be a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 14 z68b grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 Here it is implied that Pharaoh will again not let God’s people go. **For** is expressing the result, that is, God‘s response to Pharaoh's disobedience to the command immediately preceding. You may need to insert this as in the UST or choose a contrastive conjunction. Alternate translation: “Otherwise,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 9 14 n6wq figs-synecdoche אֲנִ֨י שֹׁלֵ֜חַ אֶת־כָּל־מַגֵּפֹתַ⁠י֙ אֶֽל־לִבְּ⁠ךָ֔ 1 on you yourself Here, **to your heart** is a synecdoche that means that even Pharaoh will be hurt by the plagues. Alternate translation: “I am about to send all my plagues against you personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 9 15 f056 grammar-connect-condition-contrary כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר וַ⁠תִּכָּחֵ֖ד מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This verse presents two things that God could have done but did not do to the Egyptians. This is to set up the reason he gives in the [next verse](../09/16.md). Be sure that it is clear in your translation that these are hypothetical past events. See the note regarding Yahweh’s stated goals in the next verse. Some languages may need to reverse the order of these verses to put Yahweh’s goals before his non-action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +EXO 9 14 n6wq figs-synecdoche אֲנִ֨י שֹׁלֵ֜חַ אֶת־כָּל־מַגֵּפֹתַ⁠י֙ אֶֽל־לִבְּ⁠ךָ֔ 1 on you yourself Here, **to your heart** is a synecdoche that means that even Pharaoh will be hurt by the plagues. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am about to send all my plagues against you personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 9 15 f056 figs-hypo כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר וַ⁠תִּכָּחֵ֖ד מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This verse presents two things that God could have done but did not do to the Egyptians. This is to set up the reason he gives in the [next verse](../09/16.md). Be sure that it is clear in your translation that these are hypothetical past events. See the note regarding Yahweh’s stated goals in the next verse. Some languages may need to reverse the order of these verses to put Yahweh’s goals before his non-action. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) EXO 9 15 a3l8 figs-metonymy שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ 1 reached out with my hand and attacked you Here, **my hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 15 hgfx figs-metaphor וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר 1 Here, **a plague** is spoken about as if it were something that could be used to hit someone. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and caused you and your people to suffer from a plague” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 16 kwks grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠אוּלָ֗ם בַּ⁠עֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְ⁠ךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑⁠י וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ׃ 1 The statements from **to show** to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, **However, for this reason I appointed you: in order** in a way that connects with the [previous verse](../09/15.md) in an action-goal manner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 9 16 nec7 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 17 h3ed figs-metaphor עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 lifting yourself up against my people Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 9 17 sdav figs-rpronouns מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, Pharaoh fills two different roles in the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 9 17 sdav figs-rpronouns מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, Pharaoh is both the subject and object of the sentence. Translate this in a way that conveys that (1) Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud and (2) this is metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom (as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 9 17 r1wv מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, **you** is Pharaoh. EXO 9 17 zfhb בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 Here, **my people** are the Israelites. EXO 9 18 fnd2 הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Listen! Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you” @@ -856,26 +773,27 @@ EXO 9 19 fduj figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ EXO 9 19 eo52 וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד 1 Alternate translation: “and the balls of ice will drop on” EXO 9 19 x4ja figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָ⁠אָדָ֨ם 1 Here, **man** means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 19 itlv וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֜ה 1 Here, **and beast** includes domestic and wild animals. -EXO 9 19 f80e figs-explicit וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ 1 The people and animals **will die** because they will be fatally injured by the hail. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 9 19 f80e figs-explicit וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ 1 The people and animals **will die** because they will be fatally injured by the hail. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 9 19 g90p figs-quotemarks וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ 1 Up to three levels of direct quotation (depending on your earlier decision about converting a level to an indirect quotation) end at the end of this verse. You should indicate that ending here with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level (if required) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 9 20 dp8j figs-explicit הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ 1 As in some other occasions, Moses’ conversation with Pharaoh is not recorded. You may need to make explicit the fact that he did as Yahweh instructed. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 9 20 p3nz הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽ⁠עַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning” +EXO 9 20 dp8j figs-explicit הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ 1 As in some other occasions, Moses’ conversation with Pharaoh is not recorded. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that he did as Yahweh instructed explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 9 20 p3nz הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽ⁠עַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Here, **the word of Yahweh** refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they believed that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning” EXO 9 21 dvwv figs-metaphor וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־שָׂ֛ם לִבּ֖⁠וֹ אֶל 1 Here, **set his heart** means he believed or thought something was true. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “but whoever did not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 9 21 bzqy figs-metonymy דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **the word of Yahweh** refers to Yahweh’s warning, more broadly it means they did not believe that Yahweh would do what he threatened. Alternate translation: “Yahweh’s warning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 22 vtfl writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 9 22 zwvk יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 9 22 h9cr figs-gendernotations הָ⁠אָדָ֣ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 9 22 h9cr figs-gendernotations הָ⁠אָדָ֣ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 22 r0g4 הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה 1 Here, **beast** includes domestic and wild animals. EXO 9 23 o8zy מַטֵּ⁠הוּ֮ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 9 25 vnpj figs-merism מֵ⁠אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 Here, **from man to beast** is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent and severity of the hail. Alternate translation: “every living thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 9 25 vnpj figs-merism מֵ⁠אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 Here, **from man to beast** is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent and severity of the hail. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every living thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 9 25 ft0o figs-gendernotations מֵ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “from people” or “from mankind” or “from humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 25 apbl בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 Here, **beast** includes domestic and wild animals. EXO 9 27 fu9c writing-newevent וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֣ח פַּרְעֹ֗ה 1 to summon A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 9 27 sh1x חָטָ֣אתִי 1 Some commentators suggest translating **sinned** more literally, that is “missed the mark,” because Pharaoh is probably not admitting a moral failure, but instead, admitting that he misjudged. EXO 9 27 joxy הַ⁠צַּדִּ֔יק…הָ⁠רְשָׁעִֽים 1 Many commentators suggest that Pharaoh is using these terms in a narrow, legal sense and only referring to this instance. That is, he is saying something like “I’ve lost this round in court.” See UST. EXO 9 27 wag1 וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 Here, **my people** refers to the Egyptians. -EXO 9 28 r0cs figs-litotes וְ⁠לֹ֥א תֹסִפ֖וּ⁠ן לַ⁠עֲמֹֽד 1 This negative statement strengthens the force of Pharaoh’s statement that he will let the people go. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +EXO 9 28 r0cs figs-litotes וְ⁠לֹ֥א תֹסִפ֖וּ⁠ן לַ⁠עֲמֹֽד 1 Here Pharaoh uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “really, I will let you go”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 9 29 ajz3 וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר אֵלָי⁠ו֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses said to him Alternate translation: “And Moses said to Pharaoh” -EXO 9 29 b787 translate-symaction אֶפְרֹ֥שׂ אֶת־כַּפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 spread my hands out to Yahweh This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. Alternate translation: “I will pray to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 9 29 b787 translate-symaction אֶפְרֹ֥שׂ אֶת־כַּפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 spread my hands out to Yahweh This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will pray to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 9 30 tn94 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠אַתָּ֖ה וַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 honor Yahweh God This phrase is shifted to the beginning of the sentence to mark focus on Pharaoh and his servants because, despite Yahweh demonstrating his power, they are not yet afraid of him. If your language has a form or discourse feature that draws contrastive focus to participants, use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) EXO 9 30 srx4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה 1 Here, **face** means presence or power. Alternate translation: “of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 31 pcwg writing-background flax This and the next verse give background information so that the destruction caused by the later plagues can be understood by the reader. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -889,19 +807,19 @@ EXO 9 34 nz0e וַ⁠יֹּ֣סֶף לַ⁠חֲטֹ֑א 1 This statement is fr EXO 9 34 ooed וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ ה֥וּא וַ⁠עֲבָדָֽי⁠ו 1 Alternate translation: “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same” EXO 9 35 yxt8 figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 The heart of Pharaoh was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 35 x0kn figs-metaphor כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה 1 This is similar to [9:12](../09/12.md). In this case, what Yahweh said is figuratively spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in [9:30](../09/30.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had told Moses to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 10 intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Let my people go\n\nThis is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.
+EXO 10 intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe text does not specify, but some time seems to have passed between chapters nine and ten (see 9:31-32 and 10:5).\n- v. 1-20: Eighth plague: locusts\n - v. 16-20: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n- v. 21-29: Ninth plague: darkness
EXO 10 1 w4pw figs-metaphor כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 for I have hardened his heart and the hearts of his servants This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were **heavy.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md), but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 2 zg4c הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 various signs Alternate translation: “I mocked Egypt” -EXO 10 3 pm8p figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 10 3 pm8p figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 10 3 u3mq figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 10 3 vze4 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 10 3 cicf figs-metonymy עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵ⁠עָנֹ֖ת מִ⁠פָּנָ֑⁠י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” or “Until when will you refuse to be humble before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 4 ge67 הִנְ⁠נִ֨י 1 listen Here, **behold me** adds emphasis to what is said next. Alternate translation: “beware” -EXO 10 4 uwtp grammar-collectivenouns אַרְבֶּ֖ה 1 Here, **locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 10 5 zu5r figs-parallelism וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠רְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 hail These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. In some languages this will not have the same rhetorical effect, and you will need to use another device to emphasize the statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 10 4 uwtp grammar-collectivenouns אַרְבֶּ֖ה 1 Here, **locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 10 5 zu5r figs-parallelism וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠רְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 hail These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 10 5 rdav וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 Alternate translation: “And it will cover the land from sight” EXO 10 5 oj3i grammar-collectivenouns וְ⁠כִסָּה֙…וְ⁠אָכַ֣ל…וְ⁠אָכַל֙ 1 Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the [previous verse](../10/04.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 10 6 ir5l figs-hyperbole עַל־הָ֣⁠אֲדָמָ֔ה 1 nothing ever seen This could either mean **on the earth** (planet) or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, it is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, meaning never. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 10 6 ir5l figs-hyperbole מִ⁠יּ֗וֹם הֱיוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עַל־הָ֣⁠אֲדָמָ֔ה עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 nothing ever seen Here, **on the earth** could either mean “on the planet” or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, the entire phrase is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, with the intended meaning being “never.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 10 6 ma0o figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֥פֶן 1 [Verse 3](../10/03.md) says that Aaron came in to see the king with Moses. It is implied that he left with him as well. You may make this explicit if it would help your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 7 xn8j figs-rquestion עַד־מָתַי֙ יִהְיֶ֨ה זֶ֥ה לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֔שׁ 1 How long will this man be a menace to us? Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to show Pharaoh that he is stubbornly causing the destruction of Egypt. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We must not let this man continue to cause trouble for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 10 7 jqbh figs-gendernotations הָ֣⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **men** may be literal or it may refer to the Israelites, including the women and children. In [verse 10](../10/10.md) the king rejects the idea of letting the women and children go, and in [verse 11](../10/11.md) he specifically says that the men can go. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -924,13 +842,13 @@ EXO 10 13 syz2 grammar-collectivenouns הָ⁠אַרְבֶּֽה 1 See how you EXO 10 14 kuuu grammar-collectivenouns הָֽ⁠אַרְבֶּ֗ה…אַרְבֶּה֙ 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 15 b3h5 grammar-collectivenouns וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס…וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל 1 so that it was darkened Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 15 xszc וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס אֶת־עֵ֣ין כָּל־הָ⁠אָרֶץ֮ 1 See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md). -EXO 10 15 ill1 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל אֶת־כָּל־עֵ֣שֶׂב הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ וְ⁠אֵת֙ כָּל־פְּרִ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹתִ֖יר הַ⁠בָּרָ֑ד וְ⁠לֹא־נוֹתַ֨ר כָּל־יֶ֧רֶק בָּ⁠עֵ֛ץ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵ֥שֶׂב הַ⁠שָּׂדֶ֖ה בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 These parallel statements reinforce one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 10 15 ill1 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל אֶת־כָּל־עֵ֣שֶׂב הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ וְ⁠אֵת֙ כָּל־פְּרִ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹתִ֖יר הַ⁠בָּרָ֑ד וְ⁠לֹא־נוֹתַ֨ר כָּל־יֶ֧רֶק בָּ⁠עֵ֛ץ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵ֥שֶׂב הַ⁠שָּׂדֶ֖ה בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 These parallel statements reinforce one another. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 10 16 ty9f figs-youdual אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 Here, **you** and **your** are plural. These could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 10 17 tsve שָׂ֣א 1 Alternate translation: “take away” EXO 10 17 ttog אַ֣ךְ הַ⁠פַּ֔עַם…רַ֖ק 1 Pharaoh could either be desperate and using **just this once … only** to attempt to make his request as small as possible to increase the chances of it being granted, or he could be still too proud to admit guilt beyond this single incident (which is probably his bold statement about Yahweh being with the Israelites in [10:10](../10/10.md)). The former seems more likely given that he terms this plague “this death.” If your culture has a way of making a request seem as small as possible, you may want to use it to translate Pharaoh’s request. EXO 10 17 kd6d figs-youdual אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 this time Here, **your** is plural. This could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 10 17 doeg figs-metonymy הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 10 17 nn2b figs-explicit הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 take this death away from me The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 10 17 nn2b figs-explicit הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 take this death away from me The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 18 p9hz וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א 1 Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in [10:16](../10/16.md), so some translations will need to say that they both left. EXO 10 19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west” EXO 10 19 mdp5 וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 picked up the locusts Alternate translation: “and it moved the locust upward” @@ -945,80 +863,71 @@ EXO 10 22 vbzj translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: EXO 10 23 jmd8 figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their **brother**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 23 o572 figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ…אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** refers to any human in general. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 10 23 qstu translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 10 24 vfo4 figs-quotemarks לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ אֶת־יְהוָ֔ה רַ֛ק צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם יֻצָּ֑ג גַּֽם־טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם יֵלֵ֥ךְ עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם 1 This is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 10 24 vp7b figs-youdual לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ…צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם…טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם…עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם 1 Every instance of **you** and **your**, as well as the imperative verb forms in this verse, are plural. They refer to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 10 25 hnt5 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [10:26](10:26). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 10 25 rsr4 figs-metonymy גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals with them. **Give in our hands** means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 25 cj78 figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 25 bjy0 וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ לַ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **do** means “do the sacrifices and burnt offerings.” Alternate translation: “and we will make those sacrifices and burnt offerings to Yahweh our God” EXO 10 25 ixo7 figs-exclusive בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ…וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ…אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we** and **us** refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 26 k0pi figs-exclusive מִקְנֵ֜⁠נוּ…עִמָּ֗⁠נוּ…נִקַּ֔ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ…נֵדַ֗ע…נַּעֲבֹד֙…בֹּאֵ֖⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** each refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we, our, and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 26 ys4v figs-activepassive לֹ֤א תִשָּׁאֵר֙ פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We cannot leave behind a single animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 10 26 v9uc figs-synecdoche פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 a hoof Here the word **hoof** refers to the entire animal. Alternate translation: “a single animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 10 26 v9uc figs-synecdoche פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 a hoof Here the word **hoof** refers to the entire animal. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a single animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 10 26 uiom שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה 1 The destination is unspecified. Previous context suggests it would be at the mountain of God (see [3:1](../03/01.md), especially [3:12](../03/12.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md)), which would take three days of travel to reach (see [3:18](../03/18.md) and [5:3](../05/03.md)). EXO 10 27 n588 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 27 mv8t וְ⁠לֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלְּחָֽ⁠ם 1 he would not let them go Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go” -EXO 10 28 di6g figs-rpronouns הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 Here, the listener, Moses, fills two different roles in the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 10 28 di6g figs-rpronouns הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 Here, the listener, Moses, is both the subject and object of the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 10 28 eza9 figs-idiom הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 This is an idiom. Pharaoh is not telling Moses literally to keep looking at himself. Alternate translation: "Be careful" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 10 28 lcz2 figs-explicit תָּמֽוּת 1 Be careful about one thing Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. You may choose to make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 10 28 lcz2 figs-explicit תָּמֽוּת 1 Be careful about one thing Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 28 te45 figs-synecdoche פָּנַ֔⁠י…פָנַ֖⁠י 1 you see my face Here, **face** refers to the whole person. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 10 29 h1jf figs-idiom כֵּ֣ן דִּבַּ֑רְתָּ 1 You yourself have spoken With these words, Moses emphasizes that Pharaoh has spoken the truth. Alternate translation: “What you have said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 10 29 rg18 figs-synecdoche פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 Here, **face** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 11 intro pu3u 0 # Exodus 11 General Notes\n\n\nChapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.\n\nIt may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. [1](../11/01.md)-[2](../11/02.md)). [Verse 3](../11/03.md) is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in [v. 2](../11/02.md). In verses [4](../11/04.md)-[7](../11/07.md) Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of [v. 8](../11/08.md) Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the [end of ch. 10](../10/28.md)). [Verse 9](../11/09.md) may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in [v. 10](../11/10.md). Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n### Let my people go\n\nIn the previous chapters, Moses did not ask Pharaoh’s permission for the Hebrew people to leave. Instead, he demanded that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. In this chapter, the same wording is used to refer to Pharaoh “allowing” the Hebrew people to leave Egypt.
-EXO 11 1 hrom figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [11:2](../11/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 11 intro pu3u 0 # Exodus 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\r\n\n\nChapter 11 is a transition point in the book. The previous nine plagues (in their three sequences of three) have come to an end and the last plague, the death of the firstborn, is about to occur, along with the Passover and the Exodus itself. It is difficult to know if the events in chapter 11 all are recorded in the order in which they happened. For translation, you should follow the order of the text if it will not confuse your readers.\n\nIt may be helpful to think that after the end of chapter 10, Yahweh spoke to Moses immediately, before he actually left Pharaoh’s presence (v. [1](../11/01.md)-[2](../11/02.md)). [Verse 3](../11/03.md) is a comment suggesting that the Egyptians will be willing to do as the Israelites are told to ask them to do in [v. 2](../11/02.md). In verses [4](../11/04.md)-[7](../11/07.md) Moses gives Pharaoh and his officials a message from Yahweh that Yahweh is giving to Moses right at that moment. At the end of [v. 8](../11/08.md) Moses leaves Pharaoh’s presence (completing the interaction from the [end of ch. 10](../10/28.md)). [Verse 9](../11/09.md) may either be Yahweh telling Moses what is going to happen, or it could be part of the summary that occurs in [v. 10](../11/10.md). Verse 10 summarizes what has happened in chs. 5-10 (especially the plagues in chs. 7-10) in preparation for the great last plague.\n
+EXO 11 1 hrom figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [11:2](../11/02.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 1 eqeb grammar-connect-time-sequential כְּ⁠שַׁ֨לְּח֔⁠וֹ…יְגָרֵ֥שׁ 1 These verbs (**lets go** and **drive away**) are meant to immediately follow one another. When you translate, make sure they are almost simultaneous in time; the letting go happens and then immediately the driving away happens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 11 1 iocd כָּלָ֕ה גָּרֵ֛שׁ יְגָרֵ֥שׁ 1 The wording here is very forceful. Use strong words, forms, or phrasing when you are translating. EXO 11 1 i87h figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 he will let you go from here Each occurrence of the word **you** in this verse is plural and refers to Moses and the rest of the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 11 2 x83s figs-aside דַּבֶּר־נָ֖א בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם וְ⁠יִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ וְ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔⁠הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 In this verse the author interjects a comment about the situation. Some translations choose to put the verse in parenthesis to indicate this. You may mark it in a way that is natural to your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 11 2 t14c נָ֖א 1 Here, **now** conveys urgency, indicating that Moses should speak soon, without delaying for other things. If you have a way of giving a command that shows that it is important for someone to do it quickly, it would be better to translate in that way than in a way that means “now” in a time sense (versus earlier or later). EXO 11 2 nlsk בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “so the people hear you” or “when all the people are listening” EXO 11 2 jl6w כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 These could be any sort of thing made from silver or gold (for instance: utensils, cups, pitchers, plates, candleholders), not just jewelry. EXO 11 2 ddej וְ⁠יִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ וְ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔⁠הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 [Exodus 3:22](../03/22.md) contains similar instructions; see how you translated there. -EXO 11 2 jyqa figs-quotemarks זָהָֽב 1 At the end of this verse, the direct quote of Yahweh that started in the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 11 3 x83s figs-aside וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם גַּ֣ם׀ הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ מֹשֶׁ֗ה גָּד֤וֹל מְאֹד֙ בְּ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 In this verse the author interjects a comment about the situation. Some translations choose to put the verse in parenthesis to indicate this. You may mark it in a way that is natural to your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 11 3 hng9 figs-idiom חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. **Favor** means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them. (Because the Egyptians have suffered under God's judgment, the Egyptians want so badly to see them leave). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 3 orq6 figs-idiom בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י עַבְדֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the servants of Pharaoh and in the eyes of the people** is an idiom for their feelings or opinions. If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated a similar idiom in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 3 s5zy וַ⁠יִּתֵּ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 [Exodus 3:21](../03/21.md) contains a related phrase; see how you translated it there. -EXO 11 4 sewb figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [11:8](../11/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 4 kpb5 כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 midnight This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 11 4 vyvr figs-quotemarks כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 After this phrase, a second-level direct quote begins which continues until the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 5 hv8k בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר 1 All the firstborn … the firstborn of Pharaoh … the firstborn of the slave girl … the firstborn of the cattle The “firstborn” always refers to the oldest male offspring. -EXO 11 5 k42h figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 who sits on his throne This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (**Pharaoh, who sits on his throne**) and the lowest (**the slave girl who is behind the mill**). Then the animals (**beasts**) are added making it a three-item list of parts of society and even economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 11 5 k42h figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 who sits on his throne This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (**Pharaoh, who sits on his throne**) and the lowest (**the slave girl who is behind the mill**). Then the animals (**beasts**) are added making it a three-item list of parts of society and even the economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 11 5 hr1x אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם 1 who is behind the handmill grinding it Alternate translation: “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain” -EXO 11 6 hui7 figs-merism אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְ⁠כָמֹ֖⁠הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף 1 This is a merism that uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 11 6 hui7 figs-merism אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְ⁠כָמֹ֖⁠הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף 1 This phrase uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 11 7 b60a figs-idiom לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ…לְשֹׁנ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means to make an unfriendly noise. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 7 t61i figs-youdual תֵּֽדְע֔וּ⁠ן 1 Here, **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 11 7 fl78 אֲשֶׁר֙ יַפְלֶ֣ה יְהוָ֔ה בֵּ֥ין מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠בֵ֥ין יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 9:4](../09/04.md). -EXO 11 7 wicm figs-quotemarks יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 After this phrase, the second-level direct quote ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 11 8 hoft translate-symaction וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י 1 This does not mean to bow for worshiping. **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 11 8 hoft translate-symaction וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י 1 This does not mean to bow for worshiping. **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 11 8 l678 figs-explicit וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּֽחֲוּוּ־לִ֣⁠י 1 **They will bow to** Moses to beg him to leave. They will do this to show how desperate they will be for Moses and the Israelites to go. If this action would not mean the same thing in your culture, you may need to make the reason they are bowing explicit. Alternate translation: “and they will bow down to me to beg” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 11 8 njx8 figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 Here, the people are figuratively pictured as below Moses, which means they are his followers. The reference to **feet** also can mean they go the same place he goes, again, meaning “follower.” If your language uses a similar image to mean follower, you can translate the image; if not, you may use another image from your culture or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “and all the people who are following you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 11 8 ria5 figs-explicit וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן אֵצֵ֑א 1 After that I will go out This means that Moses and the Israelites will leave Egypt. Alternate translation: “After that I will leave here” or “After that I will go out from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 11 8 awcj figs-quotemarks אֵצֵ֑א 1 After this phrase, the direct quote ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 11 8 ria5 figs-explicit וְ⁠אַחֲרֵי־כֵ֖ן אֵצֵ֑א 1 After that I will go out This means that Moses and the Israelites will leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “After that I will leave here” or “After that I will go out from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 11 8 milu figs-idiom בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף 1 This is an idiom meaning that Moses is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “enraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 11 9 xk4l figs-quotemarks לֹא־יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם פַּרְעֹ֑ה לְמַ֛עַן רְב֥וֹת מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 10 h5g7 writing-endofstory וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּפְתִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְ⁠לֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9 - see the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) EXO 11 10 um4u figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 12 intro fd2f 0 # Exodus 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n1. Instruction v. 1-28\n * v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions\n * v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover\n * v. 12-13: description of the plague\n * v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover\n * v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites\n2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus\n3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover\n4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unleavened bread\n\nThe concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])\n\n### Ethnic segregation\n\nThe Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues:\n\n### Passover\n\n\n### Pronoun usage\n\nIn the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.\n\n\n### You plural\n\nIn this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO 12 2 z785 figs-quotemarks הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים 1 For you, this month will be the start of months, the first month of the year to you The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+EXO 12 2 z785 figs-quotemarks הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים 1 For you, this month will be the start of months, the first month of the year to you The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 2 gtgb figs-parallelism הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the month in which the events of this chapter take place will be the beginning of their calendar year. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 12 2 uy4w translate-hebrewmonths רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 the first month of the year The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 12 2 uy4w translate-hebrewmonths רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 the first month of the year The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 12 3 lv6s figs-youdual דַּבְּר֗וּ 1 The command here is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 12 3 nu6r figs-quotemarks לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר בֶּ⁠עָשֹׂ֖ר 1 After **saying**, a second level direct quotation begins which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. **Saying** is used to mark the beginning of a quote. Many times it can be omitted in translation if the target language does not use a similar structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 3 jjw0 וְ⁠יִקְח֣וּ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אִ֛ישׁ שֶׂ֥ה לְ⁠בֵית־אָבֹ֖ת שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 This seems to be indicating that if multiple families live in one house, the man who is the leader of the family group that lives there should take one lamb for that whole household. Alternate translation: “the father of each household must take a lamb for his household, one per household” EXO 12 3 d1f5 שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 Alternate translation: “one lamb per house” EXO 12 3 qzct שֶׂ֥ה…שֶׂ֥ה 1 The word **lamb** literally means “of the flock,” and it could also be translated as a sheep or a goat. Here, the ULT uses **lamb** (a young sheep), because [verse 5](../12/05.md) specifies that it must be one year old. “Kid” (a young goat) would be equally valid as verse 5 also says that it could be either a sheep or a goat. You may translate it as either sheep or goat, whichever would be most familiar. -EXO 12 4 xzn3 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַ⁠בַּיִת֮ מִ⁠הְיֹ֣ת מִ⁠שֶּׂה֒ 1 If the household is too small for a lamb This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 12 4 xzn3 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַ⁠בַּיִת֮ מִ⁠הְיֹ֣ת מִ⁠שֶּׂה֒ 1 If the household is too small for a lamb This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 4 o258 וּ⁠שְׁכֵנ֛⁠וֹ הַ⁠קָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠מִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת 1 The phrase **by the number of people** helps to clarify which sort of **neighbor near to his house** the Israelite should choose. They should count their own household and another household and try to have a group that is the right number to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “and his neighbor who lives near him and whose family is the right size to share a lamb with” -EXO 12 4 fu2g figs-gendernotations אִ֚ישׁ 1 the man and his next door neighbor This refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 12 4 fu2g figs-gendernotations אִ֚ישׁ 1 the man and his next door neighbor Here **man** refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 12 6 lz76 בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 twilight This refers to the time of evening after the sun has set but while there is still some light. EXO 12 7 cjt7 עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים 1 on the two side doorposts and on the tops of the doorframes of the houses Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” or “on the top and sides of the frame around the door into the house” EXO 12 8 uxn6 מְרֹרִ֖ים 1 bitter herbs These are edible but strong-tasting leaves, seeds, and other parts of plants. EXO 12 9 ny3a אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ נָ֔א 1 Do not eat it raw Alternate translation: “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked” EXO 12 11 ks7d חֲגֻרִ֔ים 1 belt Here, **belts** are strips of leather or fabric for tying around the waist. EXO 12 11 nzw2 וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠חִפָּז֔וֹן 1 eat it hurriedly Alternate translation: “And you must eat it quickly” -EXO 12 11 r789 figs-explicit פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It is Yahweh’s Passover Here the word **It** refers to eating the animal on the tenth day of the month. Alternate translation: “This observance is Yahweh’s Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 12 12 sa5n figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 I will bring punishment on all the gods of Egypt This can be stated with a verbal form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 12 13 tywz figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠מַשְׁחִ֔ית 1 This can be stated with a verbal form, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 12 11 r789 figs-explicit פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It is Yahweh’s Passover **It** refers to eating the animal on the tenth day of the month. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This observance is Yahweh’s Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 12 12 sa5n figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 I will bring punishment on all the gods of Egypt If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 12 13 tywz figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠מַשְׁחִ֔ית 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 12 13 bnoe figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֨ה בָ⁠כֶ֥ם נֶ֨גֶף֙ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I will not put the plague on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 13 ox3l figs-metonymy בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 12 14 fa9q וְ⁠הָיָה֩ הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 Verses 14-[20](../12/20.md) are instructions for the Israelites’ future celebration of the Passover. If your language makes a distinction between near and far future events or between near and general commands, you may need to make clear that these verses primarily have a later application. @@ -1026,43 +935,41 @@ EXO 12 14 usns translate-hebrewmonths הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 H EXO 12 15 xsb9 אַ֚ךְ 1 Alternate translation: “Surely” or “Indeed” EXO 12 15 i9n3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 that person must be cut off from Israel The metaphor **cut off** could mean: (1) the person must leave. Alternate translation: “he must be sent away” (2) the person is no longer an Israelite. Alternate translation: “he will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” (3) the person must die. Alternate translation: “he must be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 12 15 enw3 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 As noted in the previous note, the metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. By whom that person will be cut off is not specified; it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 15 eqzu grammar-collectivenouns מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun referring to the nation or people group. Alternate translation: “from the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 12 15 eqzu grammar-collectivenouns מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun referring to the nation or people group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 12 16 bzj6 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֤וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 an assembly that is set apart to me If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And on the first day and on the seventh day, you shall have an assembly of holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 16 o3oh translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֤וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙…וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 **First** and **seventh** are ordinal numbers. Alternate translation: “And on day one of the month … and on day seven of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 12 16 cb1r figs-abstractnouns מִקְרָא־קֹ֔דֶשׁ…מִקְרָא־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 an assembly that is set apart to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy assembly … a holy assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 12 16 o3oh translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֤וֹם הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙…וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And on day one of the month … and on day seven of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 12 16 l7pj figs-activepassive כָּל־מְלָאכָה֙ לֹא־יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה בָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 No work will be done on these days If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will do no work on these days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 16 qr65 figs-activepassive ה֥וּא לְ⁠בַדּ֖⁠וֹ יֵעָשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 That must be the only work that may be done by you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which must be the only work that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 17 r3qj translate-unknown צִבְאוֹתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 armed group by armed group The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 12 18 v7g9 translate-ordinal בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 **First**, **fourteenth**, and **twenty-first** are ordinal numbers. Alternate translation: “In month one, on day fourteen … until day twenty-one of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 12 18 l57q translate-ordinal בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 12 18 m475 translate-hebrewmonths בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 the fourteenth day in the first month This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fourteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -EXO 12 18 uss3 translate-hebrewmonths י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 the twenty-first day of the month This is near the middle of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 12 18 v7g9 translate-ordinal בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In month one, on day fourteen … until day twenty-one of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 12 18 l57q translate-ordinal בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙…עַ֠ד י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 12 18 m475 translate-hebrewmonths בָּ⁠רִאשֹׁ֡ן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֤וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 the fourteenth day in the first month This is the first month of the Hebrew calendar. The fourteenth day is near the beginning of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 12 18 uss3 translate-hebrewmonths י֣וֹם הָ⁠אֶחָ֧ד וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 the twenty-first day of the month This is near the middle of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 12 19 aej1 figs-activepassive שְׂאֹ֕ר לֹ֥א יִמָּצֵ֖א בְּ⁠בָתֵּי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 no yeast must be found in your houses This means there should not be any yeast in their houses. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Note that the UST more accurately conveys the meaning here, as the alternate translation in this note could be understood to mean that you must simply hide the yeast very well. Alternate translation: “Yahweh must not find any yeast in your houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 19 vy72 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 must be cut off from the community of Israel See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 12 19 cwvs figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מֵ⁠עֲדַ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 12 20 dj1c figs-quotemarks מַצּֽוֹת 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s commands to Moses and Aaron for the Israelites ends (two levels). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing second-level and first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 21 y9qt writing-newevent 0 summoned A new scene begins at this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 12 21 exy0 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֑ם 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:27](../12/27.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EXO 12 22 qwv1 translate-unknown אֲגֻדַּ֣ת אֵז֗וֹב 1 hyssop **Hyssop** is a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids by dipping the leaves in the liquid and then shaking them or brushing them over the target. If this plant is unknown, you can use a descriptor phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 12 22 c1cf אֶל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁקוֹף֙ וְ⁠אֶל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֔ת 1 the top of the doorframe and the two doorposts Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). EXO 12 22 vdlj figs-gendernotations לֹ֥א…אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 12 23 uu61 figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פָסַ֤ח יְהוָה֙ עַל־הַ⁠פֶּ֔תַח 1 pass over your door Here the word **door** implies the entire house. This means that God will spare the Israelites in houses with blood on the door frames. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh will pass over the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 12 23 uu61 figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פָסַ֤ח יְהוָה֙ עַל־הַ⁠פֶּ֔תַח 1 pass over your door Here the word **door** implies the entire house. This means that God will spare the Israelites in houses with blood on the door frames. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh will pass over the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 12 23 onpu עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֔וֹף וְ⁠עַ֖ל שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֑ת 1 Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). EXO 12 24 v7z5 הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 this event These words refer to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh. -EXO 12 24 bzm0 figs-youcrowd לְ⁠ךָ֥ וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **you** and **your** are singular but they refer to the whole nation. You may need to continue to use a plural form of “you,” if your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +EXO 12 24 bzm0 figs-youcrowd לְ⁠ךָ֥ וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **you** and **your** are singular but they refer to the whole nation. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 24 ch73 figs-gendernotations וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **sons** includes everyone. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 12 25 l8ls הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּֽאת 1 this act of worship Here, **this service** refers to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh. EXO 12 26 hbh4 figs-gendernotations בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 Here, **your sons** refers to all children, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 12 26 odj0 figs-quotesinquotes אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם…מָ֛ה הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 After **you**, a second-level quotation begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “to you what this ritual means to you,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 12 27 qft1 figs-quotemarks זֶֽבַח־פֶּ֨סַח ה֜וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר פָּ֠סַח עַל־בָּתֵּ֤י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠נָגְפּ֥⁠וֹ אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 12 27 t779 figs-explicit וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 He set our households free This means that Yahweh spared the Israelites’ firstborn sons. Alternate translation: “He did not kill the firstborn sons in our houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 12 27 t779 figs-explicit וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 He set our households free This means that Yahweh spared the Israelites’ firstborn sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “He did not kill the firstborn sons in our houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 28 r5cj כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses and Aaron Alternate translation: “everything that Yahweh told Moses and Aaron to do” EXO 12 29 rvg9 0 The next few verses are the climax of this part of Exodus. A number of literary features mark it out. First, it is specially introduced with **and so it happened,** which is used to mark major breaks in the narrative. Second, it uses repetition: **firstborn** is repeated four times in verse 29 so that the reader cannot possibly miss what is happening. **Night** is repeated in verse 29, 30, and 31. **Got up/get up** is repeated in verse 30 and 31. In verses 31 and 32 “also” occurs five times (it is translated as “both” once in the ULT). Third, the places of both **Pharaoh** and **the captive** are elaborated on to slow the pace and create a vivid mental image for the reader. In verse 30 there is the listing of sorts of people who got up; note the use of the double negative for emphasis. Your translation should attempt to use the same or similar literary features of your own language that slow down the pace, create vivid imagery, and emphasize that this is a climax point. -EXO 12 29 zm1l figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 at midnight This is a merism used to indicate that there was no person or household excluded from Yahweh’s judgment. It both speaks of extreme parts of society and then makes this into a list by including the animals. Alternate translation: “the firstborn of Pharaoh who sits on the throne and the firstborn of the captive who was in the house of the pit and the firstborn of everyone in between was struck; even all the firstborn of the beasts were struck” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 12 29 zm1l figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 at midnight This phrase indicates that there was no person or household excluded from Yahweh’s judgment. It both speaks of extreme parts of society and then makes this into a list by including the animals. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the firstborn of Pharaoh who sits on the throne and the firstborn of the captive who was in the house of the pit and the firstborn of everyone in between was struck; even all the firstborn of the beasts were struck” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 12 29 uj6u בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר 1 all the firstborn in the land of Egypt…all the firstborn of cattle In these usages, **firstborn** always refers to the oldest male offspring. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 11:5](../11/05.md). EXO 12 29 g9z1 עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר 1 the firstborn of the person in prison Alternate translation: “to the firstborn of people in the house of the pit” This refers to prisoners in general and not to a specific person in prison. -EXO 12 30 gt4w figs-doublenegatives כִּֽי־אֵ֣ין בַּ֔יִת אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֵֽין־שָׁ֖ם מֵֽת׃ 1 for there was not a house where there was not someone dead This double negative emphasizes the positive. Alternate translation: “because someone was dead in every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 12 30 gt4w figs-doublenegatives כִּֽי־אֵ֣ין בַּ֔יִת אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֵֽין־שָׁ֖ם מֵֽת׃ 1 for there was not a house where there was not someone dead If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “because someone was dead in every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 12 31 j8k5 figs-youdual אַתֶּ֖ם…כְּ⁠דַבֶּרְ⁠כֶֽם 1 Here, Pharaoh speaking is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 12 33 j5u4 figs-explicit כֻּלָּ֥⁠נוּ מֵתִֽים 1 We will all die The Egyptians were afraid that they would die if the Israelites did not leave Egypt. Alternate translation: “We will all die if you do not leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 12 33 j5u4 figs-explicit כֻּלָּ֥⁠נוּ מֵתִֽים 1 We will all die The Egyptians were afraid that they would die if the Israelites did not leave Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We will all die if you do not leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 34 diw8 figs-activepassive מִשְׁאֲרֹתָ֛⁠ם צְרֻרֹ֥ת בְּ⁠שִׂמְלֹתָ֖⁠ם עַל־שִׁכְמָֽ⁠ם 1 Their kneading bowls were already tied up in their clothes and on their shoulders If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They tied up their bread-making bowls in their clothes and placed them on their shoulders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 36 nvmo figs-idiom אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֛ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י מִצְרַ֖יִם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. **Favor** means that those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians saw the Israelites leaving Egypt, they gladly helped them (because they wanted them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 12 37 n1ha translate-names מֵ⁠רַעְמְסֵ֖ס 1 Rameses **Rameses** was a major Egyptian city where grain was stored. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1072,39 +979,37 @@ EXO 12 40 qsi5 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ EXO 12 41 d8yh translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת 1 430 years Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 12 41 xlf4 translate-unknown צִבְא֥וֹת 1 Yahweh’s armed groups The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 12 42 w6mj לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְ⁠כָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 all the Israelites throughout their people’s generations Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh” -EXO 12 43 zwac figs-quotemarks וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:49](../12/49.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 44 n9wn וְ⁠כָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ 1 every Israelite’s slave Alternate translation: “But any slave of an Israelite” EXO 12 44 qabi grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ אָ֖ז 1 This is a hypothetical situation. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 12 44 jqs8 figs-yousingular וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה 1 Here **you** is singular. It refers to a specific man and his slave. It might make more sense to use the third person here. Alternate translation: “if he circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 12 46 j242 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠בַ֤יִת אֶחָד֙ יֵאָכֵ֔ל 1 The food must be eaten in one house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat it in one house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 46 iovj figs-youcrowd לֹא־תוֹצִ֧יא 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd, so you may need to translate it using a plural form if your languages uses one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +EXO 12 46 iovj figs-youcrowd לֹא־תוֹצִ֧יא 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 48 j7ob grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וְ⁠כִֽי־יָג֨וּר אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ גֵּ֗ר וְ⁠עָ֣שָׂה פֶסַח֮ לַ⁠יהוָה֒ 1 This is a two-part hypothetical situation. It describes the circumstance and desire of the sojourner; the next portion says what he must do. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 12 48 va2p figs-youcrowd אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd, so you may need to translate it using a plural form if your languages uses one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +EXO 12 48 va2p figs-youcrowd אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 48 h7k9 figs-activepassive הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר 1 all his male relatives must be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone must circumcise all males in his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 48 n3fz grammar-connect-logic-goal הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר וְ⁠אָז֙ יִקְרַ֣ב לַ⁠עֲשֹׂת֔⁠וֹ 1 The sojourner will be circumcised in order to **draw near to keep** the Passover. Some languages may need to place the purpose clause first. Alternate translation: “in order draw near to keep it all his males must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 12 48 hi4z figs-metonymy כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 the people who were born in the land Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 12 48 f9ti figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ 1 no uncircumcised person may eat This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 12 48 f9ti figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ 1 no uncircumcised person may eat If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 12 51 e3z3 וַ⁠יְהִ֕י בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 It came about This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. EXO 12 51 tyj3 translate-unknown צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their armed groups The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 13 intro g9qi 0 # Exodus 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Instruction v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from [12:14-20](../12/14.md) and [24-27](../12/24.md), with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations
2. Narrative v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus

## Special concepts in this chapter

* There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

* There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.
* Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.
* It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites. -EXO 13 2 de3u figs-quotemarks קַדֶּשׁ־לִ֨⁠י כָל־בְּכ֜וֹר פֶּ֤טֶר כָּל־רֶ֨חֶם֙ בִּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֑ה לִ֖⁠י הֽוּא 1 Set apart to me…every firstborn male This entire verse is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 13 3 e0n1 figs-quotemarks אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֗ם 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 16](../13/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 13 intro g9qi 0 # Exodus 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Instruction \n - v. 1-2: First mention of setting apart the firstborn \n - v. 3-10: Reiteration of the Passover instructions from [12:14-20](../12/14.md) and [24-27](../12/24.md), with a focus on telling to Yahweh’s deeds to the future generations of Israelites \n - v. 11-13: More details on setting apart the firstborn \n - v. 14-16: Reiteration of purpose: telling to future generations\n2. Narrative \n - v. 17-22: Some details of the exodus\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n* There are several concepts that will be important to understand and translate with care (some have already been encountered in Exodus). They are: set apart, sign, symbol, redemption, and sacrifice.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n* There are a number of names of people groups and places in this chapter. However, many have been translated in earlier passages.\n* Transporting the bones of Joseph may be an unknown concept in some places.\n* It may take some time to decide on a good translation for the pillars of fire and cloud that lead the Israelites.
+EXO 13 2 de3u figs-quotemarks קַדֶּשׁ־לִ֨⁠י כָל־בְּכ֜וֹר פֶּ֤טֶר כָּל־רֶ֨חֶם֙ בִּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֑ה לִ֖⁠י הֽוּא 1 Set apart to me…every firstborn male This entire verse is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 13 3 en1s figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית עֲבָדִ֔ים 1 the house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 3 yjy5 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Yahweh’s strong hand Here, **hand** refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 3 c6ee figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל חָמֵֽץ 1 No bread with yeast may be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 13 4 y1f3 translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִֽיב 1 the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 13 4 y1f3 translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִֽיב 1 the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 13 5 x89s וְ⁠הָיָ֣ה כִֽי־יְבִֽיאֲ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֡ה אֶל־אֶ֣רֶץ…וְ⁠עָבַדְתָּ֛ אֶת־הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 you must observe this act of worship When the Israelites live in Canaan, they must celebrate the Passover on this day each year. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:25](../12/25.md). EXO 13 5 u37l figs-metonymy לַ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 5 ueej אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 The same description occurs in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated it there and in the several notes for it. EXO 13 6 vwy9 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 For seven days Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 13 6 mde6 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 13 6 mde6 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 13 7 n41m figs-activepassive מַצּוֹת֙ יֵֽאָכֵ֔ל 1 Bread without yeast must be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must eat unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 13 7 zm8p translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 13 7 le33 figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֨ה לְ⁠ךָ֜ חָמֵ֗ץ 1 no bread with yeast may be seen among you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you may not have any bread with yeast among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 13 7 c9kr figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֛ שְׂאֹ֖ר 1 No yeast may be seen with you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You may not have any yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 13 7 dmv1 בְּ⁠כָל־גְּבֻלֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 within any of your borders Alternate translation: “inside any of the borders of your land” EXO 13 8 qum9 figs-quotesinquotes בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר בַּ⁠עֲב֣וּר זֶ֗ה עָשָׂ֤ה יְהוָה֙ לִ֔⁠י בְּ⁠צֵאתִ֖⁠י מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 On that day you are to say to your children, ‘This is because of what Yahweh did for me when I came out of Egypt.’ The quotation can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “on that day that this is because of what Yahweh did for you when you came out of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 13 9 p21h figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This will be a reminder for you on your hand, and a reminder on your forehead These are two different types of physical reminders so people will not forget something important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 13 9 p21h figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This will be a reminder for you on your hand, and a reminder on your forehead This phrase compares the Festival of Unleavened bread to two different types of physical reminders that help people not forget something important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 13 9 s7zg figs-metaphor לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 a reminder for you on your hand Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie around their hands to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like something you tie around your hand as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 9 mru4 figs-metaphor וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 a reminder on your forehead Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie on their foreheads to remind them of what Yahweh had done. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and like something you tie around your head as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 9 b6ny figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ 1 so the law of Yahweh may be in your mouth Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1113,20 +1018,19 @@ EXO 13 10 rxel figs-merism מִ⁠יָּמִ֖ים יָמִֽימָ⁠ה 1 Alte EXO 13 11 e886 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לַֽ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 11 iqh5 וּ⁠נְתָנָ֖⁠הּ לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 when he gives the land to you Alternate translation: “when he gives the land of the Canaanites to you” EXO 13 12 mqgs וְ⁠הַעֲבַרְתָּ֥ 1 This is a deliberate word-play with [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) and [Exodus 12:23](../12/23.md) because these memorial sacrifices are to be reminders of what happened at the first Passover. It would be good to make a similar word-play in your translation, if possible, but following the meaning as in the UST is fine. -EXO 13 13 lwv5 figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Every firstborn of a donkey You may need to make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 13 13 lwv5 figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Every firstborn of a donkey If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 13 13 ew26 לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey” EXO 13 14 s8cm figs-quotesinquotes כִּֽי־יִשְׁאָלְ⁠ךָ֥ בִנְ⁠ךָ֛ מָחָ֖ר לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר מַה־זֹּ֑את וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו 1 When your son asks you later, ‘What does this mean?’ then you are to tell him The first quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “when your son asks you later what this means, then you are to tell him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 13 14 qr7q figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֗ד 1 strong hand Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “With his powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 14 rcz7 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 the house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 15 fgvg figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הִקְשָׁ֣ה פַרְעֹה֮ לְ⁠שַׁלְּחֵ⁠נוּ֒ 1 If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This means he was stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he were **hard.** Alternate translation: “that when Pharaoh resisted letting us go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 13 15 atxz figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֥ר אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּכ֣וֹר בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 This is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent of the plague. Alternate translation: “whether he was a person or an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 13 15 atxz figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֥ר אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּכ֣וֹר בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 This is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent of the plague, nothing was exempt. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whether he was a person or an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 13 16 bse4 figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָ֤ה לְ⁠אוֹת֙ עַל־יָ֣דְ⁠כָ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠טוֹטָפֹ֖ת בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 become a reminder on your hands, and a reminder on your forehead This expresses two ways to remember the importance of the Passover event. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 13:9](../13/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 13 16 xfag figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “with his powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 17 uxjh writing-background 0 Verses 17-19 provide background information about the Israelites process of leaving Egypt. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 13 17 cv8n writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 This marks the transition from instruction to narrative. You should mark the resumption of the narrative in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 13 17 pum6 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠לֹא־נָחָ֣⁠ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא 1 The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -EXO 13 17 upop grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּֽן־יִנָּחֵ֥ם הָ⁠עָ֛ם בִּ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם מִלְחָמָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁ֥בוּ מִצְרָֽיְמָ⁠ה 1 In some languages you may need to put the reason before the hypothetical result. Alternate translation: “When they see war, they may repent and return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 13 17 fjvz יִנָּחֵ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “turn back” +EXO 13 17 pum6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠לֹא־נָחָ֣⁠ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא 1 The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 13 17 upop figs-hypo פֶּֽן־יִנָּחֵ֥ם הָ⁠עָ֛ם בִּ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם מִלְחָמָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁ֥בוּ מִצְרָֽיְמָ⁠ה 1 In some languages you may need to put the reason before the hypothetical result. Alternate translation: “When they see war, they may repent and return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) EXO 13 18 c4tw וַ⁠חֲמֻשִׁ֛ים 1 The meaning of this term (**by fives**) is uncertain. Many English translations opt for something like “prepared for battle,” because this seems to be the meaning in Numbers 32:17 and the related verses in Joshua 1:14 and 4:12. Because of what the previous verse said about war, it may mean that they went out in formation—like an army would march—but perhaps not armed. Alternate translation: “And … in formation like an army” EXO 13 19 cxyk וַ⁠יִּקַּ֥ח מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־עַצְמ֥וֹת יוֹסֵ֖ף עִמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 See Joshua 24:32 regarding the burial of Joseph’s bones. EXO 13 19 dnlp פָּקֹ֨ד יִפְקֹ֤ד אֱלֹהִים֙ אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הַעֲלִיתֶ֧ם אֶת־עַצְמֹתַ֛⁠י מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה אִתְּ⁠כֶֽם 1 This is an almost exact quote of what Joseph said in Genesis 50:25; reference your translation there when translating this. @@ -1138,56 +1042,53 @@ EXO 13 21 nr02 לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: EXO 13 21 i7yl grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֖שׁ לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם לָ⁠לֶ֖כֶת יוֹמָ֥ם וָ⁠לָֽיְלָה 1 They could travel either by day or night because God provided light at night. You could reorder the cause and effect if that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fire. They could go by day or by night because he was light to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n\n\n EXO 13 22 iiuj עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְ⁠עַמּ֥וּד הָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה 1 See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). EXO 13 22 qxks figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Here, **from the face of the people** means “from in front of the people” where they could see it. Alternate translation: “from where they could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 14 intro jq4u 0 # Exodus 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter contains an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”\nThroughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. The context shows that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text, if just using “sea” is confusing.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s hard heart\n\nPharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.\n\n### Pharaoh’s chariots\n\nThese chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
-EXO 14 2 b5qq figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֮ 1 This verse begins a direct quote which continues into [verse 4](../13/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 14 intro jq4u 0 # Exodus 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis whole chapter is the record of an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”\nThroughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. Exodus 13:18 and 15:22 show that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text if just using “sea” is confusing.\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pharaoh’s chariots\n\nThese chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n
+EXO 14 2 b5qq figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֮ 1 This verse begins a direct quote which continues into [verse 4](../13/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 2 mb4e translate-names פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת…מִגְדֹּ֖ל…בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 Pi Hahiroth…Migdol…Baal Zephon These are locations on Egypt’s eastern border. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 14 2 ue2o figs-quotations בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֗בוּ וְ⁠יַחֲנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת בֵּ֥ין מִגְדֹּ֖ל וּ⁠בֵ֣ין הַ⁠יָּ֑ם לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 The portion after **that** could be translated as a direct quotation. That would make a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the sons of Israel, ‘Turn and camp before the face of Pi Hahiroth, between Migdol and the sea, before the face of Baal Zephon.’ ”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 14 2 c9r8 figs-youdual תַחֲנ֖וּ 1 You are to camp Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 14 3 c81b figs-quotations וְ⁠אָמַ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ לִ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל נְבֻכִ֥ים הֵ֖ם בָּ⁠אָ֑רֶץ סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 Pharaoh will say about the Israelites, ‘They are wandering in the land. The wilderness has closed in on them.’ This can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh will say that the Israelites are confused in the land, and the wilderness has closed in on them”\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 14 3 c81b figs-quotations וְ⁠אָמַ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ לִ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל נְבֻכִ֥ים הֵ֖ם בָּ⁠אָ֑רֶץ סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 Pharaoh will say about the Israelites, ‘They are wandering in the land. The wilderness has closed in on them.’ If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh will say that the Israelites are confused in the land, and the wilderness has closed in on them”\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 14 3 tz6j figs-personification סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 The wilderness has closed in on them Pharaoh speaks of **the wilderness** as a person who has trapped the Israelites. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wilderness is closing in on them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 14 4 dv62 figs-metaphor וְ⁠חִזַּקְתִּ֣י אֶת־לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֮ 1 I will harden Pharaoh’s heart This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were **strong.** If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 4 tw2m וְ⁠רָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֒ 1 he will pursue them Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites” EXO 14 4 d5x1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 I will get honor If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 4 a7m2 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 14 4 dms1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן 1 So the Israelites camped as they were instructed This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 14 4 a7m2 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 4 dms1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן 1 So the Israelites camped as they were instructed If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what **they did** explicitly. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 14 5 t4cn figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֻּגַּד֙ לְ⁠מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 When the king of Egypt was told If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then someone told the king of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 5 it5s בָרַ֖ח 1 had fled Alternate translation: “had run away” EXO 14 5 k67b figs-metonymy וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes toward the Israelites. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 5 go8u figs-activepassive וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 5 wljw אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “against the Israelites” EXO 14 5 v236 figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 What have we done? We have released Israel from serving us. They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 14 5 kw4x figs-quotemarks מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 5 dnj3 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 7 ry11 translate-numbers שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת 1 He took six hundred chosen chariots Alternate translation: “six hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 14 7 g2d9 וְ⁠שָׁלִשִׁ֖ם 1 The precise meaning of this term is not known. Alternate translations: “and officers” or “and shield-bearers” or “and three men” EXO 14 8 a1r1 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֣ק יְהֹוָ֗ה אֶת־לֵ֤ב פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Yahweh hardened the heart of Pharaoh This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his **heart** were "strong." If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “And Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 8 doa5 בְּ⁠יָ֥ד רָמָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “boldly” or “defiantly” EXO 14 9 x9x0 כָּל־סוּס֙ רֶ֣כֶב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠פָרָשָׁ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠חֵיל֑⁠וֹ 1 It is unclear exactly what the groupings are here. **Horses of the chariots** (probably meaning “horse-drawn chariots”) and **horsemen** could be two groups or two references to the same group. **Army** could mean another group, perhaps on foot (see [15:19](../15/19.md)), or it could be a summary grouping. Furthermore, most translations render **horses of the chariots** as “horses and chariots,” suggesting four total groups (possibly because of [v. 23](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “all the horse-drawn chariots of Pharaoh and his horsemen and his foot soldiers” -EXO 14 9 q0jo writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 14 9 q0jo writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 14 9 sb7x translate-names פִּי֙ הַֽחִירֹ֔ת…בַּ֥עַל צְפֹֽן 1 Pi Hahiroth…Baal Zephon These are places on Egypt’s eastern border. See how you translated them in [Exodus 14:2](../14/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 14 10 s1xa figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב 1 When Pharaoh came close Here, **Pharaoh** represents the entire Egyptian army. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 14 10 s1xa figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב 1 When Pharaoh came close Here, **Pharaoh** represents the entire Egyptian army. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 14 10 vyp9 וַ⁠יִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back” EXO 14 10 qcy1 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה 1 they were terrified Here, **behold** is used to draw attention to alarming information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very alarming. EXO 14 11 vzw5 figs-rquestion הַֽ⁠מִ⁠בְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖⁠נוּ לָ⁠מ֣וּת בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר 1 Is it because there were no graves in Egypt, that you have taken us away to die in the wilderness? The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 11 x4n2 figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔⁠נוּ לְ⁠הוֹצִיאָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 Why have you treated us like this, bringing us out of Egypt? The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have endangered us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 12 itb2 figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹא־זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר אֲשֶׁר֩ דִּבַּ֨רְנוּ אֵלֶ֤י⁠ךָ בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ 1 Is this not what we told you in Egypt? The Israelites ask this question to emphasize that this is what they had told Moses. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is exactly what we told you while we were in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 14 12 ix25 figs-quotations בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר חֲדַ֥ל מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ וְ⁠נַֽעַבְדָ֣ה אֶת־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 We said to you, ‘Leave us alone, so we can work for the Egyptians.’ The portion following **saying** can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “in Egypt? We told you to leave us alone so we could serve the Egyptians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 14 13 phy1 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠רְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “and see what Yahweh will do for you today, he will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 14 13 l615 figs-quotemarks אֶל־הָ⁠עָם֮ 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 14](../14/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 14 12 ix25 figs-quotations בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר חֲדַ֥ל מִמֶּ֖⁠נּוּ וְ⁠נַֽעַבְדָ֣ה אֶת־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 We said to you, ‘Leave us alone, so we can work for the Egyptians.’ If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the portion following **saying** as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “in Egypt? We told you to leave us alone so we could serve the Egyptians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 14 13 phy1 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠רְאוּ֙ אֶת־יְשׁוּעַ֣ת יְהוָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and see what Yahweh will do for you today, he will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 14 13 rrd4 לֹ֥א תֹסִ֛יפוּ לִ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם ע֖וֹד עַד־עוֹלָֽם 1 provide for you This statement is very extended for emphasis on its certainty. Alternate translation: “you will not see them again forever” -EXO 14 14 vcdc figs-rpronouns יְהוָ֖ה יִלָּחֵ֣ם 1 The form **Yahweh himself** is reflexive, emphasizing what Yahweh will do in contrast to what the Israelites will do. Alternate translation: “As for Yahweh, he will fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 14 14 vcdc figs-rpronouns יְהוָ֖ה יִלָּחֵ֣ם 1 The form **Yahweh himself** emphasizes what Yahweh will do in contrast to what the Israelites will do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “As for Yahweh, he will fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 14 14 hx1f תַּחֲרִישֽׁוּ⁠ן 1 Here, **silent** could mean “still.” The Israelites’ lack of action is in contrast to Yahweh’s fighting. It is not a total lack of motion or sound. Alternate translation: “you will not fight” -EXO 14 15 zsgk figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me? After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 18](../14/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 15 a727 figs-rquestion מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me? Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 16 stla הָרֵ֣ם אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠נְטֵ֧ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֛ 1 divide it in two See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding **hand** and **staff**. EXO 14 16 t3e4 וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 divide it in two Alternate translation: “and divide the sea into two parts” EXO 14 17 z5ub וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Be aware Here, **behold me** is an expression meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case, Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do” EXO 14 17 qd3l figs-metaphor מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 I will harden the Egyptians’ hearts This means that God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts** were "strong." If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 17 asz9 וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 so they will go after them Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites” -EXO 14 17 hjyh figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 17 hjyh figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 17 asfq figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 so they will go after them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 18 ytnm figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י 1 so they will go after them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when I cause people to glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 18 cji1 figs-ellipsis בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַרְעֹ֔ה בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 14 18 cji1 figs-ellipsis בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַרְעֹ֔ה בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “when I get glory because of what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” or “when I show my glory by what I do to Pharaoh, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 19 hsih figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 so they will go after them Here, **face** means “front.” Alternate translation: “in front of the camp of … from in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 19 m1do עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ 1 so they will go after them See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). EXO 14 19 ysv9 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 so they will go after them This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1199,23 +1100,21 @@ EXO 14 21 f9zh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּבָּקְע֖וּ הַ⁠מָּ EXO 14 24 iz9t translate-unknown בְּ⁠אַשְׁמֹ֣רֶת הַ⁠בֹּ֔קֶר 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians This is the last third of the night. It is approximately the three hours before sunrise. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning” or “in the time before the sun rises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 14 24 kjg9 בְּ⁠עַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ וְ⁠עָנָ֑ן 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). EXO 14 24 zyp4 מַחֲנֵ֣ה מִצְרַ֔יִם…מַחֲנֵ֥ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians Alternate translation: “the army of the Egyptians … the army of the Egyptians” -EXO 14 25 qdp8 figs-quotemarks אָנ֨וּסָה֙ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֣י יְהוָ֔ה נִלְחָ֥ם לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Their chariot wheels were clogged This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 25 qzkw figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Their chariot wheels were clogged Here, **the face of Israel** means the presence of Israel. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 14 26 dfg1 figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 14 26 p5ds figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו׃ 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” This can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to reach out with his hand over the sea so that the waters would come back onto the Egyptians, their chariots, and their horsemen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 14 26 p5ds figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו׃ 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to reach out with his hand over the sea so that the waters would come back onto the Egyptians, their chariots, and their horsemen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 14 26 pw8g נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 14 26 d46y writing-pronouns עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” Here, **his** refers to Pharaoh, king of Egypt. Alternate translation: “on Pharaoh’s chariots and on Pharaoh’s horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 14 27 wn3q וַ⁠יֵּט֩ מֹשֶׁ֨ה אֶת־יָד֜⁠וֹ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֗ם 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 14 27 cosa figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 27 h64r figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְנַעֵ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם בְּ⁠ת֥וֹךְ הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians Here, Yahweh is pictured as acting toward the Egyptians as if they were dirt or dust on his clothing that he shakes to be rid of them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh threw the Egyptians back into the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 14 28 o9qo figs-litotes לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +EXO 14 28 o9qo figs-litotes לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 14 30 zvbe grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 out of the hand of the Egyptians This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 30 e2lf figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 out of the hand of the Egyptians Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “from the Egyptians’ power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 30 p5zw עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the seashore Alternate translation: “on the land along the edge of the sea” EXO 14 31 o1oc grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 on the seashore This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 31 np6s figs-metonymy אֶת־הַ⁠יָּ֣ד הַ⁠גְּדֹלָ֗ה 1 on the seashore Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language.\n\n### Structure\n\nThis song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:\n\n* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)\n* B - because he defeats our enemies\n\nThe song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbal forms (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.\n\nHere is an outline of the structure according to this model:\n\n* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):\n* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”\n* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”\n* 2-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n* Section 2:\n* 6a: A\n* 6b: B\n* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”\n* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”\n* Section 3:\n* 11: A\n* 12: B\n* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”\n* 13a-17: b\n* 18: finale\n\nAlternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:\n\n* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”\n* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”\n* 2c-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n\n### Themes:\n\nThere are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.\n\n* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.\n* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \\[Yahweh’s\\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.\n* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \\[him\\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).\n* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).\n* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).\n* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.\n* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.\n* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.\n* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).\n* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).\n* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.\n* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)\n* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)\n* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people\n* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)\\-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:\n* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid\n* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid\n* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid\n* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid\n* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid\n* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid\n* In section three, there is another parallel structure:\n* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by\n* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)\n* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \\[to\\] the place … you made\n* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Israelite’s discontent\n\nIn [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.\n\n### Yahweh’s laws\n\nIn verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
-EXO 15 1 kw29 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously It can be stated explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings in his own language. Unlike in many other places, most notes in this chapter will not advise towards expressing meaning in non-figurative ways or combining parallel phrases as that advice would be too simplistic for handling poetry.\n\n### Structure\n\nThis song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:\n\n* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)\n* B - because he defeats our enemies\n\nThe song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbal forms (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.\n\nHere is an outline of the structure according to this model:\n\n* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):\n* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”\n* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”\n* 2-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n* Section 2:\n* 6a: A\n* 6b: B\n* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”\n* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”\n* Section 3:\n* 11: A\n* 12: B\n* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”\n* 13a-17: b\n* 18: finale\n\nAlternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:\n\n* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”\n* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”\n* 2c-3: a\n* 4-5: b\n\n### Themes:\n\nThere are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.\n\n* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.\n* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \\[Yahweh’s\\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case, Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.\n* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \\[him\\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).\n* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).\n* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy’s hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).\n* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.\n* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.\n* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.\n* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).\n* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).\n* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.\n* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)\n* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)\n* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people\n* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)\\-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:\n* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid\n* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid\n* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid\n* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid\n* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid\n* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid\n* In section three, there is another parallel structure:\n* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by\n* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)\n* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \\[to\\] the place … you made\n* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Israelite’s discontent\n\nIn [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.\n\n### Yahweh’s laws\n\nIn verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n
+EXO 15 1 kw29 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 1 bpyj גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously Alternate translation: “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted” EXO 15 1 f6ue figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם 1 the horse and its rider he has thrown into the sea Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them **into the sea**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 1 cr5u figs-genericnoun ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ 1 the horse and its rider This refers to many or all of the Egyptian horses and riders that were chasing the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the horses and their riders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -1228,15 +1127,15 @@ EXO 15 3 p1d5 figs-metaphor יְהוָ֖ה אִ֣ישׁ מִלְחָמָ֑ה 1 Y EXO 15 4 pc8d figs-parallelism מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַ⁠יָּ֑ם וּ⁠מִבְחַ֥ר שָֽׁלִשָׁ֖י⁠ו טֻבְּע֥וּ בְ⁠יַם־סֽוּף 1 He has thrown Pharaoh’s chariots and army into the sea These lines are synonymous parallels where the second strengthens what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “He threw all of Pharaoh’s army into the sea, including the chariots; even his chosen officers sank in the sea of reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 4 p8w6 figs-metaphor מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַ⁠יָּ֑ם 1 He has thrown Pharaoh’s chariots and army into the sea Moses sings about Yahweh causing the sea to cover Pharaoh’s chariots and army as if Yahweh had thrown them **into the sea.** If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made Pharaoh’s chariot riders and army drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 5 yefe figs-parallelism תְּהֹמֹ֖ת יְכַסְיֻ֑⁠מוּ יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן׃ 1 they went down into the depths like a stone These lines are synonymous parallels where the second clarifies what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “The deeps covered them because they had descended into the depths like a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 15 5 nqe4 figs-simile יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן 1 they went down into the depths like a stone Just ***like a stone*** does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 15 5 nqe4 figs-simile יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן 1 they went down into the depths like a stone This comparison is that just ***like a stone*** does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 6 jx52 figs-parallelism יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב׃ 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “Yahweh, you show how majestic in power your right hand is by shattering the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 6 x1fz figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 6 rmd4 figs-metaphor תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 has shattered the enemy Moses speaks of the enemy as if it were fragile and could be **shattered** like glass or pottery. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “completely destroys the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 i2x4 figs-parallelism תַּהֲרֹ֣ס קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ 1 those who rose up against you These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first portion (**you overthrow those who rise up against you**) and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “you overthrow those who rise up against you by sending out your heat to devour them like stubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 15 7 kmv4 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠רֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 those who rose up against you If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **abundance** and **majesty** as an adverb and adjective, respectively. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 15 7 kmv4 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠רֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 those who rose up against you If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **majesty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 15 7 nd3t figs-metaphor קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 those who rose up against you Rebelling against Yahweh is spoken of as **rising up against** him. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who rebel against you” or “your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 kst4 חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath Alternate translation: “your wrath” or “your fury” -EXO 15 7 glq7 figs-personification תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath Moses speaks of Yahweh’s wrath (literally **heat**) as if it were a servant that Yahweh sent out to do something. Alternate translation: “You show your wrath” or “You act according to your wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 15 7 glq7 figs-personification תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath Moses speaks of Yahweh’s wrath (literally **heat**) as if it were a servant that Yahweh sent out to do something. Alternate translation: “You show your wrath” or “You act according to your wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 15 7 a5x7 figs-metaphor יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ׃ 1 it consumed them like stubble Moses speaks of God’s wrath as if it were fire that could completely burn up things. His enemies were completely destroyed like **stubble** in a fire. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “it completely destroys your enemies like a fire that burns up straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 guap figs-simile יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ 1 By the blast of your nostrils Here the enemies (or **those who rise up against** Yahweh) are pictured as if they were a highly flammable piece of dried grass. Alternate translation: “it devours the enemy as if they were stubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 8 ic8v figs-personification וּ⁠בְ⁠ר֤וּחַ אַפֶּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 By the blast of your nostrils Moses speaks of God as if God had a nose, and he speaks of the wind as if God blew the wind from his nose. Alternate translation: “You blew on the sea and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1250,12 +1149,14 @@ EXO 15 10 yrj5 figs-metaphor נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְ⁠רוּחֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 EXO 15 10 f7d3 figs-simile צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽ⁠עוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים 1 sank like lead in the mighty waters **Lead** is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how quickly God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 11 wq2s figs-rquestion מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה 1 Who is like you, Yahweh, among the gods? Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 15 11 pp57 figs-rquestion מִ֥י כָּמֹ֖⁠כָה נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ נוֹרָ֥א תְהִלֹּ֖ת עֹ֥שֵׂה פֶֽלֶא 1 Who is like you,…doing miracles? Moses uses this question to show how great God is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one is like you. No one is majestic in holiness as you are, no one is honored in praises as you are, and no one does miracles as you do!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +EXO 15 11 uhfj figs-abstractnouns נֶאְדָּ֣ר בַּ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 Who is like you,…doing miracles? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “majestic and holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 15 12 cid8 figs-metonymy יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 with your right hand The phrase **right hand** represents the strong power of God. Alternate translation: “with your strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 12 bkg2 figs-metaphor נָטִ֨יתָ֙ יְמִ֣ינְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You reached out with your right hand Moses speaks about God causing something to happen as if God **reached out** with his** hand**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “With your strong power you made it happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 12 g7bv figs-personification תִּבְלָעֵ֖⁠מוֹ אָֽרֶץ 1 the earth swallowed them Moses personifies the earth as if it could swallow or devour with its mouth. Alternate translation: “the earth devours them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 15 13 cvea figs-parallelism נָחִ֥יתָ בְ⁠חַסְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ עַם־ז֣וּ גָּאָ֑לְתָּ נֵהַ֥לְתָּ בְ⁠עָזְּ⁠ךָ֖ 1 the earth swallowed them These lines are structural parallels where the lines are saying similar things, but the parallelism is more in the construction of the lines. **In your** is repeated and the concepts of **led** and **guided** are very similar to one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 15 13 znbr figs-abstractnouns קָדְשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ 1 the earth swallowed them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 15 14 qlpy figs-parallelism 0 tremble Verses 14-16a form a complex parallel structure where things are repeated in reverse. (See the [introduction to chapter 15](../15/intro.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 15 14 zi1m figs-explicit יִרְגָּז֑וּ⁠ן 1 tremble This means to shake with fear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 15 14 zi1m figs-explicit יִרְגָּז֑וּ⁠ן 1 tremble This means to shake with fear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 14 uqf7 figs-personification חִ֣יל אָחַ֔ז יֹשְׁבֵ֖י פְּלָֽשֶׁת 1 terror will seize the inhabitants of Philistia Moses speaks of **anguish** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the inhabitants of Philistia will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 15 15 qyix figs-personification אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲזֵ֖⁠מוֹ רָ֑עַד 1 terror will seize the inhabitants of Philistia Moses speaks of **trembling** as if it were a person that could forcefully grab hold of someone and make them extremely afraid. Alternate translation: “the leaders of Moab will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 15 15 ya48 figs-metaphor נָמֹ֕גוּ 1 will melt away Moses uses the phrase, **melted away,** to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1263,7 +1164,7 @@ EXO 15 16 nk67 figs-doublet תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨ EXO 15 16 kbt5 figs-metaphor תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד 1 Terror and dread will fall on them **Terror and dread** are pictured as physical objects that could **fall on** people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 16 t2yp figs-metonymy בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 Because of your arm’s power Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 16 umm7 figs-simile יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּ⁠אָ֑בֶן 1 they will become as still as a stone This could mean: (1) “they will be silent like stone” or (2) “they will be motionless as stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 15 17 n5i5 figs-explicit תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ 1 You will bring them Where God would bring them can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 15 17 n5i5 figs-explicit תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ 1 You will bring them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where God would bring them explicitly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 17 u26j figs-go תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ 1 You will bring them Since Moses was not already in Canaan, some languages would use “take” rather than **bring.** Alternate translation: “You will take them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 15 17 t6wg figs-metaphor וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ בְּ⁠הַ֣ר 1 plant them on the mountain Moses speaks about God giving his people the land to live in as if they were a plant that God was planting. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you will settle them on the mountain of” or “and you will let them live on the mountain of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 17 p7kb בְּ⁠הַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 the mountain of your inheritance This refers to Mount Zion in the land of Canaan. @@ -1272,23 +1173,23 @@ EXO 15 17 ytz3 figs-metonymy כּוֹנְנ֥וּ יָדֶֽי⁠ךָ׃ 1 that y EXO 15 18 ue6p יְהוָ֥ה׀ יִמְלֹ֖ךְ לְ⁠עֹלָ֥ם וָ⁠עֶֽד 1 that your hands have built Alternate translation: “Yahweh reigns forever and ever” EXO 15 20 gam2 translate-unknown הַ⁠תֹּ֖ף…בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים 1 tambourine A **tambourine** is a hand-held musical instrument like a small drum that also has pieces of metal around the side that make a metallic rattling sound when shaken. Alternate translation: “timbrel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 15 20 hut1 figs-hyperbole וַ⁠תֵּצֶ֤אןָ כָֽל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ אַחֲרֶ֔י⁠הָ בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים וּ⁠בִ⁠מְחֹלֹֽת 1 tambourine Here, **all** may be a generalization; it may not have been every woman. It could be better to translate as a restrictive clause as in the UST. Alternate translation: “and every woman who went out after her had a tambourine and danced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -EXO 15 21 f6m3 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously It can be stated explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. See how you translated this in [Exodus 15:1](../15/01.md). Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 15 21 f6m3 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. See how you translated this in [Exodus 15:1](../15/01.md). Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 21 hvu1 figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The horse and his rider he has thrown into the sea Miriam sang about God causing the **sea** to cover and drown the **horse and the one riding it** as if God had thrown them **into the sea**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 15:1](../15/01.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 22 iw9n grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 Moses led Israel The word **Israel** represents the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “Moses led the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 15 22 iw9n grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 Moses led Israel The word **Israel** represents the people of Israel. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Moses led the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 15 22 c7pe translate-names מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר 1 wilderness of Shur We do not know the exact location of this place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 23 a9pv translate-names מָרָ֔תָ⁠ה 1 Marah We do not know the exact location of **Marah**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 24 n64m וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 complained to Moses and said Murmur is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people complained against Moses” or “And the people grumbled at Moses” EXO 15 26 l2hx figs-123person לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 15 26 oh8c figs-metonymy לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 26 sq5x figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה 1 do what is right in his eyes The **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 26 bgcf figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו 1 do what is right in his eyes The **ear** represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 26 m4cn figs-metaphor כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will put on you none of the diseases God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 15 26 sq5x figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה 1 do what is right in his eyes The **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 15 26 bgcf figs-idiom וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו 1 do what is right in his eyes The **ear** represents listening, and listening represents obeying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 15 26 m4cn figs-idiom כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will put on you none of the diseases God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 15 27 did8 translate-names אֵילִ֔מָ⁠ה 1 Elim **Elim** is an oasis in the desert, a place with water and shade trees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 27 p64y translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֣ים 1 seventy Alternate translation: “and seventy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 16 intro nkd7 0 # Exodus 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Complaints

After complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Prohibition against storing food

The people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Sabbath

This is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Bread as food

Yahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Chronology

[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).

### Ark of the covenant

Related to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 16 intro nkd7 0 # Exodus 16 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\nThis entire chapter is the story of the Israelites complaining about food and Yahweh providing food. Verses 22-30 introduce the Sabbath.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Complaints\n\nAfter complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Prohibition against storing food\n\nThe people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n### Sabbath\n\nThis is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Bread as food\n\nYahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Chronology\n\n[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).\n\n### Box of the Covenant\n\nRelated to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EXO 16 1 gw67 translate-names סִ֔ין 1 wilderness of Sin The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 16 1 h44x translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -EXO 16 1 u2aq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month Alternate translation: “on day 15 of the second month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 1 h44x translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 16 1 u2aq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 15 of month 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 2 h938 figs-hyperbole וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל 1 The whole community of Israelites complained Here, **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 16 2 nx6f וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ 1 complained Alternate translation: “And … spoke angrily” EXO 16 3 nwy6 figs-hypo מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤⁠נוּ 1 If only we had died This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Translate it in a way that makes it clear that this did not actually happen. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -1296,37 +1197,39 @@ EXO 16 3 g1n1 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 by Yahweh’s hand T EXO 16 4 kls5 figs-metaphor מַמְטִ֥יר לָ⁠כֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 I will rain down bread from heaven for you God speaks of food coming **down from heaven** as if it were rain. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 16 4 yew5 בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י 1 my law Alternate translation: “in my instruction” EXO 16 5 p1f6 וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ 1 It will come about on the sixth day, that they Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare” -EXO 16 5 cl74 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י 1 on the sixth day Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 5 cl74 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י 1 on the sixth day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 5 t5il מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 twice two times EXO 16 7 zb21 figs-rquestion וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Who are we for you to complain against us? Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 16 8 pn4e figs-rquestion וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה 1 Who are Aaron and I? Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 16 8 vdr8 figs-explicit וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה לֹא־עָלֵ֥י⁠נוּ תְלֻנֹּתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם כִּ֥י עַל־יְהוָֽה 1 Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh The people were complaining against Moses and Aaron, who were Yahweh’s servants. So by complaining against them, the people were really complaining against Yahweh. Alternate translation: “Your complaints are not really against us; they are against Yahweh, because we are his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 16 9 pqgo figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן אֱמֹ֗ר אֶֽל־כָּל־עֲדַת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל קִרְב֖וּ 1 Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh There are two layers of quotes here. You may want to translate one or the other as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “And Moses told Aaron to tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel, “Approach” or “And Moses told Aaron, “Tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel to approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 16 8 vdr8 figs-explicit וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה לֹא־עָלֵ֥י⁠נוּ תְלֻנֹּתֵי⁠כֶ֖ם כִּ֥י עַל־יְהוָֽה 1 Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh The people were complaining against Moses and Aaron, who were Yahweh’s servants. So by complaining against them, the people were really complaining against Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Your complaints are not really against us; they are against Yahweh, because we are his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 16 9 pqgo figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן אֱמֹ֗ר אֶֽל־כָּל־עֲדַת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל קִרְב֖וּ 1 Your complaints are not against us; they are against Yahweh There are two layers of quotations here. You may want to translate one or the other as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “And Moses told Aaron to tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel, “Approach” or “And Moses told Aaron, “Tell all of the congregation of the sons of Israel to approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 16 10 q4ax וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 It came about This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. The important event here is the people seeing Yahweh’s glory. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. EXO 16 10 b6rp וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙ 1 behold The word **behold** here shows that the people saw something extraordinary. EXO 16 13 aas8 וַ⁠יְהִ֣י 1 It came about…that This phrase is used here to mark an important part of the events. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. EXO 16 13 eu1x translate-unknown הַ⁠שְּׂלָ֔ו 1 quails The word **quail** means a type of small, plump game bird. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 16 14 k5lb translate-unknown כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר 1 like frost Frost is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 16 14 k5lb translate-unknown כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר 1 like frost **Frost** is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 16 14 jern figs-simile כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר 1 like frost The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “flakes that looked like frost” or “flakes that were fine like frost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 16 16 gotf אִ֖ישׁ לְ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer Alternate translation: “according to how much each will eat” EXO 16 16 fqp9 translate-bvolume עֹ֣מֶר 1 omer 2 liters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 16 16 mnwy עֹ֣מֶר לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ 1 omer Alternate translation: “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent” +EXO 16 19 v499 figs-genericnoun אִ֕ישׁ אַל 1 omer **A man** refers to people in general, not to one particular man. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “No one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) EXO 16 20 itjo וַ⁠יָּ֥רֻם תּוֹלָעִ֖ים 1 omer Alternate translation: “and it decayed with worms” EXO 16 21 jd5t אִ֖ישׁ כְּ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer Alternate translation: “everyone according to how much they would eat” or “everyone according to how many people they had to feed” EXO 16 22 nrx8 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י 1 It came about that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. Verses 16:22-30 tell about what the people did concerning the manna on the sixth and seventh days of the week. If your language has a way for marking this as a new part of the story, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 16 22 xk6x translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֗י 1 on the sixth day Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 22 xk6x translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֗י 1 on the sixth day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 22 zj1u מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 twice Alternate translation: “two times as much” EXO 16 22 f4j9 לֶ֨חֶם֙ 1 bread This refers to the **bread** that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning. EXO 16 23 wc4a שַׁבָּת֧וֹן שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 a solemn rest Alternate translation: “is a day to stop working completely and dedicate to Yahweh” +EXO 16 23 cqjd figs-abstractnouns שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ 1 a solemn rest If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 16 24 y4d9 וְ⁠לֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ 1 did not become foul Alternate translation: “And it did not smell rotten” EXO 16 25 pr1p כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם לַ⁠יהוָ֑ה 1 today is a day reserved as a Sabbath to honor Yahweh Alternate translation: “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working” -EXO 16 26 jv77 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 26 jv77 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 but the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 27 qf14 וְ⁠לֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ 1 they found none Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna” EXO 16 28 e1vx figs-rquestion עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י 1 How long will you refuse to keep my commandments and my laws? God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 16 28 q41d figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 General Information: Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +EXO 16 28 q41d figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 General Information: Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 16 28 vnq7 לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י 1 to keep my commandments and my laws Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws” EXO 16 29 p22l figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֣ם הַ⁠שַּׁבָּת֒ 1 Yahweh has given you the Sabbath Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the **Sabbath** were a gift. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 16 29 dt58 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֖י…בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 sixth day…two days…seventh day Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 29 dt58 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֖י…בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 sixth day…two days…seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 29 y8wf לֶ֣חֶם 1 bread This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning. EXO 16 29 x6gh יוֹמָ֑יִם 1 bread Alternate translation: “for 2 days” EXO 16 31 r1a5 translate-unknown כְּ⁠זֶ֤רַע גַּד֙ לָבָ֔ן 1 coriander seed **Coriander** is an herb also known as cilantro. People eat both the leaves and seeds. People dry the seeds, grind them into a powder, and put it in food to add flavor. Alternate translation: “like a small white seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1336,7 +1239,7 @@ EXO 16 34 x9vr writing-background 0 wafers Verses 34-36 provide a later comment EXO 16 34 jzcz figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠עֵדֻ֖ת 1 wafers Here, **face** figuratively represents being near the **Covenant.** Alternate translation: “near the Covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 16 36 g8ns translate-bvolume וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah An **omer** and an **ephah** are both units of dry measurement. An ephah is approximately equal to a bushel, and an omer is one-tenth of an ephah. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 16 36 a9uh translate-fraction וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah For languages that do not use fractions, this can be reworded. Alternate translation: “Now ten omers equal one ephah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) -EXO 17 intro f12q 0 # Exodus 17 General Notes\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nMoses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n\n### Naming\n\nAs in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.
+EXO 17 intro f12q 0 7# Exodus 17 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-7: the Israelites complain and Yahweh gives them water\n- v. 8-16: Israel defeats Amalek in battle\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nMoses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question shows their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Wilderness of Sin\n\nSin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with the act of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n\n### Naming\n\nAs in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner,” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever.\n EXO 17 1 jzz5 writing-newevent וַ֠⁠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל 1 wilderness of Sin A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 17 1 h1li translate-names סִ֛ין 1 wilderness of Sin The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 16:1](../16/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 1 e7jv figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 wilderness of Sin Here, **mouth** refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1348,14 +1251,15 @@ EXO 17 7 x5an translate-names מַסָּ֖ה 1 Massah **Massah** is a place in t EXO 17 7 hw7y translate-names וּ⁠מְרִיבָ֑ה 1 Meribah **Meribah** is a place in the desert whose name means “complaining” in Hebrew. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 7 m55e אִם־אָֽיִן 1 Meribah In some languages it may be unnatural to explicitly have the negative option included in this question or to have it at the end. It may be omitted or relocated in the question if that is the case. EXO 17 8 nyt1 writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּבֹ֖א עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Rephidim A new scene begins here which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])\n\n -EXO 17 8 hi3u grammar-collectivenouns עֲמָלֵ֑ק…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Rephidim **Amalek** and **Israel** are both collective nouns that refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 17 8 pu7i figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֑ק…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Rephidim **Amalek** and **Israel** both refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual by simply using the name of the ancestor. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 8 hi3u grammar-collectivenouns עֲמָלֵ֑ק…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Rephidim **Amalek** and **Israel** are both collective nouns that refer to the nations (people groups) descended from that individual. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Amalekites … the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 17 8 srdq writing-participants עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Rephidim **Amalek** or the Amalekites are a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 17 8 rv14 translate-names בִּ⁠רְפִידִֽם 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** was the name of a place in the desert. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 9 dscc writing-participants יְהוֹשֻׁ֨עַ֙ 1 Rephidim **Joshua** is a completely new participant in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Later he becomes a major character, but not really in the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 17 10 ca3g figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר אָֽמַר־ל⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה לְ⁠הִלָּחֵ֖ם בַּ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 So Joshua fought Amalek **Joshua** represents himself and the Israelites that he led into battle. Alternate translation: “And, as Moses instructed, Joshua and the men he chose fought against the Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 17 10 ca3g figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר אָֽמַר־ל⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה לְ⁠הִלָּחֵ֖ם בַּ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 So Joshua fought Amalek **Joshua** represents himself and the Israelites that he led into battle. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And, as Moses instructed, Joshua and the men he chose fought against the Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 17 10 wy51 translate-names וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur **Hur** was the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 10 itcx writing-participants וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur **Hur** is a new participant in the story, which you may need to point out in your translation. However, he is a very minor character. He only appears in this passage and once much later in the book, so you may not need to highlight him at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 17 11 x5ex figs-synecdoche וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק 1 Israel was winning…Amalek would begin to win The words **Israel** and **Amalek** represent the fighters from those groups. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 17 11 x5ex figs-synecdoche וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק 1 Israel was winning…Amalek would begin to win The words **Israel** and **Amalek** represent the fighters from those groups. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 17 12 hxt8 figs-idiom וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 hands became heavy The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his **hands became heavy**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 17 12 js2p מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד 1 hands became heavy Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other” EXO 17 13 plp3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב 1 with the sword The **sword** represents battle. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in combat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1365,16 +1269,16 @@ EXO 17 14 n42j figs-hyperbole מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם EXO 17 15 fneg נִסִּֽ⁠י 1 Amalek A **banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon” EXO 17 16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 Amalek The Hebrew here is very difficult, and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the Hebrew preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah” EXO 17 16 sw1q מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Amalek This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek” -EXO 18 intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Leadership lessons\n\nJethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties\n\n### Order of events\n\nThe timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).\n\n### Verse 11\n\n[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.\n\n### God and Yahweh\n\nIn this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.\n\n### Kinship: Father-in-law\n\nJethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])\n\n\n### Participant reference\n\nJethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).
+EXO 18 intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-12: Jethro visits Moses and hears all that Yahweh has done\n- v. 13-27: Jethro observes Moses and advises him to set up a subsidiarity leadership structure; Moses does so\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Leadership lessons\n\nJethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties\n\n### Order of events\n\nThe timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and, whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).\n\n### Verse 11\n\n[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.\n\n### God and Yahweh\n\nIn this chapter, God, who is named Yahweh in much of the rest of the book, is mostly referred to as God instead of by his name as is usual. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.\n\n### Kinship: Father-in-law\n\nJethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])\n\n\n### Participant reference\n\nJethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly (referred to by name) an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). Frequent use of his name is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status).\n
EXO 18 1 nl86 translate-kinship חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses’ father-in-law The label, **father-in-law of Moses** refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s father-in-law, choose the appropriate one here. Note the use of this term also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 18 2 zw6h וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח יִתְרוֹ֙ חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶת־צִפֹּרָ֖ה אֵ֣שֶׁת מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 took Zipporah, Moses’ wife This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah. -EXO 18 2 chy6 figs-explicit אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ 1 after he had sent her home This is something Moses had done earlier. The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 18 2 chy6 figs-explicit אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ 1 after he had sent her home This is something Moses had done earlier. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 3 khs1 וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֣י בָנֶ֑י⁠הָ 1 and her two sons This is the ending of the sentence that begins with the words **Jethro … took Zipporah** in [verse 2](../18/02.md). This could mean: (1) Jethro took Zipporah and her two sons to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah and her two sons. EXO 18 3 k4mb translate-names גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Gershom **Gershom** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “foreigner.” See [2:22](../02/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 18 4 xi35 translate-names אֱלִיעֶ֑זֶר 1 Eliezer **Eliezer** is a son of Moses and Zipporah; his name means “God is the one who helps me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 18 4 z2km figs-metonymy מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Pharaoh’s sword The phrase **from the sword of Pharaoh** represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 5 zzab וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו 1 where he was camped Alternate translation: “with his sons” -EXO 18 7 s5p2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק־ל֔⁠וֹ 1 bowed down, and kissed him These symbolic acts were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 18 7 s5p2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק־ל֔⁠וֹ 1 bowed down, and kissed him These were symbolic acts that were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 18 8 rkq2 figs-metonymy עַ֖ל אוֹדֹ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 for Israel’s sake The word **Israel** represents the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “in order to help the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 8 a1ra figs-metaphor כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מְצָאָ֣תַ⁠ם 1 all the hardships that had come to them Moses writes of **hardships** happening to them as if hardships had discovered where they were. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all the hardships that had happened to them” or “how they had many hard experiences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1383,12 +1287,12 @@ EXO 18 11 kmk7 כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר 1 the hand of the Egyptians…t EXO 18 11 ljj6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites (**them**). This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bringing judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 12 voi9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 13 ni2b writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֙ מִֽ⁠מָּחֳרָ֔ת 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 18 13 ano2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 18 13 ano2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 18 13 wzea מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Alternate translation: “all day” EXO 18 14 bax5 figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 What is this that you are doing with the people? Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 18 14 b5wj figs-rquestion מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב 1 Why is it that you sit alone…from morning until evening? Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why are you doing all this for the people? Why are you doing this by yourself, and why are all the people standing around you from morning until evening, asking you to make decisions for them?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 18 14 cfd1 figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 18 14 tiqs figs-explicit נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. You could state that explicitly if it would be more clear. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 18 14 tiqs figs-explicit נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 18 jtd2 נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל 1 You will surely wear yourselves out Alternate translation: “You will surely make yourself very tired” EXO 18 18 h91b figs-metaphor כָבֵ֤ד מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 This burden is too heavy for you Jethro speaks of the hard work that Moses is doing as if it were a physical burden that Moses was carrying. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is too hard for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 19 pug7 אִיעָ֣צְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 you advice Alternate translation: “I will guide you” or “I will instruct you” @@ -1404,17 +1308,16 @@ EXO 18 22 u42p figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ ו EXO 18 23 wyq4 וְ⁠יָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד 1 endure Alternate translation: “then you will not wear yourself out” EXO 18 23 bt5p כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה עַל־מְקֹמ֖⁠וֹ יָבֹ֥א בְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 endure Here, getting **to their place** could mean each person’s home tent or it could mean the whole group gets to the promised land. If you cannot leave it ambiguous, it would be best to indicate something like “harmony in the camp.” Alternate translation: “all these people will live in harmony” EXO 18 25 n2ws figs-metaphor רָאשִׁ֖ים עַל־הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 heads over the people Moses writes of the leaders of people as if they were the **head** of a body. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “leaders over the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 25 tb18 figs-explicit אַנְשֵׁי־חַ֨יִל֙ 1 capable men What sort of ability they had can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “men who were able to lead” or “men who were able to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 18 25 tb18 figs-explicit אַנְשֵׁי־חַ֨יִל֙ 1 capable men If it would be helpful to your readers, what sort of ability they had can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “men who were able to lead” or “men who were able to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 25 iqn8 translate-numbers שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת 1 leaders in charge of thousands, hundreds, fifties, and tens This could mean: (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” See how you translated this in [Exodus 18:21](../18/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 18 26 abx4 וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֑ת 1 judged the people in normal circumstances Alternate translation: “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances” EXO 18 26 z7j4 figs-metaphor אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠קָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּ⁠ן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 The difficult cases they brought to Moses The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 26 ve8h הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן 1 the small cases Alternate translation: “easy case” -EXO 19 intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “A kingdom of priests”\n\nThe function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Revealing the law\n\nThe events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n\n### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people\n\nMoses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.
-EXO 19 1 r5tj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 In the third month…on the same day This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. Alternate translation: “In the third month … on the first day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 19 intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and Formatting\nThis chapter consist of a series of Moses going up Mount Sinai, talking to Yahweh, coming down, and talking to the people. He is being the intermediary, carrying messages between Yahweh and the people.\n- v. 1-2: Arrival at Sinai\n- v. 3-8: First cycle of Moses going up and down for instruction and response\n- v. 9-15: Second cycle, people get ready to hear God\n- v. 16-19: God speaks to the people from the mountain\n- v. 20-25: Third cycle\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “A kingdom of priests”\n\nThe function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### Revealing the law\n\nThe events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n\n### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people\n\nMoses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, and then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code.\n
+EXO 19 1 r5tj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 In the third month…on the same day This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “In the month 3 … on the day 1 of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 19 2 nk51 translate-names מֵ⁠רְפִידִ֗ים 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:1](../17/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 19 3 kgev figs-parallelism תֹאמַר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠תַגֵּ֖יד לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 the house of Jacob, the people of Israel These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect, as Yahweh’s statement here through [verse 6](../19/06.md) is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 19 4 z9i6 figs-you אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 You have seen The word **you** here refers to the Israelites. Yahweh is telling Moses what to tell the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 19 4 l1do figs-quotemarks 0 You have seen A second-level direct quotation begins with this verse and continues until the middle of [verse 6](../19/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 19 4 z9i6 figs-youdual אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 You have seen The word **you** here refers to the Israelites. Yahweh is telling Moses what to tell the Israelites. If your language has a plural form of you you would need it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 19 4 b7ph figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֶשָּׂ֤א אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ עַל־כַּנְפֵ֣י נְשָׁרִ֔ים 1 I carried you on eagles’ wings God speaks of caring for his people while they traveled as if he were an eagle and carried them on his **wings**. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ how I helped you travel like an eagle that carries her babies on her wings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 5 c767 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹלִ֔⁠י 1 my voice God’s voice represents what he says. Alternate translation: “to what I say” or “to my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 5 fh8e וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑⁠י 1 keep my covenant Alternate translation: “and do what my covenant requires you to do” @@ -1423,7 +1326,7 @@ EXO 19 6 gm9s figs-metaphor לִ֛⁠י מַמְלֶ֥כֶת כֹּהֲנִ֖י EXO 19 7 c5tq figs-metaphor וַ⁠יָּ֣שֶׂם לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 set before them all these words Moses setting the words before them means that he was telling people things. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 7 xjbb figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם 1 set before them all these words Here, **face** means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 7 zqk1 כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖⁠הוּ יְהוָֽה 1 all these words that Yahweh had commanded him Alternate translation: “all that Yahweh had commanded him” -EXO 19 8 ljf5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 Moses came to report Where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 19 8 ljf5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 Moses came to report If it would be helpful to your readers, where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 19 8 rwx6 figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 9 ih2h figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 10 ie7y וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתָּ֥⁠ם 1 you must set them apart to me This may mean instruct the people, or it may mean Moses will have a role as well. Alternate translation: “and tell them to dedicate themselves to me” or “and help them to purify themselves for me” @@ -1439,7 +1342,7 @@ EXO 19 13 ezpm figs-go יַעֲל֥וּ 1 shot If you translate this with come o EXO 19 15 bw2p figs-euphemism אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה 1 do not go near your wives This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 19 15 z0aq אִשָּֽׁה 1 do not go near your wives This word means both “woman” and “wife.” Context dictates the correct translation. Since wife would make it a narrower command, **woman** was chosen here. EXO 19 18 m1b5 יָרַ֥ד…יְהוָ֖ה 1 Yahweh descended Alternate translation: “Yahweh came down” -EXO 19 18 a8p7 figs-simile כְּ⁠עֶ֣שֶׁן הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֔ן 1 like the smoke of a furnace This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 19 18 a8p7 figs-simile כְּ⁠עֶ֣שֶׁן הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֔ן 1 like the smoke of a furnace This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 19 19 m8ae הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְ⁠חָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד 1 grew louder and louder Alternate translation: “continued to become louder and louder” EXO 19 19 f5e6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠קֽוֹל 1 in a voice The word **voice** here refers to a sound that God made. This could mean: (1) “by speaking loudly like thunder” or (2) “by speaking” or (3) “by causing thunder to sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 20 zx5p figs-go וַ⁠יֵּ֧רֶד…וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 in a voice You may need to consider your language’s rules for perspective regarding going or coming up or down in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1450,25 +1353,25 @@ EXO 19 23 gagp figs-quotesinquotes בָּ֨⁠נוּ֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הַג EXO 19 24 w8lx לֶךְ־רֵ֔ד 1 get down Alternate translation: “Go down” EXO 19 24 bk6p figs-metaphor אַל־יֶֽהֶרְס֛וּ 1 break through the barrier God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might **break** down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:21](../19/21.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “must not go beyond the boundary” or “must not go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 24 p1yq figs-metaphor יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם 1 break through the barrier Yahweh’s anger and judgment are pictured as something that will **burst** forth from him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:22](../19/22.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 20 intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe instructions recorded in this chapter are commonly known as the “ten commandments.”\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nYahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n\n### Form of you\n\nThe singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+EXO 20 intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n\n- v. 1-17: Yahweh gives the Ten Commandments\n- v. 18-21: the people react\n- v. 22-26: Yahweh gives a little more explanation about idols and altars\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Covenant\n\nYahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n\n### Form of you\n\nThe singular form of you is used in the commandments; however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])\n
EXO 20 2 qg71 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 house of slavery Yahweh speaks of **Egypt** as if it were a **house** where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 20 3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ 1 You must have no other gods before me Alternate translation: “You must not worship any other gods besides me” -EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merism וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means all created things wherever they are. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 20 5 ka3i writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 You must not bow down to them or worship them The word **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 20 6 u9nc figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠עֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me The abstract noun **faithfulness** can be restated as “faithfully” or “faithful.” Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merism וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means all created things wherever they are. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created, whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **likeness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 20 5 ka3i writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 You must not bow down to them or worship them Here, **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**, therefore **third and fourth** refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” or “and even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 20 6 u9nc figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠עֹ֥שֶׂה חֶ֖סֶד לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faithfulness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply necessary words from the context. Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 20 6 yw38 figs-metonymy לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 to thousands of those who love me Here, **thousands** may mean: (1) “forever,” that is, “to all descendants forever” (2) a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “for every generation” or “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 7 o96b תִשָּׂ֛א…יִשָּׂ֥א 1 take the name of Yahweh your God To **lift up**, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name or making a claim to him or attempting to manipulate him or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term. EXO 20 7 t3k2 לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 take the name of Yahweh your God Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God” EXO 20 7 gcz2 לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא 1 in vain Alternate translation: “carelessly” or “without proper respect” -EXO 20 7 sl6g figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙ 1 I will not hold guiltless This double-negative can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 20 7 sl6g figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙ 1 I will not hold guiltless If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. . Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 20 8 kwn7 לְ⁠קַדְּשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 set it apart Alternate translation: “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me” EXO 20 9 sad1 מְלַאכְתֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 do all your work Alternate translation: “your occupation” or “your livelihood” EXO 20 10 t1ky figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 within your gates Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 20 11 vw1f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 on the seventh day Alternate translation: “on day seven.” Here “seventh” is the ordinal number for “7.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 20 11 vw1f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 on the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 20 14 wyv9 לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף 1 You must not commit adultery Alternate translation: “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse” EXO 20 16 zix8 לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְ⁠רֵעֲ⁠ךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר 1 must not give false testimony Alternate translation: “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor” EXO 20 17 vt9t לֹ֥א תַחְמֹ֖ד 1 must not covet Alternate translation: “You must not strongly want to have” or “You must not want to take” @@ -1478,7 +1381,6 @@ EXO 20 18 h53m וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְד֖וּ מֵֽ⁠רָחֹֽק 1 stood fa EXO 20 20 slb8 וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ 1 so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin Alternate translation: “so that you will honor him and not sin” EXO 20 20 hocw figs-metaphor תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin Here, **fear** is spoken of as something that could be **above their faces**. This means that they would be continually thinking about honoring God. It is similar to the image in [Exodus 13:16](../13/16.md). If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you will live always reverencing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 20 21 lts1 וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ 1 Moses approached Alternate translation: “and Moses moved closer,” -EXO 20 22 ayom figs-quotemarks אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 Moses approached A second-level direct quotation begins here that continues until the [end of the chapter](../20/26.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 20 23 qm44 אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 gods of silver or gods of gold Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold” EXO 20 24 pf1i מִזְבַּ֣ח אֲדָמָה֮ 1 earthen altar The phrase **an alter of earth** means an altar made of materials from the ground, such as stone, soil, or clay. EXO 20 24 ge89 figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1486,7 +1388,7 @@ EXO 20 24 zmc4 figs-activepassive אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י EXO 20 26 qm1b figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְ⁠מַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑⁠י 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter, you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 20 26 e28y figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 20 26 h2qd עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 your nakedness Alternate translation: “your private parts” -EXO 21 intro dnd3 0 # Exodus 21 General Notes\n\nThis chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- 1: Introduction\n- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves\n- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves\n- 12-17: Capital crimes\n- 18-36: Liability laws\n * 18-27: Regarding human violence\n * 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].\n\n\n### Daughters sold as servants\n\nThe section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife.\n\n### Ransom payment\n\nIn [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.
+EXO 21 intro dnd3 0 # Exodus 21 General Notes\n\nThis chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- 1: Introduction\n- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves\n- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves\n- 12-17: Capital crimes\n- 18-36: Liability laws\n * 18-27: Regarding human violence\n * 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law, a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” It is followed by a description of the situation; then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].\n\n\n### Daughters sold as servants\n\nThe section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be somewhat confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife. It seems the two things could be closely related.\n\n### Ransom payment\n\nIn [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear.\n
EXO 21 1 xxf4 0 you must set before them Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters. EXO 21 1 hhf7 תָּשִׂ֖ים 1 you must set before them Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell” EXO 21 1 ddql figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 you must set before them Here, **faces** figuratively represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1509,12 +1411,12 @@ EXO 21 9 h9ni 0 he has treated her deceitfully This verse is the second of thr EXO 21 9 w99z לִ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 designates her as a wife for his son Alternate translation: “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife” EXO 21 9 suz0 כְּ⁠מִשְׁפַּ֥ט הַ⁠בָּנ֖וֹת יַעֲשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠הּ 1 designates her as a wife for his son Alternate translation: “he must do to her according to the manner in which daughters are customarily treated” EXO 21 10 i0xh 0 designates her as a wife for his son This verse and the next are the third of three possible situations between a master and his female slave. -EXO 21 10 rxk4 figs-doublenegatives שְׁאֵרָ֛⁠הּ כְּסוּתָ֥⁠הּ וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ לֹ֥א יִגְרָֽע 1 he must not diminish her food, clothing, or her marital rights This can be stated in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he must give the first wife the same food, clothing, and marital rights she had before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 21 10 rxk4 figs-doublenegatives שְׁאֵרָ֛⁠הּ כְּסוּתָ֥⁠הּ וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ לֹ֥א יִגְרָֽע 1 he must not diminish her food, clothing, or her marital rights If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he must give the first wife the same food, clothing, and marital rights she had before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 21 10 np9b figs-euphemism וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ 1 or her marital rights This term only occurs here in the Bible. It probably means things that a husband must do for his wife. Most commentators believe it specifically means having sexual relations with her, possibly so that she can bear children. Alternate translation: “or her right to intimacy” or “or her childbearing rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 21 12 gks4 מַכֵּ֥ה אִ֛ישׁ 1 strikes a man Alternate translation: “Whoever attacks a man” EXO 21 12 su6b figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 that person must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly execute that person” or “you must certainly kill that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 13 h4ka וַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א צָדָ֔ה 1 did not do it with premeditation Alternate translation: “But if he did not plan to do it” or “But if he did not do it on purpose” -EXO 21 13 gme9 figs-explicit וְ⁠שַׂמְתִּ֤י לְ⁠ךָ֙ מָק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר יָנ֖וּס שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה 1 I will fix a place to where he can flee The purpose for choosing a place can be stately clearly here. Alternate translation: “I will choose a place to which he can run away to be safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 13 gme9 figs-explicit וְ⁠שַׂמְתִּ֤י לְ⁠ךָ֙ מָק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר יָנ֖וּס שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה 1 I will fix a place to where he can flee If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the purpose for choosing a place explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will choose a place to which he can run away to be safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 14 st5h בְ⁠עָרְמָ֑ה 1 according to a cunning plan Alternate translation: “after thinking carefully about it” EXO 21 14 abx6 תִּקָּחֶ֖⁠נּוּ 1 must take him The word “him” refers to the one who killed his neighbor. EXO 21 14 mvpx לָ⁠מֽוּת 1 must take him Alternate translation: “to execute him” @@ -1525,41 +1427,41 @@ EXO 21 17 h8qf figs-activepassive וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל אָבִ֛י⁠ו ו EXO 21 17 kvbc וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל 1 Whoever curses his father or his mother must surely be put to death The word translated **acts contemptuously** means the opposite of “honor” (as in the commandment to honor one’s parents). Alternate translation: “Whoever acts dishonorably toward” EXO 21 19 c7rv יָק֞וּם 1 he recovers Alternate translation: “he gets better” EXO 21 19 tv0z וְ⁠נִקָּ֣ה 1 he recovers Alternate translation: “then … is innocent” -EXO 21 19 xg6c figs-explicit שִׁבְתּ֛⁠וֹ 1 the loss of his time This refers to a situation when someone cannot work to earn money. You can express this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “for the time he could not work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 19 xg6c figs-explicit שִׁבְתּ֛⁠וֹ 1 the loss of his time This refers to a situation when someone cannot work to earn money. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the time he could not work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 19 ws14 וְ⁠רַפֹּ֥א יְרַפֵּֽא 1 pay for his complete recovery Alternate translation: “and for his medical costs” or “and for his costs for healing” EXO 21 20 te41 תַּ֣חַת יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 as a result of the blow Alternate translation: “because of the injury” or “because the master hit him” EXO 21 20 h4eg figs-activepassive נָקֹ֖ם יִנָּקֵֽם 1 that man must surely be punished If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly punish that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 21 r65u figs-explicit כִּ֥י כַסְפּ֖⁠וֹ הֽוּא 1 for he will have suffered the loss of the servant A common view is that the loss of the valuable property, the slave, is itself a punishment. It may be that the master loses the slave for a time and also has to pay for his healing, or it may be that the slave dies after a few days. You can express clearly in the translation that the servant was valuable to his master. Alternate translation: “because he has already lost his servant who was valuable to him” or “because he has already lost his servant’s work for a time and had to pay for his healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 21 r65u figs-explicit כִּ֥י כַסְפּ֖⁠וֹ הֽוּא 1 for he will have suffered the loss of the servant A common view is that the loss of the valuable property, the slave, is itself a punishment. It may be that the master loses the slave for a time and also has to pay for his healing, or it may be that the slave dies after a few days. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that the servant was valuable to his master explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he has already lost his servant who was valuable to him” or “because he has already lost his servant’s work for a time and had to pay for his healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 22 a6av וְ⁠יָצְא֣וּ יְלָדֶ֔י⁠הָ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִהְיֶ֖ה אָס֑וֹן 1 she miscarries It is not clear in the passage what happens to the child. The text is simply as in the ULT. Some have taken it to mean that the child dies because of premature birth, and the **serious injury** only relates to the woman. In this case, a fine is imposed for the loss of the child. However, the text could also mean that the child is born safely. A fine is still imposed because of the great danger to the two lives. Then the next few verses give consequences for any injury either to mother or child. EXO 21 22 w4p3 אָס֑וֹן 1 she miscarries Alternate translation: “hurt” EXO 21 22 cn4h figs-activepassive עָנ֣וֹשׁ יֵעָנֵ֗שׁ 1 the guilty man must surely be fined If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly fine the guilty man” or “the guilty man must pay a fine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 22 v5ye בִּ⁠פְלִלִֽים 1 as the judges determine Alternate translation: “what the judges decide” -EXO 21 23 ya82 figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 as the judges determine This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 24 c5bq figs-explicit עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן 1 an eye for an eye This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and repeated in like manner for each example throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 23 ya82 figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 as the judges determine This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 24 c5bq figs-explicit עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן 1 an eye for an eye This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and repeated in like manner for each example throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 26 i8cg אִ֜ישׁ 1 If a man Here, **man** refers to the owner of a slave. EXO 21 26 bmc1 תַּ֥חַת 1 in compensation Alternate translation: “as payment for” EXO 21 28 sp6w יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר 1 an ox gores Alternate translation: “an ox injures with its horns” EXO 21 28 qk3u figs-activepassive סָק֨וֹל יִסָּקֵ֜ל הַ⁠שּׁ֗וֹר 1 the ox must surely be stoned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely stone the ox to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 28 q2gv figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹ֤א יֵאָכֵל֙ אֶת־בְּשָׂר֔⁠וֹ 1 its flesh must not be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must not eat its flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 29 zgll figs-activepassive וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ 1 its owner also must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **its owner was warned** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 29 x2y0 figs-explicit וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ 1 its owner also must be put to death The content of the warning could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 29 x2y0 figs-explicit וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְרֶ֔⁠נּוּ 1 its owner also must be put to death If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the content of the warning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner was warned that it gores but he did not keep it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 29 nzn1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו יוּמָֽת 1 its owner also must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must also kill its owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 30 t5rs figs-explicit אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔⁠וֹ כְּ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another option is that the judges will impose it. One of these can be stated clearly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 30 py37 figs-activepassive אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו…יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom or use an unspecified pronoun, if that is possible in your language (This second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 21 30 t5rs figs-explicit אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔⁠וֹ כְּ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another option is that the judges will impose it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express one of these explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 30 py37 figs-activepassive אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו…יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom or use an unspecified pronoun, if that is possible in your language (this second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 31 kg25 יִגָּ֖ח…יִגָּ֑ח 1 has gored Alternate translation: “it injures with its horns … it injures with its horns” EXO 21 31 to8k writing-pronouns לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 has gored Here, **him** probably refers to the ox’s owner. Alternate translation: “to the owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 21 32 qzv3 translate-bmoney כֶּ֣סֶף׀ שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֗ים 1 thirty shekels of silver A **shekel** weighed 11 grams. Alternate translation: “330 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -EXO 21 32 qy0g figs-explicit אִם־עֶ֛בֶד יִגַּ֥ח הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר 1 thirty shekels of silver Because they are to kill the ox, the slave must have died. You can make this explicit. Alternate translation: “If an ox kills a male servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 32 qzv3 translate-bmoney כֶּ֣סֶף׀ שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֗ים 1 thirty shekels of silver In ancient times, a silver shekel weighed about 11 grams or about a third of an ounce. You could try to express the equivalent in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. Instead, you could say something general like “30 silver coins” or give the equivalent weight or use the biblical term in the text and explain the weight in a footnote. Alternate translation: “330 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +EXO 21 32 qy0g figs-explicit אִם־עֶ֛בֶד יִגַּ֥ח הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר 1 thirty shekels of silver Because they are to kill the ox, the slave must have died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If an ox kills a male servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 32 wm9a figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר יִסָּקֵֽל 1 the ox must be stoned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill the ox by stoning it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 33 fd4p יִפְתַּ֨ח…בּ֗וֹר 1 opens a pit Alternate translation: “uncovers a hole in the ground” or “takes a cover off a hole in the ground” -EXO 21 34 b48a figs-explicit כֶּ֖סֶף יָשִׁ֣יב לִ⁠בְעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 repay the loss The owner must be paid for the loss of his animal. Alternate translation: “he must pay the owner for the dead animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 34 b48a figs-explicit כֶּ֖סֶף יָשִׁ֣יב לִ⁠בְעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 repay the loss The owner must be paid for the loss of his animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he must pay the owner for the dead animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 34 ip1n יְשַׁלֵּ֔ם 1 repay the loss Alternate translation: “must make restitution” -EXO 21 34 j8qz figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֵּ֖ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 will become his The one who paid for the loss of the animal will become the owner of the dead animal and can do what he wants with it. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and the dead animal will belong to the owner of the pit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 34 j8qz figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֵּ֖ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 will become his The one who paid for the loss of the animal will become the owner of the dead animal and can do what he wants with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the dead animal will belong to the owner of the pit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 35 z9ug וְ⁠חָצ֣וּ אֶת־כַּסְפּ֔⁠וֹ 1 divide its price Alternate translation: “and divide the money” or “and divide the money they receive” EXO 21 36 fkx2 figs-activepassive א֣וֹ נוֹדַ֗ע 1 if it was known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 36 v64b נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִ⁠תְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 a habit of goring in time past Alternate translation: “the ox had gored other animals before” -EXO 21 36 ix8h figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 its owner has not kept it in This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. This can be clearly stated in the translation. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 36 dcv2 figs-explicit שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר 1 he must surely pay ox for ox The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 36 ix8h figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 its owner has not kept it in This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 21 36 dcv2 figs-explicit שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר 1 he must surely pay ox for ox The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 22 intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].
EXO 22 1 syx5 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel. EXO 22 1 onm0 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּ⁠טְבָח֖⁠וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑⁠וֹ 1 General Information: This is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -1596,19 +1498,19 @@ EXO 22 13 b313 figs-activepassive אִם־טָרֹ֥ף יִטָּרֵ֖ף 1 If a EXO 22 14 h8yw שַׁלֵּ֥ם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 must surely make restitution Alternate translation: “must certainly repay with another animal” or “must certainly pay the owner for the animal” EXO 22 14 wu3u figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁבַּ֣ר אוֹ־מֵ֑ת 1 must surely make restitution If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled in the UST.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 15 g3zw figs-activepassive אִם־שָׂכִ֣יר 1 if the animal was hired If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone rented the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 15 r792 figs-explicit בָּ֖א בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 it will be paid for by its hiring fee The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 22 15 r792 figs-explicit בָּ֖א בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 it will be paid for by its hiring fee The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 22 15 f9w9 בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 hiring fee Alternate translation: “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal” EXO 22 16 a8s8 וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 a man seduces a virgin who is not engaged Alternate translation: “If a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to lie with him” EXO 22 16 th2m לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 not engaged Alternate translation: “not promised to be married” EXO 22 16 g24h figs-euphemism וְ⁠שָׁכַ֣ב 1 if he lies with her Lying with someone refers to having sex. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 22 16 x33y מָהֹ֛ר יִמְהָרֶ֥⁠נָּה 1 bride wealth The **bride price** was money paid to the family to compensate for the loss of their daughter. -EXO 22 17 y2xz writing-pronouns ל֑⁠וֹ…יִשְׁקֹ֔ל 1 him, he These pronouns refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 22 17 y2xz writing-pronouns ל֑⁠וֹ…יִשְׁקֹ֔ל 1 him, he Here, **him** and **he** refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 22 19 y3qy figs-euphemism כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה 1 Whoever lies with an animal This refers to sexual relations. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 22 19 b807 figs-activepassive כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever lies with an animal If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state **be put to death** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute whoever lies with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 20 n4nh figs-activepassive יָֽחֳרָ֑ם 1 Yahweh must be completely destroyed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the sentence): “You must completely destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 21 kr35 לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה 1 wrong a foreigner Alternate translation: “You must not mistreat” or “You must not cheat” -EXO 22 21 eoa5 figs-explicit כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 wrong a foreigner The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed, and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 22 22 djh3 figs-doublenegatives כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃ 1 You must not mistreat any widow or fatherless child This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 22 21 eoa5 figs-explicit כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 wrong a foreigner The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed, and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 22 22 djh3 figs-doublenegatives כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃ 1 You must not mistreat any widow or fatherless child If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 22 22 v3i8 אַלְמָנָ֥ה 1 widow Alternate translation: “woman whose husband has died” EXO 22 22 l2ih וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם 1 fatherless child Alternate translation: “or child with no parents” EXO 22 24 zszz figs-idiom וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י 1 fatherless child This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1619,45 +1521,46 @@ EXO 22 27 wi2m כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ 1 only covering Al EXO 22 27 x7zb figs-rquestion בַּ⁠מֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב 1 What else can he sleep in? This question adds emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 22 28 eel2 אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל 1 You must not blaspheme me, God Alternate translation: “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God” EXO 22 28 tdj6 וְ⁠נָשִׂ֥יא בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר 1 nor curse a ruler Alternate translation: “and do not ask God to do bad things to your ruler” -EXO 22 29 p8nk figs-doublenegatives לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר 1 You must not hold back offerings This can be stated in a positive form. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 22 29 p8nk figs-doublenegatives לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר 1 You must not hold back offerings If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 22 30 j345 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֤ת 1 For seven days Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 22 30 m4wq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י 1 the eighth day This can be written as a numeral. Alternate translation: “on day number 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 22 30 m4wq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י 1 the eighth day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 22 31 jjhn figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠אַנְשֵׁי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ תִּהְי֣וּ⁠ן לִ֑⁠י 1 the eighth day If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And you shall be holy men to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 23 intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.
EXO 23 1 we1y 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel. -EXO 23 1 eeoc figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 dishonest witness This could be translated differently to avoid the abstract nouns **report** and **emptiness.** Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 23 1 eeoc figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 dishonest witness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **report** and **emptiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 23 1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “a false testimony” EXO 23 1 fu5k figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 dishonest witness Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 23 1 y1a3 figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 dishonest witness Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 2 nqz9 וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 nor may you bear witness Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak” EXO 23 2 z6ej figs-metaphor לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְ⁠רָעֹ֑ת 1 siding with the crowd This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd The phrase “from justice” is omitted twice but should be understood in both cases. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 23 2 tnv2 לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 pervert justice Here, **to turn aside** means to do illegal or immoral actions that result in a unjust ruling. Alternate translation: “to pervert justice … that perverts justice” EXO 23 6 z2al לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 Do not thrust aside justice for your poor in his lawsuit Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters” EXO 23 6 vh76 בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 lawsuit Here, **in his lawsuit** refers to any matter that a court decides. EXO 23 7 ljdw figs-metaphor מִ⁠דְּבַר־שֶׁ֖קֶר תִּרְחָ֑ק 1 I will not acquit the wicked Here distance is used figuratively to tell the Israelites to have no part in deception. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not speak deceptively” or “Do not join a false matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 23 7 c6xl figs-doublet וְ⁠נָקִ֤י וְ⁠צַדִּיק֙ 1 I will not acquit the wicked These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with **the wicked** later in the verse. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and … the person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “and … the person who does right and not wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 23 7 mf4w לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע 1 I will not acquit the wicked Alternate translation: “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent” -EXO 23 8 gh3v figs-personification כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 bribe blinds…perverts Here, a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 23 8 gh3v figs-personification כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 bribe blinds…perverts Here, a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 23 8 ai37 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 bribe blinds…perverts To **blind the clear-sighted** is a metaphor that means causing those who know what is right to act like they do not. And **perverts the words of the righteous** could mean causes those who would speak the truth (in court) to lie or causes the judge to give an evil judgment or causes those listening to **the words of the righteous** to choose to act as if they had heard something different. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “for a bribe causes those who understand the right thing to do not to do it and causes good men to speak lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 23 9 mzu9 אֶת־נֶ֣פֶשׁ הַ⁠גֵּ֔ר 1 the life of a foreigner Alternate translation: “the feelings of the foreigner” EXO 23 10 rt7h תְּבוּאָתָֽ⁠הּ 1 its produce Alternate translation: “the food its plants produce” EXO 23 10 gjya translate-numbers וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ 1 its produce Alternate translation: “And 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 11 waxp translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֞ת 1 unplowed Alternate translation: “But the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 23 11 waxp translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֞ת 1 unplowed If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “But year 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 23 11 b5q6 translate-unknown תִּשְׁמְטֶ֣⁠נָּה וּ⁠נְטַשְׁתָּ֗⁠הּ 1 fallow This means to leave the land fallow, that is, in its natural state, unplowed, unplanted, not used to grow food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 23 11 s4wv figs-explicit וְ⁠אָֽכְלוּ֙ אֶבְיֹנֵ֣י עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 so that the poor among your people may eat The poor can eat any food that grows on its own in a field that is not cultivated. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “so the poor among your people may harvest and eat any food that grows on its own in that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 23 11 s4wv figs-explicit וְ⁠אָֽכְלוּ֙ אֶבְיֹנֵ֣י עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 so that the poor among your people may eat The poor can eat any food that grows on its own in a field that is not cultivated. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so the poor among your people may harvest and eat any food that grows on its own in that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 23 12 ij92 שֽׁוֹרְ⁠ךָ֙ וַ⁠חֲמֹרֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 your ox and your donkey Alternate translation: “your work animals” EXO 23 12 tajk translate-numbers שֵׁ֤שֶׁת 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 12 u07q translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed Alternate translation: “the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 23 12 u07q translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “and on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 23 12 gpu1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּֽר 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 13 ldn8 תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ 1 Pay attention to Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey” -EXO 23 13 va2j figs-parallelism וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These two instructions mean almost the same thing. It may be more clear to combine them in some languages. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 23 13 va2j figs-parallelism וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These two instructions mean almost the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These parallel phrases probably mean praying to other gods. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods, never let me hear you do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 13 s86p figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 14 ezgh translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֣שׁ 1 mention the names of other gods Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv **Aviv** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv **Aviv** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 23 15 i88n translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Aviv Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 15 tx1v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 not appear before me empty-handed Understatement is used here to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “You must not come to me without a proper offering” or “You must always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 23 15 tx1v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 not appear before me empty-handed Understatement is used here to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You must not come to me without a proper offering” or “You must always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 23 16 ybsb וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following. EXO 23 16 pnx4 וְ⁠חַ֤ג הָֽ⁠אָסִף֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering” EXO 23 16 wgxm figs-metaphor בְּ⁠צֵ֣את הַ⁠שָּׁנָ֔ה 1 Festival of Ingathering The phrase **in the exiting of the year** means at the end of the year. The year is pictured as something that is leaving. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as the year goes out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1669,12 +1572,12 @@ EXO 23 21 p5y3 grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠ו EXO 23 21 p4jv figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 My name is on him Here, **name** refers to God’s authority. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “he has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 21 gt76 figs-metonymy וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 22 z1gn figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 22 y9bm figs-parallelism וְ⁠אָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠צַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 an enemy to your enemies and an adversary to your adversaries These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 23 22 y9bm figs-parallelism וְ⁠אָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠צַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 an enemy to your enemies and an adversary to your adversaries These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 23 23 x2nh figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒ 1 This phrase, **before your face**, means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 24 a1d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּ⁠מַֽעֲשֵׂי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 You must not…do as they do The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. Alternate translation: “and you must not live as the people live who worship those gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 23 25 t3ir figs-merism וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ אֶֽת־לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠אֶת־מֵימֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 he will bless your bread and water Here, **your bread and your water** is a merism that means food and drink. Alternate translation: “and he will bless your food and drink” or “and he will bless you by giving you food and drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 23 25 ydl4 figs-123person וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ 1 he will bless…I will remove Yahweh switched between the first and third pronoun to refer to himself. Here both “he” and “I” refer to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 23 26 q4gz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א תִהְיֶ֛ה מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה וַ⁠עֲקָרָ֖ה 1 No woman will be barren or will miscarry her young in your land This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Every woman will be able to become pregnant and give birth to healthy babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 23 24 a1d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּ⁠מַֽעֲשֵׂי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 You must not…do as they do The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you must not live as the people live who worship those gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 23 25 t3ir figs-merism וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ אֶֽת־לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠אֶת־מֵימֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 he will bless your bread and water Here, **your bread and your water** is a merism that means food and drink. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and he will bless your food and drink” or “and he will bless you by giving you food and drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 23 25 ydl4 figs-123person וּ⁠בֵרַ֥ךְ…וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִ֥י 1 he will bless…I will remove Yahweh switched between the first and third pronoun to refer to himself. Here, both **he** and **I** refer to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 23 26 q4gz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א תִהְיֶ֛ה מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה וַ⁠עֲקָרָ֖ה 1 No woman will be barren or will miscarry her young in your land If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Every woman will be able to become pregnant and give birth to healthy babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 23 26 i1r9 מְשַׁכֵּלָ֥ה 1 miscarry to have a pregnancy end early and unexpectedly, resulting in the death of the baby EXO 23 26 geqg figs-idiom אֶת־מִסְפַּ֥ר יָמֶ֖י⁠ךָ אֲמַלֵּֽא 1 miscarry This is an idiom that means to live a long time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you a long life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 23 27 yps8 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1683,36 +1586,36 @@ EXO 23 28 t0r1 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ…מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנ EXO 23 28 cg7i translate-unknown הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה 1 hornets The **hornet** is a flying insect that can sting people and cause pain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 23 28 oocw grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠צִּרְעָ֖ה…וְ⁠גֵרְשָׁ֗ה 1 hornets Here, **hornet** is used in the singular but refers to a large group of the flying, stinging insects. **It** agrees in number with **hornet**. It may be necessary to translate as a plural. Alternate translation: “hornets … and they will drive out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 23 29 wfdi figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 29 i9aq figs-explicit פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ שְׁמָמָ֔ה 1 or the land would become abandoned You could make the rest of the idea explicit if it would help. Alternate translation: “lest the land become desolate because no one would be living in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 23 29 i9aq figs-explicit פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ שְׁמָמָ֔ה 1 or the land would become abandoned If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the rest of the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “lest the land become desolate because no one would be living in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 23 30 mne7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 31 my2e figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 33 d1fp figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠מוֹקֵֽשׁ 1 this will surely become a trap for you This means worshiping other gods will lead the people of Israel to certain destruction, as if they were an animal caught in a hunter’s trap. It could also be saying that leaving the other people around will make it so that the Israelites see the other people’s worship and are lured (like in a trap) into worshiping the other gods, which is a sin against Yahweh. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Worshiping them will surely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 24 intro b83l 0 # Exodus 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n1. Yahweh summons Moses v. 1-2\n2. Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood v. 3-8\n3. Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat v. 9-11\n4. Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes v. 12-15\n5. Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain v. 16-18\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God\n- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways\n- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Moses’ covenant\n\nThe people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nBecause Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
+EXO 24 intro b83l 0 # Exodus 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-2: Yahweh summons Moses\n- v. 3-8: Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it; this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood\n- v. 9-11: Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat\n- v. 12-15: Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders, and he goes\n- v. 16-18: Description of Yahweh’s glory, and Moses is at the top of the mountain\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- there are a number of similes used to describe people’s encounter with God\n- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways\n- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Moses’ covenant\n\nThe people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n### God’s holiness\n\nBecause Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n
EXO 24 1 hji6 writing-newevent 0 Nadab…Abihu A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 1 c97i translate-names נָדָ֣ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא 1 Nadab…Abihu **Nadab and Abihu** are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 24 1 zukb figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה 1 Nadab…Abihu Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. You may change it to first person if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 24 1 zukb figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה 1 Nadab…Abihu Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 24 1 nm3t translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Alternate translation: “and 70” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 24 1 ymip figs-explicit וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Here, “to me” is implied. You may make it explicit if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “and you shall bow down to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 24 2 p06o writing-pronouns וְ⁠הֵ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders The pronoun **they** refers to all the other people mentioned in [verse 1](../24/01.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron, Nadab, Abihu, and the elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 24 2 dqnp figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. You may change it to first person if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 24 1 ymip figs-explicit וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Here, after **bow down,** “to me” is implied. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you shall bow down to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 24 2 p06o writing-pronouns וְ⁠הֵ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Here, **they** refers to all the other people mentioned in [verse 1](../24/01.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron, Nadab, Abihu, and the elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 24 2 dqnp figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 24 3 sbc3 writing-newevent 0 with one voice Verses 3-8 tell of a different scene than the rest of the chapter, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. It seems that there were some preparations needed before Moses and the elders could go up to meet Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 3 nuqr 0 with one voice See [Exodus 19:8](../19/08.md) for how you translated a very similar event. EXO 24 3 cg32 figs-idiom ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙ 1 with one voice Here, **with one voice** is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 24 4 h7gg תַּ֣חַת הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “at the base of the mountain” EXO 24 4 uipf translate-numbers וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙…לִ⁠שְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 24 7 c9tm translate-unknown סֵ֣פֶר הַ⁠בְּרִ֔ית 1 foot of the mountain Here, **book** does not mean something in our modern format. It was likely a piece of papyrus (an early form of paper made from reeds) or animal skin that rolled up. Alternate translation: “the Covenant he had written down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 24 8 h9ff figs-explicit הַ⁠דָּ֔ם 1 Then Moses took the blood This refers to **the blood** that Moses had put into the bowls. This can be stated clearly. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 24 8 juxf figs-explicit עַ֥ל כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה׃ 1 Then Moses took the blood **These words** refers to what Moses just read aloud to them, that is, Yahweh’s commands. You can make this more clear. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 24 8 h9ff figs-explicit הַ⁠דָּ֔ם 1 Then Moses took the blood This refers to **the blood** that Moses had put into the bowls. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 24 8 juxf figs-explicit עַ֥ל כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה׃ 1 Then Moses took the blood **These words** refers to what Moses just read aloud to them, that is, Yahweh’s commands. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 9 izl5 writing-newevent 0 Nadab…Abihu A new scene begins with this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. Here the narrative is connected to [verse 2](../24/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 9 uz7y translate-names נָדָב֙ וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא 1 Nadab…Abihu **Nadab and Abihu** are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 24 9 nuq7 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 Nadab…Abihu The men **went up** the mountain. You can state this clearly. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 24 10 ic4s figs-personification וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Under his feet **And under his feet** speaks of God as if he had human feet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +EXO 24 9 nuq7 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 Nadab…Abihu The men **went up** the mountain. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 24 10 ic4s figs-personification וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Under his feet **And under his feet** speaks of God as if he had human feet. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And below where God was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 24 10 q8sn לִבְנַ֣ת 1 pavement a hard surface for walking or riding EXO 24 10 pm87 translate-unknown הַ⁠סַּפִּ֔יר 1 sapphire stone A **sapphire** is a gemstone that is blue in color. If there is a blue gemstone that your people are familiar with, you may use it here, as the exact gemstone is not certain. You may also describe it. Alternate translation: “a blue gemstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 24 10 zd6u figs-simile וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִם לָ⁠טֹֽהַר 1 as clear as the sky itself This is a simile. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 24 10 zd6u figs-simile וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִם לָ⁠טֹֽהַר 1 as clear as the sky itself The point of this comparison is the blueness of the tile. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 24 11 jds6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 24 11 b398 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -EXO 24 12 dx4f figs-explicit לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 tablets of stone and the law and commandments This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. You may need to make this clear. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 24 11 b398 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders What would be expected is that they would die if they saw God. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected. Be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +EXO 24 12 dx4f figs-explicit לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 tablets of stone and the law and commandments This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 13 flw7 writing-participants וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ 1 with his assistant Joshua **Joshua** is introduced here again. Use the natural form in your language for reintroducing a character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 24 13 gv5e וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑⁠וֹ 1 with his assistant Joshua The word translated **servant** here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower class serving role. Alternate translation: “and Joshua his assistant” EXO 24 14 mhvj grammar-connect-time-sequential וְ⁠אֶל־הַ⁠זְּקֵנִ֤ים אָמַר֙ 1 wait for us The structure of the Hebrew indicates but does not require that this speech by Moses happened before [verse 13](../24/13.md) (hence **had said**). The ULT takes this view, however, for languages where it is hard to express events out of order, the UST reflects the other grammatical possibility and says in [24:13](../24/13.md) that Moses started up the mountain and in [24:15](../24/15.md) that he went the rest of the way up the mountain. Following this, you can view this verse as if Moses paused and gave these final instructions as he was leaving the elders behind, thus keeping a sequential structure. Either approach is permissible by the text, but the approach of the ULT is preferred, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) @@ -1722,9 +1625,9 @@ EXO 24 14 jyh8 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה 1 Hur **Behold** is used to draw attention EXO 24 14 dqhj figs-idiom מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 Hur This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 24 16 j2s5 figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s glory This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 24 16 sb1o translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 Yahweh’s glory Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 Yahweh’s glory Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 24 17 e4n6 figs-simile כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 like a devouring fire This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 24 17 k5lj figs-metaphor לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 in the eyes of the Israelites Their **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about what they saw. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See how you translated a similar expression in [15:26](../15/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 Yahweh’s glory If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 24 17 e4n6 figs-simile כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 like a devouring fire This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly, like a fire. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 24 17 k5lj figs-idiom לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 in the eyes of the Israelites Their **eyes** represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about what they saw. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See how you translated a similar expression in [15:26](../15/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 24 18 h1wy translate-numbers אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה 1 forty days and forty nights Alternate translation: “forty days and forty nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 25 intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes\n\n## Structure:\n\n* v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place where they will worship God\n* v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions\n* v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony\n* v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table\n* v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand\n* v. 40: Summary instruction\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n* The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.\n* Translators will need to take special care in translating the concept of atonement.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues in this Chapter:\n\n* There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.\n* There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.\n* From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30, almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you,” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
EXO 25 2 ygtd figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֙ 1 who is motivated by a willing heart The beginning of this verse marks the start of a very long direct quote which continues until the end of [Exo 30:10](../30/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -1733,29 +1636,29 @@ EXO 25 2 r5yr figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔ EXO 25 2 k78q figs-youdual תִּקְח֖וּ 1 You must receive The word **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the leaders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 25 4 c1qn figs-explicit וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, and scarlet material This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 25 4 c958 translate-unknown וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 scarlet A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 25 5 ayup translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 scarlet When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish in color. It is not clear whetherfff these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 25 5 ayup translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 scarlet When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish in color. It is not clear whether these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 5 va28 translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 scarlet The meaning of this word is not known. It may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 5 d4fa translate-unknown שִׁטִּֽים 1 scarlet A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 6 i6gp translate-unknown בְּשָׂמִים֙ 1 spices Here, **spices** are things made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 7 mg4f translate-unknown אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֕הַם 1 onyx An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 7 c3hk וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 precious stones Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “ and treasured gems for” -EXO 25 9 m1np figs-you אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 show you in the plans Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 25 9 w4sc כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו 1 tabernacle Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the dwelling, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements” +EXO 25 9 m1np figs-yousingular אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 show you in the plans Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +EXO 25 9 w4sc כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו 1 tabernacle Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the Dwelling, as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements” EXO 25 9 c9qe figs-youdual תַּעֲשֽׂוּ 1 You must make it Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 25 9 tc2k figs-123person תַּעֲשֽׂוּ 1 You must make it Since Moses does not construct these items himself, you may consider shifting the instructions to the third person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they shall make it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 25 10 o8dl translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֑ים 1 two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half These trees, **acacias**, are small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 25 10 cs23 translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֨יִם וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 25 10 saf8 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 25 10 cs23 translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֨יִם וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 25 10 saf8 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֜צִי…וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 25 12 wbq8 translate-unknown וְ⁠יָצַ֣קְתָּ לּ֗⁠וֹ אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת זָהָ֔ב 1 cast four rings of gold Casting rings was a process in which gold was melted, poured into a mold that was in the shape of a ring, and then allowed to cool and harden. If this sort of metal-working process is unknown to your people, you may simply describe it, or use a word meaning “make,” as the UST does. The UST approach is preferred, as the creation process is not in focus here, and it would be cumbersome to include the description in the text. You could use a word meaning “make,” and include the description in a footnote if you are including those and your team feels it is important to understand. Alternate translation: “You shall make four rings of gold by melting the gold and pouring it into molds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 13 i5mc translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֑ים 1 cast four rings of gold A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 25 15 k67p figs-parallelism בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 General Information: These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If it is confusing for your readers to repeat both phrases, you can combine them and show the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 25 15 k67p figs-parallelism בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 General Information: These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 25 15 aea1 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠טַבְּעֹת֙ הָ⁠אָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַ⁠בַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 General Information: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 25 17 ast8 translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 25 17 c8o7 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 25 17 ast8 translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 25 17 c8o7 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֨צִי֙…וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two and a half cubits…a cubit and a half A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 25 19 b4l9 מִן־הַ⁠כַּפֹּ֛רֶת תַּעֲשׂ֥וּ אֶת־הַ⁠כְּרֻבִ֖ים עַל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 They must be made This seems to indicate that the cherubim should be formed out of the same piece of gold as the rest of the lid. It may, however, mean that at the end they should be one piece, so the gold should be heated to melting and the lid and cherubim joined together. Alternate translation: “You shall join the cherubim to the atonement lid on its two ends” -EXO 25 22 zu9u figs-you לְ⁠ךָ֮…אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜…אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 It is at the ark that I will meet with you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. If you have been using a plural you for Yahweh’s commands which have been to give to others, make sure you use the singular form of “you” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 25 23 t312 translate-bdistance שִׁטִּ֑ים אַמָּתַ֤יִם אָרְכּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אַמָּ֣ה רָחְבּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי קֹמָתֽ⁠וֹ 1 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115 centimeters … 46 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 25 23 a2o9 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 25 22 zu9u figs-yousingular לְ⁠ךָ֮…אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜…אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 It is at the ark that I will meet with you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. If you have been using a plural you for Yahweh’s commands which have been to give to others, make sure you use the singular form of “you” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +EXO 25 23 t312 translate-bdistance שִׁטִּ֑ים אַמָּתַ֤יִם אָרְכּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אַמָּ֣ה רָחְבּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַמָּ֥ה וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי קֹמָתֽ⁠וֹ 1 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115 centimeters … 46 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 25 23 a2o9 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 25 24 f20e 0 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half This verse is almost identical to [25:11](../25/11.md). EXO 25 25 awi7 translate-bdistance טֹ֖פַח 1 one handbreadth wide You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **handbreadth** is a measurement of approximately eight centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 25 25 bit8 לּ֥⁠וֹ 1 frame for it Alternate translation: “for the table” @@ -1767,24 +1670,24 @@ EXO 25 30 uth7 figs-metonymy לֶ֥חֶם פָּנִ֖ים 1 bread of the presen EXO 25 30 kh7c figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנַ֥⁠י 1 bread of the presence Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 25 31 kc3q מִקְשָׁ֞ה 1 hammered gold Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). EXO 25 31 g25l figs-activepassive תֵּעָשֶׂ֤ה 1 The lampstand is to be made If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you shall make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 25 33 i7bh translate-unknown מְֽשֻׁקָּדִ֞ים 1 almond blossoms An almond blossom is a white or pink flower that has five petals. (An almond is a kind of nut.) You may want to include a short description as a footnote or in the text (if that is your translation style) the first time this object is encountered. Alternate translation: “shaped like the five-petaled almond flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 25 33 i7bh translate-unknown מְֽשֻׁקָּדִ֞ים 1 almond blossoms **Almond blossoms** are white or pink flowers with five petals. (An almond is a kind of nut.) You may want to include a short description as a footnote or in the text (if that is your translation style) the first time this object is encountered. Alternate translation: “shaped like the five-petaled almond flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 35 lk10 וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַ⁠קָּנִ֜ים מִמֶּ֗⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּר֙ תַּ֣חַת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠קָּנִים֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֕ר תַּחַת־שְׁנֵ֥י הַ⁠קָּנִ֖ים מִמֶּ֑⁠נָּה לְ⁠שֵׁ֨שֶׁת֙ הַ⁠קָּנִ֔ים הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֖ים מִן־הַ⁠מְּנֹרָֽה 1 made as one piece with it Alternate translation: “There must be a leafy base under the first pair of branches—made as one piece with it, and a leafy base under the second pair of branches—also made as one piece with it. In the same way there must be a leafy base under the third pair of branches, made as one piece with it. It must be the same for all six branches extending out from the lampstand.” EXO 25 36 r7yz מִקְשָׁ֥ה 1 made as one piece with it Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). EXO 25 37 dfn6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הֵאִ֖יר עַל־עֵ֥בֶר פָּנֶֽי⁠הָ 1 for them to give light from it Here, **face** figuratively represents the location of the lampstand. Alternate translation: “so they shine light near it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 25 39 ff5p translate-bweight כִּכָּ֛ר 1 one talent You can convert this weight to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 25 40 y081 figs-explicit וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain All the items described in this chapter are included in what Moses is told to **see and make**. You could make that explicit in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 25 39 ff5p translate-bweight כִּכָּ֛ר 1 one talent If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 25 40 y081 figs-explicit וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain All the items described in this chapter are included in what Moses is told to **see and make**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 25 40 gyte figs-metonymy וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Observe carefully and work exactly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 25 40 l7je figs-activepassive אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 26 intro emw7 0 # Exodus 26 General Notes\n\n\n- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.\n- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent\n * v. 1-6: Inner covering\n * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers\n * v. 15-30: Wooden framework\n- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent\n- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the dwelling. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent,” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place and which has taken on religious significance via the King James Version of the Bible. The terms “tabernacle” and “tent” should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
-EXO 26 1 ks8r figs-you תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה 1 You must make Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. Alternate translation: “, tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 26 intro emw7 0 # Exodus 26 General Notes\n\n- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.\n- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place (also known as Holy of Holies) ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent\n * v. 1-6: Inner covering\n * v. 7-14: Outer covering layers\n * v. 15-30: Wooden framework\n- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent\n- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the Dwelling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n
+EXO 26 1 ks8r figs-yousingular תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה 1 You must make Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. Alternate translation: “, tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 26 1 vre7 וּ⁠תְכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 curtains This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). EXO 26 1 xvs7 translate-unknown וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 scarlet wool A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 1 ni5d translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 scarlet wool This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 1 n2vm חֹשֵׁ֖ב 1 craftsman a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand -EXO 26 2 dkr6 translate-bdistance שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 twenty-eight cubits…four cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9 meters … 184 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 26 2 dkr6 translate-bdistance שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 twenty-eight cubits…four cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9 meters … 184 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 3 ba6w figs-activepassive חֲמֵ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֗ת תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ וְ⁠חָמֵ֤שׁ יְרִיעֹת֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 Five curtains must be joined to each other…must also be joined to each other If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Join five of the curtains each to another, and join five of the curtains each to another.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 26 4 ghz8 תְּכֵ֗לֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “blue yarn” or “blue cloth” -EXO 26 4 wdum translate-ordinal הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 26 4 wdum translate-ordinal הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 26 4 d0sl בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “in one set of five curtains” EXO 26 4 gjt1 בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set Alternate translation: “in the other set of five curtains” EXO 26 5 nkr7 figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 one set This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1794,20 +1697,20 @@ EXO 26 6 b242 אֶחָֽד 1 clasps Alternate translation: “as though it were EXO 26 7 jeaz לְ⁠אֹ֖הֶל 1 eleven This refers to a outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “for an outer tent” EXO 26 7 t7t3 translate-numbers עַשְׁתֵּי־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה 1 eleven Alternate translation: “eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 26 8 p423 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁים֙…אַרְבַּ֣ע…לְ⁠עַשְׁתֵּ֥י עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה 1 thirty…four Alternate translation: “thirty … four … eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 26 8 v7i1 translate-bdistance שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 26 8 v7i1 translate-bdistance שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 9 kb9x figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits Here, **face** is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 26 9 q3og הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits As in [verse 7](../26/07.md), **the tent** refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent” EXO 26 10 etf7 0 loops See how you translated a very similar text in [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md). EXO 26 11 cq36 translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֙ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 26 12 hftk translate-fraction חֲצִ֤י 1 clasps The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) -EXO 26 13 k4ci translate-bdistance וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה 1 cubit You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 26 12 hftk translate-fraction חֲצִ֤י 1 clasps A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 26 13 k4ci translate-bdistance וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה 1 cubit If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 14 kii8 translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 a covering of ram skins dyed red, and another covering of fine leather The meaning of this word, **sea cows**, is not known. It may refer to a water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 14 yz3v translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֑ים 1 dyed red When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 15 y85l translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים 1 frames Here, **frames** refers to open wooden structures made to hold the curtains. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 15 tw2h translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֖ים 1 frames The **acacias** are relatively small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 16 k4b7 translate-numbers עֶ֥שֶׂר…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits Alternate translation: “10 … 1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 26 16 z2rv translate-bdistance עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 26 16 p3av translate-fraction וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 26 16 z2rv translate-bdistance עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 26 16 p3av translate-fraction וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 26 17 zwfj translate-unknown יָד֗וֹת 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits Here, the term **tenons** means a part of the wood sticking out from the rest of the frame so that it can be put into a hole in another object. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 17 xf6s figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” See how you translated this in [26:5](../26/05.md). Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 26 19 c9id אַדְנֵי־כֶ֔סֶף 1 silver bases The **bases of silver** were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place and off the ground. @@ -1821,19 +1724,19 @@ EXO 26 29 nq3m לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 crossbars The **crossbars** are ho EXO 26 30 csf9 figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר 1 you were shown on the mountain If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 26 31 yqi6 0 General Information: See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 26 33 p2yq translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 26 33 x28l figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the most holy place” or “the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 26 34 u3tu figs-possession בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the most holy place” or “in the extraordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 26 33 x28l figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” or “the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 26 34 u3tu figs-possession בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the Most Holy Place” or “in the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 26 35 lv9e הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙ 1 The table must be on the north side This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md). EXO 26 36 tiz7 0 The table must be on the north side See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 26 36 rr16 תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, and scarlet material This could mean: (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). EXO 26 36 f6td translate-unknown וְ⁠שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר 1 fine twined linen This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 36 r2fy translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 an embroiderer Alternate translation: “a person who sews decorative designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 37 av60 0 an embroiderer See how you translated very similar instructions in [verse 32](../26/32.md). -EXO 27 intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar\n- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent\n- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand\n\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building (around the tent of meeting) of the courtyard area containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.\n- There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.
-EXO 27 1 s8qy translate-bdistance חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 27 intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.\n- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar\n- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent\n- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tent of meeting\n\nThis chapter gives specific instructions regarding building the courtyard area around the Dwelling containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs. Others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.\n- There continue to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.\n
+EXO 27 1 s8qy translate-bdistance חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 4 hsq3 מִכְבָּ֔ר 1 grate The **grate** is a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning. EXO 27 4 vlau וְ⁠עָשִׂ֣יתָ עַל־הָ⁠רֶ֗שֶׁת אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת נְחֹ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ל אַרְבַּ֥ע קְצוֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 grate You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), and [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md). -EXO 27 5 c5em figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ 1 You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 27 5 c5em figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ 1 You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar The grate was placed inside the altar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 27 7 b3yx figs-activepassive וְ⁠הוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖י⁠ו 1 The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 27 8 ecmh figs-123person הֶרְאָ֥ה 1 The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it Here, **he** refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way, you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 27 8 frcs figs-123person יַעֲשֽׂוּ 1 The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it Here, **they** refers to whoever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout, these instructions are meant to be conveyed to Israelite craftsmen. See [25:intro](../25/intro.md) for more. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -1841,7 +1744,7 @@ EXO 27 9 v748 translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 fine twined li EXO 27 9 ce9a translate-bdistance מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙ 1 one hundred cubits You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 10 qq8f וְ⁠עַמֻּדָ֣י⁠ו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 one hundred cubits Here, **bronze** may refer to both the **pillars** and the **bases**, or just to the **bases.** The pillars inside the tent were of wood overlaid with gold; these may be wood overlaid with bronze. EXO 27 11 gjg5 0 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9-10](../27/09.md). -EXO 27 11 ynao figs-ellipsis מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 27 11 ynao figs-ellipsis מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 27 11 xev2 translate-bdistance מֵ֣אָה 1 there must be hangings one hundred cubits long You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 12 p4u4 translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 there must be a curtain You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 13 w2sg translate-bdistance חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה 1 The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23 meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) @@ -1854,23 +1757,25 @@ EXO 27 15 o49h וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 bases The **bases** were meta EXO 27 16 kn9u 0 blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen See how you translated a nearly identical passage in [26:36](../26/36.md). EXO 27 16 g5wi translate-bdistance עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה 1 an embroiderer You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 17 wtng figs-activepassive מְחֻשָּׁקִ֣ים 1 an embroiderer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Among other options not so relevant here, Wiktionary suggests that a **fillet** could be a “thin strip of any material, in various technical uses,” “thin featureless molding used as separation between broader decorative moldings,” or a rounded corner. Alternate translation: “you shall fillet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 27 18 wt7n translate-bdistance מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 one hundred cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 27 18 mu6b figs-ellipsis חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים 1 one hundred cubits Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 27 18 wt7n translate-bdistance מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 one hundred cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 meters … 23 meters … 2.3 meters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 27 18 mu6b figs-ellipsis חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים 1 one hundred cubits Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 27 19 bs7c translate-unknown יְתֵדֹתָ֛י⁠ו…יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 tent pegs The **tent pegs** are strong, sharp pieces of metal driven into the ground and used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or to secure ropes in order to create tension to stabilize something standing upright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 27 21 p7ru figs-synecdoche הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת 1 ark of testimony The **testimony** refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “is the Box of the Testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 27 21 nlwz יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ 1 ark of testimony Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it” EXO 27 21 j41s figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 ark of testimony Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 27 21 vr7m חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹ֣רֹתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 This requirement will be a lasting statute See how you translated a similar statement in [12:14](../12/14.md) EXO 28 intro r3yx 0 # Exodus 28 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests\n- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing\n- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod\n * v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod\n- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece\n * v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece\n * v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod\n- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart\n- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates\n- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban\n- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing\n- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments\n- v. 43b: Closing statement\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Holy garments\n\nBecause Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they had to be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\n- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstones. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.\n
-EXO 28 1 e1xb figs-you וְ⁠אַתָּ֡ה 1 Call to yourself Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case it is about something he must do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 28 1 e1xb figs-yousingular וְ⁠אַתָּ֡ה 1 Call to yourself Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 28 1 w9ls translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֨ן אָחִ֜י⁠ךָ 1 Call to yourself Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 28 1 ofgr translate-names נָדָ֧ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֛וּא אֶלְעָזָ֥ר וְ⁠אִיתָמָ֖ר 1 Call to yourself These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 28 3 n17y figs-you וְ⁠אַתָּ֗ה 1 Call to yourself Here, **you** refers to Moses. In this case it is about something he must do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 28 3 c9pv figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה 1 Call to yourself There is a little bit of parallelism here. Yahweh is clarifying who causes someone to be **wise of heart**. You could translate this in a more causal way if that would make more sense. Alternate translation: “to anyone whom I have filled with the spirit of wisdom, making them wise of heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 28 2 zxy0 figs-abstractnouns בִגְדֵי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 Call to yourself If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 28 3 n17y figs-you וְ⁠אַתָּ֗ה 1 Call to yourself Here, **you** refers to Moses; in this case, it is used to highlight that he is the person who must do the next thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +EXO 28 3 c9pv figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה 1 Call to yourself There is a little bit of parallelism here. Yahweh is clarifying who causes someone to be **wise of heart**. You could translate this in a more causative way if that would make more sense. Alternate translation: “to anyone whom I have filled with the spirit of wisdom, making them wise of heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 28 3 wt7m figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֥ר מִלֵּאתִ֖י⁠ו ר֣וּחַ חָכְמָ֑ה 1 Call to yourself Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person that is, traits of a person. **Wisdom** refers to skill or talent with crafting in this case. Together **wise of heart** and **filled with the spirit of wisdom** both essentially mean “a talented craftsman.” If it would be more clear to your readers, you may consider making some of this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to every talented craftsman, those whom I have made skilled in their work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 4 tr5e וּ⁠כְתֹ֥נֶת תַּשְׁבֵּ֖ץ 1 a coat of woven work We do not know what word translated **of woven work** means, as it only occurs here and in [verse 39](../28/39.md) as a verb. Alternate translation: “and a checkered tunic” or "an embroidered garment" EXO 28 4 dz5h translate-unknown מִצְנֶ֣פֶת 1 turban This is a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 4 k184 translate-unknown וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֑ט 1 sash The **sash** is a piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. You may translate it with a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 4 jqtg figs-abstractnouns בִגְדֵי־קֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 sash If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 28 5 rxke translate-unknown וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֖לֶת וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן וְ⁠אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 sash This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 5 pfq5 translate-unknown תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 sash A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 6 u3rx translate-unknown וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ מָשְׁזָ֖ר 1 fine-twined linen This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). Alternate translation: “fine twined linen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1895,27 +1800,27 @@ EXO 28 16 cny4 translate-bdistance זֶ֥רֶת…וְ⁠זֶ֥רֶת 1 span You EXO 28 16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 span Alternate translation: “Fold it in half so it will be square” EXO 28 17 spd4 translate-unknown 0 General Information: Twelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 17 n1ys translate-unknown אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּ⁠בָרֶ֔קֶת 1 ruby…topaz…garnet These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 18 qq9g translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 emerald…diamond Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 18 qq9g translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 emerald…diamond If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 18 ga1v translate-unknown נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְ⁠יָהֲלֹֽם 1 emerald…diamond These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 18 a5rr translate-unknown סַפִּ֖יר 1 sapphire This is a gemstone that is blue in color. See how you translated this in [Exodus 24:10](../24/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 19 uw42 translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י 1 sapphire Alternate translation: “And row 3:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 19 uw42 translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י 1 sapphire If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 3:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 19 z17r translate-unknown לֶ֥שֶׁם שְׁב֖וֹ וְ⁠אַחְלָֽמָה 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst These are precious stones (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 20 ekaf translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיעִ֔י 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst Alternate translation: “And row 4:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 20 ekaf translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיעִ֔י 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 4:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 20 ul2e translate-unknown תַּרְשִׁ֥ישׁ וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם וְ⁠יָשְׁפֵ֑ה 1 beryl…jasper These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 20 rgf6 translate-unknown וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם 1 onyx An **onyx** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. See how you translated these in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 20 pw5h figs-activepassive מְשֻׁבָּצִ֥ים זָהָ֛ב יִהְי֖וּ 1 They must be mounted in gold settings If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall set them in gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 21 z8mw translate-unknown פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙ 1 signet ring This is an engraved stone often set into a ring and used to stamp a design into a wax seal to authenticate an official document. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 22 m7yl translate-unknown שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר 1 chains like cords, braided work of pure gold See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). Alternate translation (place at **twisted chains**): “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 22 m7yl translate-unknown שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר 1 chains like cords, braided work of pure gold See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). Alternate translation (should replace **twisted chains**): “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 25 d8y3 figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 braided chains Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 28 25 a4lc figs-explicit עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽ⁠מִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת 1 to the two settings These are two settings that enclose the stones. This can be clearly stated in the translation. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 28 25 a4lc figs-explicit עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽ⁠מִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת 1 to the two settings These are two settings that enclose the stones. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 28 27 f2nn figs-metonymy פָּנָ֔י⁠ו 1 braided chains Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 27 vw1w translate-unknown לְ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב 1 finely-woven waistband The **waistband** was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 28 se56 figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל 1 so that it might be attached If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 28 28 wf9v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל 1 the breastpiece might not become unattached from the ephod This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 28 28 wf9v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל 1 the breastpiece might not become unattached from the ephod If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 28 29 z1mz שְׁמ֨וֹת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 he must carry the names of the people of Israel over his heart in the breastpiece This refers to the names of the tribes engraved on the twelve stones the breastplate as described in [Exodus 28:17-21](./17.md). EXO 28 29 cc97 עַל־לִבּ֖⁠וֹ 1 over his heart Alternate translation: “over Aaron’s heart” or “on his chest” -EXO 28 30 dgn9 translate-unknown הָ⁠אוּרִים֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תֻּמִּ֔ים 1 the Urim and the Thummim It not clear what **the Urim and the Thummim** are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to somehow determine the will of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 30 f537 translate-unknown וְ⁠נָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד 1 the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions The second phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 30 dgn9 translate-transliterate הָ⁠אוּרִים֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תֻּמִּ֔ים 1 the Urim and the Thummim It is not clear what **the Urim and the Thummim** are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to somehow determine the will of God. Because of this, it is basically impossible to translate. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +EXO 28 30 f537 translate-unknown וְ⁠נָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד 1 the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions This phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 30 fep5 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh … before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 32 x42n מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג 1 This must be the work of a weaver Alternate translation: "made by a weaver" EXO 28 32 rw96 translate-unknown אֹרֵ֗ג 1 a weaver Alternate translation: “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread, yarns and wool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1925,15 +1830,15 @@ EXO 28 33 qm1f translate-unknown תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן EXO 28 34 kl55 פַּעֲמֹ֤ן זָהָב֙ וְ⁠רִמּ֔וֹן פַּֽעֲמֹ֥ן זָהָ֖ב וְ⁠רִמּ֑וֹן 1 a golden bell and a pomegranate This phrase is repeated to show the pattern of the design on the robe. Alternate translation: “alternate pomegranates and golden bells” EXO 28 35 pf61 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַ֣ע ק֠וֹל⁠וֹ 1 so that its sound can be heard If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the bells make a sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 35 fmqu figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its sound can be heard Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 28 35 ky8s figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its sound can be heard Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If it would be more natural in your language, you may need to change this to first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 28 35 qtf9 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמֽוּת 1 This is so that he does not die The probable implication is that he would die because he did not obey Yahweh. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “As a result, he will not die because of disobeying my instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 28 35 ky8s figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its sound can be heard Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 28 35 qtf9 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמֽוּת 1 This is so that he does not die The probable implication is that he would die because he did not obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result, he will not die because of disobeying my instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 28 36 mzej translate-unknown צִּ֖יץ 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet We do not know exactly what this was. It was probably a thin piece of gold smaller than the palm of someone’s hand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 36 nd2q translate-unknown וּ⁠פִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָי⁠ו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet Alternate translation: “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” See how you translated similar words in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 36 nd2q translate-unknown וּ⁠פִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָי⁠ו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet See how you translated similar words in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md) Alternate translation: “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 37 qka6 translate-unknown הַ⁠מִּצְנָ֑פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 turban This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 37 lxq8 figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פְּנֵֽי־הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 turban Here, **face** means the front. Alternate translation: “to the front of the turban” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 38 frqm figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָשָׂ֨א אַהֲרֹ֜ן אֶת־עֲוֺ֣ן הַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁ֗ים 1 turban Here, **iniquity** is pictured as something that can be carried or worn like the turban. It also seems to picture handing off the iniquity from the people to Aaron. Also here, **iniquity** actually seems to refer to the punishment for anything that might be wrong regarding the things the Israelites offer Yahweh. You may need to use a different word than **bear** to convey the transfer of responsibility for wrongs from the people to Aaron. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and Aaron shall be responsible for any wrong related to the holy things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 28 38 chuz figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 turban Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 28 38 jbt4 figs-123person יְהוָֽה 1 turban Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person, if it would be more natural in your language you may need to change this to first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 28 38 jbt4 figs-123person יְהוָֽה 1 turban Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 28 39 t5vj translate-unknown מִצְנֶ֣פֶת 1 turban This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 39 yi1l translate-unknown וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֥ט 1 sash A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that a person wears around his waist or across his chest. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 39 i62z translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 the work of an embroiderer An embroiderer is a person who sews decorative designs onto cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1943,27 +1848,28 @@ EXO 28 41 xa75 translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔י⁠ךָ 1 You must EXO 28 41 agey figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם 1 You must clothe Aaron your brother This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 28 42 vz62 translate-unknown מִכְנְסֵי 1 undergarments These are articles of clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 42 m1bi figs-euphemism בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה 1 undergarments This refers to the male genitalia. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 29 intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes\n\nLarge translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.\n\n## Structure\n\nAs you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.\nThe Consecration of the Priests\n- v. 1-3 Preparing items\n- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons\n- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar\n- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams\n * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned\n * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating\n * v. 29-30 Priestly succession\n * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram\n- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days\n- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings\n- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Consecrating priests\n\nThis chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n### Forms of you\n\nFor this chapter, it seems that the singular "you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.\n\n### “I will live among the Israelites”\n\nAs God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.
+EXO 29 intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes\n\nLarge translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.\n\n## Structure\n\nAs you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole; the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.\nThe Consecration of the Priests\n- v. 1-3 Preparing items\n- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons\n- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar\n- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams\n * v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned\n * v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating\n * v. 29-30 Priestly succession\n * v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram\n- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days\n- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings\n- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Consecrating priests\n\nThis chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n### Forms of you\n\nFor this chapter, it seems that the singular "you: that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters now actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.\n\n### “I will live among the Israelites”\n\nAs God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark.\n
EXO 29 1 d6gk writing-newevent וְ⁠זֶ֨ה 1 Now A new scene begins here. There is a change in topic from instructions for making garments for priests to consecrating priests. This may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 29 1 z78h writing-pronouns תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה 1 you must do Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 29 1 ld5s writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 to set them apart Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 29 1 dq2c writing-pronouns לִ֑⁠י 1 serve me Here **me** refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 29 1 ld5s writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 to set them apart Here, **they** refers to Aaron and his sons. Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 29 1 dq2c writing-pronouns לִ֑⁠י 1 serve me Here, **me** refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 1 jhj3 figs-idiom בֶּן־בָּקָ֛ר 1 serve me This is an idiom meaning young. If you do not have a similar idiom you may translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “a young one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 2 ptm7 figs-activepassive בְּלוּלֹ֣ת בַּ⁠שֶּׁ֔מֶן…מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן 1 Also take wafers without yeast rubbed with oil If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to shorten the sentences and make the alternate translation content separate sentences or mark it off with special punctuation. Alternate translation: “(mix them with oil) … (rub them with oil)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 29 2 wkyb וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י מַצּ֖וֹת מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן 1 Also take wafers without yeast rubbed with oil These may have been rubbed with oil before or after baking. EXO 29 2 r449 translate-unknown וְ⁠חַלֹּ֤ת…וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י 1 bread…cakes…wafers These are different kinds of food made from flour. While all the breads were somewhat flat because they were unleavened, the **cakes** were a bread enriched with oil, and the **wafers** were especially thin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 3 gm58 writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 You must put them Alternate translation: “the bread, cakes, and wafers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 3 cd6m וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠סָּ֑ל וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־הַ⁠פָּ֔ר וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֵילִֽם 1 present them with the bull and the two rams Here, **in the basket** is almost parenthetical. You may need to restructure the sentence or use punctuation to make it clear that **the bull and the two rams** are connected to **bring**, and not to **in the basket.** Alternate translation: “and you shall bring them near (in the basket) along with the bull and the two rams” -EXO 29 4 a6rz אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting The **tent of meeting** is another name for the dwelling. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md). +EXO 29 4 a6rz אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting The **tent of meeting** is another name for the Dwelling. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md). EXO 29 5 pr4i translate-unknown בְּ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב 1 finely-woven waistband This was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 6 ap2x translate-unknown הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנָֽפֶת 1 turban This was a head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 6 y59s translate-unknown נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ 1 holy crown This **crown** is described in [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md) as being engraved with the words “Holy to Yahweh” and made of pure gold. There it is referred to by a different Hebrew word, which is translated as “rosette.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 7 rwuj translate-unknown שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה 1 holy crown See how you translated **oil of anointing" in [25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 29 6 n4bt figs-abstractnouns אֶת־נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ 1 holy crown If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 29 7 rwuj translate-unknown שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה 1 holy crown See how you translated **oil of anointing** in [25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 8 v46k writing-pronouns בָּנָ֖י⁠ו 1 bring his sons Alternate translation: “Aaron’s sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 9 j3a8 translate-unknown אַבְנֵ֜ט 1 sashes A **sash** is a decorative piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. See how you translated this word in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 bh2d translate-unknown מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת 1 headbands A headband is a narrow, decorative strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:40](../28/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 r1x4 translate-unknown כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 The work of the priesthood Here, **the priesthood** means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 9 ze9l figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 will belong to them The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. You can state this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And the priesthood will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 29 9 ze9l figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 will belong to them The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And the priesthood will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 9 p7m9 לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם 1 permanent law Alternate translation: “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md). EXO 29 9 zbzk figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 permanent law The phrase, **fill the hand**, seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 9 jhwb וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 tent of meeting The phrase, **fill the hand** may be (1) a summary and reminder statement of the whole ordination process, (2) referring to the previous description, meaning that the priests have been ordained, or (3) referring to the following description, meaning that the priests are about to be ordained. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text. @@ -1981,25 +1887,26 @@ EXO 29 17 w2nb translate-unknown קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙ 1 the inner parts Alterna EXO 29 18 qc2i וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אַ֨יִל֙ 1 on the altar Alternate translation: “and burn all of the ram to make smoke” EXO 29 18 pwjk figs-parallelism עֹלָ֥ה ה֖וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה רֵ֣יחַ נִיח֔וֹחַ אִשֶּׁ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 on the altar These phrases are in parallel, with the second expanding and clarifying the first. In some languages, you may need to use a different structure to expand and clarify the **burnt offering**. Alternate translation: “It is a pleasant smelling burnt offering made by fire to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 29 19 zzsi הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 on the altar Except for **the second,** this verse is identical to [verse 15](../29/15.md). -EXO 29 20 j6b1 figs-explicit וְ⁠שָׁחַטְתָּ֣ אֶת־הָ⁠אַ֗יִל 1 Then you must kill the ram They killed the ram by cutting its throat. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “and kill the ram by cutting its throat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 29 21 bxs6 figs-explicit וְ⁠לָקַחְתָּ֞ מִן־הַ⁠דָּ֨ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עַֽל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּחַ֮ וּ⁠מִ⁠שֶּׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָה֒ וְ⁠הִזֵּיתָ֤ 1 Aaron will then be set apart for me Moses would mix the blood and oil. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “And you shall take some of the blood that is on the altar and mix it with some of the oil of anointing and sprinkle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 29 20 j6b1 figs-explicit וְ⁠שָׁחַטְתָּ֣ אֶת־הָ⁠אַ֗יִל 1 Then you must kill the ram They killed the ram by cutting its throat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and kill the ram by cutting its throat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 29 21 bxs6 figs-explicit וְ⁠לָקַחְתָּ֞ מִן־הַ⁠דָּ֨ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עַֽל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּחַ֮ וּ⁠מִ⁠שֶּׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָה֒ וְ⁠הִזֵּיתָ֤ 1 Aaron will then be set apart for me Moses would mix the blood and oil. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And you shall take some of the blood that is on the altar and mix it with some of the oil of anointing and sprinkle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 22 i3dc translate-unknown הַ⁠קֶּ֗רֶב…הַ⁠כָּבֵד֙…הַ⁠כָּבֵד֙ 1 inner parts…liver…kidney The **entrails** and **liver** refer to organs inside the body. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 23 mcko וְ⁠כִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽ⁠חַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְ⁠רָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִ⁠סַּל֙ הַ⁠מַּצּ֔וֹת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 Take one loaf…before Yahweh All of these items were in the basket mentioned in [verse 2](../29/02.md), not just the wafer. Be sure this is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “and from the basket of bread without yeast that is before the face of Yahweh: one round loaf of bread, and one cake of bread of oil, and one wafer” EXO 29 23 td8w וְ⁠כִכַּ֨ר לֶ֜חֶם אַחַ֗ת וַֽ⁠חַלַּ֨ת לֶ֥חֶם שֶׁ֛מֶן אַחַ֖ת וְ⁠רָקִ֣יק אֶחָ֑ד מִ⁠סַּל֙ הַ⁠מַּצּ֔וֹת 1 Take one loaf…before Yahweh For 29:23, see how you translated similar words in [Exodus 29:2](../29/02.md). EXO 29 23 i7vx figs-metonymy אֲשֶׁ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 that is before Yahweh This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “that you have placed before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 24 b9bj writing-pronouns הַ⁠כֹּ֔ל 1 You must put these Here, **all these** refers to the parts of the sacrifice mentioned in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 29 24 q6k5 figs-123person וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ 1 You must put these While the text reads, **you shall raise**, logically, it is Aaron and his sons who will raise the offerings at this point. It may be clearer to your readers to change the person here. Alternate translation: “and they shall raise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 29 24 xhhf translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֛⁠ם תְּנוּפָ֖ה לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 You must put these The act of raising the meat and bread symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out the process of handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. Alternate translation: “and they shall show that they are giving them to me by holding them up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 29 24 q6k5 figs-123person וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ 1 You must put these While the text reads, **you shall raise**, logically, it is Aaron and his sons who will raise the offerings at this point. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the third person. Alternate translation: “and they shall raise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 29 24 xhhf translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֛⁠ם תְּנוּפָ֖ה לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 You must put these The act of raising the meat and bread symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out the process of handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they shall show that they are giving them to me by holding them up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 29 24 ypit figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 You must put these This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 25 e6bj וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֥ הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חָ⁠ה עַל־הָ⁠עֹלָ֑ה לְ⁠רֵ֤יחַ נִיח֨וֹחַ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה אִשֶּׁ֥ה ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 You must put these See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 18](../29/18.md). EXO 29 26 bf71 מֵ⁠אֵ֤יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִים֙ 1 ram of dedication See how you translated this in [verse 22](../29/22.md). Alternate translation: “from the ram that you dedicated” -EXO 29 26 c21f translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 29 27 dzkx translate-symaction הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 29 26 c21f translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 29 27 dzkx translate-symaction הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 29 28 uc2d וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons Alternate translation: “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people” EXO 29 28 q3ms מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some phrases if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to him” +EXO 29 29 qta8 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בִגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 29 29 a59z figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him **Fill their hand** seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in the clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 31 l3xk אֵ֥יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִ֖ים 1 the ram for the installation of the priests The **ram of consecration** refers to the second ram, the one described in [verses 19](../29/19.md) and following. -EXO 29 31 u9kl figs-explicit בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ 1 in a holy place This is not the same as the holy place outside of the most holy place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 29 31 u9kl figs-explicit בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ 1 in a holy place This is not the same as the Holy Place outside of the Most Holy Place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 33 mcdc figs-idiom לְ⁠מַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 in a holy place This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 34 rhp7 figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל 1 It must not be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 29 35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 General Information: Here, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times. @@ -2011,7 +1918,7 @@ EXO 29 37 pq5d figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Then the EXO 29 37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 will be set apart to Yahweh Alternate translation: “will also become set apart” EXO 29 38 e4r9 figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 General Information: The phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 39 qxst figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 General Information: The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 29 40 x6i4 translate-fraction וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית 1 a tenth…the fourth part Alternate translation: “1/10 of … 1/4 of … 1/4 of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 29 40 x6i4 translate-fraction וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית 1 a tenth…the fourth part A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. A **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 29 40 nd8q figs-explicit וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת 1 a tenth…the fourth part Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 40 oxsl translate-bvolume וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת…רֶ֣בַע הַ⁠הִ֔ין…רְבִעִ֥ית הַ⁠הִ֖ין 1 a tenth…the fourth part The values given in the UST are approximations as the exact size of an ephah and a hin is not precisely known. An ephah (the implied measurement) may have been around 22 liters, so this is about 2.2 liters of flour. A hin may have been around 3.7 liters, so this is about one liter of both oil and wine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 29 41 ibch figs-idiom בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם 1 a tenth…the fourth part The exact meaning of the phrase **between the evenings** is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. See how you translated it in [verse 39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2019,21 +1926,21 @@ EXO 29 42 j8cg לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations EXO 29 42 h5r7 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 tent of meeting This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 43 ic8i figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּ⁠כְבֹדִֽ⁠י 1 the tent will be set apart for me by my glory If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 30 intro z3yc 0 # Exodus 30 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.\nThe forms of "you" are mostly singular. However, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct, so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.\n\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-10: Incense altar\n * v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar\n * v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar\n- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census\n- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin\n- v. 22-30: Anointing oil\n * v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil\n * v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil\nv- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Atonement\n\nThrough the offering of blood and money, things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])\n\n\n### Holiness\n\nSome items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n\n### Unknown terms\n\nThere are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars.
-EXO 30 1 v8vb figs-you וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 You must make Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 30 1 v8vb figs-youdual וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 You must make Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 30 2 w56e translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 Its horns must be made See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 30 2 a39m translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 Its horns must be made You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 30 2 a39m translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 Its horns must be made If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 30 3 d3uu 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there. EXO 30 4 qyg4 0 to be attached to it When translating this verse, you may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md). EXO 30 4 bvxi figs-idiom לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים 1 to be attached to it Here, the word **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are figuratively their house. If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 6 ulvn figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 to be attached to it Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 30 6 e87s figs-you לְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 to be attached to it Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 30 6 e87s figs-yousingular לְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 to be attached to it Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 30 7 o1zo בַּ⁠בֹּ֣קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּ֗קֶר 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “Each morning” or “Daily, in the morning” EXO 30 7 l2rl בְּ⁠הֵיטִיב֛⁠וֹ אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֖ת 1 General Information: The lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day, so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready to burn again in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps” EXO 30 8 nrgk וּ⁠בְ⁠הַעֲלֹ֨ת אַהֲרֹ֧ן אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֛ת 1 throughout your generations This may indicate that in the morning Aaron had taken the lamps down, and he would light them and then put them up on the holders in the evening. EXO 30 8 sq7x figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עֲרְבַּ֖יִם 1 throughout your generations The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. See how you translated it in [29:39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 8 qm7i לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 9 ckf9 לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛י⁠ו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָרָ֖ה וְ⁠עֹלָ֣ה וּ⁠מִנְחָ֑ה 1 But you must offer Later, in [verses 34](../30/34.md) and following, God describes how to make the one sort of incense that he wants burnt on this altar. Alternate translation: “You shall only offer up the kind of incense I tell you. You shall not make burnt or grain offerings on it.” -EXO 30 10 dgny grammar-connect-logic-goal קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 horns This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +EXO 30 10 dgny grammar-connect-logic-goal קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 horns This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 10 k6xk קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו 1 horns These were projections that looked like ox horns and were attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). EXO 30 10 san2 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 10 jxn0 figs-possession קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים 1 throughout your generations Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -2042,9 +1949,9 @@ EXO 30 12 dprx figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 When you take EXO 30 12 s73c figs-you תִשָּׂ֞א 1 When you take This could mean: (1) **you** refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) **you** refers to just Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 12 k5p1 אִ֣ישׁ 1 a census of the Israelites The leaders only counted the Israelite men. EXO 30 13 y1kn figs-idiom כָּל־הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 half a shekel of silver This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 30 13 i4wk translate-bweight הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** and the **gerah** are units of weight. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 30 13 i4wk translate-bweight הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** and the **gerah** are units of weight. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 30 13 a2py translate-bmoney הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** was used as both a weight and a unit of money. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -EXO 30 13 w3hx translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 half a shekel of silver Alternate translation: “1/2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 30 13 w3hx translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 half a shekel of silver A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 30 13 nfp6 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ עֶשְׂרִ֤ים גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 according to the weight of the shekel of the sanctuary There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. EXO 30 14 uqt6 figs-idiom כֹּ֗ל הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 from twenty years old and up This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. It is the same phrase as in the [previous verse](../30/13.md). Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 14 vhim figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה 1 from twenty years old and up This is an idiom that refers to age. See the UST and how you translated the same idiom in [Exo 7:7](../07/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2053,7 +1960,7 @@ EXO 30 15 e8xa translate-bmoney מִֽ⁠מַּחֲצִ֖ית הַ⁠שָּׁ֑ EXO 30 15 ew8p figs-123person נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 the half shekel The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 30 16 z6tn וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives This sentence is very unclear. It is not clear who is being reminded of what. This could mean: (1) that it will remind Yahweh that the Israelites have given money for their lives, and therefore he should welcome them. (2) that it will remind the Israelites that they have given Yahweh money for their lives. Therefore, Yahweh will welcome them. EXO 30 16 mwix figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 30 18 v88y translate-unknown כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת 1 bronze basin Alternate translation: “bronze bowl” or “bronze tub” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 30 18 v88y translate-unknown כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת 1 bronze basin Alternate translation: “a bronze bowl” or “a bronze tub” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 18 bh82 וְ⁠כַנּ֥⁠וֹ 1 a bronze stand The **base** is what the basin would be put upon. EXO 30 18 iq8n לְ⁠רָחְצָ֑ה 1 a basin for washing This phrase, **for washing**, explains the purpose for which the priests were to use the bronze basin. EXO 30 19 ivb1 מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 water in it Alternate translation: “in the water in the basin” @@ -2061,18 +1968,20 @@ EXO 30 20 dyku figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 water in it The EXO 30 20 it0h grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 water in it Not dying is the goal of the priests’ washing. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 21 hp35 וְ⁠הָיְתָ֨ה לָ⁠הֶ֧ם חָק־עוֹלָ֛ם ל֥⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠זַרְע֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 for Aaron and his descendants throughout their people’s generations See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:17](../12/17.md). EXO 30 23 m9g7 translate-unknown בְּשָׂמִ֣ים 1 spices These are parts of dried plants (other than the leaves) which people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 30 23 zq43 figs-explicit חֲמֵ֣שׁ מֵא֔וֹת…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים וּ⁠מָאתָ֑יִם…חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠מָאתָֽיִם 1 five hundred shekels…250 shekels [The next verse](../30/24.md) mentions that these are shekel weight measurements. You may want to include some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “500 shekels … 250 shekels … 250 shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 30 23 zq43 figs-ellipsis חֲמֵ֣שׁ מֵא֔וֹת…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים וּ⁠מָאתָ֑יִם…חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠מָאתָֽיִם 1 five hundred shekels…250 shekels [The next verse](../30/24.md) mentions that these are shekel weight measurements. You may want to include some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “500 shekels … 250 shekels … 250 shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 30 23 xga2 translate-unknown וְ⁠קִנְּמָן 1 cinnamon…cane We know that **cinnamon** is a sweet spice taken from the inside of the bark of a tree that grows in south-east Asia. [See Wikipeda](https://wikipedia.org/wiki/Cinnamon) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 23 t2me translate-unknown וּ⁠קְנֵה 1 cinnamon…cane This plant is unknown to scholars. Alternate translation: “and reed of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 24 p9jh translate-unknown וְ⁠קִדָּ֕ה 1 cassia It is known that **cassia** is a sweet spice taken from the bark of a tree that grows in east Asia. It is slightly different than the spice cinnamon in the previous verse. [See Wikipeda](https://wikipedia.org/wiki/Cinnamomum_cassia) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 30 24 n38f translate-bweight בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 the weight of the shekel of the sanctuary There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 30 24 dv89 translate-bvolume הִֽין 1 one hin Translators may use units that people know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +EXO 30 24 n38f translate-bweight בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 the weight of the shekel of the sanctuary There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 30 24 dv89 translate-bvolume הִֽין 1 one hin If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the **hin**, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 30 25 k3s5 מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 the work of a perfumer This could mean: (1) Moses was to have an ointment mixer do the work. (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way an ointment mixer would do it. EXO 30 25 yv9l translate-unknown רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 a perfumer This is a person who is skilled in mixing spices and oils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 30 25 ioem figs-abstractnouns שֶׁ֥מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 a perfumer If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a holy oil of anointment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 30 26 u241 figs-you וּ⁠מָשַׁחְתָּ֥ 1 You must anoint Here, **you** may refer to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 29 np7g אֹתָ֔⁠ם 1 set them apart Here, **them** refers to the items listed in [Exodus 30:26-28](../30/26.md). EXO 30 29 m062 figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים 1 set them apart Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 31 k4s7 לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your people’s generations Alternate translation: “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 30 31 e2ti figs-abstractnouns שֶׁ֠מֶן מִשְׁחַת־קֹ֨דֶשׁ 1 throughout your people’s generations If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [30:25](../30/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 30 32 rlk4 figs-activepassive עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ 1 It must not be applied to people’s skin If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 30 32 v3br וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ 1 with the same formula Alternate translation: “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe” EXO 30 32 it0x grammar-connect-logic-result קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 with the same formula The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse, because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -2080,18 +1989,18 @@ EXO 30 33 pa53 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו EXO 30 33 yhgi figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 that person must be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 34 uo57 translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה…וּ⁠לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה 1 General Information: Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are: **stacte** is a resin from certain gum plants, **onycha** is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and **galbanum** is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 35 y8yj וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 blended by a perfumer This could mean: (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md). -EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it Here, **you** probably refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 36 oj2r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י 1 You will grind it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 36 mxww figs-metonymy הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙ 1 You will grind it Here, **testimony** probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 36 i71b figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים 1 You will grind it Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 30 36 t8y9 figs-you לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 You will regard Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 30 37 dq6c figs-you תַעֲשׂ֖וּ 1 you must not make any The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 30 36 t8y9 figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 You will regard Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) +EXO 30 37 dq6c figs-youdual תַעֲשׂ֖וּ 1 you must not make any The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 30 37 yv1y בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ 1 with the same formula Alternate translation: “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md). EXO 30 37 wh25 קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It must be most holy to you Alternate translation: “You must consider it to be most holy” EXO 30 38 xn6v לְ⁠הָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑⁠הּ 1 perfume This could mean: (1) to enjoy the scent for oneself (2) to wear as a perfume. EXO 30 38 sa1m figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 38 o6v0 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 31 intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter is the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nAs described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
+EXO 31 intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-11: Selection of the skilled craftsmen\n- v. 12-17: Sabbath instruction\n- v. 18: the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nAs described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n
EXO 31 2 m8ju figs-idiom קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם 1 I have called by name Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 31 2 hf5r translate-names בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר 1 Bezalel…Uri…Hur These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 31 3 f7sk figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2109,7 +2018,7 @@ EXO 31 14 dsya figs-quotemarks לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 throughout your people’s gene EXO 31 14 plq5 figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת 1 must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 31 14 fz1g figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה 1 must surely be cut off from his people See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 31 15 v4dv translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “the 7th” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 31 15 lrat שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “a Sabbath of complete rest” EXO 31 15 fxuo figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 31 16 t9hw figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 must keep the Sabbath Yahweh uses the phrase **keep my Sabbaths** as a metaphor for obeying his instructions about the Sabbath, as if it was a precious thing they should guard. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2120,22 +2029,22 @@ EXO 31 18 xc6h figs-activepassive כְּתֻבִ֖ים בְּ⁠אֶצְבַּ֥ EXO 32 intro vv2w 0 # Exodus 32 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occured while Moses spoke with God and therefore happened sometime during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])\n\n\n- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf\n- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction\n * v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people\n- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EXO 32 1 oan6 writing-newevent 0 the people saw This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 32 1 cfk8 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the people saw Here, the word **saw** is used to indicate understanding or realization of a situation. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 32 1 lnau figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם 1 the people saw This means the people were not summoned by Aaron to come to him, but instead they decided to **gather themselves.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 32 1 lnau figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם 1 the people saw This means the people both decided to gather and were the ones gathering. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 1 k2i1 figs-idiom ק֣וּם 1 Come, make us an idol **Arise** strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean that he should literally stand up. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 1 mrb5 figs-metonymy יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 go before us Here, **before our faces** means ahead of. The Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 1 wulk כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 go before us People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. -EXO 32 2 p86s writing-pronouns וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ 1 bring them to me The word **them** here refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 32 3 ckg2 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 All the people This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh and that the Israelites had a great deal more gold. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 32 2 p86s writing-pronouns וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ 1 bring them to me Here, **them** refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 32 3 ckg2 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 All the people This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh and that the Israelites had a great deal more gold. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that means many or most. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 32 4 uf9e translate-unknown וַ⁠יָּ֤צַר אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בַּ⁠חֶ֔רֶט וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשֵׂ֖⁠הוּ עֵ֣גֶל מַסֵּכָ֑ה 1 fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf Most likely this means that Aaron melted the gold and poured it into a mold that had the shape of a calf. When the gold cooled and became hard, he removed the mold, and the hardened gold had the shape of a calf. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 32 4 cc7s writing-pronouns וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf The identity of the speakers, referred to as **they**, remains unknown. Alternate translation: “And someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 32 4 ence figs-123person אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ 1 fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. Alternate translation: “our gods … brought us up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 32 4 ence figs-123person אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙…הֶעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ 1 fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf Because the speaker of this sentence is unknown and mentioned in the plural, it is possible that it is the people speaking. In that case, it would be possible for a translation to use the first person rather than second person here. Alternate translation: “These are our gods … brought us up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 32 4 n17v אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 fashioned it with an engraving tool and he made a cast idol in the shape of a calf In the text, there only appears to be one “god” (the golden calf idol) presented to Israel. If it would be clearer to your audience, you may consider translating **these … gods** as singular. Alternate translation: “this is your god” -EXO 32 5 ztx4 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 When Aaron saw this You may need to make explicit what he saw. “Aaron saw what the people did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 5 ztx4 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 When Aaron saw this If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what he saw explicitly. “Aaron saw what the people did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 5 odaq figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו 1 When Aaron saw this Here, **before its face** means in front of. Alternate translation: “in front of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 32 5 p2df figs-explicit לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו 1 When Aaron saw this Here, **it** is the golden bull-calf. Alternate translation: “in front of the bull-calf idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 5 p2df figs-explicit לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו 1 When Aaron saw this Here, **it** is the golden bull-calf. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in front of the bull-calf idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 6 as6u figs-euphemism לְ⁠צַחֵֽק 1 to carouse in wild celebration This word may imply drunken and sexual sin (for a sexual implication see [Genesis 26:8](../GEN/26/08)). However, the only actions mentioned in the text are singing ([v. 18](../32/18.md)) and dancing ([v. 19](../32/19.md)), so translators should avoid using a term that is overly suggestive. Alternate translation: “to revel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 32 7 iajs writing-newevent 0 to carouse in wild celebration Here there is a scene shift back to the top of the mountain with Moses and Yahweh, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 32 7 tcek figs-rpronouns שִׁחֵ֣ת 1 to carouse in wild celebration Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** is used to translate the fact that the Israelites actions made the Israelites corrupt. Alternate translation: “have acted corruptly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 32 7 tcek figs-rpronouns שִׁחֵ֣ת 1 to carouse in wild celebration Here, **themselves** is used to indicate that the Israelites actions made the Israelites corrupt. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “have acted corruptly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 8 eua5 figs-metaphor סָ֣רוּ מַהֵ֗ר מִן־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר צִוִּיתִ֔⁠ם 1 left the way that I commanded them Here God speaks of the people disobeying what he commanded them as if he had told them to walk on a certain road, and they left that road. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “They have quickly stopped doing what I commanded them to do” or “They have quickly stopped obeying what I commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 8 tg9e figs-quotemarks אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 left the way that I commanded them This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 32 8 w7v8 figs-quotesinquotes אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 left the way that I commanded them You may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “that these are your gods, Israel, that brought you up from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2145,13 +2054,13 @@ EXO 32 9 ffe2 figs-metaphor עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֖רֶף 1 a stiff-necked EXO 32 9 my87 grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…הֽוּא 1 a stiff-necked people The word **people** is a collective noun, so the pronouns referring to the people are singular. You may use plural pronouns if that is the normal usage in your language. Alternate translation: “these … they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 32 10 fmk3 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠עַתָּה֙ 1 Now then **So now** is used here to mark that Yahweh’s next statements are a result of what he has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 32 10 sd9w figs-idiom וְ⁠יִֽחַר־אַפִּ֥⁠י בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And let me be angry with them”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 10 vc2u writing-pronouns אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 from you The word **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 32 10 vc2u writing-pronouns אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 from you Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 32 11 h62e figs-rquestion לָ⁠מָ֤ה יְהוָה֙ יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הוֹצֵ֨אתָ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 why does your anger burn against your people…a mighty hand? Moses used this question to try to persuade Yahweh not to be so angry with his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, do not let your nose burn against your people whom you have brought out from the land of Egypt with great power and with a strong hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 32 11 nuwf figs-idiom יֶחֱרֶ֤ה אַפְּ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 My anger will burn hot against them This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry with his people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “are you angry with your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 11 t2cv figs-doublet בְּ⁠כֹ֥חַ גָּד֖וֹל וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 great power…mighty hand These two phrases share similar meanings and are combined for emphasis. If doubling in this way would not convey emphasis in your language, you will need to find a way to translate it that does give emphasis. Alternate translation: “using your very strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 32 11 ph43 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 a mighty hand Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “and with powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 12 r8ij figs-rquestion לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 32 12 yvez figs-quotesinquotes יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ After **saying,** this is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 32 12 yvez figs-quotesinquotes יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ After **saying,** this is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 12 kzh7 figs-metonymy מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 face of the earth Here, **face** means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the land” or “from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 12 fns1 שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry” EXO 32 12 iz5q figs-idiom שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠הִנָּחֵ֥ם עַל־הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה לְ⁠עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Here, Yahweh’s anger (burning nose) and plan to punish the people are spoken of as things that he could turn away from and repent of (repentance also means to turn from). This imagery may not translate into your language, and you may need to use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Calm down, and please do not stay determined to do evil to your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2167,7 +2076,7 @@ EXO 32 18 m4k0 figs-parallelism אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבו EXO 32 18 fdg8 figs-explicit ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses If it is unclear to say that Moses hears **the sound of singing** after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of [verse 6](../32/06.md) (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 19 hr2j figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 the tablets This is an idiom for being angry. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 the tablets Alternate translation: “at the bottom of” -EXO 32 21 du5l figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?” Moses’ question is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 32 21 du5l figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?” Moses’ question is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.\nHowever, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 21 np73 figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה 1 you have brought such a great sin on them Moses spoke of causing people to **sin** as if sin were an object and Aaron put it **on them**. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 22 z2ch figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 Do not let your anger burn hot This is an idiom for anger. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 22 vdy2 figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2175,32 +2084,32 @@ EXO 32 22 h6dm figs-123person הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil Here, **it EXO 32 23 w91d figs-quotesinquotes עֲשֵׂה־לָ֣⁠נוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵלְכ֖וּ לְ⁠פָנֵ֑י⁠נוּ כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱלָ֨⁠נוּ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם לֹ֥א יָדַ֖עְנוּ מֶה־הָ֥יָה לֽ⁠וֹ׃ 1 they are set on doing evil This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 23 zn68 זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ 1 this Moses People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating social distance between him and themselves. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. See how you translated this in [verse 1](../32/01.md). EXO 32 24 yq7s figs-quotesinquotes וָ⁠אֹמַ֤ר לָ⁠הֶם֙ לְ⁠מִ֣י זָהָ֔ב הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ **Whoever has gold, take it off yourself** is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, this can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “So I told them that whoever had any gold should take it off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 32 24 yy82 figs-rpronouns הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ He instructs people to take their own gold off. Alternate translation: “you take off your own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +EXO 32 24 yy82 figs-rpronouns הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ Aaron instructs people to take their own gold off. Alternate translation: “you take off your own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 24 wvin grammar-connect-logic-result וָ⁠אַשְׁלִכֵ֣⁠הוּ בָ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א הָ⁠עֵ֥גֶל הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ Aaron claims an unusual sequence of events here. The translation should surprise an audience unfamiliar with the story. He states that the result of simply throwing gold in the fire is the apperance (by its own power or volition it seems) of the calf. This is a lie. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 32 25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 were running wild Alternate translation: “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves” -EXO 32 25 csg0 grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 were running wild Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 32 26 jis7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Then Moses stood at the entrance…“Whoever is on Yahweh’s side, come to me.” You can state this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 32 25 csg0 grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 were running wild Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 32 26 jis7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Then Moses stood at the entrance…“Whoever is on Yahweh’s side, come to me.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 32 26 ryb5 figs-idiom מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 Whoever is on Yahweh’s side Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance Alternate translation: “Go from one side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” EXO 32 28 at4i translate-numbers כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י 1 three thousand of the people Alternate translation: “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 32 29 to5d figs-idiom מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text, as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 29 rkp6 מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service Here it is unclear if **fill** should be rightly understood as in the past or as a new command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today” -EXO 32 29 c6fg figs-explicit כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו 1 for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother The fact that they did this in obedience to God can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh because each man was against his son and against his brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 29 c6fg figs-explicit כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו 1 for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that they did this in obedience to God explicitly. Alternate translation: “For you have obeyed Yahweh, because each man was against his son and against his brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 29 l54l וְ⁠לָ⁠תֵ֧ת עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֛ם הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם בְּרָכָֽה 1 for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother This phrase is difficult to interpret. Several options depend on exactly how the conjunction, preposition, and verb combination are interpreted. The first difficulty is related to the difficulty with the previous verb: have they already been blessed or are they going to be blessed? (Alternate translation: “to have put a blessing on yourselves today”) The second difficulty is: should the clause connections be understood to say that the blessing is because of their actions, or more strongly, that a desire for blessing motivated them to take action? (Alternate translation: “and therefore a blessing is put on you today” or “so that a blessing may be put over you today”) The third difficulty is: while ultimately all blessing is from Yahweh, which is the subject here, Yahweh or the Levites? (Alternate translation: “and so Yahweh is putting a blessing on you today”) As with the previous clause, you may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “, by that you brought blessing on yourselves” EXO 32 30 kvj4 figs-doublet חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 You have committed a very great sin Here, **sin** used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “You have sinned extremally badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 32 30 r5fn figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 32 30 r5fn figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 32 31 ccpg figs-doublet חָטָ֞א הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 You have committed a very great sin Here, **sin** is used as a verb and then repeated as a noun for emphasis. Along with **great**, it suggests that the people sinned very, very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis, use another form in your language that would. Alternate translation: “this people has sinned extremely badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 32 31 y049 figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 32 31 y049 figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 32 31 yeta אֱלֹהֵ֥י 1 You have committed a very great sin Alternate translation: “a god” EXO 32 32 brpu figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה אִם־תִּשָּׂ֣א חַטָּאתָ֑⁠ם 1 blot me out of the book Moses leaves out his conclusion, perhaps as a way of making this conditional phrase into a request, or perhaps to avoid suggesting to God what would be good for him to do. However, if leaving out a conclusion would be misunderstood in your language you may need to rephrase it or add the implied conclusion. Alternate translation: “But now, if you forgive their sin, good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 32 32 c72y figs-metonymy מְחֵ֣⁠נִי 1 blot me out of the book Here, **me** refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 32 32 ahb3 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר כָּתָֽבְתָּ 1 the book that you have written What God had written in the book can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 32 ahb3 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר כָּתָֽבְתָּ 1 the book that you have written If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what God had written in the book explicitly. Alternate translation: “in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 33 igb4 figs-metonymy אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 that person I will blot out of my book Here, **him** represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 33 qwk9 מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 my book This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in [Exodus 32:32](../32/32.md). -EXO 32 34 xn8p grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם 1 But on the day that I punish them, I will punish them Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshiping the idol. If it would be more clear in your language to place the reason first, you may consider reordering the clauses. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 32 35 wv1v figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 32 35 h3kl grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made If your language requires placing the reason before the result, you may reorder these clauses. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 33 intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the dwelling will be in the center of the tent.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.\n
+EXO 32 34 xn8p grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם 1 But on the day that I punish them, I will punish them Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshiping the idol. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 32 35 wv1v figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 35 h3kl grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 33 intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n\n## Structure:\n- v. 1-6: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to go with Israel\n- v. 7-11: the temporary tent of meeting\n- v. 12-23: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to see his glory\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the Dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the Dwelling will be in the center of the camp.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.\n\n
EXO 33 1 p8xp figs-quotesinquotes לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 General Information: The words which follow **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 33 2 tlen וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְ⁠פָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְ⁠גֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי 1 General Information: See how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md). EXO 33 3 yyt4 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 that land, which is flowing with milk and honey Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2209,28 +2118,28 @@ EXO 33 3 ah5t figs-metaphor קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ 1 a stubborn people Yah EXO 33 4 jemj figs-gendernotations וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֛תוּ אִ֥ישׁ עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 jewelry Here, **his** and **him** refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “and the men and women did not put on their ornaments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 33 4 cf7g translate-unknown עֶדְי֖⁠וֹ 1 jewelry This may have referred to beautiful clothing as well as chains and rings made from gold or silver that had could have had jewels in them. Alternate translation: “his adornments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 33 4 qwuu translate-versebridge 0 jewelry Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -EXO 33 5 rn40 grammar-connect-words-phrases וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 jewelry The word **had** places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should adjust the verbal sequencing in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -EXO 33 5 ndhx figs-quotations אֱמֹ֤ר אֶל־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 jewelry You may want to make the introductory portion of this quotation,**Say to the sons of Israel**, indirect to keep from having a quote inside a quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 33 5 rn40 figs-events וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 jewelry The word **had** places Yahweh’s statement back in time. It can be understood from context as Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4. If you are reversing the order of the verses for your language, you should adjust the verbal sequencing in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) +EXO 33 5 ndhx figs-quotations אֱמֹ֤ר אֶל־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 jewelry You may want to make the introductory portion of this quotation,**Say to the sons of Israel**, indirect to keep from having a quote inside a quote. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 33 5 rzr5 figs-metaphor קְשֵׁה־עֹ֔רֶף 1 a stubborn people Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 33 5 hakp grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical רֶ֧גַע אֶחָ֛ד אֶֽעֱלֶ֥ה בְ⁠קִרְבְּ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠כִלִּיתִ֑י⁠ךָ וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה 1 a stubborn people Because the surrounding narrative clearly shows that this is not what Yahweh did or will do, this is a hypothetical situation. Some languages may need to reorder the clauses. Alternate translation: “Since I would destroy if I went up among you for one moment, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 33 5 l6ax grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠אֵדְעָ֖ה מָ֥ה אֶֽעֱשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 a stubborn people The goal of the Israelites removing their ornaments is so that Yahweh can consider his reaction. Some languages may need to reorder this structure. Alternate translation: “So that I will know what I will do to you, take your ornaments down from on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 33 5 gb16 figs-explicit וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 a stubborn people This was a way for the Israelites to show that they were sorry for sinning. If this would not be understood, you may need to make it explicit in the text or a footnote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 33 5 gb16 figs-explicit וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה הוֹרֵ֤ד עֶדְיְ⁠ךָ֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 a stubborn people This was a way for the Israelites to show that they were sorry for sinning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 33 6 tomy figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּֽתְנַצְּל֧וּ 1 a stubborn people Here, **themselves** refers to the Israelites; they are both the ones doing the action and the ones to whom the action is done. A special form of verb or pronoun may be required to translate this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -EXO 33 6 i0c5 figs-explicit מֵ⁠הַ֥ר חוֹרֵֽב׃ 1 a stubborn people Here, **from** means “from that point of time and continuing into the future.” Try to find a form in your language that means “from then on” for your translation. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 33 6 i0c5 figs-explicit מֵ⁠הַ֥ר חוֹרֵֽב׃ 1 a stubborn people Here, **from** means “from that point of time and continuing into the future.” Try to find a form in your language that means “from then on” for your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 33 7 wsfe grammar-connect-time-background 0 a stubborn people Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) EXO 33 7 fb65 הָ⁠אֹ֜הֶל 1 a stubborn people The word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up, or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is being referenced. Here it refers to the “tent of meeting.” EXO 33 8 h2us אָהֳל֑⁠וֹ 1 a stubborn people This refers to the people’s tents. EXO 33 9 yt4f עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן 1 the pillar of cloud See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). -EXO 33 9 vam7 figs-explicit יֵרֵד֙ 1 would come down Where it came down from can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “would come down from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 33 9 vam7 figs-explicit יֵרֵד֙ 1 would come down If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express where the **pillar of cloud would come down** from explicitly. Alternate translation: “would come down from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 33 9 ghf8 figs-metonymy וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר 1 would come down Grammatically, the most likely referent for this pronoun is the **pillar of cloud**. By metonymy and based on [verse 11](../33/11.md), this probably refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 33 10 nyoe figs-parallelism וְ⁠רָאָ֤ה כָל־הָ⁠עָם֙ אֶת־עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן עֹמֵ֖ד פֶּ֣תַח הָ⁠אֹ֑הֶל וְ⁠קָ֤ם כָּל־הָ⁠עָם֙ וְ⁠הִֽשְׁתַּחֲוּ֔וּ אִ֖ישׁ פֶּ֥תַח אָהֳלֽ⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face This verse uses contrastive parallelism. The presence of Yahweh is represented in the cloud that stands at the entrance of the tent, while the people prostrate themselves at the entrance to their tents. It would be good to try to retain the contrasting image in your translation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 33 10 zvaf עַמּ֣וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָ֔ן 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face See how you translated this in [13:21](../13/21.md). EXO 33 10 dm01 אָהֳלֽ⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face This refers to the people’s tents. EXO 33 11 zrb8 figs-metaphor פָּנִ֣ים אֶל־פָּנִ֔ים 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face Speaking directly to each other rather than through dreams and visions is spoken of as if Moses and God saw each other’s faces while they spoke. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yahweh would speak directly to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 33 11 lqe0 figs-simile כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר יְדַבֵּ֥ר אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face The metaphor of speaking **face to face** is explained by the simile here. How you handled **face to face** in your language may determine how you should handle this explanatory simile. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 33 11 rcsu writing-participants וּ⁠מְשָׁ֨רְת֜⁠וֹ יְהוֹשֻׁ֤עַ בִּן־נוּן֙ נַ֔עַר 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face **Joshua** has been introduced before but not mentioned since [Exodus 32:17](../32/17.md). Different languages may need to re-introduce him in different ways. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 33 11 lqe0 figs-simile כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר יְדַבֵּ֥ר אִ֖ישׁ אֶל־רֵעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face The metaphor of speaking **face to face** is explained by the simile here. How you handled **face to face** in your language may determine how you should handle this explanation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 33 11 rcsu writing-participants וּ⁠מְשָׁ֨רְת֜⁠וֹ יְהוֹשֻׁ֤עַ בִּן־נוּן֙ נַ֔עַר 1 Yahweh would speak to Moses face to face **Joshua** has been introduced before but not mentioned since [Exodus 32:17](../32/17.md). Consider if your language will need to re-introduce Joshua in any way here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 33 12 ohra writing-newevent 0 See A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 33 12 hlsl figs-quotations הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…דַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 See You may want to make these two second-level quotations indirect to reduce the levels of quotation. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 33 12 hlsl figs-quotations הַ֚עַל אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה…דַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 See You may want to make these two second-level quotations indirect to reduce the levels of quotation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 33 12 unz8 רְ֠אֵה 1 See This is an interjection to get someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “Look!” or “Listen!” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” EXO 33 12 w7fs figs-idiom יְדַעְתִּ֣י⁠ךָֽ בְ⁠שֵׁ֔ם 1 I know you by name To **know** someone **by name** is to know them well. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I know you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 33 12 uhjs figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־מָצָ֥אתָ חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָֽ⁠י 1 you have also found favor in my eyes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my eyes find you favorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2243,20 +2152,20 @@ EXO 33 13 gtv4 אֶמְצָא־חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 show m EXO 33 13 o1ew וּ⁠רְאֵ֕ה כִּ֥י עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ הַ⁠גּ֥וֹי הַ⁠זֶּֽה׃ 1 show me your ways Moses is requesting that Yahweh would again **see**, perceive, consider, or recognize the Israelites as his special people. In this way, Moses would know that Yahweh had truly forgiven them. EXO 33 14 gh8q figs-metonymy פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ 1 My own presence will go Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “I will go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 33 14 esdd figs-explicit פָּנַ֥⁠י יֵלֵ֖כוּ וַ⁠הֲנִחֹ֥תִי לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 My own presence will go The preposition connected to **you** here has a very flexible meaning and seems to be connected to both **will go** and **will cause rest**. If this would be unclear, consider repeating it in both clauses. Alternate translation: “My face will go with you and I will cause rest for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 33 14 hl15 figs-you לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 go with you…give you The word **you** here refers to Moses. It is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 33 14 hl15 figs-yousingular לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 go with you…give you The word **you** here refers to Moses. It is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 33 15 a2hc grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים 1 go with you…give you **If your face is not going** is a hypothetical situation in which Moses makes a request that they not go anywhere without Yahweh. In some languages you may need to place the request first. Alternate translation: “Do not take us up from here if your face is not going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 33 15 m5cq figs-metonymy אִם־אֵ֤ין פָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הֹלְכִ֔ים 1 go with you…give you Yahweh’s **face** represents his presence, which represents himself. Alternate translation: “If you are not going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 33 16 cgl8 figs-rquestion וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא כִּֽי־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא בְּ⁠לֶכְתְּ⁠ךָ֣ עִמָּ֑⁠נוּ וְ⁠נִפְלֵ֨ינוּ֙ אֲנִ֣י וְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֔ מִ⁠כָּ֨ל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֲדָמָֽה 1 how will it be known…people? This verse contains two or three rhetorical questions, and the length of the second is debated. The first rhetorical question, **And in what then will it be known that I have found favor in your eyes, I and your people?** is used for emphasis and means, “There is only one way people will know that I and your people please you.” The second, **Is it not in your going with us?** is used to answer the first question and means “That way is your going with us.” It is possible that the rest of the verse is (1) a statement further clarifying how Yahweh’s favor is demonstrated (ULT, UST), (2) an extension of the second rhetorical question (“Is it not in your going with us so that I and your people shall be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”), or (3) a separate rhetorical question making the same point (“And shall I and your people be distinct from all of the people that are on the face of the earth?”)\nMoses used these questions in order to emphasize that if Yahweh does not go with them, no one will know that Yahweh is pleased with Moses and the people. Use whatever forms would be natural in your language to present an argument like this. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 33 16 d36k figs-infostructure וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה 1 For otherwise This refers back to Moses’ hypothetical situation in the previous verse, that is, Yahweh not going with them. Use whatever connecting forms are necessary to make that clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 33 16 tu8e figs-activepassive וּ⁠בַ⁠מֶּ֣ה׀ יִוָּדַ֣ע אֵפ֗וֹא 1 how will it be known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And in what then will people know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 33 16 u82a figs-idiom מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Will it not only be if Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 33 17 chua grammar-connect-logic-result גַּ֣ם אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר דִּבַּ֖רְתָּ אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֑ה כִּֽי־מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינַ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֵדָעֲ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 you have found favor in my eyes Here, **for** signals a reason clause. Some languages may need to reorder the clauses here. Alternate translation: “Because you have found favor in my eyes, and I know you by name, I will also do this thing that you have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +EXO 33 17 chua grammar-connect-logic-result גַּ֣ם אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר דִּבַּ֖רְתָּ אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֑ה כִּֽי־מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינַ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֵדָעֲ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 you have found favor in my eyes Here, **for** signals a reason clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you have found favor in my eyes, and I know you by name, I will also do this thing that you have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 33 17 ln7y figs-idiom מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּ⁠עֵינַ֔⁠י 1 you have found favor in my eyes Here, **you have found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 33 17 aln2 figs-you מָצָ֤אתָ 1 General Information: Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 33 17 aln2 figs-yousingular מָצָ֤אתָ 1 General Information: Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 33 17 u2nv figs-idiom וָ⁠אֵדָעֲ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 I know you by name To know someone by name is to know them well. See how you translated this in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). Alternate translation: “and I know you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 33 18 w73v figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 I know you by name In languages without abstract nouns, you may need to change **glory** to another form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 33 18 w73v figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 I know you by name If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 33 19 sx1a figs-metaphor אֲנִ֨י אַעֲבִ֤יר כָּל־טוּבִ⁠י֙ עַל־פָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you Yahweh speaks of his **goodness** like it was an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 33 19 e3o3 figs-abstractnouns טוּבִ⁠י֙ 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you In languages without abstract nouns, you may need to change **goodness** to another form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 33 19 e3o3 figs-abstractnouns טוּבִ⁠י֙ 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **goodness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 33 19 gzr5 figs-metonymy עַל־פָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ…לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you Here, **face** means “you.” Alternate translation: “above you … before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 33 19 d4z9 וְ⁠קָרָ֧אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֛ם יְהוָ֖ה 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you The meaning of the phrase is unclear. It may mean that Yahweh will disclose something about his character to Moses. Alternate translation: “and I will proclaim my name, ‘Yahweh,’ ” EXO 33 19 vqq6 figs-parallelism וְ⁠חַנֹּתִי֙ אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָחֹ֔ן וְ⁠רִחַמְתִּ֖י אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲרַחֵֽם 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They stress Yahweh’s divine prerogative to do whatever he wants. The structure also parallels Yahweh’s I AM statements in [Exodus 3:14](../03/14.md). If this form of parallelism would be misunderstood in your language, consider another form that emphasizes that Yahweh is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2265,7 +2174,7 @@ EXO 33 20 fyc0 כִּ֛י לֹֽא־יִרְאַ֥⁠נִי הָ⁠אָדָ֖ם EXO 33 21 loep writing-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you In some languages it may be better to omit **And Yahweh said** at the start of this verse to avoid stopping and restarting the quotation. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) EXO 33 21 s4iy הִנֵּ֥ה 1 See Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.” EXO 33 22 qhe6 figs-metaphor בַּ⁠עֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See Yahweh speaks of his **glory** as if it were an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 33 22 o5as figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See In languages without abstract nouns, you may need to change **glory** to another form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 33 22 o5as figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 33 22 ivf5 figs-personification וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 See Here Yahweh speaks as if he, like a person, had hands that could cover things. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use a simile to retain the image, as this figure is important to retain and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you as with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 fmu8 figs-personification וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠רָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑⁠י וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 you will see my back The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be retained, if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be as if I stop covering you with a hand, and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 jq7t grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י 1 you will see my back Here, **but my face** is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with **my back**. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements, be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -2278,23 +2187,22 @@ EXO 34 3 ck6d figs-metonymy וְ⁠גַם־אִ֥ישׁ אַל־יֵרָ֖א ב EXO 34 3 x3rx גַּם־הַ⁠צֹּ֤אן וְ⁠הַ⁠בָּקָר֙ אַל־יִרְע֔וּ אֶל־מ֖וּל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠הֽוּא 1 No flocks or herds are even to graze in front of the mountain Alternate translation: “Even flocks or herds are not allowed to come near the mountain to eat.” EXO 34 5 sp7f writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּתְיַצֵּ֥ב עִמּ֖⁠וֹ שָׁ֑ם וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א 1 stood with Moses there The pronouns are not clear here, but the referents are probably as in the following alternate translation: “and Yahweh stood with Moses there, and Yahweh proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 34 5 r9ey figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א בְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 he pronounced the name “Yahweh.” This could mean: (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh’” (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is.” For the second meaning, **name** would represent who God is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 34 6 fz1q figs-123person יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 34 6 fz1q figs-123person יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious God is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 34 6 t0kd figs-doublet רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious This is emphasizing that Yahweh cares for people and acts kindly toward them. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 34 6 f7iq figs-idiom אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious The phrase **long of nostril** is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 34 6 j7we figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠רַב־חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 abounding in covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness The abstract nouns **covenant faithfulness** and **trustworthiness** can be stated as “covenantally faithful” and “trustworthy.” (For **covenant faithfulness**, see [Exodus 20:6](../20/06.md)). Alternate translation: “always being faithful to my covenant and always being trustworthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 34 6 j7we figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠רַב־חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 abounding in covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **covenant faithfulness** and **trustworthiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. (For **covenant faithfulness**, see [Exodus 20:6](../20/06.md)). Alternate translation: “always being faithful to my covenant and always being trustworthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 34 6 d1qj figs-doublet חֶ֥סֶד וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 abounding in covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness This is emphasizing that Yahweh always does what he promises toward the people he loves. If doubling would not strengthen the statement here in your language, consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 34 7 lt2j figs-abstractnouns נֹצֵ֥ר חֶ֨סֶד֙ לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 keeping covenant faithfulness for thousands of generations The abstract nouns **covenant faithfulness** can be stated as “faithfully loving” or “faithful love.” See how you translated this in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “faithfully loving thousands of generations” or “faithful to his covenant with thousands of generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 34 7 q7z8 figs-ellipsis לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 But he will Here, **thousands** may refer to thousands of generations or thousands of people. The two notes following deal with either possibility. See [Exodus 20:6](../20/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 34 7 x90l figs-hyperbole לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 But he will This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +EXO 34 7 lt2j figs-abstractnouns נֹצֵ֥ר חֶ֨סֶד֙ לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 keeping covenant faithfulness for thousands of generations See how you translated **covenant faithfulness**in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “faithfully loving thousands of generations” or “faithful to his covenant with thousands of generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 34 7 x90l figs-hyperbole לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 But he will This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” It is deliberately contrasted with **third** and **fourth** later in the verse to emphasize how much longer God’s covenant faithfulness is than his anger. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys a very long time. Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 34 7 dxkb figs-metonymy לָ⁠אֲלָפִ֔ים 1 But he will The word **thousands** is a metonym for a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “to innumerable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 7 hllt figs-litany עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה 1 But he will This list is meant to convey the idea of every kind of wrong. If a list like this would be misunderstood in your language you may need to use other terms or forms to make this point. Alternate translation: “every kind of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -EXO 34 7 e2qc figs-abstractnouns עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה…עֲוֺ֣ן 1 But he will If your language does not use an abstract noun for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns in another way, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 34 7 x397 figs-123person וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 he will by no means clear the guilty Yahweh is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 34 7 ts1b figs-ellipsis וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 will by no means clear the guilty Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. Many translations will require that information. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 34 7 e2qc figs-abstractnouns עָוֺ֛ן וָ⁠פֶ֖שַׁע וְ⁠חַטָּאָ֑ה…עֲוֺ֣ן 1 But he will If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **iniquity, transgression, and sin**, you could express the same ideas in another way., as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 34 7 x397 figs-123person וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 he will by no means clear the guilty Yahweh is speaking about himself. If this is confusing in your language, you may use the first person. Alternate translation: “But I will certainly not acquit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +EXO 34 7 ts1b figs-ellipsis וְ⁠נַקֵּה֙ לֹ֣א יְנַקֶּ֔ה 1 will by no means clear the guilty Whom Yahweh will not acquit is not stated. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translations: “But he will certainly not clear the guilty” or “But he will certainly not say that the guilty are innocent” or “But he will certainly not free guilty people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 34 7 lyrg figs-metonymy עֲוֺ֣ן 1 will by no means clear the guilty Here, **iniquity** refers to the consequences or the punishment for iniquity. Alternate translation: “the punishment for the iniquity of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 7 px85 figs-metaphor פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children The **iniquity of the fathers** is spoken of as if it were something capable of **visiting** people. This means that Yahweh makes the consequences of people’s sins affect their descendants. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “punishing the sons and the sons of the sons for the iniquity of the fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 7 c3tb figs-metonymy עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 their children The references to **sons** and **sons of the sons** represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 34 7 d462 figs-explicit עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 their children Here, “generation” is implied. Many translations will need to make this explicit as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 34 7 d462 figs-explicit עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 their children Here, “generation” is implied after **third** and **fourth**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 7 pacu figs-metonymy עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 their children Here, **third** and **fourth** means “several.” If this would not be understood and your language has a way of referring to an unspecified (but approximately 3-4) number, you may have to use it here. Alternate translation: “on a few generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 8 c1qt figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 their children Here, **himself** means that Moses did this action to his own body. Some languages may use a special form to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 34 8 mf8o figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּקֹּ֥ד אַ֖רְצָ⁠ה וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 their children These two verbs have very similar meanings and are often used together to express people’s physical and spiritual posture in worship. If such repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you may need to express the physical action and spiritual action explicitly. Alternate translation: “and bowed to the ground in worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -2306,7 +2214,7 @@ EXO 34 10 ps7o figs-idiom כֹּרֵ֣ת בְּרִית֒ 1 your people To **cut EXO 34 10 zdq6 figs-possession עַמְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 your people Here, the **people** are referred to as belonging to Moses. This refers to his being their leader. Alternate translation: ”the people you lead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 34 10 itdx כָל־הָ֠⁠עָם אֲשֶׁר־אַתָּ֨ה בְ⁠קִרְבּ֜⁠וֹ 1 your people This phrase is ambiguous and could refer to: (1) the nations that surrounded Israel or (2) the Israelites (who surrounded Moses). Attempt to maintain the ambiguity if you can; otherwise you may choose one, perhaps following another locally known translation’s choice. EXO 34 10 bj1a כִּֽי־נוֹרָ֣א ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י עֹשֶׂ֥ה עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 it is a fearful thing that I am doing with you This means that what Yahweh is doing causes people to be afraid. In this case, people will fear Yahweh when they see what he does. Alternate translation: “for what I am doing with you will cause fear” -EXO 34 10 s7uz figs-you עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 I am doing with you Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 34 10 s7uz figs-youdual עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 I am doing with you Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 34 11 xtkf figs-metonymy גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִ⁠פָּנֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 I am doing with you Here, **from before your faces** means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 11 kfix translate-names אֶת־הָ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי 1 I am doing with you See how you translated these in [Exodus 33:2](../33/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 34 12 fmc9 0 General Information: Verses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English). @@ -2315,11 +2223,11 @@ EXO 34 12 n1il figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠י EXO 34 12 t1hz grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 General Information: The second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 34 12 b459 figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ 1 General Information: See how you translated this in [34:10](../34/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 34 12 tnka grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…יִהְיֶ֥ה 1 General Information: The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun **he** is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 34 12 lxz8 figs-simile פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 they will become a trap among you People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a **trap.** Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +EXO 34 12 lxz8 figs-simile פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 they will become a trap among you People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a **trap.** If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 34 13 wkbx grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֤י 1 they will become a trap among you This word marks a strong contrast with the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a new sentence: “Do the opposite!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 34 13 tfd1 figs-infostructure אֶת־מִזְבְּחֹתָ⁠ם֙ תִּתֹּצ֔וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־מַצֵּבֹתָ֖⁠ם תְּשַׁבֵּר֑וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־אֲשֵׁרָ֖י⁠ו תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן 1 they will become a trap among you This unusual word order reflects the original in bringing each item the Israelites must destroy into focus. You should use whatever form in your language would emphasize or focus on each item that they must destroy. Alternate translation, as separate sentences: “as for their altars, break them down! As for their stone pillars, smash them to pieces! As for their trees where they worship the goddess Asherah, cut them all down!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 34 13 gbp0 grammar-collectivenouns תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן 1 they will become a trap among you For some reason only this pronoun is singular, referring back the singular “inhabitant” in the previous verse. Translate it based on your decision in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 34 14 fzjz translate-symaction לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה 1 Yahweh, whose name is Jealous To **bow to another god** means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 34 14 fzjz translate-symaction לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה 1 Yahweh, whose name is Jealous To **bow to another god** means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 34 14 vmx2 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ אֵ֥ל קַנָּ֖א הֽוּא׃ 1 Yahweh, whose name is Jealous The repeated word **jealous** means that God is concerned to keep his honor. If his people worship other gods, he loses honor, because when his people do not honor him, other people also will not honor him. This is pictured in a metaphor of a jealous spouse who is concerned that his spouse be faithful to him. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. The UST makes this image explicit as a simile, which can be done occasionally but would probably be too long for repeated use in a translation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh jealously guards his reputation. He is a God jealous of his honor.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 14 s5sd figs-metonymy כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ 1 whose name is Jealous, Here, the word **name** represents God’s character. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is always jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 15 r70f grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…וְ⁠קָרָ֣א…מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 General Information: The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -2330,9 +2238,9 @@ EXO 34 15 gtd8 figs-metaphor וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽה EXO 34 15 d1m0 figs-metonymy וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠הֶ֗ם 1 for they prostitute themselves to their gods This phrase may also be seen as a metonymy because sexual sin was a regular part of worshiping false gods. Alternate translation: “and they worship by fornicating with their gods’ cult prostitutes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 15 vijl figs-ellipsis וְ⁠קָרָ֣א לְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 for they prostitute themselves to their gods Here, what the inhabitant will invite the Israelite to is not stated, but can be inferred from context. At the most basic level it is an invitation to eat food the Israelites were forbidden to eat. It is unclear how much more participation in worshiping false gods is implied. If your language requires that you specify what the Israelite is being invited into you may have to add some information. Alternate translation: “and he will invite you to eat from his sacrifice” or “and he will invite you to a feast to honor his gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 34 15 ygd9 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 for they prostitute themselves to their gods The first part of the sin Yahweh is warning against in this and the next verse is to **eat from his sacrifice**. This clause is the result of disobedience regarding the **covenant** and the logical conclusion of the series of hypothetical events Yahweh presents before this. Alternate translation: “as a result, you will eat from his sacrifice” or “then you will eat from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 34 15 hhbc figs-synecdoche וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 for they prostitute themselves to their gods Here, **and you eat from his sacrifice** may be a synecdoche for any and all parts of the worship of the other nations’ false gods. Alternate translation: “and you feast to honor his gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 34 15 bj2i figs-explicit וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice The consequence of eating food that is sacrificed to another god can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “and you will eat some of his sacrifice and become guilty of worshiping his gods” or “and you will prostitute yourself to his god by eating some of his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 34 16 jaic grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical 0 you will eat some of his sacrifice The string of hypothetical actions, each with its logical result continues throughout this verse. Continue translating the transitions between clauses as you decided in verse 15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +EXO 34 15 hhbc figs-synecdoche וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 for they prostitute themselves to their gods Here, **and you eat from his sacrifice** may represent any and all parts of the worship of the other nations’ false gods. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and you feast to honor his gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +EXO 34 15 bj2i figs-explicit וְ⁠אָכַלְתָּ֖ מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the consequence of eating food that is sacrificed to another god explicitly. Alternate translation: “and you will eat some of his sacrifice and become guilty of worshiping his gods” or “and you will prostitute yourself to his god by eating some of his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 34 16 jaic grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical 0 you will eat some of his sacrifice The string of hypothetical actions, each with its logical result continues throughout this verse. Continue translating the transitions between clauses as you decided in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 34 16 d4ma figs-metaphor וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ בְנֹתָ֗י⁠ו אַחֲרֵי֙ אֱלֹ֣הֵי⁠הֶ֔ן 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. This metaphor is most often used regarding the unfaithfulness of the Israelites. The metaphor is not quite as clear with the other nations because while Yahweh is the only true God, he is not in special covenant with the other nations as their god. However, since the worship is still impurely following false gods, the metaphor is used here. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and his daughters worship their gods” or “and his daughters worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 16 k0lr figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. The metaphor is clear here since it is referring to Israelite men who should be Yahweh worshipers. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. Alternate translation: “and cause your sons to worship their gods” or “and cause your sons to worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 16 p98a grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -2340,15 +2248,15 @@ EXO 34 17 lgab 0 you will eat some of his sacrifice The prohibition here is fo EXO 34 17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md). EXO 34 18 s1rr 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). EXO 34 18 u5be translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 seven days Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 34 18 i5ck translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 in the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) +EXO 34 18 i5ck translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 in the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 34 19 ly7d 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md). EXO 34 20 sbrs 0 buy back This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md). -EXO 34 20 j4tv figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 buy back You may need to make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 34 20 j4tv figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 buy back If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 buy back Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey” EXO 34 20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 buy back Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh. -EXO 34 20 u2p5 figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 No one may appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +EXO 34 20 u2p5 figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 No one may appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 34 21 w9ed 0 General Information: This command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md). -EXO 34 21 n2ka translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “but on day seven” Here **seventh** is the ordinal number for 7. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 34 21 n2ka translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 General Information: If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 34 21 swm8 בֶּ⁠חָרִ֥ישׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠קָּצִ֖יר 1 Even at plowing time and in harvest Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops” EXO 34 22 lhxb 0 Festival of Ingathering This verse is similar to [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), however the first festival is named **Festival of Weeks** here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16. EXO 34 22 d13l וְ⁠חַג֙ הָֽ⁠אָסִ֔יף 1 Festival of Ingathering This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md). Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering” @@ -2356,7 +2264,7 @@ EXO 34 22 xqy4 figs-metaphor תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 Fest EXO 34 23 zh58 0 General Information: Except for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md). EXO 34 23 iagy figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽ⁠אָדֹ֥ן 1 General Information: Here to **appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **Before the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 25 zx2v 0 General Information: See the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md). -EXO 34 25 e8v2 figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י 1 the blood of my sacrifice The fact that the blood is from an animal can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 34 25 e8v2 figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י 1 the blood of my sacrifice If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that the blood is from an animal explicitly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 26 bv0a 0 the blood of my sacrifice This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md). EXO 34 27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 the blood of my sacrifice Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words” EXO 34 27 ybz6 figs-idiom כָּרַ֧תִּי אִתְּ⁠ךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית 1 the blood of my sacrifice See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2369,19 +2277,19 @@ EXO 34 29 yagj figs-infostructure וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֹֽא־יָדַ֗ע EXO 34 29 d9zk קָרַ֛ן 1 had become radiant Alternate translation: “became radiant” EXO 34 30 yn9s grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֖וּ 1 had become radiant They were afraid because of his bright face. Alternate translation: “because of that, they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 34 32 kt23 וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 all the commands that Yahweh had given him This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do. -EXO 34 34 fzm1 grammar-connect-time-background 0 he would remove This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** and the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +EXO 34 34 fzm1 grammar-connect-time-background 0 he would remove This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** or the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) EXO 34 34 m1sv figs-activepassive יְצֻוֶּֽה 1 what he was commanded If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 35 intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n\n- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the dwelling complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.\n- Many items, materials, and processes for building the dwelling may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.\n\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\n- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))\n- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the dwelling complex\n- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\n- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things
+EXO 35 intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command\r\n- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))\r\n- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the Dwelling complex\r\n- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed\r\n- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the Dwelling complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.\n- Many items, materials, and processes for building the Dwelling may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.\n\n
EXO 35 2 hfaq 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 31:15](../31/15.md).
EXO 35 2 g6oe translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 the seventh day Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 35 2 c559 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 the seventh day Alternate translation: “day number seven” or “Saturday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 35 2 c559 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 the seventh day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 35 2 ax6u figs-activepassive שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒ 1 Whoever does any work on that day must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 2 zij9 figs-activepassive כָּל־הָ⁠עֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛⁠וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever does any work on that day must be put to death If your language would not use passive here, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 4 jdb8 0 General Information: In verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages. EXO 35 4 ugn4 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 General Information: Verses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 35 5 h5c8 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md). EXO 35 5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have” -EXO 35 5 qq0a figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 35 5 qq0a figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 5 pqa2 figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 General Information: This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 35 5 gx87 0 General Information: After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. EXO 35 6 r12v 0 General Information: This verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). @@ -2420,19 +2328,19 @@ EXO 35 21 p2ls figs-parallelism וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ EXO 35 21 r34y figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֕אוּ כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ הֵ֠בִיאוּ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **heart** and **spirit** both refer to a person's will, their desire to do something. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using different body and spirit words or concepts which you can use. If your language would not express a person's will in this way, you could translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “And every man whose will lifted him came, and all who felt impelled brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 35 21 ckmu figs-metaphor אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **heart lifted** is a metaphor for being willing or excited. Many languages will have similar expressions, perhaps using a different body part or a different action. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who was excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 35 21 u7kq figs-gendernotations כָּל־אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נָדְבָ֨ה רוּח֜⁠וֹ אֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 all the tribes of Israel Here, **man, whose,** and **him** all refer to men and women in a general way. This is made explicit in the next verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you may use terms that include men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 35 21 kew0 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠לְ⁠בִגְדֵ֖י הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 all the tribes of Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “and for the holy clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 35 21 kew0 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠לְ⁠בִגְדֵ֖י הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 all the tribes of Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “and for the holy clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 35 22 mwx8 figs-synecdoche כֹּ֣ל׀ נְדִ֣יב לֵ֗ב 1 all who had a willing heart Here, **heart** refers to a person's will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to bring these gifts to Yahweh. This is a shortening and combining of the figure used in the [previous verse](../35/21.md): **heart** and **impelled** are brought together. See how you translated these ideas in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “anyone whose will impelled him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 35 22 yzsw ל׀ נְדִ֣יב 1 all who had a willing heart Alternate translation: “who were impelled of” EXO 35 22 wwp2 figs-litany חָ֣ח וָ⁠נֶ֜זֶם וְ⁠טַבַּ֤עַת וְ⁠כוּמָז֙ כָּל־כְּלִ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 brooches, earrings, rings, and ornaments These are different kinds of jewelry. The exact identity of each object is not known. The phrase **all of the things of gold** could either modify the whole list, meaning “all these items were made of gold,” or could mean “many other gold things.” If taken as a summary statement, in some languages it may be clearer to move it to the front of the list. Alternate translation: “all kinds of gold jewelry including necklaces, nose rings, signet rings, and gold ornaments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) EXO 35 22 frci figs-gendernotations וְ⁠כָל־אִ֕ישׁ 1 brooches, earrings, rings, and ornaments Although the term **men** is used, the word here is used in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 35 23 s3ky 0 Everyone who had…brought them See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:4-5](../25/04.md). EXO 35 23 dweo figs-activepassive וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ אֲשֶׁר־נִמְצָ֣א אִתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 Everyone who had…brought them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “And every man who owned” or “And every man having” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 35 23 hg0d figs-gendernotations וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them Although the term **men** is used, the word here is used in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 35 23 hg0d figs-gendernotations וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here **man** includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “And every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 35 23 t3ti figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כָל־אִ֞ישׁ 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **every man** is used here without the restriction, “who was willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “And very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 35 24 qpep figs-activepassive וְ⁠כֹ֡ל אֲשֶׁר֩ נִמְצָ֨א אִתּ֜⁠וֹ 1 Everyone who had…brought them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Also, the meaning of this phrase is simple possession. Alternate translation: “and everyone who owned” or “and everyone having” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 24 zk6i כָּל־מֵרִ֗ים 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **all** is limited by **presenters**, meaning only everyone who brought contributions. Avoid implying that every single Israelite did this (though very many did). Alternate translation: “All who decided to offer” EXO 35 24 loob figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כֹ֡ל 1 Everyone who had…brought them The phrase **all** is used here without the restriction, “who were willing,” from previous verses. The exaggeration is used to emphasize what a large portion of the Israelites gave willingly. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses a large number or a majority. Alternate translation: “and very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -EXO 35 24 bab9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 35 24 bab9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ae9d figs-metonymy חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool Here, **heart** is referring to something innately possessed by a person, that is, a trait of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “who possessed the skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ebm5 אֶֽת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). EXO 35 26 k1gy figs-synecdoche אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛⁠ן אֹתָ֖⁠נָה 1 whose hearts stirred them up Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in [verse 21](../35/21.md). Alternate translation: “whose wills impelled them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2456,33 +2364,33 @@ EXO 35 34 ab2z translate-names וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָ EXO 35 35 ehu7 0 filled them with skill This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**). EXO 35 35 rcv9 figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 35 35 jvtd figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **of heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 36 intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Translation issues\n\n* The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n* Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n* Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n## Structure\n\n* v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\n* v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\n * v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\n * v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\n * v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\n * v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)
+EXO 36 intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n\n\r\n\r\n* v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\r\n* v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r\n * v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\r\n * v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\r\n * v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\r\n * v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)\n\n\n## Translation issues\n\n* The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n* Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n* Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
EXO 36 1 ubk2 0 General Information: This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed. EXO 36 1 ds99 translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 Bezalel **Bezalel and Oholiab** are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 36 1 y1h1 figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ 1 Bezalel We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 36 1 tr3p figs-synecdoche חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב 1 to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability Here, **of heart** refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 36 1 ah6j figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֤ה 1 to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **skill** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “the ability to work skillfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 36 1 d6os figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠תְבוּנָה֙ 1 to whom Yahweh has given skill and ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** in another way. See [35:31](../35/31.md). Alternate translation: “and so he can understand his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 36 1 mdi4 figs-metonymy מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 according to all that Yahweh has commanded Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the dwelling (**holy place**) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See [35:24](../35/24.md). Alternate translation: “the building of the holy place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 36 1 mdi4 figs-metonymy מְלֶ֖אכֶת עֲבֹדַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 according to all that Yahweh has commanded Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh, and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the Dwelling (**holy place**) where the Israelites would worship Yahweh. See [35:24](../35/24.md). Alternate translation: “the building of the holy place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 36 2 tda7 אֶל־בְּצַלְאֵ֘ל וְ⁠אֶל־אָֽהֳלִיאָב֒ וְ⁠אֶל֙ כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ חֲכַם־לֵ֔ב אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָתַ֧ן יְהוָ֛ה חָכְמָ֖ה בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 in whose mind Yahweh had given skill See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../36/01.md). -EXO 36 2 vvtz figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֖ה 1 in whose mind Yahweh had given skill See how you translated this abstract noun in the [previous verse](../36/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 36 2 vvtz figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֖ה 1 in whose mind Yahweh had given skill See how you translated **skill** in the [previous verse](../36/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 36 2 yuq8 figs-metaphor כֹּ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 whose heart stirred within him See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 36 3 est0 וַ⁠יִּקְח֞וּ 1 whose heart stirred within him Alternate translation: “and the craftsmen took” EXO 36 3 xkix figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 whose heart stirred within him Here, **before the face** means with Moses. Moses had received and kept the building materials. Alternate translation: “from the custody of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 36 3 mtkr figs-idiom בַּ⁠בֹּ֥קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּֽקֶר 1 whose heart stirred within him This is an idiom meaning every morning or every day. Use a similar expression or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “morning by morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 36 4 b772 figs-nominaladj הַ֣⁠חֲכָמִ֔ים 1 whose heart stirred within him Here the adjective **skilled** is used as a noun in order to describe the group of craftsmen. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the skilled workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) EXO 36 4 pz6u figs-idiom אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 whose heart stirred within him Here, **every single man** translates an idiom that cannot be rendered literally and sensibly in English. The original is ”a man a man.” If your language would use repetition to emphasize that each and every man came to see Moses, you can follow the original; otherwise use a phrase or structure that emphasizes that they all came. Alternate translation: “every man without exception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 36 4 gjrz figs-gendernotations אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 whose heart stirred within him As previously, noted, there were some women who contributed (particularly in the cloth crafts) so this use may include women. Alternate translation: “every single worker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 36 5 tni7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְרוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֵּ⁠אמֹ֔ר מַרְבִּ֥ים הָ⁠עָ֖ם לְ⁠הָבִ֑יא מִ⁠דֵּ֤י הָֽ⁠עֲבֹדָה֙ לַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לַ⁠עֲשֹׂ֥ת אֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” The can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “The craftsmen told Moses that the people were bringing much more than enough for doing the work that Yahweh has commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 36 6 es1y figs-quotations אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ־ע֛וֹד מְלָאכָ֖ה לִ⁠תְרוּמַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” This could be translated as an indirect quotation if that would help your readers. Alternate translation: “that no one should bring any more contributions for the work of the holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 36 4 gjrz figs-gendernotations אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 whose heart stirred within him As previously, noted, there were some women who contributed (particularly in the cloth crafts) so this use of **man** may include women. Alternate translation: “every single worker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +EXO 36 5 tni7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְרוּ֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֵּ⁠אמֹ֔ר מַרְבִּ֥ים הָ⁠עָ֖ם לְ⁠הָבִ֑יא מִ⁠דֵּ֤י הָֽ⁠עֲבֹדָה֙ לַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לַ⁠עֲשֹׂ֥ת אֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The craftsmen told Moses that the people were bringing much more than enough for doing the work that Yahweh has commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 36 6 es1y figs-quotations אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ־ע֛וֹד מְלָאכָ֖ה לִ⁠תְרוּמַ֣ת הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that no one should bring any more contributions for the work of the holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 36 6 k3g1 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֨ירוּ ק֥וֹל 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” Here, **sound** refers to the message. This means they spread Moses’ message orally. Alternate translation: “everyone to share this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 36 6 ak26 figs-merism אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” The listing of **man and woman** is intended to mean everyone, or in this case, no one. Alternate translation: “No one shall make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 36 6 ak26 figs-genericnoun אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֗ה אַל־יַעֲשׂוּ 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” Here, **man and woman** is intended to mean everyone, or in this case because of the negation, no one. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one shall make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 36 6 k1qm מְלָאכָ֖ה 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter. EXO 36 6 utcw figs-ellipsis מֵ⁠הָבִֽיא 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” In some languages you may need to provide an object for this sentence. Alternate translation: “from bringing contributions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 36 7 ipiu וְ⁠הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֗ה 1 The craftsmen told Moses…commanded us to do.” Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter. EXO 36 8 kw33 0 General Information: Except for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 36 8 l7ub figs-synecdoche כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֜ב 1 ten curtains made from fine linen See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 36 8 zz0w figs-genericnoun עָשָׂ֥ה 1 ten curtains made from fine linen Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +EXO 36 8 zz0w figs-genericnoun עָשָׂ֥ה 1 ten curtains made from fine linen Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) EXO 36 9 p2mr 0 General Information: This verse is identical to [Exodus 26:2](../26/02.md). Tense is implied. EXO 36 10 z6sq 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:3](../26/03.md). EXO 36 11 yw91 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md). @@ -2505,7 +2413,7 @@ EXO 36 27 a7js 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodu EXO 36 28 hw9c 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:23](../26/23.md). EXO 36 29 u396 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:24](../26/24.md). EXO 36 30 mu5n 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:25](../26/25.md). -EXO 36 30 r252 figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד 1 and so on The list formula from [26:25](../26/25.md) is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 36 30 r252 figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד 1 and so on The list formula from [26:25](../26/25.md) is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 36 31 cf2p 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md). EXO 36 32 p4wd 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:27](../26/27.md). EXO 36 33 h94y 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md). @@ -2514,7 +2422,7 @@ EXO 36 35 pfc5 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodu EXO 36 36 hg2q 0 General Information: Aside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md). EXO 36 37 r5ya 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). EXO 36 38 pr67 0 General Information: See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md). -EXO 37 intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n## Structure\n\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)
+EXO 37 intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\r\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\r\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\r\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\r\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)\n\n\n## Potential translation issues\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
EXO 37 1 byr3 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md). EXO 37 2 kb3s 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md). EXO 37 3 pb6v 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md). @@ -2544,7 +2452,7 @@ EXO 37 26 ep66 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodu EXO 37 27 zez2 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md). EXO 37 28 hw37 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md). EXO 37 29 c992 0 General Information: For the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md). -EXO 38 intro hp86 0 # Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
+EXO 38 intro hp86 0 # Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
EXO 38 1 r81c 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md). EXO 38 2 g71x 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). EXO 38 3 v73t 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md). @@ -2553,19 +2461,19 @@ EXO 38 5 kp6w 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to the second EXO 38 6 l258 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md). EXO 38 7 ys63 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md). EXO 38 8 e6gd וַ⁠יַּ֗עַשׂ אֵ֚ת הַ⁠כִּיּ֣וֹר נְחֹ֔שֶׁת וְ⁠אֵ֖ת כַּנּ֣⁠וֹ נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 large bronze basin with a bronze stand This portion is almost identical to [Exodus 30:18](../30/18.md). -EXO 38 8 mdx9 figs-explicit בְּ⁠מַרְאֹת֙ 1 He made the basin out of mirrors The **bronze** came from the **mirrors.** This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 38 8 mdx9 figs-explicit בְּ⁠מַרְאֹת֙ 1 He made the basin out of mirrors The **bronze** came from the **mirrors.** If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 38 9 clk6 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md). EXO 38 10 nz6q 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md). EXO 38 11 mp6n 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md). -EXO 38 11 xl4c figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If this verse would not be understood without these words, you may add them. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 11 xl4c figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 12 g5iz 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:12](../27/12.md). EXO 38 13 iju3 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:13](../27/13.md). EXO 38 14 n1xj 0 General Information This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:14](../27/14.md). EXO 38 15 dlq7 0 General Information This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:15](../27/15.md). EXO 38 17 s5g5 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). EXO 38 18 hmi5 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:16 and 18](../27/16.md). -EXO 38 18 yf6z translate-bdistance וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 38 18 trz5 וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה בְ⁠רֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַמּ֔וֹת 1 The curtain was made of This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the dwelling. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height when hung, was five cubits” +EXO 38 18 yf6z translate-bdistance וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ 1 cubits If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A cubit is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) +EXO 38 18 trz5 וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה בְ⁠רֹ֨חַב֙ חָמֵ֣שׁ אַמּ֔וֹת 1 The curtain was made of This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the Dwelling. Alternate translation: “and the width, which corresponded to the height when hung, was five cubits” EXO 38 19 fjw4 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). EXO 38 20 ye5c 0 General Information This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). EXO 38 21 k2ex figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד 1 as it was taken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2577,22 +2485,22 @@ EXO 38 22 i4ha figs-ellipsis מֹשֶֽׁה 1 Yahweh had commanded Moses This se EXO 38 23 f93b translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב בֶּן־אֲחִיסָמָ֛ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak **Oholiab** and **Ahisamak**are names of men. See how you translated these in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 38 23 wvw4 חָרָ֣שׁ וְ⁠חֹשֵׁ֑ב וְ⁠רֹקֵ֗ם בַּ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וּ⁠בָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן וּ⁠בְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י וּ⁠בַ⁠שֵּֽׁשׁ 1 an engraver, as a skillful workman, and as an embroiderer This is very similar to part of [Exodus 35:35](../35/35.md). EXO 38 24 tl4k figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠זָּהָ֗ב הֶֽ⁠עָשׂוּי֙ 1 All the gold that was used for the project If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “All the gold that the craftsmen used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 38 24 y7hy translate-bweight תֵּ֤שַׁע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ כִּכָּ֔ר וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֧וֹת וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 twenty-nine talents A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 38 25 ni5b translate-bweight מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אֶלֶף֩ וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֜וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 one hundred talents A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [the previous verse](../38/24.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 38 24 y7hy translate-bweight תֵּ֤שַׁע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ כִּכָּ֔ר וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֧וֹת וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 twenty-nine talents A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:13](../30/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 38 25 ni5b translate-bweight מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אֶלֶף֩ וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֜וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 one hundred talents A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [the previous verse](../38/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 26 rp46 0 one hundred talents See how you translated many of the same things in [Exodus 30:13-14](../30/13.md). -EXO 38 26 t2gi translate-bweight בֶּ֚קַע לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 one beka A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [verse 24](../38/24.md).Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 38 26 t2gi translate-bweight בֶּ֚קַע לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 one beka A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time; **by the shekel of the sanctuary** specified which one was to be used. See [verse 24](../38/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 26 fyy5 translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 half a shekel A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 38 26 nvf8 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠כֹ֨ל הָ⁠עֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֗ים מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה לְ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּ⁠שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַ⁠חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 half a shekel Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” **from** these “men” is left out. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 26 ll8b figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ 1 This figure was reached on the basis of every person who was counted in the census This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 38 27 p7r5 translate-bweight מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר 1 One hundred talents of silver were cast A talent is about 34 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 38 28 nxf5 figs-ellipsis הָ⁠אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁבַ֤ע הַ⁠מֵּאוֹת֙ וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֔ים 1 Bezalel Here the words **shekels of silver** have been omitted because they are understood from [verse 25](../38/25.md). If the text would not be understood without them, you may add them in. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 38 27 p7r5 translate-bweight מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר 1 One hundred talents of silver were cast A talent is about 34 kilograms. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 38 28 nxf5 figs-ellipsis הָ⁠אֶ֜לֶף וּ⁠שְׁבַ֤ע הַ⁠מֵּאוֹת֙ וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֔ים 1 Bezalel Here the words **shekels of silver** have been omitted because they are understood from [verse 25](../38/25.md). If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the 1,775 shekels of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 28 rcda 0 Bezalel See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). -EXO 38 29 p3mr translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 seventy talents and 2,400 shekels A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +EXO 38 29 p3mr translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 seventy talents and 2,400 shekels A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 30 rck7 מִכְבַּ֥ר 1 grate A **grate** is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md). EXO 38 31 bvr9 יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 tent pegs These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). EXO 39 intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n
EXO 39 1 h8kg 0 as Yahweh had commanded Moses See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md). -EXO 39 1 e1xh figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 39 1 e1xh figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 39 2 b9mg 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md). EXO 39 4 pq62 0 Connecting Statement: This verse is very similar to [28:7](../28/07.md). EXO 39 5 g75w 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). @@ -2622,10 +2530,10 @@ EXO 39 28 um4e 0 turban Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40] EXO 39 29 hn5g 0 sash Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order. EXO 39 30 kq33 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**. EXO 39 31 fml2 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md). -EXO 39 32 jh64 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -EXO 39 32 z1z7 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 So the work on the dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 39 32 et19 figs-parallelism וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 So the work on the dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 39 33 ri54 writing-newevent 0 So the work on the dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +EXO 39 32 jh64 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +EXO 39 32 z1z7 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 39 32 et19 figs-parallelism וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 39 33 ri54 writing-newevent 0 So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 39 33 y9ym 0 clasps This verse, especially the list of items, is very similar to [35:11](../35/11.md). EXO 39 34 z6r6 וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֞ה עוֹרֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠אֵילִם֙ הַ⁠מְאָדָּמִ֔ים וְ⁠אֶת־מִכְסֵ֖ה עֹרֹ֣ת הַ⁠תְּחָשִׁ֑ים 1 the covering of ram skins dyed red, the covering of fine leather See how you translated similar phrases to this in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md). EXO 39 34 l0fi פָּרֹ֥כֶת הַ⁠מָּסָֽךְ 1 the covering of ram skins dyed red, the covering of fine leather See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md). @@ -2635,34 +2543,34 @@ EXO 39 37 nzph 0 bread of the presence This verse is very similar to [35:14](. EXO 39 38 elv1 0 bread of the presence This verse is very similar to [35:15](../35/15.md). EXO 39 39 e755 0 grate This verse is almost identical with [35:16](../35/16.md). EXO 39 40 i8lm 0 Connecting Statement: This verse is almost identical with [35:17](../35/17.md) and parts of [35:18](../35/18.md). -EXO 39 40 ajt4 figs-doublet הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְ⁠אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the dwelling, the tent of meeting These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 39 41 z3ip 0 the dwelling, the tent of meeting This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md). +EXO 39 40 ajt4 figs-doublet הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְ⁠אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the Dwelling, the tent of meeting These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 39 41 z3ip 0 the Dwelling, the tent of meeting This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md). EXO 39 42 ct6k 0 Thus the people This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md). EXO 39 43 t26m וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙ 1 behold Here, the word **behold** draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information. EXO 39 43 z79s writing-endofstory 0 As Yahweh had commanded, in that way they did it This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in [verse 32](../39/32.md). If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this, consider using them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses** is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.\n- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n\n- The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.\n- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the dwelling. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.\n- “Yahweh’s glory filled the dwelling”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the dwelling, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])
+EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses** is repeated seven times, as in the previous chapter, to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.\n- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel verses 2-8 in an expanded way.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n- The **Dwelling** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing, but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing, you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.\n- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like with Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the Dwelling. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.\n- “the glory of Yahweh filled the Dwelling”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the Dwelling, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])\n
EXO 40 1 ea7j writing-newevent 0 There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 40 2 bgv1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 40 2 gzk3 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the first day of the first month of the new year These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 40 2 bgv1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 40 2 gzk3 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the first day of the first month of the new year These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 40 2 clkf figs-ellipsis לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 the first day of the first month of the new year Here, the new or next year is omitted because it can be inferred from context. However, if that would be misunderstood by your readers (perhaps they would think it just meant ”next month” or something), you could add a phrase to make it clear that it is the first month of the year. This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 40 3 l7fp וְ⁠סַכֹּתָ֥ עַל 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “and you shall conceal” EXO 40 5 b3ct figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 40 6 o5sz figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 40 6 nqha figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 place the ark of the testimony in it These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 40 6 nqha figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 place the ark of the testimony in it These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 40 10 yiq8 figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 General Information: Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 40 12 gqld 0 General Information: Verses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md). EXO 40 16 xl61 writing-newevent 0 General Information: This statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 40 17 r6pc figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 So the dwelling was set up The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the dwelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 40 17 r6pc figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 So the Dwelling was set up The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 40 17 gzu5 בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 the first day of the first month This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). -EXO 40 17 wnh8 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד 1 in the second year Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 40 18 kk4n figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Moses set up Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the dwelling. All references to Moses from here to all the dwelling assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md) can be understood this way. Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the dwelling, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 40 20 chx4 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 40 21 yhbs writing-pronouns וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 40 17 wnh8 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד 1 in the second year If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 40 18 kk4n figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Moses set up Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally; the people helped him set up the Dwelling. All references to Moses from here to all the Dwelling assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md) can be understood this way. Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the Dwelling, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 20 chx4 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the next, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 40 21 yhbs writing-pronouns וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the previous verse, there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses, because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the Dwelling, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 40 23 b3pp figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 Moses set up Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 40 25 t2o2 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 Moses set up Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 40 26 i5gg figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י 1 in front of the curtain Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 40 27 iwuo 0 in front of the curtain See [30:7](../30/07.md). -EXO 40 35 ysd8 וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 Yahweh’s glory filled If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the dwelling, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.” +EXO 40 35 ysd8 וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 Yahweh’s glory filled If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the Dwelling, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.” EXO 40 36 ak35 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ 1 was taken up from over If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 40 37 s8y2 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽ⁠וֹ 1 that it was lifted up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 40 38 i8hu figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **before the eyes of** refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv b/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv index 835ad3a264..252e9dc350 100644 --- a/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_04-NUM.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -NUM front intro p55k 0 # Introduction to Numbers\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Numbers\n\n1. Preparing to leave Sinai (1:1–10:10)\n * Counting and assembling the tribes (1:1–4:49)\n * Regulations (5:1–6:27)\n * Dedicating the altar (7:1-89)\n * Setting up the lampstand (8:1-4)\n * Setting apart the Levites (8:5–29)\n * Second Passover; the cloud to lead them; trumpets (9:1–10:10)\n1. Sinai to Moab, through the wilderness (10:11–17:13)\n * Complaining and murmuring (10:11–11:15)\n * The quails (11:16–35)\n * Miriam’s leprosy (12:1–16)\n * The spies selected and sent (13:1–14:45)\n * Commands (15:1-41)\n * Korah’s rebellion (16:1–17:13)\n1. The Priests and purifying (18:1-19:22)\n * Priests and Levites (18:1–32)\n * The law about purifying (19:1–22)\n1. Conflicts (20:1–21:35)\n * Miriam’s death (20:1–13)\n * Edom’s refusal and Aaron’s death (20:14–29)\n * Journey to Moab (21:1–35)\n1. The Plains of Moab (22:1–36:13)\n * Balaam (22:1–24:25)\n * Baal Peor (25:1–18)\n * The second counting (26:1-65)\n * Inheritance rights for daughters (27:1–11)\n * Joshua succeeds Moses (27:12–23)\n * Offerings and women’s vows (28:1–30:16)\n * Midianite war (31:1–54)\n * Across the Jordan (32:1–42)\n * The people set up camp (33:1–56)\n * Land west of the Jordan; cities for Levites and cities of refuge (34:1–35:34)\n * Female heirs marry (36:1-13)\n\n### What is the Book of Numbers about?\n\nThe Book of Numbers tells about the people of Israel as they traveled from Mount Sinai in the wilderness to the Jordan River. While traveling, the Israelites became discouraged. So they rebelled against the leaders whom God had given them. At the Jordan River, the people of Israel refused to enter the Promised Land. Because the Israelites were afraid and did not trust God, he delayed their entry into the Promised Land for forty years (13:1–14:45). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThe title of this book, “Numbers,” refers to when the number of the Israelites was counted. The people of the project language may already be familiar with the name “Numbers” from other Bible versions. If not, the translator could consider a clearer name for the book, such as “The Counting of the People of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/census]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Numbers?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the Book of Numbers. However, at a later time, scribes and priests probably put the book into its present form. They may have included text from other sources. One such source was “the scroll of the Wars of Yahweh” (21:14).\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### How does Numbers present the idea of the whole community being responsible when only a few people sinned?\n\nThe people understood and assumed that God would punish the whole community of Israel if some of the people rebelled against him. God did often punish the entire nation when some of them sinned. All of the people in the ancient Near East would have understood and expected this. However, Moses and Aaron prayed for God to punish only those who were guilty.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Why does Moses speak using third person pronouns about himself?\n\nWhen an author wrote about something he was involved in, it was common for him to use the pronoun “he” instead of “I,” or “they” instead of “we.” The translator may decide to use the project’s normal pronouns instead. +NUM front intro p55k 0 # Introduction to Numbers

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Numbers

1. Preparing to leave Sinai (1:1–10:10)
* Counting and assembling the tribes (1:1–4:49)
* Regulations (5:1–6:27)
* Dedicating the altar (7:1-89)
* Setting up the lampstand (8:1-4)
* Setting apart the Levites (8:5–29)
* Second Passover; the cloud to lead them; trumpets (9:1–10:10)
1. Sinai to Moab, through the wilderness (10:11–17:13)
* Complaining and murmuring (10:11–11:15)
* The quails (11:16–35)
* Miriam’s leprosy (12:1–16)
* The spies selected and sent (13:1–14:45)
* Commands (15:1-41)
* Korah’s rebellion (16:1–17:13)
1. The Priests and purifying (18:1-19:22)
* Priests and Levites (18:1–32)
* The law about purifying (19:1–22)
1. Conflicts (20:1–21:35)
* Miriam’s death (20:1–13)
* Edom’s refusal and Aaron’s death (20:14–29)
* Journey to Moab (21:1–35)
1. The Plains of Moab (22:1–36:13)
* Balaam (22:1–24:25)
* Baal Peor (25:1–18)
* The second counting (26:1-65)
* Inheritance rights for daughters (27:1–11)
* Joshua succeeds Moses (27:12–23)
* Offerings and women’s vows (28:1–30:16)
* Midianite war (31:1–54)
* Across the Jordan (32:1–42)
* The people set up camp (33:1–56)
* Land west of the Jordan; cities for Levites and cities of refuge (34:1–35:34)
* Female heirs marry (36:1-13)

### What is the Book of Numbers about?

The Book of Numbers tells about the people of Israel as they traveled from Mount Sinai in the wilderness to the Jordan River. While traveling, the Israelites became discouraged. So they rebelled against the leaders whom God had given them. At the Jordan River, the people of Israel refused to enter the Promised Land. Because the Israelites were afraid and did not trust God, he delayed their entry into the Promised Land for forty years (13:1–14:45). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

The title of this book, “Numbers,” refers to when the number of the Israelites was counted. The people of the project language may already be familiar with the name “Numbers” from other Bible versions. If not, the translator could consider a clearer name for the book, such as “The Counting of the People of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/census]])

### Who wrote the Book of Numbers?

The writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the Book of Numbers. However, at a later time, scribes and priests probably put the book into its present form. They may have included text from other sources. One such source was “the scroll of the Wars of Yahweh” (21:14).

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How does Numbers present the idea of the whole community being responsible when only a few people sinned?

The people understood and assumed that God would punish the whole community of Israel if some of the people rebelled against him. God did often punish the entire nation when some of them sinned. All of the people in the ancient Near East would have understood and expected this. However, Moses and Aaron prayed for God to punish only those who were guilty.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Why does Moses speak using third person pronouns about himself?

When an author wrote about something he was involved in, it was common for him to use the pronoun “he” instead of “I,” or “they” instead of “we.” The translator may decide to use the project’s normal pronouns instead. NUM 1 intro av14 0 # Numbers 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The ULT sets the lines in 1:5-15 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are long lists.

### Census

They counted how many men of military age were in each tribe of Israel. These men would also become the heads of families. It is possible the numbers in this chapter are rounded to the nearest 100. NUM 1 1 fr2s 0 Yahweh This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. NUM 1 1 u2p1 translate-hebrewmonths בְּ⁠אֶחָד֩ לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֜י 1 on 1 of the second month This is the **second month** of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of April on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ NUM 7 29 m62d 0 Eliab son of Helon See how you translated this man’s name in NUM 7 30 g7np translate-ordinal 0 the fourth day Alternate translation: “day 4” or “day number 4” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) NUM 7 30 i4g9 0 Elizur son of Shedeur See how you translated this man’s name in [Numbers 1:5](../01/05.md). NUM 7 31 z13a translate-bweight שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֮ מִשְׁקָלָ⁠הּ֒ 1 its weight was 130 See how you translated **its weight was 130** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -NUM 7 31 x59n translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל 1 70 shekels \nSee how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +NUM 7 31 x59n translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֥ים שֶׁ֖קֶל 1 70 shekels
See how you translated **70 shekels** in [7:13](../07/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) NUM 7 31 ccm9 translate-bweight 0 by the standard weight of the sanctuary shekel There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “measured by the standard weights used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) NUM 7 31 xme1 figs-activepassive 0 fine flour mixed with oil If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fine flour that he had mixed with oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) NUM 7 32 ce94 translate-bweight 0 one gold dish weighing ten shekels If necessary, this can be written in modern measurements. See how you translated these same weights in [Numbers 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “one gold dish weighing one tenth of a kilogram” or “one gold dish weighting 110 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ NUM 8 24 ygl7 0 All of this is for the Levites Alternate translation: “All o NUM 8 24 q65x translate-numbers 0 twenty-five years old Alternate translation: “25 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) NUM 8 24 l8m6 0 must join the company to serve in the tent of meeting The word “company” refers to the rest of the people working in the tent of meeting. See how you translated this phrase in [Numbers 4:3](../04/03.md). NUM 8 25 hw8k translate-numbers 0 at the age of fifty years Alternate translation: “at 50 years old” or “when they become 50 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -NUM 9 intro p8ra 0 # Numbers 9 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Passover\n\nThis chapter records the celebration of the Passover for the first time since it began. The people kept the Passover as directed by the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]]) +NUM 9 intro p8ra 0 # Numbers 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Passover

This chapter records the celebration of the Passover for the first time since it began. The people kept the Passover as directed by the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]]) NUM 9 1 zi29 translate-ordinal 0 in the first month of the second year after they came out from the land of Egypt This means that they had come out of Egypt a year earlier. They were beginning their second year in the wilderness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) NUM 9 1 w91f translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן 1 in the first month This is the **first month** of the Hebrew calendar. It marks when God brought the people of Israel out of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) NUM 9 1 ku29 figs-idiom 0 after they came out from the land of Egypt Here “they” refers to the people of Israel. The phrase “came out” means to leave. Alternate translation: “after they left the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1158,8 +1158,8 @@ NUM 21 26 v9rj 0 Sihon had taken all his land Here “his” refers to the kin NUM 21 27 bf5s figs-parallelism 0 Heshbon … city of Sihon These are two names that refer to the same city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) NUM 21 27 pw7i figs-activepassive 0 Let the city of Sihon be rebuilt and established again If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let someone rebuild and establish again the city of Sihon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) NUM 21 27 a4ni figs-doublet 0 rebuilt and established These two terms are very similar and emphasize that the city will be fully rebuilt. Alternate translation: “completely rebuilt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -NUM 21 28 hxh1 figs-parallelism כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן 1 For fire went out from Heshbon,\na flame from the city of Sihon These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that destruction will begin at Heshbon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -NUM 21 28 qha8 figs-metaphor כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן 1 For fire went out from Heshbon,\na flame from the city of Sihon Here the destroying army is spoken of as if it were a fire. Alternate translation: “King Sihon led a strong army from the city of Heshbon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +NUM 21 28 hxh1 figs-parallelism כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן 1 For fire went out from Heshbon,
a flame from the city of Sihon These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that destruction will begin at Heshbon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +NUM 21 28 qha8 figs-metaphor כִּי־ אֵשׁ֙ יָֽצְאָ֣ה מֵֽ⁠חֶשְׁבּ֔וֹן לֶהָבָ֖ה מִ⁠קִּרְיַ֣ת סִיחֹ֑ן 1 For fire went out from Heshbon,
a flame from the city of Sihon Here the destroying army is spoken of as if it were a fire. Alternate translation: “King Sihon led a strong army from the city of Heshbon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) NUM 21 28 di4e figs-metaphor 0 devoured Ar of Moab The army of Sihon is spoken of as if it was an animal that ate up the city of Ar. Alternate translation: “destroyed the town of Ar in the land of Moab” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) NUM 21 29 cu3d figs-parallelism 0 Moab … people of Chemosh These two phrases refer to the same people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) NUM 21 29 r97r 0 people of Chemosh Alternate translation: “Chemosh” was the name of the false god whom the Moabites worshiped. Alternate translation: “the people who worship Chemosh” @@ -1255,8 +1255,8 @@ NUM 23 9 hq42 figs-parallelism 0 from the top of the rocks I see him … from t NUM 23 9 a551 figs-metonymy 0 I see him … I look at him Here “him” is a metonym that refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) NUM 23 9 mm7u 0 there is a people Alternate translation: “there is a group of people” NUM 23 9 ni8f figs-litotes 0 do not consider themselves as just an ordinary nation This negative statement is used to stress that the opposite is true. Alternate translation: “they consider themselves to be a special nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -NUM 23 10 hr4v figs-metaphor מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 Who can count the dust of Jacob\nor number the fourth part of Israel? Here **dust of Jacob** is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -NUM 23 10 x7sy figs-rquestion מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 Who can count the dust of Jacob\nor number the fourth part of Israel? If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +NUM 23 10 hr4v figs-metaphor מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 Who can count the dust of Jacob
or number the fourth part of Israel? Here **dust of Jacob** is a metaphor that speaks of the number of Israelites as if they were as numerous as the specks of dust. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +NUM 23 10 x7sy figs-rquestion מִ֤י מָנָה֙ עֲפַ֣ר יַעֲקֹ֔ב וּ⁠מִסְפָּ֖ר אֶת־ רֹ֣בַע יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 Who can count the dust of Jacob
or number the fourth part of Israel? If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There are too many Israelites to count. No one could count even a fourth of them because there are so many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) NUM 23 10 uxp9 figs-explicit 0 the death of a righteous person It is understood that this will be a peaceful death. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “the peaceful death of a righteous person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) NUM 23 10 am5i figs-metonymy 0 a righteous person … like his These are metonymies that refer to the people of Israel as a single person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) NUM 23 11 x2xr 0 Balak This is the king of Moab. See how you translated this in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md). @@ -1271,14 +1271,14 @@ NUM 23 16 fc1n figs-metaphor 0 put a message in his mouth The message is spoken NUM 23 16 yn5x 0 He said Alternate translation: “Then Yahweh said” NUM 23 18 kka5 figs-parallelism 0 Balak, and hear … Listen to me, you son of Zippor These two phrases mean the same thing and are repeated to emphasize how important it was for Balak to pay attention. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) NUM 23 18 d6y8 0 Balak … son of Zippor See how you translated these names in [Numbers 22:2](../22/02.md). -NUM 23 19 q4wm figs-parallelism הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 Has he said and not done,\nOr spoken and not made it arise? Both of these clauses mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -NUM 23 19 cqsi figs-rquestion הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 Has he said and not done,\nOr spoken and not made it arise? These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +NUM 23 19 q4wm figs-parallelism הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 Has he said and not done,
Or spoken and not made it arise? Both of these clauses mean the same thing and emphasize that God does what he says he will. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +NUM 23 19 cqsi figs-rquestion הַ⁠ה֤וּא אָמַר֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲשֶׂ֔ה וְ⁠דִבֶּ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֥א יְקִימֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 Has he said and not done,
Or spoken and not made it arise? These rhetorical questions can be translated as statements. Alternate translation: “He has never promised a thing without fulfilling what he promised. He has always done exactly what he said he would do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) NUM 23 20 tga7 figs-activepassive 0 I have been commanded to bless If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has commanded me to bless the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) NUM 23 21 w1xp figs-parallelism 0 hardship in Jacob … trouble in Israel These two phrases mean the same thing. This could mean: (1) God has given Israel only good things or (2) there is no sin in Israel that would cause him to judge them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) NUM 23 21 i4xz 0 shouts for their king are among them Alternate translation: “they shout with joy because Yahweh is their king” NUM 23 22 bnk6 figs-simile 0 with strength like that of a wild ox This simile says that Yahweh’s great strength is equal to an ox. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -NUM 23 23 q3q1 figs-parallelism כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 For there is no omen against Jacob,\nand no divination against Israel These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of **Israel** will be effective. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -NUM 23 23 rriu figs-metonymy כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 For there is no omen against Jacob,\nand no divination against Israel Here **Jacob** is a metonym that refers to **Israel**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +NUM 23 23 q3q1 figs-parallelism כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 For there is no omen against Jacob,
and no divination against Israel These two lines mean the same thing, that no curse that anyone puts on the nation of **Israel** will be effective. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +NUM 23 23 rriu figs-metonymy כִּ֤י לֹא־ נַ֨חַשׁ֙ בְּ⁠יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠לֹא־ קֶ֖סֶם בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 For there is no omen against Jacob,
and no divination against Israel Here **Jacob** is a metonym that refers to **Israel**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) NUM 23 23 xhg8 figs-activepassive 0 it must be said If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “people must say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) NUM 23 23 yvh5 0 Look what God has done! It is implied that what God did for them was good. Alternate translation: “Look at the good things God has done for them!” NUM 23 24 jm1j figs-metaphor 0 the people rise like a lioness … he has killed This verse is a long metaphor that speaks of Israel defeating her enemies as if Israel was a lion devouring its prey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_24-JER.tsv b/en_tn_24-JER.tsv index 3c5830f245..a5803ebfd6 100644 --- a/en_tn_24-JER.tsv +++ b/en_tn_24-JER.tsv @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ JER 8 11 a894 0 General Information: The words “they,” “their” and “ JER 8 11 f7ex 0 Connecting Statement: Yahweh continues giving Jeremiah his message to the people of Judah. JER 8 11 t6ta figs-metaphor 0 They healed the wounds of my people lightly This could mean: (1) the wounds represent the problems the people have as a result of their sin. Alternate translation: “They act as though my people’s problems are not serious, like small wounds” or (2) the wounds represent the people’s sin. Alternate translation: “They act as though my people’s sins are not serious, like small wounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JER 8 11 t1ge figs-metaphor 0 They healed the wounds … lightly Here “lightly” represents treating the wounds as if they were not serious, as if they were not difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JER 8 11 mjy3 0 Alternate translation: “Peace, Peace,” when there was no peace “‘All is well, All is well,’ but it was not well” +JER 8 11 mjy3 0 “Peace, Peace,” when there was no peace Alternate translation: “‘All is well, All is well,’ but it was not well” JER 8 12 j556 figs-rquestion 0 Were they ashamed when they practiced abominations? God uses this question to show his anger that the people were not ashamed of their sins. Alternate translation: “They committed terrible sins, and they were not ashamed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JER 8 12 a8qy 0 they did not know how to blush “their faces did not even turn red.” When a person is ashamed, his face normally turns red. JER 8 12 m1ix figs-metaphor 0 they will fall among the fallen Here “fall” represents being killed. Alternate translation: “they will be killed along with the others who are killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 4f910099e3..5efdc8de52 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ MAT 1 22 e8ld writing-quotations λέγοντος 1 In Paul’s culture, **sayi MAT 1 23 sln1 translate-names Ἐμμανουήλ 1 Immanuel **Immanuel** is a male name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 1 23 wlft figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing figuratively means giving notice and attention. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am saying to you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 1 23 lm6t grammar-connect-time-background ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὁ Θεός 1 which is translated, “God with us.” Matthew is providing this background information to help readers understand what the name **Immanuel** means. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “This name means, ‘God with us’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -MAT 1 24 iue3 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος Κυρίου, καὶ παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jospeh took Mary as his wife, just as the angel of the Lord commanded Him to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n +MAT 1 24 iue3 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος Κυρίου, καὶ παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jospeh took Mary as his wife, just as the angel of the Lord commanded Him to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 1 25 i7p5 figs-euphemism οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν 1 he did not know her Mark uses a polite expression to say that they had not engaged in sexual activity. Alternate translation: “He did not have sexual with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His star”

These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Learned men”

English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.” MAT 2 1 j9yn grammar-connect-time-sequential τοῦ δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως, ἰδοὺ, μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 General Information: **learned men from the east arrived in Jerusalem** comes after **Jesus had been born in Bethlehem of Judea**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Now after Jesus had been born in the city of Bethlehem, which is in Judea, men who studied the stars came to Jerusalem from an eastern country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 5cfcef38a6..822686d7db 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1,519 +1,519 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
* Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
* Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
* Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

### What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his life. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:

*The phrase son of man can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, or a human being.

*The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is than the first different because God gives this son of man authority forever. Therefore, the title son of man became a title for the Messiah.

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### Sabbath/Sabbaths

Oftentimes in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “sabbaths”. This is simply for the sake of being as close to the original text as possible. In the UST it is changed to singular to make more sense of the use of the word in its context, “sabbath”.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “You can make me clean”\n\nLeprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n### “The kingdom of God is near”\n\nScholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n +MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Mark\n\n1. Introduction (1:1-13)\n1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee\n * Early ministry (1:14-3:6)\n * Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)\n * Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)\n1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)\n1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)\n1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)\n\n### What is the book of Mark about?\n\nThe Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his life. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Mark?\n\nThe book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?\n\nThe people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways to other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. Jesus often taught by telling parables, stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the Synoptic Gospels?\n\nThe Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”\n\nThe texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.\n\n### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?\n\nIn the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:\n\n*The phrase "son of man" can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, or a human being.\n\n*The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “Son of Man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is different than the first because God gives this Son of Man authority forever. Therefore, the title Son of Man became a title for the Messiah.\n\nTranslating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.\n\n### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?\n\nThe Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.\n\n### Sabbath/Sabbaths\n\nOften in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “Sabbaths.” This is simply for the sake of rendering the translated text as close to the original text as possible. In the UST, Sabbath it is changed to singular to make more sense of the use of the word in its context, “Sabbath.”\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark?\n\nSome verses found in older versions of the Bible are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translator's region that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be surrounded by square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.\n* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)\n* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)\n* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)\n* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)\n\nThe following passage is not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar to the modern versions of the Bible.\n* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “You can make me clean”\n\nLeprosy is a disease of the skin. It made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n### “The kingdom of God is near”\n\nScholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 1 1 kpq1 writing-newevent ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This verse introduces the reader to the history of Jesus the Messiah as told by Mark. This functions as an introduction to the entire book of Mark. Use the natural form in your language for beginning the telling of something that actually happened. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent) MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. If this would be misunderstood, you could use the alternate translation: “who is God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 2 fc4t figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 1 2 e3by writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, where it says” or “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet—he wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MRK 1 2 e3by writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, it says,” or “Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, he wrote,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MRK 1 2 z8b7 figs-ellipsis ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that this sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 1 2 dglq translate-names Ἠσαΐᾳ 1 **Isaiah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face **before your face** is an idiom which means that “the messenger” was sent first, and then the second person came after them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify. Alternate Translation: “first” or “before you”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 1 2 fsqn figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case “seeing” figuratively means giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention!” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face Here, **before your face** is an idiom which means that “the messenger” was sent first, and then the second person came after them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify. Alternate Translation: “first” or “before you”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 1 2 fsqn figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The term **Behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case “seeing” figuratively means giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention!” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MRK 1 2 s28q figs-yousingular προσώπου σου…τὴν ὁδόν σου 1 your face … your way Here, both of the words **your** refer to Jesus and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -MRK 1 2 kl12 figs-metaphor ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου 1 will prepare your way That the messenger **will prepare your way** represents preparing the people for the Lord’s arrival. If this would be misunderstood your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will prepare the people for your arrival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 1 2 kl12 figs-metaphor ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου 1 will prepare your way That the messenger **will prepare your way** represents preparing the people for the Lord’s arrival. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who will prepare the people for your arrival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 1 3 lkm3 writing-quotations φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, 1 The voice of one crying out in the wilderness Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “The voice of someone crying out in the wilderness is heard, saying:” or “They hear the sound of someone calling out in the wilderness, saying:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MRK 1 3 dqi9 figs-quotesinquotes φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Here there is a direct quotation inside a direct quotation as Mark quotes Isaiah who quotes the messenger. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 1 3 cf0e figs-synecdoche φωνὴ βοῶντος 1 Here, **a voice** figuratively refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear his voice as he crys out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 1 3 dqi9 figs-quotesinquotes φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Here there is a direct quotation nested inside a direct quotation as Mark quotes Isaiah who quotes the messenger. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 1 3 cf0e figs-synecdoche φωνὴ βοῶντος 1 Here, **a voice** figuratively refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear his voice as he cries out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 1 3 v3n3 figs-parallelism ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight **Make ready the way of the Lord** and **make his paths straight** mean the same thing. If this would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two. See the next note for alternate translations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MRK 1 3 peh5 figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make ready the way of the Lord Isaiah uses a metaphor here of preparing **paths** or **the way** that someone will travel on. If someone prepares a path for another, they make the path walkable. If someone in high authority were coming, they would make sure the roads were clear from any hazards. So this metaphor means that the people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 1 3 peh5 figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make ready the way of the Lord Isaiah uses a metaphor here of preparing **paths** or **the way** that someone will travel on to make it walkable. If a person in high authority were coming, the people would make sure the roads were clear of any hazards. This metaphor means that people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MRK 1 3 yyk3 figs-extrainfo Κυρίου 1 In this quote from Isaiah, **the Lord** refers to God, but Mark is showing how it also refers to Jesus the Messiah. However, do not translate this as “Jesus” here, because this double reference must be maintained. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo) -MRK 1 3 h8rt figs-idiom ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν 1 The imagery of paths or **the way** is figuratively used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for another, they make the path walkable. If someone in high authority was coming, they would make sure the roads were clear from any hazards. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -MRK 1 3 wltl figs-idiom ἑτοιμάσατε…ποιεῖτε 1 These words are both plural, addressing people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 1 3 h8rt figs-idiom ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν 1 The imagery of paths or **the way** is figuratively used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for another person, the people make the path walkable. If someone in high authority were coming, they would make sure the roads were clear from any hazards. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) +MRK 1 3 wltl figs-yousingular ἑτοιμάσατε…ποιεῖτε 1 These words are both plural, addressing people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) MRK 1 4 di1o translate-names Ἰωάννης 1 **John** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 1 4 s05n figs-explicit καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 The **baptism of repentance** proclaimed by John likely has its origin in baptisms which gentiles did who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time, and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If this would be misunderstood, you can state it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -MRK 1 4 dtqv figs-explicit καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance**, **forgiveness**, and **sins**, you could express those ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have repented of their former evil way of living and that God has forgiven them for sinning against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 1 5 u9yg figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα 1 the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem The word **region of Judea** is used here to refer to the people living within Judea. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 1 5 cf75 figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες 1 the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem Here, **the whole region** and **all the people** are generalizations that refers to a great number of people, not to every single person. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 1 4 s05n figs-explicit καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 The **baptism of repentance** proclaimed by John likely has its origin in baptisms done by Gentiles who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time and showed that these people were converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If this would be misunderstood, you can express it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have turned from their former evil ways, accepted God’s forgiveness for their sins, and were now following God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 1 4 dtqv figs-abstractnouns καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance**, **forgiveness**, and **sins**, you could express those ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them to show that they have repented of their former evil way of living and that God has forgiven them for sinning against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 1 5 u9yg figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα 1 the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem The word **region of Judea** is used here to refer to the people living within Judea. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 1 5 cf75 figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες 1 the whole region of Judea and all the people of Jerusalem Here, **the whole region** and **all the inhabitants** are generalizations that refer to a great number of people, not to every single person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 1 5 h8h7 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν 1 were baptized by him in the Jordan River, confessing their sins If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and he was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 1 6 n3rk writing-background καὶ ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας καὶ μέλι ἄγριον. 1 This verse helps provide background to John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 1 6 j141 figs-explicit ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου 1 The camels’ hair that John wore had been made into clothing. This would have been a rough, coarse material. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John wore rough clothing woven from camel’s hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 6 j141 figs-explicit ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου 1 The camels’ hair that John wore had been made into clothing. This would have been a rough, coarse material. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John wore rough clothing woven from camel’s hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 6 h518 translate-unknown καμήλου 1 If your readers would not know what a **camel** is, you could include a description in a footnote or use a more general term. Alternate translation: “animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 1 6 jpzh translate-unknown ἀκρίδας 1 If your readers would not know what **locusts** are, you could include a description in a footnote or use a more general term. Alternate translation: “grasshoppers” or “insects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MRK 1 7 p7tl writing-quotations ἐκήρυσσεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he announced loudly to the people” or “he proclaimed these things:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MRK 1 7 l7jd writing-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν 1 he was proclaiming The pronoun **He** is referring to John. Alternate translation: “John was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MRK 1 7 bk1j writing-pronouns ἔρχεται…ὀπίσω μου 1 Here, **coming after me** means that this mightier person would come at a later time than John came. It does not mean that he is behind John, chasing John, or a disciple of John. -MRK 1 7 g8fw figs-explicit κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 of whom the strap of his sandals I am not worthy to stoop down to untie Untying the straps of sandals was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that he is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -MRK 1 8 e4qi figs-metaphor αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 but he will baptize you with the Holy Spirit This metaphor compares John’s baptism with water to the baptism with the Holy Spirit that Jesus will give. The point of the comparison is how people are made clean from sin. John baptized people to show that they wanted to be cleansed of their sin, and Jesus will enable them to be fully cleansed of sin by the Holy Spirit. If possible, use the same word for **baptize** here as you used for John’s baptism to keep the comparison between the two. If this is not possible, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “but he will join you to the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 1 7 p7tl writing-quotations ἐκήρυσσεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he announced loudly to the people” or “he proclaimed these things, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MRK 1 7 l7jd writing-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν 1 he was proclaiming The pronoun **he** is referring to John. Alternate translation: “John was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 1 7 bk1j ἔρχεται…ὀπίσω μου 1 Here, **coming after me** means that this mightier person would come at a later time than John came. It does not mean that he is behind John, chasing John, or a disciple of John. +MRK 1 7 g8fw figs-explicit κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 of whom the strap of his sandals I am not worthy to stoop down to untie Untying the straps of sandals was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that John is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 1 8 e4qi figs-metaphor αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 but he will baptize you with the Holy Spirit This metaphor compares John’s baptism with water to the baptism with the Holy Spirit, which Jesus will give. The point of the comparison is how people are made clean from sin. John baptized people to show that they wanted to be cleansed of their sin, and Jesus will enable them to be fully cleansed of sin by the Holy Spirit. If possible, use the same word for **baptize** here as you used for John’s baptism to aid the comparison between the two. If this is not possible, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “but he will join you to the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MRK 1 8 r1j9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, baptism by water and baptism by the Holy Spirit are being contrasted. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MRK 1 9 u65k writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 it happened that in those days **And it happened that in those days** marks the beginning of a new event in the story line. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MRK 1 9 y8ea writing-pronouns ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “while John was preaching and baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 1 9 u65k writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 it happened that in those days **And it happened that in those days** marks the beginning of a new event in the storyline. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MRK 1 9 y8ea writing-pronouns ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If this is not clear in your language, you can express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 1 9 gi39 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη…ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου 1 he was baptized by John If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) MRK 1 9 zv8t figs-go ἦλθεν Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus went from Nazareth in Galilee” or “Jesus went out from Nazareth in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 1 10 m5f6 figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the Spirit coming down on him like a dove The phrase **like a dove** could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “The Spirit came down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) -MRK 1 10 stwh grammar-connect-time-sequential εὐθὺς 1 The word **immediately** occurs often throughout the book of Mark. As here, it usually means that the event it introduces occurs directly after the previous event. Use a natural way in your language that communicates this. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential) -MRK 1 10 n8sg figs-activepassive εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he saw the heavens burst open” or “he saw that God was tearing open heaven” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) -MRK 1 11 jh9m guidelines-sonofgodprinciples καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) +MRK 1 10 m5f6 figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the Spirit coming down on him like a dove The phrase **like a dove** could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit came down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) +MRK 1 10 stwh grammar-connect-time-sequential εὐθὺς 1 The word **immediately** occurs often throughout the book of Mark. As used here, it usually means that the event it introduces occurs directly after the previous event. Use a natural way in your language that communicates this. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential) +MRK 1 10 n8sg figs-activepassive εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he saw the heavens bursting open” or “he saw that God was tearing heaven open” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) +MRK 1 11 jh9m figs-personification καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “And God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MRK 1 11 s6f4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 my beloved Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus. The title **Son** describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 12 mh8n εὐθὺς 1 See how you translated the word **immediately** in [Mark 1:10](../mrk/01/10.md) -MRK 1 12 yv6v τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “The Spirit led Jesus into the wilderness” -MRK 1 13 k2kt translate-numbers πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “while Satan tempted him” or “during which Satan kept trying to persuade him to disobey God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) +MRK 1 12 yv6v τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus into the wilderness” +MRK 1 13 k2kt active-passive πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “while Satan tempted him” or “during which Satan kept trying to persuade him to disobey God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) MRK 1 13 siu3 ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων 1 he was with Alternate Translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals” -MRK 1 13 sojp figs-explicit οἱ ἄγγελοι διηκόνουν αὐτῷ. 1 Comparing this account with the one in Matthew 4:1-11, we see that Mark is only listing a brief summary of the events here. So the phrase **the angels were serving him** could mean: (1) the angels were taking care of Jesus during this time to keep him safe or (2) The angels came to give him food and water at the end of the 40 days. -MRK 1 14 q12s figs-activepassive μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 after John was arrested If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the governor Herod had John arrested” or “after Herod’s soldiers arrested John” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) -MRK 1 14 o4oh figs-extrainfo μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 The governor Herod Antipas had John arrested and put into prison because John continually rebuked Herod Antipas for his sins. See [6:14-29](../06/14-29.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this information in a footnote. +MRK 1 13 sojp οἱ ἄγγελοι διηκόνουν αὐτῷ. 1 Comparing this account with the one in Matthew 4:1-11, we see that Mark is only listing a brief summary of the events here. So the phrase **the angels were serving him** could mean: (1) the angels were taking care of Jesus during this time to keep him safe or (2) the angels came to give him food and water at the end of the 40 days. +MRK 1 14 q12s figs-activepassive μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 after John was arrested If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But after the governor Herod had John arrested” or “But after Herod’s soldiers arrested John” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) +MRK 1 14 o4oh μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 The governor Herod Antipas had **John arrested** and put into prison because John continually rebuked Herod Antipas for his sins. See [6:14-29](../06/14-29.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this information in a footnote. MRK 1 14 tmh9 grammar-connect-time-background μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 This phrase provides background information that sets the time period for Jesus’ ministry. Jesus did not begin his ministry until John had been arrested. Use the natural form in your language for expressing this information. Alternate translation: “Later, John was arrested. After that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background) -MRK 1 14 ys3b figs-activepassive ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Also, it might be more natural to indicate that Jesus was returning to Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back to Galilee” or “Jesus returned to Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 1 14 ys3b figs-go ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Also, it might be more natural to indicate that Jesus was returning to Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back to Galilee” or “Jesus returned to Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 1 14 ns6b κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 proclaiming the gospel Alternate Translation: “telling the people there about the good news” -MRK 1 15 fzq5 figs-idiom πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς καὶ ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **the time has been fulfilled** is an idiom that means that something which God said would happen has finally happened. Often, this refers to prophecy of the Old Testament being fulfilled in the New Testament. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this plainly. Alternate tra nslation: “God said that his rule would come near, and now it has” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -MRK 1 15 rhom writing-quotations καὶ λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and this is what he said” or “giving this message:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MRK 1 15 fzq5 figs-idiom πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς καὶ ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **The time has been fulfilled** is an idiom that means that something which God said would happen has finally happened. Often, this refers to prophecy of the Old Testament being fulfilled in the New Testament. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God said that his rule would come near, and now it has come near” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) +MRK 1 15 rhom writing-quotations καὶ λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said” or “and informing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MRK 1 15 quab figs-activepassive πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The time has come” or “What God promised is now happening” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) -MRK 1 15 yo11 figs-activepassive 1 The phrase **has come near** could mean: (1) has begun. Alternate translation: “God is now creating his kingdom among you” or (2) will soon begin. Alternate translation: “God will soon bring people into his kingdom” -MRK 1 16 kgzb figs-explicit Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν 1 The phrase **has come near** could mean: (1) has begun. Alternate translation: “God is now creating his kingdom among you” or (2) will soon begin. Alternate translation: “God will soon bring people into his kingdom” -MRK 1 16 z3j9 figs-explicit ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 casting a net into the sea The purpose of throwing the net was to catch fish in it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “throwing a net into the water to catch fish” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 1 15 yo11 1 The phrase **has come near** could mean: (1) has begun. Alternate translation: “God is now creating his kingdom among you” or (2) will soon begin. Alternate translation: “God will soon bring people into his kingdom” +MRK 1 16 kgzb Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν 1 The phrase **has come near** could mean: (1) has begun. Alternate translation: “God is now creating his kingdom among you” or (2) will soon begin. Alternate translation: “God will soon bring people into his kingdom” +MRK 1 16 z3j9 figs-explicit ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 casting a net into the sea The purpose of throwing the net was to catch fish in it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “were throwing a net into the water to catch fish” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) MRK 1 16 xor6 grammar-connect-logic-result ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. You may also wish to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because they were fishermen, they were casting a net into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MRK 1 17 zui3 figs-idiom δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου 1 Come after me **Come after me** is an idiom which means to become a disciple of someone. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Join the group of my followers” or “Become my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 1 17 mlc6 figs-metaphor ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων 1 I will make you to become fishers of men **fishers of men** means Simon and Andrew will teach people God’s message, so others will also follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will teach you to gather men to me like you gather fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 1 17 i2sr figs-metaphor ἀνθρώπων 1 **men** here refers not just to men, but to people in general. Alternate Translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 1 17 mlc6 figs-metaphor ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων 1 I will make you to become fishers of men **fishers of men** means Simon and Andrew will teach people God’s message so others will also follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will teach you to gather men to me like you gather fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 1 17 i2sr figs-gendernotations\n\n ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, **men** refers not just to men but to people in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MRK 1 18 tnuc grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ εὐθέως 1 See note on [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -MRK 1 18 gvia grammar-connect-time-sequential ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **they followed him** means that they went with Jesus and intended to remain with him as his disciples. Make sure that you use a phrase that does not imply that they followed him with any evil intention or followed far behind him. Alternate translation: “they walked away with Jesus to learn from him” -MRK 1 19 xl2m figs-explicit καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα 1 were in the boat mending the nets Here, **preparing** refers to making something ready to use. Since a net is made of ropes, this probably meant mending or tying it together. Alternate translation: “mending their nets” -MRK 1 20 zjz5 figs-explicit ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς 1 having called them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what Jesus **called** James and John to do. Alternate translation: “having called them to come with him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -MRK 1 20 f77b figs-explicit ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **they** refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 1 18 gvia ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **they followed him** means that they went with Jesus and intended to remain with him as his disciples. Make sure that you use a phrase that does not imply that they followed him with any evil intention or followed far behind him. Alternate translation: “they walked away with Jesus to learn from him” +MRK 1 19 xl2m καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα 1 were in the boat mending the nets Here, **mending** refers to restoring something, usually by sewing, to make it ready to use. Since a net is made of ropes, this probably meant stitching, weaving, or tying it together. Alternate translation: “repairing their nets” +MRK 1 20 zjz5 figs-explicit ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς 1 having called them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly what Jesus **called** James and John to do. Alternate translation: “having called them to come with him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 1 20 f77b writing-pronouns ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **they** refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If this is not clear in your language, you can express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 1 20 b2ci ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 they went after him The phrase, **they went away after him** means the same as “they followed him” in [verse 18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus” -MRK 1 22 bsc9 figs-ellipsis ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 for he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes The author intentionally leaves out the repeated information in this sentence. If this would be misunderstood in you in you language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “for he was teaching them as someone who has authority teaches and not as the scribes teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 1 22 bsc9 figs-ellipsis ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 for he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes The author intentionally leaves out the repeated information in this sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “for he was teaching them as someone who has authority teaches and not as the scribes teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 1 22 e9gf grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς. 1 Here, Jesus’ teaching is being contrasted with the way that the Jewish teachers taught. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MRK 1 22 kmxf ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 Alternate translation: “The people in the synagogue were amazed” -MRK 1 23 w7z2 figs-explicit καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 The person with the unclean spirit enters the synagogue while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit entered the synagogue.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 1 24 ra8g figs-rquestion τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ? 1 What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth? The demons ask this rhetorical question meaning there is no reason for Jesus to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 1 24 qsig figs-explicit ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 **us** here refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1-20). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 22 kmxf ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue were amazed” +MRK 1 23 w7z2 figs-explicit καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 The person with the **unclean spirit** enters the **synagogue** while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit entered the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 24 ra8g figs-rquestion τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ? 1 What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth? The demons ask this rhetorical question, meaning there is no reason for Jesus to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them alone. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 1 24 qsig figs-explicit ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1-20). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 24 m8gz figs-rquestion ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Have you come to destroy us? The demons ask this rhetorical question to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 1 28 hrbh figs-metaphor καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 This is is a metaphor which means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it in the region of Galilee. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout the entire region of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 1 29 ybs7 ἦλθον 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “They went to the house of Simon and Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 1 28 hrbh figs-metaphor καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 This is a metaphor which means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it in the region of Galilee. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout all of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 1 29 ybs7 figs-go  ἦλθον 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “They went into the house of Simon and Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 1 30 bvvl writing-background ἡ…πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα 1 the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever This phrase gives background information about Peter’s mother-in-law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 1 30 vnp5 translate-unknown πυρέσσουσα 1 A **fever** is an illness which causes the temperature of the body to increase. This results in the need to lie down in bed and rest as Peter’s mother-in-law was doing. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression. Alternate Translation: “being sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 1 30 vnp5 translate-unknown πυρέσσουσα 1 A **fever** is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. This results in the need to lie down in bed and rest as Peter’s mother-in-law was doing. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression. Alternate Translation: "being feverish from illness" or “being ill with an elevated temperature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 1 31 bzd2 figs-events ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός 1 Here, the author mentions Jesus helping her up before mentioning that Jesus took her by the hand, even though it happened in the opposite order. If this is confusing in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “Jesus took her hand and helped her up out of bed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MRK 1 31 sff6 figs-explicit ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός 1 the fever left her This is a metaphor meaning that Jesus healed her of the fever. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her of the fever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 1 31 i5br figs-explicit διηκόνει αὐτοῖς 1 she started serving them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly that she likely served them food. Alternate translation: “she provided them with food and drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 1 32 h0y2 writing-background ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος 1 ***Now when it became evening, after the sun had set** gives background information which helps the reader know when in the day this was occurring. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 1 32 d1i7 figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους 1 all those having sickness and those possessed by demons The word **all** is an exaggeration to emphasize the great number of people who came. It is not likely that every single sick person was brought to Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “A great number who were sick or possessed by demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 1 33 grp2 figs-metonymy ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 the whole city was gathered together at the door The word **city** is a metonym for the people who lived in the city. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people from that city gathered outside of Simon’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 1 33 pa4f figs-hyperbole καὶ ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 The entire city did not gather at his door. This expression is used to express that a large number of people came to him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people from the city gathered at Jesus’ door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 1 31 sff6 figs-metaphor ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός 1 the fever left her This is a metaphor meaning that Jesus healed her of the fever. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her of the fever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 1 31 i5br figs-explicit διηκόνει αὐτοῖς 1 she started serving them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that she likely served them food. Alternate translation: “she provided them with food and drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 32 h0y2 writing-background ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος 1 **Now when it became evening, after the sun had set** gives background information which helps the reader know the time in the day when this was occurring. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 1 32 d1i7 figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους 1 all those having sickness and those possessed by demons The word **all** is an exaggeration to emphasize the great number of people who came. It is not likely that every single sick person was brought to Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “a great number who were sick or possessed by demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 1 33 grp2 figs-metonymy ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 the whole city was gathered together at the door The word **city** is a metonym for the people who lived in the city. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “many people from that city gathered outside of Simon’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 1 33 pa4f figs-hyperbole καὶ ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 The entire city did not gather at his door. This expression, **the whole city**, is used to express that a large number of people came to him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people from the city gathered at Simon's door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 1 37 vgc7 figs-hyperbole πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε 1 Everyone is seeking you The word **Everyone** is an exaggeration to emphasize that many people were looking for Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people are looking for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 1 38 plm9 figs-exclusive ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ 1 We may go elsewhere Here, Jesus uses the word **us** to refer to himself, along with Simon, Andrew, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MRK 1 38 z53z figs-extrainfo εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις 1 Which towns the **surrounding towns** are is clarifed in the following passages. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MRK 1 39 lb9t grammar-connect-time-simultaneous κηρύσσων, εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλων 1 Jesus’ was both **preaching** and **casting out demons**. Jesus was not necessarily doing these in any order. Use the appropriate connecting word or phrase to show that Jesus was doing both of these things together. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous) -MRK 1 39 zs4i figs-hyperbole ἦλθεν…εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 He went in all of Galilee The words **in all** are an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations during his ministry. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys this idea. Alternate translation: “He went to many places in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 1 39 zs4i figs-hyperbole ἦλθεν…εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 He went in all of Galilee The words **in all** are an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations during his ministry. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys this idea. Alternate translation: “he went to many places in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 1 41 l9jg figs-idiom σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 having been moved with compassion Here, the word **moved** is an idiom meaning to feel emotion about another person’s need. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having felt compassion for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 1 41 flc0 figs-idiom σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus felt compassionate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 1 41 flc0 figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus felt compassionate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 1 41 qjz4 figs-ellipsis θέλω 1 I am willing If **I am willing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply what Jesus is willing to do from the context. Alternate translation: “I am willing to make you clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 1 43 iw7t 0 General Information: The word **him** used here refers to the leper whom Jesus healed. -MRK 1 44 xhu8 figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 show yourself to the priest Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 44 xhu8 figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 show yourself to the priest Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: "get inspected by the priest to confirm that you are healed of the leprosy" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 44 w6b2 figs-synecdoche σεαυτὸν δεῖξον 1 show yourself Here, the word **yourself** represents the skin of the leper. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 1 45 i91a figs-metaphor ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 began to proclaim often and to spread the word widely Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from all sides The word **all sides** is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)\n1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)\n1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)\n1. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)\n1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and Feasting\n\nPeople would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nThe Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 7, 14, 15, 18, 25, . If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n -MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he is at home If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 2 1 j6pa grammar-connect-time-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ 1 The author tells us that Jesus **entered again** to remind us that he has already been in Capernaum in [1:21](../01/21.md). You could make this more explicit in your language. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -MRK 2 1 afvi figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 There is some debate over whose **house** this is. It could possibly be (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place where Jesus always returned to when we was in the town of Capernaum. Alternate translation: “He was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic, and not specify whose house it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 45 i91a figs-metaphor ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 began to proclaim often and to spread the word widely Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from all sides The word **all sides** is a hyperbole used to emphasize from how very many places the people came. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)\n1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)\n1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)\n1. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)\n1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and Feasting\n\nPeople would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nThe Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and to show that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 7, 14, 15, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he is at home If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 2 1 j6pa grammar-connect-time-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ 1 The author tells us that Jesus **entered again** to remind us that he has already been in Capernaum in [1:21](../01/21.md). You could make this more explicit in your language. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “When Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +MRK 2 1 afvi figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 There is some debate over whose **house** this is. It could possibly be: (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place to which Jesus always returned when we was in the town of Capernaum. Alternate translation: “he was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic and not specify whose house it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 2 3 s21g translate-unknown παραλυτικὸν 1 A paralytic is someone who is not able to completely use their body. Sometimes they just can’t use their legs, but sometimes they can’t use anything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MRK 2 4 v6ma translate-unknown ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 they removed the roof where he was, and having made an opening, they lowered Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay and covered with tiles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MRK 2 4 ouxr translate-unknown κράβαττον 1 A mat was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture that you might carry an injured person on to get them medical attention. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” or “a cot” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) -MRK 2 5 trg9 figs-explicit ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 having seen their faith The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 4 v6ma translate-unknown ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 they removed the roof where he was, and having made an opening, they lowered Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay covered with tiles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 2 4 ouxr translate-unknown κράβαττον 1 A **mat** was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture on which you might carry an injured person to get them medical attention. Alternate translation: “stretcher” or “cot” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) +MRK 2 5 trg9 figs-explicit ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 having seen their faith The implication is that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he recognized that the man’s friends were convinced that he could heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 2 5 hzg6 translate-kinship τέκνον 1 Child The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MRK 2 6 le6v figs-metonymy διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 reasoning in their hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “were thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 2 7 yr5a figs-rquestion τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ? 1 Why does this man speak this way? These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus was claiming to be God, and so in their view, he would be speaking blasphemies. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n -MRK 2 7 sj6j figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός? 1 Who is able to forgive sins except God alone? The scribes used this question to say that since only **God is able to forgive sins**, then Jesus should not say “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 2 8 niy6 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his spirit The word **spirit** is a metonym for his inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 2 8 h3zp figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 7 yr5a figs-rquestion τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ? 1 Why does this man speak this way? These religious leaders do not expect someone to tell them who Jesus is. Instead, they are using the question form to emphasize how inappropriate they think it is for Jesus to tell someone that he forgives their sins. As the next sentence explains, they think this means Jesus is claiming to be God, and so in their view, he is speaking blasphemies. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This man is speaking blasphemies!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 7 sj6j figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός? 1 Who is able to forgive sins except God alone? The scribes used this question to say that since no one **is able to forgive sins except God alone**, then Jesus should not say, “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 8 niy6 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his spirit Here, **his spirit** is a metonym for his inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 2 8 h3zp figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 2 8 wga7 figs-rquestion τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Why are you thinking these things in your hearts? Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 2 8 s3m6 figs-metonymy ταῦτα…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 these things in your hearts The word **hearts** is a metonym for their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 2 9 wv5d figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Which is easier to say to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins have been forgiven’ or to say ‘Get up and take up your bed, and walk’? Jesus is using the form of a question in order to teach. He wants to make the scribes and Pharisees reflect on the situation and realize something. There are many implications. For example, these religious leaders may take the question in the sense, “Which is easier to get away with saying?” The answer would be, “Your sins are forgiven,” because people don’t expect visual proof of that, whereas if someone says, “Get up and walk,” and nothing happens, that proves the speaker doesn’t have the power to heal. Jesus likely intends the question in a different sense: “Which is the easier way to deal with a situation like this?” It appears that the man’s sickness has something to do with his sins, because Jesus forgives them. In such a situation, it would not be sufficient to say, “Get up and walk,” since that would address the effect but not the cause. To say, “Your sins are forgiven,” would deal with both the cause and the effect, so that would be the easier way to deal with the situation. There are many other implications that could also be drawn out as well—too many to include in the text of a translation. Since the question form is intrinsic to Jesus’ teaching method, you may wish simply to retain it in your translation. However, to show that he is teaching, not asking for information, you could introduce his question with a phrase that indicates its purpose. Alternate translation: “Think about this. Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk’?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 2 9 q905 figs-quotesinquotes τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 2 10 g4jn εἰδῆτε 1 But in order that you may know The word **you** refers to the scribes and the crowd. If this would be misunderstood, you can state this explicitly. -MRK 2 11 f369 figs-imperative ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου, καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 1 **get up, take up your mat, and go** were not commands that the man was able to obey. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +MRK 2 9 q905 figs-quotesinquotes τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven or to tell him to get up, take his mat, and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 2 10 g4jn εἰδῆτε 1 But in order that you may know The word **you** refers to the scribes and the crowd. If this would be misunderstood, you can express this explicitly. +MRK 2 11 f369 figs-imperative ἔγειρε ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου, καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν σου 1 Here, **get up, take up your mat, and go** are not commands that the man was able to obey. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can rise up and return home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) MRK 2 10 jw9z figs-123person ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 that the Son of Man has authority Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man.” If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and convey the respect in another way. Alternate translation: “that I am the Son of Man and I have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 2 10 s0w6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 **Son of Man** is an important title referring to Jesus. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 2 12 ki94 ἔμπροσθεν πάντων 1 in front of everyone Alternate translation: “in the presence of everyone in the house” -MRK 2 12 e0xs figs-explicit ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν ἔμπροσθεν πάντων 1 The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And all at once the man was healed, so he got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 12 e0xs figs-explicit ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν ἔμπροσθεν πάντων 1 The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all at once the man was healed, so he got up and left the house with everyone watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 2 13 ma6f grammar-connect-time-background καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς 1 Connecting Statement: This phrase acts as background information to tell the reader where the next event is taking place. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -MRK 2 13 zecn figs-go πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “A large crowd went to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 2 13 zecn figs-go πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than came in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “a large crowd went to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 2 14 sc4g translate-names Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου 1 Levi son of Alphaeus **Alphaeus** was the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 2 14 ekv0 figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι 1 In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 2 15 bwv2 ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 for there were many and they were following him Alternate translation: “There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus” -MRK 2 15 zqcu (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 These two groups are used to express that Jesus and his students were eating with many people who the religious leaders looked down upon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -MRK 2 16 rwu1 figs-rquestion οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 This phrase tells the reader that these scribes were members of the group known as the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The scribes, who were members of the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -MRK 2 16 b1bi figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 Why is he eating with the tax collectors and sinners? The Pharisees and scribes are using the question form to express their disapproval. They believed that religious people should separate themselves from people whom they considered to be sinners. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not eat and drink with sinful tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 2 17 ak1u writing-proverbs οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 The ones being healthy do not have need of a physician, but the ones having sickness Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MRK 2 17 c62j figs-irony οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 **Those who are sick** are equated with those who are wanting to be saved by Jesus. The **healthy** are equated with those who do not think they need Jesus. Jesus does not actually think those who do not want him are healthy, but the opposite. He says this because those people think they are healthy in their own eyes and do not need Jesus. If this would be confusing in your language, you be more explicit. Alternate translation: “Those who suppose themselves to be healthy do not need a doctor. It is those who know that they are sick who need a doctor”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -MRK 2 17 lh4l figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 The words **have a need of a physician** are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: Those who are healthy do not need a doctor, but those whoa re sick need a doctor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 2 17 ca4e figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι…ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 but sinners The words **I came...to call** are understood from the phrase before this. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 2 18 z394 ἔρχονται 1 they are coming **They came** refers to an unknown group of people. It is best to leave this unknown, as it is not clear who is being talked about here. Alternate translation: “A group of unknown men came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MRK 2 18 j1h2 figs-explicit καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες 1 This fast is likely referring to the fast which the religious leaders performed twice per week. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now, the students of John and the Pharisees were performing their bi-weekly fast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 18 y7bm figs-explicit καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες. 1 This phrase provides background information. The author is telling us this to help us to understand why Jesus was being asked this question. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now, it happened at the time when the students of John the Baptizer and the Pharisees were fasting.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 2 19 eke3 figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 The sons of the wedding chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? Jesus is using the question form to teach. He wants the scribes and Pharisees to reflect on the actions of his disciples in light of a situation they are already familiar with. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one tells the groom’s party at a wedding to fast while the groom is still with them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 14 ekv0 figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι 1 In this context, to **Follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 2 15 bwv2 ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 for there were many and they were following him Alternate translation: “for there were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus” +MRK 2 15 zqcu (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 These two groups, **tax collectors and sinners**, are used to express that Jesus and his students were eating with many people upon whom the religious leaders looked down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +MRK 2 16 rwu1 figs-possession οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 This phrase tells the reader that these scribes were members of the group known as the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The scribes, who were members of the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +MRK 2 16 b1bi figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 Why is he eating with the tax collectors and sinners? The Pharisees and scribes are using the question form to express their disapproval. They believed that religious people should separate themselves from people whom they considered to be sinners. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “He should not eat and drink with sinful tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 17 ak1u writing-proverbs οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 The ones being healthy do not have need of a physician, but the ones having sickness Jesus begins his response with a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so do sinners need to see Jesus to be forgiven and restored. Since Jesus explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to explain it here. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do need medical care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MRK 2 17 c62j figs-irony οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 Here,**the ones having sickness** are equated with those wanting to be saved by Jesus. The **ones being healthy** are equated with those who do not think they need Jesus. Jesus does not actually think those who do not want him are healthy, but sick. He says this because those people think they are healthy and do not need Jesus. If this would be confusing in your language, you could be more explicit. Alternate translation: “Those who suppose themselves to be healthy do not need a doctor. It is those who know that they are sick who need a doctor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +MRK 2 17 lh4l figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 The words **have a need of a physician** are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: Those who are healthy do not need a doctor, but those who are sick need a doctor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 2 17 ca4e figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι…ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 but sinners The words **I came ... to call** are understood from the phrase before this. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 2 18 z394 ἔρχονται 1 they are coming Here, **they come** refers to an unknown group of people. It is best to leave this unknown, as it is not clear who is being talked about here. Alternate translation: “a group of unknown men came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 2 18 j1h2 figs-explicit καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες 1 This fast is likely referring to the fast which the religious leaders performed twice per week. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now, the students of John and the Pharisees were performing their biweekly fast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 18 y7bm figs-writing-background καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες. 1 The phrase **were fasting** provides background information. The author is telling us this to help us to understand why Jesus was being asked this question. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now, it happened at the time when the students of John the Baptizer and the Pharisees were fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 2 19 eke3 figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 The sons of the wedding chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? Jesus is using the question form to teach. He wants the scribes and Pharisees to reflect on the actions of his disciples in light of a situation with which they are already familiar. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one tells the groom’s party at a wedding to fast while the groom is still with them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 2 19 tiiz figs-extrainfo μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 It is best to keep this verse the way it is. Do not clarify that it is about Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MRK 2 19 wetb figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ 1 The expression sons of is a Hebrew idiom that means a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. Alternate translation: “the groom’s party” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 2 20 vg2u figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ…ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom may be taken away If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **the bridegroom may be taken away** with an active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 2 20 y79o figs-activepassive τότε 1 **then** here shows the reader that the bridegroom must first leave, and then the friends will begin fasting. Make sure this is clear in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -MRK 2 21 v6xc figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν 1 No one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was to begin with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 21 vdza figs-parables οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. 1 This verse is a parable, as well as verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 2 22 fk15 figs-explicit ἀσκοὺς 1 wineskins These were bags made out of animal skins where wine was stored. If they were old and used, and someone put new wine in them, they would tear. This would happen because the wine expands as it sits for a long time and the old wine skins could no longer stretch with the wine. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -MRK 2 22 dgcz figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς 1 In this phrase, it is assumed that **new wine** is being poured **into fresh wineskins**. If this would be confusing in your language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “But you should pour new wine into new wineskins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 2 23 jya1 figs-explicit τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας 1 picking the heads of grain Plucking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the Law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood In your culture, you can clarify. Alternate translation: plucking heads of grain, as the Law permitted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 23 k3pa figs-explicit τοὺς στάχυας 1 the heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were **picking the heads of grain** to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “picking heads of grain and eating the seeds”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 19 wetb figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ 1 The expression **sons of** is a Hebrew idiom that means that a person shares the qualities of something else that is mentioned. In this case, Jesus is describing people, **sons of the wedding chamber**, who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. Alternate translation: “the groom’s party” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 2 20 vg2u figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ…ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom may be taken away If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **the bridegroom may be taken away** with an active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 2 20 y79o figs-grammar-connect-time-sequential τότε 1 Here, **then** shows the reader that the bridegroom must first leave, and afterward, the friends will begin fasting. Make sure this is clear in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MRK 2 21 v6xc figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν 1 No one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was at first. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 21 vdza figs-parables οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. 1 This verse and verse 22 are both a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MRK 2 22 fk15 figs-explicit ἀσκοὺς 1 wineskins Wine was stored in **wineskins,** which were bags made out of animal skins. If the **wineskins** were old and used when someone put new wine in them, they could tear. This would happen because the new wine expands as it sits, and the old, previously stretched wineskins could not stretch more with the new wine. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 2 22 dgcz figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς 1 In this phrase, it is assumed that **new wine** is being poured **into fresh wineskins**. If this would be confusing in your language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “but you should pour new wine into new wineskins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 2 23 jya1 figs-explicit τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας 1 picking the heads of grain Plucking grain in others’ fields to eat it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If this issue would be misunderstood In your culture, you can clarify. Alternate translation: harvesting the heads of grain by hand, as the law permitted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 23 k3pa figs-explicit τοὺς στάχυας 1 the heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the grain plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were **picking the heads of grain** to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “picking heads of grain and eating the seeds” If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 2 24 h41a figs-rquestion ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν? 1 Look, why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths? The Pharisees ask Jesus a question to condemn him. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 2 24 ec3u figs-explicit τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν 1 The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. You could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 24 bf8w figs-exclamations ἴδε 1 Look “Look at this” or “Listen.” This is a word used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -MRK 2 25 g8sf figs-rquestion οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ 1 Have you never read what David did Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. You can state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “you have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 2 25 r14d figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ 1 Have you never read what David did Jesus refers to reading about David in the Old Testament. You can translate this showing the implicit information. Alternate translation: “Have you not read in the scriptures what David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 25 cjzx figs-doublet ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν 1 **had need** and **hungry** are two words that being used to express the same idea. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine the two words in your translation. Alternate translation: “When he was in need of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 2 24 ec3u figs-explicit τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν 1 The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting and therefore work. You could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbaths!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 24 bf8w figs-exclamations ἴδε 1 Look “Look at this” or “Listen.” This is a word that is used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +MRK 2 25 g8sf figs-rquestion οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ 1 Have you never read what David did Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. You can state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “you have read that David did the same thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 25 r14d figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ 1 Have you never read what David did Jesus refers to reading about David in the Old Testament. You can translate this to show the implicit information. Alternate translation: “Have you not read in the scriptures what David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 2 25 cjzx figs-doublet ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν 1 Here, **had need** and **was hungry** are two phrases being used to express the same idea. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “when he was in need of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MRK 2 26 y57j figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the bread of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of **bread** that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 2 26 wz3g figs-metaphor εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 2 26 wz3g figs-metaphor εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking of it as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MRK 2 27 i374 figs-activepassive τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο 1 The Sabbath was made for man Jesus makes clear why God established the Sabbath. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 2 27 u83s figs-gendernotations τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 man **man** is a word which refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -MRK 2 27 v3mb figs-genericnoun τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 **man** is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person, but to mankind as a whole. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 2 27 u83s figs-gendernotations τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 man Here, **man** is a word which refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 2 27 v3mb figs-genericnoun τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, **man** is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person, but to mankind as a whole. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 2 27 s2yd figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 not man for the Sabbath The words **was made** are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 2 28 wgwu ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man is a common title given to Jesus. See the introduction to the book for a detailed explanation of the title. -MRK 2 28 pwb5 ὥστε Κύριός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath.” (2) **son of man** is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”. -MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nIt was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”\n\nNo one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### The twelve disciples\n\nThe following are the lists of the twelve disciples:\n\nIn Matthew:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Mark:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Luke:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nThaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.\n\n### Brothers and Sisters\n\nMost people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n +MRK 2 28 pwb5 ὥστε Κύριός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath” (2) **son of man** is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”. +MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nIt was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”\n\nNo one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The twelve disciples\n\nThe following are the lists of the twelve disciples:\n\nIn Matthew:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Mark:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn Luke:\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nThaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.\n\n### Brothers and Sisters\n\nMost people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 3, 13, 20, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 3 2 vr25 figs-explicit ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him If Jesus were to heal the man that day, the Pharisees would **accuse him** of breaking the law by the working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “so that they could accuse him of wrongdoing” or “so that they could accuse him of breaking the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 3 1 bm6z writing-newevent καὶ εἰσῆλθεν πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν, καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 3 1 rn8y writing-participants καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος 1 This expression introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you can use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -MRK 3 1 ye6d translate-unknown ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” or “his hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 3 1 ye6d translate-unknown ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 This phrase **having a withered hand** means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “whose hand was shriveled” or “whose hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 3 2 q35x grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase tells the reader why the Pharisees were watching Jesus. Alternate translation: “They were doing this so that they could accuse him of working on the jewish rest day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -MRK 3 3 nm6w ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον 1 in our midst **midst** here is referring to the group people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If this would be confusing in your language, you can be explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here” -MRK 3 4 mh3z figs-rquestion ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι? 1 Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill? Jesus said this to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is **lawful** to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may state these questions as sentences. Alternate translation: “It is allowed for people to do good on the sabbath, but not to do evil. Likewise it is allowed to save someone on the sabbath, but not to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 3 4 i71v figs-parallelism ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι 1 to do good, or to do harm … to save a life, or to kill **Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill** are similar in meaning, except that the second is more extreme. The two phrases are trying to make the same point. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MRK 3 3 nm6w ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον 1 in our midst Here, **midst** is referring to Jesus and the man being present with the group of people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If this would be confusing in your language, you can be explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here” +MRK 3 4 mh3z figs-rquestion ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι? 1 Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good, or to do harm; to save a life, or to kill? Jesus asks this to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is **lawful** to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may state these questions as sentences. Alternate translation: “It is allowed for people to do good on the Sabbath, but not to do evil. Likewise it is allowed to save someone on the Sabbath, but not to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 3 4 i71v figs-parallelism ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι 1 to do good, or to do harm … to save a life, or to kill The phrases **Is it lawful on the Sabbaths to do good or to do harm; to save a life or to kill** are similar in meaning, except that the second is more extreme. The two phrases are trying to make the same point. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 3 4 vz6c figs-ellipsis ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι 1 to save a life, or to kill The phrase **is it lawful** is assumed here. If this would be misunderstood, you may clarify and add it again for the second phrase. Alternate translation: “is it lawful to save a life, or is it lawful to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 3 4 nut4 figs-metonymy ψυχὴν 1 a life This refers to physical life and is a metonym for a person. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 3 5 n4ep figs-metaphor τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 **hardness of heart** is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness to do anything on the Sabbath — whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. Alternate Translation: “by their stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 3 4 nut4 figs-metonymy ψυχὴν 1 a life Here, **a life** refers to physical life and is a metonym for a person. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 3 5 n4ep figs-metaphor τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **hardness of heart** is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness to do anything on the Sabbath — whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 3 5 c3qe figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ 1 his hand was restored You can state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “Jesus healed his hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 3 6 nvk1 figs-explicit τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 the Herodians This is the name of a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 8 bi1b τῆς Ἰδουμαίας 1 Idumea This is the region, previously known as Edom, which covered the southern half of the province of Judea. -MRK 3 8 mm5v figs-explicit ὅσα ἐποίει 1 how much he was doing This refers to the miracles Jesus was performing. Alternate translation: “the great miracles that Jesus had performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 9 zu5e figs-explicit εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν 1 he said to his disciples that a small boat should be waiting for him because of the crowd, so that they would not press against him As the large **crowd** was pushing forward toward Jesus, he was in danger of being crushed by them. They would not crush him intentionally. It was because there were so many people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 3 8 bi1b τῆς Ἰδουμαίας 1 Idumea **Idumea**, previously known as Edom, is the region which covered the southern half of the province of Judea. +MRK 3 8 mm5v figs-explicit ὅσα ἐποίει 1 how much he was doing Here, **how much he was doing** refers to the miracles Jesus was performing. Alternate translation: “of the great miracles that Jesus had performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 3 9 zu5e figs-explicit εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν 1 he said to his disciples that a small boat should be waiting for him because of the crowd, so that they would not press against him As the large **crowd** was pushing forward toward Jesus, he was in danger of being crushed by them. They would not crush him intentionally, but because there were so many people eager to be healed by his touch. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 3 10 e86s grammar-connect-logic-result πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας 1 For he healed many, so that as many as had diseases pressed against him so that they might touch him This tells why so many people were crowding around Jesus that he thought they might crush him. Alternate translation: “For, because Jesus had healed many people, everyone pressed against him so that they might touch him” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MRK 3 10 ge71 figs-explicit ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας 1 as many as had diseases pressed against him so that they might touch him They did this because they believed that touching Jesus would make them well. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “all the sick people pushed forward eagerly trying to touch him so that they might be healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 10 qyyv figs-metaphor ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ 1 To **press against** someone means that they are drawing very close to them. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this would be misunderstood, think of a way in your language which this could be expressed. Alternate translation: “so a large number of people surrounded him closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 3 10 ge71 figs-explicit ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας 1 as many as had diseases pressed against him so that they might touch him They **pressed against him** because they believed that touching Jesus would make them well. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “all the sick people pushed forward, eagerly trying to touch him so that they might be healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 3 10 qyyv figs-metaphor ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ 1 To **press against** someone means that the first person approaches very closely to the second person. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this would be misunderstood, think of a way in your language in which this could be expressed. Alternate translation: “so a large number of people surrounded him closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 3 11 ca5i figs-explicit προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα 1 they were falling down before him and crying out, saying Here, **they** refers to the unclean spirits. It is they who are causing the people they possess to do things. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they caused the people they were possessing to fall down before him and to cry out to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 11 rpwx figs-explicit προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα 1 The spirits knew who Jesus is without Him telling them. This is because Jesus is God, and He is the one who created them. If readers would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation “they caused the people whom they controlled to fall down because of Jesus’ power, and they cried out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 11 xf41 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MRK 3 13 fatx figs-idiom ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος 1 **he goes up on the mountain** does not refer to a specific mountain. This phrase is an idiom which means that Jesus traveled to the mountainous regions. If this would be misunderstood, you may state it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “Jesus went up into the mountainous regions” or “Jesus went up into area with many hills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 3 11 rpwx figs-explicit προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα 1 The spirits know who Jesus is without Him telling them. This is because Jesus is God, and he is the one who created them. If readers would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation “they caused the people whom they controlled to fall down because of Jesus’ power, and they cried out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 3 11 xf41 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MRK 3 13 fatx figs-idiom ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος 1 Here, **he goes up on the mountain** does not refer to a specific mountain. This phrase is an idiom which means that Jesus traveled to the mountainous regions. If this would be misunderstood, you may express it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “Jesus went up into the mountainous regions” or “Jesus went up into an area with many hills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 3 16 ywli translate-textvariants καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Some manuscripts do not include the words **and he appointed the Twelve**. This is likely original, but some writers decided to leave it out because verse 14 has a similar phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MRK 3 16 ozli figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 3 16 i7tf translate-names καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 To Simon, also he added the name Peter **Simon** is the first man listed. All of the names listed here are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 3 16 bt0f figs-explicit ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 In ancient times, people changed their names to show that they are changing something about them. Here, Jesus changes Peter’s name to show that Peter is now one of his followers. This also happens in the next verse. If this would be misunderstood, think of something in your language that people do to signify a major change in their lives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 3 17 n4gy translate-metaphor ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ βροντῆς 1 the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder Jesus called them this because they were like **thunder**. Alternate translation: “the name Boanerges, which means men who are like thunder” or “the name Boanerges, which means thunder men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-metaphor]]) -MRK 3 19 r3zs ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 who also betrayed him This note tells the reader that **Judas Iscariot** stood out from the rest of the Apostles, in that he later would betray the Lord. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 3 16 bt0f figs-explicit ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 In ancient times, people changed their names to show that they were changing something about themselves. Here, Jesus changes Peter’s name to show that Peter is now one of his followers. This also happens in the next verse. If this would be misunderstood, think of something in your language that people do to signify a major change in their lives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 3 17 n4gy translate-metaphor ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ βροντῆς 1 the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder Jesus called them **Boanerges** because they were like **thunder**. Alternate translation: “the name Boanerges, which means men who are like thunder” or “the name Boanerges, which means thunder men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-metaphor]]) +MRK 3 19 r3zs writing-background ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 who also betrayed him **Judas Iscariot** stood out from the rest of the Apostles in that he would later betray the Lord. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 3 20 jxr5 καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον 1 And he is entering into a house This is likely the same house which was mentioned previously. See note on 2:1 MRK 3 20 rq6k figs-synecdoche μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν 1 they are not able even to eat bread The word **bread** represents food. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples could not eat at all” or “they could not eat anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 3 21 uyl8 ἔλεγον γὰρ 1 for they said Here, **they** could refer to: (1) his relatives. (2) some people in the crowd. MRK 3 21 mf5q figs-idiom ἐξέστη 1 He is out of his mind This idiom describes how they think he is acting. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 3 23 q8f3 figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν? 1 How is Satan able to cast out Satan? Jesus asked this rhetorical question in response to the scribes saying that he **cast out** demons by Beelzebul. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out himself!” or “Satan does not go against his own evil spirits!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 3 23 xb13 figs-synecdoche Σατανᾶν 1 The name **Satan** is used here to refer to Satan’s “kingdom”, and not just him. If a reader would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation: “his own power” or “his own evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 3 24 j5sv figs-parables καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη 1 Jesus uses this parable to show why scribes are wrong to think Jesus is controlled by Satan. He is saying that if a group of people are not united, they will not be able to exist together. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 3 24 b4z4 figs-synecdoche ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 if a kingdom might have been divided against itself The word **kingdom** refers to the people who live in the **kingdom**. Alternate translation: “If the people who live in a kingdom are divided against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 3 24 k3bz figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι 1 is not able to stand This phrase is a metaphor meaning that the people will no longer be united and they will fall. Alternate translation: “will no longer exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 3 23 xb13 figs-synecdoche Σατανᾶν 1 The name **Satan** is used here to refer to Satan’s “kingdom” and not just him. If a reader would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation: “his own power” or “his own evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 3 24 j5sv figs-parables καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη 1 Jesus uses this parable to show why scribes are wrong to think Jesus is controlled by Satan. He is saying that if a people in a group are not united, they will not be able to exist together. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MRK 3 24 b4z4 figs-synecdoche ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 if a kingdom might have been divided against itself The word **kingdom** here refers to the people or citizens who live in the **kingdom**. Alternate translation: “If the people who live in a kingdom are divided against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 3 24 k3bz figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι 1 is not able to stand This phrase is a metaphor meaning that the people will no longer be united, and they will fall. Alternate translation: “will no longer exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 3 24 h7hr figs-litotes οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι 1 is not able to stand You can state this phrase in positive form. Alternate translation: “will fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) MRK 3 25 zcr1 figs-metonymy οἰκία 1 a house This is a metonym for the people who live in **a house**. Alternate translation: “a family” or “a household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 3 25 dm6j figs-parables καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι 1 This is another parable which shows the religious leaders why they are wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 3 25 dlev figs-parallelism καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι 1 This parable is identical to the previous one. If the repetition would confuse readers, you can use one or the other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MRK 3 25 dlev figs-parallelism καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι 1 This parable is very similar to the previous one. If the repetition would confuse readers, you can use one or the other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 3 26 w7na figs-rpronouns εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη 1 if Satan rose up against himself and was divided The word **himself** is a reflexive pronoun that refers back to Satan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) MRK 3 26 vif7 figs-parallelism καὶ εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει 1 While this parable is similar to the previous two, it would be good to keep it, as the parable refers back to the original problem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MRK 3 26 df2f figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει 1 he is not able to stand, but he has an end This is a metaphor meaning he will fall and not endure. Alternate translation: “he will cease to be united and will be finished” or “he cannot endure and has come to an end” or “he will fall and come to an end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 3 27 mvr6 figs-parables ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ; καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει. 1 he will plunder This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 3 27 x9lk figs-genericnoun οὐδεὶς 1 This doe not refer to a specific person, but to people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 3 26 df2f figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει 1 he is not able to stand, but he has an end This is a metaphor meaning that he will fall and not endure. Alternate translation: “he will cease to be united and will be finished” or “he cannot endure and will come to an end” or “he will fall and come to an end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 3 27 mvr6 figs-parables ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ; καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει. 1 he will plunder This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and he is saving the people whom Satan had controlled previously. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MRK 3 27 x9lk figs-genericnoun οὐδεὶς 1 Here, **no one** does not refer to a specific person, but to people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 3 28 f6fq ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true” MRK 3 28 p6sz figs-idiom τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 of the sons of men Here, the phrase **sons of men** is an idiom which means the people. Alternate translation: “of people” or “of mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 3 29 ips3 figs-genericnoun ὃς δ’ ἂν 1 **Whoever** here does not refer to anyone, but is a generic word for a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 3 30 sfa2 figs-idiom πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει 1 He has an unclean spirit This is an idiom that means to be possessed by **an unclean spirit**. Alternate translation: “an unclean spirit is controlling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 3 29 ips3 figs-genericnoun ὃς δ’ ἂν 1 Here, **whoever** does not refer to anyone specifically, but is a generic word for any person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 3 30 sfa2 figs-idiom πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει 1 He has an unclean spirit This is an idiom that means to be possessed by **an unclean spirit**. Alternate translation: “An unclean spirit is controlling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 3 31 gef8 καὶ ἔρχονται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Then his mother and his brothers come Alternate Translation: “Then Jesus’ mother and brothers arrived” MRK 3 33 qe8c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who are my mother and my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved These are people who belong to his spiritual family. He has not forgotten who his family members are. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may make it explicit. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who I consider to be my mother and brothers” or “I will tell you who I love as a mother or brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 3 33 iu9r translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Jesus is using the words **mother** and **brother** here not referring to biological relatives, but to those whom he loves and whom obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -MRK 3 35 dr45 figs-genericnoun ὃς 1 whoever may do … this is **whoever** does not refer to any specific person, but to any person who does these things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 this is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nMark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nThe parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n -MRK 4 1 i95e grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 the sea Jesus **stepped into the boat** because the crowd was so big that it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat so the crowd could hear his teaching.” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MRK 4 2 h2a9 καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 4 3 vqh3 figs-parables ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι 1 Listen! Behold, the sower Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear Jesus’ teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 4 3 gmdi figs-imperative ἀκούετε 1 This is an imperative which Jesus speaks to get his listeners to hear what he is about to say. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Listen to what I am about to say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -MRK 4 4 si37 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 as he sowed, some fell beside the road Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As we was scattering the seeds, some of them fell unprotected from animals onto the path. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 4 5 wuw2 καὶ ἄλλο ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες 1 In this verse and in the following 4 verses, the word **other** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 4 6 z2el figs-idiom ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος 1 **the sun rose** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 3 33 iu9r translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Jesus is using the words **mother** and **brother** here to refer not to biological relatives, but to those whom he loves and who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MRK 3 35 dr45 figs-genericnoun ὃς 1 whoever may do … this is Here, **whoever** does not refer to any specific person, but to any person who does these things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 this is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means that Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nMark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which comprises words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nThe parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 4 1 i95e grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 the sea Jesus **stepped into the boat** because the crowd was so big that it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you can express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat so the crowd could hear his teaching.” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 4 2 h2a9 writing-background  καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 4 3 vqh3 figs-parables ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι 1 Listen! Behold, the sower Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear his teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MRK 4 3 gmdi figs-imperative ἀκούετε 1 **Listen!** is an imperative which Jesus speaks to get his listeners to hear what he is about to say. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Listen to what I am about to say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +MRK 4 4 si37 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 as he sowed, some fell beside the road Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect the seeds from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on the path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so the birds ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as we were scattering the seeds, some of them fell unto the path, where they were unprotected from animals (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 4 5 wuw2 figs-ellipsis  καὶ ἄλλο ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες 1 In this verse and in the following four verses, the word **other** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 4 6 z2el figs-idiom ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος 1 Here, **the sun rose** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you express it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 4 6 ee49 figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 it was scorched If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 4 7 bw62 ἄλλο ἔπεσεν 1 choked it … it did not produce See the note on [4:5](../04/05.md) -MRK 4 8 v3sr figs-ellipsis αὐξανόμενα, καὶ ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 increasing and yielding one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100 The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 30 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 100 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 4 8 v3sr figs-ellipsis αὐξανόμενα, καὶ ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 increasing and yielding one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100 The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases, but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 30 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 100 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 4 8 u327 translate-numbers τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκατόν 1 30 … 60 … 100 “thirty … sixty … a hundred.” These may be written as numerals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 4 9 p2us figs-metonymy ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear The phrase **has ears** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 4 9 qxy4 figs-123person ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MRK 4 10 u2nj ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας 1 when he was alone This does not mean that Jesus was completely **alone**. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the twelve and some of his other close followers. +MRK 4 10 u2nj ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας 1 when he was alone This does not mean that Jesus was completely **alone**. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the Twelve and some of his other close followers. MRK 4 10 kqcz figs-nominaladj τοῖς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [11:7](../11/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 4 11 t9ee figs-activepassive ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 To you has been given If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I have given you the mystery of the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 4 11 q2az figs-explicit ἐκείνοις…τοῖς ἔξω 1 to those who are outside **to those who are outside** refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If this would be misunderstood, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 4 12 p4fv figs-metaphor βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν 1 they may look, but may not see **see** here is a metaphor for being spiritually blind. Alternate translation: “When they see my works, they will not know why I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 11 q2az figs-explicit ἐκείνοις…τοῖς ἔξω 1 to those who are outside Here, **to those who are outside** refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If this would be misunderstood, you can express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 4 12 p4fv figs-metaphor βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν 1 they may look, but may not see Here, **see** is a metaphor for being spiritually blind. Alternate translation: “When they see my works, they will not know why I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 4 12 e33y figs-quotesinquotes ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν 1 Mark is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. For clarity, you could also indicate the source of the words that Jesus is quoting. Alternate translation: “so that as the prophet Isaiah said, though they see, they will not perceive, and though they hear, they will not understand” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes) -MRK 4 12 p9yr figs-metaphor μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 so that they would not turn **turn** is a metaphor for “repent.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 12 p9yr figs-metaphor μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 so that they would not turn Here, **turn** is a metaphor for “repent.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 4 13 fs1v figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε? 1 Do you not understand this parable? And how will you understand all the parables? Jesus used **Do you not understand this parable?** and **how will you understand all the parables?** to show how disappointed he was that his disciples could not understand his parable. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “If you cannot understand this parable, think about how hard it will be for you to understand all of the other parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 14 m72p figs-metonymy ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Marks’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one sowing the seed represents a person who proclaims God’s message to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 14 rp6h figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 sows the word Here, **the word** means the gospel which Jesus was proclaiming. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sowed the message which Jesus was proclaiming” or “sowed the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 4 14 rp6h figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 sows the word Here, **the word** means the gospel which Jesus was proclaiming. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sows the message which Jesus was proclaiming” or “sows the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 4 14 xdaj figs-metaphor τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 sows the word Sowing the message represents teaching it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the one who teaches people God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 4 15 p68u figs-metaphor οὗτοι δέ εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 1 If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the instance when the seeds fell along the path. ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 15 gcuh figs-metaphor οὗτοι 1 **These** is a generic noun for people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 4 15 gcuh figs-genericnoun οὗτοι 1 **These** is a generic noun for people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 4 16 ty3q figs-metaphor καὶ οὗτοί εἰσιν ὁμοίως οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι 1 These are the ones If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the rocky soil. ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 16 d7ep figs-metaphor οὗτοί 1 See the note on **these** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 4 16 gdq7 figs-metaphor οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the ones which the sower sowed on the rocky soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 4 17 p5fr figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 They have no root in themselves This is a comparison to young plants that have very shallow roots. This metaphor means that the people were first excited when they received the word, but they were not strongly devoted to it. If your readers would not understand what **they have no root in themselves** means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “they did not fully grasp the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 17 s5mh figs-hyperbole οὐκ…ῥίζαν 1 no root **They have no root in themselves** is an exaggeration to emphasize how small the roots were. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 4 17 t21w figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζονται 1 they are caused to stumble **to stumble** is an idiom which means to stop believing. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they stop believing in God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 18 uu9b figs-metaphor ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι 1 others are the ones sown among the thorns If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed into the thorny plants.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 18 wlab figs-metaphor ἄλλοι 1 See note about **others** on [4:15](../04/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 4 16 d7ep figs-genericnoun οὗτοί 1 See the note on **these** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 4 16 gdq7 figs-activepassive οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the ones which the sower sowed on the rocky soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 4 17 p5fr figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 They have no root in themselves This is a comparison to young plants that have very shallow roots. This metaphor means that the people were at first outwardly excited when they received the word, but they were not strongly devoted to it. If your readers would not understand what **they have no root in themselves** means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “they did not fully grasp the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 17 s5mh figs-hyperbole οὐκ…ῥίζαν 1 no root Here, **no root ** is an exaggeration to emphasize how little they interacted with the gospel message. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: "no lasting change" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 4 17 t21w figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζονται 1 they are caused to stumble Here, **to stumble** is an idiom which means to stop believing. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they stop believing in God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 18 uu9b figs-metaphor ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι 1 others are the ones sown among the thorns If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed among the thorny plants.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 18 wlab figs-genericnoun ἄλλοι 1 See note about **others** on [4:15](../04/15.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 4 19 wa3k αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 the cares of this age Alternate translation: “the worries in this life” or “the concerns about this present life” -MRK 4 19 s7s7 figs-metaphor εἰσπορευόμεναι, συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον 1 entering in choke the word Jesus uses the metaphor **choke** to depict what these peoples’ desires to to them. Similarly to how a thorny plant chokes a baby plant, worldly desire chokes faith. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “did not allow the faith to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 19 f4ip ἄκαρπος γίνεται 1 it becomes unfruitful **unfruitful** is a metaphor used to depict whether one is a follower of Jesus or not. If a tree is fruitful, it is living and healthy. If it is not fruitful, it is dead or unhealthy. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the person does not do good works showing that they follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 20 axh1 figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες 1 these are the ones sown in the good soil If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the good soil. ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 20 d3r7 figs-ellipsis ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 30 grains, some produce 60 grains, and some produce 100 grains” or “some produce 30 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 100 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 4 19 s7s7 figs-metaphor εἰσπορευόμεναι, συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον 1 entering in choke the word Jesus uses the metaphor **choke** to depict what these peoples’ desires do to them. Similarly to how a thorny plant chokes a baby plant, worldly desire chokes faith. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “do not allow the faith to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 19 f4ip figs-metaphor  ἄκαρπος γίνεται 1 it becomes unfruitful Here, **unfruitful** is a metaphor used to depict whether one is a follower of Jesus or not. If a tree is fruitful, it is living and healthy. If it is not fruitful, it is dead or unhealthy. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the person does not do good works showing that they follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 20 axh1 figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες 1 these are the ones sown in the good soil If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the good soil ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 20 d3r7 figs-ellipsis ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100 This refers to the quantity of grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 30 grains, some produce 60 grains, and some produce 100 grains” or “some produce 30 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 100 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 4 20 tdwj translate-numbers τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκατόν 1 30 … 60 … 100 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MRK 4 21 zzw7 αὐτοῖς 1 And he was saying to them **Them** could also possibly be referring to (1) the crowd. Alternate translation: “the crowd”. or (2) if you do not know, you can make it vague. Alternate translation: “them” -MRK 4 21 nn7e figs-rquestion μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? 1 The lamp does not come in order to be put under a basket, or under the bed, does it? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket, or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 4 21 dkq7 figs-rquestion ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην 1 Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 4 22 y5kn figs-litotes οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into to open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 4 22 kc6k figs-parallelism οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν…οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον 1 nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened **there is nothing that is hidden…there is nothing that is secret** Both of the phrases have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Nothing is hidden that will not be revealed?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MRK 4 21 zzw7 αὐτοῖς 1 And he was saying to them The pronoun **them** could be referring to: (1) the crowd. Alternate translation: “the crowd” or (2) if you do not know, you can make it vague. Alternate translation: “his listeners” +MRK 4 21 nn7e figs-rquestion μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? 1 The lamp does not come in order to be put under a basket, or under the bed, does it? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 4 21 dkq7 figs-doublet ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην 1 Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 4 22 y5kn figs-litotes οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +MRK 4 22 kc6k figs-parallelism οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν…οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον 1 nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened These two parallel phrases, **nothing is hidden** and **nothing secret has happened**, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “nothing is hidden that will not be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 4 23 k1a8 figs-metonymy εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear See how your translated this in [4:09](../04/09.md) MRK 4 24 r2r1 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 he was saying to them See how you translated [4:21](../04/21.md) -MRK 4 24 zis1 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 In that measure you use This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one who thinks carefully about the things I have said, God will allow him to understand even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 4 24 zis1 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 In that measure you use This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “As much as you think carefully about the things I have said, God will allow you to understand even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 4 24 c4xp figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be measured to you, and it will be added to you If it would be more natural in your language, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 4 25 i24l figs-activepassive δοθήσεται αὐτῷ…ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο 1 to him will be given … even what he has will be taken away from him If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 4 25 i24l figs-activepassive δοθήσεται αὐτῷ…ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο 1 to him will be given … even what he has will be taken away from him If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … God will take away from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 4 26 n1mq figs-parables οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells the people parables to explain the kingdom of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 4 26 r5n7 figs-simile ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον 1 As a man who may throw his seed Jesus likens the kingdom of God to a man who **may throw his seed**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God grows like when a man throws seed on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MRK 4 26 htar figs-parables ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 The word **man** is not speaking of any specific person, but people who scatter seed in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “As people who scatter seed upon the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 4 28 cew8 grammar-connect-time-sequential πρῶτον…εἶτα…εἶτα 1 the ear These words show that this happened one after another. Make sure that this is clear to your audience in your translation. Alternate translation: “First, the stalks appeared. After this, the heads appeared. Finally, the mature grain in the heads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MRK 4 26 r5n7 figs-simile ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον 1 As a man who may throw his seed Jesus likens the kingdom of God to a man who **may throw the seed**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God grows like when a man throws seed on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MRK 4 26 htar figs-genericnoun ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 The word **man** is not speaking of any specific person, but of any people who scatter seed. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “As people who may throw seed on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 4 28 cew8 grammar-connect-time-sequential πρῶτον…εἶτα…εἶτα 1 the ear These words show that these things happened one after another. Make sure that this is clear to your audience in your translation. Alternate translation: “First, the stalks appeared. After this, the heads appeared. Finally, the mature grain in the heads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MRK 4 29 ah9d figs-metonymy εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον 1 he immediately sends forth the sickle Here, **the sickle** is a metonym that stands for the farmer or the people whom the farmer sends out to harvest the grain. Alternate translation: “he immediately goes into the field with a sickle to harvest the grain” or “he immediately sends people with sickles into the field to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 4 29 yd1d δρέπανον 1 sickle A **sickle** is a curved blade or a sharp hook used to cut tall crops down to the ground to be harvested. If this would be misunderstood, use a tool in your language that is used to do this job. -MRK 4 29 hx6v figs-idiom ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός 1 because the harvest has come Here the phrase **has come** is an idiom for the grain being ripe for harvest. Alternate translation: “because it was time for the farmers to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 4 30 ivk2 figs-rquestion πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν? 1 How might we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable might we present it? Jesus asked this question to cause his hearers to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about **the kingdom of God**. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 4 29 yd1d δρέπανον 1 sickle A **sickle** is an agricultural tool with a handle and a curved blade or a sharp hook used to cut tall crops down to the ground to be harvested. If this would be misunderstood, use a tool in your language that is used to do this job. +MRK 4 29 hx6v figs-idiom ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός 1 because the harvest has come Here the phrase **has come** is an idiom meaning that the grain is ripe for harvest. Alternate translation: “because it is time for the farmers to harvest the grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 4 30 ivk2 figs-rquestion πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν? 1 How might we compare the kingdom of God, or in what parable might we present it? Jesus asked this question to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about **the kingdom of God**. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 31 w4l5 figs-activepassive ὅταν σπαρῇ 1 when it may have been sown If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “when someone sows it” or “when someone plants it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 4 32 x1xh figs-personification καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους 1 and it forms large branches The mustard tree is described as causing its branches to grow large. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with large branches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MRK 4 33 y7i2 καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν 1t This verse marks the end of this section of Jesus’ parables. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -MRK 4 34 oo4t figs-litotes χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 Luke uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +MRK 4 33 y7i2 writing-endofstory καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν 1t This verse marks the end of this section of Jesus’ parables. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +MRK 4 34 oo4t figs-litotes χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 Luke uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) MRK 4 34 gp99 figs-hyperbole ἐπέλυεν πάντα 1 he was explaining everything Here, **everything** does not actually mean everything, but rather, all of his parables which he had spoken. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he explained all his parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 4 38 b4xb figs-rquestion οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα? 1 do you not care that we are perishing? The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 38 phc3 Διδάσκαλε 1 **Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. MRK 4 38 qtb3 figs-exclusive ἀπολλύμεθα 1 we are perishing The word **we** includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MRK 4 39 yym6 figs-doublet σιώπα, πεφίμωσο 1 Be silent! Be still! These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted the wind and the sea to do. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be calm!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 4 40 w5n4 figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith? Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 4 40 w5n4 figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith? Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation as statements: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 41 u8e1 figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ? 1 Who then is this, for even the wind and the sea obey him? The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 5 General Notes\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Talitha, koum”\n\nThe words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n -MRK 5 1 fix1 writing-newevent καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 Connecting Statement: This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Geresenes lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MRK 5 1 gt8a figs-go ἦλθον 1 They came Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 5 1 vsc7 translate-names τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 the Gerasenes This name refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 5 2 pf16 figs-idiom ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 with an unclean spirit This is an idiom meaning that the man is controlled by the unclean spirit. Alternate translation: “that an unclean spirit controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 5 4 nsol translate-unknown διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι 1 This verse and the next verse function as background information to tell the reader about this man who was controlled by an evil spirit. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 5 4 da4x figs-activepassive αὐτὸν πολλάκις…δεδέσθαι 1 He had been bound many times If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People had bound him many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 5 4 nep6 figs-activepassive τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι 1 his shackles were shattered If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 5 4 fk7t translate-unknown πέδαις 1 shackles **shackles** are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attach with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MRK 5 6 y6c2 figs-explicit καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 And seeing Jesus from a distance After **having seen Jesus** the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -MRK 5 7 ux6u figs-events 0 General Information: The information in these two verses may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) +MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 5 General Notes\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Talitha, koum”\n\nThe words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 19, 22, 23, 31, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 5 1 fix1 writing-newevent καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 Connecting Statement: This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Gerasenes lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MRK 5 1 gt8a figs-go ἦλθον 1 They came Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 5 1 vsc7 translate-names τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 the Gerasenes This name, **the Gerasenes**, refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 5 2 pf16 figs-idiom ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 with an unclean spirit This phrase, **with an unclean spirit**, is an idiom meaning that the man is controlled by the unclean spirit. Alternate translation: “whom an unclean spirit controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 5 4 nsol writing-background διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι 1 This verse and the next verse function as background information to tell the reader about this man who was controlled by an evil spirit. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 5 4 da4x figs-activepassive αὐτὸν πολλάκις…δεδέσθαι 1 He had been bound many times If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people had bound him many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 5 4 nep6 figs-activepassive τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι 1 his shackles were shattered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 5 4 fk7t translate-unknown πέδαις 1 shackles Prisoners' **shackles** are strong, rounded strips of metal that people place around each arm and leg of prisoners. The shackles are then attached with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 5 6 y6c2 figs-explicit καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 And seeing Jesus from a distance After **having seen Jesus**, the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MRK 5 7 ux6u figs-events 0 General Information: The information in these two verses may be reordered to present the events in the order in which they happened, as modelled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) MRK 5 7 ppu5 figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? 1 What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God! There is no reason for you to interfere with me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 7 kd19 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 Son of the Most High God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MRK 5 9 h6ch figs-exclusive λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 he says to him, “My name is Legion, for we are many.” The spirit who is speaking is speaking on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. **we** here includes him and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -MRK 5 9 oa64 figs-exclusive Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 A **legion** is the name of a large group of Roman soldiers. The unclean spirit uses this name to tell Jesus that they **many**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation “My name is Legion. This is our name because there are many of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 5 10 gtq4 καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας 1 Mark inserts this verse and the following verse to give important information about what Jesus does with the spirits. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 5 13 iff6 figs-explicit ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς 1 he permitted them It may be helpful to state clearly what Jesus allowed them to do. Alternate translation: “Jesus allowed the unclean spirits to do what they asked permission to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 5 7 kd19 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 Son of the Most High God **(Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MRK 5 9 h6ch figs-exclusive λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 he says to him, “My name is Legion, for we are many.” The spirit which is speaking speaks on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. Here, **we** includes the speaker and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 5 9 oa64 translate-names Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 A **legion** is the name of a large group of Roman soldiers. The unclean spirit uses this name to tell Jesus that they **many**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can express this explicitly. Alternate translation “My name is Legion. This is our name, because there are many of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 5 10 gtq4 writing-background  καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας 1 Mark inserts this verse and the following verse to give important information about what Jesus does with the spirits. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 5 13 iff6 figs-explicit ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς 1 he permitted them It may be helpful to state clearly what Jesus allowed them to do. Alternate translation: “Jesus allowed the unclean spirits to do what they asked his permission to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 5 13 a28z translate-numbers ὡς δισχίλιοι 1 about 2,000 “about two thousand pigs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MRK 5 13 ntl1 translate-numbers ἐξελθόντα 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 5 15 qih4 τὸν λεγεῶνα 1 the Legion This was the name of the many demons that were in the man. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:9](../05/09.md). -MRK 5 15 fb4b figs-idiom σωφρονοῦντα 1 being in his right mind This is an idiom meaning that he is thinking clearly. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “being of a normal mind” or “thinking clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 5 18 pup5 figs-quotations ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 5 19 e21m figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν αὐτόν 1 But he did not permit him Jesus was not allowing the an into the boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But he did not allow the man to come with them in the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 5 20 g8ed translate-names τῇ Δεκαπόλει 1 the Decapolis This is the name of a region that means “Ten Cities.” It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 5 20 y8vn figs-ellipsis πάντες ἐθαύμαζον 1 everyone was marvelling It may be helpful to state who the people were that were **marveling**. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 5 22 v1dm translate-names Ἰάειρος 1 Jairus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 5 22 u1rx figs-go ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων 1 Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “one of the leaders of the synagogue went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 5 23 jd27 ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας 1 you may lay your hands **lay your hands** often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hand on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jarius is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 5 23 kzz8 figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῇ 1 in order that she may be healed and she may live If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that you might heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 5 13 ntl1 figs-go ἐξελθόντα 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 5 15 qih4 τὸν λεγεῶνα 1 the Legion **Legion** was the name of the many demons that were in the man. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:9](../05/09.md). +MRK 5 15 fb4b figs-idiom σωφρονοῦντα 1 being in his right mind The phrase, **being in his right mind** is an idiom meaning that he is thinking clearly. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “being of a normal mind” or “thinking clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 5 18 pup5 figs-quotations ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: "I want to be with you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MRK 5 19 e21m figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν αὐτόν 1 But he did not permit him Jesus was not allowing the man to get into the boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But he did not allow the man to come with them in the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 5 20 g8ed translate-names τῇ Δεκαπόλει 1 the Decapolis The **Decapolis** is the name of a region. It means “ten cities.” It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 5 20 y8vn figs-ellipsis πάντες ἐθαύμαζον 1 everyone was marvelling It may be helpful to state who the people were that were **marveling**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 5 22 v1dm translate-names Ἰάειρος 1 Jairus **Jairus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 5 22 u1rx figs-go ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων 1 Your language may say “goes” rather than **comes** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “one of the leaders of the synagogue goes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 5 23 jd27 figs-idiom  ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας 1 you may lay your hands The expression **lay your hands** often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hands on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jairus is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 5 23 kzz8 figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῇ 1 in order that she may be healed and she may live If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that you might heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 5 25 e2cz writing-participants καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα 1 And a woman, being This introduces the woman as a new character in the story. Consider how new people are introduced into a story in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MRK 5 25 h58w figs-euphemism ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη 1 with a flow of blood for 12 years The woman did not have an open wound. Rather, her monthly flow of blood would not stop. Your language may have a polite way to refer to this condition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 5 25 idh9 translate-numbers δώδεκα ἔτη 1 for 12 years “for twelve years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MRK 5 27 z2hg figs-explicit τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 the things about Jesus She had heard reports about how Jesus healed people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus healed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 5 27 z2hg figs-explicit τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 the things about Jesus She had heard reports **about Jesus** healing people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus healed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 5 28 alc9 grammar-connect-logic-result ἔλεγεν γὰρ 1 This verse tells the reader that the woman had determined to **touch his clothes** in her mind before she actually touched Jesus’ cloak. Think of a way in your language which makes it apparent that this is the reason why she touches Jesus’ cloak. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MRK 5 28 wge2 figs-activepassive σωθήσομαι 1 I will be saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 5 29 c1vz figs-activepassive ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος 1 she had been healed from the disease If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sickness had left her” or “she was no longer sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 5 30 ma2b figs-explicit τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν 1 his power had gone out from him When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **his power** healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his power went out from him and healed someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 5 33 r3a0 figs-doublet ἡ δὲ γυνὴ, φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα 1 Both words **fear and trembling** are similar words used to show that the woman was very afraid. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The woman was very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 5 28 wge2 figs-activepassive σωθήσομαι 1 I will be saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 5 29 c1vz figs-activepassive ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος 1 she had been healed from the disease If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sickness had left her” or “she was no longer sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 5 30 ma2b figs-explicit τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν 1 his power had gone out from him When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **his power** healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his power went out from him and healed someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 5 33 r3a0 figs-doublet ἡ δὲ γυνὴ, φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα 1 Both **afraid and trembling** are similar words used to show that the woman was very fearful. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The woman, filled with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MRK 5 33 b6kz figs-ellipsis εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 told him the whole truth The phrase **the whole truth** refers to how she had touched him and became well. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “told him the whole truth about how she had touched him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 5 34 gbk8 translate-kinship θυγάτηρ 1 Daughter Jesus was using this term figuratively to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -MRK 5 35 t2wd figs-rquestion τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 Why trouble the teacher any longer? This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer.” or “There no need to bother the teacher any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 35 vqt0 figs-infostructure ἡ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν; τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 **your daughter died** explains why he asks the question here. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Why trouble the teacher any longer? For your daughter died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +MRK 5 34 gbk8 translate-kinship θυγάτηρ 1 Daughter Jesus was using this term, **Daughter**, figuratively to refer to the woman as a beloved believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MRK 5 35 t2wd figs-rquestion τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 Why trouble the teacher any longer? This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer” or “There is no need to bother the teacher any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 5 35 vqt0 figs-infostructure ἡ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν; τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 The news that **your daughter died** explains why he asks the question here. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Why trouble the teacher any longer, for your daughter died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) MRK 5 39 a3ih figs-rquestion τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? 1 Why are you upset and weeping? Jesus asked this question to help them see their lack of faith. This may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is not a time to be upset and crying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 5 39 dzrk figs-ellipsis τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει 1 The words **The child** are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The child is not dead, but the child is sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 5 39 g83c figs-euphemism τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει 1 The child has not died, but is sleeping **sleep** here refers to death. Jesus is likely using it to mean a temporary end to the girls life, but not a permanent end. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child is not permanently dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -MRK 5 41 hx3c translate-transliterate ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! 1 Talitha, koum! This is an Aramaic sentence which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her language. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 5 39 g83c figs-euphemism τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει 1 The child has not died, but is sleeping Often, **sleep** refers to death. Jesus is likely using it here to mean a temporary end to the girl's life, but not a permanent end. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child is not permanently dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 5 41 hx3c translate-transliterate ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! 1 Talitha, koum! **Talitha, koum** is an Aramaic sentence which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her own language. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language, and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 5 42 pt5t translate-numbers ἦν…ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 she was 12 years of age “she was twelve years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MRK 5 42 m49c translate-numbers καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 Mark includes this information to help the readers understand how it was that she immediately **rose up** and began **walking**. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this because she was 12 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 5 42 m49c figs-explicit καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 Mark includes this information to help the readers understand how it was that she immediately **rose up** and began **walking**. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this, because she was 12 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 5 43 n29k figs-quotations καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν 1 and he told them to give her something to eat You can state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 6 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “Anointed with oil”\n\nIn the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n -MRK 6 1 mi7z writing-newevent καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, Jesus and his disciples went out from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MRK 6 1 lpci figs-go ἐξῆλθεν…ἔρχεται εἰς 1 Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came out … went into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 6 2 y4xj figs-activepassive τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ 1 what is this wisdom that has been given to him? If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that God gave to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 6 3 s3wl figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 Is this not the carpenter, the son of Mary and the brother of James and Joses and Judas and Simon? And are his sisters not here with us? If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 6 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Anointed with oil”\n\nIn the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 7, 30, 31, 37, 38, 45, 48, 49 and 55. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 6 1 mi7z writing-newevent καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐκεῖθεν, καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, Jesus and his disciples went out from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MRK 6 1 lpci figs-go ἐξῆλθεν…ἔρχεται εἰς 1 Your language may say **went** rather than "came" in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came out … went into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 6 2 y4xj figs-activepassive τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ 1 what is this wisdom that has been given to him? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that God gave to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 6 3 s3wl figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 Is this not the carpenter, the son of Mary and the brother of James and Joses and Judas and Simon? And are his sisters not here with us? If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 6 3 hx1m figs-litany οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 Those who were in the synagogue with Jesus asked all of these questions to emphasize that they know who Jesus is. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -MRK 6 3 tlub translate-names Ἰακώβου…Ἰωσῆτος…Ἰούδα…Σίμωνος 1 James … Joses … Judas … Simon These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 6 3 d2g7 figs-synecdoche ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The people in the synagogue were not **offended** by who Jesus was. They were offended by what he was teaching them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 6 3 tlub translate-names Ἰακώβου…Ἰωσῆτος…Ἰούδα…Σίμωνος 1 James … Joses … Judas … Simon **James and Joses and Judas and Simon** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 6 3 d2g7 figs-synecdoche ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The people in the synagogue were not **offended** by who Jesus was. They were offended by what he was teaching them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 6 4 l436 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ 1 A prophet is not without honor, except Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored, except” or “The only place a prophet is not honored is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MRK 6 4 y2oa figs-litany ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus lists **hometown**, **relatives**, **house** to emphasize that prophets are often never welcome where they are most well known. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things like Jesus does here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -MRK 6 4 mutm figs-litany τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν 1 **relatives** refers to people who are related to Jesus, but are not his siblings, mother, or father. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a way in your language of expressing this. -MRK 6 4 mgbp figs-litany ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses **in his own house** to refer to his closest relatives, lie his father, mother, or siblings. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, or siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 6 4 y2oa figs-litany ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus lists **hometown**, **relatives**, **house** to emphasize that prophets are often not welcomed where they are most well known. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things like Jesus does here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +MRK 6 4 mutm figs-litany τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν 1 The term **relatives** refers to people who are related to Jesus, but are not his siblings, mother, or father. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a way in your language of expressing this. +MRK 6 4 mgbp figs-metonym ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses **in his own house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, or siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 6 7 d6sx translate-numbers δύο δύο 1 two by two “2 by 2” or “in pairs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 6 6 g8s1 translate-numbers καὶ περιῆγεν τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ διδάσκων. 1 Come back to this MRK 6 7 ldbv figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [11:7](../11/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 6 8 k5hl figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον 1 Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Only bring on your journey a staff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MRK 6 8 t9a2 figs-synecdoche μὴ ἄρτον 1 no bread Here, **bread** is a synecdoche for food in general. Alternate translation: “no food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 6 11 b2kb figs-explicit ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 as a testimony against them **shake off the dust that {is} under your feet** was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture of rejection in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction) -MRK 6 14 ly7z figs-activepassive Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται 1 John the Baptist has been raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has caused John the Baptist to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 6 15 fgy3 figs-explicit ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν 1 But others were saying, “He is Elijah.” It may be helpful to state why some people thought he was **Elijah**. Alternate translation: “Some others said, ‘He is Elijah, whom God promised to send back again.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 6 15 n8sq figs-explicit ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Some were saying that he is Elijah, while others were saying that he is like one of the prophets who lived long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MRK 6 11 b2kb figs-symaction ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 as a testimony against them The phrase **shake off the dust that {is} under your feet** was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture of rejection in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction) +MRK 6 14 ly7z figs-activepassive Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται 1 John the Baptist has been raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has raised John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 6 15 fgy3 figs-explicit ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν 1 But others were saying, “He is Elijah.” It may be helpful to state why some people thought John was **Elijah**. Alternate translation: “Some others said, ‘He is Elijah, whom God promised to send back again.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 6 15 n8sq figs-quotations ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Some were saying that he is Elijah, while others were saying that he is like one of the prophets who lived long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MRK 6 16 ym2w figs-metonymy ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα 1 whom I beheaded Here Herod uses the word **I** to refer to himself. The word **I** is a metonym for Herod’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom I commanded my soldiers to behead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 6 16 n6nq figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη 1 has been raised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 6 17 vpr7 figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Herod himself, having sent, seized John and he bound him in prison You can state this clearly that **Herod** sent his soldiers to put **John** in **prison**. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 6 17 ojtd figs-explicit γὰρ 1 Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])\n +MRK 6 17 vpr7 figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Herod himself, having sent, seized John and he bound him in prison You can state clearly that **Herod** did not go himself, but sent his soldiers to put **John** in **prison**. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 6 17 ojtd figs-grammar-connect-time-background γὰρ 1 Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why Herod was saying that John rose from the dead. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “He was saying this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) MRK 6 17 sf6r translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the wife of his brother Philip Herod’s **brother Philip** is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 6 18 e2ex grammar-connect-logic-result ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 Herod put John into prison because he was saying **It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother**. Make sure this is clear in your language. Alternate translation: “Herod told his soldiers to arrest John because he was saying, ‘God’s law does not allow you to marry the wife of your brother.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MRK 6 19 x35v figs-metonymy Ἡρῳδιὰς…ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι 1 was wanting to kill him, but she was not able **Herodias** is a metonym, as she wants someone else to execute John for her. Alternate translation: “she wanted someone to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 6 20 k13z figs-doublet εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον 1 **righteous and holy** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that John was a holy man before God. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he knew that he was a righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 6 20 k13z figs-doublet εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον 1 Here, **righteous and holy** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that John was a holy man before God. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he knew that he was a righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MRK 6 21 m54q figs-metonymy Ἡρῴδης τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν, τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ 1 Herod prepared his birthday dinner for his officials Here, **Herod** is a metonym for his servants whom he would have commanded to prepare a meal. Alternate translation: “Herod had his servants prepare a dinner for his officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 6 22 a1d7 translate-textvariants εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος 1 the daughter of Herodias herself There are a few possible understandings of this passage. (1) This could be saying that Herod’s daughter’s name was Herodias. Alternate translation: “And Herodias his daughter came in” or (2) This could be speaking about the daughter of Herodias emphatically. Alternate translation: “Herodias’ daughter herself came in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MRK 6 25 caz0 εὐθὺς…μετὰ σπουδῆς…ἐξαυτῆς 1 **immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** are all words which give a sense of urgency. Make sure that this comes across in your language. -MRK 6 25 ap2w figs-euphemism δῷς μοι 1 a platter Herodias is telling her daughter that she wants King Herod to cut off John the Baptizer’s head. **give** is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “Cut off John’s head and bring it to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -MRK 6 26 c1gn figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους 1 because of his oath and those reclining at table with him You can state clearly the content of the **oath**, and the relationship between the oath and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oath that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 6 25 caz0 εὐθὺς…μετὰ σπουδῆς…ἐξαυτῆς 1 In this verse, **immediately**, **with haste**, and **at once** are all words which give a sense of urgency. Make sure that this comes across in your language. +MRK 6 25 ap2w figs-euphemism δῷς μοι 1 a platter Herodias is telling her daughter that she wants King Herod to cut off John the Baptizer’s head. Here, **give me** is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “cut off John’s head and bring it to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 6 26 c1gn figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους 1 because of his oath and those reclining at table with him You can express clearly the content of the **oath**, and the relationship between the oath and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oath that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 6 27 k51v figs-euphemism ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 on a platter See how you handled the note in verse 25. [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 6 33 x5un καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν πολλοί 1 many saw them leaving and recognized them There are a few possible understandings of **recognized**. (1) The people recognized where Jesus and his disciples were going. Alternate translation: “and they knew where Jesus and his disciples were going” (2) The people knew that it was Jesus and his disciples were leaving, and so followed them. Alternate translation: “and they recognized that it was Jesus and his disciples leaving” MRK 6 34 j1td figs-simile ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα 1 they were like sheep not having a shepherd Jesus compares the people to **sheep** who are confused when they do not have their **shepherd** to lead them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “they were confused because they did not have someone to lead them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MRK 6 35 sei9 figs-idiom καὶ ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης 1 And the hour already having become late This means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And when it was getting late” or “And late in the afternoon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 6 35 sei9 figs-idiom καὶ ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης 1 And the hour already having become late This means it was toward the end of the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “And when it was getting late” or “And late in the afternoon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 6 35 hz4h ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος 1 This place is desolate This refers to a place where there are no people. See how you translated this in [Mark 6:31](../06/31.md). MRK 6 37 cts5 figs-rquestion ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν? 1 Having gone away, might we buy 200 denarii of loaves of bread and give it to them to eat? The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd, even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 6 37 wowk figs-rquestion ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n\n +MRK 6 37 wowk figs-hypo ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 The disciples are using a hypothetical situation to express how expensive it would be to buy enough food for all of the people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we go out to the market, how could we afford to spend 200 denarii on food to feed all of these people?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) MRK 6 37 hs21 translate-bmoney δηναρίων διακοσίων 1 200 denarii The singular form of the word **denarii** is “denarius.” A denarius was a Roman silver coin worth one day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MRK 6 37 c65w translate-numbers δηναρίων διακοσίων 1 200 denarii “two hundred denarii” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MRK 6 39 xgb6 translate-unknown τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ 1 the green grass Describe the **grass** with the color word used in your language for healthy grass, which may or may not be the color **green**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])\n +MRK 6 39 xgb6 translate-unknown τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ 1 the green grass Describe the **grass** with the color word used in your language for healthy grass, which may or may not be the color **green**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 6 40 e4cb figs-explicit πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα 1 by group according to hundreds and according to fifties This refers to the number of people in each of the groups. Alternate translation: “about fifty people in some groups and about a hundred people in other groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 6 41 l8q3 figs-explicit ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 having looked up to heaven This means that he **looked up** toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus looked up to the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 6 43 xk9h translate-numbers δώδεκα κοφίνων 1 12 baskets “twelve baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 6 44 v4m3 translate-numbers πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 5,000 men “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 6 44 deov writing-background καὶ ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρτους, πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ location to help readers understand how many people they fed. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 6 44 u413 figs-explicit ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρτους, πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 those who ate the loaves were 5,000 men The number of women and children was not counted. If it would not be understood that women and children were present, it can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “And there were 5,000 men who ate the loaves. They did not even count the women and children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 6 45 y3ve translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Bethsaida This is a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 6 48 g7ka (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) τετάρτην φυλακὴν 1 the fourth watch This is the time between 3 AM and sunrise. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you can state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 6 45 y3ve translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Bethsaida **Bethsaida** is a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 6 48 g7ka (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) τετάρτην φυλακὴν 1 the fourth watch This is the time between 3 AM and sunrise. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you can express this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 6 50 et5c figs-parallelism θαρσεῖτε…μὴ φοβεῖσθε 1 Take courage! … Do not fear! **Take courage** and **Do not be afraid** are similar in meaning, emphasizing to his disciples that they did not need to be afraid. They can be combined into one if necessary. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid of me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 6 52 m53m figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις 1 about the loaves Here the phrase **the loaves** refers to when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what it meant when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread” or “what it meant when Jesus caused the few loaves to become many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 6 52 t1qb figs-metaphor ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη 1 their heart had been hardened Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts had been hardened.\nIf the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “they were stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n -MRK 6 53 p316 translate-names Γεννησαρὲτ 1 Gennesaret This is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 6 52 t1qb figs-metaphor ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη 1 their heart had been hardened Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their **hearts had been hardened**. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “they were stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 6 53 p316 translate-names Γεννησαρὲτ 1 Gennesaret **Gennesaret** is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 6 55 d9k9 περιέδραμον…ἤκουον 1 they ran throughout … they were hearing The word **they** refers to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples. MRK 6 56 gi6y ἐτίθεσαν 1 they were putting Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples. -MRK 6 56 y6hs figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 6 56 y6hs figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick The phrase **the sick** refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 6 56 bqzf figs-litany εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς 1 Mark lists **villages**, **cities**, and **countryside** to emphasize that everywhere Jesus went, they were bringing sick people to him. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list different places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Hand washing\n\nThe Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Ephphatha”\n\nThis is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n -MRK 7 1 b9ul writing-newevent καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1d are gathering around him This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, some Pharisees and some men who teach the Jewish laws who had come from Jerusalem gathered around Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MRK 7 2 wd6i figs-extrainfo 0 General Information: The following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MRK 7 3 mj6u writing-background γὰρ 1 of the elders This verse, as well as the next verse, are added to explain to the reader why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n -MRK 7 3 x0b6 figs-explicit κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 **The traditions of the elders** were teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Hand washing\n\nThe Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Ephphatha”\n\nThis is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 7 1 b9ul writing-newevent καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1d are gathering around him This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, some Pharisees and some men who teach the Jewish laws and who had come from Jerusalem gathered around Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MRK 7 2 wd6i figs-extrainfo 0 General Information: The following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained there, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 7 3 mj6u writing-background γὰρ 1 of the elders This verse, as well as the next verse, are added to explain to the reader why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 7 3 x0b6 figs-explicit κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 The phrase, **the tradition of the elders**, means teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had passed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 7 4 wsb8 writing-background χαλκίων 1 copper vessels See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 7 4 d3qc figs-explicit ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων 1 **cups…pots…copper vessels** would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 7 5 hts4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands? **walk** is a common way of speaking which means “obey.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Why do your disciples not obey what the elders have taught us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 7 5 ugom grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands? **but** is used to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing, with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MRK 7 5 j7ht figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread **bread** is a synecdoche, representing food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 7 4 d3qc figs-explicit ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων 1 Utensils such as **cups…pots…copper vessels** would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 5 hts4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands? The verb **walk** is a common way of speaking which means “obey.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Why do your disciples not obey what the elders have taught us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 7 5 ugom grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Why do your disciples not walk according to the tradition of the elders, but they eat their bread with unwashed hands? Here, **but** is used to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MRK 7 5 j7ht figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread Here, **bread** represents food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 7 6 oavh figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 7 6 ep7u figs-metonymy τοῖς χείλεσίν 1 with their lips Here, **lips** is used to signify speaking. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 6 zgt9 figs-metonymy ἡ…καρδία αὐτῶν 1 but their heart is far from me The word **heart** is a metonym for their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 6 xtab figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me This is a way of saying the people are not truly devoted to God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 7 8 hnw4 figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε 1 you hold fast to To **hold fast** means to obey something without ceasing. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “You obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +MRK 7 6 zgt9 figs-metonymy ἡ…καρδία αὐτῶν 1 but their heart is far from me The word **heart** is used to signify their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 7 6 xtab figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me The phrase *their heart is far from me** is a way of saying that the people are not truly devoted to God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 7 8 hnw4 figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε 1 you hold fast to To **hold fast** means to obey something without ceasing. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent way of speaking from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “you obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 7 9 e3qv figs-irony καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε 1 How well you reject the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition! Jesus says **You do well at rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition** to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s **commandment**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well in how you have rejected the commandment of God so you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MRK 7 10 d4sd figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς γὰρ εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 The one speaking evil of his father If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the one who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 7 11 cd57 translate-transliterate κορβᾶν 1 is Corban **Corban** is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning, and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -MRK 7 11 ev2r ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον 1 that is, a gift The author says **that is a gift** to provide background information to his audience who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “this word means a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])\n -MRK 7 14 u3nk figs-doublet ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε 1 Listen to me, all of you, and understand The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take head to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 7 15 gk5i figs-idiom οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 nothing from outside the man Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person could eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n +MRK 7 11 cd57 translate-transliterate κορβᾶν 1 is Corban **Corban** is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation, you can spell it the way it sounds in your language, and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 7 11 ev2r grammar-connect-time-background ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον 1 that is, a gift The author says **that is, a gift** to provide background information to his audience, who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “which means a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +MRK 7 14 u3nk figs-doublet ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε 1 Listen to me, all of you, and understand The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take heed to what I am about to say to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 7 15 gk5i figs-idiom οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 nothing from outside the man Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person could eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 7 15 ms5c figs-metonymy τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά 1 the things that come out from the man Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 17 l7d7 writing-endofstory καὶ ὅτε 1 And **and when** is a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -MRK 7 18 z8w1 figs-rquestion οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also thus without understanding? Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 7 17 l7d7 writing-endofstory καὶ ὅτε 1 And **And when** begins a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +MRK 7 18 z8w1 figs-rquestion οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also thus without understanding? Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I see! You do not understand either!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 7 18 yqve figs-metonymy πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι 1 See the note in verse 15. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 19 y2cr figs-metonymy οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν 1 it does not go into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. Here Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 19 hm98 figs-explicit καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα 1 making all foods clean **making all foods clean** explains to the reader what the significance of what Jesus’ sayings was. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus was traveling along the border between Samaria and Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) (COME BACK TO THIS) -MRK 7 20 r12p figs-metonymy τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον 1 he was saying **What is coming out from the man** means the thoughts and intentions of a person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “It is the thoughts and desires of a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 21 chkk figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “out of the inner being of a person, come evil thoughts” or “out of the mind of a person, come evil thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 7 21 eey1 figs-litany πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι 1 Mark lists out a number of sins here and in the next verse. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -MRK 7 24 k9bl writing-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν 1 Connecting Statement: **and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know it, but he was not able to hide** provides background information to what Jesus was thinking as he travelled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Having entered someones house, he was hoping to not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n +MRK 7 19 y2cr figs-metonymy οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν 1 it does not go into his heart Here, **heart** represents a person’s inner being or mind. Here Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 7 19 hm98 writing-background καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα 1 making all foods clean **making all foods clean** explains to the reader what the significance of Jesus’ sayings was. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus was traveling along the border between Samaria and Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) (COME BACK TO THIS) +MRK 7 20 r12p figs-metonymy τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον 1 he was saying **What is coming out from the man** means the thoughts and intentions of a person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “What a man thinks, says, or does," (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 7 21 chkk figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται 1 Here, **heart** represents a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “from the inner being of a person, come evil thoughts” or “from the mind of a person, come evil thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 7 21 eey1 figs-litany πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι 1 Mark lists a number of sins here and in the next verse. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +MRK 7 24 k9bl writing-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν 1 Connecting Statement: The three phrases, **and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know it, but he was not able to hide**, provide background information, telling what Jesus was thinking as he travelled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and having entered someone's house, he was hoping to not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 7 26 aik7 writing-background ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει 1 But the woman was a Greek, a Syrophoenician by descent This sentence gives us background information about the woman. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 7 26 e39y translate-names Συροφοινίκισσα 1 a Syrophoenician This is the name of the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 7 27 gsj7 figs-metaphor ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν 1 Permit the children first be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the dogs Here Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are **children** and the Gentiles as if they are **dogs**. This is not in a derogatory remark, but he is talking in terms of whether they are Israelites or not. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first eat. For it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like household pets compared to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 7 26 e39y translate-names Συροφοινίκισσα 1 a Syrophoenician **Syrophoenician** indicates the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 7 27 gsj7 figs-metaphor ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν 1 Permit the children first be fed, for it is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the dogs Here Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are **children** and the Gentiles as if they are **dogs**. This is not intended as a derogatory remark, but he is talking in terms of whether they are Israelites or not. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first eat. For it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like household pets compared to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 7 27 r898 figs-activepassive ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα 1 Permit the children first to be fed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We must first feed the children of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 7 27 k2wb figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread This refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 7 29 sa9t figs-explicit ὕπαγε 1 go Jesus was implying that she no longer needed to stay to ask him to help her daughter. He would do it. Alternate translation: “you may go now” or “you may go home in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 7 29 sbqp figs-explicit ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου 1 **The demon** left the **daughter** because Jesus commanded it too. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have commanded the demon to leave your daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 7 31 cxa8 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 of the Decapolis This is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:20](../05/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 7 32 jlj4 figs-explicit παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα 1 they beg him that he would lay his hand on him Prophets and teachers would put their **hands on** people in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, people are begging Jesus to heal a man. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they begged Jesus to put his hand on the man to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 7 33 ld3f figs-explicit πτύσας 1 having spit It may be helpful to state that Jesus **spit** on his fingers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after spitting on his fingers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 7 34 lbw4 translate-transliterate ἐφφαθά 1 Ephphatha Here the author speaks to the mans ears with an Aramaic word. This word should be copied as is into your language using your alphabet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -MRK 7 35 yg15 figs-idiom ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί 1 his ears were opened **his ears were opened** means he was able to hear. Alternate translation: “his ears were opened and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 7 27 k2wb figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread Here, **bread** refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 7 29 sa9t figs-explicit ὕπαγε 1 go When Jesus told her to **go**, he was implying that she no longer needed to stay to ask him to help her daughter. He would do it. Alternate translation: “you may go now” or “you may go home in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 29 sbqp figs-explicit ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου 1 **The demon** left the **daughter** because Jesus commanded it too. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have commanded the demon to leave your daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 31 cxa8 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 of the Decapolis **Decapolis** means Ten Cities; it is the name of that region. **Decapolis** is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:20](../05/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 7 32 jlj4 figs-explicit παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα 1 they beg him that he would lay his hand on him Prophets and teachers would put their **hands on** people in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, people are begging Jesus to heal a man. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they begged Jesus to put his hand on the man to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 33 ld3f figs-explicit πτύσας 1 having spit It may be helpful to state that Jesus **spit** on his fingers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after spitting on his fingers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 7 34 lbw4 translate-transliterate ἐφφαθά 1 Ephphatha Here the author speaks to the man's ears with an Aramaic word, **Ephphatha**. Using your alphabet, spell this word the way it would sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 7 35 yg15 figs-idiom ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί 1 his ears were opened The phrase **his ears were opened** means he became able to hear. Alternate translation: “his ears were healed, and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 7 35 yj4j figs-activepassive ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 the band of his tongue was released You can state **his tongue was released** in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 7 35 gssm figs-idiom ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 **the band of his tongue was released** means he was able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was free and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 7 35 gssm figs-idiom ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase, **the band of his tongue was released**, means he was able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed” or “the restraint on his tongue was removed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 7 36 eb2y figs-ellipsis ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ 1 as much as he ordered them The refers to him ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους 1 the deaf … the mute These refer to people. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nWhen Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.\n\nYeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Adulterous generation”\n\nWhen Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### The Historic Present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)).\n\n\n\n +MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους 1 the deaf … the mute The words **the deaf** and **the mute** refer to people who are unable to hear or speak. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nWhen Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.\n\nYeast is the ingredient that causes bread to increase in size before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Adulterous generation”\n\nWhen Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present \n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nJesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses paradoxes when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)). MRK 8 1 rmd8 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In those days This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MRK 8 1 sgv6 figs-extrainfo μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus explains following this why the crowd did not have anything to eat. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MRK 8 3 u3mu grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 they will faint Mark is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -MRK 8 4 jdk2 figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? 1 From where will anyone be able to feed these people with bread here in this desolate place? The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 6 x2jr figs-quotations παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 he commands the crowd to recline on the ground If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation. “Jesus commanded the crowd, ‘Sit down on the ground’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 8 7 bio6 figs-quotations εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation. “Jesus said to the disciples, ‘Serve these fish also’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 8 8 v5zi figs-explicit περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας 1 an abundance of broken pieces—seven baskets This refers to the **broken pieces** of bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread, which filled seven large baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 8 9 m81z writing-background ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι 1 and he sent them away Mark includes **Now there were about 4,000** to help his reader to know how many people are there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4000 people that Jesus fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 8 1 sgv6 figs-extrainfo μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν 1 Connecting Statement: Following this Jesus explains why the crowd did not have anything to eat. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 8 3 u3mu grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 they will faint Mark is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples' attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MRK 8 4 jdk2 figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? 1 From where will anyone be able to feed these people with bread here in this desolate place? The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation, and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 8 6 x2jr figs-quotations παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 he commands the crowd to recline on the ground If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus commanded the crowd, ‘Sit down on the ground’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MRK 8 7 bio6 figs-quotations εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **serve these also** as a direct quotation. “Jesus said to the disciples, ‘Serve these fish also’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MRK 8 8 v5zi figs-explicit περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας 1 an abundance of broken pieces—seven baskets The **abundance of broken pieces** refers to the **broken pieces** of bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread, which filled seven large baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 8 9 m81z writing-background ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι 1 and he sent them away Mark includes **Now there were about 4,000** to help his readers know how many people were there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4000 people that Jesus fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 8 10 qnt3 writing-endofstory καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ 1 **And immediately, having gotten into the boat with his disciples** is a comment concluding the story of Jesus feeding the 4,000 people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -MRK 8 10 y8u3 figs-explicit ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά 1 he went into the region of Dalmanutha They got to Dalmanutha in a boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sailed around the Sea of Galilee to the region of Dalmanutha” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 8 10 y8u3 figs-explicit ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά 1 he went into the region of Dalmanutha They got to **Dalmanutha** in a boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sailed around the Sea of Galilee to the region of Dalmanutha” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 8 10 x33a translate-names Δαλμανουθά 1 of Dalmanutha **Dalmanutha** is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 8 11 zi91 figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 a sign from heaven They wanted **a sign** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 having sighed deeply in his spirit This means that he groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated this in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md). -MRK 8 12 s8xl figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his spirit **in his spirit** means within himself or to himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 12 g4lz figs-rquestion τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? 1 Why does this generation seek for a sign? Jesus asks **Why does this generation seek for a sign** to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 8 11 zi91 figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 a sign from heaven The Pharisees wanted **a sign from heaven** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 8 12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 having sighed deeply in his spirit This means that he groaned or that he let out a long, deep breath that could be heard. It probably expressed Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated this in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md). +MRK 8 12 s8xl figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his spirit The phrase **in his spirit** means within himself or to himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 8 12 g4lz figs-rquestion τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? 1 Why does this generation seek for a sign? Jesus asked **"Why does this generation seek for a sign"** to show that they had not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 8 12 l335 figs-synecdoche τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον 1 Why does this generation seek for When Jesus speaks of **this generation**, he is referring to some of the people who lived at that time who were not following God. He was not speaking of every single person alive. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Why do you Pharisees ask for a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 8 12 a2x2 figs-activepassive εἰ δοθήσεται…σημεῖον 1 if a sign will be given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 8 12 q4wh figs-idiom εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον 1 **if a sign will be given to this generation** is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 8 13 i2se writing-pronouns ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς 1 having left them, having boarded a boat again Jesus’ was not the only one who left, but his disciples were with him also. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left them and got into the boat again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MRK 8 13 u1qk figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 to the other side **to the other side** describes the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 8 12 q4wh figs-idiom εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον 1 Jesus' statement,**if a sign will be given to this generation**, is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 8 13 i2se writing-pronouns ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς 1 having left them, having boarded a boat again Jesus’ was not the only one who left, but his disciples were with him also. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left them and got into the boat again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 8 13 u1qk figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 to the other side Here, **to the other side** describes their travel on the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 8 14 gtg6 grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ ἐπελάθοντο λαβεῖν ἄρτους, καὶ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ 1 except for one loaf If it would appear in your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ disciples only brought one loaf of bread onto the boat with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -MRK 8 15 bd2x figs-doublet ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε 1 Keep watch! Be on guard **Keep watch** and **Be on guard** have a common meaning and are repeated here for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Keep watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 8 15 nszl figs-extrainfo βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου 1 Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to **yeast**. When yeast it put into bread, it affects the entire batch of bread which is made. You should not explain this when you translate it, for the disciples themselves did not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -MRK 8 16 zfw3 figs-hyperbole ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν 1 they have no bread The word **no** is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread ([Mark 8:14](../08/14.md)), but that was not for all of them on the boat. Alternate translation: “they have very little bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 8 15 bd2x figs-doublet ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε 1 Keep watch! Be on guard **Keep watch** and **Be on guard** have a common meaning which is repeated here for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Keep on your guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MRK 8 15 nszl figs-extrainfo βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου 1 Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to **yeast**. When yeast is put into the bread dough, it affects the entire batch of bread which is being made. You should not explain this when you translate it, for the disciples themselves did not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 8 16 zfw3 figs-hyperbole ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν 1 they have no bread The word **no** is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread ([Mark 8:14](../08/14.md)), but that was not enough for all of them on the boat. Alternate translation: “they have very little bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 8 17 hnh6 figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? 1 Why are you reasoning that you do not have bread? Here Jesus is rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking that I am talking about actual bread.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 17 dmt2 figs-parallelism οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? 1 Do you not yet perceive, nor understand? These questions have the same meaning and are used together to emphasize that they do not understand. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MRK 8 17 dmt2 figs-parallelism οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? 1 Do you not yet perceive, nor understand? These phrases have the same meaning and are used together to emphasize that they do not understand. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 8 17 wf6j figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? 1 Do you not yet perceive, nor understand? If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should perceive and understand by now the things I say and do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 8 17 fn31 figs-metonymy πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Have your hearts become hardened? Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Have you become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 8 17 rq8c figs-metaphor πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Have your hearts become hardened? The phrase **hearts become hardened** is a metaphor for not being able or willing to understand something. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 8 17 mihv figs-rquestion πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Have your hearts become hardened? Jesus uses a question to scold the disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your thinking has become so dull!” or “You are so slow to understand what I mean!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 18 u1gh figs-rquestion ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε? 1 Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear? And do you not remember? Jesus continues to rebuke his disciples by asking them questions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have eyes, but you do not understand what you see. You have ears, but you do not understand what you hear. You should remember the things that I have said and done.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 18 qt58 figs-idiom οὐ βλέπετε…οὐκ ἀκούετε 1 **do you not see** and **do you not hear** are idioms meaning that the disciples did not understand. They heard and saw everything Jesus did, but they did not understand what it meant. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do you not understand the things which I have said and done the whole time you have been with me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 8 18 u1gh figs-rquestion ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε? 1 Having eyes, do you not see? And having ears, do you not hear? And do you not remember? Jesus continues to rebuke his disciples by asking them rhetorical questions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have eyes, but you do not understand what you see. You have ears, but you do not understand what you hear. You should remember the things that I have said and done.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 8 18 qt58 figs-idiom οὐ βλέπετε…οὐκ ἀκούετε 1 The phrases **do you not see** and **do you not hear** are idioms meaning that the disciples did not understand. They heard and saw everything Jesus did, but they did not comprehend what it meant. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do you not understand the things which I have said and done the whole time you have been with me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 8 19 t7ig translate-numbers τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους 1 the 5,000 “the five thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 8 20 lip5 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους 1 the 4,000 “the four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MRK 8 21 kh42 figs-rquestion πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? 1 How do you not yet understand? Jesus is mildly rebuking his disciples for not understanding what he has done in front of their eyes. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I say and do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 22 c92c figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 8 22 c92c figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they go to Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 8 22 mj78 figs-explicit ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Jesus and his disciples traveled to Bethsaida in a boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They came to Bethsaida in a boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 8 22 mul4 translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Bethsaida **Bethsaida** is a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated the name of this town in [Mark 6:45](../06/45.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 8 22 mx9q figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται 1 that he would touch him They wanted Jesus to touch the man in order to heal him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to touch him in order to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 8 24 r6tk figs-simile βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας 1 I see men who look like walking trees The man sees people **walking** around, yet they are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to **trees**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MRK 8 25 td9l figs-activepassive καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη 1 and he looked intently and was restored The phrase **was restored** can be written in active form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 8 22 mx9q figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται 1 that he would touch him They wanted Jesus to touch the man in order to heal him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to touch him in order to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 8 24 r6tk figs-simile βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας 1 I see men who look like walking trees The man sees people **walking** around, yet their images are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to **trees**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MRK 8 25 td9l figs-activepassive καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη 1 and he looked intently and was restored The phrase **was restored** can be written in active form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored the man’s sight as the man stared at things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 8 27 e4l3 figs-go ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they came out into the villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 8 28 nn1f figs-ellipsis ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι 1 other … others The two occurrences of **others** refers to other people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 8 28 nn1f figs-ellipsis ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι 1 other … others The two occurrences of **others** refers to other people. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say … other people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 8 30 rgy8 figs-quotations ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 he warned them that they might tell no one about him If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **they might tell no one about him** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 8 31 d4dc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MRK 8 31 d4dc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 8 31 m32p figs-activepassive ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes, and to be killed, and to rise up after three days If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 8 31 gjg2 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 The events of this verse progress in chronological order. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “first, the elders and the chief priests and the scribes will reject me. Then, people will kill me. But after that, on the third day, I will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -MRK 8 31 h9t2 figs-123person δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν 1 When Jesus says **Son of Man**, he is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would be confusing in your language, you can use first person. Alternate translation: “It is necessary that I, the Son of Man, should suffer many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MRK 8 31 h9t2 figs-123person δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν 1 When Jesus says **Son of Man**, he is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would be confusing in your language, you can use first person. Alternate translation: “it is necessary that I, the Son of Man, should suffer many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 8 33 nu32 figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ 1 Get behind me, Satan! For you are not setting your mind Jesus means that Peter is acting like **Satan** because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 8 33 r9gy grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Get behind me Jesus is saying that Peter is acting in a way that he ought not act. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MRK 8 33 clxo figs-idiom οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 To **set your mind** on something means to think about it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 8 33 clxo figs-idiom οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 To be **setting your mind** on something means to be thinking about it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 8 33 t6jv figs-ellipsis οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Jesus leaves some words out in the second phrase that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You are not thinking about what God desires, but you are thinking about what man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 8 34 m732 figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν 1 to follow after me To **follow** Jesus here represents being one of his disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 8 34 c6ll figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me The cross here represents suffering and death because you follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 34 oxv6 figs-hypo εἴ τις θέλει ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to show the seriousness of being his follower. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +MRK 8 34 c6ll figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me The cross here represents your suffering and death because you follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 8 34 oxv6 figs-hypo εἴ τις θέλει ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 take up his cross, and follow me Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to show the seriousness of being his follower. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) MRK 8 35 d5rj figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 For whoever wants Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 8 35 a6g3 figs-explicit ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν 1 soul The first time the word life occurs in each phrase, it means life before a person dies, that is, earthly life. The second occurrence of life in each phrase means life after death, that is, everlasting life. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For whoever desires to save his earthly life will not have everlasting life with God after he dies. Whoever loses his earthly life for my sake, and for the sake of the good news, will have everlasting life with God after he dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n -MRK 8 35 nn0a figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 **lose it** is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God will judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 8 35 a6g3 figs-explicit ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσει τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, σώσει αὐτήν 1 soul The first time the word **life** occurs in each phrase, it means life before a person dies, that is, earthly life. The second occurrence of life in each phrase, represented by the pronoun **it**, means life after death, that is, everlasting life. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “For whoever desires to save his earthly life will not have everlasting life with God after he dies. Whoever loses his earthly life for my sake, and for the sake of the good news, will have everlasting life with God after he dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 8 35 nn0a figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 The expression **lose it** is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will receive God's judgment" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 8 36 ua46 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ? 1 For what does it profit a man to gain the whole world and to forfeit his soul? Jesus asks this question to emphasize that If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his soul.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 36 mxuj figs-rquestion ἄνθρωπον 1 Mark is using the phrase **a man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -MRK 8 36 jde6 figs-hyperbole κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον 1 to gain the whole world The phrase **the whole world** is an exaggeration, meaning that the person might gain great riches. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 8 36 mxuj figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Mark is using the phrase **a man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 8 36 jde6 figs-hyperbole κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον 1 to gain the whole world The phrase **the whole world** is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 8 37 wua4 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 For what might a man give as an exchange for his soul? Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life.” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 8 38 c53y figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ 1 in this adulterous and sinful generation Jesus speaks of this **generation** as **adulterous**, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery against God and are very sinful” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 8 38 ov1d figs-synecdoche τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 See how you translated **this generation** in [8:12](../08/12.md)\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n -MRK 8 38 s5tm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MRK 8 38 c53y figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ 1 in this adulterous and sinful generation Jesus speaks of **this generation** as **adulterous**, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what that means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery against God and are very sinful” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 8 38 ov1d figs-synecdoche τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 See how you translated **this generation** in [8:12](../08/12.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 8 38 s5tm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 8 38 hvx0 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **Son of Man** in [8:31](../08/31.md)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md)). MRK 9 1 q4b6 writing-pronouns ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 he was saying to them Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you can state who **he** refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ MRK 9 1 kg4x figs-idiom οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανά MRK 9 1 qloy figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 9 1 ymou figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would help your readers understand the meaning you can state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2-10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 9 2 uf5f figs-rpronouns κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 by themselves, alone The author uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +MRK 9 2 uf5f figs-rpronouns κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 by themselves, alone Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) MRK 9 2 krt6 translate-unknown μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured before them The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 9 2 b3bb figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 9 3 gp48 translate-unknown οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι 1 as no bleacher on earth is able thus to make them white The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth and would clean and bleach it. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ MRK 9 9 pdmm writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the MRK 9 9 w1nf writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται 1 Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter and James and John. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 9 9 wter διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται 1 Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them not tell anyone about what they had just seen” MRK 9 9 w98g figs-metonymy ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 would rise from the dead Jesus speaks figuratively in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. Alternate translation: “would come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 9 10 edv3 figs-explicit καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 1 **And they kept the matter to themselves** means that Peter, James, and John did not share with other people that Jesus had been transfigured until after he rose from the dead. Alternate translation: “And they did not tell others about Jesus’ transfiguration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 9 10 edv3 καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 1 Here, Mark is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “And they kept the matter to themselves” MRK 9 10 wfu9 ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise from the dead See how you translated the phrase “rise from the dead” in the previous verse. MRK 9 11 s9zn writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες 1 they were questioning him Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 9 11 je29 writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν 1 Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -563,6 +563,7 @@ MRK 9 14 n8fd ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 having co MRK 9 14 qsp3 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…αὐτούς 1 Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refers to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus and Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 9 15 qhc3 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…προστρέχοντες…αὐτόν 1 All three of the occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse, refer to Jesus. If it would help your readers you can clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 9 16 w679 writing-pronouns καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crown” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 9 17 a2j6 Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 9 18 h98h ξηραίνεται 1 he becomes rigid Alternate translation: “his body becomes rigid” MRK 9 18 zre6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἴσχυσαν 1 they could not The phrase **the were not strong enough** refers to the disciples not being about to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 9 19 tb67 figs-extrainfo ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει 1 answering them, he says Here, the pronoun **them** is plural so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly who **them** refers to. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,**them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -607,8 +608,13 @@ MRK 9 31 s1n2 figs-activepassive ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς MRK 9 33 xv94 figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “they went” rather than **they came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 9 33 l2kj figs-go ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having went into the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 9 34 gdg3 figs-explicit τίς μείζων 1 about who was the greatest Here, **greatest** refers to who was the **greatest** among the disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 9 35 jzl5 figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all Here the words **first** and **last** are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants God to consider him to be the most important person of all, he must consider himself to be the least important of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 9 35 z754 figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 9 35 fkf6 figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act as if he is the least important and serve everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +MRK 9 35 jzl5 figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all Being **first** figuratively represents people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** figuratively represents people who are not esteemed by others because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 9 35 ioiu figs-nominaladj εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 9 35 um58 translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 9 35 jqo3 figs-ellipsis ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 9 35 z9x2 figs-declarative ἔσται…ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) MRK 9 35 t526 πάντων…πάντων 1 of all … of all Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people” MRK 9 36 qqcu writing-pronouns ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would help your readers you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 9 37 h242 ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων 1 one of these little children Alternate translation: “a child such as this one” @@ -616,6 +622,7 @@ MRK 9 37 ul12 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name H MRK 9 37 uik3 figs-explicit οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 **does not receive me but the one who sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God who sent him. If it would help your readers you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 9 37 y24n figs-explicit τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 the one who has sent me Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that **the one** refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 9 38 dxq5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 in your name Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. This expression means the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 9 38 a3d3 Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 9 38 k2i2 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν 1 he was not following us Here, **following** does not seem to mean to be one of Jesus’ disciples, since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 9 39 oynl figs-litotes μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν 1 Jesus is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) MRK 9 39 yw2q figs-metonymy ὀνόματί 1 See how you translated **name** in the previous verse [9:39](../09/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -683,335 +690,446 @@ MRK 10 15 a1e7 figs-simile ὡς παιδίον 1 as a little child The point of MRK 10 15 q3ck figs-explicit οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 may certainly not enter into it Here, the word **it** refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 10 16 jq4f ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ 1 having taken them into his arms Alternate translation: “embracing the children in his arms” MRK 10 17 fpp6 figs-metaphor ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω 1 in order that I might inherit everlasting life Here, the word **inherit** means “be given” or “receive” and is being used metaphorically to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal.” If your readers would not understand what it means to “inherit eternal life” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 17 d0iy Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 10 17 h45i figs-abstractnouns ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea behind **life** by using a verbal form like “live.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 10 18 lw1f figs-rquestion τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? 1 Why are you calling me good? Jesus’ question “Why are you calling me good” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is asks in order to make a point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 10 18 uwt6 τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone**, Jesus is asking the man a rhetorical question in order to make a point. The Bible clearly teaches that Jesus is God and Jesus affirms elsewhere that he believes that he is God. Make sure that your translation does not portray Jesus as denying his own moral perfection or divinity here. -MRK 10 18 gyod τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life” a person simply needs to know the right things to do and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God a person must focus on God and put their trust in God’s charachter. +MRK 10 18 gyod τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one is good except God alone**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life” a person simply needs to know the right things to do and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God a person must focus on God and put their trust in God’s character. +MRK 10 19 qs3e figs-quotesinquotes τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase **Do not kill**, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 10 19 hj3v μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς 1 do not testify falsely Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court” -MRK 10 21 syq1 figs-metaphor ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ 1 One thing you are lacking “There is one thing you are missing.” Here, **lacking** is a metaphor for needing to do something. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 21 rd85 figs-metonymy δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 give it to the poor Here the word **it** refers to the things he sells and is a metonym for the money he receives when he sells them. Alternate translation: “give the money to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 10 21 ux1l figs-nominaladj τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 to the poor This refers to **poor** people. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 10 21 iij4 θησαυρὸν 1 treasure wealth, valuable things -MRK 10 22 v58f ἔχων κτήματα πολλά 1 one having many possessions “someone who owned many things” -MRK 10 23 k5nk πῶς δυσκόλως 1 How difficult it is “It is very difficult” -MRK 10 24 z9z1 ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 but again answering, Jesus says to them “but Jesus said to his disciples again” -MRK 10 24 fh1q figs-metaphor τέκνα, πῶς 1 Children, how “My children, how.” Jesus is teaching them as a father would teach his **children**. Alternate translation: “My friends, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 24 jf83 πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν 1 how hard it is “it is very hard” -MRK 10 25 f15k figs-hyperbole εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God Jesus uses an exaggeration to emphasize how very difficult it is for **rich** people to get into **the kingdom of God**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 10 25 hl4s figs-hypo εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον 1 It is easier for a camel This speaks of an impossible situation. If you cannot state this in this way in your language, it can be written as a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “It would be easier for a camel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -MRK 10 25 t4y8 τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος 1 the eye of a needle “the hole of a needle.” This refers to the small hole in the end of a sewing **needle** that thread passes through. -MRK 10 26 ly6b οἱ δὲ περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 But they were greatly astonished “But the disciples were very astonished” -MRK 10 26 q8b7 figs-rquestion καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι? 1 And who is able to be saved? This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “If that is so, then no one will be saved!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 10 27 a7bi figs-ellipsis παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ 1 With men it is impossible, but not with God The understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for people to save themselves, but God can save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 10 28 hcv3 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is used here to draw attention to the words that come next. -MRK 10 28 cj3f ἀφήκαμεν πάντα 1 have left everything “have left everything behind” -MRK 10 29 zhx5 figs-litotes οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν 1 there is no one who has left The phrase **there is no one who has left** is a litotes. Jesus uses it to emphasize that every single person who leaves things for Jesus’ sake will receive the rewards that he lists in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 10 29 m1w3 ἢ ἀγροὺς 1 or lands “or plots of ground” or “or the land that he owns” -MRK 10 29 hr9y ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ 1 for my sake “for my cause” or “for me” -MRK 10 29 pf2g τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 for the gospel “to proclaim the gospel” -MRK 10 30 sjhg figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ 1 who may not receive Jesus finishes a sentence that begins with the words **there is no one who has left** (verse 29). You can state the whole sentence positively. “everyone who has left house, or brothers, or sisters, or mother, or father, or children, or lands, for my sake, and for the gospel, will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MRK 10 30 heb4 ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ 1 in this time “in this life” or “in this present age” -MRK 10 30 jev2 ἀδελφοὺς, καὶ ἀδελφὰς, καὶ μητέρας, καὶ τέκνα 1 brothers, and sisters, and mothers, and children Like the list in verse 29, this describes the family in general. The word “fathers” is missing in verse 30, but it does not significantly change the meaning. -MRK 10 30 ae92 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 with persecutions, and in the age that is coming, everlasting life This can be reworded so that the ideas in the abstract noun **persecutions** are expressed with the verb “persecute.” Because the sentence is so long and complicated, “will receive” can be repeated. Alternate translation: “and even though people persecute them, in the world to come, they will receive everlasting life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 10 30 v8nr ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ 1 in the age that is coming “in the future world” or “in the future” -MRK 10 31 ym7t figs-metaphor ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 who are first will be last, and the last first Here the words **first** and **last** are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “important” as being “first” and of being the “unimportant” as being “last.” Alternate translation: “are important will be unimportant, and those who are unimportant will be important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 31 xcj1 figs-nominaladj ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 the last first The phrase **the last** refers to people who are “last.” Also, the understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last, first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 10 31 mo59 figs-ellipsis ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 the last first The understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last will be first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 10 32 zc62 ἦσαν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἀναβαίνοντες εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, καὶ ἦν προάγων αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 And they were on the road, going up to Jerusalem, and Jesus was going ahead of them “And Jesus and his disciples were walking on the road, on the way up to Jerusalem, and Jesus was in front of his disciples” -MRK 10 32 hq7y οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 those who are following behind “those who were following behind them.” Some people were walking behind Jesus and his disciples. -MRK 10 33 pv4w ἰδοὺ 1 Behold “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” -MRK 10 33 s1hp figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 the Son of Man will be delivered Jesus is speaking about himself. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 10 33 ha2g figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 the Son of Man will be delivered You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will deliver the Son of Man” or “they will hand the Son of Man over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 10 33 zhf1 κατακρινοῦσιν 1 they will condemn The word **they** refers to the chief priests and the scribes. -MRK 10 33 ils2 παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 deliver him to the Gentiles “put him under the control of the Gentiles” -MRK 10 34 ccd3 ἐμπαίξουσιν 1 they will mock “people will mock” -MRK 10 34 xv2g figs-explicit ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise This refers to rising from the dead. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 10 35 li9k figs-exclusive θέλομεν…αἰτήσωμέν…ἡμῖν 1 we desire … for us … we may ask The words **we** and **us** refer only to James and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -MRK 10 37 bb98 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 in your glory “when you are glorified.” The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and rules over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 10 20 bd3s Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 10 21 syq1 figs-metaphor ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ 1 One thing you are lacking Here, **lack** is a metaphor for needing to do something. If your readers would not understand what it means to **lack** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 21 rd85 figs-explicit δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 give it to the poor Here, the word **it** refers to the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 21 ux1l figs-nominaladj τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 to the poor Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 10 21 iij4 figs-metaphor ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 treasure Jesus speaks figuratively of rewards in heaven as if these rewards are **treasure**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **have treasure in heaven** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you will be rewarded in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 22 afu7 figs-synecdoche τῷ λόγῳ 1 Although the term **word** is singular, Mark is using this term to refer to all of the instructions that Jesus gave the man in the prior verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 10 22 v58f ἔχων κτήματα πολλά 1 one having many possessions Alternate translation: “someone who owned many things” +MRK 10 24 z9z1 ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 but again answering, Jesus says to them Alternate translation: “but Jesus said to his disciples again” +MRK 10 24 fh1q figs-metaphor τέκνα 1 Children, how Here, Jesus is using the term **Children** figuratively to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and so Jesus regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. If your readers would not understand the use of the term **Children** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this in a non-figurative way as UST does. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 10 25 f15k figs-hyperbole εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for **rich** people **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 10 25 t4y8 translate-unknown εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 the eye of a needle **the eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing **needle** that thread passes through. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 10 27 vfyb figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, although the term **men** is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 10 28 hcv3 figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: See the UST.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +MRK 10 29 zhx5 figs-litotes οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν 1 there is no one who has left The phrase **there is no one who has left** is a litotes. Jesus uses the negative word **no** to negate **one** in order to emphasize that every single person who leaves things for Jesus’ sake will receive the rewards that he lists in the next verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “everyone who has left” or “every person who has left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +MRK 10 29 m1w3 ἢ ἀγροὺς 1 or lands Alternate translation: “or the land that he owns” +MRK 10 30 sjhg figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ 1 who may not receive The phrase **not receive** in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If this is confusing in your language you can state the entire sentence positively. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MRK 10 30 heb4 ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ 1 in this time Alternate translation: “in this present age” +MRK 10 31 y2lu figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ…ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj) +MRK 10 31 ym7t figs-metaphor ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 who are first will be last, and the last first Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 32 hq7y figs-explicit οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 those who are following behind Some people were walking behind Jesus and his twelve disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 32 k1nn figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 10 33 pv4w figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +MRK 10 33 qkq9 figs-exclusive ἀναβαίνομεν 1 When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 10 33 s1hp figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 the Son of Man will be delivered Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) +MRK 10 33 ha2g figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 the Son of Man will be delivered If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be delivered** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will hand the Son of Man over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 10 33 ohsf figs-abstractnouns καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 10 33 ils2 παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 deliver him to the Gentiles Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles” +MRK 10 34 ccd3 figs-123person ἐμπαίξουσιν 1 they will mock In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) +MRK 10 34 t0lt writing-pronouns ἐμπαίξουσιν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 10 34 xv2g figs-explicit ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise The phrase **he will rise** refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 35 li9k figs-exclusive θέλομεν…αἰτήσωμέν…ἡμῖν 1 we desire … for us … we may ask Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 10 35 ch2r Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 10 36 he8f writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 10 37 xwf8 writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 10 37 n1fv figs-exclusive δὸς ἡμῖν…καθίσωμεν 1 Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 10 37 bb98 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 in your glory The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “with you when you rule in your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 37 kyg6 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 10 38 v1bf οὐκ οἴδατε 1 You do not know “You do not understand” -MRK 10 38 yvu8 figs-metaphor πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω 1 to drink the cup which I am drinking Here, **cup** refers to what Jesus must suffer. Suffering is often referred to as drinking from a cup. Alternate translation: “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering that I will drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 38 pd7l figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 to be baptized with the baptism with which I am being baptized Here, **baptism** and **being baptized** represent suffering. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “to endure the baptism of suffering which I will suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 39 r3pm figs-ellipsis δυνάμεθα 1 We are able They respond this way, meaning that they **are able** to drink the same cup and endure the same baptism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 10 39 hc1g πίεσθε 1 you will drink “you will drink as well” -MRK 10 40 ig8f τὸ δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι 1 But to sit at my right hand or at my left hand is not mine to give “But I am not the one who allows people to sit at my right hand or my left hand” -MRK 10 40 pdc1 ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται 1 but it is for those for whom it has been prepared “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared.” The word **it** refers to the places to his right hand and to his left hand. -MRK 10 40 eu9v figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 it has been prepared You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” or “God has prepared them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 10 41 ad19 ἀκούσαντες, 1 When heard about this The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hands. -MRK 10 42 sbk8 προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 having summoned them, Jesus “after Jesus called his disciples, he” -MRK 10 42 sfs9 figs-activepassive οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 that those who are considered rulers of the Gentiles You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) the people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) the Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 10 42 hme7 κατακυριεύουσιν 1 lord it over have control or power over -MRK 10 42 zfr3 κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 exercise authority over “flaunt their authority over.” This means that they show or use their authority in an overbearing way. -MRK 10 43 zfz6 figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 But it is not this way among you This refers back to the previous verse about the Gentile rulers. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “But do not be like them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 10 43 fc3m μέγας γενέσθαι 1 to become great “to be highly respected” -MRK 10 44 e7sn figs-metaphor εἶναι πρῶτος 1 to be first This is a metaphor for being the most important. Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 45 a3fr figs-activepassive καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι 1 For even the Son of Man did not come to be served You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “For even the Son of Man did not come to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 10 45 rik1 διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι 1 to be served, but to serve “to be served by people, but to serve people” -MRK 10 45 d9jd ἀντὶ πολλῶν 1 in exchange for many “in the place of many people” -MRK 10 46 n4i3 0 Connecting Statement: As Jesus and his disciples continue walking toward Jerusalem, Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus, who then walks with them. -MRK 10 46 bq3j translate-names ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης 1 Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus “a blind beggar named Bartimaeus, the son of Timaeus.” **Bartimaeus** is the name of a man. **Timaeus** is his father’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 10 47 ynr7 figs-ellipsis ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς…ἐστιν 1 having heard that it was Jesus Bartimaeus **heard** people saying **that it was Jesus**. Alternate translation: “when he heard people saying that it was Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 10 47 vwz9 figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 Son of David Jesus is called the Son of David because he is a descendant of King David. Alternate translation: “You who are the Messiah descended from King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 10 48 ca5u ἐπετίμων…πολλοὶ 1 many were rebuking “many people rebuked” -MRK 10 48 m32u πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 much more “even more” -MRK 10 49 t5ch figs-quotations εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν 1 said, “Call him.” You can translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “commanded others to call him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 10 49 ac7h φωνοῦσι 1 they call The word **they** refers to the crowd. -MRK 10 49 jvr1 θάρσει 1 Take courage! “Have courage” or “Do not be afraid” -MRK 10 49 gnb9 φωνεῖ σε 1 He is calling you “Jesus is calling for you” -MRK 10 50 z6ec ἀναπηδήσας 1 having sprung up “having jumped up” -MRK 10 51 i5an ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ 1 answering him “answering the blind man” -MRK 10 51 dap1 ἀναβλέψω 1 I might receive my sight “I would be able to see” +MRK 10 38 yvu8 figs-idiom πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω 1 to drink the cup which I am drinking Drinking a **cup** is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo. In the Bible suffering is often referred to as drinking from a cup. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering that I will drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 10 38 pax6 figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 The phrase **to be baptized with the baptism** is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here, this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and death by crucifixion. If your readers would not understand this metaphor for suffering, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 38 hlue figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 10 39 r3pm writing-pronouns οἱ…αὐτοῖς 1 We are able Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 10 39 hc1g figs-idiom τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε 1 you will drink **The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 10 39 c15v figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** metaphorically. See how you translated Jesus’ metaphorical use of baptism in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 39 humc figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 10 40 pdc1 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται 1 but it is for those for whom it has been prepared The word **it** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 40 eu9v figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 it has been prepared The phrase **it has been prepared** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in [Matthew 20:23](../mat/07/14.md) that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 10 41 ad19 figs-explicit] ἀκούσαντες, 1 When heard about this The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] +MRK 10 41 i48d figs-explicit οἱ δέκα 1 **the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 42 sbk8 προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 having summoned them, Jesus Alternate translation: “after Jesus called his disciples to him, he” +MRK 10 42 zfr3 figs-abstractnouns κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 exercise authority over If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 10 43 zfz6 figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως…ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 But it is not this way among you The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you” and refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers you can indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than the Gentile rulers do” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 10 43 fc3m μέγας γενέσθαι 1 to become great Alternate translation: “to be highly respected” or “to be greatly respected” +MRK 10 43 gfun figs-declarative ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be your servant** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md) where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +MRK 10 44 e7sn figs-metaphor εἶναι πρῶτος 1 to be first Here, **to be first** is a metaphor for being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 10 44 qzo8 figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +MRK 10 44 u5yb figs-hyperbole δοῦλος 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of being **a slave** to emphasize the great lengths Jesus’ followers should go to in order to serve others. If Jesus’ exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act similar to slaves in their service to others. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 10 45 ctta figs-123person καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) +MRK 10 45 pmk3 translate/figs-go οὐκ ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “leave” and “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 10 45 a3fr figs-activepassive διακονηθῆναι 1 For even the Son of Man did not come to be served The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 10 45 rik1 διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι 1 to be served, but to serve Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people” +MRK 10 45 d9jd ἀντὶ πολλῶν 1 in exchange for many Alternate translation: “in place of many people” or “in exchange for many people” +MRK 10 46 n4i3 figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Ἰερειχώ 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went into Jericho” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 10 46 bq3j figs-go ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ 1 Bartimaeus, a blind beggar, son of Timaeus Your language may say “coming out” rather than **going out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “as he is coming out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 10 47 ow3g translate-names Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός 1 The people call **Jesus the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names) +MRK 10 47 opm0 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses **And** to introduce a reason result statement. **And** introduces the reason **having heard that it was Jesus** which resulted in Bartimaeus beginning **to cry out and to say, “Son of David, Jesus, have mercy on me!”** When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result) +MRK 10 47 ynr7 figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 having heard that it was Jesus The blind man is using the word **Son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MRK 10 47 vwz9 figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 Son of David **David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title Son of David implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 10 47 ylls figs-abstractnouns ἐλέησόν με 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** by using an adjective form such as “merciful” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 10 47 s2dr figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative) +MRK 10 47 tvkh figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking specifically to be healed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 10 48 ca5u ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ ἵνα σιωπήσῃ 1 many were rebuking Alternate translation: “many people kept telling him not to shout” +MRK 10 48 m32u πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 much more The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) that the blind man called out even more persistently. Alternate translation: “called out even more persistently” +MRK 10 48 l86a figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με 1 See how you decided to translate this phrase in [10:47](../010/47.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +MRK 10 49 ac7h writing-pronouns φωνοῦσι 1 they call Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the crowd. If this might confuse your readers, you could state explicitly who **they** refers to. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 10 49 n6xl figs-abstractnouns θάρσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **courage** by using an adjective form such as “courageous” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 10 52 s5d2 figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has healed you This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s **faith**. Jesus heals the man because he believes that Jesus can heal him. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you believed in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 10 52 ub7w ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he was following him “he followed Jesus” +MRK 10 52 bjuw figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 10 52 ub7w figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψεν 1 he was following him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you could express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “see” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../jhn/12/14.md)) -MRK 11 1 ch4j καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives “And when Jesus and his disciples came near to Jerusalem, they came to Bethphage and Bethany near the Mount of Olives” They had come to **Bethphage and Bethany** in the vicinity of **Jerusalem**. -MRK 11 1 g1fy translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage This is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 11 2 bi22 τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν 1 opposite us “ahead of us” -MRK 11 2 r41g πῶλον 1 a colt This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man. -MRK 11 2 yw78 figs-activepassive ἐφ’ ὃν οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν 1 on which no man has yet sat This can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “that no one has ever ridden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 11 3 xw55 figs-explicit τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? 1 Why are you doing this? It can be written clearly what the word **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 3 k7fd αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει 1 has need of it “needs it” -MRK 11 3 yj5y figs-explicit εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε 1 immediately he sends it back here Jesus will send it back promptly when he is finished using it. Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 4 y381 ἀπῆλθον 1 they went away “the two disciples went away” -MRK 11 4 i2ml πῶλον 1 a colt This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man. See how you translated this in [Mark 11:2](../11/02.md). -MRK 11 6 j39z οἱ…εἶπον 1 they spoke “they responded” -MRK 11 6 ij7y καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 just as Jesus told them “just as Jesus had told them to respond.” This refers to how **Jesus** had **told them** to respond to people’s questions about taking the colt. -MRK 11 6 m8pm figs-idiom ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς 1 they gave them permission This means that they allowed them to continue doing what they were doing. Alternate translation: “they let them take the donkey with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 11 7 ice6 ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 throw their cloaks on it, and he sat on it “laid their cloaks on its back so Jesus could ride it.” It is easier to ride a colt or a horse when there is a blanket or something similar on its back. In this case, the disciples threw **their cloaks** on it. -MRK 11 7 k9g7 τὰ ἱμάτια 1 cloaks “coats” or “robes” -MRK 11 8 t8hy figs-explicit πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν 1 many spread their cloaks on the road It was a tradition to lay garments on **the road** in front of important people to honor them. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “many people spread their garments on the road to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 1 ch4j translate/figs-go ἐγγίζουσιν 1 And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 1 g1fy translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage **Bethphage** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 11 2 bi22 figs-go ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην 1 opposite us Your language may say “Come” rather than **Go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 2 si41 figs-youdual ὑμῶν…εὑρήσετε 1 Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual) +MRK 11 2 r41g translate-unknown πῶλον 1 a colt The term **colt** refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 11 2 yw78 figs-gendernotations οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν 1 on which no man has yet sat Although the term **man** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. He means that “no one” had yet sat on the donkey. Alternate translation: “no person has yet sat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 11 2 zloo figs-metonymy οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν 1 Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. Alternate translation: “no person has ever ridden” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy) +MRK 11 3 aw3v figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε 1 This verse contains two direct quotations within a direct quotation. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two direct quotations in this verse as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are untying the donkey tell them that the Lord needs it and will send it back here as soon as he is done using it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 3 q446 figs-youdual ποιεῖτε 1 The owners of the colt are speaking to the two disciples, so **you** would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual) +MRK 11 3 xw55 figs-explicit τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? 1 Why are you doing this? If it would be helpful to your readers you can say explicitly what the word **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 3 k7fd figs-abstractnouns αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει 1 has need of it If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **need**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “needs it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 3 yj5y εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε 1 immediately he sends it back here Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it” +MRK 11 4 y381 writing-pronouns ἀπῆλθον 1 they went away Here, **they** refers to the two disciples mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). If it would help your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 11 4 f6hc πῶλον 1 See how you translated **colt** in [Mark 11:2](../11/02.md). Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal” +MRK 11 7 k9g7 translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 cloaks The word **cloaks** refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) +MRK 11 7 sbqy figs-explicit ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν 1 The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “draped the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 8 t8hy figs-explicit πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν 1 many spread their cloaks on the road Spreading **cloaks on the road** and **branches** was a way of showing honor to someone. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and others spread branches they had cut from the fields. They did this in order to honor Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 8 jk2o translate-symaction πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν 1 The words **many**, **others**, and **they** all refer to other people besides the disciples. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and other people spread branches they had cut” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction) +MRK 11 8 fwl0 ἱμάτια 1 See how you translated the word **cloaks** in [11:7](../11/07.md). Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments” MRK 11 8 nx3n figs-explicit ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν 1 and others, branches having been cut from the fields It was a tradition to lay palm **branches** on the road in front of an important people to honor them. Alternate translation: “and others spread branches on the road that they had cut from the fields, also to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 9 ye41 οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 those following “those who followed Jesus” -MRK 11 9 d8se translate-transliterate ὡσαννά 1 Hosanna This word means “save us,” but people also shouted it joyfully when they wanted to praise God. You can translate it according to how it was used, or you can write **Hosanna** using your language’s way of spelling that word. Alternate translation: “Praise God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -MRK 11 9 x1bz figs-explicit εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Blessed is the one who comes This is referring to Jesus. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 9 e2p6 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord This is a metonym for the Lord’s authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 11 9 el81 εὐλογημένος 1 Blessed is “May God bless” -MRK 11 10 a6b4 figs-explicit εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David “Blessed is our father David’s coming kingdom.” This refers to Jesus **coming** and ruling as king. Alternate translation: “Blessed be the coming of your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 10 kkfo figs-activepassive εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David The word **blessed** can be translated as an active verb. Alternate translation: “May God bless you as you rule your coming kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 11 10 diq8 figs-metonymy τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 of our father David Here David’s descendant who will rule is referred to as **David** himself. Alternate translation: “of the greatest descendant of our father David” or “that David’s greatest descendant will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 11 10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 Hosanna in the highest This could mean: (1) they should praise God who is in heaven. (2) those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’. -MRK 11 10 vqm2 figs-metaphor τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 the highest Here heaven is spoken of as **the highest**. Alternate translation: “the highest heaven” or “heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 11 11 mz8r ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας 1 the hour already being late “because it was already late in the day” -MRK 11 11 t5nv ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 he went out to Bethany with the Twelve “he and his twelve disciples left Jerusalem and went to Bethany” -MRK 11 12 zr8n ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας 1 when they had returned from Bethany “while they were going back to Jerusalem from Bethany” -MRK 11 13 y447 0 Connecting Statement: This happens while Jesus and his disciples are walking to Jerusalem. -MRK 11 13 yg5n εἰ ἄρα τι εὑρήσει ἐν αὐτῇ 1 if perhaps he could find anything on it “looking to see if there was any fruit on it” -MRK 11 13 j6cq figs-litotes οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα 1 he found nothing except leaves Mark is using a negative expressions to emphasize that there were only leaves on the tree. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 11 13 vy09 figs-explicit οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα 1 he found nothing except leaves This means that he did not find any figs. Alternate translation: “he did not find any figs at all on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 13 g76z ὁ…καιρὸς 1 the season “the time of year” -MRK 11 14 u3bk figs-apostrophe εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι 1 he said to it, “No one will ever eat fruit from you again.” Jesus speaks to the fig tree and curses it. He speaks to it so that his disciples hear him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) -MRK 11 14 b362 εἶπεν αὐτῇ 1 he said to it “he spoke to the tree” -MRK 11 14 ij5h ἤκουον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples heard it The word **it** refers to Jesus speaking to the fig tree. -MRK 11 15 hj7z ἔρχονται 1 coming “Jesus and his disciples came” -MRK 11 15 md5l figs-explicit ἤρξατο ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 he began to cast out those selling and those buying in the temple Jesus is forcing these people out of **the temple**. This can be written clearly. Alternate translation: “he began to drive the sellers and buyers out of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 15 s4m2 τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας 1 those selling and those buying “the people who were buying and selling” -MRK 11 17 ve56 0 General Information: God had said earlier in his word, through the prophet Isaiah, that his temple would be a house of prayer for all the nations. -MRK 11 17 xrz2 figs-rquestion οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? 1 Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’? Jesus is rebuking the Jewish leaders for their misuse of the temple. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is written in the scriptures that God said, ‘I want my house to be called a house where people from all nations may pray.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 11 17 dpt1 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 But you have made it a den of robbers Jesus compares the people to **robbers** and the temple to a robbers’ **den**. Alternate translation: “But you are like robbers who have made my house into a robbers’ den” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 11 17 qc6k σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 a den of robbers “a cave where robbers hide” -MRK 11 18 k6dv ἐζήτουν πῶς 1 they were seeking a way “they were looking for a way” -MRK 11 19 h4hg ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο 1 when evening came “in the evening” -MRK 11 19 y7la ἐξεπορεύοντο ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 they were departing from the city “Jesus and his disciples left the city” -MRK 11 20 m27r 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus uses the example of the fig tree to remind the disciples to have faith in God. -MRK 11 20 b56h παραπορευόμενοι 1 passing by “walking along the road” -MRK 11 20 s8ki figs-explicit τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν 1 the fig tree had been withered from its roots Translate this statement to clarify that the **tree** died. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered away down to its roots and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 20 a83v ἐξηραμμένην 1 had been withered “had dried up” -MRK 11 21 jt3h figs-explicit ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος 1 having remembered, Peter It may be helpful to state what **Peter** **remembered**. Alternate translation: “Peter, remembering what Jesus had said to the fig tree,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 22 ry5v ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 answering, Jesus says to them “Jesus replied to his disciples” -MRK 11 23 sy61 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MRK 11 23 c3cj ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ 1 whoever might say “if anyone says” -MRK 11 23 y76p figs-metonymy μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ 1 may not doubt in his heart, but may believe Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his heart” or “if he does not doubt but believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 11 23 fzp5 ἔσται αὐτῷ 1 it will be for him “God will make it happen” -MRK 11 24 pn9x grammar-connect-words-phrases διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Because of this, I say to you “So I tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -MRK 11 24 tu5z figs-explicit ἔσται ὑμῖν 1 it will be yours It is understood that this will happen because God will provide what you ask for. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 25 m7xi ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι 1 when you stand praying It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Alternate translation: “when you pray” -MRK 11 25 f6ex εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος 1 if you have something against anyone “whatever grudge you have against anyone.” Here the word **something** refers to any grudge you hold **against** someone for sinning against you or any anger you have against someone. -MRK 11 27 n3ei 0 Connecting Statement: The next day when Jesus returns to temple, he gives the chief priests, scribes, and elders an answer to their question about his casting the money changers out of the temple area, by asking them another question, which they were not willing to answer. -MRK 11 27 s2ac ἔρχονται…εἰς 1 they come to “Jesus and his disciples came to” -MRK 11 27 alh5 ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 as he is walking around in the temple This means that Jesus was walking around inside of the temple courtyard; he was not walking into the temple. -MRK 11 28 r3ik ἔλεγον αὐτῷ 1 they were saying to him The word **they** refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. +MRK 11 9 d8se translate-transliterate ὡσαννά 1 Hosanna The word **Hosanna** is a Hebrew word. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. **Hosanna** had an original meaning of “save now” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell **Hosanna** the way it sounds in your language or you can translate it according to how it was used, as the UST does. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 11 9 ye41 figs-activepassive εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 those following The word **Blessed** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “God” is the one doing the blessing. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 9 suib εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 The phrase **Blessed is the one** could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “May God bless the one who comes in his name” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “God has blessed the one who comes in his name” +MRK 11 9 x1bz figs-explicit εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Blessed is the one who comes Here, the phrase **the one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one who comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 9 e2p6 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord Here, the phrase **in the name of** is used figuratively for authority. The phrase **in the name of the Lord** means the “with the authority of the Lord.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or express this with plain language. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” or “with the Lord’s authority” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 11 10 kkfo figs-activepassive εὐλογημένη 1 Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David The word **Blessed** is passive in form. See how you translated this word in [11:9](../11/09.md). Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 10 a6b4 εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David The phrase **Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David** could be: (1) an exclamation proclaiming that the future messianic kingdom promised to a descendant of David is blessed by God. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) a prayer expressing the desire that God would bless the coming messianic kingdom. Alternate translation: “May God bless the coming kingdom of our father David” +MRK 11 10 yuap figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Here, the term **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **father** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “of our ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 11 10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 Hosanna in the highest See how you translated the word **Hosanna** in [11:9](../11/09.md). The phrase ** Hosanna in the highest** could be (1) an exclamation of praise to God. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) a prayer to God for salvation from Israel’s enemies. Alternate translation: “Please save us now God in the highest” +MRK 11 10 vqm2 figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 the highest The phrase ** in the highest** is a figurative way or referring to heaven where God dwells. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state this explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 11 h2du figs-synecdoche ἱερόν 1 Since only priests could enter the temple building, here the word **temple** means the temple courtyard. Mark is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 11 11 t5nv figs-go ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν 1 he went out to Bethany with the Twelve Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came to Bethany” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 11 rvd7 figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 11 12 zr8n figs-go ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας 1 when they had returned from Bethany Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when they had went out from Bethany” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 13 y447 figs-go ἦλθεν 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]] +MRK 11 13 yg5n figs-go ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν 1 if perhaps he could find anything on it Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having went to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 13 j6cq figs-litotes οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα 1 he found nothing except leaves Mark is using a negative expressions to emphasize that there were only leaves on the tree. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +MRK 11 13 g76z ὁ…καιρὸς οὐκ ἦν σύκων 1 the season Alternate translation: “it was not the time of year for figs” +MRK 11 14 u3bk figs-apostrophe εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι 1 he said to it, “No one will ever eat fruit from you again.” Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the fig tree, in order to teach his listeners something. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about the fig tree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +MRK 11 14 b362 figs-explicit εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 he said to it The phrase **to eternity** is a Jewish expression which means “forever.” In this context it specifically means “ever again.” Mark assumed his readers would be familiar with this expression. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning of the expression **to eternity** explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 14 ij5h figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι…ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι 1 his disciples heard it The phrase **no one will any longer** is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MRK 11 15 hj7z figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 coming Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +MRK 11 15 c2wl figs-synecdoche ἱερὸν 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 11 15 hoym ἐκβάλλειν 1 Alternate translation: “to throw out” or “to force out” or “to drive out” +MRK 11 15 s4m2 τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας 1 those selling and those buying Alternate translation: “the people who were buying and selling” +MRK 11 15 ve56 figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 General Information: See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 11 16 ohxg figs-synecdoche ἱεροῦ 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 11 17 xrz2 figs-rquestion οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? 1 Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’? **Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple as recorded in the Old Testament scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have payed closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 11 17 dxwe figs-quotesinquotes οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that ‘his temple will be a place of prayer for all nations,’ but you have made it ‘a den of robbers’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 17 t9x9 figs-activepassive οὐ γέγραπται 1 If your readers would misunderstand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 17 qeix figs-metaphor οἶκός μου 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to his temple as his **house**, because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 11 17 t1ho figs-metaphor οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to a place where people would pray as a **house**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 11 17 npdf figs-activepassive οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται 1 The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is people who are calling God’s temple a house of prayer. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 17 qvxz figs-abstractnouns προσευχῆς…πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 17 dpt1 figs-metaphor σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 But you have made it a den of robbers God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers figuratively to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s den or lair. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 11 18 k6dv ἐζήτουν πῶς 1 they were seeking a way Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way” +MRK 11 19 h4hg ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο 1 when evening came Alternate translation: “in the evening” +MRK 11 20 s8ki figs-explicit τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν 1 the fig tree had been withered from its roots The phrase **the fig tree had been withered from the roots** means that the **fig tree** had shriveled and dried up and was dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered down to its roots and died” or “the fig tree was dried and shriveled down to its roots and had completely died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 20 a83v figs-activepassive ἐξηραμμένην 1 had been withered The phrase **had been withered** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered” or “had dried up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 21 jt3h figs-activepassive ἀναμνησθεὶς 1 having remembered, Peter The phrase **having been reminded** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 21 na1k figs-activepassive ἐξήρανται 1 The phrase **has been withered away** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was withered away” or “has dried up” or “has died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 22 ry5v figs-yousingular ἔχετε πίστιν 1 answering, Jesus says to them In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **have faith** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 22 x8k7 figs-abstractnouns ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “Trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 23 sy61 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus uses the phrase **Truly I say to you** to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true” +MRK 11 23 mred figs-hyperbole ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 Jesus is using hyperbole to teach. He is using an extreme example to emphasize to his disciples the point that God can do anything in response to believing prayer. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “for example, that whoever might ask God and say, ‘God please take up this mountain and cast it into the sea,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 11 23 a01g figs-metaphor ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 Here, Jesus uses **mountain** figuratively to represent anything that would seem difficult or impossible to do. If your readers would not understand Jesus’ figurative use of **mountain** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to do it” or “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to accomplish it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 11 23 dwsf figs-imperative ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 This would not be a command that the mountain would be capable of obeying. Instead, it would be a command that directly caused the mountain to be taken up and cast into the sea by the power of God. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +MRK 11 23 c3cj figs-extrainfo ὄρει τούτῳ 1 whoever might say Here, the phrase **this mountain** refers to the Mount of Olives which was mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 11 23 k3z4 figs-activepassive ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 The phrases **Be taken up** and **be cast* are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “God” is the one doing it. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and cast you into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 23 y76p figs-metonymy μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ 1 may not doubt in his heart, but may believe In the expression **doubt in his heart** the word **heart** figuratively represents a person’s mind or inner being. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “if he does not doubt but believes” or “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 11 23 doeg figs-doublenegatives μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ 1 The phrase **not doubt** is a double negative. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MRK 11 23 fzp5 ἔσται αὐτῷ 1 it will be for him Alternate translation: “God will make it happen” +MRK 11 24 pn9x διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Because of this, I say to you Alternate translation: “For this reason, I say to you” +MRK 11 24 c61c figs-yousingular ὑμῖν…προσεύχεσθε…ἐλάβετε…ὑμῖν 1 In this verse, all four occurrences of the word **you** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 24 abke figs-yousingular πιστεύετε 1 In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the word **believe** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 24 tu5z figs-explicit ἔσται ὑμῖν 1 it will be yours In the phrase **it will be to you** the implication is that God will provide what is asked for. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 25 m2aw figs-yousingular στήκετε…ἔχετε…ὑμῶν…ὑμῖν…ὑμῶν 1 In this verse every occurrence of the word **you** and **your** is plural and applies to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 25 m7xi figs-explicitinfo ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι 1 when you stand praying It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If this would be misunderstood in your culture you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “when you are praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) +MRK 11 25 ttxg figs-yousingular ἀφίετε 1 In this verse, the first occurrence of the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 25 swa3 figs-yousingular ἀφίετε 1 In the original language that the author of Mark wrote this Gospel in, the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 25 f6ex figs-explicit εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος 1 if you have something against anyone Here, **have something against anyone** refers to any anger, unforgiveness, or grudge a person holds **against** against another person for offending or sinning against them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 25 jjs9 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says **forgive, if you have something against anyone** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +MRK 11 25 omze figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 27 alh5 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 as he is walking around in the temple The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard; he was not walking in the temple since only priests were allowed in inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 11 28 se9b figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς? 1 By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them? This could mean: (1) both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) these are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MRK 11 28 p5u3 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things The words **these things** refer to Jesus turning over the sellers’ tables in the temple and speaking against what the chief priests and scribes taught. Alternate translation: “things like those you did here yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 The baptism of John “The baptism that John performed” -MRK 11 30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 was it from heaven or from men “was it authorized by heaven or by men” -MRK 11 30 sh7b figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven Here, **heaven** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 11 30 i5is ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 from men “from people” -MRK 11 31 s9vv figs-ellipsis ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 If we would say, ‘From heaven,’ This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “If we say, ‘It was from heaven,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 11 31 nu1m figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 From heaven Here, **heaven** refers to God. See how you translated this in [Mark 11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 11 31 t9er οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 did you not believe him The word **him** refers to John the Baptist. -MRK 11 32 aus1 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’ This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘It was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 11 32 v2gs ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 From men “From people” -MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… The religious leaders imply that they will suffer from the people if they give this answer. Alternate translation: “But we do not want to say that it was from men or the crowd may attack us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 32 z93u figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understood what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 11 32 z998 figs-explicit ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον 1 They were afraid of the crowd The author, Mark, explains why the religious leaders did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men. You can state this clearly. “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the people” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 11 33 us4a figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 We do not know This refers to the baptism of John. This understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hypothetical Situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -MRK 12 1 w2hb figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus speaks this parable against the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MRK 12 1 qa93 καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν 1 Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables The word **them** here refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders to whom Jesus had been talking in the previous chapter. -MRK 12 1 qap8 περιέθηκεν φραγμὸν 1 put a hedge around it He put a barrier around the vineyard. It could have been a row of shrubs, a fence, or a stone wall. -MRK 12 1 ns9e figs-explicit ὤρυξεν ὑπολήνιον 1 dug a pit for a winepress This means that he carved a pit on the rock, which would be the bottom part of the winepress used for collecting the squeezed grape juice. Alternate translation: “carved a pit into rock for the winepress” or “he made a vat to collect the juice from the winepress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 1 l2i2 ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς 1 leased the vineyard to vine growers The owner still owned the vineyard, but he allowed the vine growers to take care of it. When the grapes became ripe, they were to give some of them to the owner and keep the rest. -MRK 12 2 s83v figs-explicit τῷ καιρῷ 1 at the season This refers to the time of harvest. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when the time came to harvest the grapes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 3 vz7k καὶ λαβόντες αὐτὸν 1 But having seized him “But after the vine growers grabbed the slave” -MRK 12 3 c321 figs-explicit κενόν 1 with nothing This means that they did not give him any of the fruit. Alternate translation: “without any grapes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 4 f3f4 ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς 1 he sent to them “the owner of the vineyard sent to the vine growers” -MRK 12 4 w1ge figs-explicit κἀκεῖνον ἐκεφαλίωσαν 1 and that one, they wounded in the head This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “and they beat that one on the head, and they hurt him terribly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 5 l1yw figs-ellipsis ἄλλον…κἀκεῖνον ἀπέκτειναν; καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους 1 another, and that one they killed, and many others These phrases refer to other slaves. Alternate translation: “yet another slave, and they killed him, and many other slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 6 z5hz figs-explicit υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 a beloved son It is implied that this is the owner’s **son**. Alternate translation: “his beloved son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 7 m63e figs-explicit ὁ κληρονόμος 1 the heir This is the owner’s **heir**, who would inherit the vineyard after his father died. Alternate translation: “the owner’s heir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 7 s5dc figs-synecdoche ἡ κληρονομία 1 the inheritance The tenants are referring to the vineyard as **the inheritance**. Alternate translation: “this vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 12 8 gx6l λαβόντες 1 having seized him “after the vine growers seized the son” -MRK 12 9 r4md figs-rquestion τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος? 1 Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do? Jesus asks a question and then gives the answer to teach the people. The question may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 9 rde6 grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 Therefore Jesus has finished telling the parable and is now asking the people what they think will happen next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -MRK 12 9 g4ce ἀπολέσει 1 destroy kill -MRK 12 9 mc5y figs-explicit δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις 1 will give the vineyard to others The word **others** refers to other vine growers who will care for the vineyard. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other vine growers to care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 10 v6ta 0 General Information: This scripture was written long before in God’s word. -MRK 12 10 xj9j figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: 1 And have you not read this scripture? Jesus reminds the people of a **scripture** passage. He uses a rhetorical question here to rebuke them. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture.” or “And you should remember this scripture.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 10 jpa3 ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 has become the head of the corner You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord made into the cornerstone” -MRK 12 11 r8z8 παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη 1 This came from the Lord “The Lord has done this” -MRK 12 11 k5w6 figs-metaphor ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 it is marvelous in our eyes Here, **in our eyes** stands for seeing, which is a metaphor for the people’s opinion. Alternate translation: “we have seen it and think that it is marvelous” or “we think that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 12 b1vz ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι 1 they were seeking to seize him Here, **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders. This group may be referred to as “the Jewish leaders.” -MRK 12 12 sl74 ἐζήτουν 1 they were seeking “they wanted” -MRK 12 12 lx62 figs-explicit καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 but they feared the crowd They were afraid of what **the crowd** would do to them if they arrested Jesus. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but they feared what the crowd would do if they arrested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 12 v9wb πρὸς αὐτοὺς 1 against them “to accuse them” -MRK 12 13 s1hb 0 Connecting Statement: In an effort to trap Jesus, some of the Pharisees and Herodians, and then the Sadducees, come to Jesus with questions. -MRK 12 13 z2sf καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν 1 And they send “Then the Jewish leaders sent” -MRK 12 13 pj3c τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 the Herodians This was the name of an informal political party that supported Herod Antipas. -MRK 12 13 kuy5 figs-metaphor ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν 1 in order to trap him Here the author describes tricking Jesus as “trapping him.” Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 14 dh3d λέγουσιν 1 they say Here, **they** refers to those sent from among the Pharisees and the Herodians. -MRK 12 14 cp3x figs-litotes οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός 1 it is not a concern to you about anyone The negation can modify the verb. Alternate translation: “you do not care about people’s opinions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 12 14 xptc figs-idiom οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός 1 it is not a concern to you about anyone This is an idiom that means that Jesus does not show favoritism. Alternate translation: “you are not concerned with earning people’s favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 12 15 g48w figs-explicit ὁ…εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν 1 he, knowing their hypocrisy They were acting hypocritically. This can be explained more clearly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, knowing that they did not really want to know what God wanted them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 15 c7nj figs-rquestion τί με πειράζετε? 1 Why do you test me? Jesus rebukes the Jewish leaders because they were trying to trick him. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 15 wl34 translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 a denarius This coin was worth a day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -MRK 12 16 ev6s οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν 1 And they brought one “So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius” -MRK 12 16 wd1n ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή 1 is this likeness and inscription “is this picture and name” -MRK 12 16 gi96 figs-ellipsis οἱ…εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Καίσαρος 2 they said to him, “Caesar’s.” Here, **Caesar’s** refers to his likeness and inscription. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 17 fl4l figs-metonymy τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι 1 The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar Jesus is teaching that his people must respect the government by paying taxes. This figure of speech can be clarified by changing **Caesar** to Roman government. Alternate translation: “Give to the Roman government the things that belong to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 12 17 la16 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 and the things of God, to God The understood verb may be supplied. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 17 pw4r figs-explicit ἐξεθαύμαζον ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 they were marveling at him They were amazed at what Jesus had said. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they marveled at him and at what he had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 18 rdl7 figs-explicit οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 who say there is no resurrection This phrase explains who the Sadducees were. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “who say there is no resurrection from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 19 e8x2 figs-quotations Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ 1 Moses wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother may die The Sadducees are quoting what **Moses** had written in the law. Moses’ quote can be expressed as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote for us that if a man’s brother dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 12 19 m8fh ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 wrote to us “wrote to us Jews.” The Sadducees were a group of Jews. Here they use the word **us** to refer to themselves and all Jews. -MRK 12 19 g49e λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα 1 his brother should take the wife “the man should marry his brother’s wife” -MRK 12 19 m2um figs-explicit ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 1 should raise up offspring to his brother “have a son for his brother.” The man’s first son would be considered to be the dead brother’s son, and the son’s descendants would be considered to be the dead brother’s descendants. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “should have a son who will be considered to be the dead brother’s son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 20 wz27 figs-hypo ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν 1 There were seven brothers The Sadducees talk about a situation that did not really happen because they want Jesus to tell them what he thinks is right and wrong. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -MRK 12 20 pj71 ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first the first brother -MRK 12 20 af1t ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα 1 the first took a wife “the first married a woman.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her. -MRK 12 21 d61g figs-ellipsis ὁ δεύτερος…ὁ τρίτος 1 the second … the third These numbers refer to each of the brothers and can be expressed as such. Alternate translation: “the second brother … the third brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 21 na6s ὁ δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτήν 1 the second took her “the second married her.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her. -MRK 12 21 l1ds figs-explicit ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως 1 the third likewise It may be helpful to explain what **likewise** means. Alternate translation: “the third brother married her as his other bothers did, and he also died leaving no children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 22 wjq8 figs-ellipsis οἱ ἑπτὰ 1 the seven This refers to all the brothers. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 22 l3dg figs-explicit οἱ ἑπτὰ οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα 1 the seven did not leave offspring Each of the brothers married the woman and then died before he had any children with her. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “eventually all seven brothers married that woman one by one, but none of them had any children with her, and one by one they died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 23 w4wu figs-rquestion ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν ἀναστῶσιν, τίνος αὐτῶν ἔσται γυνή 1 In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife? The Sadducees are testing Jesus by asking this question. If your readers can only understand this as a request for information, this can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Now tell us whose wife she will be in the resurrection, when they all rise again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 24 zp2p figs-rquestion οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God? Jesus rebukes the Sadducees because they are mistaken about God’s law. This may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are mistaken because you do not know the scriptures nor the power of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 24 li2y μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς 1 not knowing the scriptures This means that they do not understand what is written in the Old Testament **scriptures**. -MRK 12 24 i8il τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the power of God “how powerful God is” -MRK 12 25 nvh6 ὅταν γὰρ…ἀναστῶσιν 1 For when they may rise Here the word **they** refers to the brothers and the woman from the example. -MRK 12 25 y8vz figs-metaphor ἀναστῶσιν 1 they may rise Waking and getting up from sleep is a metaphor for becoming alive after having been dead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 25 vh7r ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again. -MRK 12 25 p5ak οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 they neither marry nor are given in marriage “they do not marry, and they are not given in marriage” -MRK 12 25 h7ii figs-activepassive γαμίζονται 1 are given in marriage You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and no one gives them in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 12 25 pi8l τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 the heavens This refers to the place where God lives. -MRK 12 26 z36n figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐγείρονται 1 that are raised This can be expressed with an active verb. Alternate translation: “who rise” or “who rise to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 12 26 jc5a τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως 1 the book of Moses “the book that Moses wrote” -MRK 12 26 w2lj figs-explicit τοῦ βάτου 1 the bush This refers to the part of the Book of Moses that tells about when God spoke to Moses out of a **bush** that was burning but that did not burn up. Alternate translation: “the passage about the burning bush” or “the words about the fiery bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 26 si2b τοῦ βάτου 1 the bush This refers to a shrub, a woody plant that is smaller than a tree. -MRK 12 26 y35v πῶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς 1 how God spoke to him “about when God spoke to Moses” -MRK 12 26 re82 ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ 1 I am the God of Abraham and the God of Isaac and the God of Jacob This means that **Abraham**, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** worship **God**. These men have died physically, but they are still alive spiritually and still worship God. -MRK 12 27 dgc9 figs-nominaladj Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων 1 the God of the dead, but of the living Here, **the dead** refers to people who are dead, and **the living** refers to people who are alive. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 12 27 v7ui figs-ellipsis Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων 1 the God of the dead, but of the living You can state **the God** clearly in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but the God of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 27 l22e ζώντων 1 of the living This includes people who are alive physically and spiritually. -MRK 12 27 wmz2 figs-explicit πολὺ πλανᾶσθε 1 You are quite being led astray It may be helpful to state what they are lead astray about. Alternate translation: “When you say that dead people do not rise again, you are quite mistaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 27 sp7x πολὺ πλανᾶσθε 1 You are quite being led astray “You are completely mistaken” or “You are very wrong” -MRK 12 28 q1u5 ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν 1 he asked him “the scribe asked Jesus” -MRK 12 29 n74y figs-nominaladj πρώτη ἐστίν 1 The first is Here, **The first** refers to the most important commandment. Alternate translation: “The most important commandment is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 12 29 mq92 ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν 1 Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one “Listen, O Israel! The Lord our God is one Lord” -MRK 12 30 xjng figs-doublet ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου 1 from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength These four phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 12 30 q49v figs-metonymy ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου 1 from your whole heart, and from your whole soul Here, **heart** and “soul” are metonyms for a person’s inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 12 31 tp6p figs-simile ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself Jesus uses this simile to compare how people are to love each other with the same love as they love themselves. Alternate translation: “You must love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MRK 12 31 pyc1 τούτων 1 than these Here the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus had just told the people. -MRK 12 32 qqm4 καλῶς, Διδάσκαλε 1 Good, Teacher “Good answer, Teacher” or “Well said, Teacher” -MRK 12 32 awe3 figs-idiom εἷς ἐστιν 1 he is one This means that there is only **one** God. Alternate translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 12 32 as2j figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος 1 that there is no other The word “God” is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “that there is no other God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 33 xnq9 figs-doublet ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 1 from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength These three phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 12 33 k42a figs-metonymy ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας 1 from your whole heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for person’s thoughts, feelings, or inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 12 33 tw15 figs-simile τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν 1 to love your neighbor as yourself This simile compares how people are **to love** each other with the same love that they love themselves. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MRK 12 33 ll9t figs-idiom περισσότερόν ἐστιν 1 is even more than This idiom means that something is more important than something else. In this case, these two commandments are more pleasing to God that burnt offering and sacrifices. This may be written clearly. Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is even more pleasing to God than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 12 34 b144 figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You are not far from the kingdom of God You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 12 34 is4c figs-metaphor οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You are not far from the kingdom of God Here Jesus speaks of the man being ready to submit to God as king as being physically close to **the kingdom of God**, as if it where a physical place. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 34 rgh8 figs-litotes οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα 1 no one any longer was daring You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -MRK 12 35 ptc8 figs-explicit ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἔλεγεν διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 answering, Jesus, teaching in the temple, said Some time has passed and Jesus is now in the temple. This is not part of the previous conversation. Alternate translation: “And later, while Jesus was teaching in the temple area, he said to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 35 q6e4 figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? 1 How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David? Jesus uses this question to get the people to think deeply about the Psalm he is about to quote. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Consider why the scribes say the Christ is the son of David.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 35 i6a4 υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the son of David “a descendant of David” -MRK 12 36 e1zq figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 David himself This word **himself** refers to **David** and is used to place emphasis on him and what he said. Alternate translation: “It was David who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -MRK 12 36 ejy2 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ 1 in the Holy Spirit This means that he was inspired by **the Holy Spirit**. That is, the Holy Spirit directed David in what he said. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 12 36 dv7b figs-explicit εἶπεν…εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord Here David calls God **The Lord** and calls the Christ **my Lord**. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “said about the Christ, ‘The Lord God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 36 v53p translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right hand Jesus is quoting a psalm. Here God is speaking to the Christ. To sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MRK 12 36 mml8 figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I may place your enemies under your feet In this quote, God speaks of defeating enemies as placing them under his feet. Alternate translation: “until I completely defeat your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 37 ka5u λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον 1 calls him ‘Lord,’ Here the word **him** refers to the Christ. -MRK 12 37 rh2t figs-rquestion καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 and how is he his son? This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “so consider how the Christ can be a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 12 38 z649 figs-abstractnouns ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς 1 greetings in the marketplaces The noun **greetings** can be expressed with the verb “greet.” Alternate translation: “for people to greet them in the marketplaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 12 38 k31m figs-explicit ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς 1 greetings in the marketplaces These greetings showed that the people respected the scribes. Alternate translation: “to be greeted respectfully in the marketplaces” or “for people to greet them respectfully in the marketplaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 40 jtw4 figs-metaphor οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of the widows Here Jesus describes the scribes’ cheating of **widows** and stealing of their **houses** as “devouring” their houses. Alternate translation: “They also cheat widows in order to steal their houses from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 40 j27b figs-synecdoche τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 the houses of the widows The words **widows** and **houses** are synecdoches for helpless people and all of a person’s important possessions, respectively. Alternate translation: “everything from helpless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 12 40 qm52 figs-activepassive οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish them with greater condemnation” or “God will certainly punish them severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 12 40 h36x figs-explicit λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 will receive greater condemnation The word **greater** implies a comparison. Here the comparison is to other men who are punished. Alternate translation: “will receive greater condemnation than other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 12 41 r69x 0 Connecting Statement: Still in the temple area, Jesus comments on the value of the widow’s offering. -MRK 12 41 p2kp τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου 1 the temple offering box This **box**, which everyone could use, was the place into which people gave offerings to the **temple**. -MRK 12 42 g6ry translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο 1 two mites “two small copper coins.” These were the least valuable coins available. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -MRK 12 42 n29e ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 are a quadrans “are worth very little.” A **quadrans** is worth very little. Translate **quadrans** with the name of the smallest coin in your language if you have one that is worth very little. +MRK 11 28 ooxp figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ…ἐξουσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 29 erqp figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 11 29 aak2 ἕνα λόγον 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question” +MRK 11 30 vpgv τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. However, this is not a rhetorical question that could be translated as a statement, for example, “Surely you must admit that God, not people, gave John the authority to baptize.” This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer, because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?” +MRK 11 30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 The baptism of John Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed” +MRK 11 30 sh7b figs-euphemism ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. That seems to be what Jesus is doing here. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 11 30 i5is figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 from men Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 11 30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 was it from heaven or from men Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men” +MRK 11 30 mc8n figs-yousingular ἀποκρίθητέ μοι 1 In the original language that Mark wrote this book in the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 11 31 s9vv grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If we would say, ‘From heaven,’ The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MRK 11 31 e7j4 figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 31 nu1m figs-euphemism ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 From heaven See how you translated the expression **From heaven** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 11 32 tczm grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MRK 11 32 aus1 figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’ The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would help your readers you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 32 v2gs figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 From men See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 32 z93u figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what will happen if they say John’s baptism is not from God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 11 32 z998 grammar-connect-time-background ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν 1 They were afraid of the crowd The author of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +MRK 11 32 dqlt grammar-collectivenouns ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +MRK 11 32 x4bo grammar-collectivenouns ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον 1 Here, the word **all** refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 11 33 rmbd grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 11 33 us4a figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 We do not know The reply **We do not know** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” or “We do not know where John’s authority to baptize came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 11 33 av5y grammar-connect-logic-result οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 With the words **Neither do I say to you**, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 11 33 arpm figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized” or express the meaning some other way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hypothetical Situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])


## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35-37, Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” +MRK 12 1 w2hb figs-parables καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand what the Jewish leaders were doing by rejecting him and John the Baptist, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the people stories to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MRK 12 1 qa93 writing-participants ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν 1 Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables Jesus uses the phrase **A man planted a vineyard** to introduce the main character into the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character into a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +MRK 12 1 l2i2 translate-unknown ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς 1 leased the vineyard to vine growers As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 12 1 fd71 γεωργοῖς 1 While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers” +MRK 12 2 s83v figs-explicit τῷ καιρῷ 1 at the season This refers to the time of harvest. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 2 su2e γεωργοὺς…γεωργῶν 1 See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). +MRK 12 2 oxoo figs-metaphor καρπῶν 1 The word **fruit** could be: (1) intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 3 c321 figs-metaphor ἀπέστειλαν κενόν 1 with nothing Jesus speaks figuratively of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Here, the word **empty** means that they did not give him any of the fruit. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 4 jhi3 καὶ ἠτίμασαν 1 Alternate translation: “and humiliated” +MRK 12 6 z5hz figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου 1 a beloved son If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “thinking that they would respect his son” or “thinking to himself that the farmers would respect his son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 7 m63e figs-explicit ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία 1 the heir It may be helpful to state explicitly that this happened after the owner sent his son and he arrived as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 7 kefz γεωργοὶ 1 See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). +MRK 12 7 s5dc figs-metonymy ἡ κληρονομία 1 the inheritance By inheritance, the farmers mean the vineyard, which the son would inherit. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he is going to inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 8 gx6l grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 having seized him Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. The farmers carried out the plan they had decided on. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 12 9 r4md figs-rquestion τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος? 1 Therefore, what will the lord of the vineyard do? Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 9 tlji γεωργούς 1 See how you translated **farmers** in [12:1](../12/01.md). +MRK 12 9 g4ce translate-unknown δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις 1 destroy See how you translated the similar expression in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “allow different grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 12 9 mc5y figs-explicit δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις 1 will give the vineyard to others The word **others** refers to other vine growers who will care for the vineyard. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other farmers to care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 10 v6ta figs-quotesinquotes οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 General Information: If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read the Scripture that says that the stone which the builders rejected became the cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 10 xj9j figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: 1 And have you not read this scripture? Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture” or “And you should remember this scripture” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 10 mzr2 figs-metaphor λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This is a quotation from Psalm 118, and it is a metaphor. It refers to the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 10 kv7t figs-explicit λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 10 l5ma figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The phrase the **head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 12 11 r8z8 figs-quotesinquotes παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 This came from the Lord This entire verse is a continuation of Jesus’ quotation from Psalm 118. If you chose not to translate [12:10](../12/10.md) as a quotation within a quotation then you should do the same with this verse. Alternate translation: “and which says that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled as they looked at it” or “and that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled when they saw what the Lord had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 11 k5w6 figs-metonymy ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 it is marvelous in our eyes **in our eyes** is a figurative way of referring to the act of seeing. Here, the act of seeing could be referring to “thinking” about or “considering” what is seen. Alternate translation: “we have seen it and think that it is marvelous” or “we think that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 12 b1vz writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν 1 they were seeking to seize him Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 12 12 lx62 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 but they feared the crowd Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. The religious leaders fear of the crowd is why they **left** Jesus and **went away**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “but because they were afraid of the crowd they did not” or “but they did not because they feared the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +MRK 12 12 v9wb figs-infostructure καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον 1 against them If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to show the logical sequence of events. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +MRK 12 12 v5wv grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 Here, Mark uses the word **but** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and this reason why they were not able to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however they were afraid of what the people might do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MRK 12 13 z2sf writing-pronouns καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν 1 And they send Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would help your readers, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 12 13 pj3c figs-explicit τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 the Herodians **the Herodians** supported the Roman Empire and Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 13 kuy5 figs-metaphor ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν 1 in order to trap him Here, Mark describes tricking Jesus as “trapping him.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be trapped in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 13 s1hb figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Mark uses the term **word** figuratively to mean something Jesus might say by using words. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in something he might say” or “with something he might say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 14 dh3d figs-synecdoche λέγουσιν 1 they say Mark could mean that one person spoke to Jesus on behalf of the whole group. So instead of **they**, you could say “one of them,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 12 14 xhl6 Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 12 14 awv5 figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 The spies are speaking only of themselves, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 12 14 cp3x οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός 1 it is not a concern to you about anyone Alternate translation: “you do not try to earn people’s favor but rather fearlessly teach the truth without worrying about people’s opinion” +MRK 12 14 xptc figs-idiom οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 1 it is not a concern to you about anyone The phrase **not look at the face of men** is a Hebrew expression that means to not give attention to people’s outward appearances. Outward appearance in this context refers to social position and whether or not a person was wealthy or influential or had a high religious position. This phrase taken as a whole here means that Jesus was impartial in his judgement and teaching and did not show favoritism. Alternate translation: “for you pay no attention to external things when you speak” or “for you do not regard people’s position or status when you teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 12 14 qvpo figs-metonymy πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 1 The Jewish leaders are using the term **face** figuratively to mean “external status and position.” Alternate translation: “the status and position of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 14 brm3 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 12 14 yfnc figs-metaphor ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The Jewish leaders speak figuratively of how God wants people to live as if it were a **way** or path that people should follow. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 14 ap2q figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “truthfully”, or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 14 k0tw figs-explicit ἔξεστιν 1 The Jewish leaders are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 14 gtsk figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 The Jewish leaders are referring figuratively to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 15 g48w figs-abstractnouns ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, εἶπεν 1 he, knowing their hypocrisy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But Jesus knew that they were not being sincere, so he said” or “But Jesus realized that they were trying to trick him, and so he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 15 c7nj figs-rquestion τί με πειράζετε 1 Why do you test me? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 15 wl34 translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 a denarius A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +MRK 12 16 ev6s οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν 1 And they brought one Alternate translation: “So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius” +MRK 12 16 gi96 figs-explicit Καίσαρος 1 they said to him, “Caesar’s.” Here, **Caesar’s** refers to Caesar’s likeness and inscription. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 17 fl4l figs-metonymy τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι 1 The things of Caesar, give back to Caesar See how you translated **Caesar** in [12:14](../12/14.md). Alternate translation: “Give to the Roman government the things that belong to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 17 la16 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 and the things of God, to God Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 18 edcn writing-background οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 Mark provides this background information about the Sadducees to help readers understand what happens in this episode. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who are a sect who deny the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 12 18 y8yo writing-participants καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 Mark uses the statement **Sadducees … come to him** to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is not resurrection, then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +MRK 12 18 ss09 figs-distinguish Σαδδουκαῖοι…οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +MRK 12 18 rdl7 figs-explicit οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 who say there is no resurrection The word **resurrection** refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 18 ax25 figs-synecdoche λέγοντες 1 Mark could mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group, and you could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 12 19 w3ev Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 12 19 e8x2 figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ 1 Moses wrote to us, ‘If someone’s brother may die These Sadducees are figuratively describing Moses giving this instruction in the law by association with the way that he wrote it down. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 19 m8fh figs-exclusive ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 wrote to us Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +MRK 12 19 kgws figs-hypo ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον 1 Alternate translation: “if a man’s brother dies who is married but who does not have children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +MRK 12 19 g49e ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα 1 his brother should take the wife Alternate translation: “that man should marry his dead brother’s widow” or “that the man should marry his brother’s wife” +MRK 12 19 m2um figs-metaphor καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 1 should raise up offspring to his brother The Sadducees assume that Jesus will know that this law specified that if the widow had children by her dead husband’s brother, those children would be considered the children of her dead husband. Alternate translation: “and have children who will be considered his brother’s descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 19 r0tg figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 The term **seed** figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 20 wz27 figs-hypo ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἀποθνῄσκων, οὐκ ἀφῆκεν σπέρμα 1 There were seven brothers While the Sadducees describe this as if it happened, they are actually asking about a hypothetical possibility in order to test Jesus. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers, and the oldest brother got married, but he died before he had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +MRK 12 20 pj71 figs-nominaladj ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 20 pj2g translate-ordinal ὁ πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 12 20 af1t figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 the first took a wife See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 21 uef6 figs-hypo καὶ 1 The Sadducees are continuing to describe a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +MRK 12 21 d61g figs-nominaladj ὁ δεύτερος 1 the second … the third Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 21 na6s translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος 1 the second took her If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 12 21 cgzm figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 21 tbzw figs-explicit καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως 1 The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow, but also died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 21 l1ds figs-nominaladj ὁ τρίτος 1 the third likewise Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 21 hx1q translate-ordinal ὁ τρίτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 12 22 wjq8 figs-ellipsis οἱ ἑπτὰ 1 the seven The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 22 l3dg figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 the seven did not leave offspring See how you translated this figurative sense of the word seed in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 23 w4wu ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife? The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead” +MRK 12 23 c4p5 figs-ellipsis οἱ…ἑπτὰ 1 The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 24 zp2p figs-rquestion οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the scriptures nor the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 24 sie3 figs-activepassive οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 12 24 i8il τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the power of God Alternate translation: “how powerful God is” +MRK 12 25 nvh6 writing-pronouns ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 For when they may rise Both uses of the pronoun **they** refer to men and women in general. If it would help your readers, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” or “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 12 25 ox82 figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 25 y8vz figs-activepassive οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 they may rise If your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can say who does the action in the second case. Alternate translation: “men marry wives and parents give their daughters in marriage to husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 12 25 ensg figs-idiom οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 In this culture, the idiom was to say that men married their wives and that women were given in marriage to their husbands by their parents. If your culture does not use different expressions like that, you can use a single term here. Alternate translation: “they do not get married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 12 25 asw4 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not marry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 25 pi8l grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 the heavens What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that they mistakenly thought that men and women being raised from the dead automatically meant that their existence would follow the same pattern or order of things as their former lives did. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MRK 12 26 mffe figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the phrase **the dead** in [12:25](../12/25.md). Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 26 z36n figs-activepassive τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται 1 that are raised If your readers would misunderstand this, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who does the action. Alternate translation: “the matter of God bringing back to life people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 12 26 eod4 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here for emphasis in order to rebuke the Sadducees for not correctly understanding the scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have surely read in the book of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 26 jc5a figs-possession τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως 1 the book of Moses Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the book that Moses wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned this book. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +MRK 12 26 w2lj figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου 1 the bush Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that he means the bush in the desert that was burning without being consumed, at which Moses encountered God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the burning bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 26 si2b figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου 1 the bush Jesus is not referring to the actual encounter that Moses had with God at the burning bush, since during that encounter Moses did not say the words that Jesus attributes to him here. Rather, God said those words about himself, and Moses recorded them in the Scriptures. So Jesus is referring by association to the passage in which Moses describes his encounter with God at the burning bush. Alternate translation: “in the passage where he wrote about the burning bush” or “in the scripture about the burning bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 26 y35v figs-verbs λέγων 1 how God spoke to him In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “he called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) +MRK 12 26 re82 figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ 1 I am the God of Abraham and the God of Isaac and the God of Jacob The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 27 dgc9 figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 the God of the dead, but of the living Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 27 xxzs figs-nominaladj ζώντων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **living** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 27 v7ui figs-activepassive πολὺ πλανᾶσθε 1 the God of the dead, but of the living If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 12 28 zqy4 writing-participants καὶ…εἷς τῶν γραμματέων 1 Mark uses the statement **And one of the scribes** to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the Law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +MRK 12 28 b3yh figs-metonymy ἰδὼν 1 Here, Mark is using the word **seen** figuratively to mean “understood” or “knew.” He is figuratively describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with eyes. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 28 q1u5 figs-metaphor ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 1 he asked him Here, the scribe is using the word **first** figuratively to represent to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 28 kftz translate-ordinal ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 12 29 ztyh figs-metaphor πρώτη 1 Here, Jesus continues the figurative use of the word **first**. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 29 euim figs-ellipsis πρώτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The first commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 29 n74y figs-nominaladj πρώτη 1 The first is If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase **The first** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 29 mq92 figs-personification Ἰσραήλ 1 Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “O Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MRK 12 29 mmtb Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν 1 **the Lord our God, the Lord is one** could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s god for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only god they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special” +MRK 12 30 thj7 figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +MRK 12 30 xjng figs-merism ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου 1 from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring figuratively to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely with your entire person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MRK 12 30 q49v figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 from your whole heart, and from your whole soul Here, the term **heart** figuratively represents a person’s mind and specifically the mind as the center and source of persons thinking and will. Alternate translation: “with all your mind” or “with your whole mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 30 m8hi ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ 1 Alternate translation: “with” +MRK 12 30 x3n5 figs-abstractnoun ψυχῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 30 ln0t figs-abstractnoun διανοίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 30 mii2 figs-abstractnoun ἰσχύος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 31 eu8b figs-ellipsis δευτέρα αὕτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 31 fz8g figs-metaphor δευτέρα 1 Here, Jesus is using the word **second** figuratively to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the figurative use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 31 oegh translate-ordinal δευτέρα 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **second**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 12 31 np4y figs-ellipsis ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 31 tp6p figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +MRK 12 31 pyc1 figs-explicit τούτων 1 than these Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 32 uhgy Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 12 32 qqm4 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 Good, Teacher If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 32 awe3 εἷς ἐστιν 1 he is one See how you translated the phrase **is one** in [12:29](../12/29.md). +MRK 12 32 as2j figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος 1 that there is no other The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context.. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 33 v8yn figs-metaphor καρδίας 1 See how you translated the phrase **whole heart** in [12:30](../12/30.md). Alternate translation: “with all your mind” or “with your whole mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 33 xnq9 figs-abstractnouns συνέσεως 1 from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you could express the same idea in another way as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 33 k42a figs-abstractnouns ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 1 from your whole heart See how you translated the phrase **whole strength** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 33 ekfy figs-ellipsis τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν 1 The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 33 ll9t περισσότερόν ἐστιν 1 is even more than Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is greater than” +MRK 12 34 hkf7 figs-metonymy ἰδὼν αὐτὸν 1 See how you translated the use of the word **seen** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same figurative meaning. Alternate translation: “having understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 34 b144 οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You are not far from the kingdom of God If it would help your readers you can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God” +MRK 12 34 is4c figs-metaphor οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You are not far from the kingdom of God Here, Jesus speaks of the man being ready to submit to God as being physically close to **the kingdom of God**, as if it where a physical place. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 34 lfti figs-abstractnouns Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 12 34 rgh8 figs-doublenegatives οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα 1 no one any longer was daring If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MRK 12 35 ptc8 figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 answering, Jesus, teaching in the temple, said See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MRK 12 35 q6e4 figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? 1 How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David? This does not seem to be a rhetorical question that Jesus is using as a teaching tool. Rather, it seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer. They had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 35 i6a4 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the son of David Here, Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 36 e1zq figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 David himself Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize to that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +MRK 12 36 jlbd figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 36 ejy2 ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ 1 in the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit” +MRK 12 36 dv7b figs-euphemism εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +MRK 12 36 v53p translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right hand The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MRK 12 36 k2j1 figs-nominaladj κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 36 rfy9 translate-symaction ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 To place an enemy under one’s feet is symbolic for conquering an enemy and making them submit and so here it means that Yahweh would make His enemies stop resisting the Messiah and submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MRK 12 37 j7wn figs-quotesinquotes αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 37 ka5u figs-explicit λέγει αὐτὸν 1 calls him ‘Lord,’ Here, the word **him** refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 37 ssq3 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 See how you translated the word **himself** in [12:36](../12/36.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person” or “David, whom we all respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +MRK 12 37 qpdy figs-explicit αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον 1 In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox, that is, is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David therefore addresses the Messiah respectfully as his Lord. But if the Messiah is his descendant, David should be the more respected person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 37 rh2t figs-rquestion καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 and how is he his son? Like the question in [12:35](../12/35.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 12 37 qucc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Jesus is using the word **and** to show that a conclusion should be drawn as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 12 37 tjp6 figs-metaphor υἱός 1 Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant” as he did in [12:35](../12/35.md). See how you translated the term **son** there. Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 38 bh8w grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Mark uses the word **And** to indicate that after asking his own difficult question to the people who had been trying to trap him, Jesus turned to speak to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MRK 12 38 rwxq figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **Watch out** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you watch out for” or “Every one of you watch out for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 12 38 yhfv figs-metonymy βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων 1 Jesus says **Watch out** to warn about the influence of these people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 38 nxy9 translate-symaction τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν 1 In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in a **long robe** was to assert wealth and status. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MRK 12 38 mu5a figs-explicit ἀσπασμοὺς 1 The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings**, in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “desire respectful greetings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 39 mwmf figs-metaphor πρωτοκαθεδρίας…πρωτοκλισίας 1 Both uses of the word **first** here figuratively mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 40 jtw4 figs-metonymy οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of the widows Jesus speaks figuratively of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 40 j27b figs-metaphor οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 the houses of the widows Jesus says figuratively that the scribes are **devouring** or eating up the possessions of widows to mean that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 40 r3ht καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι 1 Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers” +MRK 12 40 qm52 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** figuratively to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 40 h36x figs-explicit οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 will receive greater condemnation The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 41 r69x writing-background καὶ 1 Connecting Statement: Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 12 41 nohd writing-newevent καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου, ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον; καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά 1 This background information that Mark provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “after Jesus sat down he was watching the crown put money into the offering box and noticed that there were many rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MRK 12 41 p2kp figs-metonymy τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου…τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 1 the temple offering box Mark is figuratively describing the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God by association with the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed, the treasury. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 41 w4xc grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +MRK 12 41 jgkw figs-nominaladj πλούσιοι 1 Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people” as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MRK 12 41 rl1l figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 42 g6ry translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 two mites The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews which was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +MRK 12 42 n29e translate-bmoney ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 are a quadrans A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MRK 12 43 ipl1 translate-versebridge 0 General Information: In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he tells his reason for saying that. The information can be reordered so that Jesus tells his reason first and then says that the widow put in more, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -MRK 12 43 n7su προσκαλεσάμενος 1 having called “when Jesus had called” -MRK 12 43 q124 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md). -MRK 12 43 n8z5 πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς 1 all of those putting into “all the other people who put money into” -MRK 12 44 ui9a τοῦ περισσεύοντος 1 abundance much wealth, many valuable things -MRK 12 44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 her poverty “her lack” or “the little she had” -MRK 12 44 p3as τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 of her livelihood “she had to survive on” +MRK 12 43 q124 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md). Alternate translation: “I can assure you” +MRK 12 43 ih0m figs-metaphor ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ 1 Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 43 n8z5 figs-explicit πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων 1 all of those putting into In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 12 43 n7su γαζοφυλάκιον 1 having called See how you translated this term in [12:41](../12/41.md). +MRK 12 44 c7jj grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason for what Jesus said in [12:43](../12/43.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MRK 12 44 ihuq ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον 1 Alternate translation: “had a lot of money but only gave a small portion of it” +MRK 12 44 ui9a αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 abundance Alternate translation: “but she only had a very little money but gave everything she had to live on” +MRK 12 44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 her poverty Alternate translation: “her lack” or “the little she had” +MRK 12 44 p3as τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 of her livelihood Alternate translation: “she had to survive on” MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time. -MRK 13 1 rrv1 0 General Information: As they leave the temple area, Jesus tells his disciples what will happen in the future to the wonderful temple that Herod the Great has built. -MRK 13 1 ql81 figs-explicit ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί 1 What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings The **stones** refer to the stones that the **buildings** were built with. Alternate translation: “What wonderful buildings and the wonderful stones that they are made of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον 1 Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here This question is used to draw attention to the buildings. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings! Not one stone will be left stacked on top of another” or “You see these great buildings now, but not a single stone will be left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 13 2 zu46 figs-explicit οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ 1 Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down It is implied that enemy soldiers will tear down the stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 2 xdhj figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ 1 Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Not one stone will remain on top of another, for enemy soldiers will come and destroy these buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 3 e913 0 Connecting Statement: In answer to the disciples’ questions about the temple’s destruction and what was going to happen, Jesus tells them what was going to take place in the future. -MRK 13 3 izt8 figs-explicit καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ…Πέτρος 1 And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter It can be expressed clearly that Jesus and his disciples had walked to **the Mount of Olives**. Alternate translation: “And after arriving at the Mount of Olives, which is opposite the temple, Jesus sat down. Then Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 3 u7ju κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 by himself when they were alone -MRK 13 4 uf37 figs-explicit πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled This refers to what Jesus had just said will happen to the stones of the temple. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when will these things happen to the buildings of the temple, and what will be the sign that these things are about to happen to the temple buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 4 lw1n ὅταν…ταῦτα…πάντα 1 when all these things “that all these things” -MRK 13 5 fe42 λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 to say to them “to say to his disciples” -MRK 13 5 u79c figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ 1 may lead you astray Here, **lead you astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 13 6 wv12 figs-metaphor πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν 1 they will lead many astray Here, **will lead many astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “they will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 13 6 z63u figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name This could mean: (1) they would be claiming his authority. (2) they would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 13 6 l7f9 ἐγώ εἰμι 1 I am “I am the Christ” -MRK 13 7 fl5h ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 you may hear of wars and rumors of wars “you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) they would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) they would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start. -MRK 13 7 d1k9 ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 but the end is not yet “but it is not yet the end” or “but the end will not happen until later” or “but the end will be later” -MRK 13 7 mi4d figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 the end This probably refers to **the end** of the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 8 xln4 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’ 1 will rise against This idiom means to fight against one another. Alternate translation: “will fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 8 e2ln figs-ellipsis βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom The words “will rise” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “kingdom will rise against kingdom” or “the people of one kingdom will fight against the people of another kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 13 8 dz8g figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα 1 These are the beginnings of birth pains Jesus speaks of these disasters as **the beginnings of birth pains** because more severe things will happen after them. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 13 9 c2cl βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς 1 But you, watch yourselves “But be ready for what people will do to you” -MRK 13 9 xsy1 παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια 1 They will deliver you to councils “They will take you and put you under the control of councils” -MRK 13 9 zdp8 figs-activepassive δαρήσεσθε 1 you will be beaten You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people will beat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 9 gbb4 figs-idiom ἐπὶ…σταθήσεσθε 1 you will be made to stand before This means to be put on trial and judged. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 9 y6p6 figs-explicit εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 for a testimony to them This means the disciples will testify about Jesus. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “and will testify to them about me” or “and you will tell them about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 10 ruk9 figs-explicit καὶ εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη πρῶτον δεῖ κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 But first, it is necessary for the gospel to be proclaimed to all the nations Jesus is still speaking about things that must happen before the end comes. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “But the gospel must first be proclaimed to all the nations before the end will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 11 uy91 figs-idiom παραδιδόντες 1 handing you over Here this means to put people under the control of the authorities. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 11 a9b6 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 but the Holy Spirit The words “will speak” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 13 12 py9u παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον 1 brother will deliver brother to death “one brother will put another brother under the control of people who will kill him” or “brothers will put their brothers under the control of people who will kill them.” This will happen many times to many different people. Jesus is not speaking of just one person and his brother. -MRK 13 12 g3jv figs-gendernotations ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν 1 brother … brother These refers to both brothers and sisters. Alternate translation: “people … their siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -MRK 13 12 b9ux figs-ellipsis πατὴρ τέκνον 1 a father, his child The words “will deliver up to death” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “fathers will deliver up their children to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 13 12 d0t9 figs-idiom πατὴρ τέκνον 1 a father, his child This means that some fathers will betray their children, and this betrayal will cause their children to be killed. Alternate translation: “fathers will betray their children, handing them over to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 12 r66s figs-idiom ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 children will rise up against parents This means that **children** will oppose their **parents** and betray them. Alternate translation: “children will oppose their parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 12 si65 figs-activepassive θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 put them to death This means that the authorities will sentence the parents to be put to death. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “cause the authorities to sentence the parents to die” or “the authorities will kill the parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 13 pk3g figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by everyone You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 13 jhp6 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Jesus uses the metonym **my name** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 13 13 w28q figs-activepassive ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 the one who endures to the end, that one will be saved You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 13 c33n figs-explicit ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 the one who endures to the end Here, **endures** represents continuing to be faithful to God even while suffering. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 13 vcz4 εἰς τέλος 1 to the end This could refer to: (1) the end of his life. (2) the end of that time of trouble. +MRK 13 1 rrv1 Διδάσκαλε 1 General Information: See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). +MRK 13 1 ql81 figs-explicit ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί 1 What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones which the temple walls were built with. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge blocks of stones are and how wonderful these buildings are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς 1 Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 13 2 xdhj figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ 1 Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 3 izt8 writing-pronouns καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας 1 And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter Here, the pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were asking him by privately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 13 3 u7ju κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 by himself Alternate translation: “when they were alone” or “privately” +MRK 13 4 uf37 figs-explicit πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled Both occurrences of the phrase **these things** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would help your readers you could say explicitly what the phrase **these things** refers to as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 4 lw1n figs-activepassive ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when all these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will fulfill all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 5 fe42 writing-pronouns λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 to say to them The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew who are mentioned in [13:3](../13/03.md). If it would help your readers you can clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 13 5 qekc figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])  +MRK 13 6 z63u figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here, Jesus uses the word **name** figuratively to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 6 cee7 figs-quotesinquotes πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])  +MRK 13 6 pbz4 figs-explicit πολλοὶ…πολλοὺς 1 Here, both uses of the word **many** refer to many people. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 6 wv12 figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 they will lead many astray The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 7 fl5h πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 you may hear of wars and rumors of wars The phrase “wars and rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. Alternate translation: See the UST. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close or wars that far away” +MRK 13 7 d1k9 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 but the end is not yet Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 7 mi4d figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 the end Here, **the end** implicitly means the end of the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 8 ydrb figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])  +MRK 13 8 rlxf figs-genericnoun ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MRK 13 8 oyrd figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The term **nation** refers figuratively to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])  +MRK 13 8 xln4 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’ 1 will rise against The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 13 8 e2ln figs-ellipsis βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 8 hz6g figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])  +MRK 13 8 wpd3 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** figuratively represents the people of a kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 8 pcyi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 **these things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 8 dz8g figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα 1 These are the beginnings of birth pains Jesus uses **birth pains** figuratively here for the sufferings he has just described. Jesus speaks of these things as **the beginning of birth pains** because more severe things will happen after them. Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because in the same way that the pain a woman experiences when giving birth to a child is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually give way to joy in the future when Christ returns. Because giving birth is something that happens in all cultures you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 13 9 nuti figs-metaphor βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus figuratively uses a word for seeing to indicate a need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +MRK 13 9 c2cl figs-yousingular βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς 1 But you, watch yourselves In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +MRK 13 9 ulws figs-rpronouns βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to draw the disciples’ attention to themselves because he now transitions from telling them about general signs and begins telling them about specific trials that they themselves will personally encounter. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But give heed to yourselves personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])  +MRK 13 9 mbr5 writing-pronouns παραδώσουσιν 1 The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])  +MRK 13 9 voih figs-activepassive δαρήσεσθε  1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will beat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 9 zdp8 figs-activepassive σταθήσεσθε 1 you will be beaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 9 gbb4 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ…σταθήσεσθε 1 you will be made to stand before Here, **stand** figuratively means to be put on trial and judged. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 9 v23p figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way as the UST does or use a verb form such as “testify.” Alternate translation: “to testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])  +MRK 13 9 qq6r εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “to testify about me to them” +MRK 13 9 y6p6 writing-pronouns εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 for a testimony to them The pronoun **them** refers to **governers** and **kings** mentioned in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MRK 13 10 ruk9 translate-ordinal πρῶτον 1 But first, it is necessary for the gospel to be proclaimed to all the nations Here, Jesus uses the ordinal number **first** in order to indicate position in an order of events. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can express this same idea in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before the end comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MRK 13 10 sfjc figs-activepassive κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “people” will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “people to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])  +MRK 13 10 e6ad figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 The term **nations** refers figuratively to the people within each nation. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])  +MRK 13 11 uy91 figs-idiom παραδιδόντες 1 handing you over **handing … over** means to deliver to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 13 11 m0xq figs-activepassive δοθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 11 nr2r figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. If this idiom would confuse your readers you can state the meaning in plain language as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])  +MRK 13 11 q2o3 figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 The phrase **for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 11 a9b6 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 but the Holy Spirit Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 12 toqp figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members because they hate Jesus and because their family members believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 12 py9u figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 brother will deliver brother to death Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 12 m6iq figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers you can say this. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +MRK 13 12 utyk figs-abstractnouns θάνατον…θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea with a verb form as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “be killed … have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MRK 13 12 b9ux figs-ellipsis πατὴρ τέκνον 1 a father, his child Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “a father will deliver up his child to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 12 hrhw figs-gendernotations πατὴρ τέκνον 1 Although the term **father** is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful to your readers you can say this. Alternate translation: “parents their children” or “fathers and mothers will deliver their children to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MRK 13 12 vjcw figs-explicit ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, **children will rise up against parents and put them to death** probably does not mean that children will directly murder their parents. Rather, this probably means that children will deliver their parents to people in positions of authority and then these people will have their parents killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 12 r66s translate-symaction ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 children will rise up against parents Here, **rise up** means to stand up. In this culture, people would stand up to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for their action. Alternate translation: “children will stand up to testify against their parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MRK 13 13 pk3g figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by everyone If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 13 w8pz figs-hyperbole ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 Here, **everyone** is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize to his disciples the fact that many people will hate them because they believe in him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 13 13 jhp6 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. Jesus is using the phrase **my name** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 13 w28q figs-activepassive ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 the one who endures to the end, that one will be saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 13 13 c33n figs-explicit ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 the one who endures to the end Here, **endured** represents continuing to be faithful to God even while suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 13 vcz4 ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 to the end The phrase **to the end** could mean: (1) to the end of one’s life. Alternate translation: “who endures to the point of death” or “who endures till death” (2) until the end of time. This meaning means that believers must endure and keep on enduring until the time when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “who keeps on enduring to the very end” (3) to the end of that time of hardship and persecution. Alternate translation: “who endures until the time of testing is over” MRK 13 14 d4nw figs-metaphor τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως 1 the abomination of desolation This phrase is from the book of Daniel. His audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 14 vx3c figs-explicit ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ 1 standing where it should not be Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 14 ck7a figs-explicit ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω 1 let the reader understand This is not Jesus speaking. Matthew added this to get the readers’ attention, so that they would listen to this warning. Alternate translation: “may everyone who is reading this pay attention to this warning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 15 m1hq ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος 1 on the housetop Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat, and people could stand on them. +MRK 13 15 m1hq figs-explicit ὁ…ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ 1 on the housetop Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his readers will know this and that they will know that the roofs were separate from the rest of the house and in order to access the inside of a house a person would have to go down the stairs on the back of the house and then enter their house from the front. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 16 y1e9 figs-ellipsis ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind This refers to returning to his house. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who is in the field should not return to his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 17 bi8n figs-euphemism ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις 1 to those having in the womb This is a polite way to say that someone is pregnant. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 13 18 w47v προσεύχεσθε…ἵνα 1 pray that “pray that these times” or “pray that these things” @@ -1083,6 +1201,7 @@ MRK 14 9 vr3w ἀμὴν…λέγω ὑμῖν 1 truly I say to you This indica MRK 14 9 ysc5 figs-activepassive ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 wherever the gospel may be preached You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 14 9 ljh1 figs-activepassive καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται 1 what she has done will also be spoken of You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people will speak about what this woman has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 14 10 pdm5 0 Connecting Statement: After the woman anoints Jesus with perfume, Judas promises to deliver Jesus to the chief priests. +MRK 14 10 tq5a figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 0 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 14 10 z71f figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς 1 so that he might betray him to them Judas did not deliver Jesus to them yet, rather he went to make arrangements with them. Alternate translation: “in order to arrange with them that he would deliver Jesus over to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 10 dq6r αὐτὸν παραδοῖ 1 he might betray him “he would bring Jesus to them so they could capture him” MRK 14 11 kzk1 figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες 1 But when they heard it It may be helpful to state clearly what the chief priests heard. Alternate translation: “But when the chief priests heard what he was willing to do for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1091,17 +1210,20 @@ MRK 14 12 wpe7 figs-explicit ὅτε τὸ Πάσχα ἔθυον 1 when they we MRK 14 12 bel5 figs-metonymy φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα 1 you may eat the Passover Here the **Passover** refers to the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “eat the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 13 a7xg κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων 1 bearing a pitcher of water “carrying a large jar full of water” MRK 14 14 i344 figs-quotations ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω? 1 The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?” This can be written as an indirect quote. Translate this so that it is a polite request. Alternate translation: “Our Teacher would like to know where the guest room is where he may eat the Passover with his disciples.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MRK 14 14 chb0 διδάσκαλος 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 14 14 q3pn τὸ κατάλυμά 1 guest room a room for visitors MRK 14 15 x3zk figs-explicit ἐκεῖ ἑτοιμάσατε ἡμῖν 1 make the preparations for us there They were to prepare the meal for Jesus and his disciples to eat. Alternate translation: “prepare the meal for us there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 16 sb35 ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples left “the two disciples left” MRK 14 16 m339 καθὼς εἶπεν 1 just as he said “just as Jesus had said” MRK 14 17 n7z4 0 Connecting Statement: That evening as Jesus and the disciples eat the Passover meal, Jesus tells them that one of them will betray him. MRK 14 17 i1q1 figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 he came with the Twelve It may be helpful to state where they came to. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 14 17 bheu figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 14 18 cwl8 ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν 1 as they were reclining at table In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they lay down on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table. MRK 14 18 dg95 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md). MRK 14 19 v3a1 εἷς κατὰ εἷς 1 one by one This means that “one at a time” each disciple asked him. MRK 14 19 f13p figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ? 1 Surely not I? This could be: (1) a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 14 20 b25j εἷς τῶν δώδεκα 1 It is one of the Twelve “He is one of the twelve of you” +MRK 14 20 n1tv figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 14 20 htn4 ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον 1 who is dipping with me into the bowl In Jesus’ culture, people would often eat bread, **dipping** it in a shared bowl of sauce or of oil mixed with herbs. MRK 14 21 q5l3 ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 For the Son of Man is going away just as it has been written about him Here Jesus refers to the scriptures prophesying about his death. If you have a polite way to talk about death in your language, use it here. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die in the way that the scriptures say” MRK 14 21 ct78 figs-explicit δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 through whom the Son of Man is being betrayed You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who is betraying the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1156,7 +1278,7 @@ MRK 14 41 ae53 ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα 1 The hour has come The time of Jesus’ MRK 14 41 msb2 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold “Listen” MRK 14 41 eg9m figs-activepassive παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man is being betrayed Jesus warns his disciples that his betrayer is approaching them. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone is betraying me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 14 43 r9cp writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 44 gives background information about how Judas had arranged with the Jewish leaders to betray Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MRK 14 43 nz4t 0 Connecting Statement: Judas betrays Jesus with a kiss, and the disciples all flee. +MRK 14 43 nz4t figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 0 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 14 44 bzj2 δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 1 And his betrayer This refers to Judas. MRK 14 44 lsh3 figs-explicit αὐτός ἐστιν 1 he it is This refers to the man that Judas was going to identify. Alternate translation: “he is the one you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 45 tpd4 κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν 1 he kissed him “Judas kissed him” @@ -1305,4 +1427,4 @@ MRK 16 1 cw1b 0 Connecting Statement: On the first day of the week, women come MRK 16 1 p61n καὶ διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 And the Sabbath having passed That is, after **the Sabbath**, the seventh day of the week, had ended and the first day of the week had begun. MRK 16 4 kld9 figs-activepassive ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος 1 the stone had been rolled away You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 16 6 x9m8 figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη 1 He has been raised! The angel is emphatically stating that Jesus has risen from the dead. You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “He arose!” or “God raised him from the dead!” or “He raised himself from the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 9 10 to7w figs-metonymy 1 Mark is figuratively describing something Jesus would say by association with his mouth, which he would use to say something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 9 10 to7w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Mark is figuratively describing something Jesus would say by association with his mouth, which he would use to say something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 25770d250a..7365cfba64 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Luke\n\n1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)\n2. Prologue\n * The birth of John the Baptist (1:5-80)\n * The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1-51)\n * The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1-20)\n * The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21-4:13)\n3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14-9:50)\n4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem\n * Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51-13:21)\n * Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22-17:10)\n * Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11-19:27)\n5. Jesus in Jerusalem\n * Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28-44)\n * Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45-21:38)\n * Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1-24:53)\n\n### What is the Gospel of Luke about?\n\nThe Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his Gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel According to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News About Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Luke?\n\nThis book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.\n\nLuke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\n“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?\n\nLuke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?\n\nLuke described women in a very positive way in his Gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the Synoptic Gospels?\n\nThe Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”\n\nPassages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.\n\n### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?\n\nIn the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.\n\nJews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])\n\nTranslating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.\n\n### Major issues in the text of the book of Luke\n\nULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5-80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1-51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1-20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21-4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14-9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51-13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22-17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11-19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28-44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45-21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1-24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his Gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel According to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News About Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his Gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -3091,6 +3091,7 @@ LUK 18 6 m201 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the resp LUK 18 6 t9mg figs-idiom ἀκούσατε τί ὁ κριτὴς τῆς ἀδικίας λέγει 1 Listen to what the unrighteous judge says **Listen to** is an idiom that means “think about.” Jesus says this to get his disciples to reflect on what the judge said at the end of the parable. He is not introducing a further statement from the judge. Translate this in such a way that your readers will understand that Jesus has already related what the judge said. Alternate translation: “Think about what the unjust judge said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 18 7 t1sk figs-rquestion ὁ δὲ Θεὸς οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 And will not God do the vindication of his elect Jesus is using the question form for emphasis as he teaches his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Now God will certainly answer the prayers of the people he has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 18 7 e2lv figs-explicit ὁ δὲ Θεὸς οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 And will not God do the vindication of his elect Jesus is drawing an implicit comparison between the unrighteous human judge and **God**, who is the perfectly righteous divine judge. The implication is that if even the human judge would ensure justice for someone who persevered in pleading for it, God would certainly do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If an unrighteous human judge would ensure justice for someone who persevered in pleading for it, God will certainly answer the prayers of the people he has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 18 7 lrs0 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his elect Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 18 7 m202 figs-merism τῶν βοώντων αὐτῷ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός 1 the ones crying out to him day and night Jesus is using the phrase **day and night** figuratively to describe all of time, by referring to its two components. Alternate translation: “who pray to him all the time” or “who ask him for help continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 18 7 ljb4 figs-idiom καὶ μακροθυμεῖ ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 and he delays long over them Here Jesus may be using the word **and** in an idiomatic sense to mean “even if.” (UST offers another possible interpretation of this phrase.) Alternate translation: “even if he takes a long time to answer their prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 18 8 m203 λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” @@ -3648,6 +3649,7 @@ LUK 21 6 m432 figs-activepassive ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται 1 which LUK 21 7 rix4 writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτησαν…αὐτὸν 1 they asked him The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus’ disciples, and the word **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples asked Jesus” or “Jesus’ disciples asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 21 7 m433 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. LUK 21 7 a11j figs-explicit πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσθαι 1 when therefore will these things be, and what will be the sign when these things are about to happen The phrase **these things** refers implicitly to what Jesus has just said about enemies destroying the temple. Alternate translation: “then when will the temple be destroyed, and how will we know that our enemies are about to destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 21 8 bbri figs-quotesinquotes βλέπετε μὴ πλανηθῆτε; πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ἐγώ εἰμι, καί, ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν 1 Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying, ‘I am {he},’ and, ‘The time has come near.’ If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying that they are the Messiah. They will also say that the time has come near.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])  LUK 21 8 vu18 figs-activepassive μὴ πλανηθῆτε 1 you are not deceived If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 8 f1ed figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here Jesus uses the word **name** figuratively to mean identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 8 h6zp figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 I am he The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 642a48fab9..ba3e95f6e8 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ JHN 10 40 wztl figs-explicit ἦν Ἰωάννης τὸ πρῶτον βαπτ JHN 10 40 f5dx figs-explicit ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ 1 he stayed there Jesus remained on the east side of **Jordan** for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stay**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Jesus stayed there for several days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 41 yfin σημεῖον 1 See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle” JHN 10 41 gd31 writing-pronouns τούτου 1 Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus returns to Judea (11:1–16)\n2. Jesus’ seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:17–46)\n3. The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:47–57)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Ancient Jewish burial customs\n\nAccording to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 38–44](../11/38.md).\n\n### Passover\n\nAfter Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover ([11:55–57](../11/55.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “One man dies for the people”\n\nIn the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([11:50](../11/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([11:48](../11/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.\n\n### “The Jews”\n\nThis term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of John’s Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him ([11:36–37](../11/36.md)). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([11:8](../11/08.md) and possibly [11:54](../11/54.md)). Finally, the term is used in [11:55](../11/55.md) to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.\n\n### Hypothetical situation\n\nWhen Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen ([11:21](../11/21.md), [32](../11/32.md)). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die. +JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus returns to Judea (11:1–16)
2. Jesus’ seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:17–46)
3. The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:47–57)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Ancient Jewish burial customs

According to the burial customs of that time, a dead person’s family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 38–44](../11/38.md).

### Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover ([11:55–57](../11/55.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### “One man dies for the people”

In the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([11:50](../11/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([11:48](../11/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.

### “The Jews”

This term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of John’s Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him ([11:36–37](../11/36.md)). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([11:8](../11/08.md) and possibly [11:54](../11/54.md)). Finally, the term is used in [11:55](../11/55.md) to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.

### Hypothetical situation

When Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen ([11:21](../11/21.md), [32](../11/32.md)). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die. JHN 11 1 fsf7 writing-background 0 General Information: [Verses 1–2](../11/01.md) provide background information about **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 1 s5im writing-participants ἦν δέ τις ἀσθενῶν Λάζαρος ἀπὸ Βηθανίας 1 This verse introduces **Lazarus** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “There was a man named Lazarus, who was from Bethany and was sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) JHN 11 1 b2r5 translate-names Λάζαρος 1 **Lazarus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv index 0829b10062..0f82e4a1c6 100644 --- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ ROM 2 24 ccm9 figs-activepassive τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δ ROM 2 24 m2bq grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 2 24 pg0g figs-explicit δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 The implication is that since the Jews are God’s people, and represent him to **among the Gentiles**, their bad behavior is what causes **the Gentiles** to blaspheme **the name of God**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 2 24 wmfh grammar-connect-logic-result ὑμᾶς 1 Here the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of you Jews” or “of you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ROM 2 24 edrf writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (See [LXX Isaiah 52:5](isa/52/05.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “exactly as Isaiah the prophet says in the holy scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n +ROM 2 24 edrf writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (See [LXX Isaiah 52:5](isa/52/05.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “exactly as Isaiah the prophet says in the holy scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
ROM 2 25 j4ao figs-parallelism 1 These two clauses, **For circumcision indeed benefits if you obey the law** and **but if you are transgressors of the law, your circumcision has become uncircumcision**, mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the how **circumcision** is only beneficial if it is accompanied by practicing **the law**. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 2 25 vdu7 grammar-connect-logic-result περιτομὴ μὲν γὰρ ὠφελεῖ, ἐὰν νόμον πράσσῃς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “If you obey the law, circumcision indeed benefits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 2 25 i497 grammar-connect-words-phrases περιτομὴ μὲν γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **For circumcision indeed** indicates that what follows is a change in topic that continues through [2:25–29](../02/25.md) about the role of **circumcision** in the life of God’s people. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ ROM 2 29 gcoq figs-metonymy γράμματι 1 Paul is figuratively describing ROM 2 29 dd3p figs-synecdoche γράμματι 1 in the Spirit, not in the letter Paul is figuratively describing **the law** by association with the letters that make up **the law**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 2 29 qa6b figs-possession οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος οὐκ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in the Spirit Paul is using the possessive form **of him** to describe from whom **the one who is inwardly a Jew** receives **praise**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “his” instead of the noun “him” or express this idea as a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “his praise is not from people but from God” or “God is who praises him not human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”

Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]]) -ROM 3 1 v788 figs-rquestion τί οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **What then {is}** marks the beginning of a series rhetorical questions and answers in [3:1–9](../03/01.md) to emphasize that “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.” If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as a statement or an exclamation as in the UST or communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n +ROM 3 1 v788 figs-rquestion τί οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **What then {is}** marks the beginning of a series rhetorical questions and answers in [3:1–9](../03/01.md) to emphasize that “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.” If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as a statement or an exclamation as in the UST or communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ROM 3 1 vrm4 figs-parallelism τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the similarity between **the Jew** and **the circumcision**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew or being circumcised beneficial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 3 1 bjfo figs-abstractnouns τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **advantage** or **benefit**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “How then does the Jew gain anything, or how does being circumcised profit anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 1 gcd6 figs-ellipsis τί…τίς 1 Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision? Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -568,12 +568,12 @@ ROM 3 22 c4mg figs-nominaladj πάντας τοὺς πιστεύοντας 1 P ROM 3 22 o6qe grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why **the righteousness of God** is **for all**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 3 22 daa3 figs-abstractnouns οὐ…ἐστιν διαστολή 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 23 x1hu grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction” (See [3:22](../03/22.md)). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 3 23 akn9 figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 See how you translated **all** in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])\n +ROM 3 23 akn9 figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 See how you translated **all** in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ROM 3 23 jbe9 figs-metaphor ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were something that misses a mark or does not reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain **the glory of God**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **fall short** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “lack God’s glory” or “need God’s glory” “do not attain to God’s glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 3 23 ywpg figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 23 vwsf figs-possession τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the glory of God** could refer to: (1) the glorious life humans were meant to live. Alternate translation: “the glory God gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God. Alternate translation: “glorifying God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 3 24 ibi2 figs-personification δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι 1 Here, **grace** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could **justify** someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people right with himself as a gift. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 3 24 evs8 figs-explicit δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν 1 Paul assumes that the reader or hearer knows that those who are **being freely declared righteous** are “all” those who “have sinned” in [3:23](../03/23.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God makes all people right with himself as a gift” or “all humanity is being freely justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +ROM 3 24 evs8 figs-explicit δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν 1 Paul assumes that the reader or hearer knows that those who are **being freely declared righteous** are “all” those who “have sinned” in [3:23](../03/23.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God makes all people right with himself as a gift” or “all humanity is being freely justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 3 24 atij figs-abstractnouns τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **redemption**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because God is so kind, who sent Christ Jesus to rescue them” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 24 mwbg figs-ellipsis τῆς 2 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 3 24 lno6 figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively of **redemption** as if it were occupying space inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all humanity by uniting it to **Christ Jesus**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you can express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -604,12 +604,12 @@ ROM 3 27 tg79 figs-exclamations οὐχί, 1 Here, **No! But** is an exclamatio ROM 3 27 mlcq figs-abstractnouns πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 28 qe9p grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in [3:27](../03/27.md)) and further answers Paul’s rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 3 28 jtqq grammar-connect-words-phrases λογιζόμεθα 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See [3:09](../03/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 3 28 t8um figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 a person is justified by faith Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense of “humanity,” including both men and women. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n +ROM 3 28 t8um figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 a person is justified by faith Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense of “humanity,” including both men and women. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
ROM 3 28 ph88 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦσθαι…ἄνθρωπον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” does it (See [3:30](../03/30.md)). Alternate translation: “that God makes a person righteous” or “God continues to justify a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 3 28 jb14 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Here **by faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God or Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in God” or “by remaining faithful to Christ” (2) God’s or Christ’s faithfulness. Alternate translation: “by God’s faithfulness” or “by Christ’s faithfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 28 ycx2 figs-possession χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου 1 without works of the law Paul is using the possessive form (See [3:21](../03/21.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **apart from works of the law** could refer to: (1) **apart from** doing what **the law** requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what his law requires” (2) outside of what **the law** says. Alternate translation: “not related to what his law says” or “differently than what his law says” or “even if he has done no works of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 3 29 c606 figs-ellipsis ἢ Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ 1 Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** and **is he** are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 3 29 hdbq figs-exclamations οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? 1 Here, **not** is an exclamation phrase that communicates a strong contrast. Use a natural way in your language for communicating an exclamatory question or another way in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Isn’t he also the God of the Gentiles?!” or “Of course he is also the God of the Gentiles, right?!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])\n +ROM 3 29 hdbq figs-exclamations οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? 1 Here, **not** is an exclamation phrase that communicates a strong contrast. Use a natural way in your language for communicating an exclamatory question or another way in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Isn’t he also the God of the Gentiles?!” or “Of course he is also the God of the Gentiles, right?!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
ROM 3 29 gp74 figs-exclamations ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν 1 Here, **Yes**is an exclamation word that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Yes, of Gentiles also!” or “Of course the Gentiles too!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ROM 3 30 vur7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) ROM 3 30 ux30 figs-metaphor εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **God** as if he were a number. He means that **God {is} one** in nature, and he is the **one** true **God** of both Jews and Gentiles. If your readers would not understand what **God {is} one** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” or “God is one in nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ ROM 3 30 gk5d figs-metonymy περιτομὴν…ἀκροβυστίαν 1 he w ROM 3 30 s9i4 figs-possession ἐκ πίστεως…διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **faith** (See how you translated this phrase in [3:26](../03/26.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **by faith** could refer to: (1) A person who trusts in God. Alternate translation: “from trusting in God … through trusting in God” (2) God’s faithfulness. Alternate translation: “because he is faithful … through his faithfulness” or “from his faithfulness … through the same faithfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 3 31 nzr7 figs-exclusive καταργοῦμεν 1 we uphold Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See [3:09](../03/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we believing Jews then nullify” or “Do we believing Jews then abolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ROM 3 31 y6qx grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν καταργοῦμεν 1 we uphold the law Here, **then** indicates result. If it would be more natural in your language, you could place **then** at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize the idea of result or make the sentence into an emphatic statement like the UST. Alternate translation: “So then, do we nullify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 3 31 aj6s figs-possession διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])\n +ROM 3 31 aj6s figs-possession διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
ROM 3 31 rhy5 figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 **May it never be** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ROM 3 31 f8ft grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **Instead** here is in contrast to the Jewish assumption that **law** and **faith** are contradictory. Instead, Paul asserts that the ideas of **law** and **faith** actually reinforce one another. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 3 31 c295 figs-metaphor νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were something that could be held aloft. He means that believing Jews such as Paul teach that **faith** was always a necessary part of obeying **the law**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **uphold the law** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we believing Jews confirm what the law says” or “we believing Jews establish what the law actually teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -634,8 +634,8 @@ ROM 4 2 wvmh figs-activepassive Ἀβραὰμ…ἐδικαιώθη 1 If your ROM 4 2 sibe figs-explicit ἐξ ἔργων 1 Paul assumes that the Jewish believers he is addressing would understand that **works** is equivalent to the phrase “works of the law” in [3:28](../03/28.md). The difference is that Abraham lived before God gave his law to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection explicit. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 4 2 me3d grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν. 1 What follows the word **but** here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Although people may be impressed by **works**, a person is not **made righteous by works** from God’s perspective. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not to God!” or “however not from God’s perspective!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 4 2 z9wx figs-metaphor πρὸς Θεόν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Abraham** as if he were located in the presence of **God** (See [2:13](../02/13.md)). He means that God does not accept Abraham as **righteous by works**. If your readers would not understand what **before God** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to God” or “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 4 3 w9i5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For what does the scripture say Here, **For** introduces a reason clause. In what follows, Paul gives the reason why Abraham is not “made righteous by works” in [4:2](../04/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n -ROM 4 3 r9te writing-quotations τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει? 1 In the New Testament, **what does the scripture say** is a normal way to introduce a scripture quotation. Here it specifically refers to a quotation from the Old Testament in [Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the holy scriptures. Alternate translation: “what is written in the Old Testament” or “what did Moses write in Genesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n +ROM 4 3 w9i5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For what does the scripture say Here, **For** introduces a reason clause. In what follows, Paul gives the reason why Abraham is not “made righteous by works” in [4:2](../04/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+ROM 4 3 r9te writing-quotations τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει? 1 In the New Testament, **what does the scripture say** is a normal way to introduce a scripture quotation. Here it specifically refers to a quotation from the Old Testament in [Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the holy scriptures. Alternate translation: “what is written in the Old Testament” or “what did Moses write in Genesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
ROM 4 3 smc6 figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 it was counted to him as righteousness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God regarded him as righteous” or “God reckoned Abraham as being right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 3 qked figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being right with God” or “being righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 4 ihul grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **Now** indicates that what follows describes the nature of works. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ ROM 4 4 oojx figs-extrainfo τῷ…ἐργαζομένῳ 1 By, **the one who ROM 4 4 dsl8 figs-activepassive ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν 1 what he is paid is not counted as a gift If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 4 ossx figs-abstractnouns κατὰ χάριν…κατὰ ὀφείλημα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **grace** and **obligation**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “something gifted … something owed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 4 avcm grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ κατὰ ὀφείλημα 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the idea of **grace**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (begin a new sentence like the UST): “On the contrary, it is counted as an obligation” or “Actually, it is regarded as an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -ROM 4 5 ynp2 figs-parallelism 1 in the one who justifies [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar language, to contrast the “the one who works” with **the one who does not work**. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas that use similar language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])\n +ROM 4 5 ynp2 figs-parallelism 1 in the one who justifies [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar language, to contrast the “the one who works” with **the one who does not work**. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas that use similar language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
ROM 4 5 x9y5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **Now** indicates that what follows describes the nature of what **makes righteous**. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 4 5 e30u grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 2 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to the idea of **work**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 4 5 fezj figs-explicit τὸν δικαιοῦντα 1 The implication is that **the one who makes righteous** is God (See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:27](../03/27.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who makes righteous” or “God who justifies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -653,12 +653,12 @@ ROM 4 5 s00l figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαι ROM 4 6 hil6 writing-quotations καθάπερ…λέγει 1 In the New Testament, **Even as … speaks** is a normal way to introduce a scripture quotation. Here it specifically refers to a quotation from the Psalms of King David in [LXX Psalm 31:1–2](psalm/31/01.md) that continues through [4:7–8](../04/07.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “This what … wrote in the Old Testament” or “This is exactly what … refers to in the Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) ROM 4 6 s0v1 figs-abstractnouns τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessing**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the person is” or “how happy people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 6 vyse figs-possession τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the man** that is characterized by **blessing**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “blessed” instead of the noun “blessing.” Alternate translation: “about the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ROM 4 6 x40j grammar-collectivenouns τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 The word **man** is a singular noun that refers to all humanity. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the people” or “for the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])\n +ROM 4 6 x40j grammar-collectivenouns τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 The word **man** is a singular noun that refers to all humanity. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the people” or “for the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
ROM 4 6 c6zs figs-distinguish ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων 1 This phrase gives us further information about the **the man**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -ROM 4 6 lilj figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being right with himself” or “being righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 4 6 lilj figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being right with himself” or “being righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 4 6 o260 figs-possession χωρὶς ἔργων 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:28](../03/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ROM 4 7 dur6 figs-parallelism 1 whose lawless deeds are forgiven … whose sins are covered These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show why these people should be **Blessed**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How happy are those people whom God completely forgives all the wrong things they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])\n -ROM 4 7 gm94 figs-exclamations μακάριοι…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν 1 If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “How happy … covered!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])\n +ROM 4 7 dur6 figs-parallelism 1 whose lawless deeds are forgiven … whose sins are covered These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show why these people should be **Blessed**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How happy are those people whom God completely forgives all the wrong things they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ROM 4 7 gm94 figs-exclamations μακάριοι…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν 1 If the plain statement form for this seems unnatural, you could translate this as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “How happy … covered!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
ROM 4 7 xesq figs-ellipsis μακάριοι…αἱ ἀνομίαι…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **are** and **their** are added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Blessed are … their lawless deeds … their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 4 7 op7p figs-nominalad μακάριοι 1 Paul is using the plural adjective **Blessed** as a noun in order to describe people whose **lawless deeds are forgiven**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “How happy are the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ROM 4 7 lq4w figs-nominalad ὧν…αἱ ἀνομίαι…ὧν…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is characterized by truth. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “by the true word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ ROM 4 9 w2xt figs-quotations λέγομεν γάρ, ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀ ROM 4 9 mrsm grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 4 9 m3uh figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 Faith was counted to Abraham as righteousness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God considered Abraham as being right with himself since he trusted in God” or “God regarded Abraham righteous because of how he trusted in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 9 ymps figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** or **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “How he trusted … as being right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 4 10 bw38 figs-explicit πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 In this verse Paul implies that **it** refers to Abraham’s faith in [4:9](../04/09.md), and that Abraham is the implied subject of the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How then was Abraham’s faith counted? While he was circumcised or while he was uncircumcised? {It was} not while Abraham was circumcised, but while Abraham was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +ROM 4 10 bw38 figs-explicit πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 In this verse Paul implies that **it** refers to Abraham’s faith in [4:9](../04/09.md), and that Abraham is the implied subject of the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How then was Abraham’s faith counted? While he was circumcised or while he was uncircumcised? {It was} not while Abraham was circumcised, but while Abraham was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 4 10 p5rp figs-activepassive πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη 1 It was not in circumcision, but in uncircumcision If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God consider it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 10 wbta grammar-connect-logic-result πῶς οὖν 1 Here, **Then** introduces a result clause in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 4 10 xid2 figs-ellipsis οὐκ 1 Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **It was** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “It was not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ ROM 4 12 wdw8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word ROM 4 12 s9jt figs-idiom καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 who follow in the steps of faith of our father Abraham Here, **walk in the footsteps** is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who live the way our ancestor Abraham’s did by trusting God even before being circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 4 12 btrd figs-possession τῆς…πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **our father Abraham** who is characterized by his **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Abraham’s” instead of the noun “Abraham” or with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” or “of trusting in God like our ancestor Abraham did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 4 12 u5ur figs-exclusive τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, **our** refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews (See [3:9](..03/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “our Jewish ancestor Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 4 13 x9s9 figs-infostructure 1 but through the righteousness of faith If it would be more natural in your language, you could reorder this verse. Alternate translation: “For the promise to Abraham or to his seed was not through the law but through the righteousness of faith. What God promised to Abraham or his seed is that they would inherit the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n +ROM 4 13 x9s9 figs-infostructure 1 but through the righteousness of faith If it would be more natural in your language, you could reorder this verse. Alternate translation: “For the promise to Abraham or to his seed was not through the law but through the righteousness of faith. What God promised to Abraham or his seed is that they would inherit the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ROM 4 13 i6xc grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, what follows **For** gives the reason why he Jewish ancestor Abraham is the “father” of the “uncircumcised” (See [4:12](../04/12.md). Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 4 13 yqxx grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Here, **or** indicates that **the promise** is **to Abraham** and **his seed**. Alternate translation: “or also” or “and also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 4 13 ew13 figs-metaphor τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a **seed* that a person plants. He means that they are Abraham’s offspring or descendants. If your readers would not understand what **his seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “those who descend from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -707,8 +707,8 @@ ROM 4 13 pjyt figs-distinguish τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶνα ROM 4 13 vtgx figs-ellipsis οὐ 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **was** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 4 13 dvlp grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to receiving God’s promise **through the law**. Instead, Paul refers to receiving the promise through **faith**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 4 13 iqsm figs-possession δικαιοσύνης πίστεως 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that comes from **faith** (See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:11](../04/11.md)). If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “faith’s righteousness” or “becoming right with God by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ROM 4 13 udne figs-abstractnouns διὰ δικαιοσύνης πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “through becoming right with God by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n -ROM 4 14 n0x6 figs-hypo 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Now, suppose that being associated with the law allows people to inherit God’s promise, then faith becomes useless and what God promised becomes void” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n +ROM 4 13 udne figs-abstractnouns διὰ δικαιοσύνης πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “through becoming right with God by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM 4 14 n0x6 figs-hypo 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Now, suppose that being associated with the law allows people to inherit God’s promise, then faith becomes useless and what God promised becomes void” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
ROM 4 14 hba4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, what follows **For** in [4:14–15](../04/14.md) gives the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham comes “through the righteousness of faith” (See [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 4 14 ksui figs-possession οἱ ἐκ νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **those** associated with **the law**. Here, **those from the law** refers to the Jews, namely, “those from the circumcision” (See [4:12](../04/12.md)). If this is not clear in your language, you could express this idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those associated with the law” or “the circumcised Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 4 14 jl50 figs-ellipsis κληρονόμοι 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **are** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are heirs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -716,20 +716,20 @@ ROM 4 14 k4ip figs-explicit κληρονόμοι 1 The implication is that the ROM 4 14 md7o figs-parallelism κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how powerless **the law** is to allow a person inherit God’s **promise**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “trusting in God’s promise becomes absolutely powerless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 4 14 hxvd figs-metaphor κεκένωται ἡ πίστις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **faith** as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that **faith** becomes powerless or useless to make a person right with God if simply being associated with **the law** allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If your readers would not understand what **faith has been made empty** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “then it is impossible to become right with God by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 4 15 b3h8 figs-abstractnouns 1 there is no trespass If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath** and **transgression**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that God punishes those who break his law, but where God’s law is not present, there is no opportunity to transgress it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 4 15 qma4 figs-metaphor ὁ γὰρ νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a person or machine that could produce something. He means that what God requires in his **law** to be done by his people causes punishment for those who do not obey **the law**. If your readers would not understand what **produces wrath** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Certainly, God punishes those who do not obey his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +ROM 4 15 qma4 figs-metaphor ὁ γὰρ νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a person or machine that could produce something. He means that what God requires in his **law** to be done by his people causes punishment for those who do not obey **the law**. If your readers would not understand what **produces wrath** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Certainly, God punishes those who do not obey his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 4 15 v1ow grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, what follows **For** gives the reason for God’s **law**. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 4 15 ucqi figs-parallelism οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that **the law** has to be present or exist for someone to be able to transgress it. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “but a person cannot transgress a law that does not exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 4 15 px0m figs-metaphor οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were located in a specific place. Here, **where** means that God’s law is present. If your readers would not understand what **where** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 4 15 t0wx grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here what follows the word **but** is meant to show a contrast between where God’s **law** is present and where it is not present. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 4 15 qxoi figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **are** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “neither is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 4 16 mex6 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 in order that the promise may rest on grace Here, **For this reason** introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “Because of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n +ROM 4 16 mex6 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 in order that the promise may rest on grace Here, **For this reason** introduces a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “Because of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ROM 4 16 gzlh figs-ellipsis ἐκ 1 Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **it is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 4 16 defl figs-extrainfo ἐκ πίστεως 1 Here, the implication is that **{it is}** refers to **the promise** (See also [4:13](../04/13.md)). Since the expression is explained in this verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ROM 4 16 nchm figs-possession ἐκ πίστεως…ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the promise** is acquired. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this idea using a verb form. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by trusting in him … who trust God like Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 4 16 bc5k grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes **faith** the means for acquiring **the promise**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) ROM 4 16 cgpq figs-abstractnouns κατὰ χάριν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is kind” or “based on how gracious God is” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 16 v8it grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “God causes the promise to become secure” or “so that the promise is certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 4 16 r8ji grammar-collectivenouns παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι 1 The phrase **all the seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” or “all the different types of offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])\n +ROM 4 16 r8ji grammar-collectivenouns παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι 1 The phrase **all the seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” or “all the different types of offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
ROM 4 16 xzsp figs-metaphor σπέρματι 1 See how you translated **seed** in [4:13](../04/13.md).(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 4 16 a4ai figs-distinguish οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ 1 These clauses give us further information about the **all the seed**. They distinguish between a **seed** based on **the law** and a **seed** based on **the faith**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law, and those associated with Abraham only through faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) ROM 4 16 ns6r figs-possession ἐκ τοῦ νόμου 1 those who are under the law See how you translated this phrase in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ ROM 4 17 s67j figs-distinguish τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος 1 What follow ROM 4 17 fhw8 figs-nominaladj τοὺς νεκροὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **the dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ROM 4 17 tg2e figs-metaphor καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the things not existing** as if **God** were shouting at or calling to them. Paul means that **God** creates things by naming them or summoning them **into existence** (See [Genesis 1](..gen/01/.md)). If your readers would not understand what **calls** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking creates things from what does not exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 4 17 ou8k figs-abstractnouns ὡς ὄντα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **existence**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “as though they exist” or “as if they were things that exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 4 18 g8fm figs-idiom ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν 1 In hope he believed against hope Here, the phrase **against hope** is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless for Abraham to have descendants, he assuredly trusted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n +ROM 4 18 g8fm figs-idiom ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν 1 In hope he believed against hope Here, the phrase **against hope** is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless for Abraham to have descendants, he assuredly trusted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ROM 4 18 auah figs-abstractnouns ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope*, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully trusted God although it seemed hopeless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 18 emih writing-pronouns ὃς…αὐτὸν…εἰρημένον…σου 1 The pronouns **who** and **he** and **your** refer to Abraham, not God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 4 18 bs6y grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν 1 This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Abraham **believed in hope**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he would become” or “in order that he could become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ ROM 4 18 qbdq figs-metaphor πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν 1 See how y ROM 4 18 b92q writing-quotations κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον 1 according to what he had been told Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. In this case, it is a direct quotation from [Genesis 15:5](gen/15/05.md). Alternate translation: “based on what God had already said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) ROM 4 18 p5el figs-explicit οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου 1 So will your descendants be Paul assumes that his readers would know the complete wording of the promise God made to Abraham in [Genesis 15:5](gen/15/05.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 4 18 i2ev figs-metaphor 1 See how you translated **seed** in [4:16](../04/16.md).(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 4 19 ycte figs-infostructure 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Even though he considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—he did not weaken in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n +ROM 4 19 ycte figs-infostructure 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Even though he considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—he did not weaken in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ROM 4 19 m9gq figs-litotes καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, 1 Without becoming weak in faith, Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in his faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ROM 4 19 b3w6 figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 4 19 w3rq writing-pronouns κατενόησεν 1 The pronouns **he** and **his own** refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham considered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -766,10 +766,10 @@ ROM 4 19 ghhm figs-abstractnouns τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας ROM 4 20 qn5h figs-infostructure εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ROM 4 20 kicf grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s **faith** in **the promise of God**. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 4 20 qcod figs-possession εἰς…τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promise** that comes from **God** that is characterized by truth. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God.” Alternate translation: “as it relates to God’s promise” or “relating to the promise from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ROM 4 20 wgmc figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 4 20 wgmc figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 4 20 ep2z figs-doublenegatives οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 did not hesitate in unbelief This is a double negative. Since the following clause positively contrasts it, you should not translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not doubt that God is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ROM 4 20 th2x figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ…τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **the unbelief** and **the faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by disbelieving … by believing” or “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 4 20 a4g4 figs-infostructure ἀλλ’ ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει, δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “but by glorifying God, he became more empowered to trust” or “but after glorifying God, he became strengthened to trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n +ROM 4 20 a4g4 figs-infostructure ἀλλ’ ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει, δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “but by glorifying God, he became more empowered to trust” or “but after glorifying God, he became strengthened to trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ROM 4 20 z0w3 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what was expected, that Abraham would doubt that God was going to give him a son since he was nearly one hundred years old (See [4:19](../04/19.md)). Instead, Abraham trusted God even more. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “on the contrary, he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 4 20 zdj5 figs-activepassive ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει 1 he was strengthened in faith If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “trusting God strengthened Abraham” or “God strengthened his belief” or “God empowered him to continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 20 ew3r figs-abstractnouns δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” or “because he glorified God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -794,28 +794,28 @@ ROM 4 24 pfc9 figs-exclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει…Ἰησ ROM 4 24 nc8x figs-distinguish οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 This phrase gives us further information about faith that is **counted** as righteousness for those who live after Jesus died and resurrected. Paul is distinguishing between faith in the one true God before and after Christ lived. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “for whom God will count our faith as righteousness as well, if we continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) ROM 4 24 nh4k figs-activepassive οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι 1 also for us, for whom it will be counted, we who believe If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is going to count as righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 24 bu1m writing-pronouns μέλλει 1 Here the pronoun **it** refers to “faith” (See [4:20–22](../04/20)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “faith is about” or “trusting in God is going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ROM 4 24 artt writing-pronouns τὸν ἐγείραντα 1 The pronoun **one** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])\n +ROM 4 24 artt writing-pronouns τὸν ἐγείραντα 1 The pronoun **one** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ROM 4 24 i6vl figs-idiom ἐγείραντα…ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** is an idiom meaning “resurrected from where dead people are.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who resurrected … from death” or “resurrected … from the grave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 4 24 iq69 figs-idiom figs-nominaladj 1 Paul is using the adjective **the dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “where dead people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ROM 4 25 vngb figs-distinguish 1 This verse gives us further information about Jesus. It is making a distinction between who Jesus is and what God has done to him. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God handed over Jesus because of how we violated God’s laws, and God resurrected Jesus in order to make us right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])\n +ROM 4 25 vngb figs-distinguish 1 This verse gives us further information about Jesus. It is making a distinction between who Jesus is and what God has done to him. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God handed over Jesus because of how we violated God’s laws, and God resurrected Jesus in order to make us right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
ROM 4 25 irue writing-pronouns ὃς…ἡμῶν…τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **who** refers to Jesus, and **our** refers to all **those who believe** in him (See [4:24](../04/24.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … all of our … the vindication of us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 4 25 cca1 figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη…ἠγέρθη 1 who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God handed over Jesus … God resurrected Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 25 b999 figs-metaphor ὃς παρεδόθη…ἠγέρθη 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were something that could be sent to another person and an object to lift up. Paul means that God allowed people to kill, and then God resurrected Jesus after he died. If your readers would not understand what **was delivered up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God handed over Jesus … God resurrected him” or “God allowed others to kill Jesus … God made him alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 4 25 op41 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν…διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us right with God” or “because we transgressed … so God could vindicate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 4 25 op41 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν…διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us right with God” or “because we transgressed … so God could vindicate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### “All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) ROM 5 1 xmp3 grammar-connect-logic-result 1 Connecting Statement: If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been made right with God by trusting in him” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since God makes us right with himself by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 5 1 age4 grammar-connect-words-phrases δικαιωθέντες οὖν 1 Since we are justified Here, **Therefore** indicates that what follows in [5:1-5](../05/01.md) is a new section that describes the results of being made right with God. Alternate translation (remove comma): “As a result of having been made right” or “So then, if we have been made right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 1 xott figs-activepassive δικαιωθέντες…ἐκ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous when we trust him” or “since God justifies us through trusting in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 5 1 wbwx figs-abstractnouns ἐκ πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 5 1 p11y figs-possession εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through our Lord Jesus Christ This phrase gives us information about how the believer can **have peace with God**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus Christ allows us to have peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])\n +ROM 5 1 p11y figs-possession εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through our Lord Jesus Christ This phrase gives us information about how the believer can **have peace with God**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus Christ allows us to have peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
ROM 5 1 hi12 figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we can live safely” or “let us live peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 1 o2yr figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could possess or own **peace**. He means that they can or must live peacefully with God. If your readers would not understand what **have peace** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “let us try to live peacefully” or “we must live peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 5 1 kjpb figs-imperative ἔχωμεν 1 The phrase **let us have peace** communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “we must have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])\n -ROM 5 2 slyh figs-abstractnouns 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **the access** or **faith**, **grace**, or **hope**, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access how gracious God is … boastful, hopeful to experience God’s glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n -ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-exclusive ἔχωμεν…ἡμῶν 1 we … our The pronouns **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all **those who believe** in Jesus (See [4:24–25](../04/24.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n -ROM 5 1 xaeg guidelines-sonofgodprinciples πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 In [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in **Christ**. Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])\n +ROM 5 1 kjpb figs-imperative ἔχωμεν 1 The phrase **let us have peace** communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “we must have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
+ROM 5 2 slyh figs-abstractnouns 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **the access** or **faith**, **grace**, or **hope**, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access how gracious God is … boastful, hopeful to experience God’s glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-exclusive ἔχωμεν…ἡμῶν 1 we … our The pronouns **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all **those who believe** in Jesus (See [4:24–25](../04/24.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ROM 5 1 xaeg guidelines-sonofgodprinciples πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 In [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in **Christ**. Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
ROM 5 2 du8b figs-distinguish δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην 1 Through him we also have our access by faith into this grace in which we stand This phrase gives us further information about how Jesus helps the believer. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access God’s grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -ROM 5 2 tsbo writing-pronouns οὗ 1 The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])\n +ROM 5 2 tsbo writing-pronouns οὗ 1 The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ROM 5 2 i50u figs-exclusive καὶ…ἐσχήκαμεν…ἑστήκαμεν…καυχώμεθα 1 Unless otherwise noted, the pronoun **we** and its other forms (“us” or “our”) refer inclusively to all believers in Christ in chapter 5. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ROM 5 2 af0n figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **grace** as if it were a location that someone could access and where someone could stand. He means that by trusting in Jesus it allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand what **grace in which we stand** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 2 fsqg figs-litany καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of phrases in [5:2–4](..05/02.md) to show how powerful **hope** is. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the ways Christians can “boast in the hope of the glory of God**. Paul goes on to say in [5:5](../05/05.md) that “hope does not disappoint.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that express reasons to **hope**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) @@ -830,8 +830,8 @@ ROM 5 3 lo57 figs-metaphor ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζ ROM 5 4 dt8w figs-abstractnouns ἡ …ὑπομονὴ…ἐλπίδα 1 See how you translated **endurance** in [5:3](../05/03.md) and **hope** in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 4 gjvh figs-abstractnouns δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **character**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “makes us approved by God, and when God approves us it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 5 u4xh grammar-connect-logic-result 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us–hope does not disappoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 5 5 rctz figs-explicit ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς 1 The implication is that **hope** here refers to **the hope of the glory of God** in [5:2](../05/02.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n -ROM 5 5 zp3q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **And** indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s litany about **hope**. Alternate translation: “So” or “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])\n +ROM 5 5 rctz figs-explicit ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς 1 The implication is that **hope** here refers to **the hope of the glory of God** in [5:2](../05/02.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM 5 5 zp3q grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **And** indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s litany about **hope**. Alternate translation: “So” or “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
ROM 5 5 pp1n figs-personification ἡ…ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει 1 that hope does not disappoint Here, **hope** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could **disappoint**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “being confident that we will once again live in the glorious way God intended, we are not disappointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 5 5 qka8 figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν 1 because the love of God has been poured into our hearts Paul speaks figuratively of **love** as if it were a something that could be **poured** out of a pitcher, and **our hearts** as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who God has given us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 5 dc95 figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul says that “the Holy Spirit” did it. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, who God gave us, poured out God’s love deep within us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ ROM 5 7 x036 writing-pronouns τις…τις 1 The pronoun **someone** refers ROM 5 7 mqyq writing-pronouns καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of dying as if it were a dare or challenge to overcome. He means that **someone** would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If your readers would not understand what **dare to die** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 8 ednw grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what was expected, that **Christ** would die for godly people. Instead, Christ died for **sinners**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 5 8 qh0h figs-rpronouns ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul uses the word **his own** to emphasize how much **God** loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ROM 5 8 vh6y figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 5 8 vh6y figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 5 8 fel5 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “by the fact that Christ died for us, even while we were still sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ROM 5 8 c8vd figs-distinguish ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν 1 This phrase gives us further information about how much love God has for his people. Paul is pointing out how undeserving God’s people are of **his own love**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “in this way: even while we were still sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) ROM 5 8 oz1w figs-ellipsis ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete (See also [5:6](../05/06.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while we still were being sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ ROM 5 12 k1xa figs-parallelism 0 This verse communicates similar ideas. Paul s ROM 5 12 hjx4 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὰ τοῦτο 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Therefore** indicates that what follows in [5:12–21](../05/12.md) is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human **sin** and God’s grace. Alternate translation: “For this reason” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 12 wf9f figs-personification ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν 1 through one man sin entered … death entered through sin Here, **sin** and **death** are spoken of figuratively as though they were persons who could travel to different places. Paul means that the way God intended for **the world** and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by **sin** and **death**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because one man sinned, he would die. All human beings born after that one man would die too because of the effects of his sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 5 12 pa8s figs-explicit δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 The implication is that the **one man** is Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, since “Adam” is not mentioned until [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “through the one man Adam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 5 12 a7ml writing-symlanguage δι’ ἑνὸς 1 The number **one** is a symbol of unity. Paul uses this possessive form **through one** twelve times in [5:12-19](../05/12.md) to emphasize the unity of Jesus with humanity. Be sure to retain this important phrase throughout your translation of this section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])\n +ROM 5 12 a7ml writing-symlanguage δι’ ἑνὸς 1 The number **one** is a symbol of unity. Paul uses this possessive form **through one** twelve times in [5:12-19](../05/12.md) to emphasize the unity of Jesus with humanity. Be sure to retain this important phrase throughout your translation of this section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
ROM 5 12 smc2 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἁμαρτία…τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος…ὁ θάνατος 1 Here, **the** indicates a specialized meaning of **sin** and **death**. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract phrases **the sin** and **the death** in another way. Here, **the sin** and **the death** mean “death ruled” and “sin ruled” (See [5:14,21](..05/14/.md)). Alternate translation: “the power of sin … the power of sin, the power of death … the power of death” or “the dominion of sin … the dominion of sin, the dominion of death … the dominion of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 12 uxcs figs-ellipsis διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the death entered the world through the sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 5 12 l7wr grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὕτως 1 Here, **so** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “so then also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -891,36 +891,36 @@ ROM 5 13 e6bx figs-ellipsis ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου…μὴ ὄντος ν ROM 5 13 at4i grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why death caused **sin** until “the law came in so that the trespass might increase” (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). Alternate translation: “This is because” or “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 5 13 w185 figs-possession ἄχρι…νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the time period **until** relates to **law**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **until** could refer to: (1) the time until **law** was given. Alternate translation: “For up to the time God gave his law to the Jews … since God’s law did not exist” (2) the whole time the law was in effect until Christ came. Alternate translation: “until the end of the law … when the law was no longer in effect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 13 v51t figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτία…ἁμαρτία 1 See how you translated **sin** in [5:12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 5 13 uyd4 figs-personification ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ, ἁμαρτία δὲ 1 Here, **sin** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person located in the world and who could be charged with sinning. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there were still people in the world who sinned, but their sinful way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])\n +ROM 5 13 uyd4 figs-personification ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ, ἁμαρτία δὲ 1 Here, **sin** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person located in the world and who could be charged with sinning. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there were still people in the world who sinned, but their sinful way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ROM 5 13 izno grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what was expected, that God would count sin against people. Instead, **sin** has no legal consequences until **the law** is given. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 5 13 juq7 figs-activepassive ἁμαρτία…οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται 2 but there is no accounting for sin when there is no law If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not reckon it as sinning” or “God did not impute it as sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 5 14 ev8a grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Nevertheless, death What follows the word **Nevertheless** here is in contrast to what was expected, that since there was no law, there would be no consequences for doing what is wrong. Instead, Paul restates that **death** is the problem for humanity, not breaking the law God gave to his people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Although this is true” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 5 14 bd3q figs-personification ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος 1 death ruled from Adam until Moses Here, **death** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king. Paul means that every person was under the control of **death**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all humans came under the control of death” or “no human could escape dying” or “human life inevitably ended in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 5 14 u66m figs-abstractnouns ὁ θάνατος 1 See how you translated **death** in [5:12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ROM 5 14 pdrh figs-merism ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως 1 Paul speaks figuratively, using these two people to represent the period of time between **Adam** and **Moses**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam sinned until the time when God gave Moses his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])\n +ROM 5 14 pdrh figs-merism ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως 1 Paul speaks figuratively, using these two people to represent the period of time between **Adam** and **Moses**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam sinned until the time when God gave Moses his law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
ROM 5 14 w24g figs-distinguish καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ 1 This phrase gives us further information about over whom **death ruled**. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of **Adam** and **Moses**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey in the same way as Adam did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) ROM 5 14 skns figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **likeness**, **transgression**, and **pattern**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way as Adam transgressed, who typifies the coming one” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who patterns he who will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 14 k2w7 figs-possession ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the likeness** relates to the **transgression**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Adam’s” instead of the noun “Adam,” or you could use a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression" or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 14 e4ze figs-metaphor Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Adam** as if he were a model or shape or drawing. Paul means that **Adam** represents humanity. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **a pattern** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of he who is coming” or “Adam, who models the coming one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 14 mu4s figs-possession τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **pattern** relates to **the one who is coming**. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who will come in the future (See [5:15](../05/15.md)). If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus who was destined to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 15 xodg grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, what follows **But** contrasts **the trespass** with **the gift**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -ROM 5 15 x37x figs-abstractnouns τὸ παράπτωμα…τὸ χάρισμα…τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι… ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift** you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “since Adam rebelled … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 5 15 x37x figs-abstractnouns τὸ παράπτωμα…τὸ χάρισμα…τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι… ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift** you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “since Adam rebelled … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 5 15 aobk figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so also is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 5 15 sful grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains the difference between **the trespass** and **the gracious gift**. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 15 yxej grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gracious gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) ROM 5 15 kdhb figs-possession τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the trespass** that comes from **one** man. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “one man’s” instead of the adjective “one” or a verb form. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 15 mm6y figs-nominaladj τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 Paul is using the adjective **one** as a noun in order to refer to Adam (See [5:14](../05/14.md)). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could make these references explicit. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ROM 5 15 e9me figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ…τοὺς πολλοὺς 1 Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people … many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])\n +ROM 5 15 e9me figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ…τοὺς πολλοὺς 1 Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people … many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ROM 5 15 h6c3 grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 Here, **much more** strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of **the trespass** of Adam and the **grace of God** that comes through **Jesus Christ** (See how you translated this phrase in [5:10](../05/10.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 15 ejxz figs-possession ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God,” or another way. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 15 wn36 figs-possession τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the grace** relates to **the one man** Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 15 fuyz guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Θεοῦ…Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers **by the grace of God** and **Jesus Christ**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ROM 5 15 lydx figs-possession τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **grace** relates to **the one man, Jesus Christ**. Use a natural way to express this idea. Here, **grace** could refer to: (1) grace through Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes through the one man, Jesus Christ” (2) grace from Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes from the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ROM 5 15 tfhj figs-infostructure ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “abounded unto the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n -ROM 5 16 ns9a grammar-connect-logic-result 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n\n -ROM 5 16 uh4x grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 followed many trespasses What follows the word **And** here contrasts the way **the gift** and **the judgment** happened. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Yet” or “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])\n -ROM 5 17 n5zx grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains the difference between **the trespass** and **the gift** (See [5:15](../05/15.md) for similar ideas)). Alternate translation: “For this reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) \n -ROM 5 17 mhtc grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1 \nPaul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +ROM 5 15 tfhj figs-infostructure ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “abounded unto the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+ROM 5 16 ns9a grammar-connect-logic-result 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])

+ROM 5 16 uh4x grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 followed many trespasses What follows the word **And** here contrasts the way **the gift** and **the judgment** happened. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Yet” or “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ROM 5 17 n5zx grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains the difference between **the trespass** and **the gift** (See [5:15](../05/15.md) for similar ideas)). Alternate translation: “For this reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+ROM 5 17 mhtc grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1
Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) ROM 5 17 lcyd figs-possession τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι 1 See how you translated this phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 17 whbf figs-nominaladj τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑνός…τοῦ ἑνὸς 2 See how you translated these nominal adjectives in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ROM 5 17 yvq5 figs-abstractnouns τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος…τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης…ἐν ζωῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how excessively kind God is and how he gives people a right relationship with him … by living eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ ROM 5 17 kz6z figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν 1 ROM 5 17 lf7t grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 See how you translated this phrase in [5:15](../05/15/.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 17 hfvt figs-infostructure ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “because of the one man Jesus Christ will … reign in life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ROM 5 17 xy6h figs-metaphor οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες, ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were kings in a location called **life**. He means that they **will rule** with **Jesus Christ** and live eternally. If your readers would not understand what **rule in life** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness rule and live eternally” or “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness live as kings forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 5 17 nr25 figs-distinguish οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες 1 This clause gives describes the people who will **rule in life**. It is not making a distinction between **those who receive** and those who **rule**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])\n +ROM 5 17 nr25 figs-distinguish οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες 1 This clause gives describes the people who will **rule in life**. It is not making a distinction between **those who receive** and those who **rule**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
ROM 5 17 o8c3 figs-possession οἱ…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **righteousness** is a **gift**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “those who receive the gift of being made righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 17 fodc figs-possession οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος… λαμβάνοντες 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **abundance** that comes from **grace**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “abundant” instead of the noun “abundance” or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 5 18 e7cq figs-ellipsis 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, just as one man trespassed and this caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteous and this caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ ROM 5 19 huig figs-nominaladj ἁμαρτωλοὶ …οἱ πολλοί…δί ROM 5 20 zsxd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **Now** indicates that what follows in [5:20–21](..05/20.md) links how **sin** and **grace** relate. Alternate translation: “Not only that, but when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 5 20 ttcw figs-abstractnouns νόμος…τὸ παράπτωμα…ἡ ἁμαρτία… ἡ χάρις 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns: **law** in [5:12–13](../05/12.md), **trespass** in [5:15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [5:12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [5:15;17](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 5 20 w958 figs-personification παρεισῆλθεν 1 the law came in Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **came in** can mean to sneak in unnoticed (See Galatians 2:4; Jude 1:4](gal/02/04.md), Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 5 20 relk figs-metaphor πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα…ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the trespass*, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were crops. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If your readers would not understand what ** increase** or **abounded** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “how people trespass God’s commands would become more evident … people living sinfully became more evident, how gracious God is became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +ROM 5 20 relk figs-metaphor πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα…ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the trespass*, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were crops. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If your readers would not understand what ** increase** or **abounded** mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “how people trespass God’s commands would become more evident … people living sinfully became more evident, how gracious God is became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 5 20 wbh3 ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα 1 Use a natural way in your language for expressing the ideas of result or purpose. This clause could refer to: (1) the result of God’s purpose of giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “causing how much people trespass what God commands to increase” (2) God’s purpose in giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “in order to expose how much people trespass what God commands” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of his giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “to cause an increase in how much people trespass” ROM 5 20 k6da grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 2 What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to what was expected, that the God’s **grace** actually became more evident when **sin increased**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 5 20 godn figs-metaphor οὗ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** and **grace** as if they were located somewhere. Here, **where** indicates the influence or power of **sin** and **grace**. If your readers would not understand what **where** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “whatever ways” or “however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -968,18 +968,18 @@ ROM 6 1 f5qt grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purp ROM 6 2 pa6g figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 **May it never be** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in [3:31](../03/31.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ROM 6 2 rgte figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ? 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if were a location where Christians could live or die. He means that for baptized Christians the spiritual kingdom of sin and death (See [5:14,17,21](../05/14.md) lost its power over them when Christ was crucified (See [6:6](../06/06.md)). If your readers would not understand what **to die to sin** or **live in it** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer dominated by sinning, how could we still live as though we are dominated by sinning” or “Since we are not dominated by sinning anymore, we certainly cannot still live sinfully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 2 gddr figs-exclusive οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν 1 Unless otherwise noted, **we** and “our” are inclusive of all Christians in this chapter. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers who in Christ died” or “We Christians who died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 6 3 ok3v grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, **of the fact that** indicates that what follows is the rhetorical answer to the question of **are you ignorant**. Alternate translation: “of this reality:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])\n +ROM 6 3 ok3v grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, **of the fact that** indicates that what follows is the rhetorical answer to the question of **are you ignorant**. Alternate translation: “of this reality:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
ROM 6 3 wh26 writing-pronouns ὅσοι 1 The pronoun **as many as** refers to those people who **were baptized into Christ Jesus**. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many people as” or “however many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 6 3 bd11 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Christ Jesus** and **his death** as if they were locations where someone could **be baptized**. He means that people who are **baptized** as Christians are united to **Christ Jesus** and spiritually share in benefits of **his death**. If your readers would not understand what **baptized into** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “become baptized as a Christians are united to Christ Jesus and also as many as become baptized are united to his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 3 jfs4 figs-parallelism ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens when a Christian is **baptized**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “become baptized as Christians are spiritually united to Christ Jesus and spiritually participate in his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ROM 6 3 tcve figs-abstractnouns τὸν θάνατον 1 See how you translated **death** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 6 3 tcve figs-abstractnouns τὸν θάνατον 1 See how you translated **death** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 6 4 ufp9 figs-parallelism συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον 1 This sentence means the same thing as [6:3](../06/03.md). Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens in Christian **baptism**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 6 4 f4va figs-metaphor συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον 1 We were buried, then, with him through baptism into death Paul speaks figuratively of **baptism** as if it were a burial. He means that in the physical act of going under the water in **baptism**, the Christian ceases to be under the control of eternal **death** (See “died to sin” in [6:2](../06/02.md)). If your readers would not understand what **buried** and **baptism into death** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “So then, being baptized represents being buried with Christ in his tomb” or “When we were baptized, we ceased to be controlled by eternal death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 4 m43r grammar-connect-logic-result συνετάφημεν οὖν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, to emphasis what results from **baptism**. Alternate translation: “So then, we were buried” or “As a result, we were buried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 6 4 y71v figs-abstractnouns τὸν θάνατον…ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός…ζωῆς 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns: **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 4 k1el grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God instituted **baptism**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that we could walk in in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) ROM 6 4 qa7r figs-parallelism ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the link between Christ’s resurrection and the Christian’s new way of **life** after **baptism**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would newly live like Christ did when Father gloriously raised him from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ROM 6 4 z6zk figs-simile ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised from the dead**, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when the Father gloriously raised Christ from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n +ROM 6 4 z6zk figs-simile ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised from the dead**, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when the Father gloriously raised Christ from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
ROM 6 4 dpy2 figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Father gloriously resurrected Christ from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 6 4 t47r figs-idiom ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father, so also we might walk in newness of life Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** is an idiom meaning “resurrected from where dead people are” (See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ resurrected from death” or “Christ resurrected from the grave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 6 4 ce9z figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father, so also we might walk in newness of life Paul is using the adjective **the dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “where dead people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -987,29 +987,29 @@ ROM 6 4 gblc figs-possession διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός 1 ROM 6 4 r3hn guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 **Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and **Christ** Jesus, as his “Son” (See [1:3–4, 7](../01/03.md)). Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. Alternate translation: “God his Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ROM 6 4 gtns figs-idiom ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 Here, the verb **might walk** is an Old Testament idiom meaning “would live” or “would act.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we might live in new way” or “we would act like new people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 6 4 x1t4 figs-rpronouns καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Paul uses the phrase **we too** to emphasize the union of the baptized Christian with Christ’s resurrection. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we who are baptized too” or “even we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ROM 6 4 hyab figs-possession ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **life** that is characterized by **newness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “renewed” instead of the noun “newness.” Alternate translation: “with a renewed life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])\n\n -ROM 6 4 lvim figs-abstractnouns ἐν καινότητι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **newness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “renewed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 6 4 hyab figs-possession ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **life** that is characterized by **newness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “renewed” instead of the noun “newness.” Alternate translation: “with a renewed life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])

+ROM 6 4 lvim figs-abstractnouns ἐν καινότητι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **newness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “renewed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 6 5 p6xk figs-metaphor 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection Paul speaks figuratively of **death** and **resurrection** as if they were things to which baptized Christians could be physically attached. He means that in baptism Christians participate in the spiritually benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day resurrect as he did. If your readers would not understand what **united with** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, since we participate in Christ’s death through baptism, we will definitely participate in Christ’s life through resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 5 jdzp grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ γὰρ 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He goes on to conclude that baptized Christians will **certainly be united with** Christ’s **resurrection**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “Indeed, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -ROM 6 5 xh3z writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…τῆς 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection The pronoun **his** refers to Christ, not the “Father” (See [6:1–3](../06/01.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s … with Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])\n +ROM 6 5 xh3z writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…τῆς 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection The pronoun **his** refers to Christ, not the “Father” (See [6:1–3](../06/01.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s … with Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ROM 6 5 wnd4 figs-metaphor σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **united** can mean “planted with,” Paul may be figuratively likening the process of burying a seed in the ground with being buried with Christ, and the result of a sprouting plant with Christ’s resurrection. If it would help your readers understand, you could make this explicit in your translation. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we have become planted with” or “have grown together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 5 z8wa figs-abstractnouns τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ…τῆς ἀναστάσεως 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **likeness** and **resurrection**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 5 hg5y figs-abstractnouns τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection The implication is that **likeness of his death** refers to “baptism” (See [6:4](../06/04.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death through baptism” or “in baptism that represents dying with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 6 5 ruhn grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλὰ καὶ…ἐσόμεθα 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection Here, **also certainly** strongly emphasizes that the reality of future resurrection is established in Christian baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could move this phrase to the beginning of the clause to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that we will” or “it is absolutely certain that we will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])\n +ROM 6 5 ruhn grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλὰ καὶ…ἐσόμεθα 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection Here, **also certainly** strongly emphasizes that the reality of future resurrection is established in Christian baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could move this phrase to the beginning of the clause to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that we will” or “it is absolutely certain that we will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
ROM 6 5 f1q1 figs-ellipsis τῆς ἀναστάσεως 1 we have become united with him in the likeness of his death … be united with his resurrection A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, his is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with his resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 6 6 gv43 grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γινώσκοντες 1 our old man was crucified with him Here, **knowing this** indicates that what follows is accepted teaching. Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain of this fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 6 6 rv8u grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι…ἵνα 1 our old man was crucified with him What follows **that** gives the reason why **our old man was crucified**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “the reason why … was in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 6 6 fhvh figs-activepassive ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 6 6 lu12 figs-metaphor ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη 1 Paul speaks figuratively of sinful humanity as if it were an **old man** nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was **crucified** he destroyed the power of **sin** and death that controlled humanity (See [6:12–18](../06/14.md). If your readers would not understand what **old man** or **crucified with him** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “on Christ’s cross, God crucified the power of sin that controlled humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 6 y0ib writing-pronouns συνεσταυρώθη 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Christ (See [6:4](../06/04.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ROM 6 6 n6o6 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **crucified our old man**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n +ROM 6 6 n6o6 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **crucified our old man**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
ROM 6 6 jw00 figs-metaphor καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 the body of sin Paul speaks figuratively of **the body of sin** as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled or made void. He means that how the human race was controlled by living sinfully was spiritually cancelled by the power Christ’s crucifixion. If your readers would not understand what **body of sin** and **nullified** and **enslaved to sin** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God would completely end how living sinfully controls the human race, and he would free us from how living sinfully enslaves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 6 6 jpge figs-activepassive καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 the body of sin If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God nullified how we are dominated by sinning so that living sinfully would no longer control us” or “God canceled the power of sin over our bodies, making us no longer enslaved to living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 6 6 l6pd figs-possession τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 the body of sin Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the body** is related to **sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the body of sin** could refer to: (1) how humans tend to **sin**. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 6 6 l3zm figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας…ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 the body of sin See how you translated the abstract noun **sin** in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 6 c5ie τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 the body of sin Use a natural way in your language for expressing a result or purpose clause. This following clause could refer to: (1) the result of **the body of sin** being **nullified**. Alternate translation: “causing us to no longer be enslaved to sin” (2) God’s purpose for nullifying **the body of sin**. Alternate translation: “in order that we would no longer be enslaved to sin” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of nullifying **the body of sin**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “in order to cause us no longer be enslaved to sin” ROM 6 7 qvmj grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 What follows **For** summarizes the ideas in [6:6](../06/06.md). Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -ROM 6 7 f893 figs-explicit ὁ…ἀποθανὼν 1 The implication is that **the one having died** is the same as “the old man” who “was crucified” in [6:6](../06/06.md). Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (See [6:2](../06/02.md) to be **righteous**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “any person who dies to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +ROM 6 7 f893 figs-explicit ὁ…ἀποθανὼν 1 The implication is that **the one having died** is the same as “the old man” who “was crucified” in [6:6](../06/06.md). Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (See [6:2](../06/02.md) to be **righteous**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “any person who dies to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 6 7 hoqm figs-activepassive δεδικαίωται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has declared free” or “God declares is righteous” or “God has vindicated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 6 7 z81y figs-possession ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **sin** is related to **has been declared righteous**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from being enslaved to sin” or “from sin’s control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 6 7 geua figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in [6:6](../06/06/md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1020,14 +1020,14 @@ ROM 6 8 cg31 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 we have died with Christ H ROM 6 8 nuc1 figs-explicit καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ 1 we have died with Christ The implication is that **live together with him** refers to “everlasting life” (See [5:21; 6:4–5](../05/21.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 6 9 bebx figs-infostructure εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει 1 We know that since Christ has been raised from the dead If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ is not going to die again, because he has been raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ROM 6 9 zdkc grammar-connect-words-phrases εἰδότες ὅτι 1 We know that since Christ has been raised from the dead Here, **knowing that** indicates that what follows is accepted teaching (See [6:6](../06/06.md) for a similar phrase)). Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -ROM 6 9 gjqq figs-activepassive Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God caused Christ to resurrect after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n +ROM 6 9 gjqq figs-activepassive Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God caused Christ to resurrect after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ROM 6 9 zkq2 figs-idiom ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 We know that since Christ has been raised from the dead See how you translated the phrase **raised from the dead** in [6:4](../06/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ROM 6 9 lvv8 figs-parallelism οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει 1 from the dead These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **Christ** can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “is now Lord over death” or “has completely mastered death's power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])\n +ROM 6 9 lvv8 figs-parallelism οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει 1 from the dead These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **Christ** can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “is now Lord over death” or “has completely mastered death's power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
ROM 6 9 wem1 figs-personification θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει 1 death no longer has authority over him Here, **death** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a **lord** who could rule over someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he is not dead anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 6 9 kl3e figs-abstractnouns θάνατος 1 from the dead See how you translated the abstract noun **death** in [6:4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 10 ehi9 writing-pronouns γὰρ 1 For in regard to the death that he died to sin, he died once for all Here, what follows **For** indicates the reason why Christ “no longer dies” in [6:9](../06/09.md).(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 6 10 e290 writing-pronouns ὃ…ὃ 1 For in regard to the death that he died to sin, he died once for all Here the phrase translated **in that** is a pronoun. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, **in that** could refer to: (1) the way Christ died and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that…the way that” or “how … how” (2) Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “the death … the life” (3) the timing of Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “when … now that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ROM 6 10 aw31 writing-pronouns τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν…ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ 1 For in regard to the death that he died to sin, he died once for all Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** and **God** as if they were locations in which Christ died and lives (See also the similar wording in [6:2](../06/02.md) for how this fact effects baptized Christians)). Paul means that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin” (See [6:6](../06/06.md), and now that he is resurrected, he lives for the sake of glorifying God. If your readers would not understand what **died for sin** and **lives for God** means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of dominating how sinning controls people … he lives for the sake of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +ROM 6 10 aw31 writing-pronouns τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν…ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ 1 For in regard to the death that he died to sin, he died once for all Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** and **God** as if they were locations in which Christ died and lives (See also the similar wording in [6:2](../06/02.md) for how this fact effects baptized Christians)). Paul means that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin” (See [6:6](../06/06.md), and now that he is resurrected, he lives for the sake of glorifying God. If your readers would not understand what **died for sin** and **lives for God** means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of dominating how sinning controls people … he lives for the sake of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ROM 6 11 cac8 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως 1 In the same way, you also must consider This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “For this reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 6 11 zjjv writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς 1 In the same way, you also must consider Throughout [6:11-23](../06/11/.md), the pronoun **you** and “your” are plural and refer to the church at Rome. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you at Rome” or “you believers at Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 6 11 qvoj figs-rpronouns λογίζεσθε ἑαυτοὺς εἶναι 1 In the same way, you also must consider Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize how important it is for the church at Rome to personally apply the spiritual benefits of Christ’s death and resurrection to their own lives. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “regard yourselves to be personally” or “reckon yourselves as actually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -1039,16 +1039,16 @@ ROM 6 12 z7zh figs-imperative μὴ…βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 ROM 6 12 cm8d figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι 1 in your mortal body Paul could be referring figuratively to the **body**, one part of the human being, to mean the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “over you” or “any of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 6 12 z1ia grammar-collectivenouns ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι, 1 in your mortal body The word **body** is a singular noun and could emphasize the unity of the individual members of the whole church at Rome. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “over your mortal bodies” or “throughout your whole church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) ROM 6 12 r462 grammar-connect-logic-result] εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts This phrase indicates what happens when **sin** rules. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **to obey** could refer to: (1) the result of letting **sin rule**. Alternate translation: “causing you to become obedient to lusting sinfully” (2) the way sin rules. Alternate translation: “by obeying how it tempts you to lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 6 12 zs9g figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lusts**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 6 12 zs9g figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lusts**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 6 12 kh3w writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts The pronoun **its** refers to **mortal body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ROM 6 13 wt07 figs-infostructure 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not present your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members to God as tools of righteousness. In other words, present yourselves to God, as living from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n +ROM 6 13 wt07 figs-infostructure 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not present your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members to God as tools of righteousness. In other words, present yourselves to God, as living from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ROM 6 13 mxto figs-infostructure μηδὲ παριστάνετε…παραστήσατε 1 in order that you may obey its lusts Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if their body parts were were **tools** that could be offered in service or used by someone. He means that the church at Rome should no longer use their body parts for sinning, but instead to live in the way God wants. If your readers would not understand what it means **to present** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “do not offer … offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 6 13 rnho figs-abstractnouns τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you use your body parts to live unrighteously through sinning … your body parts … to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n -ROM 6 13 r0ak figs-synecdoche τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν 2 in order that you may obey its lusts Paul could be referring figuratively to the **members**, the body parts of the human being, to mean the whole person (See [6:12](../06/12.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Here, **your members** could mean: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “yourselves … yourselves” (2) the individual body parts. Alternate translation: “your body parts … your body parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n +ROM 6 13 rnho figs-abstractnouns τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης 1 in order that you may obey its lusts If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you use your body parts to live unrighteously through sinning … your body parts … to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ROM 6 13 r0ak figs-synecdoche τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν 2 in order that you may obey its lusts Paul could be referring figuratively to the **members**, the body parts of the human being, to mean the whole person (See [6:12](../06/12.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Here, **your members** could mean: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “yourselves … yourselves” (2) the individual body parts. Alternate translation: “your body parts … your body parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ROM 6 13 qncn figs-possession ὅπλα ἀδικίας…ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης 1 in order that you may obey its lusts Paul is using the possessive form to describe what characterizes these **tools**. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools … as righteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously … as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ROM 6 13 hlzf ὅπλα…ὅπλα 1 in order that you may obey its lusts Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **tools** often means “weapons,” Paul could be stressing the spiritual warfare that is involved for the Christian to “not allow sin to rule over” them (See [6:14](../06/14.md)). If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons” ROM 6 13 dz8u figs-possession ὅπλα…ὅπλα 1 in order that you may obey its lusts Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **as** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as tools … as tools” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 6 13 zgd3 figs-parallelism παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ…καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts These two phrases basically mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to urge the church at Rome to commit their whole lives to God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can reorder and combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Instead, because you are free from living sinfully through being baptized, use every body part as a tool for serving God” or “Instead, because you are no longer dominated by living sinfully in baptism, present your whole body and life to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])\n +ROM 6 13 zgd3 figs-parallelism παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ…καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ 1 in order that you may obey its lusts These two phrases basically mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to urge the church at Rome to commit their whole lives to God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can reorder and combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Instead, because you are free from living sinfully through being baptized, use every body part as a tool for serving God” or “Instead, because you are no longer dominated by living sinfully in baptism, present your whole body and life to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
ROM 6 13 oiz0 figs-rpronouns ἑαυτοὺς 1 in order that you may obey its lusts Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize how the church at Rome should commit their whole lives to God. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “your whole lives” or “yourselves completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ROM 6 13 px9k figs-simile ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας 1 in order that you may obey its lusts The point of this comparison is that the church at Rome should live in such a way that demonstrates that the reality that they have been baptized, and are now **dead to sin, but alive to God” (See [6:11](../06/11.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because through being baptized you are free from living sinfully” or “because through baptism you are no longer dominated by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ROM 6 14 u36f grammar-connect-logic-result 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1056,17 +1056,17 @@ ROM 6 14 gez3 figs-personification ἁμαρτία…ὑμῶν οὐ κυριε ROM 6 14 bl09 figs-declarative ἁμαρτία…οὐ κυριεύσει 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you Paul is using a future statement to give a command or strong appeal. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command or appeal. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ROM 6 14 caqv grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges the church at Rome not to **allow sin to rule over** them. Alternate translation: “The reason for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) ROM 6 14 a0dz figs-personification οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you Paul speaks figuratively of **law** and **grace** as if they were a kingdoms ruled by **sin** (See [5:17,21](../05/17.md) for a similar idea)). He means that believing and baptized Jewish Christians are freed from the spiritual dominion of the requirements of the **law**, and now they serve the gracious God (See [6:15–23](../06/15.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **under law** and **under grace** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, the law no longer dominates you, but you are freed by how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 6 14 ypqx figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ χάριν 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serve the gracious God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 6 14 ypqx figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ χάριν 1 Do not allow sin to rule over you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serve the gracious God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 6 15 zxb8 figs-rquestion τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? 1 What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be Paul is using a rhetorical questions in [6:15–16](../06/15.md) to reject certain rumors that misrepresent his teachings (See also [6:1–3](../06/01.md)). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly are not saying that we should keep sinning since the law no longer dominates us, and because we now are freed by how gracious God is!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ROM 6 15 a74y figs-ellipsis τί οὖν? 1 What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying” or “What are we saying then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])\n +ROM 6 15 a74y figs-ellipsis τί οὖν? 1 What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying” or “What are we saying then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ROM 6 15 rtts figs-quotations τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? 1 What then? Shall we sin because we are not under law, but under grace? May it never be If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation that is an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying? ‘We should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” or “What are we saying then? ‘Let us sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ROM 6 15 t4cc figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ χάριν 1 May it never be See how you translated this abstract noun phrase in [6:14](../06/14.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 15 c77g figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be **May it never be** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in [3:31](../03/31.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ROM 6 16 n5j4 figs-hypo οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “Suppose you present yourselves to someone to obey as slaves. Then you would become slaves to that person you obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -ROM 6 16 hn6y writing-pronouns ᾧ…ᾧ 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience The pronoun translated **what** can indicate a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, **what** could refer to: (1) the concepts of **sin** and **obedience**. Alternate translation: “to whatever … to whatever” (2) anyone or anything. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])\n +ROM 6 16 hn6y writing-pronouns ᾧ…ᾧ 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience The pronoun translated **what** can indicate a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, **what** could refer to: (1) the concepts of **sin** and **obedience**. Alternate translation: “to whatever … to whatever” (2) anyone or anything. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ROM 6 16 g6zz figs-hypo παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience See how you translated this similar phrase in [6:13](../06/13.md). ROM 6 16 pwwi figs-ellipsis δούλους 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **as** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 6 16 psrr grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὑπακοήν 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])\n +ROM 6 16 psrr grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὑπακοήν 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
ROM 6 16 sf8m figs-ellipsis δούλους 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **as** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 6 16 zim4 figs-abstractnouns ὑπακοήν…ὑπακοῆς 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **obedience**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 16 h0ar figs-personification ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 whether you are slaves to sin … or slaves to obedience Here, **sin** and **obedience** are spoken of as if they were masters that **slaves** would obey. Paul means that depending on how a person chooses to live, they end up obeying either sin or God, like a slave would serve a master. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you serve as slaves by sinning, leading you to die, or you serve as slaves by obeying God, leading you to become righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ ROM 6 16 zfgc grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς θάνατον…εἰς δι ROM 6 17 xj75 figs-exclamations χάρις…τῷ Θεῷ 1 For you were slaves of sin What follows this exclamatory phrase indicates the reason why Paul is thankful **to God**. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ROM 6 17 x5h8 figs-ellipsis χάρις 1 For you were slaves of sin A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **be** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “thanks be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 6 17 yxt7 figs-personification δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 For you were slaves of sin See how you translated the similar phrase **of sin** in [6:16](See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 6 17 uwcy figs-personification ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς 1 For you were slaves of sin Here, **the pattern of teaching** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be **obeyed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “but you fully accepted the form of teaching that others passed on to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])\n +ROM 6 17 uwcy figs-personification ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς 1 For you were slaves of sin Here, **the pattern of teaching** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be **obeyed**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “but you fully accepted the form of teaching that others passed on to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ROM 6 17 g1gn grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 2 For you were slaves of sin What follows the word **but** here is meant to strongly contrast the former sinful life of Christians at Rome. Instead, they now **have obeyed God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” or “on the contrary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ROM 6 17 n3nz writing-pronouns ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς 1 For you were slaves of sin The pronoun **which** refers to **the pattern**. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you became willingly obedient to which pattern of teaching you were given” or “you are now fully obedient to that pattern of teaching that others passed down to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 6 17 my2z figs-metonymy ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας 1 but you have obeyed from the heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being or motives. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you became wholeheartedly obedient” or “you totally obeyed” or “you obeyed from deep within” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1093,16 +1093,16 @@ ROM 6 19 lhh4 figs-nominaladj ἀνθρώπινον 1 because of the weakness of ROM 6 19 gt1n figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν. …τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 because of the weakness of your flesh If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how immature you are … body parts … act impurely and increasingly wicked behavior … your body parts … for living rightly in order to live like God’s people should” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 6 19 l4ah figs-idiom τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 because of the weakness of your flesh Here, the term **flesh** is an idiom meaning “human.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “how immature you are” or “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 6 19 bmo7 figs-parallelism ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 because of the weakness of your flesh These two clauses mean the opposite thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to show the contrast between being **slaves to uncleanness** and **slaves to righteousness**. Be sure to retain the similar forms to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ROM 6 19 jbcz figs-personification ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 because of the weakness of your flesh Here, **uncleanness** and ** righteousness** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters of **members**. Paul means that the church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, but should now use their bodies to serve righteous purposes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way you used to slavishly offer yourselves to live impurely, leading you to act more and more lawless, so now offer yourselves to live righteously for God, leading you to act holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])\n +ROM 6 19 jbcz figs-personification ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 because of the weakness of your flesh Here, **uncleanness** and ** righteousness** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters of **members**. Paul means that the church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, but should now use their bodies to serve righteous purposes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way you used to slavishly offer yourselves to live impurely, leading you to act more and more lawless, so now offer yourselves to live righteously for God, leading you to act holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ROM 6 19 ran5 figs-synecdoche τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν 2 presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil Paul refers figuratively to **members**, parts of the human body, to mean the whole person (See also [6:13](../06/13.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “yourselves … yourselves” or “your bodies … your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 6 19 ka0f figs-imperative νῦν παραστήσατε 1 presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates either an urgent appeal or a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “I beg you” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “you must now use” or “I beg you now to present” or “I urge you now to offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -ROM 6 19 o0ta grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading you to live holy” or “causing you to become sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n +ROM 6 19 o0ta grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 presented the parts of your body as slaves to uncleanness and to evil This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading you to live holy” or “causing you to become sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ROM 6 20 s9pk grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 you were free from righteousness Here, **For** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ROM 6 20 aavw figs-metaphor δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 you were free from righteousness These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to emphasize the relationship between **sin** and **righteousness**. Be sure to retain the similar phrasing to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 6 20 i1ze figs-personification ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 you were free from righteousness Here, **sin** and **righteousness** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, they were not **slaves** of **righteousness** by serving God‘s purposes (See [6:19](../06/19.md)). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you did not serve God” or “you were not enslaved to righteousness” or “you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 6 20 mu0y figs-irony ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of **free**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were alienated from serving God’s righteous purposes” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) ROM 6 21 x3bn grammar-connect-logic-result 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit then did you have from that of which you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ROM 6 21 kjl5 figs-rquestion τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in [6:20](../06/20.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So then, it is clear that the shameful way you used to live never produced anything beneficial for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\r\n\r +ROM 6 21 kjl5 figs-rquestion τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in [6:20](../06/20.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So then, it is clear that the shameful way you used to live never produced anything beneficial for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\r
\r ROM 6 21 vgam figs-idiom καρπὸν 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? Here, the term **fruit** is an idiom meaning “benefit” or “advantage.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” or “value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 6 21 pnbm figs-explicit ἐφ’ οἷς…ἐκείνων 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? The implication is that **which things** and **those things** refer to sins. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … those sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 6 21 j2ie figs-abstractnouns τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος 1 At that time, what fruit then did you have of the things of which you are now ashamed? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **outcome**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “This is because what finally results from those things is death” or “Certainly, those things end in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1153,86 +1153,86 @@ ROM 7 7 k1jj figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 What will we say th ROM 7 7 erx6 μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be “Of course that is not true!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in [Romans 9:14](../09/14.md). ROM 7 7 zl8m figs-personification τὴν ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔγνων, εἰ μὴ διὰ νόμου 1 I would never have known sin, if it were not through the law Paul is speaking of **sin** as if it were a person who can act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 7 8 mz77 figs-personification ἀφορμὴν δὲ λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν; 1 But sin took the opportunity … brought about every lust Paul continues comparing sin to a person who can act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 7 8 r5i2 χωρὶς…νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά 1 without the law, sin is dead “if there were no law, there would be no breaking of the law, so there would be no sin” +ROM 7 8 r5i2 χωρὶς…νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά 1 without the law, sin is dead Alternate translation: “if there were no law, there would be no breaking of the law, so there would be no sin” ROM 7 9 q9le figs-personification ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν 1 sin regained life This could mean: (1) Paul realized that he was sinning. (2) Paul strongly desired to sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 7 10 yu1u figs-metaphor εὑρέθη μοι ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν, αὕτη εἰς θάνατον. 1 The commandment that was to bring life turned out to be death for me Paul speaks of God’s **commandment** as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “God gave me the commandment so I would live, but it killed me instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 11 r582 figs-personification ἡ γὰρ ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἐξηπάτησέν με καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς ἀπέκτεινεν 1 For sin took the opportunity through the commandment and deceived me. Through the commandment it killed me As in [Romans 7:7-8](./07.md), Paul is describing **sin** as a person who can do three things: take the opportunity, deceive, and kill. Alternate translation: “Because I wanted to sin, I deceived myself into thinking that I could sin and obey the commandment at the same time, but God punished me for disobeying the commandment by separating me from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 7 11 qi99 ἡ…ἁμαρτία 1 sin “my desire to sin” +ROM 7 11 qi99 ἡ…ἁμαρτία 1 sin Alternate translation: “my desire to sin” ROM 7 11 f6sx figs-metaphor ἀπέκτεινεν 1 it killed me Paul speaks of sin as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “it separated me from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 13 cz5k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between sin in his inner man and his mind with the law of God—between sin and good. ROM 7 13 us69 οὖν 1 So Paul is introducing a new topic. ROM 7 13 e1bx figs-rquestion τὸ…ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος? 1 did what is good become death to me? Paul uses this question to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 7 13 g451 τὸ…ἀγαθὸν 1 what is good This refers to God’s law. -ROM 7 13 qwe9 ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος 1 become death to me “did … cause me to die” +ROM 7 13 qwe9 ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος 1 become death to me Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die” ROM 7 13 hgm6 figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο! 1 May it never be This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “Of course that is not true!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 7 13 m4l5 figs-personification ἡ ἁμαρτία…μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον; 1 sin … brought about death in me Paul is viewing **sin** as though it were a person who could act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 7 13 pnq6 μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον 1 brought about death in me “separated me from God” -ROM 7 13 a6zb διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 through the commandment “because I disobeyed the commandment” +ROM 7 13 pnq6 μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον 1 brought about death in me Alternate translation: “separated me from God” +ROM 7 13 a6zb διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 through the commandment Alternate translation: “because I disobeyed the commandment” ROM 7 15 udc8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between his flesh and the law of God—between sin and good. -ROM 7 15 u3av ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω 1 For what I do, I do not really understand “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do” -ROM 7 15 hv9g ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι 1 For what I do “Because what I do” +ROM 7 15 u3av ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω 1 For what I do, I do not really understand Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do” +ROM 7 15 hv9g ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι 1 For what I do Alternate translation: “Because what I do” ROM 7 15 az2z figs-hyperbole οὐ…ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω 2 what I want to do, this I do not do The words **I do not do** are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does not do what he wants to do as often as he would like or that he does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “I do not always do what I want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ROM 7 15 zv5l figs-hyperbole ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ. 1 what I hate, this I do The words **I do**, which implies that he always does what he hates to do, are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “the things that I know are not good are the things that I sometimes do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ROM 7 16 y26s εἰ δὲ ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ 1 But if I do “However, if I do what I do not want to do” -ROM 7 16 q3b5 σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός 1 I agree with the law “I know God’s law is good” +ROM 7 16 y26s εἰ δὲ ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ 1 But if I do Alternate translation: “However, if I do what I do not want to do” +ROM 7 16 q3b5 σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός 1 I agree with the law Alternate translation: “I know God’s law is good” ROM 7 17 f6n8 figs-personification ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία 1 the sin that lives in me Paul describes **sin** as a living being that has the power to influence him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 7 18 p1c1 figs-metonymy τῇ σαρκί μου 1 my flesh Here, **flesh** is a metonym for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 7 19 ri3b ἀγαθόν 1 the good “the good deeds” or “the good actions” -ROM 7 19 j69g κακὸν 1 the evil “the evil deeds” or “the evil actions” +ROM 7 19 ri3b ἀγαθόν 1 the good Alternate translation: “the good deeds” or “the good actions” +ROM 7 19 j69g κακὸν 1 the evil Alternate translation: “the evil deeds” or “the evil actions” ROM 7 20 afw6 figs-personification ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία 1 rather sin that lives in me Paul speaks of **sin** as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 7 21 fbr9 figs-personification ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται 1 that evil is actually present in me Paul speaks of **evil** here as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 7 22 m13q figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 1 the inner man This refers to the newly-revived spirit of a person who trusts in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 7 23 clu4 βλέπω δὲ ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με 1 But I see a different principle in my body parts. It fights against that new principle in my mind. It takes me captive “But I am able only to do what my old nature tells me to do, not to live the new way the Spirit shows me” +ROM 7 23 clu4 βλέπω δὲ ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με 1 But I see a different principle in my body parts. It fights against that new principle in my mind. It takes me captive Alternate translation: “But I am able only to do what my old nature tells me to do, not to live the new way the Spirit shows me” ROM 7 23 t7yh τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου 1 new principle This refers to the new spiritually-alive nature. ROM 7 23 fct8 ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου 1 a different principle in my body parts This refers to the old nature, the way people are when they are born. -ROM 7 23 u4ny τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου 1 the principle of sin that is in my body parts “my sinful nature” +ROM 7 23 u4ny τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου 1 the principle of sin that is in my body parts Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” ROM 7 24 h8l8 figs-rquestion τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου? 1 Who will deliver me from this body of death? Paul uses this question to express great emotion. If your language has a way of showing great emotion through an exclamation or a question, use it here. Alternate translation: “I want someone to set me free from the control of what my body desires!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me “will rescue me” +ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me Alternate translation: “will rescue me” ROM 7 24 md8e figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 this body of death This is a metaphor that means a **body** that will experience physical **death**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 25 w9ui χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 But thanks be to God through Jesus Christ our Lord This is the answer to the question in 7:24. ROM 7 25 adx1 figs-metaphor ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 So then, I myself serve the law of God with my mind. However, with the flesh I serve the principle of sin The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either the **law of God** or the principle of **sin**. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) ROM 8 1 xq2y 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good. ROM 8 1 xw65 figs-explicit οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus Here, **condemnation** refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true” +ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true” ROM 8 2 x8uu figs-explicit ὁ…νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 the law of the Spirit of life in Christ Jesus Here, **the Spirit of life** refers to God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the working of the Holy Spirit in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 2 th4n figs-metaphor ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου 1 has set you free from the law of sin and death Being **set free** from **the law of sin and death** is a metaphor for not being controlled by the law of sin and death. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 2 u82e τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου 1 the law of sin and death This could mean: (1) the **law** of Moses, which provokes people to sin, and their sin causes them to die. Alternate translation: “the law which causes sin and death” (2) Paul is stating the principle that people **sin** and die. ROM 8 3 j98t figs-personification τὸ γὰρ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς 1 For what the law was unable to do because it was weak through the flesh, God did Here the **law** is described as a person who could not break the power of sin. Alternate translation: “For the law did not have the power to stop us from sinning, because the power of sin within us was too strong. But God did stop us from sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 8 3 etf2 διὰ τῆς σαρκός 1 through the flesh “because of people’s sinful nature” +ROM 8 3 etf2 διὰ τῆς σαρκός 1 through the flesh Alternate translation: “because of people’s sinful nature” ROM 8 3 p4qq τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας, κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 He … sent his own Son in the likeness of sinful flesh … an offering for sin … he condemned sin The **Son** of God forever satisfied God’s holy anger against our sin by giving his own body and human life as the eternal sacrifice for sin. ROM 8 3 csl8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸν 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -ROM 8 3 uf94 ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας 1 in the likeness of sinful flesh “who looked like any other sinful human being” -ROM 8 3 hfr2 καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 to be an offering for sin “so that he could die as a sacrifice for our sins” -ROM 8 3 es29 κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί 1 he condemned sin in the flesh “God broke the power of sin through the body of his Son” +ROM 8 3 uf94 ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας 1 in the likeness of sinful flesh Alternate translation: “who looked like any other sinful human being” +ROM 8 3 hfr2 καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 to be an offering for sin Alternate translation: “so that he could die as a sacrifice for our sins” +ROM 8 3 es29 κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί 1 he condemned sin in the flesh Alternate translation: “God broke the power of sin through the body of his Son” ROM 8 4 j9ff figs-activepassive τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν 1 the requirements of the law might be fulfilled in us You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill what the law requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 8 4 acc4 figs-metaphor τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν 1 we who walk not according to the flesh Here, **walking** on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. Alternate translation: “we who do not obey our sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 4 bgg7 figs-idiom τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν 1 Here, **flesh** is an idiom for sinful human nature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ROM 8 4 a5t4 ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 but according to the Spirit “but who obey the Holy Spirit” +ROM 8 4 a5t4 ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 but according to the Spirit Alternate translation: “but who obey the Holy Spirit” ROM 8 6 y6p7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to contrast the flesh with the Spirit we now have. ROM 8 6 vyw4 figs-personification τὸ…φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς…τὸ δὲ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 the mind set on the flesh … the mind set on the Spirit Here Paul speaks of both the **mind of the flesh** and the **mind of the Spirit** as if they were living persons. Alternate translation: “the way sinful people think … the way people who listen to the Holy Spirit think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 8 8 me7u οἱ…ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες 1 Those who are in the flesh This refers to people who do what their sinful nature tells them to do. ROM 8 9 czm9 ἐν σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh “acting according to your sinful natures.” See how **the flesh** was translated in [Romans 8:5](../08/05.md). -ROM 8 9 e54u ἐν Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit “acting according to the Holy Spirit” +ROM 8 9 e54u ἐν Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit Alternate translation: “acting according to the Holy Spirit” ROM 8 9 p55f Πνεύματι,…Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ…Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ 1 Spirit … God’s Spirit … Spirit of Christ These all refer to the Holy **Spirit**. ROM 8 9 bei3 εἴπερ 1 if it is true that This phrase does not mean Paul doubts that some of them have God’s Spirit. Paul wants them to realize that they all have God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” ROM 8 10 q8be figs-explicit εἰ…Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If Christ is in you How **Christ** lives in a person could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “If Christ lives in you through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 10 e6g9 figs-idiom τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν 1 the body is dead with respect to sin This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually **dead** to the power of sin. (2) the physical **body** will still die because of sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 8 10 yb1b figs-idiom τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην 1 the spirit is alive with respect to righteousness This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually **alive** because God has given him power to do what is right. (2) God will bring the person back to life after he dies because God is righteous and gives believers eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 8 11 jlc9 εἰ δὲ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If the Spirit … lives in you Paul assumes that the Holy Spirit lives in his readers. Alternate translation: “Since the Spirit of the one who raised Jesus from the dead lives in you” -ROM 8 11 b9pu τοῦ ἐγείραντος 1 of him who raised “of God, who raised” +ROM 8 11 b9pu τοῦ ἐγείραντος 1 of him who raised Alternate translation: “of God, who raised” ROM 8 11 jr6p figs-idiom ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 raised Jesus Here “to raise” is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ROM 8 11 t27d τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν 1 mortal bodies “your physical bodies” or “your bodies, which will die someday” -ROM 8 12 mv1r ἄρα οὖν 1 So then “Because what I have just told you is true” +ROM 8 11 t27d τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν 1 mortal bodies Alternate translation: “your physical bodies” or “your bodies, which will die someday” +ROM 8 12 mv1r ἄρα οὖν 1 So then Alternate translation: “Because what I have just told you is true” ROM 8 12 qw5b ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. ROM 8 12 e3j8 figs-metaphor ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν 1 we are debtors Paul is speaking of obedience as if it were paying back a debt. Alternate translation: “we need to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 12 fb3m figs-ellipsis οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ, τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν 1 but not to the flesh to live according to the flesh You can include the implied word “debtors.” Alternate translation: “but we are not debtors to the flesh, and we do not have to obey our sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 8 13 ri75 εἰ γὰρ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε 1 For if you live according to the flesh “Because if you live only to please your sinful desires” -ROM 8 13 b9n5 μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν 1 you are about to die “you will certainly be separated from God” +ROM 8 13 ri75 εἰ γὰρ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε 1 For if you live according to the flesh Alternate translation: “Because if you live only to please your sinful desires” +ROM 8 13 b9n5 μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν 1 you are about to die Alternate translation: “you will certainly be separated from God” ROM 8 13 ld2h figs-metaphor εἰ δὲ Πνεύματι τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε 1 but if by the Spirit you put to death the body’s actions Paul speaks of not doing sinful **deeds** as putting them to death. Alternate translation: “but if by the power of the Holy Spirit you stop obeying your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 14 u8pv figs-activepassive ὅσοι γὰρ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται 1 For as many as are led by the Spirit of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For all the people whom the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 8 14 gd1i υἱοί Θεοῦ 1 sons of God Here, **sons of God** refers to all believers in Jesus. -ROM 8 15 ecq3 ἐν ᾧ κράζομεν 1 by which we cry “who causes us to cry out” +ROM 8 15 ecq3 ἐν ᾧ κράζομεν 1 by which we cry Alternate translation: “who causes us to cry out” ROM 8 15 vxs9 translate-unknown Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ 1 Abba, Father **Abba** is the word for **Father** in the Aramaic language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ROM 8 17 fj7w figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ 1 heirs of God Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “we also will one day receive what God has promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 17 q751 figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοι…Χριστοῦ 1 we are joint heirs with Christ Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. God will give to us what he gives to Christ. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1255,26 +1255,26 @@ ROM 8 23 qsb9 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν τοῦ σώματο ROM 8 24 x4gi figs-activepassive τῇ γὰρ ἐλπίδι ἐσώθημεν 1 For in this certain hope we were saved You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For God saved us because we hoped in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 8 24 tks9 figs-rquestion ἐλπὶς δὲ βλεπομένη, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐλπίς; ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει? 1 Now hope that is seen is not hope. For who hopes for what he can see? Paul uses a question to help his audience understand what **hope** is. Alternate translation: “But if we are confidently waiting, that means we do not yet have what we want. No one can confidently wait if he already has what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 8 26 h8jy 0 Connecting Statement: Though Paul has been emphasizing that there is a struggle in believers between the flesh and the Spirit, he affirms that the Spirit is aiding us. -ROM 8 26 jmp8 στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις 1 inexpressible groans “with groanings that we cannot express in words” +ROM 8 26 jmp8 στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις 1 inexpressible groans Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words” ROM 8 27 tq4n ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 He who searches the hearts Here, **the one** refers to God. ROM 8 27 tz5h figs-metonymy ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who searches all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 8 27 v184 figs-metaphor ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 The phrase **searches the hearts** is a metaphor for examining thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 8 28 w4rz 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers that nothing can separate them from God’s love. ROM 8 28 q3ce figs-activepassive τοῖς…κλητοῖς οὖσιν 2 for those who are called You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for those whom God chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 8 29 m3vv οὓς προέγνω 1 those whom he foreknew “those whom he knew before he even created them” -ROM 8 29 rg4t καὶ προώρισεν 1 he also predestined “he also made it their destiny” or “he also planned in advance for them” +ROM 8 29 m3vv οὓς προέγνω 1 those whom he foreknew Alternate translation: “those whom he knew before he even created them” +ROM 8 29 rg4t καὶ προώρισεν 1 he also predestined Alternate translation: “he also made it their destiny” or “he also planned in advance for them” ROM 8 29 xhn2 figs-activepassive συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 to be conformed to the image of his Son God planned from before the beginning of creation to grow those who believe in Jesus, the **Son** of God, into persons who are like Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that he would change them to be like his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 8 29 yuw2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -ROM 8 29 lf49 εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν πρωτότοκον 1 that he might be the firstborn “so that his Son would be the firstborn” +ROM 8 29 lf49 εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν πρωτότοκον 1 that he might be the firstborn Alternate translation: “so that his Son would be the firstborn” ROM 8 29 s552 figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 among many brothers Here, **brothers** refers to all believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “among many brothers and sisters who belong to the family of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 8 30 hg3f οὓς…προώρισεν 1 Those whom he predestined “those whom God made plans for in advance” +ROM 8 30 hg3f οὓς…προώρισεν 1 Those whom he predestined Alternate translation: “those whom God made plans for in advance” ROM 8 30 g1y3 figs-explicit τούτους καὶ ἐδικαίωσεν 1 these he also justified Here, **justified** is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he also put right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 30 g29g figs-explicit τούτους καὶ ἐδόξασεν 1 these he also glorified The word **glorified** is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he will also glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 31 xpu3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν? 1 What then shall we say about these things? If God is for us, who is against us? Paul uses questions to emphasize the main point of what he said previously. Alternate translation: “This is what we should know from all of this: since God is helping us, no one can defeat us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 8 32 l73i guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 He who did not spare his own Son God the Father sent the Son of God, Jesus Christ, to the cross as the holy, infinite sacrifice necessary to satisfy God’s infinite, holy nature against the sin of humanity. Here, **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -ROM 8 32 b3au ἀλλὰ…παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 but delivered him up “but put him under the control of his enemies” +ROM 8 32 b3au ἀλλὰ…παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 but delivered him up Alternate translation: “but put him under the control of his enemies” ROM 8 32 gk4l figs-rquestion πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται? 1 how will he not also with him freely give us all things? Paul is using a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he will certainly and freely give us all things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ROM 8 32 rib2 πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται 1 freely give us all things “he will certainly also kindly give us all things” +ROM 8 32 rib2 πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται 1 freely give us all things Alternate translation: “he will certainly also kindly give us all things” ROM 8 33 vr1b figs-rquestion τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ? Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν. 1 Who will bring any accusation against God’s chosen ones? God is the one who justifies Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “No one can accuse us before God because he is the one who makes us right with him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 8 34 vt5r figs-rquestion τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν? 1 Who is the one who condemns? Paul uses a question for emphasis. He does not expect an answer. Alternate translation: “No one will condemn us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 8 34 vd8g translate-symaction ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God To be **at the right hand of God** is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “who is at the place of honor beside God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1290,44 +1290,44 @@ ROM 8 36 h6v7 figs-hyperbole θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέρ ROM 8 36 phxq figs-activepassive θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “our enemies continually seek to kill us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 8 36 g3pi figs-simile ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς 1 We were considered as sheep for the slaughter Here Paul compares to livestock those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. Alternate translation: “Our lives are considered of no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ROM 8 36 gmi0 figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Our lives have no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 8 37 iui3 ὑπερνικῶμεν 1 we are more than conquerors “we have complete victory” +ROM 8 37 iui3 ὑπερνικῶμεν 1 we are more than conquerors Alternate translation: “we have complete victory” ROM 8 37 wcm6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 through the one who loved us You can make explicit the kind of love that Jesus showed. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, who loved us so much he was willing to die for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced “I am confident” +ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced Alternate translation: “I am confident” ROM 8 38 js9q ἀρχαὶ 1 governments This could refer to: (1) demons. (2) human kings and rulers. ROM 8 38 q7ti οὔτε δυνάμεις 1 nor powers This could refer to: (1) spiritual beings with power. (2) human beings with power. ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. ROM 9 1 b89f 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe. ROM 9 1 yg93 figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say” +ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say” ROM 9 2 jx3a figs-idiom ὅτι λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου 1 that for me there is great sorrow and unceasing pain in my heart Here, **unceasing pain in my heart** is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. Alternate translation: “I tell you that I grieve very greatly and deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 9 2 jky1 figs-doublet λύπη…μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη 1 great sorrow and unceasing pain These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how great his emotions are. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 9 3 rh5h figs-activepassive ηὐχόμην γὰρ ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς, ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 For I could wish that I myself would be cursed and set apart from Christ for the sake of my brothers, those of my own race according to the flesh You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I personally would be willing to let God curse me and, keep me apart from Christ forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 9 3 eg9b τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. -ROM 9 4 p1ys οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 They are Israelites “who, like me, are Israelites” +ROM 9 4 p1ys οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 They are Israelites Alternate translation: “who, like me, are Israelites” ROM 9 4 l6vs figs-metaphor ὧν ἡ υἱοθεσία 1 They have adoption Here Paul uses the metaphor of **adoption** to indicate that the Israelites are like God’s children. Alternate translation: “who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 6 s2ma 0 Connecting Statement: Paul emphasizes that those who are born in the family of Israel can really only be a true part of Israel through faith. -ROM 9 6 equ8 οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 But it is not as though the promises of God have failed “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises” +ROM 9 6 equ8 οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 But it is not as though the promises of God have failed Alternate translation: “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises” ROM 9 6 wy8z οὐ γὰρ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ 1 For it is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel God did not make his promises to all the physical descendants of **Israel** (or Jacob), but to his spiritual descendants, that is, those who trust in Jesus. -ROM 9 7 s3rj οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα 1 Neither are all Abraham’s descendants truly his children “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants” +ROM 9 7 s3rj οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα 1 Neither are all Abraham’s descendants truly his children Alternate translation: “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants” ROM 9 8 s5xa figs-metonymy τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς, 1 the children of the flesh are not Here, **children of the flesh** is a metonym that refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “all of Abraham’s descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 9 8 y17u figs-metaphor οὐ…ταῦτα τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 children of God The phrase **children of God** is a metaphor that refers to people who are spiritual descendants, those who have faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 8 ta8t τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 children of the promise The phrase **children of the promise** refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. -ROM 9 9 up57 ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 this is the word of promise “these are the words God used when he made the promise” +ROM 9 9 up57 ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 this is the word of promise Alternate translation: “these are the words God used when he made the promise” ROM 9 9 wqb2 figs-activepassive ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός 1 a son will be given to Sarah You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 9 10 mb5q figs-exclusive τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 our father Paul refers to Isaac as **our father** because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 9 10 icc1 κοίτην, ἔχουσα 1 had conceived “had become pregnant” -ROM 9 11 h16y μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 for the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad” -ROM 9 11 a1gz ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ 1 so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen” -ROM 9 11 eez1 μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων 1 for the children were not yet born “before the children were born” -ROM 9 11 iw56 μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 had not yet done anything good or bad “not because of anything they had done” +ROM 9 10 icc1 κοίτην, ἔχουσα 1 had conceived Alternate translation: “had become pregnant” +ROM 9 11 h16y μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 for the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad Alternate translation: “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad” +ROM 9 11 a1gz ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ 1 so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand Alternate translation: “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen” +ROM 9 11 eez1 μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων 1 for the children were not yet born Alternate translation: “before the children were born” +ROM 9 11 iw56 μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 had not yet done anything good or bad Alternate translation: “not because of anything they had done” ROM 9 12 ze3m 0 Connecting Statement: It may be necessary in your language to place this verse between verse 10 and verse 11: “our father Isaac, it was said to her, ‘The older will serve the younger.’ Now the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad, but so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand—not because of actions, but because of him who calls. It is just” ROM 9 12 d6mr ἐκ τοῦ 1 because of him because of God -ROM 9 12 wv7n ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι 1 it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.” “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’” +ROM 9 12 wv7n ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι 1 it was said to her, “The older will serve the younger.” Alternate translation: “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’” ROM 9 13 xt7t figs-hyperbole τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα 1 Jacob I loved, but Esau I hated The word **hated** is an exaggeration. God **loved** **Jacob** much more than he loved **Esau**. He did not literally hate Esau. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ROM 9 14 m8xk figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 What then will we say? Paul is using the question to get the attention of his readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 9 14 s1hm μὴ γένοιτο! 1 May it never be “That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. ROM 9 15 kq2c figs-metaphor τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει 1 For he says to Moses Paul speaks about God’s talking with **Moses** as if it is being done in the present time. Alternate translation: “For God said to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 9 16 d4f5 οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος 1 it is not because of him who wills, nor because of him who runs “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard” +ROM 9 16 d4f5 οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος 1 it is not because of him who wills, nor because of him who runs Alternate translation: “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard” ROM 9 16 ues3 figs-metaphor οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος 1 nor because of him who runs Paul speaks of a person who does good things in order to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 17 x1cj figs-personification λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 For the scripture says Here the **scripture** is personified as if God were talking to Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “For the scripture records that God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 9 17 xu7s ἐξήγειρά σε…ἐνδείξωμαι…μου 1 I … my Here the pronouns **I** and **my** refer to God as the speaker. @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ ROM 9 18 a1uv ὃν δὲ θέλει, σκληρύνει 1 whom he wishes, he m ROM 9 19 z4j2 figs-you ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν 1 You will say then to me Paul is talking to the critics of his teaching as though he were only talking to one person. You may need to use the plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ROM 9 19 bbe4 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν? 1 Why does he still find fault? For who has ever withstood his will? These rhetorical questions are complaints against God. You can translate them as strong statements. Alternate translation: “He should not find fault with us. No one has ever been able to withstand his will.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 9 19 hqr7 μέμφεται…αὐτοῦ 1 he … his The words **he** and **his** here refer to God. -ROM 9 19 n1ti τῷ…βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν 1 has … withstood his will “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do” +ROM 9 19 n1ti τῷ…βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν 1 has … withstood his will Alternate translation: “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do” ROM 9 20 arw8 figs-metaphor μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? 1 Will what has been molded say to the one who molds it, “Why … way?” Paul uses the potter’s right to make any kind of container he wants from the clay as a metaphor for the creator’s right to do whatever he wants with his creation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 20 knb3 figs-rquestion μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? 1 Paul asks questions to emphasize his point. You can translate this as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “What a person has molded should never say to the one who molds it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 9 20 wcj3 figs-rquestion τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως 1 Why did you make me this way? This question is a rebuke and can be translated as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1355,18 +1355,18 @@ ROM 9 24 t8rn ἐκάλεσεν 1 called Here, **called** means God has appoint ROM 9 25 eqc2 0 Connecting Statement: In this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea. ROM 9 25 ewb4 figs-explicit ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει 1 As he says also in Hosea Here, **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 9 25 m82v translate-names τῷ Ὡσηὲ 1 Hosea **Hosea** was an Old Testament prophet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ROM 9 25 gi5k καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου 1 I will call my people who were not my people “I will choose for my people those who were not my people” +ROM 9 25 gi5k καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου 1 I will call my people who were not my people Alternate translation: “I will choose for my people those who were not my people” ROM 9 25 yy15 figs-activepassive τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην 1 her beloved who was not beloved Here, **the one** refers to Hosea’s wife, Gomer, who represents the nation of Israel. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I will choose her whom I did not love to be one whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 9 26 qe9f υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 sons of the living God The word **living** may refer to the fact that God is the only true God, and not like the false idols. Alternate translation: “children of the true God” -ROM 9 27 zqi1 κράζει 1 cries out “calls out” +ROM 9 27 zqi1 κράζει 1 cries out Alternate translation: “calls out” ROM 9 27 k9j8 figs-simile ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης 1 as the sand of the sea Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of **sand** in the **sea**. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ROM 9 27 wig1 figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 will be saved Paul uses the word **saved** in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 9 28 cm32 λόγον…ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 the Lord will carry out his sentence on the earth Here, **word** refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said” ROM 9 29 dl9x figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ν ἐγενήθημεν 1 us … we Here the pronouns **us** and **we** refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ROM 9 29 tk2e figs-explicit ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν 1 we would be like Sodom, and we would have become like Gomorrah God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 9 30 m5l2 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 What will we say then? Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ROM 9 30 ki4k ὅτι ἔθνη 1 That the Gentiles “We will say that the Gentiles” -ROM 9 30 bnl6 τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην 1 who were not pursuing righteousness “who were not trying to please God” +ROM 9 30 ki4k ὅτι ἔθνη 1 That the Gentiles Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles” +ROM 9 30 bnl6 τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην 1 who were not pursuing righteousness Alternate translation: “who were not trying to please God” ROM 9 30 gl4m figs-explicit δικαιοσύνην…τὴν ἐκ πίστεως 1 the righteousness by faith Here, **by faith** refers to placing one’s trust in Christ. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “because God made them right with him when they trusted in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 9 31 f18n figs-explicit εἰς νόμον οὐκ ἔφθασεν 1 did not arrive at it This means that the Israelites could not please God by trying to keep **the law**. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “were not able to please God by keeping the law because they could not keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 9 32 y4pf figs-ellipsis διὰ τί? 1 Why not? This is an ellipsis. You can include the implied words in your translation. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1382,20 +1382,20 @@ ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatt ROM 10 1 pi37 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus. ROM 10 1 hj4b ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. ROM 10 1 tq7k figs-metonymy ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας 1 my heart’s desire Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 10 1 tmf2 ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 is for them, for their salvation “is that God will save the Jews” -ROM 10 2 y7qg μαρτυρῶ…αὐτοῖς 1 I testify about them “I declare truthfully about them” +ROM 10 1 tmf2 ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 is for them, for their salvation Alternate translation: “is that God will save the Jews” +ROM 10 2 y7qg μαρτυρῶ…αὐτοῖς 1 I testify about them Alternate translation: “I declare truthfully about them” ROM 10 3 bw97 figs-explicit ἀγνοοῦντες γὰρ τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην 1 For they do not know of God’s righteousness Here, **righteousness** refers to the way God puts people right with himself. You can make this explicit in the translation. Alternate translation: “For they do not know how God puts people right with himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 10 3 a6r4 τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν 1 They did not submit to the righteousness of God “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself” -ROM 10 4 x1w8 τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς 1 For Christ is the fulfillment of the law “For Christ completely fulfilled the law” +ROM 10 3 a6r4 τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν 1 They did not submit to the righteousness of God Alternate translation: “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself” +ROM 10 4 x1w8 τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς 1 For Christ is the fulfillment of the law Alternate translation: “For Christ completely fulfilled the law” ROM 10 4 f6pu figs-explicit εἰς δικαιοσύνην παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 for righteousness for everyone who believes Here, **believes** means “trusts.” Alternate translation: “in order that he may make everyone who trusts in him right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 10 5 qby2 τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου 1 the righteousness that comes from the law “how the law makes a person right before God” +ROM 10 5 qby2 τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου 1 the righteousness that comes from the law Alternate translation: “how the law makes a person right before God” ROM 10 5 wjn6 figs-explicit ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ 1 The man who does the righteousness of the law will live by this righteousness In order to be made right with God through the law, a person would have to keep the law perfectly, which is not possible. Alternate translation: “The person who perfectly obeys the law will live because the law will make him right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 10 5 qkz4 ζήσεται 1 will live Here, **will live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. (2) mortal life in fellowship with God. ROM 10 6 sr9z figs-personification ἡ δὲ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει 1 But the righteousness that comes from faith says this Here, **righteousness** is described as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But Moses writes this about how faith makes a person right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 10 6 x7h4 figs-you μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 Do not say in your heart Moses was addressing the people as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun **your** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ROM 10 6 nwlw figs-metonymy μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “Do not say to yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 10 6 tf9r figs-rquestion τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 Who will ascend into heaven? Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is able to go up to heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ROM 10 6 gi7s τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν 1 that is, to bring Christ down “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth” +ROM 10 6 gi7s τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν 1 that is, to bring Christ down Alternate translation: “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth” ROM 10 7 w8xe figs-rquestion τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον? 1 Who will descend into the abyss Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No person can go down and enter the place where the spirits of dead persons are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 10 7 iw13 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. ROM 10 7 t8dd νεκρῶν 1 dead Here, **the dead** speaks of physical death. @@ -1404,8 +1404,8 @@ ROM 10 8 sen1 figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ τί λέγει? 1 Paul uses a question ROM 10 8 kzb2 figs-personification ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν 1 The word is near you Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were a person who can move. Alternate translation: “You have heard the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 10 8 y6mq figs-metonymy ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 The word is … in your mouth The word **mouth** is a metonym that refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “You can hear and know how to speak and think about God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 10 8 zvx4 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 The word is … in your heart The phrase **in your heart** is metonym that refers to what a person thinks and believes. Alternate translation: “and you know what it means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 10 8 lh5d τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως 1 the word of faith “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him” -ROM 10 9 tz7r ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν 1 if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord” +ROM 10 8 lh5d τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως 1 the word of faith Alternate translation: “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him” +ROM 10 9 tz7r ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν 1 if with your mouth you confess Jesus as Lord Alternate translation: “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord” ROM 10 9 ie71 figs-metonymy πιστεύσῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 believe in your heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner person. Alternate translation: “believe in your mind” or “truly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 10 9 zdf5 figs-idiom αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead Here, **raised** here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 10 9 c3cq figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1427,7 +1427,7 @@ ROM 10 16 hku8 οὐ πάντες ὑπήκουσαν 1 not all of them obeyed ROM 10 16 j3se figs-rquestion Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? 1 Lord, who has believed our message? Paul is using this question to emphasize that Isaiah prophesied in the Scriptures that many Jews would not believe in Jesus. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Lord, so many of them do not believe our message.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 10 16 z4s9 τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν 1 our message Here, **our** refers to God and Isaiah. ROM 10 17 wu5a ἡ πίστις ἐξ ἀκοῆς 1 faith comes from hearing Here, **faith** refers to “believing in Christ” -ROM 10 17 nq87 ἡ…ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ 2 hearing by the word of Christ “hearing by listening to the message about Christ” +ROM 10 17 nq87 ἡ…ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ 2 hearing by the word of Christ Alternate translation: “hearing by listening to the message about Christ” ROM 10 18 f6jy figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? μενοῦνγε 1 But I say, “Did they not hear?” Yes, most certainly Paul uses a question for emphasis. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But, I say the Jews certainly have heard the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 10 18 s5zh figs-parallelism εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν 1 Their sound has gone out into all the earth, and their words to the ends of the world. Both of these statements mean basically the same thing and Paul uses them for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ROM 10 18 g4vd figs-personification εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν 1 The word **their** refers to the sun, moon, and stars. Here they are described as human messengers that tell people about God. This refers to how their existence shows God’s power and glory. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1436,30 +1436,30 @@ ROM 10 19 ib4m figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ROM 10 19 zyw0 figs-metonymy ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω? 1 The word **Israel** is a metonym for the people who lived in the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you the people of Israel did know the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 10 19 jjt3 figs-explicit πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει 1 First Moses says, “I will provoke you … I will stir you up to anger.” This means that Moses wrote down what God said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 10 19 vxzz figs-you ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς,…παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 Both instances of **I** refer to God, and **you** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “God will provoke you … God will stir you up to anger.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ROM 10 19 ve6t ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει 1 by what is not a nation “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation” +ROM 10 19 ve6t ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει 1 by what is not a nation Alternate translation: “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation” ROM 10 19 s3nz figs-explicit ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ 1 By means of a nation without understanding Here, **without understanding** means that the people do not know God. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me or my commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 10 19 g7zt παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 I will stir you up to anger “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry” +ROM 10 19 g7zt παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 I will stir you up to anger Alternate translation: “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry” ROM 10 19 a7k7 figs-you ὑμᾶς 1 you Here, **you** refers to the nation of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ROM 10 20 qcx2 0 General Information: Here the words **I**, “me,” and “my” refer to God. ROM 10 20 cv1x Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει 1 Then Isaiah was very bold when he says This means the prophet **Isaiah** wrote what God had said. ROM 10 20 fc4b εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν 1 I was found by those who did not seek me Prophets often speak of things in the future as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that the prophecy will certainly come true. ROM 10 20 u60f figs-activepassive εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though the Gentile people will not look for me, they will find me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 10 20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 I appeared “I made myself known” +ROM 10 20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 I appeared Alternate translation: “I made myself known” ROM 10 20 k8pp λέγει 1 he says **He** refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah. ROM 10 21 hw4w ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 All the day long This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “Continually” ROM 10 21 il8s translate-symaction ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα 1 I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people The action of reaching out a hand represents offering help to a person. Alternate translation: “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Grafting

Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]]) ROM 11 1 p2h9 0 Connecting Statement: Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works. -ROM 11 1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 I say then “I, Paul, say then” +ROM 11 1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 I say then Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say then” ROM 11 1 p4zd figs-rquestion μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ? 1 did God reject his people? Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 11 1 wqu2 μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be “That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in [Romans 9:14](../09/14.md). ROM 11 1 bc4g φυλῆς Βενιαμείν 1 tribe of Benjamin This refers to the **tribe** descended from **Benjamin**, one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel. -ROM 11 2 h4qe ὃν προέγνω 1 whom he foreknew “whom he knew ahead of time” +ROM 11 2 h4qe ὃν προέγνω 1 whom he foreknew Alternate translation: “whom he knew ahead of time” ROM 11 2 cjp6 figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ? 1 Do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleaded with God against Israel? You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know what the Scriptures record about when Elijah pleaded with God against Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 11 2 dd1e figs-personification τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή 1 what the scripture says Paul is referring to the **scriptures** as if they were able to speak. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ROM 11 3 fh9i ἀπέκτειναν 1 they have killed Here, **they** refers to the people of Israel. ROM 11 3 ut1s κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος 1 I alone am left The pronoun **I** here refers to Elijah. -ROM 11 3 dv5u ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου 1 seeking my life “they want to kill me” +ROM 11 3 dv5u ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου 1 seeking my life Alternate translation: “they want to kill me” ROM 11 4 rj4e figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός? 1 But what does God’s answer say to him? Paul is using this question to bring the reader to his next point. Alternate translation: “How does God answer him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 11 4 x6e9 αὐτῷ 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to Elijah. ROM 11 5 ce2r λῖμμα 1 remnant Here this means a small part of people whom God chose to receive his grace. @@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ ROM 11 9 kpg8 figs-metonymy γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν ε ROM 11 9 l6re figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν 1 Here, **net** and **trap** are metaphors that represent punishment. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 11 9 x0wl figs-activepassive γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts like a trap that catches them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 11 9 ya1g figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον 1 a stumbling block A **stumbling block** is anything that causes a person to trip so that he falls down. Here it represents something that tempts a person to sin. Alternate translation: “something that tempts them to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 11 9 xex5 ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς 1 a retribution for them “something that allows you to take revenge on them” +ROM 11 9 xex5 ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς 1 a retribution for them Alternate translation: “something that allows you to take revenge on them” ROM 11 10 c1nj figs-metonymy τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον 1 bend their backs continually Here, **make their backs bend** is a metonym for forcing slaves to carry heavy loads on their backs. Alternate translation: “make them continually carry heavy loads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 11 10 biqg figs-metaphor τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον 1 This is a metaphor for making them suffer. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer like people carrying heavy loads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 11 11 z8tw 0 Connecting Statement: With Israel as a nation rejecting God, Paul warns the Gentiles to be careful they do not make the same mistake. @@ -1486,7 +1486,7 @@ ROM 11 12 it9k κόσμου 1 the world Here the **world** is a metonym that re ROM 11 14 ua2k παραζηλώσω 1 I will provoke to jealousy See how you translated this phrase in [Romans 10:19](../10/19.md). ROM 11 14 h1qe μου τὴν σάρκα 1 those who are of my own flesh This refers to Paul’s fellow Jews. ROM 11 14 gp38 figs-explicit καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 Perhaps I will save some of them God will save those who believe. Alternate translation: “and perhaps some will believe and God will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 11 15 es22 εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου 1 For if their rejection means the reconciliation of the world “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the **world** to himself” +ROM 11 15 es22 εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου 1 For if their rejection means the reconciliation of the world Alternate translation: “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the **world** to himself” ROM 11 15 ui3i ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν 1 their rejection The pronoun **their** refers to Jewish unbelievers. ROM 11 15 m3fs figs-metonymy κόσμου 1 the world Here, **the world** is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 11 15 em8m figs-rquestion τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν? 1 what will their acceptance be but life from the dead? Paul asks this question to emphasize that when God accepts the Jews, it will be a wonderful thing. Alternate translation: “how will it be when God accepts them? It will be like they have come back to life from among the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ ROM 11 26 ds7a 0 Connecting Statement: Paul says that a deliverer will come ou ROM 11 26 vu7t figs-activepassive καὶ οὕτως πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται 1 Thus all Israel will be saved You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and thus God will save all Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 11 26 n7yf figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “just as the scriptures record” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 11 26 dm4e figs-metonymy ἐκ Σιὼν 1 Out of Zion Here, **Zion** is used as a metonym for the place where God dwells. Alternate translation: “From where God is among the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 11 26 v96c ὁ ῥυόμενος 1 the Deliverer “the one who brings his people to safety” +ROM 11 26 v96c ὁ ῥυόμενος 1 the Deliverer Alternate translation: “the one who brings his people to safety” ROM 11 26 at55 figs-metaphor ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας 1 He will remove ungodliness Paul speaks of **ungodliness** as if it were an object that someone could remove, perhaps like someone removes a garment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 11 26 bkr2 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ 1 from Jacob Here, **Jacob** is used as a metonym for Israel. Alternate translation: “from the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 11 27 ll39 figs-metaphor ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν 1 I will take away their sins Here Paul speaks of **sins** as if they were objects that someone could take away. Alternate translation: “I will remove the burden of their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1546,12 +1546,12 @@ ROM 11 28 jas2 figs-explicit ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας ROM 11 28 d82k figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God still loves them because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 11 29 p2sf figs-metaphor ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 For the gifts and the call of God are unchangeable Paul speaks of the spiritual and material blessings that God promised to give his people as if they were **gifts**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 11 29 mnqs figs-explicit ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The call of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. Alternate translation: “For God never changed his mind about what he has promised to give them, and about how he has called them to be his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 11 30 bj8g ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε 1 you were formerly disobedient “you did not obey in the past” +ROM 11 30 bj8g ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε 1 you were formerly disobedient Alternate translation: “you did not obey in the past” ROM 11 30 df91 figs-explicit ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ 1 you have received mercy because of their disobedience Here, **mercy** means God’s undeserved blessings. Alternate translation: “because the Jews have rejected Jesus, you have received blessings that you did not deserve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 11 30 g3cn figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you Here, **you** refers to Gentile believers, and is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ROM 11 32 t6cb figs-metaphor συνέκλεισεν…ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν 1 God has shut up all into disobedience God has treated people who disobey him like prisoners who are unable to escape from prison. Alternate translation: “God has made prisoners of those who disobey him. Now they cannot stop disobeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 11 33 x3kb figs-doublet ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ 1 Oh, the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God! Here, **wisdom** and **knowledge** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “How amazing are the many benefits of both God’s wisdom and knowledge!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ROM 11 33 u322 ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us” +ROM 11 33 u322 ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering Alternate translation: “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us” ROM 11 34 r2wj figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο? 1 For who has known the mind of the Lord or who has become his advisor? Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has ever known the mind of the Lord, and no one has become his advisor.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 11 34 yy52 figs-metonymy νοῦν Κυρίου 1 the mind of the Lord Here, **mind** is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 11 35 j5cn figs-rquestion ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ? 1 Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him? Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1563,15 +1563,15 @@ ROM 12 1 d2y3 figs-explicit παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφο ROM 12 1 w1mz figs-synecdoche παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 to present your bodies a living sacrifice Here Paul uses the word **bodies** to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God as a living sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 12 1 wuyl figs-metaphor παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 1 dwr5 figs-doublet ἁγίαν, εὐάρεστον, τῷ Θεῷ 1 holy, acceptable to God This could refer to: (1) a sacrifice that you give to God alone and that pleases him. (2) a sacrifice that is **acceptable** to God because it is morally pure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ROM 12 1 tyk7 τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν 1 This is your reasonable service “which is the right way to worship God” +ROM 12 1 tyk7 τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν 1 This is your reasonable service Alternate translation: “which is the right way to worship God” ROM 12 2 clc6 figs-metaphor μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 Do not be conformed to this world This could mean: (1) do not behave as the world behaves. (2) do not think the way the world does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 2 pyb6 figs-activepassive μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 Do not be conformed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do not act and think like the world does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 12 2 d2qq figs-metonymy τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 this world Here, **this world** refers to unbelievers who live in the world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 12 2 na8p figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ μεταμορφοῦσθε τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός 1 but be transformed by the renewal of your mind You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “but let God change the way you think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 12 3 nyc2 figs-explicit διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι 1 because of the grace that was given to me Here, **grace** refers to God’s choosing Paul to be an apostle and leader of the church. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 12 3 l6c6 figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God freely chose me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 12 3 s6yg παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν 1 that everyone who is among you should not think more highly of themselves than they ought to think “that no one among you should think they are better than they are” -ROM 12 3 me4t ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν 1 Instead, they should think in a wise way “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves” +ROM 12 3 s6yg παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν 1 that everyone who is among you should not think more highly of themselves than they ought to think Alternate translation: “that no one among you should think they are better than they are” +ROM 12 3 me4t ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν 1 Instead, they should think in a wise way Alternate translation: “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves” ROM 12 3 m8z7 figs-explicit ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως 1 just as God has given out to each one a certain amount of faith Paul implies here that believers have different abilities that correspond to their **faith** in God. Alternate translation: “since God has given each of you the faith to trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 12 4 zm8p γὰρ 1 For Paul the word **For** to show that he will now explain why some Christians should not think they are better than others. ROM 12 4 v2pi figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, πολλὰ μέλη ἔχομεν 1 we have many members in one body Paul refers to all the believers in Christ as if they were different parts of the human **body**. He does this to illustrate that although believers may serve Christ in different ways, each person belongs to Christ and serves in an important way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1586,19 +1586,19 @@ ROM 12 9 iv5h figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος 1 Let l ROM 12 9 eaw7 ἡ ἀγάπη 1 love The word Paul uses here refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. ROM 12 10 mr8i τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 love This is another word that means brotherly **love** or love for a friend or family member. This is natural human love between friends or relatives. ROM 12 10 ng86 τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ…φιλόστοργοι 1 Concerning love of the brothers, be affectionate Here Paul begins a list of nine items, each of the form **in … be** to tell the believers what kind of people they should be. You may need to translate some of the items as “in … do.” The list continues to [Romans 12:13](../12/13.md). -ROM 12 10 ux2y τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 Concerning love of the brothers “as for how you love your fellow believers” -ROM 12 10 tj57 τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι 1 Concerning honor, respect one another “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them” -ROM 12 11 iu2i τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες 1 Concerning diligence, do not be hesitant. Concerning the spirit, be eager. Concerning the Lord, serve him “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord” -ROM 12 12 l3es τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες 1 be patient in suffering “wait patiently whenever you have troubles” -ROM 12 13 vk5h ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες 1 Share in the needs of the saints “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need” +ROM 12 10 ux2y τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 Concerning love of the brothers Alternate translation: “as for how you love your fellow believers” +ROM 12 10 tj57 τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι 1 Concerning honor, respect one another Alternate translation: “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them” +ROM 12 11 iu2i τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες 1 Concerning diligence, do not be hesitant. Concerning the spirit, be eager. Concerning the Lord, serve him Alternate translation: “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord” +ROM 12 12 l3es τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες 1 be patient in suffering Alternate translation: “wait patiently whenever you have troubles” +ROM 12 13 vk5h ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες 1 Share in the needs of the saints Alternate translation: “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need” ROM 12 13 exd8 τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες 1 Find many ways to show hospitality This is the last item in the list that began in [Romans 12:9](../12/09.md). “always welcome them into your home when they need a place to stay” ROM 12 16 hwd1 figs-idiom τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες 1 Be of the same mind toward one another This is an idiom that means to live in unity. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another” or “living in unity with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ROM 12 16 ar7y μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες 1 Do not think in proud ways “do not think that you are more important than others” -ROM 12 16 cc23 τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι 1 accept lowly people “welcome people who do not seem important” -ROM 12 16 h469 μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς 1 Do not be wise in your own thoughts “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else” -ROM 12 17 h2tz μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες 1 Repay no one evil for evil “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you” -ROM 12 17 fzh8 προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Do good things in the sight of all people “do things that everyone considers to be good” -ROM 12 18 pgt7 τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες 1 as far as it depends on you, live at peace with all people “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone” +ROM 12 16 ar7y μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες 1 Do not think in proud ways Alternate translation: “do not think that you are more important than others” +ROM 12 16 cc23 τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι 1 accept lowly people Alternate translation: “welcome people who do not seem important” +ROM 12 16 h469 μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς 1 Do not be wise in your own thoughts Alternate translation: “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else” +ROM 12 17 h2tz μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες 1 Repay no one evil for evil Alternate translation: “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you” +ROM 12 17 fzh8 προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Do good things in the sight of all people Alternate translation: “do things that everyone considers to be good” +ROM 12 18 pgt7 τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες 1 as far as it depends on you, live at peace with all people Alternate translation: “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone” ROM 12 19 ew6x figs-metonymy δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ 1 give way to his wrath Here, **wrath** is a metonym for God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “allow God to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 12 19 ns3b figs-activepassive γέγραπται γάρ 1 For it is written You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 12 19 l2i8 figs-parallelism ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω 1 Vengeance belongs to me; I will repay These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -1611,10 +1611,10 @@ ROM 12 21 p7fd μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκ ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly rulers

When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 13 1 v5ik 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers. ROM 13 1 b8nf figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω 1 Let every soul be obedient to Here, **soul** is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ROM 13 1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 higher authorities “submit to government officials” +ROM 13 1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 higher authorities Alternate translation: “submit to government officials” ROM 13 1 wii2 figs-doublenegatives οὐ…ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ 1 there is no authority unless it comes from God This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ROM 13 1 j3lr figs-activepassive αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν 1 The authorities that exist have been appointed by God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 13 2 ui8y τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 that authority “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power” +ROM 13 2 ui8y τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 that authority Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power” ROM 13 2 dsa3 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται 1 those who oppose it will receive judgment on themselves You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 13 3 m3yf γὰρ 1 For Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of [Romans 13:2](../13/02.md) and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person. ROM 13 3 c2xa οἱ…ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος 1 rulers are not a terror Rulers do not make good people afraid. @@ -1624,10 +1624,10 @@ ROM 13 3 ahl9 ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς 1 you will receive ROM 13 4 ink8 figs-litotes οὐ…εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ 1 he does not carry the sword for no reason You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ROM 13 4 s3vz figs-metonymy τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ 1 carry the sword Roman governors carried a short **sword** as a symbol of their authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 13 4 au7j figs-metonymy ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν 1 an avenger for wrath Here, **wrath** represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 13 5 q81v οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God” -ROM 13 6 r1jy διὰ τοῦτο 1 Because of this “because the government punishes evildoers” +ROM 13 5 q81v οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not only because of the wrath, but also because of conscience Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God” +ROM 13 6 r1jy διὰ τοῦτο 1 Because of this Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers” ROM 13 6 r4b3 τελεῖτε 1 you pay Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural. -ROM 13 6 hy4f γὰρ…εἰσιν 2 For they are “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are” +ROM 13 6 hy4f γὰρ…εἰσιν 2 For they are Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are” ROM 13 7 z9cn ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι 1 Pay to everyone Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural. ROM 13 7 wg2l figs-ellipsis τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν 1 Tax to whom tax is due, toll to whom toll is due; fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due. The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 13 7 nwi2 figs-metaphor τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν 1 fear to whom fear is due, honor to whom honor is due Here paying **fear** and **honor** is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1653,7 +1653,7 @@ ROM 13 14 xre7 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποι ROM 14 intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Weak in faith

Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Dietary restrictions

Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### The judgment seat of God

The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives. ROM 14 1 abm6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God. ROM 14 1 jf8v ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει 1 weak in faith This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things. -ROM 14 1 p697 μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν 1 without giving judgment about arguments “and do not condemn them for their opinions” +ROM 14 1 p697 μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν 1 without giving judgment about arguments Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions” ROM 14 2 ii8g ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα 1 One person has faith to eat anything Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food. ROM 14 2 n2n6 ὁ…ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει 1 another who is weak eats only vegetables This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat. ROM 14 4 q9bx figs-rquestion σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην? 1 Who are you, you who judge a servant belonging to someone else? Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1661,12 +1661,12 @@ ROM 14 4 xq7r figs-you σὺ…ὁ κρίνων 1 you, who judges The form of ** ROM 14 4 ba38 figs-metaphor τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει 1 It is before his own master that he stands or falls Paul speaks of God as if he were a **master** who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 14 4 cp9y figs-metaphor σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν 1 But he will be made to stand, for the Lord is able to make him stand Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being **made to stand** instead of falling. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 14 4 ucto figs-activepassive σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 14 5 x7j2 ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν. 1 One person values one day above another. Another values every day equally “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same” +ROM 14 5 x7j2 ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν. 1 One person values one day above another. Another values every day equally Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same” ROM 14 5 m511 figs-explicit ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω 1 Let each person be convinced in his own mind You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 5 y5ea figs-activepassive ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 14 6 pfn6 figs-explicit ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ 1 He who observes the day, observes it for the Lord Here, **observes** refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 6 esu5 figs-ellipsis ὁ ἐσθίων 1 he who eats The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ROM 14 6 f9tm Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει 1 eats for the Lord “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord” +ROM 14 6 f9tm Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει 1 eats for the Lord Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord” ROM 14 6 jh8j figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων 1 He who does not eat The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 14 7 txm3 figs-explicit οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ 1 For none of us lives for himself Here, **lives for himself** means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 7 u9ar figs-exclusive οὐδεὶς…ἡμῶν 1 none of us Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -1679,28 +1679,28 @@ ROM 14 11 fel6 figs-activepassive γέγραπται γάρ 1 For it is written, ROM 14 11 tf76 figs-explicit ζῶ ἐγώ 1 As I live This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 11 sb6q figs-synecdoche ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ 1 to me every knee will bend, and every tongue will confess to God Paul uses the word **God** and **tongue** to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 14 11 vngp figs-123person ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ 1 The Lord uses the word **God** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ROM 14 12 nsy8 περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ 1 will give an account of himself to God “will have to explain our actions to God” +ROM 14 12 nsy8 περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ 1 will give an account of himself to God Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God” ROM 14 13 ia62 figs-doublet ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον 1 but instead decide this, that no one will place a stumbling block or a snare for his brother Here, **stumbling block** and **snare** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 14 13 cx4s τῷ ἀδελφῷ 1 brother Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. ROM 14 14 t7gc figs-doublet οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 I know and am persuaded in the Lord Jesus Here the words **know** and **am persuaded** mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 14 14 fuk1 figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 nothing is unclean by itself You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ROM 14 14 mjc5 δι’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 by itself “by its nature” or “because of what it is” +ROM 14 14 mjc5 δι’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 by itself Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is” ROM 14 14 w3gg figs-explicit εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν 1 Only for him who considers anything to be unclean, for him it is unclean Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 15 iw7w εἰ…διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται 1 If because of food your brother is hurt “If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word **your** refers to those who are strong in faith and **brother** refers to those who are weak in faith. ROM 14 15 ln42 ὁ ἀδελφός 1 brother Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. ROM 14 15 bj8v figs-metaphor οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς 1 you are no longer walking in love Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 14 16 gl48 μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν 1 So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good” +ROM 14 16 gl48 μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν 1 So do not allow what you consider to be good to be spoken of as evil Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good” ROM 14 17 j92k figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 For the kingdom of God is not about food and drink, but about righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit Paul argues that God set up his **kingdom** so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 18 am8m figs-activepassive δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 approved by people You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 14 19 i3rv figs-explicit τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 let us pursue the things of peace and the things that build up one another Here, **build up one another** refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 20 p65h figs-explicit μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Do not destroy the work of God because of food You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 20 dk72 figs-explicit ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι 1 but it is evil for that person who eats and causes him to stumble Here a **stumbling block** is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 14 21 mrr4 καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει 1 It is good not to eat meat, nor to drink wine, nor anything by which your brother takes offense “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin” +ROM 14 21 mrr4 καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει 1 It is good not to eat meat, nor to drink wine, nor anything by which your brother takes offense Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin” ROM 14 21 iq9g ὁ ἀδελφός 1 brother Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. ROM 14 21 e1du figs-you σου 1 your Here, **you** is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ROM 14 22 hjk9 σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις 1 The faith you have Here, **faith** refers back to the beliefs about food and drink. ROM 14 22 b3hi figs-you σὺ…σεαυτὸν 1 you … yourself Here, **you** and **yourself** are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ROM 14 22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 1 Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do” +ROM 14 22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 1 Blessed is the one who does not condemn himself by what he approves Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do” ROM 14 23 s1ph figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται 1 He who doubts is condemned if he eats You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 14 23 yr44 figs-explicit ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως 1 because it is not from faith Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 23 tr9i figs-explicit πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν 1 whatever is not from faith is sin Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1718,10 +1718,10 @@ ROM 15 4 txd4 figs-activepassive ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τ ROM 15 4 m7yy figs-exclusive ἡμετέραν…ἔχωμεν 1 our … we have Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ROM 15 4 g6r1 figs-explicit ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν 1 in order that through patience and through encouragement of the scriptures we would have certain hope Here, **have hope** means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 5 u2zm 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ. -ROM 15 5 g5xm Θεὸς…δῴη 1 may … God … grant “I pray that … God … will grant” -ROM 15 5 ws7q τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 to be of the same mind with each other “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united” +ROM 15 5 g5xm Θεὸς…δῴη 1 may … God … grant Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant” +ROM 15 5 ws7q τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 to be of the same mind with each other Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united” ROM 15 6 uz1z figs-metonymy ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε 1 praise with one mouth This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 15 7 z941 προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους 1 receive one another “accept one another” +ROM 15 7 z941 προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους 1 receive one another Alternate translation: “accept one another” ROM 15 8 gbh8 λέγω γὰρ 1 For I say The pronoun **I** refers to Paul. ROM 15 8 k4my figs-metonymy Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς 1 Christ has been made a servant of the circumcision Here, **the circumcision** is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 15 8 r0gd figs-activepassive Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1731,9 +1731,9 @@ ROM 15 8 dxz1 figs-activepassive τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέ ROM 15 9 k5q7 τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 and for the Gentiles to glorify God for his mercy This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy” ROM 15 9 xgc4 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 As it is written You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 15 9 em5q figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ 1 sing praise to your name Here, **your name** is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 15 10 yvy9 καὶ πάλιν λέγει 1 Again it says “And again the scripture says” +ROM 15 10 yvy9 καὶ πάλιν λέγει 1 Again it says Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says” ROM 15 10 x4kg figs-explicit μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 with his people This refers to God’s **people**. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 15 11 xw7t ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν 1 Let praise him “let … praise the Lord” +ROM 15 11 xw7t ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν 1 Let praise him Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord” ROM 15 12 fta5 figs-metonymy ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί 1 root of Jesse **Jesse** was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 15 12 i4nn figs-explicit ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν 1 in him the Gentiles will have hope Here, **him** refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 13 w7wn figs-hyperbole πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης 1 May fill you with all joy and peace Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@ ROM 15 14 ge2l figs-explicit δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νου ROM 15 15 n2gr figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the grace given me by God Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a physical gift that **God** had **given** him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 15 16 wiw1 figs-metaphor γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος 1 the offering of the Gentiles might become acceptable Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an **offering** to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 15 18 lu97 figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ 1 by the power of signs and wonders, and by the power of the Spirit of God You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ROM 15 18 by9s εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν 1 for the obedience of the Gentiles “so that the Gentiles will obey God” +ROM 15 18 by9s εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν 1 for the obedience of the Gentiles Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God” ROM 15 18 xds3 figs-explicit λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ 1 These are things done by word and action Here, **word and deed** refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 19 g8bk figs-doublet σημείων καὶ τεράτων 1 signs and wonders These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 15 19 c8ff ὥστε…ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ 1 so that from Jerusalem, and round about as far as Illyricum This is from the city of **Jerusalem** as far as the province of **Illyricum**, a region close to Italy. @@ -1758,36 +1758,36 @@ ROM 15 22 f1fq 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells the believers in Rome about ROM 15 22 ex5j figs-activepassive καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην 1 I was also hindered You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 15 23 b6kl figs-explicit μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις 1 I no longer have any place in these regions Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 24 si59 translate-names τὴν Σπανίαν 1 Spain At that time, **Spain** was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ROM 15 24 c6wq διαπορευόμενος 1 in passing “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way” +ROM 15 24 c6wq διαπορευόμενος 1 in passing Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way” ROM 15 24 vya3 figs-explicit καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ 1 and to be helped by you along my journey there Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 24 rzie figs-activepassive καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ 1 You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 15 24 wg6d ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ 1 I have enjoyed your company “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you” +ROM 15 24 wg6d ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ 1 I have enjoyed your company Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you” ROM 15 26 vn1r figs-synecdoche εὐδόκησαν…Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα 1 it was the good pleasure of Macedonia and Achaia Here the words **Macedonia** and **Achaia** are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ROM 15 27 w5ap εὐδόκησαν γάρ 1 Indeed they were please to do this “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it” -ROM 15 27 tfz1 ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν 1 indeed, they are their debtors “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem” -ROM 15 27 en7l εἰ…τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς 1 if the Gentiles have shared in their spiritual things, they owe it to them also to serve them “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers” +ROM 15 27 w5ap εὐδόκησαν γάρ 1 Indeed they were please to do this Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it” +ROM 15 27 tfz1 ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν 1 indeed, they are their debtors Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem” +ROM 15 27 en7l εἰ…τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς 1 if the Gentiles have shared in their spiritual things, they owe it to them also to serve them Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers” ROM 15 28 zz8u figs-metaphor σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον 1 made sure that they have received what was collected Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a **fruit** that was collected and **sealed** for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 15 29 ylq8 figs-explicit ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι 1 I know that when I come to you I will come in the fullness of the blessing of Christ This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 30 w1ta δὲ 1 Now If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of ([Romans 15:29](../15/29.md)) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here. -ROM 15 30 yb7m παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς 1 I urge you “I encourage you” +ROM 15 30 yb7m παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς 1 I urge you Alternate translation: “I encourage you” ROM 15 30 v9iy ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. -ROM 15 30 fy1v συναγωνίσασθαί 1 to strive together with “to work hard with” or “to struggle with” +ROM 15 30 fy1v συναγωνίσασθαί 1 to strive together with Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with” ROM 15 31 u7st figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων 1 I may be rescued from those who are disobedient You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 15 31 nw5h figs-explicit καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται 1 and that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers Here Paul expresses his desire that the **saints** in **Jerusalem** will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 33 s947 figs-explicit ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ 1 May the God of peace be with The **God of peace** means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 16 intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 16 1 sg6a 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name. -ROM 16 1 vkg8 συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην 1 I commend to you Phoebe “I want you to respect Phoebe” +ROM 16 1 vkg8 συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην 1 I commend to you Phoebe Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe” ROM 16 1 sry4 translate-names Φοίβην 1 Phoebe **Phoebe** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 1 q86q figs-exclusive τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν 1 our sister The word **our** refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ROM 16 1 q669 translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 Cenchrea **Cenchrea** was a seaport city in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 2 cwx1 figs-explicit αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 you may receive her in the Lord Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 16 2 yic3 ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων 1 in a manner worthy of the saints “in the way that believers should welcome other believers” +ROM 16 2 yic3 ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων 1 in a manner worthy of the saints Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers” ROM 16 2 qp4w figs-euphemism παραστῆτε αὐτῇ 1 stand by her Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -ROM 16 2 inh1 καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ 2 has become a helper of many, and of myself as well “has helped many people, and she has also helped me” +ROM 16 2 inh1 καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ 2 has become a helper of many, and of myself as well Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me” ROM 16 3 c5lg translate-names Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν 1 Priscilla and Aquila **Priscilla** was the wife of **Aquila**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 3 fsk1 figs-explicit τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 my fellow workers in Christ Jesus Paul’s **fellow workers** are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 16 5 i32d καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Greet the church that is in their house “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship” +ROM 16 5 i32d καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Greet the church that is in their house Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship” ROM 16 5 bn9z translate-names Ἐπαίνετον 1 Epaenetus **Epaenetus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 5 d1f1 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν 1 firstfruit of Asia to Christ Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 16 6 ew2z translate-names Μαρίαν 1 Mary **Mary** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ ROM 16 7 tzk4 translate-names Ἀνδρόνικον 1 Andronicus **Andronicus** ROM 16 7 z9uk translate-names Ἰουνίαν 1 Junias This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 7 gce3 figs-activepassive οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 They are prominent among the apostles You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 16 8 h976 translate-names Ἀμπλιᾶτον 1 Ampliatus **Ampliatus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ROM 16 8 alh2 τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 my beloved in the Lord “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord” +ROM 16 8 alh2 τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 my beloved in the Lord Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord” ROM 16 9 bd5l translate-names Οὐρβανὸν…Στάχυν 1 Urbanus … Stachys These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 10 k55t translate-names Ἀπελλῆν…Ἀριστοβούλου 1 Apelles … Aristobulus These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 10 q96n τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the approved in Christ The word **approved** refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” @@ -1813,9 +1813,9 @@ ROM 16 16 g2z1 φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 a holy kiss an expression of affec ROM 16 16 t1q4 figs-hyperbole ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 All the churches of Christ greet you Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the **churches** of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ROM 16 17 u1m9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God. ROM 16 17 wx6r ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. -ROM 16 17 ztv5 σκοπεῖν 1 to think about “to watch out for” +ROM 16 17 ztv5 σκοπεῖν 1 to think about Alternate translation: “to watch out for” ROM 16 17 n59l figs-explicit τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα…ποιοῦντας 1 who are causing the divisions and obstacles This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 16 17 j9x7 παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε 1 They are going beyond the teaching that you have learned “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned” +ROM 16 17 j9x7 παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε 1 They are going beyond the teaching that you have learned Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned” ROM 16 17 b318 figs-metaphor ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Turn away from them Here, **turn away** is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 16 18 ea6h figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ 1 but their own stomach The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ROM 16 18 nxn4 figs-metonymy ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ 1 but their own stomach Here, **stomach** is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1824,19 +1824,19 @@ ROM 16 18 eif6 figs-doublet καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας κ ROM 16 18 c2je figs-metonymy ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων 1 they deceive the hearts of the innocent Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 16 18 m9h5 τῶν ἀκάκων 1 innocent This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them” ROM 16 19 imc7 figs-personification ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο 1 For your obedience reaches everyone Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ROM 16 19 le5l ἀκεραίους…εἰς τὸ κακόν 1 innocent to that which is evil “not involved in doing evil things” +ROM 16 19 le5l ἀκεραίους…εἰς τὸ κακόν 1 innocent to that which is evil Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things” ROM 16 20 s3cq figs-metaphor ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει 1 The God of peace will soon crush Satan under your feet The phrase **crush … under your feet** refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over **Satan** as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their **feet**. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 16 21 z4g3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives greetings from the believers who are with him. ROM 16 21 ku15 translate-names Λούκιος…Ἰάσων…Σωσίπατρος 1 Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 22 xu3q translate-names ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 Tertius, who write this epistle **Tertius** is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ROM 16 22 nx4g ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς…ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 greet you in the Lord “greet you as a fellow believer” +ROM 16 22 nx4g ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς…ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 greet you in the Lord Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer” ROM 16 23 sw7r translate-names Γάϊος…Ἔραστος…Κούαρτος 1 Gaius … Erastus … Quartus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ROM 16 23 j9u7 ὁ ξένος 1 the host This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship. ROM 16 23 m5hg ὁ οἰκονόμος 1 the treasurer This is a person who takes care of the money for a group. ROM 16 25 psm3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul closes with a prayer of blessing. ROM 16 25 v71l δὲ 1 Now Here the word **Now** marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here. ROM 16 25 pp5k figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι 1 to strengthen you Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 16 25 kmw1 κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 according to my gospel and the preaching of Jesus Christ “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ” +ROM 16 25 kmw1 κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 according to my gospel and the preaching of Jesus Christ Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ” ROM 16 25 s5ky figs-metaphor κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου 1 according to the revelation of the mystery that had been kept secret for long ages Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a **secret**. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 16 25 n6c1 figs-activepassive κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 16 26 d7r5 figs-doublet φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος 1 but now has been revealed and made known through the prophetic writings to all nations, by the command of the eternal God The verbs **revealed** and **made known** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1863,5 +1863,5 @@ ROM 3 9 drcx figs-exclusive προῃτιασάμεθα 1 Here, **we** is used ROM 3 9 q88t figs-merism Ἰουδαίους τε καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 Paul figuratively refers to **Jews** and **Greeks**, using these types of people in order to include all of humanity (See the same phrase in [2:09](../02/09.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “both Jewish and non-Jewish people” or “both the Jewish people and the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ROM 3 14 df77 figs-abstractnouns ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **cursing** and **bitterness**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “They continually curse and regularly say harsh things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ROM 3 9 s0px figs-metaphor πάντας ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν εἶναι 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a weight that **all** people are underneath. He means that **all** types of people are controlled or dominated or cursed by a tendency to **sin**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **be under sin** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “that they are all controlled by living sinfully” or “that they are all cursed to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 5 16 x6ot figs-abstractnouns τὸ δώρημα…τὸ…κρίμα…κατάκριμα…τὸ… χάρισμα…παραπτωμάτων…δικαίωμα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “what God gives … God judging … being condemned … what God gives … ways people trespass … being made right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +ROM 5 16 x6ot figs-abstractnouns τὸ δώρημα…τὸ…κρίμα…κατάκριμα…τὸ… χάρισμα…παραπτωμάτων…δικαίωμα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “what God gives … God judging … being condemned … what God gives … ways people trespass … being made right with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ROM 5 16 kawg figs-nominaladj ἑνὸς…ἑνὸς 1 See how you translated this word in [5:15](../05/15/.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 4cf4c79b4e..08715d8c8d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Opening (1:1–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
4. On abstinence (7:1–40)
5. On food (8:1–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)
10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of “flesh?”

Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.

* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians\n\n1. Opening (1:1–9)\n2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)\n3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)\n4. On abstinence (7:1–40)\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n6. On head coverings (11:2–16)\n7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)\n10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)\n11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?\n\n1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.\n\n### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?\n\nMany animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:\n\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)\n* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What is the meaning of “flesh?”\n\nPaul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.\n\n* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)\n* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.\n* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)\n* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”\n* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Opening (1:1–9)
* Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3)
* Praise and Prayer (1:4–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17)
* Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others.

### Wisdom and foolishness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])

### Power and weakness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphors about Christ

In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses.

### Rhetorical questions

Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.

### Using different perspectives

Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well.

### Information presented out of order

The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move it between [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md). 1CO 1 1 m3dd figs-exclusive 0 General Information Throughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Corinthian believers unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 1 1 lihg figs-yousingular 0 General Information The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Corinthians believers and so are plural unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 21 u7b9 figs-possession πνεύματί…πραΰτητος 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **gentleness** as an adjective, such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 21 hpmb translate-unknown πνεύματί 1 Here, **spirit** does not refer to God’s Spirit, the Holy Spirit. Rather, it refers to Paul’s spirit. In Paul’s culture, **as spirit of** something is a way to describe a person’s attitude that is characterized by that thing. Here, then, Paul speaks about an attitude that is gentle. If **spirit** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “attitude” to express the idea. Alternate translation: “an attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 4 21 ix7l figs-abstractnouns πραΰτητος 1 of gentleness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gentleness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “that is gentle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
* Paul condemns a sexually immoral man (5:1–5)
* Passover festival metaphor (5:6–8)
* Explanation of previous letter (5:9–13)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13. Verse 13 quotes from Deuteronomy 17:7.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Sexual immorality

This chapter deals mostly with what Paul calls “sexual immorality” ([5:1](../05/01.md), [9–11](../05/9.md)). The word Paul uses for “sexual immorality” is a general term for sexual behavior that is considered improper. The specific type of “sexual immorality” that Paul addresses in this chapter is a man having sex with his step-mother. In some languages, there is a specific word for this. English uses the word “incest.” However, since Paul uses a general term and then brings up a specific situation, you also should use a general term for “sexual immorality” in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Judgment

Paul refers to “judgment” or “judging” in [5:3](../05/03.md), [12–13](../05/12.md). “Judging” refers to deciding whether someone is guilty or innocent. Paul emphasizes in this chapter that Christians should “judge” other Christians in the proper setting (see [5:3–5](../05/03.md)). However, they do not need to “judge” people who are not Christians. Paul states that “judging” them is God’s responsibility ([5:12–13](../05/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

### Excommunication

In [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul speaks about “removing” the person who committed the sexual sin from among the Corinthians, and he makes a similar command in [5:13](../05/13.md). The phrase “hand this man over to Satan” in [5:5](../05/05.md) has a similar meaning. Finally, when Paul tells them to “clean out the old yeast” ([5:7](../05/07.md)), this is a metaphor for the same action. Paul is commanding the Corinthians to stop including in their group the man who committed the sexual sin. It is not totally clear whether the man can be accepted back into the group if he stops committing the sin.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Euphemisms

As is the case in many cultures, sexual behavior is a delicate topic. Paul thus uses euphemisms to avoid sounding crude or nasty. When he says that “someone has his father’s wife” ([5:1](../05/01.md)), this is a delicate way to refer to someone consistently having sex with his father’s wife, whether married or not. He later on calls this behavior “a deed” ([5:2](../05/02.md)) or “such a thing” ([5:3](../05/03.md)). These phrases are ways of referring back to the man having sex with his father’s wife without using crude words. If your language has similar euphemisms for delicately referring to sexual behavior, you could use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])

### Passover metaphor

In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), Paul speaks of “yeast” and “Passover.” Passover was Jewish festival in which the people celebrated how God delivered them from serving as slaves in Egypt. The Israelites sacrificed lambs and spread the blood on their doors, and they ate bread without yeast in it because they would have to leave quickly. Then, God sent a destroying angel who killed the firstborn child in every house that did not have blood on its door. When this happened, the ruler of Egypt told the Israelites to leave immediately. You can read about these events in [Exodus 12](../exo/12/01.md). Later generations of Israelites celebrated this day by removing the yeast from their houses and by sacrificing a lamb. Paul refers to this festival in these verses. He uses the festival of Passover as a metaphor to encourage the Corinthians to remove sinful people (“yeast”) from their group (“their house”). There is even a “Passover lamb,” who is Jesus himself. Since this metaphor is drawn from the Old Testament, you should preserve it in your translation. If necessary you can include a footnote that gives some extra information, or you could refer your readers to Exodus 12 if they have access to the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/yeast]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

In [5:6](../05/06.md) and [5:12](../05/12.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Present in spirit

In [5:3–4](../05/03.md), Paul speaks of being with the Corinthians “in spirit.” While this could be a reference to the Holy Spirit, who would connect Paul with the Corinthians, more likely Paul is referring to his own “spirit,” which refers to the aspect of Paul that can connect with the Corinthians even when he is not physically present. When he says that he is with them “in spirit,” that means that he is thinking about them and that they should act as they would if Paul was physically present. You could either use a comparable idiom in your language or explain in some other way what “spirit” means in these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Structure of 5:3–5

In [5:3–5](../05/03.md), Paul uses a long and complicated sentence structure. In 5:3, he describes how he has “passed judgment” as if he were present. In 5:5, he tells them what the response to that judgment should be: “hand this man over to Satan.” In 5:4, then, he describes the situation in which they should hand the man over: they should be gathered together and acting with the authority of both Paul and Jesus. Finally, in 5:4, “in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ” could describe how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3, or it could describe how the Corinthians have “assembled” in 5:4. In order to translate these verses clearly, you may need to rearrange some clauses or add explanatory information that clarifies what Paul is saying. For more details and translation options, see the notes on those verses.

### Structure of 5:12–13

In [5:12–13](../05/13.md), Paul alternates between talking about judging “those outside” and “those inside.” If alternating between these two ideas would be confusing in your language, you could rearrange the clauses so that the verses deal with “those outside” first and then “those inside.” Here is an example of how you could do this: “For what to me to judge those outside? God will judge those outside. But do you not judge those inside? “Remove the evil from among yourselves.” +1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)\n * Paul condemns a sexually immoral man (5:1–5)\n * Passover festival metaphor (5:6–8)\n * Explanation of previous letter (5:9–13)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13. Verse 13 quotes from Deuteronomy 17:7.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sexual immorality\n\nThis chapter deals mostly with what Paul calls “sexual immorality” ([5:1](../05/01.md), [9–11](../05/9.md)). The word Paul uses for “sexual immorality” is a general term for sexual behavior that is considered improper. The specific type of “sexual immorality” that Paul addresses in this chapter is a man having sex with his step-mother. In some languages, there is a specific word for this. English uses the word “incest.” However, since Paul uses a general term and then brings up a specific situation, you also should use a general term for “sexual immorality” in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])\n\n### Judgment\n\nPaul refers to “judgment” or “judging” in [5:3](../05/03.md), [12–13](../05/12.md). “Judging” refers to deciding whether someone is guilty or innocent. Paul emphasizes in this chapter that Christians should “judge” other Christians in the proper setting (see [5:3–5](../05/03.md)). However, they do not need to “judge” people who are not Christians. Paul states that “judging” them is God’s responsibility ([5:12–13](../05/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])\n\n### Excommunication\n\nIn [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul speaks about “removing” the person who committed the sexual sin from among the Corinthians, and he makes a similar command in [5:13](../05/13.md). The phrase “hand this man over to Satan” in [5:5](../05/05.md) has a similar meaning. Finally, when Paul tells them to “clean out the old yeast” ([5:7](../05/07.md)), this is a metaphor for the same action. Paul is commanding the Corinthians to stop including in their group the man who committed the sexual sin. It is not totally clear whether the man can be accepted back into the group if he stops committing the sin.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Euphemisms\n\nAs is the case in many cultures, sexual behavior is a delicate topic. Paul thus uses euphemisms to avoid sounding crude or nasty. When he says that “someone has his father’s wife” ([5:1](../05/01.md)), this is a delicate way to refer to someone consistently having sex with his father’s wife, whether married or not. He later on calls this behavior “a deed” ([5:2](../05/02.md)) or “such a thing” ([5:3](../05/03.md)). These phrases are ways of referring back to the man having sex with his father’s wife without using crude words. If your language has similar euphemisms for delicately referring to sexual behavior, you could use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])\n\n### Passover metaphor\n\nIn [5:6–8](../05/06.md), Paul speaks of “yeast” and “Passover.” Passover was Jewish festival in which the people celebrated how God delivered them from serving as slaves in Egypt. The Israelites sacrificed lambs and spread the blood on their doors, and they ate bread without yeast in it because they would have to leave quickly. Then, God sent a destroying angel who killed the firstborn child in every house that did not have blood on its door. When this happened, the ruler of Egypt told the Israelites to leave immediately. You can read about these events in [Exodus 12](../exo/12/01.md). Later generations of Israelites celebrated this day by removing the yeast from their houses and by sacrificing a lamb. Paul refers to this festival in these verses. He uses the festival of Passover as a metaphor to encourage the Corinthians to remove sinful people (“yeast”) from their group (“their house”). There is even a “Passover lamb,” who is Jesus himself. Since this metaphor is drawn from the Old Testament, you should preserve it in your translation. If necessary you can include a footnote that gives some extra information, or you could refer your readers to Exodus 12 if they have access to the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/yeast]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [5:6](../05/06.md) and [5:12](../05/12.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Present in spirit\n\nIn [5:3–4](../05/03.md), Paul speaks of being with the Corinthians “in spirit.” While this could be a reference to the Holy Spirit, who would connect Paul with the Corinthians, more likely Paul is referring to his own “spirit,” which refers to the aspect of Paul that can connect with the Corinthians even when he is not physically present. When he says that he is with them “in spirit,” that means that he is thinking about them and that they should act as they would if Paul was physically present. You could either use a comparable idiom in your language or explain in some other way what “spirit” means in these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Structure of 5:3–5\n\nIn [5:3–5](../05/03.md), Paul uses a long and complicated sentence structure. In 5:3, he describes how he has “passed judgment” as if he were present. In 5:5, he tells them what the response to that judgment should be: “hand this man over to Satan.” In 5:4, then, he describes the situation in which they should hand the man over: they should be gathered together and acting with the authority of both Paul and Jesus. Finally, in 5:4, “in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ” could describe how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3, or it could describe how the Corinthians have “assembled” in 5:4. In order to translate these verses clearly, you may need to rearrange some clauses or add explanatory information that clarifies what Paul is saying. For more details and translation options, see the notes on those verses.\n\n### Structure of 5:12–13\n\nIn [5:12–13](../05/13.md), Paul alternates between talking about judging “those outside” and “those inside.” If alternating between these two ideas would be confusing in your language, you could rearrange the clauses so that the verses deal with “those outside” first and then “those inside.” Here is an example of how you could do this: “For what to me to judge those outside? God will judge those outside. But do you not judge those inside? “Remove the evil from among yourselves.” 1CO 5 1 k55t translate-unknown ὅλως ἀκούεται 1 The word translated **actually** can: (1) emphasize that something is really true. Alternate translation: “It is really reported that” (2) emphasize that many people know about what is going on in the Corinthian church. Alternate translation: “It is everywhere reported that” or “It is reported by many people that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 5 1 wrj1 figs-activepassive ὅλως ἀκούεται 1 Here, Paul intentionally uses a passive form to avoid stating who told him about the **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea by making Paul the subject of a verb such as “learn” or by using a form that avoids naming a person. Alternate translation: “Some people have actually reported to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 5 1 dlj2 figs-doublet ἐν ὑμῖν πορνεία, καὶ τοιαύτη πορνεία ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 which does not even exist among the Gentiles Here, Paul repeats **sexual immorality** in order to emphasize how shocked and upset he is that people among the Corinthians are committing sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these two statements and express Paul’s shock in another way. Alternate translation: “{there is} sexual immorality among you that even the Gentiles condemn” or “you overlook flagrant sexual immorality, a kind which even the Gentiles do not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 40 hwz4 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην 1 my judgment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Alternate translation: “I judge that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 7 40 pse4 figs-explicit οὕτως μείνῃ 1 lives as she is Here Paul is referring back to wife whose husband had died from the previous verse ([7:39](../07/39.md)). By **remain as she is**, Paul means “remain unmarried after her husband died.” If **remain as she is** would be misunderstood in your language, you clarify that the wife from the previous verse is in view. Alternate translation: “she remains unmarried” or “she does not marry again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 7 40 hd7f figs-explicit κἀγὼ, Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ ἔχειν 1 happier This could mean that (1) Paul thinks his **judgment** is backed up by **the Spirit of God**. Alternate translation: “I have the Spirit of God supporting my judgment” (2) Paul wishes to say that he has the **Spirit of God** as much as the Corinthians do. Alternate translation: “I also, not just you, have the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* The truth about food and idols (8:1–6)
* Respecting the “weak” (8:7–13)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Things sacrificed to idols

In Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. In fact, for most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice was one of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul explains how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

### The “weak”

In [8:9](../08/09.md), [11](../08/11.md), Paul speaks about the “weak,” and in [8:7](../08/07.md), [10](../08/10.md), [12](../08/12.md), he mentions a “weak conscience,” which is the conscience of the “weak.” The “weak” person or conscience considers eating things sacrificed to idols to be sinful and participation in idolatry. Perhaps “weak” was a word that the Corinthians were using for fellow believers who were not comfortable eating food sacrificed idols. Paul urges the Corinthians to respect these “weak” people, even if it means never eating meat again. While Paul never uses the word “strong” in this section, the “strong would probably be those who are comfortable eating meat sacrificed to an idol.

### Knowledge

Paul refers to “knowledge” in [8:1](../08/01.md), [7](../08/7.md), [10–11](../08/10.md) and to “knowing” in [8:2–4](../08/02.md). Throughout the chapter, the one who has “knowledge” is contrasted with the one who is “weak.” In [8:4–6](../08/04.md), Paul explains what this “knowledge” is about: while other people may name many gods and many lords, believers know that there is only one God and one Lord. Because of this “knowledge,” eating food sacrificed to idols has no significance, since there is only one God and Lord. Paul, however, urges the Corinthians to respect those who do not fully comprehend this “knowledge.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Building up

In [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul contrasts what “knowledge” does (“puffs up”) with what love does (“builds up”). “Building up” in this verse refers to helping other Christians grow in their knowledge of God and care for each other. In [8:10](../08/10.md), however, “building up” has a negative connotation. In this verse, the conscience of the “weak” is “built up,” which means that the “weak” person eats food sacrificed to idols despite his or her conscience says. “Building up” in this verse refers to strengthening a conscience so that one is able to do what one is uncomfortable with.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Other “gods” and “lords”

In [8:4–5](../08/04.md), Paul states that an idol is “nothing.” However, he also acknowledges that there are many so-called “gods” and “lords.” In [10:20–21](../10/20.md), Paul will make his point more clearly: those who sacrifice to idols are actually sacrificing to demons. So, Paul denies the existence of other “gods,” but he thinks that the idols do represent something: demons. In this chapter, you could clarify that Paul is speaking about what other people call “gods” and “lords.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
+1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * The truth about food and idols (8:1–6)\n * Respecting the “weak” (8:7–13)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. In fact, for most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice was one of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul explains how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n### The “weak”\n\nIn [8:9](../08/09.md), [11](../08/11.md), Paul speaks about the “weak,” and in [8:7](../08/07.md), [10](../08/10.md), [12](../08/12.md), he mentions a “weak conscience,” which is the conscience of the “weak.” The “weak” person or conscience considers eating things sacrificed to idols to be sinful and participation in idolatry. Perhaps “weak” was a word that the Corinthians were using for fellow believers who were not comfortable eating food sacrificed idols. Paul urges the Corinthians to respect these “weak” people, even if it means never eating meat again. While Paul never uses the word “strong” in this section, the “strong would probably be those who are comfortable eating meat sacrificed to an idol. \n\n### Knowledge\n\nPaul refers to “knowledge” in [8:1](../08/01.md), [7](../08/7.md), [10–11](../08/10.md) and to “knowing” in [8:2–4](../08/02.md). Throughout the chapter, the one who has “knowledge” is contrasted with the one who is “weak.” In [8:4–6](../08/04.md), Paul explains what this “knowledge” is about: while other people may name many gods and many lords, believers know that there is only one God and one Lord. Because of this “knowledge,” eating food sacrificed to idols has no significance, since there is only one God and Lord. Paul, however, urges the Corinthians to respect those who do not fully comprehend this “knowledge.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Building up\n\nIn [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul contrasts what “knowledge” does (“puffs up”) with what love does (“builds up”). “Building up” in this verse refers to helping other Christians grow in their knowledge of God and care for each other. In [8:10](../08/10.md), however, “building up” has a negative connotation. In this verse, the conscience of the “weak” is “built up,” which means that the “weak” person eats food sacrificed to idols despite his or her conscience says. “Building up” in this verse refers to strengthening a conscience so that one is able to do what one is uncomfortable with. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Other “gods” and “lords”\n\nIn [8:4–5](../08/04.md), Paul states that an idol is “nothing.” However, he also acknowledges that there are many so-called “gods” and “lords.” In [10:20–21](../10/20.md), Paul will make his point more clearly: those who sacrifice to idols are actually sacrificing to demons. So, Paul denies the existence of other “gods,” but he thinks that the idols do represent something: demons. In this chapter, you could clarify that Paul is speaking about what other people call “gods” and “lords.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n 1CO 8 1 cep1 grammar-connect-words-phrases περὶ δὲ 1 Now about Just as in 7:1, **Now about** introduces a new topic that Paul wishes to address. Likely, the topics that he introduces in this way are what the Corinthians wrote to him about. Translate **Now about** here as you translated “now concerning” in [7:1](../07/01.md), [7:25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “Next, about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 8 1 g5t3 translate-unknown τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων 1 food sacrificed to idols Here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next few chapters, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 8 1 beh8 figs-activepassive τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων 1 food sacrificed to idols If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “the things that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 pma2 figs-metaphor ὑπωπιάζω μου τὸ σῶμα 1 Here, Paul uses words that continue the boxing metaphor from [9:26](../09/26.md). He says, “I give my body a black eye.” Paul’s point is that he controls or rules over his **body**, just like boxers control or rule over any opponents that they have punched in the face. He does not mean that he physically hurts his body. Since this language would be misunderstood in English, the ULT has expressed the idea non-figuratively. You could also express the idea non-figuratively, or you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “I rule my body” or “I take control of my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 whfp figs-synecdoche μου τὸ σῶμα, καὶ δουλαγωγῶ 1 Here Paul uses **my body** to refer to himself as a whole. He does not mean that his non-physical part “subdues” and “enslaves” his physical part. Rather, he means that he “subdues” and “enslaves” himself. If your readers would misunderstand **my body**, you could express the idea by using a natural way in your language to refer to oneself. Alternate translation: “myself and enslave myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 9 27 n001 figs-metaphor δουλαγωγῶ 1 Here, Paul speaks as if he were “enslaving” his **body**. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that he controls and rules over himself. If your readers would misunderstand **enslave**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “control it” or “govern it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-logic-contrast μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (2) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)
* Encouragement and command (10:13–14)
* The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)
* Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The Exodus and wilderness journey

In the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])

### “Spiritual”

In [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### The Lord’s Supper

In [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper.

### Things sacrificed to idols

In Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### “That rock was Christ”

In [10:4](../10/04.md), Paul states that the “rock” from which the Israelites received water “was Christ.” This metaphor can be interpreted in two major ways: (1) Paul could be saying that Christ was the one who made the rock provide the Israelites with water. (2) Paul could be saying that the rock provided water for the Israelites like Christ provides salvation for those who believe in him. (3) Paul could be saying that Christ was somehow present in or with the rock itself. Since Paul’s sentence allows for a number of interpretations, if possible you should also allow for a number of interpretations with your translation. Also, consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “that rock was Christ.”

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Quoting the Corinthians

In [10:23](../10/23.md), Paul quotes words that the Corinthians have said or that they wrote to him. The ULT indicates these words by putting quotation marks around them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that an author is quoting someone else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?

In [10:25–27](../10/25.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that they can eat any food from the marketplace or in someone’s home without asking about whether it was sacrificed to an idol. Everything belongs to God, so whether it was sacrificed or not does not matter. However, in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md), Paul gives an exception: if someone tells you directly that the food was sacrificed to an idol, you should not eat it for the sake of the person who told you. Immediately after, however, in [10:29b](../10/29.md), he asks a question that implies that one’s freedom should be constrained by some other person’s ideas about right and wrong. This does not seem to fit with the exception Paul has given in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Most likely, Paul means [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) to be understood as a side note, and [10:29b](../10/29.md) follows directly from [10:27](../10/27.md). In order to indicate this, the UST puts parentheses around [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Consider using a natural way in your language to indicate a side note or a digression from the main argument.
@@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 13 iw8o figs-ellipsis πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul simply lists the three things without using connecting words. Since English speakers expect a connecting word before the last item in a list, the ULT has included **and** here. If your readers would also expect one or several connecting words in a list, you could include them. Alternate translation: “faith and hope and love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 13 13 l4wx figs-explicit μείζων…τούτων 1 faith, hope, and love Here Paul does not explicitly say why **love** is **the greatest**. He could imply that: (1) loving God and others is the most important thing to do. Alternate translation: “the most significant of these” (2) **love** is the only one of the **three** that continues after Jesus comes back, and so it is the only one that lasts. Alternate translation: “the most enduring of these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 13 pw69 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀγάπη 1 faith, hope, and love If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the **love** is for God and others. Alternate translation: “{is} loving people and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n * (14:1–25)\n * (14:26–40)\n\nSome translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Tongues\n\nScholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.\n\n### Prophecy\n\nScholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Building up\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Holy Spirit or human spirit?\n\n### Woman or wife?\n +1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n * Prophecy is superior to tongues in the church (14:1–25)\n * Order in the church (14:26–40)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 21. Verse 21 quotes from ([Isaiah 28:11–12](../../isa/28/11.md)).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Prophecy\n\nWhen Paul speaks about “prophecy” or “prophesying,” he is referring to when someone proclaims a message from God. This message could encourage, rebuke, warn, predict, or do many other things. Whatever the “prophecy” is about, it means that a human is speaking a message from God that others can understand. In your translation, use a word or a phrase that refers to God speaking through people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Tongues\n\nIn this chapter, Paul refers many times to “tongues.” A “tongue” could be: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. (3) foreign languages that believers in the church do not speak. Of course, it could refer to any or all of these languages. Since Paul’s words are not very specific, you may also want to use relatively generic terms that refer to “unknown languages” or “special languages.” What Paul emphasizes is that many or most other believers do not understand the language unless someone interprets it, so make sure that your translation uses a word or phrase that refers to language that not many people understand. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tongue]])\n\n### Interpreting tongues\n\nPaul says that some believers have the “gift” of being able to “interpret” the tongues. These could be the same people who speak the “tongues,” or they could be other people. When someone “interprets” the tongues, he or she either explains what the sounds mean or translates them into a language that the other believers know. Use a word or phrase that refers to explaining or translating unknown languages and sounds. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/interpret]])\n\n### The ungifted\n\nIn [14:16](../14/16.md), [23–24](../14/23.md), Paul refers to the “ungifted.” This word could describe people who: (1) do not have the “gift” of tongues or interpreting tongues. (2) do not belong to the group of believers. The first option is more likely correct because of the emphasis in this chapter on understanding what others are saying during a gathering of believers. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [14:6–9](../14/06.md), [16](../14/16.md), [23](../14/23.md), [26](../14/26.md), [36](../14/36.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Building up\n\nIn [14:3–5](../14/03.md), [12](../14/12.md), [17](../14/17.md), [26](../14/26.md), Paul speaks about “building up.” He identifies people and groups of people with buildings, and he refers to making these people or groups stronger and more mature as if it was “building up” the buildings. If you readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor for making people or groups stronger and more mature, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Hypothetical examples\n\nMany times in this chapter, Paul speaks about specific situations that may or may not be real. He uses these hypothetical situations to give examples that support how he wants the Corinthians to think and what he wants them to do. In [14:6](../14/06.md), [11](../14/11.md), [14](../14/14.md), Paul uses himself in hypothetical examples. In [14:16–17](../14/16.md), [23–25](../14/23.md), Paul uses the Corinthians in hypothetical examples. See the notes on each verse for ways to introduce each hypothetical situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n\n### Children metaphor\n\nIn [14:20](../14/20.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he wants them to be “childlike” about evil, but not “children” in their thoughts, where they should be “mature” or adults. In this metaphor, Paul emphasizes how children know little and are not capable of doing very much. He wants the Corinthians to know and do little evil, but he wants them to know much about the truth and do many good things. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking about how children know and do very little, you could make this explicit or express the metaphor non-figuratively. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Holy Spirit or human spirit?\n\nIn [14:2](../14/02.md), [14–16](../14/14.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to the “Holy Spirit” or to a person’s “spirit.” Similarly, in [14:32](../14/32.md), Paul uses a word that could refer to specific ways in which the “Holy Spirit” empowers prophets or to the prophet’s own “spirits.” The notes will refer to this issue in each of these verses. In [14:2](../14/02.md), [32](../14/32.md), it is recommended that you translate the word in a way that relates it to the Holy Spirit. In [14–16](../14/14.md), however, Paul contrasts this word with the “mind,” so it is recommended that you translate the word here in a way that relates to a person’s “spirit,” which identifies the inner or non-physical part of a person that is not their mind. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### Musical intruments\n\nIn [14:7–8](../14/07.md), Paul refers to three musical instruments. The “flute” refers to a hollow tube or pipe that a musician blows into to create notes. The “harp” refers to a frame with strings attached that a musician plucks to create notes. The “trumpet” refers metal tube with large opening at one end that a musician blows into to create notes. The “trumpet” was often used to send signals during battles. Paul’s point in this verse does not depend upon the exact instruments used. He uses instruments that were common in his culture to make the point that the instruments must make different, recognizable sounds for anyone to understand the music. You could refer to common instruments in your culture that are similar to the ones that Paul refers to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/flute]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/harp]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/trumpet]])\n\n### [14:22](../14/22.md) and the examples in [14:23–25](../14/23.md)\n\nIn [14:22](../14/22.md), Paul says that “tongues” are a “sign” for unbelievers, but “prophecy” is a “sign” for believers. However, in the examples that he gives in [14:23–25](../14/23.md), he only speaks about unbelievers, and it is the “prophecy” that leads to the unbeliever repenting and believing. The “tongues” only lead to the unbeliever thinking that believers are “insane.” Most likely, Paul uses two different nuances of “sign” in these verses. A “sign” simply points to something, so “tongues” point to how someone does not belong to the group (an unbeliever), while “prophecy” points to how someone does belong to the group (a believer). When Paul gives the examples of unbelievers hearing both “tongues” and “prophecy,” the “tongues” are a “sign” because they make the unbeliever feel like an outsider. On the other hand, the “prophecy” is a “sign” because it makes the unbeliever into an insider, a believer. See the notes on these verses for translation options, especially for “sign.” \n\n### Function of [14:33b](../14/33.md)\n\nThe clause “As in all the churches of the saints” in [14:33](../14/33.md) could modify what goes before it (“God is not of confusion, but of peace”) or what goes after it (“let the women be silent in the churches”). Many translations decide that it modifies what goes after it. This is because, in the other places where Paul refers to all the churches (see [7:17](../07/17.md); [11:16](../11/16.md)), is talking about how the churches behave, not about who God is. God is the same no matter what church he is connected to. On the other hand, some translations decide that the phrase modifies what goes before it. This is because Paul states “in the church” again in [14:34](../14/34.md), which would make “As in all the churches of the saints” redundant if it was connected with that verse. Also, the other places where Paul uses similar phrases (see verses already mentioned) put the reference to the other churches at the end of the sentence, not at the beginning. Consider which option translations that your readers are familiar with choose. If there is no strong reason to pick one option or the other, you could follow the ULT and UST. \n\n### The details of [14:34–35](../14/34.md)\n\nIn [14:34–35](../14/34.md), Paul speaks “the women.” The word that he uses could refer to women in general or more specifically to married women. Translations and commentators are divided over whether these two verses require women in general to be silent in church or whether they require wives to be silent in church. Further, being “silent” could refer to keeping quiet at all times, or it could refer to keeping quiet in certain situations or not saying certain things. There are three major options. First, Paul could be speaking about “wives,” and he could be requiring them to keep quiet while their husbands are speaking or prophesying. In other words, they cannot in public question or examine what their husbands say. Second, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to avoid certain kinds of talking. This could be speaking while others are speaking, or it could be asking too many questions, or it could be speaking during specific times when male church leaders were speaking. Third, Paul could be speaking about “women” in general, and he could be requiring them to keep quiet during the entire public gathering of believers. See the notes on these verses for the specific translation issues. Part of the problem in these verses is that Paul is not very specific about what he is commanding. If possible, make your translation general enough to allow for several of these interpretations. 1CO 14 1 vl57 figs-metaphor διώκετε 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **love**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to act in **love** as persistently as someone who “pursues” someone or something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Consistently act in” or “Chase after” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 1 nuf8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Paul implies that the object of **love** is other people. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 1 n7ac grammar-connect-words-phrases ζηλοῦτε δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **but** introduces the next topic that Paul wishes to speak about. If your readers would misunderstand **but** and think that Paul is contrasting **Pursue love** and **be zealous for spiritual gifts**, you could use another word that introduces a new topic, or you could start a new sentence here. If you use the second alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “and be zealous for” or “Be zealous for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1824,59 +1824,230 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 3 ypx0 figs-abstractnouns παράκλησιν, καὶ παραμυθίαν 1 to build them up If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **encouragement** and **consolation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “encourage” and “console.” Alternate translation: “encouraging and consoling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 4 k612 figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ…ὁ…προφητεύων 1 builds up Here, just as in [14:2–3](../14/02.md), Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” and people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “Anyone who speaks in a tongue … anyone who prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 14 4 b2mg figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ…ἐκκλησίαν οἰκοδομεῖ 1 builds up Just as in [14:3](../14/03.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one **builds up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **The one who speaks in a tongue** helps himself or herself become stronger and more mature, while **the one who prophesies** helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “helps himself grow … helps the church grow” or “edifies himself … edifies the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 5 z5my figs-synecdoche μείζων δὲ ὁ προφητεύων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Paul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: “The one who prophesies has a greater gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 14 5 g9k1 διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md). -1CO 14 6 l71k figs-rquestion ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ? 1 how will I benefit you? This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not benefit you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” or “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not have done anything that helps you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 7 t3rb διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here, **sounds** refers to different pitches that make up the melody, not to the difference between a flute sound and a harp sound. -1CO 14 7 hq2u figs-rquestion ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ, πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον? 1 how will it be known what is being played on the flute Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if they would not give different sounds, no one will know what tune the flute or harp is playing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 8 z6jg figs-rquestion ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound, no one would know when it is time to prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 10 im7a figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν ἄφωνον 1 none is without meaning You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “they all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1CO 14 12 j1h7 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας, ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Paul speaks of the **church** as if it were a house that one could build and of the work of building the church as if it were something one could harvest. Alternate translation: “to succeed greatly in making God’s people more able to serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 13 j87g διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret To **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md). -1CO 14 14 kjh6 figs-metaphor ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν 1 my mind is unfruitful The mind not understanding what is being prayed and, therefore, receiving no benefit from the prayer is spoken of as if the **mind is unfruitful**. Alternate translation: “I do not understand it in my mind” or “my mind does not benefit from the prayer, because I do not understand the words I am saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 15 vm6p figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν? 1 What should I do? Paul is introducing his conclusion. Alternate translation: “This is what I will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 15 r11f προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ 1 pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind Prayers and songs must be in a language that the people present can understand. -1CO 14 15 fi2f τῷ νοΐ 1 with my mind “with words that I understand” -1CO 14 16 niu5 figs-you εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Though **you** and **your** are singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1CO 14 16 r4w5 figs-rquestion ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι, ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if you bless with the spirit, the outsider will never be able to say ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 16 j3e3 τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 the ungifted This could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group. -1CO 14 16 ev63 figs-synecdoche ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν 1 say “Amen” “will … be able to agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 14 17 a7wr figs-you σὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς 1 you certainly give Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1CO 14 17 w25k figs-metaphor ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 the other person is not built up Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 17 m7cj figs-activepassive ἀλλ’ ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 19 cbw8 figs-hyperbole ἢ μυρίους λόγους 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Paul was not counting **words**, but used exaggeration to emphasize that a few understandable words are far more valuable than even a great number of words in a language that people cannot understand. Alternate translation: “10,000 words” or “a great many words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1CO 14 20 luu4 0 General Information: Paul tells them that speaking in different languages was told ahead of time by the prophet Isaiah many years before this speaking in other languages happened at the start of Christ’s church. -1CO 14 20 mh5t figs-metaphor μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε ταῖς φρεσίν 1 do not be children in your thinking Here, **children** is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: “do not think like children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 14 21 jx6l figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται 1 In the law it is written, You can state this in active form: Alternate translation: “The prophet wrote these words in the law:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 21 l9xz figs-parallelism ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers These two phrases mean basically the same thing and are used together for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 14 22 bp4j 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives specific instructions on an orderly way to use gifts in the church. -1CO 14 22 qj5f figs-doublenegatives οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις 1 not for unbelievers, but for believers This can be expressed positively and combined with the other positive statement. Alternate translation: “only for believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1CO 14 23 hj3d figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε? 1 would they not say that you are insane? This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “they would say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 24 xxy5 figs-parallelism ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Paul says basically the same thing twice for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he would realize that he is guilty of sin because he hears what you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 14 25 ma47 figs-metonymy τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται 1 The secrets of his heart would be revealed Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “his own private inner thoughts will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 14 25 l62f figs-activepassive τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would reveal to him the secrets of his heart” or “He would recognize his own private inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 25 w31w figs-idiom πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει τῷ Θεῷ 1 he would fall on his face and worship God Here, **having fallen on his face** is an idiom, meaning he has bowed down. Alternate translation: “he would bow down and worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 14 26 bv9k figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί? 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Paul uses a question to introduce the next part of his message. Alternate translation: “Because everything I have just told you is true, this is what you need to do, my fellow believers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 26 xzz2 ἑρμηνίαν 1 interpretation Here, an **interpretation** means a telling of what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md). -1CO 14 27 wc1z καὶ ἀνὰ μέρος 1 and each one in turn “and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time” -1CO 14 27 ari2 διερμηνευέτω 1 must interpret To **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md). -1CO 14 29 a9iz προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak This could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time. -1CO 14 30 sl1q figs-activepassive ἐὰν…ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ 1 if a revelation is given to another You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives insight to another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 31 xr69 καθ’ ἕνα…προφητεύειν 1 prophesy one by one Only one person should prophesy at a time. -1CO 14 31 nrq1 figs-activepassive πάντες…παρακαλῶνται 3 all may be encouraged You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 14 33 my65 οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς 1 God is not a God of confusion God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time. -1CO 14 34 gjv2 αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν 1 let be silent This could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service. -1CO 14 36 h8lp figs-rquestion ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν? 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? Paul uses these questions to emphasize that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God’s will.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 14 36 mj6b figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, the **word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 14 37 ab6u ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul’s writings as coming from the Lord. -1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable. -1CO 14 40 d7ia figs-activepassive πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Resurrection

This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection

Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand. -1CO 15 1 gc6n 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen. -1CO 15 1 la9v γνωρίζω…ὑμῖν 1 make known to you “I am helping you remember” -1CO 15 1 xv53 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε 1 on which you stand Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 2 xh29 figs-activepassive σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved You can state this in active form. “God is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 15 2 le2k τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν 1 the word I preached to you “to the message I preached to you” +1CO 14 5 f1sh figs-ellipsis μᾶλλον δὲ ἵνα 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**I desire**). If your language does need these words, you can supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “but I desire even more that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 5 z5my figs-genericnoun ὁ προφητεύων…ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσαις 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul is speaking of people “who prophesy” and people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of two particular people. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who prophesies … anyone who speaks in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 5 o0b6 figs-explicit μείζων 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater Here, **greater** indicates that **the one who prophecies** does something that is more important and helpful than **the one who speaks in tongues**. It does not mean that God cares about the person **who prophesies** more than the person **who speaks in tongues**. If you readers would misunderstand **greater**, you could state explicitly how or in what way the person is **greater**. Alternate translation: “does something more useful” or “does what is more valuable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 5 u9oq figs-infostructure ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 Now the one who prophesies is greater The ULT puts these clauses in parentheses because they give a qualification of what Paul has said about how **the one who prophesies is greater than the one who speaks in tongues**. In this clause, Paul clarifies that he is only speaking about **tongues** without interpretation. Further, if someone does **interpret** the **tongues**, then that can lead to **building up**, just like prophecy. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “That is true except for when he interprets, so that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 5 g9k1 grammar-connect-exceptions ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ διερμηνεύῃ, ἵνα ἡ ἐκκλησία οἰκοδομὴν λάβῃ 1 he would interpret If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. If you use this alternate translation, you may need to remove the parentheses. Alternate translation: “and does not interpret, because it is only when he interprets that the church receives building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +1CO 14 5 ut9b writing-pronouns διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Here, **he** could refer back specifically to **the one who speaks in tongues**, but it does not have to do so. The word **he** could refer to anyone who can **interpret**, not just the person who is speaking **in tongues**. If your readers would misunderstand that **he** refers to anyone, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “he or somebody else would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 5 pmzu figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 he would interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she would interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 5 o7ok figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 he would interpret Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **the one who speaks in tongues** and also “interprets” helps other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md). Alternate translation: “growth” or “edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 6 fxhx gammar-connect-words-phrases νῦν δέ, ἀδελφοί 1 how will I benefit you? Here, **But now** introduces what Paul thinks is true. The word **now** does not refer to time here. If your readers would misunderstand **But now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces what a person thinks is true. Alternate translation: “As it is, brothers,” or “But what is true, brothers, is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 14 6 oemv figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 how will I benefit you? Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 6 jndd figs-123person ἔλθω…ὠφελήσω…λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could instead use a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody comes … will he or she benefit … he or she speaks” or “people come … will they benefit … they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 6 j3nn figs-infostructure ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ? 1 how will I benefit you? If your language would normally express what will **benefit** the Corinthians before what will not **benefit** them, you could rearrange this verse. Alternate translation: “will I not benefit you if I speak to you in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching? But will I benefit you at all if I come to you speaking in tongues?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 6 i4st figs-hypo ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he was coming to them **speaking in tongues**. He uses himself in this hypothetical situation to illustrate that he could do this if he wanted to and also because he does not want to offend someone else by saying that they do not **benefit** others. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that I came to you speaking in tongues. What would I benefit you unless I spoke to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1CO 14 6 l71k figs-rquestion τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ? 1 how will I benefit you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” In other words, Paul would be of no **benefit** at all. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will not benefit you unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 6 v7a9 grammar-connect-exceptions τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “will I not benefit you only when I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +1CO 14 6 vqpn figs-abstractnouns ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ 1 how will I benefit you? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation**, **knowledge**, **prophecy**, or **teaching**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal,” “know,” “prophesy,” and “teach.” Alternate translation: “either to show you things or to make you understand things or to prophesy to you or to instruct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 7 d6mt figs-infostructure ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα, εἴτε αὐλὸς, εἴτε κιθάρα, ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **they** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “If even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—would not give different sounds” or “Take even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—as an example. If they would not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 7 cv7t translate-unknown τὰ ἄψυχα 1 they do not make different sounds Here**lifeless things** are things are inanimate objects, things that have never been alive. Paul is specifically thinking of instruments that humans use to make sounds. If your readers would misunderstand **lifeless things**, you could use a word or phrase that normally refers to things that have never been alive. Alternate translation: “inanimate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 7 g2fx figs-idiom φωνὴν διδόντα…διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something could **give** a sound. This means that the thing creates or makes the sound. If your readers would misunderstand **giving sounds** or **give different sounds**, you could use a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “creating sounds … they would not create different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 7 xunn grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **flute** and **harp** really do **give different sounds**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if they actually did not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 14 7 t3rb figs-explicit διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul refers to how an instrument like a **flute** or a **harp** produces many **different sounds**. It is only because it produces a variety of different sounds that it can create a melody or a song. If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is talking about here, you could make it more explicit that he is talking about how different sounds make up a song or melody. Alternate translation: “they did not make many different pitches” or “if they did not create various notes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 7 hq2u figs-rquestion πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον? 1 how will it be known what is being played on the flute Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it will not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the thing being played on the flute or the thing being played on the harp will not be known.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 7 fmn6 figs-activepassive τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον 1 how will it be known what is being played on the flute If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul here uses the passive to emphasize the song instead of the person who plays the song. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “what a person plays on the flute or what a person plays on the harp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 7 cfaw figs-activepassive πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον 1 how will it be known what is being played on the flute If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “how anyone know the thing being played on the flute or the thing being played on the harp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 8 qdy0 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **For indeed** introduces another example that further supports what Paul said in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand **For indeed**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another example. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 14 8 ykv3 figs-explicit ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον 1 who will prepare for battle? In Paul’s culture, soldiers would often use **a trumpet** to issue commands or signals before or during a **battle**. These signals could indicate that an enemy was coming, that the soldiers should attack or retreat, or various other things. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul jumps from talking about **a trumpet** to talking about a **battle**, you could state more explicitly that the **trumpet** was used in warfare. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound when a solider uses it to signal other soldiers, who will prepare for battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 8 h3hv grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ 1 who will prepare for battle? Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **a trumpet** really does **give** a certain or clear **sound**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet actually were to give an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +1CO 14 8 hauz figs-idiom ἄδηλον…φωνὴν δῷ 1 who will prepare for battle? In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something **gives** a **sound**. This means that the thing creates or makes the **sound**. If your readers would misunderstand **gives an uncertain sound**, you could use a comparable idiom or expression. See how you translated this idiom in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “creates an uncertain sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 8 ynnk figs-explicit ἄδηλον…φωνὴν 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **an uncertain sound** refers to notes that are not easily recognized or are difficult to hear. If your readers would misunderstand **an uncertain sound**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to notes that are played poorly or are hard to hear. Alternate translation: “an unclear sound” or “an indistinct sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 8 z6jg figs-rquestion τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one will.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “people would never prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 9 q9lk figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς…ἐὰν 1 who will prepare for battle? Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians would have inferred that Paul meant they would be like instruments that do not make clear sounds. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires more words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “You are like those instruments. Unless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 9 f9h6 οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς διὰ τῆς γλώσσης, ἐὰν μὴ εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **tongue** could refer to: (1) the human body part that people use to speak words. In this case, **with {your} tongue** modifies **give intelligible speech**. Alternate translation: “In the same way also you, unless you use your tongue to give intelligible speech” (2) the unknown language that some of the Corinthians were speaking. In this case, **with {your} tongue** modifies the first **you**. Alternate translation: “You act in the same way when you speak in a tongue. Unless you give intelligible speech” +1CO 14 9 ltq2 figs-idiom εὔσημον λόγον δῶτε 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, to **give intelligible speech** refers to making words that other people understand. If your language does not use **give** for **speech** or words, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “you speak intelligible words” or “you talk in intelligible language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 9 bw66 translate-unknown εὔσημον λόγον 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **intelligible speech** refers to words and sentences that other people can understand. If your readers would misunderstand **intelligible speech**, you could use a comparable expression that identifies language that can be understood. Alternate translation: “understandable speech” or “words that others can comprehend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 9 rlzw figs-rquestion πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ λαλούμενον? 1 who will prepare for battle? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it will not be understood.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the thing being spoken will never be understood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 9 qmc2 figs-activepassive γνωσθήσεται τὸ λαλούμενον 1 who will prepare for battle? If your language does not use the passive form in these ways, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses passive forms here to avoid stating who is speaking and who is understanding, which makes his question more general. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “you” are speaking and some other person is understanding. Alternate translation: “someone understand what you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 9 m3cj figs-idiom εἰς ἀέρα λαλοῦντες 1 who will prepare for battle? Here, **speaking into the air** is a way to say that the speech or words have no effect. In other words, no people but only **the air** hears the **speech**. If your readers would misunderstand **speaking into the air**, you could use a comparable expression that describes words that have no effect or meaning. Alternate translation: “speaking empty words” or “talking to nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 10 ddu4 translate-unknown εἰ τύχοι 1 none is without meaning Here, **doubtless** indicates that Paul is assuming that there are **so many kinds of languages**. He is not arguing this and is not interested in proving it. If your readers would misunderstand **doubtless**, you cold use a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that is assumed to be true. Alternate translation: “assuredly” or “certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 10 cfkk οὐδὲν ἄφωνον 1 none is without meaning The word translated **without meaning** could refer to: (1) how all the **languages** “communicate” clearly among those who know those languages. Alternate translation: “and none communicate nothing” (2) how all the languages use “sound” or “voice” to communicate. Alternate translation: “none {is} without sound” or “all of them use the voice” +1CO 14 10 im7a figs-litotes οὐδὲν ἄφωνον 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite meaning of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +1CO 14 11 dl95 figs-hypo ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς, ἔσομαι τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβαρος, καὶ ὁ λαλῶν ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος. 1 none is without meaning Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that he is with somebody who speaks a language that he does not know. In this situation, he and the other person are “foreigners” to each other. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose, then, that I do not know the meaning of a specific language. In this situation, I am a foreigner to anyone who speaks that language, and anyone who speaks that language is a foreigner to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1CO 14 11 drm2 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐὰν οὖν 1 none is without meaning Here, **then** could introduce: (1) an inference from the previous verse. In other words, if every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), **then** a person who does not understand that meaning is **a foreigner** to the person who speaks that language. Alternate translation: “Therefore, if” (2) a contrast with the previous verse. In other words, although every language communicates meaning ([14:10](../14/10.md)), a person who does not understand the language cannot grasp that meaning. Alternate translation: “But if” +1CO 14 11 myal grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν οὖν μὴ εἰδῶ τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that not knowing **the meaning of the language** leads to being a **foreigner to the one speaking** that language. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Then, whenever I do not know the meaning of the language” or “Suppose then that I do not know the meaning of the language. Then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 11 ut5z figs-123person μὴ εἰδῶ…ἔσομαι…ἐμοὶ 1 none is without meaning Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could instead use a generic third person. Alternate translation: “somebody does not know … he or she will be … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 11 ueuu figs-abstractnouns τὴν δύναμιν τῆς φωνῆς 1 none is without meaning If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **meaning**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “communicates” or “means.” Alternate translation: “what the language means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 11 szms translate-unknown βάρβαρος -1 none is without meaning Here, **foreigner** identifies someone with whom one does not share a culture and language. If your readers would misunderstand **foreigner**, you could use a comparable term for someone who has a different language and culture. Alternate translation: “an outsider … {will be} an outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 11 q756 figs-ellipsis τῷ λαλοῦντι…ὁ λαλῶν 1 none is without meaning Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the first clause (**the language**). If your language does need these words, you can supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to the one speaking the language … the one speaking the language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 12 o0rq grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here, **So also you** introduces the conclusion Paul wishes to draw from what he has said in [14:1–11](../14/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand the function of **So also you**, you could use a comparable phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “In line with all of that” or “Given what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 14 12 oel4 figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. If your language does need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “should act in this way.” Alternate translation: “So also you should behave in the following way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 12 f6vn figs-idiom ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here, **seek that you would abound** refers to desiring to have more of something. If your readers would misunderstand this construction, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates a desire to have or do more. Alternate translation: “desire to overflow with them” or “endeavor to gain more of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 12 di2n figs-possession πρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Here Paul uses the possession form to speak about **building up** that affects the **church**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by translating **building up** as a verb with **church** as its object. Alternate translation: “so that you can build up the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 14 12 j1h7 figs-metaphor τὴν οἰκοδομὴν 1 try to excel in the gifts that build up the church Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:3](../14/03.md), [5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 13 dsve figs-imperative ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ, προσευχέσθω 1 interpret Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the one speaking in tongues must pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 13 j87g figs-genericnoun ὁ λαλῶν γλώσσῃ 1 interpret Paul is speaking of people “who speak in tongues” in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who speaks in a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 13 yjos figs-ellipsis διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Here Paul omits what the person is going to **interpret** since he already stated it in the previous clause (**a tongue**). If you need to specify what the person will **interpret**, you could include a reference to the **tongue** here. Alternate translation: “he might interpret it” or “he might interpret what he said in the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 13 a378 figs-gendernotations διερμηνεύῃ 1 interpret Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she might interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 14 yi43 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν προσεύχωμαι γλώσσῃ, τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that praying **in a tongue** leads to the **spirit** praying but the **mind** being **unfruitful**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **If** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “Whenever I pray in a tongue, my spirit” or “Suppose that I pray in a tongue. Then, my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 14 tfy0 figs-123person προσεύχωμαι…μου…μου 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could instead use a generic third person or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “somebody would pray … his or her … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 14 gph1 τὸ πνεῦμά μου προσεύχεται 1 my mind is unfruitful Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “my inner spiritual being prays” or “my heart prays” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit prays with my spirit” or “the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being in prayer” +1CO 14 14 kjh6 figs-metaphor ὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν 1 my mind is unfruitful Here Paul speaks as if his **mind** were a plant or tree that could produce “fruit.” He states that his **mind** is **unfruitful** to indicate that it is not doing anything useful, just like a fruit tree that does not produce fruit. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “my mind does nothing” or “my mind is not involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 15 vm6p figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν? 1 What should I do? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or solution. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what I do.” or “This, then, is what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 15 nkgj figs-123person προσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ 1 What should I do? Here, just as in [14:14](../14/14.md), Paul uses the first person to give himself as an example. If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could instead use a generic third person or explicitly state that Paul is an example. Alternate translation: “People should pray with their spirits, and they should also pray with their minds. People should sing with their spirits, and they should also sing with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 15 nneh grammar-connect-time-simultaneous προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ…ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. 1 What should I do? Here, doing things **with {my} mind** could happen: (1) at the same time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he will use both his **spirit** and **mind** at the same time when he “prays” or “sings.” Alternate translation: “and I will use {my} mind also … and I will use {my} mind also” (2) at a different time as doing things **with {my} spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that he sometimes use his **spirit** and sometimes use his **mind**. Alternate translation: “but other times I will pray with {my} mind … but other times I will sing with {my} mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1CO 14 15 r11f τῷ Πνεύματι -1 pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mind Here, just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the **mind** but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with my inner spiritual being … with my inner spiritual being” or “with my heart … with my heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit … as the Holy Spirit directs my spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being … as the Holy Spirit directs my inner spiritual being” +1CO 14 16 fyc7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι…πῶς 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that blessing **with the spirit** leads to **the one who fills the place of the ungifted** being unable to **say the “Amen”**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “whenever you bless with the spirit, how” or “Suppose that you bless with the spirit. Then, how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 16 niu5 figs-yousingular εὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul switches from using himself as an example to using one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, every **you** in this verse is singular. If your readers would misunderstand the second person singular here, you could instead use a second person plural or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, bless … your thanksgiving … you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +1CO 14 16 crew figs-explicit εὐλογῇς πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Here Paul is speaking about someone who is using **the spirit** only and not the “mind” to speak in “tongues.” If your readers would misunderstand that this is what Paul is talking about, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “you bless in tongues with the spirit only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 gi1q πνεύματι 1 you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are saying Just as in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, a part that contrasts with the mind but that is not somehow superior or closer to God. Alternate translation: “with your inner spiritual being” or “with your heart” (2) the Holy Spirit directing the **spirit** of a person. Alternate translation: “by the power of the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit directs your inner spiritual being” +1CO 14 16 r4w5 figs-rquestion ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the answer to the question is “he cannot.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “the one who fills the place of the ungifted will not be able to say the ‘Amen’ at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 16 untg figs-metaphor ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Here, Paul speaks as if there was a **place** for **the ungifted** which they would “fill.” He speaks in this way to characterize the person by the **place** they “fill.” In other words, a person who **fills the place of the ungifted** is characterized as **ungifted**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the one who is ungifted” or “the ungifted person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 16 g36b figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναπληρῶν 1 how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying? Paul is speaking of people who “fill” **the place of the ungifted** in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “anyone who fills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 16 j3e3 translate-unknown τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 the ungifted Here, **the ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the “tongue” in the person is speaking. Alternate translation: “of the one who does not understand tongues” or “of the uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “of the outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 16 ev63 figs-explicit ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ 1 say “Amen” Here, to **say the “Amen”** refers to responding in agreement to something that someone has said. This is because, in Christian gatherings, the word **Amen** was a common way to affirm or agree with someone. If your readers would misunderstand **Amen** or why people would say it, you could express the idea by using a word that indicates agreement or by referring simply to agreement. Alternate translation: “will … agree with” or “will … say that he agrees with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 i6o5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” Here, **your thanksgiving** refers back to what the person said when they were “blessing” **with the spirit**. Paul uses a different word here, but they mean basically the same thing. If your readers would misunderstand **thanksgiving**, you could translate this phrase so that it clearly refers back to **bless with the spirit**. Alternate translation: “at what you said” or “at your blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 16 jxn4 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 say “Amen” If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thanksgiving**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “thank.” Alternate translation: “at how you thanked God” or “at what you thanked God for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 16 m0x2 figs-gendernotations οὐκ οἶδεν 1 say “Amen” Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she does not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 17 a7wr figs-yousingular σὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς 1 you certainly give Here Paul continues to use one of the Corinthians as an example. Because of this, **you** in this verse is singular. If your readers would misunderstand the second person singular here, you could instead use a second person plural or explicitly state that **you** functions as an example. Alternate translation: “you, for example, certainly give thanks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +1CO 14 17 cgls figs-genericnoun ὁ ἕτερος 1 you certainly give Paul is speaking of **other** people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 14 17 w25k figs-metaphor ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 the other person is not built up Just as in [14:4](../14/04.md), Paul here speaks as if a person were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that **you** who are “giving thanks” are not helping other people become stronger, unlike the one who builds a house and thus makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the other person is not helped to grow” or “the other person is not edified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 17 m7cj figs-activepassive ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the person who **is not built up** rather than the person who is not doing the building up. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “you” did it. Alternate translation: “you do not build up the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 18 t27e figs-ellipsis πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**speak in tongues**). If your language does need these words, you can supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “all of you speak in tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 19 w4pr figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here, **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meet to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand **in the church**, you could clarify that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 19 jht9 translate-numbers πέντε 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here Paul speaks about **five** words to indicate just a few words in contrast to the **myriads** he will mention later on in the verse. There is no special significance to the number **five**. If your readers would misunderstand and think that **five** is a special number, you could use a number that would not be considered special or indicate that Paul has “a few” words in mind. Alternate translation: “four” or “only several” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +1CO 14 19 nzby figs-infostructure ἵνα καὶ ἄλλους κατηχήσω, ἢ μυρίους λόγους ἐν γλώσσῃ 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue If your language would naturally state the rest of the comparison before the purpose, you could rearrange these clauses. You may need to start a new sentence when you express the purpose. Alternate translation: “than myriads of words in a tongue. That way, I might also instruct others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 19 cbw8 figs-hyperbole μυρίους λόγους 1 than ten thousand words in a tongue Here, much like in [4:15](../04/15.md), **myriads of words** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **words**. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many words” or “a large number of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 14 20 luu4 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 General Information: Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “Brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 20 mh5t figs-metaphor μὴ παιδία γίνεσθε…νηπιάζετε 1 do not be children in your thinking Here, much like in [13:11](../13/11.md), Paul compares people to **children**. He is particularly thinking about how children do not know very much or do very much. Paul thus wants the Corinthians not to be like children by avoiding knowing very little in their **thinking**. He wants the Corinthians to be like children by doing very little **evil**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express it as an analogy or in a non-figurative way. If possible, preserve the metaphor because Paul has already used “child” language in [13:11](../13/11.md). Alternate translation: “do not know very little, like children, … do very little, like children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 20 i2w1 figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ τῇ κακίᾳ, νηπιάζετε, ταῖς δὲ φρεσὶν, τέλειοι γίνεσθε 1 do not be children in your thinking If your language would naturally express the contrast before the comparison, you could move the clause about being **mature** before the clause about being **childlike**. Alternate translation: “Rather, become mature in the thoughts, and only be childlike in evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 20 y2og τῇ κακίᾳ 1 do not be children in your thinking Alternate translation: “about evil” +1CO 14 21 jx6l figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται 1 In the law it is written, If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to emphasize the words rather than whoever wrote the words. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “In the law someone wrote” or “They wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 21 mbkb writing-quotations ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται 1 In the law it is written, In Paul’s culture, **it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Isaiah” (see [Isaiah 28:11–12](isa/28/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It can be read in the law” or “In the law, the book of Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 14 21 up8a figs-explicit ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 In the law it is written, Here, **law** refers to all of the scriptures of Israel that we call the Old Testament. It does not refer just to the first five books or to books that have “laws.” If your readers would misunderstand **law**, you could use a term that refers more clearly to the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “In the scriptures” or “In the Israelites’ sacred book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 21 f5gp figs-quotations γέγραπται, ὅτι ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων, λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος 1 In the law it is written, If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that by people of other tongues and by the lips of strangers God will speak to this people, but not even in this way will they hear him. So says the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +1CO 14 21 l9xz figs-parallelism ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here, Paul quotes two phrases that mean basically the same thing. In Paul’s culture, poetry often included repetition of the same idea in different words. If your readers would not recognize this as poetry, and if they would misunderstand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “By strangers of other tongues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 14 21 trh3 figs-metonymy ἑτερογλώσσοις 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here, **tongues** refers to words that people speak with their **tongues**. It primarily refers here to foreign languages, not primarily to unknown languages spoken in Christian worship. If your readers would misunderstand **tongues**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to foreign languages. Alternate translation: “by people of other languages” or “people who speak different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 14 21 q6ku figs-metonymy χείλεσιν ἑτέρων 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here, **lips** refers to words that people speak with their **lips**. If your readers would misunderstand **lips**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what people say. Alternate translation: “the words of strangers” or “the speech of strangers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 14 21 s7uu figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers The Corinthians would have understood **this people** to refer to the people of Israel. If your readers would not make this inference, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 21 sltb figs-infostructure λαλήσω τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ καὶ οὐδ’ οὕτως εἰσακούσονταί μου, λέγει Κύριος 1 By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangers Here Paul includes **says the Lord** to indicate who spoke the words he quotes. If your language would indicate who is speaking before or in the middle of the quote, you could move **says the Lord** to a more natural place. Alternate translation: “I will speak to this people,’ says the Lord, ‘but not even in this way will they hear me.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 22 bp4j εἰς σημεῖόν εἰσιν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **sign** could be: (1) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. This would fit with what the quotation from Isaiah in the last verse suggests. Alternate translation: “are an indication of God’s judgment” (2) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. This would fit with what “signs” means in [1:22](../01/22.md), but it does not fit well with the next two verses (see [14:23–24](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “are impressive” or “are convicting” +1CO 14 22 vl45 figs-infostructure σημεῖόν…οὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις…οὐ τοῖς ἀπίστοις, ἀλλὰ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 Connecting Statement: If your language would naturally put those whom the signs are **to** before those whom they are **not to**, you could rearrange the clauses so that the **not** clause is second. Alternate translation: “a sign to the unbelievers, not to those who believe … {is} to those who believe, not to the unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 22 qj5f figs-ellipsis ἡ…προφητεία, οὐ 1 not for unbelievers, but for believers Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. The Corinthians could have inferred: (1) the words “is for a sign,” since Paul used these words in the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “prophecy is for a sign, not” (2) the word “is,” since Paul’s language often implies “is” when there is no verb. See the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 22 bddb ἡ…προφητεία, οὐ 1 not for unbelievers, but for believers If Paul implies “is for a sign” here, then “sign” could mean what it meant earlier in the verse, but it more likely means something different. “Sign” could be: (1) a positive indication of what convicts or impresses people. Alternate translation: “prophesy {is} impressive, not” or “prophecy {is} convicting, not” (2) a negative indication of God’s judgment or wrath. Alternate translation: “prophecy {is} an indication of God’s judgment, not” +1CO 14 22 mb3p figs-abstractnouns ἡ…προφητεία 1 not for unbelievers, but for believers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prophecy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prophesy.” Alternate translation: “what people prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 23 ec5x figs-hypo ἐὰν οὖν συνέλθῃ ἡ ἐκκλησία ὅλη ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ, καὶ πάντες λαλῶσιν γλώσσαις, εἰσέλθωσιν δὲ ἰδιῶται ἢ ἄπιστοι, οὐκ ἐροῦσιν 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **the whole church** is together, and **all speak in tongues**. Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **ungifted or unbelievers** are present and hear **all** speaking **in tongues**. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose, then, that the whole church comes together to the same place, and they all speak in tongues. Suppose that ungifted or unbelievers come in. Will they not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1CO 14 23 mlmt figs-doublet συνέλθῃ…ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here Paul uses both **come together** and **to the same place** to emphasize that he is speaking about an official gathering of the church for worship. If your language does not use two similar phrases for emphasis like Paul does, then you could use just one phrase and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “might come together” or “might be in the same place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1CO 14 23 agza translate-unknown ἰδιῶται 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here, just as in [14:16](../14/16.md), **ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the **tongues** that the other people are speaking. Alternate translation: “people who do not understand tongues” or “uninitiated” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 23 n03r figs-go εἰσέλθωσιν 1 would they not say that you are insane? Your language may say “would go in” rather than **would come in** in this situation. Use whatever form is natural. Alternate translation: “would go in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +1CO 14 23 hj3d figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε? 1 would they not say that you are insane? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “yes, they will.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “they will definitely say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 23 xiiq translate-unknown μαίνεσθε 1 would they not say that you are insane? People who are **insane** act in ways that are not normal or acceptable. Often these ways are dangerous, strange, or irrational. If your readers would misunderstand **insane**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies people who are acting in irrational and strange ways. Alternate translation: “you are out of your minds” or “you are mad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 23 fa7i figs-123person μαίνεσθε 1 would they not say that you are insane? Here, **you** refers back to **the whole church** and **they** who **speak in tongues**. Paul switches from third person to second person to apply the hypothetical situation to the Corinthians. If your readers would misunderstand this switch, you could use second person earlier in the verse or use the third person here. Alternate translation: “the church is insane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 24 mm3e figs-hypo ἐὰν…πάντες προφητεύωσιν, εἰσέλθῃ δέ τις ἄπιστος ἢ ἰδιώτης, ἐλέγχεται 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Corinthians. He wants them to imagine that **all would prophesy**, and he implies that the whole church is together for this hypothetical situation, just like for the last one (see [14:23](../14/23.md)). Then, he wants them to imagine what would happen if **some unbeliever** or **ungifted person** is present and hears **all** prophesying. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose that they all would prophesy. Suppose that some unbeliever or ungifted person comes in. In that situation, he is convicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1CO 14 24 feby figs-123person πάντες προφητεύωσιν 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here, Paul uses the third person because he is again using a hypothetical situation. However, he wants the Corinthians to apply this hypothetical situation to themselves. If your readers would misunderstand that **they** applies to the Corinthians, you could use the second person instead. Alternate translation: “you all would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 14 24 d5vi translate-unknown ἰδιώτης 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here, just as in [14:23](../14/23.md), **ungifted** could refer to: (1) any person who does not understand the tongues that the other people are speaking. Alternate translation: “person who does not understand tongues” or “uninitiated person” (2) a person who is not part of the Christian group. Alternate translation: “outsider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])  +1CO 14 24 ihkk figs-go εἰσέλθῃ 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Your language may say “might go in” rather than **might come in** in this situation. Use whatever form is natural. Alternate translation: “might go in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +1CO 14 24 xxy5 figs-parallelism ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here Paul uses the same words and structure twice, only changing the verb. He does this to emphasize how the “prophecy” affects the **unbeliever or ungifted person**. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers might be confused why Paul repeats himself, you could combine these two clauses into one. Alternate translation: “he is convicted and examined by all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 14 24 izrj figs-activepassive ἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to emphasize the person who is **convicted** or **examined** rather than the **all** that is doing the actions. Alternate translation: “all convict him, all examine him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])  +1CO 14 24 gr05 figs-gendernotations ἐλέγχεται…ἀνακρίνεται 1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Although **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she is convicted … he or she is examined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 24 iprk ὑπὸ πάντων -1 he would be convicted by all and examined by all Here, **all** could refer to: (1) everything that the people who **prophesy** are saying. Alternate translation: “by all that is said … by all that is said” or “by all the words … by all the words” (2) **they all** who are prophesying. Alternate translation: “by all who are prophesying … by all who are prophesying” +1CO 14 25 ma47 figs-metonymy τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ 1 The secrets of his heart would be revealed In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If that meaning of **heart** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the secrets of his mind” or “his secret thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 14 25 l62f figs-metaphor τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the secrets of his heart** were invisible objects that could **become visible**. He speaks in this way to indicate that others now know **the secrets** as much as if they saw them **become visible**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the secrets of his heart become known” or “the secrets of his heart are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 25 w31w figs-idiom πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον 1 he would fall on his face and worship God In Paul’s culture, “falling” **on** one’s **face** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s **face** close to the ground. This was a position used to show respect and sometimes worship. If your readers would misunderstand **having fallen on {his} face**, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having bowed down” or “kneeling to show respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 25 q5ee figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ…πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει  1 he would fall on his face and worship God Although **his** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **his** and **he** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … {his or her} face, he or she will worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 14 25 tou0 figs-quotations ἀπαγγέλλων, ὅτι ὄντως ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν 1 he would fall on his face and worship God If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “declaring that God is really among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +1CO 14 26 bv9k figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί? 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. He himself gives the answer to the question in the next sentences. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or a clarification. Alternate translation: “This is what it is, brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 26 f8ai figs-explicit τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, Paul could be asking this question about: (1) what his argument means for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “What then do I mean” (2) what the Corinthians should be doing. Alternate translation: “What then should you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 26 b79h figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 26 qgao writing-pronouns ἕκαστος 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, **each one** refers to specific or individual believers in the Corinthian church. Paul does not mean that every person **has** each of these things, and he also does not mean that **each** person has only one of these things. Rather, he means that individual people within the Corinthian church may have any of these things **when you come together**. If your readers would misunderstand **each one**, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly indicates that Paul is speaking in general. Alternate translation: “any one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 26 m04v figs-parallelism ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here Paul repeats **has** in order to emphasize any believer might “have” any of these things **when you come together**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul repeats **has**, you could use another form that indicates that any person might have any of these things. Alternate translation: “has a psalm, or a teaching, or a revelation, or a tongue, or an interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 14 26 qsx0 figs-abstractnouns ψαλμὸν ἔχει, διδαχὴν ἔχει, ἀποκάλυψιν ἔχει, γλῶσσαν ἔχει, ἑρμηνίαν ἔχει 1 What is tp be then, brothers? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation** or **interpretation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal” and “interpret.” If you do, you may need to translate all the items in the list with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “sings a psalm, instructs, explains something that was secret, speaks in a tongue, or interprets a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 26 dy8d figs-explicit ἑρμηνίαν 1 What is tp be then, brothers? Here, just as in [12:10](../12/10.md), **interpretation** refers specifically to interpreting **a tongue**. If your readers would misunderstand what the **interpretation** is about, you could state explicitly that it is an **interpretation** of a **tongue**. Alternate translation: “an interpretation of a tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 26 fnba figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:12](../14/12.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +1CO 14 26 jvgw figs-explicit πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Here the Corinthians would have understood Paul to mean that the **building up** applies to other believers. If your readers would not infer this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “for building up believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 27 gqdr figs-ellipsis κατὰ 1 and each one in turn Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. English needs these words, so the ULT has supplied them in brackets. If your language also needs these words, you could use these or similar ones. Alternate translation: “{this should be done} by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 14 27 qhl3 figs-explicit κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς 1 and each one in turn Paul does not explicitly state in what situation only **two or at most three** believers should speak **in a tongue**. The Corinthians would have understood him to be speaking about each time the believers gathered to worship God (see the expression “in the church” in [14:28](../14/28.md)). Paul does not mean that only **two or most three** people can ever speak in tongues. If your readers would misunderstand what situation Paul is speaking about, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “{it should be} by two or at most three every time you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 27 wc1z figs-idiom ἀνὰ μέρος 1 and each one in turn Here, **in turn** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If your readers would misunderstand **in turn**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “successively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 27 njmu figs-imperative εἷς διερμηνευέτω 1 and each one in turn Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])  +1CO 14 27 vvge figs-extrainfo εἷς 1 and each one in turn Here Paul does not indicate whether **one** is one of the people who is speaking **in a tongue** or if it is someone else. It is likely that Paul thinks that both options are acceptable. If possible, you should translate **one** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking **in a tongue** or to someone else. Alternate translation: “somebody” or “one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])  +1CO 14 27 ari2 figs-explicit διερμηνευέτω 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:26](../14/26.md), **interpret** refers specifically to interpreting a **tongue**. If your readers would misunderstand what the person should **interpret**, you could state explicitly that the person should **interpret** the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “must interpret the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])  +1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν  1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])  +1CO 14 28 bkc6 figs-explicit διερμηνευτής  1 must interpret Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If your readers would misunderstand what the **interpreter** does, you could state explicitly that the person “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])   +1CO 14 28 znt9 figs-extrainfo μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])  +1CO 14 28 u0ia figs-gendernotations σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **him** and **himself**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 28 c2wj figs-imperative σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here Paul uses two third person imperatives. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be silent … he needs to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])  +1CO 14 28 nzye figs-explicit σιγάτω…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Here, **let him be silent** and **let him speak** refer specifically to speaking in “tongues.” They do not refer in general to any speaking **in church**.  If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “let him not speak the tongue … let him speak the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 28 pqky figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ  1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:19](../14/19.md), **in the church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place **in** which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: a gathering of believers that meet to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand **in the church**, you could clarify that **the church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “during the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 28 fl59 figs-idiom ἑαυτῷ…καὶ τῷ Θεῷ 1 must interpret Here, **to himself and to God** could refer to: (1) how the person should keep the “tongue” between **himself** and **God**. In other words, the only people who experience the “tongue” are the person speaking it and God. This would mean that the person speaking the “tongue” says words in their head or very quietly. Alternate translation: “in his mind to God” or “quietly to God” (2) how the person should speak the “tongue” after the meeting is over and “he” is by **himself**. In this way, only the person who speaks the “tongue” and **God** hear it. Alternate translation: “to God when he is by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 14 29 x2fd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **But** introduces similar instructions about a new topic (prophecy). If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related topic. Alternate translation: “In the same way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 14 29 a9iz figs-explicit  προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak Paul does not explicitly state in what situation **two or three prophets** should **speak**. He does not mean that only **two or three** prophets can ever speak. He could be speaking about: (1) each time the believers gathered to worship God. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak every time you gather together” (2) the periods between when **the others evaluate**. In this case, **two or three prophets** can speak before the evaluation happens. Alternate translation: “let two or three prophets speak in a row” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 29 kw3u figs-explicit  δύο ἢ τρεῖς  1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **two or three** does not restrict the number of prophets to only those two numbers. Rather, Paul uses **two or three** to give a general idea of how many **prophets** should **speak** when believers gather for worship. If your readers would misunderstand **two or three**, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is giving examples or rough estimates. Alternate translation: “roughly two or three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 29 u33q figs-imperative  προφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν, καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak In this verse, Paul uses two third person imperatives. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “two or three prophets must speak, and the others must evaluate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])  +1CO 14 29 qdb8 writing-pronouns οἱ ἄλλοι 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here, **the others** could refer to: (1) all the believers who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the rest of the believers” (2) all the prophets who are not prophesying. Alternate translation: “the other prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 29 dsmv figs-explicit οἱ ἄλλοι διακρινέτωσαν 1 Let two or three prophets speak Here Paul does not state what **the others** are supposed to **evaluate**. He implies that it is what the **prophets speak**. If your readers would not make this inference, you could refer to what the **prophets speak** explicitly. Alternate translation: “let the others evaluate what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 30 zd6m grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 if a revelation is given to another Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **something** might be **revealed to another**, or it might not. He specifies the result for **something is revealed to another**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 30 sl1q figs-activepassive ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ καθημένῳ 1 if a revelation is given to another If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to keep the focus on the “revelation” and the person who receives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “another who is sitting there receives a revelation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 30 lcmf figs-explicit ἄλλῳ…καθημένῳ 1 if a revelation is given to another Here, **sitting** implies that the person is participating in the worship when the believers gather together. It further implies that the person is not the one speaking since the speaker would stand in Paul’s culture. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could state them explicitly. Alternate translation: “to another who is sitting and listening” or “to another worshiper who is listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 30 e2m4 figs-imperative ὁ πρῶτος σιγάτω  1 if a revelation is given to another Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the first must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 30 i3m1 writing-pronouns ὁ πρῶτος 1 if a revelation is given to another Here, **the first** refers back to one of the “two or three prophets” in [14:29](../14/29.md). It identifies the person who is speaking while **another** is **sitting there**. If your readers would misunderstand **the first**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the person who is speaking while **something is revealed to another**. Alternate translation: “the one currently prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 14 31 oytt grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 prophesy one by one Here, **For** introduces the reason why Paul wants “the first” speaker to “be silent” when another receives a revelation (see [14:30](../14/30.md)): if they do what he asks, **all are able to prophesy**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces a reason for a command. Alternate translation: “Do that because, in this way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 14 31 gtsp figs-explicit πάντες 1 prophesy one by one Here Paul does not state who **all** are. He implies that **all** refers to everyone who receives a revelation from God (see [14:30](../14/30.md)). He does not have in mind every single believer who gathers together. If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “all who receive a revelation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 31 xr69 figs-idiom καθ’ ἕνα 1 prophesy one by one Here, **one by one** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If your readers would misunderstand **one by one**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “in turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])  +1CO 14 31 nrq1 figs-activepassive πάντες παρακαλῶνται 1 all may be encouraged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to emphasize the person who is **encouraged** instead of the person doing the encouraging. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the ones who **prophesy** do it. Alternate translation: “the prophets may encourage all” or “the prophecies may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 32 rcat figs-activepassive πνεύματα προφητῶν, προφήταις ὑποτάσσεται 1 all may be encouraged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on the **spirits** rather than the **prophets** If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **prophets** do it. Alternate translation: “prophets subject the spirits of prophets” or “prophets govern the spirits of prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 32 o950 translate-unknown πνεύματα προφητῶν…ὑποτάσσεται 1 all may be encouraged Here, **the spirits of the prophets** could refer to: (1) the “spiritual” gift that the **prophets** have by the power of the Holy Spirit. This is supported by [14:12](../14/12.md), where the word that is here translated **spirits** is there translated “spiritual gifts.” Alternate translation: “the spiritual gifts of prophets are subject to” or “what the Holy Spirit enables prophets to do is subject to” (2) the **spirits** that are part of the **prophets**, that is, their inner life or non-physical parts. Alternate translation: “how the prophets act is subject to” or “the minds of prophets are subject to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 32 cli1 προφήταις 1 all may be encouraged Here, **prophets** could refer to (1) the same **prophets** who have **the spirits**. In this case, **prophets** control their own **spirits**. Alternate translation: “these prophets” (2) other **prophets**. In this case, some **prophets** (those who are not speaking) control the **spirits** of different **prophets** (those who are speaking). Alternate translation: “the other prophets” +1CO 14 33 iki9 grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ  1 God is not a God of confusion Here, **For** introduces the reason why “the spirits of the prophets are subject to prophets” ([14:32](../14/32.md)). Since the prophetic gift comes from God, it should fit with who God is. Since God is **not of confusion, but of peace**, so the prophetic gift must be **of peace** as well. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a statement. Alternate translation: “You can know this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 14 33 my65 figs-infostructure οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “God is of peace, not of confusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 33 ze95 figs-possession οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς, ἀλλὰ εἰρήνης  1 God is not a God of confusion Here Paul uses the possessive form to state that **God** is characterized by **peace**, not by **confusion**. If your language does not use the possessive form to characterize someone, you could use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “God is not a confused God but a peaceful God” or “God is not related to confusion but to peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 14 33 cu4y figs-abstractnouns ἀκαταστασίας…εἰρήνης 1 God is not a God of confusion If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confusion** and **peace**, you could express the idea by using adjectives such as “confused” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “confused … peaceful” or “a confused God … a peaceful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 14 33 k0ma figs-infostructure εἰρήνης. ὡς ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῶν ἁγίων, 1 God is not a God of confusion The phrase **As in all the churches of the saints** could modify: (1) the two verses that follow. Supporting this option is how the first half of this verse sounds like a conclusion and how it does not make much sense to say that **God** is a specific way **in all the churches**. See the ULT for this option. (2) the first half of this verse. Supporting this option is how “in the churches” is repeated near the beginning of the next verse and how Paul uses a phrase similar to this one at the end of sentences (see [4:17](../04/17.md); [7:17](../07/17.md)). Alternate translation: “of peace, as in all the churches of the saints.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 14 33 m76o figs-metaphor ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 1 God is not a God of confusion Here, **in all the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand **in all the churches**, you could clarify that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in all the gatherings of believers” or “in all the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 34 gjv2 figs-explicit αἱ γυναῖκες 1 let be silent Here, **women** could refer to: (1) married **women** (and possibly **women** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to “{their} own husbands” in [14:35](../06/21.md). Alternate translation: “wives” (2) **women** in general. Alternate translation: “women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 34 ssjr figs-explicit  αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν…λαλεῖν 1 let be silent Here, **be silent** and **speak** could refer to: (1) speaking or not speaking in specific situations related to “examining” prophecies (see [14:29](../14/29.md)). These specific situations would be when the woman’s husband or close male relative is the one who has prophesied. Alternate translation: “let the women be silent when their husbands are prophesying … to speak when their husbands are prophesying” (2) speaking or not speaking in disruptive ways, particularly asking questions improperly, talking loudly, or speaking out of turn. Paul is using **be silent** as he did in [14:28](../14/28.md), [30](../14/30.md): it does not prohibit any kind of talking but refers to “keeping quiet” when speaking would be disruptive. Alternate translation: “let the women avoid disruptive talk … to disrupt worship by speaking” (3) any official speaking, including prophecy, discerning prophecies, and tongues. Alternate translation: “remain silent … ever to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 34 h6ip figs-imperative  αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “the women must be silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])  +1CO 14 34 d18m figs-metaphor  ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις 1 let be silent Here, **in the churches** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **churches** as if they were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gatherings of believers who meet to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand **in the churches**, you could clarify that **the churches** refers to gatherings of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gatherings of believers” or “in the worship services” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +1CO 14 34 i3t3 figs-idiom οὐ…ἐπιτρέπεται αὐταῖς 1 let be silent Here, **it is not permitted** is a way to indicate that a custom or a practice is strongly forbidden. It does not state who forbids the custom or practice but rather indicates that this is generally accepted. If your readers would misunderstand **it is not permitted**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that refers to a general prohibition. Alternate translation: “they are not allowed” or “they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])  +1CO 14 34 rwgg figs-imperative ὑποτασσέσθωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “let them be in submission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])  +1CO 14 34 edeg figs-explicit ὑποτασσέσθωσαν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not state to whom or what the **women** are **to be in submission**. If possible, you also should not express what they are **to be in submission** to. If you must consider the object of **submission**, Paul could imply that the **submission** is to: (1) husbands (or other close male relatives). Alternate translation: “to be in submission to their husbands” (2) to the order God has given the church. Alternate translation: “to act in line with the order of the church” (3) to the church as a whole, particularly the leaders. Alternate translation: “to be in submission to other believers” or “to be in submission to the leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 34 nszq figs-extrainfo καθὼς καὶ ὁ νόμος λέγει 1 let be silent Here Paul does not specify what he means by **law**. It could refer to [Genesis 3:16](../../gen/03/16.md). However, it may just be a more general reference to the first five books of the Old Testament (the “Pentateuch”) or to the entire Old Testament (as Paul uses **law** in [14:21](../14/21.md)). If possible, do not clarify what meaning of **law** Paul had in mind, since he does not identify exactly what he means by **law**. Alternate translation: “just as also God’s commandments say” or “just as also the scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +1CO 14 35 orcw grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 let be silent Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **desire to learn anything**, or they may not. He specifies the result for **if they desire to learn anything**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “suppose.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 14 35 tzao figs-explicit τι μαθεῖν θέλουσιν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not state what the “women” or “wives” might **desire to learn** about. He could imply that they want **to learn** more and **ask** questions about: (1) what their husbands have said **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn anything about what their husbands have said” (2) what anyone has said in **in church**. Alternate translation: “they desire to learn about what someone said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 35 hx7r figs-imperative ἐπερωτάτωσαν  1 let be silent Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “they must ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 35 a1dt figs-extrainfo αἰσχρὸν…ἐστιν 1 let be silent Here Paul does not express for whom this behavior is **disgraceful**. He almost certainly means that it brings “disgrace” on the woman and probably her family too. It may also bring “disgrace” on the whole group of believers. If possible, use an expression that is general enough to capture any or all of these ideas. Alternate translation: “it is shameful” or “it brings shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +1CO 14 35 fqot figs-explicit γυναικὶ 1 let be silent Here, just as in [14:34](../14/34.md), **woman** could refer to: (1) any married **woman** (and possibly any **woman** with close male relatives). In support of this view is the reference to **{their} own husbands** in this verse. Alternate translation: “for a wife” (2) any **woman** in general. Alternate translation: “for any woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])  +1CO 14 35 sj8l figs-metaphor ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 let be silent Here, **in church** is a spatial metaphor that speaks of the **church** as if it were a place in which people could gather. Paul speaks in this way to indicate the situation which he is discussing: the gathering of believers who meet to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand **in church**, you could clarify that **church** refers to a gathering of believers for worship. Alternate translation: “in the gathering of believers” or “in the worship service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 14 36 fysl grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to the instructions that Paul has given about proper order in worship, including what he has said in [14:27–35](../14/27.md) but especially [14:33b–35](../14/33.md). Paul uses **Or** to indicate that thinking that **the word of God** went **out from** them is the opposite of obeying what he has said. If your readers would misunderstand **Or**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an alternative. Alternate translation: “Suppose you do not want to follow my instructions. Consider this:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 14 36 h8lp figs-rquestion ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν? 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “no, it did not.” If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the ideas with strong negations. If you do so, you will need to replace **Or** with different transition words. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the word of God certainly did not go out from you, and it certainly did not come only to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 14 36 o8sf figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν…κατήντησεν 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? Here Paul speaks as if **the word of God** were a person who could travel. He speaks in this way to emphasize **the word** over the people who proclaim that **word**. If your readers would misunderstand speaking about a **word** traveling, you could indicate that people travel with the **word** and indicate the emphasis on **the word of God** in another way. Alternate translation: “did the people who proclaim the word of God go out … did people who proclaim it come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1CO 14 36 tmfn figs-go ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν 1 the word of God In the first question, **go out** refers to the Corinthians as the source of the **word of God**. In the second question, **come** refers to the Corinthians as the recipients of the **word of God**. Use movement words that make this clear in your language. Alternate translation: “did the word of God depart … did it reach only you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +1CO 14 36 mj6b figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 14 36 hdu2 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here Paul uses the possessive to describe a **word** that is: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 14 37 lrzp grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις δοκεῖ προφήτης εἶναι ἢ πνευματικός 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might that they are “prophets” or **spiritual**, but he knows that some of them do think in this way. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you could use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever thinks himself to be a prophet or spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 37 h265 figs-gendernotations δοκεῖ…ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **himself** and **him**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 37 ab6u figs-imperative ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to acknowledge” or “he should acknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 37 b81a figs-pastforfuture γράφω 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the present tense to refer to this letter, 1 Corinthians. If your language would not use the present tense to refer to a letter that one is currently writing, you could use the tense that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +1CO 14 37 z0hu figs-possessive Κυρίου…ἐντολή 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul uses the possessive form to the describe the **command** as: (1) a **command** that he gives with the authority of **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord authorizes” or “a command that has the Lord’s authority” (2) a **command** that **the Lord** gave or currently gives. Alternate translation: “a command that the Lord gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 14 37 rc1r figs-abstractnouns Κυρίου…ἐντολή  1 he should acknowledge If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “what the Lord commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])  +1CO 14 38 ilzx grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…τις ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might be **ignorant**, but he expects that some of them might be. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you could use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “whoever is ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 38 m1lx ἀγνοεῖ, ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here, **ignorant** could refer to: (1) the opposite of “acknowledge” in the last verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)), that is, not accepting the authority of something or someone. Alternate translation: “does not acknowledge this, let him not be acknowledged” (2) not knowing that something is true. Alternate translation: “does not know this, let him continue not to know” +1CO 14 38 b8fk figs-explicit ἀγνοεῖ 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul does not state what the person **is ignorant** about. However, the previous verse ([14:37](../14/37.md)) implies that the person **is ignorant** about how what Paul has written is a “command of the Lord.” If your readers would not infer this information, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “is ignorant that I am writing a command from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 38 fde9 figs-imperative ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 38 nxo7 figs-explicit ἀγνοείτω  1 he should acknowledge Here Paul does not state who is letting **him be ignorant**. He could mean: (1) that the Corinthians should **let him be ignorant**. Alternate translation: “you should let him be ignorant” (2) that God lets **him be ignorant**. Alternate translation: “God will let him be ignorant” or “God will consider him ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 14 38 u9qi figs-gendernotations ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **him**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 38 cwbs translate-textvariants ἀγνοείτω 1 he should acknowledge In Paul’s language, **let him be ignorant** and “he is considered ignorant” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “he is considered ignorant” here, many early and important manuscripts have **let him be ignorant**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “he is considered ignorant,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1CO 14 39 xgjw grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Here, **So then** introduces a conclusion of the argument from [14:1–38](../14/01.md). Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces the conclusion to an argument. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “To sum up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 14 39 oe0c figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])  +1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν…γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Alternate translation: “speaking in tongues” +1CO 14 40 d7ia figs-activepassive πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all things**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])  +1CO 14 40 mrnf figs-imperative πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 14 40 y5wb translate-unknown εὐσχημόνως 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **properly** refers to behavior that is appropriate for the situation. See how you translated the similar word “appropriate” in [7:35](../07/35.md). If your readers would misunderstand **properly**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to appropriate or decent behavior. Alternate translation: “correctly” or “decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 40 yh07 translate-unknown κατὰ τάξιν 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **in order** refers to how things, people, and actions are in proper place and sequence. If your readers would misunderstand **in order**, you could use a word or phrase that indicates such proper and organized things, people, and actions. Alternate translation: “in an organized way” or “in a correctly arranged way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)\n * (15:1–11)\n * (15:12–34)\n * (15:35–58)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Denying the resurrection\n\n(1) philosophy or theology that denies afterlife altogether (2) resurrection has already happened (3) the body is not valuable or cannot resurrect. A combination of these problems may be in play.\n\n### Resurrection\n\nPaul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\nPaul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Early Christian confessions?\n\n +1CO 15 1 gc6n grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Now** introduces a new topic that Paul will speak about for many verses. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 15 1 la9v γνωρίζω…ὑμῖν, ἀδελφοί 1 make known to you Paul makes it clear in the rest of the verse that this is not the first time he has made **known** the **gospel** to the Corinthians. If **I make known to you** sounds like Paul is making it known for the first time, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is reminding them of the **the gospel** or giving them more information about it. Alternate translation: “I again make known to you, brothers,” or “I remind you, brothers, about”  +1CO 15 1 c3yo figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί  1 Connecting Statement: Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])   +1CO 15 1 xv53 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε 1 on which you stand Here Paul speaks as if **the gospel** were something solid **on which** the Corinthians could **stand**. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the gospel** is trustworthy, like a firm foundation or a well-built floor. He also speaks in this way to indicate that the Corinthians trust **the gospel** as much as if it were a floor that was keeping them from falling. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “which also you trust completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 15 2 i2h6 figs-infostructure δι’ οὗ καὶ σῴζεσθε, τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν, εἰ κατέχετε 1 you are being saved If your language would naturally state the condition before the main statement, you could rearrange these two clauses. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “If you hold firmly to the word I proclaimed to you, by it also you are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])  +1CO 15 2 xh29 figs-activepassive δι’ οὗ καὶ σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) God does it by means of the “gospel.” Alternate translation: “through which God is also saving you” (2) the gospel does it. Alternate translation: “which also is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 15 2 s83s σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the present tense to speak about the Corinthians’ salvation. Paul could use this tense because: (1) he wants the Corinthians to realize that they are only finally **saved** when Jesus comes back, and right now they are in the process of **being saved**. Alternate translation: “you are currently being saved” or “you will be saved” (2) he is using the present tense to speak about something that is generally true. He does not have a specific time in mind for when the Corinthians are **saved**. Alternate translation: “you are saved” +1CO 15 2 nx1q grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that holding **firmly to the word** leads to **being saved**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 15 2 d8or figs-metaphor τίνι λόγῳ…κατέχετε 1 you are being saved Here Paul speaks as if **the word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +1CO 15 2 le2k figs-metonymy τίνι λόγῳ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])  +1CO 15 2 opvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast  ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **unless** introduces the opposite of holding **firmly to the word**. Paul means that they **believed in vain** if they do not **hold firmly to the word**. If your readers would misunderstand this contrast, you could express the contrast more explicitly. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “However, if you do not hold firmly to the word, you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 15 3 sp4p ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance This could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time (3) this was done previously. 1CO 15 3 azw6 ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 for our sins “to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins” 1CO 15 3 inj2 κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς 1 according to the scriptures Here, **the Scriptures** refers to the writings of the Old Testament. diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index 8c7e66729a..7027ced266 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -9,42 +9,42 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 3 m6z5 0 General Information: Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica. 2TH 1 3 ea59 figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 We ought always to give thanks to God Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” The sentence emphasizes the greatness of what God is doing in the lives of the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TH 1 3 h6t9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 1 3 u3m8 καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 just as it is fitting “for it is the right thing to do” -2TH 1 3 xy7k πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing “you sincerely love one another more and more” +2TH 1 3 u3m8 καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 just as it is fitting Alternate translation: “for it is the right thing to do” +2TH 1 3 xy7k πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing Alternate translation: “you sincerely love one another more and more” 2TH 1 3 bmn6 ἀλλήλους 1 one another Here, **one another** means fellow Christians. 2TH 1 4 kx1n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 we ourselves Here, **ourselves** is used to emphasize Paul’s boasting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 6 wrg2 0 Connecting Statement: As Paul continues, he talks about God being just. -2TH 1 6 cxx1 εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God “for God is certainly right” or “because God is just” +2TH 1 6 cxx1 εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Alternate translation: “for God is certainly right” or “because God is just” 2TH 1 6 id3i figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you Here, **to return** is a metaphor that means to cause someone to experience the same thing they did to someone else. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 1 7 hxy2 figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμῖν…ἄνεσιν 1 and relief to you These words continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). This is a metaphor that means to cause someone to experience the same thing they did to someone else. Alternate translation: “and to relieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 1 7 lu43 figs-ellipsis ὑμῖν…ἄνεσιν 1 relief to you You can make it explicit that God is the one who provides relief. Alternate translation: “for God to provide relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2TH 1 7 yix7 ἀγγέλων δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 his mighty angels “his powerful angels” -2TH 1 8 y3uv ἐν πυρὶ φλογός διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 in flaming fire taking vengeance on those who have not known God “he will punish with blazing fire those who do not know God” or “then with blazing fire he will punish those who do not know God” +2TH 1 7 yix7 ἀγγέλων δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 his mighty angels Alternate translation: “his powerful angels” +2TH 1 8 y3uv ἐν πυρὶ φλογός διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 in flaming fire taking vengeance on those who have not known God Alternate translation: “he will punish with blazing fire those who do not know God” or “then with blazing fire he will punish those who do not know God” 2TH 1 9 plw5 figs-activepassive οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 who will pay the penalty—eternal destruction Here, **who** refers to the people who do not obey the gospel. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish them with eternal destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 10 ugk9 ὅταν ἔλθῃ…ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 when he comes on that day Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. 2TH 1 10 bi2u figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 to be glorified by his saints and to be marveled at by all those who have believed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when his people will glorify him and all those who believed will stand in awe of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 11 ik19 figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 we also pray always for you Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TH 1 11 hiv9 τῆς κλήσεως 1 of your calling Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to be his children and servants, and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. -2TH 1 11 r8gk πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης 1 he may fulfill every desire of goodness “he would make you able to do good in every way that you desire” +2TH 1 11 r8gk πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης 1 he may fulfill every desire of goodness Alternate translation: “he would make you able to do good in every way that you desire” 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus might be glorified in you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and Jesus will glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 1 12 z8k9 κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God “because of God’s grace” +2TH 1 12 z8k9 κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace” 2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Being gathered together to be with him”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness

This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God

Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 2 1 r36t 0 General Information: Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back. 2TH 2 1 q1uq δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks a change of topic in Paul’s instructions. 2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 2 2 b8b2 εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς, μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled “so that you do not easily let yourselves be disturbed in your thinking” -2TH 2 2 d334 διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 by a spirit, nor by a word, nor by a letter as if from us “by a spirit or a spoken word or by written letter that pretends to be coming from us” -2TH 2 2 k4dk ὡς ὅτι 1 as if that “saying that” +2TH 2 2 b8b2 εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς, μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 for you not to be quickly shaken in your mind nor to be troubled Alternate translation: “so that you do not easily let yourselves be disturbed in your thinking” +2TH 2 2 d334 διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 by a spirit, nor by a word, nor by a letter as if from us Alternate translation: “by a spirit or a spoken word or by written letter that pretends to be coming from us” +2TH 2 2 k4dk ὡς ὅτι 1 as if that Alternate translation: “saying that” 2TH 2 2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers. 2TH 2 3 l9c5 0 General Information: Paul teaches about the man of lawlessness. -2TH 2 3 ej66 μὴ ἔλθῃ 1 it may not come “the day of the Lord will not come” +2TH 2 3 ej66 μὴ ἔλθῃ 1 it may not come Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord will not come” 2TH 2 3 y7ch ἡ ἀποστασία 1 the apostacy Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. 2TH 2 3 e86v figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 the man of lawlessness may be revealed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God reveals the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 3 tkg9 figs-metaphor ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 the son of destruction Paul speaks of **destruction** as a person who bore a **son** whose goal is to totally destroy everything. Alternate translation: “the one who destroys everything he can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 2 4 t485 figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 everything being called god or an object of worship You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people consider to be God or everything that people worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 2 4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 showing that he himself is God “showing himself as God” +2TH 2 4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 showing that he himself is God Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” 2TH 2 5 rsz1 figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε…ταῦτα 1 Do you not remember … these things? Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind them of his teaching when he was with them previously. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am sure you remember … these things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2TH 2 5 lkk7 ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to the return of Jesus, the day of the Lord, and the man of lawlessness. 2TH 2 6 ask4 figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 he is revealed in his time You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will reveal the man of lawlessness when the time is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -53,70 +53,73 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 8 hn67 figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 and then the lawless one will be revealed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 8 vay9 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 with the breath of his mouth Here, **breath** represents the power of God. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 8 hy3y καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 and will bring to nothing by the appearance of his coming When Jesus returns to earth and shows himself, he will defeat the **lawless one**. -2TH 2 9 bd5m ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders “with all kinds of power, and signs, and false wonders” +2TH 2 9 bd5m ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 with all power, and signs, and false wonders Alternate translation: “with all kinds of power, and signs, and false wonders” 2TH 2 10 tf75 ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness This person will use every sort of evil to deceive people to believe in him instead of God. 2TH 2 10 v366 τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 to those who are perishing This man who is given power by Satan will deceive everyone who did not believe in Jesus. 2TH 2 10 pf48 ἀπολλυμένοις 1 who are perishing Here, **perishing** has the concept of everlasting or eternal destruction. -2TH 2 11 sj1v διὰ τοῦτο 1 because of this “because the people do not love the truth” +2TH 2 11 sj1v διὰ τοῦτο 1 because of this Alternate translation: “because the people do not love the truth” 2TH 2 11 en8e figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending them** something. Alternate translation: “God is allowing the man of lawlessness to deceive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 2 12 d63e figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 they might all be judged You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge all of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 2 12 pkw8 οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness “those who took pleasure in unrighteousness because they did not believe the truth” +2TH 2 12 pkw8 οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness Alternate translation: “those who took pleasure in unrighteousness because they did not believe the truth” 2TH 2 13 w83a 0 General Information: If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 2 13 bcd5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now changes topics. 2TH 2 13 b3hh δὲ 1 Now Paul here uses the word **Now** to mark a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section. -2TH 2 13 dze5 figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς…ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν…πάντοτε 1 we ought always to give thanks The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize or to exaggerate the action. If this is not natural in your language, you can use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2TH 2 13 dze5 figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς…ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν…πάντοτε 1 we ought always to give thanks The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize or to exaggerate the action. If this is not natural in your language, you can use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” OR “"”we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TH 2 13 m418 ἡμεῖς…ὀφείλομεν 1 we ought Here, **we** refers to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] 2TH 2 13 ia4x figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 brothers having been loved by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 13 v15j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed.Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See:  [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TH 2 13 l7a8 figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers are **firstfruits**.  Alternate Translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “among the first people whom God was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] 2TH 2 13 bpqn figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth You can change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TH 2 14 e0gy figs-ellipsis 1 +2TH 2 14 e0gy figs-ellipsis 1 Here, the phrase “through our gospel” does not mean that it is Paul’s gospel. It refers to the gospel that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “by means of the gospel preached to you” OR “through the gospel that we preached to you”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2TH 2 14 thmh figs-explicit 1 The phrase “to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” does not mean that we will take over or dividing up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “you might share in the glory” or “you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ“ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 2 15 u9ss ἄρα οὖν, ἀδελφοί, στήκετε 1 So then, brothers, stand firm Paul exhorts the believers to hold fast to their faith in Jesus. -2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **traditions** refers to the truths of Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “remember the traditions” or “believe the truths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TH 2 15 whp8 figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 you were taught You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 2 15 z2vs figs-synecdoche εἴτε διὰ λόγου, εἴτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 whether by word or by our letter Here, **by word** is a synecdoche for “by instructions” or “by teachings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **teachings** refers to the truths of Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 2 15 whp8 figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 you were taught If your language does not use this passive form, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2TH 2 15 z2vs figs-synecdoche εἴτε διὰ λόγου 1 whether by word or by our letter Here, **by word** is a synecdoche which means that Paul was present there teaching them personally.  Alternate translation: “when we were with you” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2TH 2 15 jrg4 figs-explicit εἴτε διὰ λόγου, εἴτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 whether by word or by our letter You can make clear the implicit information that **by word** means to speak to them personally. Alternate translation: “whether by what we taught you in person or by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 2 16 njk1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul ends with a blessing from God. 2TH 2 16 g8m1 δὲ 1 Now Paul here uses the word **Now** to mark a change in topic. -2TH 2 16 yge9 figs-exclusive ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν…ὁ ἀγαπήσας ἡμᾶς καὶ δοὺς 1 our Lord … who loved us and gave us The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2TH 2 16 yge9 figs-inclusive ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν…ὁ ἀγαπήσας ἡμᾶς καὶ δοὺς 1 our Lord … who loved us and gave us The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun.  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 our Lord Jesus Christ himself Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, **hearts** represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TH 2 17 yw5f παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word “every good thing you do and say” +2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, **hearts** represents the seat of emotions. If hearts is not the seat of emotions in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 2 17 yw5f figs-synecdoche παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word The phrase “work and word“ can be better expressed in verbs to make it more clear. Alternative translation:  “every good thing you do and say” or “you will do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons

In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) 2TH 3 1 k33i 0 General Information: Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions. -2TH 3 1 jy75 τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Paul uses the word **Finally** to mark a change in topic. +2TH 3 1 jy75 τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Paul uses the word **Finally** to mark a change in topic. This is not the final instructions that were given by Paul but it means that he is now saying about the remaining matters that were not discussed before. This can also be translated as “one more thing” or “So, continuing on.” 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 1 r54v figs-metaphor ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TH 3 1 yvkm figs-activepassive ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that more and more people will soon hear our message about our Lord Jesus and honor it, as happened with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2TH 3 1 v8k2 figs-exclusive 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2TH 3 1 r54v figs-metaphor ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 3 1 yvkm figs-activepassive ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you You can state this in active form, if passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that more and more people will soon hear our message about our Lord Jesus and honor it, as happened with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 3 2 xg2h figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 we might be rescued You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 3 2 p1ct οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 for not everyone has faith “for many people do not believe in Jesus” -2TH 3 3 yx9g ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen “who will strengthen” -2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one “Satan” -2TH 3 4 xk85 πεποίθαμεν 1 we are confident “we have faith” or “we trust” -2TH 3 5 giz4 figs-metonymy ὁ…Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 may the Lord direct your hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or mind. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 3 2 h11p figs-doublet 1 These two terms mean basically the same thing. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. A qualifier like “very” can be used as an equivalent. Alternate translation: “very wicked men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +2TH 3 2 p1ct figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 for not everyone has faith **not everyone** is not negative but it means “some people.” If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for many people do not believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen strengthen here does not mean the physical strength but spiritual. This can be made clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “he will strengthen you inwardly” or “he can make you strong spiritually”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one Alternate translation: “Satan” +2TH 3 4 xk85 figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν 1 we are confident Here, the phrase “we are confident” may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “we have faith” or “we trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +2TH 3 5 giz4 figs-metonymy ὁ…Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 may the Lord direct your hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or mind.  If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand” or “may the Lord help you to know”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path.  If your readers would not understand, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 6 mst3 0 General Information: Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. 2TH 3 6 v33v δὲ 1 Now Paul here uses the word **Now** to mark a change in topic. 2TH 3 6 x9l8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TH 3 6 jvw1 figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 of our Lord Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2TH 3 7 h222 μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 to imitate us “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” -2TH 3 7 b1i1 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 we did not behave disorderly among you Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2TH 3 8 d9h1 figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 working night and day Here, **night and day** are a merism and they mean “all the time.” Alternate translation: “working during the night and during the day” or “working all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -2TH 3 8 w8fq figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 in toil and hardship Paul emphasizes how hard his circumstances were. The word **toil** implies work that requires great effort. The word **hardship** implies they endured pain and suffering. Alternate translation: “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2TH 3 9 sn3k figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 not because we do not have authority, but Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2TH 3 10 c652 figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2TH 3 11 ey6c figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας…ἀτάκτως 1 some who are walking idly Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** is a metonymy for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term figuratively is not clear in your language, you can express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 3 6 jvw1 figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 of our Lord Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2TH 3 7 h222 figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 to imitate us **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you can make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 3 7 b1i1 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 we did not behave disorderly among you Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or ”we were not lazy when we were with you“ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +2TH 3 8 d9h1 figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 working night and day Here, **night and day** are a merism and they mean “all the time.” If this means that they worked without any rest in your language, then you can make it clear. Alternate translation: “working almost all the time” or “we worked continuously/without stopping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +2TH 3 8 w8fq figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 in toil and hardship Paul emphasizes how hard his circumstances were. The two words have similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words you can use here, or it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you can use a qualifier. Alternate translation: “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +2TH 3 9 sn3k figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 not because we do not have authority, but Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +2TH 3 10 c652 figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat You can state this in positive form, if it is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +2TH 3 11 ey6c figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας…ἀτάκτως 1 some who are walking idly Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you can express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 11 iv1z ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 but meddling Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. 2TH 3 12 bm6z μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 with quietness Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs. Alternate translation: “in a quiet, peaceful, and mild manner” 2TH 3 13 jx8t δέ 1 But Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. -2TH 3 13 e59v figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +2TH 3 13 e59v figs-youplural ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers. So, it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2TH 3 13 usu9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 14 mzs4 εἰ…τις οὐχ ὑπακούει τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word “if anyone does not obey our instructions” -2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “publicly identify that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TH 3 14 y552 ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to shun lazy believers as a disciplinary action. +2TH 3 14 mzs4 εἰ…τις οὐχ ὑπακούει τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word Alternate translation: “if anyone does not obey our instructions” +2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “publicly identify that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is.”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2TH 3 14 y552 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. Sometimes, it is necessary to make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 16 nef4 0 General Information: Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. -2TH 3 16 whb9 figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 may the Lord of peace himself give you You can make explicit that this is Paul’s prayer for the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 3 16 whb9 figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 may the Lord of peace himself give you You can make explicit that this is Paul’s prayer for the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 16 zl1s figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 the Lord of peace himself Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2TH 3 17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me” +2TH 3 17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me” 2TH 3 17 wg3f οὕτως γράφω 1 In this manner I write Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 6914440adf..2077bdf028 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
2. Peter reminds the believers of their identity in Christ (1:3–2:10)
* Peter praises God for saving the believers (1:3–12)
* Command to be holy (1:13–21)
* Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)
3. Peter tells the believers how they should behave (2:11–4:11)
* How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
* How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)
* The end is near (4:7–11)
4. Peter encourages the believers to persevere when suffering (4:12–5:11)
* How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)
* Instructions for relationships among believers (5:1–11)
5. Conclusion (5:12–14)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The author identified himself as Peter, who was also called Simon Peter. He was an apostle and also wrote the book of 2 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter in Rome. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/peter]])

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage Gentile Christians who were being persecuted and to exhort them to stand firm in “the true grace of God” ([5:12](../05/12.md)). Peter told his readers how they should act in the midst of a society that hated them. He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also instructed Christians about submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter was probably in Rome when he wrote this letter. In [5:13](../05/13.md) Peter referred to Rome symbolically as “Babylon.” It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were severely persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?

“Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from a pure heart” ([1:22](../01/22.md)). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth *through the Spirit* for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from the heart.” Translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
2. Peter reminds the believers of their identity in Christ (1:3–2:10)

* Peter praises God for saving the believers (1:3–12)
* Command to be holy (1:13–21)
* Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)

1. Peter tells the believers how they should behave (2:11–4:11)

* How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
* How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)
* The end is near (4:7–11)

1. Peter encourages the believers to persevere when suffering (4:12–5:11)

* How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)
* Instructions for relationships among believers (5:1–11)

1. Conclusion (5:12–14)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The author identified himself as Peter, who was also called Simon Peter. He was an apostle and also wrote the book of 2 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter in Rome. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/peter]])

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage Gentile Christians who were being persecuted and to exhort them to stand firm in “the true grace of God” ([5:12](../05/12.md)). Peter told his readers how they should act in the midst of a society that hated them. He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also instructed Christians about submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter was probably in Rome when he wrote this letter. In [5:13](../05/13.md) Peter referred to Rome symbolically as “Babylon.” It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were severely persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?

“Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from a pure heart” ([1:22](../01/22.md)). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “Having purified your souls by obedience to the truth *through the Spirit* for sincere brotherly love, love one another earnestly from the heart.” Translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
2. Peter praises God for saving the believers (1:3–12)
3. Command to be holy (1:13–21)
4. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)

Peter begins this letter in [1:1–2](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at that time.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [1:24–25](../01/24.md).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy (1:15). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are also glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md)) 1PE 1 1 g6b4 figs-123person Πέτρος 1 In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Peter, am writing this letter” or “From Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1PE 1 1 p0pd translate-names Πέτρος 1 **Peter** is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to 1 Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -135,148 +135,229 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 25 aba2 figs-metonym τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Peter quotes Isaiah using **word** figuratively to describe all that God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that comes from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 25 pp62 figs-metonym τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν τὸ ῥῆμα 1 Here Peter uses **word** in the same specific sense as in [verse 23](../01/23.md). It is not the general meaning of **word** used earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And this is the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 25 s11j figs-activepassive τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν 1 the word that has been proclaimed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the word that we have proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)
2. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 1 cch5 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues teaching his readers about holiness and obedience. -1PE 2 1 n3x5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The word **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said about being holy and obedient. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander These sinful actions are spoken of as if they were objects that people could throw away. Alternate translation: “get rid of everything that is evil, and hypocrisy, and envy, and all slander” or “stop being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-metaphor ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk Peter speaks of his readers as if they were babies. Babies requires very pure food, which they can digest easily. In the same way, believers need pure teaching from God’s word. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s breast milk, so you must yearn for pure spiritual milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)
2. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10 and the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, which is the most important stone. According to [Ephesians 2:20](../../eph/02/02.md), the apostles and prophets are the foundation, which is the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk” in [2:2](../02/02.md), he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sheep and shepherds

The Bible often speaks metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter alludes to [Isaiah 53:6](../../isa/53/06.md) to describe unbelievers as sheep that wander aimlessly and don’t know where they are going. God’s people are also similar to sheep in that they are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter also refers to Jesus as a shepherd who takes care believers, which is a similar idea to what Jesus said in [John 10:11–18](../../jhn/10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shepherd]]) +1PE 2 1 n3x5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said in the previous paragraph ([1:22–25](../01/22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1PE 2 1 inct figs-declarative ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander Peter speaks of these sinful actions figuratively as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 1 r853 figs-abstractnouns ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside all evil acts and all deceitful acts and hypocritical acts and deceptive acts and all slanderous acts” or “having put aside every kind of evil, deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-simile ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just **newborn babies** desire milk. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 2 rm71 ἐπιποθήσατε 1 long for Alternate translation: “desire intensely” or “yearn for” -1PE 2 2 fn81 figs-metaphor τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα 1 pure spiritual milk Peter speaks of the word of God as if it were **spiritual milk** that nourished children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 2 vg76 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 to salvation Here the word **salvation** refers to when God brings the salvation of his people to completion when Jesus returns (see [1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md)). Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks of believers advancing in knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 2 scbe figs-explicit αὐξηθῆτε εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 you may grow up to salvation They were to increasingly act in ways that were consistent with this salvation. You can translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you may grow up spiritually until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Here to taste means to experience something personally. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced the Lord’s kindness toward you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 4 sa2z figs-metaphor 0 General Information: Peter begins to tell a metaphor about Jesus and the believers being living stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 4 c4lu figs-metaphor πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι λίθον ζῶντα 1 coming to him, a living stone Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a stone in a building. Alternate translation: “coming to him who is like a stone in a building, but alive, not a dead stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 4 ihq2 ὃν…λίθον ζῶντα 1 him, a living stone This could mean: (1) This refers to a stone that is alive. (2) This refers to a stone that gives life. -1PE 2 4 e8sy figs-activepassive ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ἀποδεδοκιμασμένον 1 having been rejected by men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 2 fn81 figs-metaphor τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα 1 pure spiritual milk The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word” and refers to the word of God. Peter speaks figuratively of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks figuratively of believers advancing in knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 2 vg76 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 to salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until you are saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 2 wmw2 figs-explicit εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **salvation** refers to when Jesus returns and God completes the **salvation** of his people. Peter also uses this meaning for **salvation** in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated this word there. Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Peter uses **tasted** figuratively to refers to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 3 hruw figs-quotemarks ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 This clause is a paraphrase of [Psalm 34:8](../../psa/34/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 4 n5pm figs-explicit πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι 1 Here, **coming** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “being built up” in the next verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “Come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 4 apbp writing-pronouns πρὸς ὃν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, who is called “Lord” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1PE 2 4 c4lu figs-metaphor πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι λίθον ζῶντα 1 coming to him, a living stone Peter refers to Jesus figuratively as if he were a **stone** in a building. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “coming to him, who is like a living stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 4 ihq2 figs-personification λίθον ζῶντα 1 him, a living stone Peters speaks of a **stone** figuratively as if it were **living**. This could refer to: (1) a stone that is alive. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus is alive enough though he had died. Alternate translation: “a stone that lives” (2) a stone that gives life. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus gives eternal life to everyone who believes in him. Alternate translation: “a stone that gives eternal life to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1PE 2 4 e8sy figs-activepassive ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ἀποδεδοκιμασμένον 1 having been rejected by men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that men have rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 4 euuz figs-gendernotations ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 2 4 a438 figs-activepassive παρὰ δὲ Θεῷ ἐκλεκτὸν 1 but chosen by God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but that God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 5 z11h figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 you, like living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house Just as people used **stones** to build the temple in the Old Testament, believers are the materials that God is using to build a house in which he will live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 5 g33x figs-simile αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες 1 you, like living stones Peter compares his readers to **stones** that are alive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1PE 2 5 v3jw figs-activepassive λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “living stones that God is building into a spiritual house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 5 i4bn figs-metonymy ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον ἀνενέγκαι πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 a holy priesthood to offer the spiritual sacrifices Here the position of **priesthood** stands for the priests who fulfill its duties. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 6 ibi1 figs-metaphor περιέχει ἐν Γραφῇ 1 it stands in scripture **Scripture** is spoken of as if it were a container. This passage refers to the words that a person reads in scripture. Alternate translation: “this is what a prophet wrote in the scriptures long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 6 q7jx ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. -1PE 2 6 klv2 figs-explicit λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον 1 a cornerstone, chosen, precious God is the one who chose the stone. Alternate translation: “a most important cornerstone, which I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 6 xsx8 figs-metaphor λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον 1 a cornerstone The prophet speaks of the Messiah as the most important stone in a building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 7 ze1c 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues quoting from the scriptures. -1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν…ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner This is a metaphor that means people, like builders, **rejected** Jesus, but God has made him the most important **stone** in a building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 7 i4jl figs-activepassive λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by the builders If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The stone that the builders rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 7 ql12 κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner This refers to the most important stone in a building and means basically the same thing as “cornerstone” in [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). -1PE 2 8 ptx5 figs-parallelism λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 A stone of stumbling and a rock of offense These two phrases share similar meanings. Together they emphasize that people will take **offense** at this “stone,” which refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “a stone or a rock over which people will stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 2 8 h7ta προσκόπτουσιν τῷ λόγῳ ἀπειθοῦντες 1 stumble because they disobey the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message. To **disobey** means that they do not believe. Alternate translation: “stumble because they are not believing the message about Jesus” -1PE 2 8 sm6s figs-activepassive εἰς ὃ καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 to which also they were appointed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for which God also appointed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 9 dc8m 0 General Information: In verse 10 Peter quotes a verse from the prophet Hosea. Some modern versions do not format this as a quote, which is also acceptable. -1PE 2 9 zla9 figs-activepassive γένος ἐκλεκτόν 1 a chosen people You can clarify that God is the one who has **chosen** them. Alternate translation: “a people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 9 g39z βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 a royal priesthood This could mean: (1) This refers to a group of kings and a group of priests. (2) This refers to a group of priests who serve the king. -1PE 2 9 qk7f λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 a people for possession Alternate translation: “a people who belong to God” -1PE 2 9 ra7z ἐκ…ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος 1 who called you from Alternate translation: “who called you to come out of” -1PE 2 9 nvf5 figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους…εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 from darkness into his marvelous light Here, **darkness** refers to their condition as sinful people who did not know God, and **light** refers to their condition as people who do know God and practice righteousness. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 11 jnr9 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about how to live Christian lives. -1PE 2 11 ve9u figs-doublet παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles These two words mean basically the same thing.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 2 11 hjuk figs-metaphor παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles Peter speaks of his readers as people who are living in foreign lands away from their home. See how you translated “foreigners” in [1 Peter 1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 11 ubn9 figs-metaphor ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν σαρκικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν 1 to abstain from fleshly desires Here the idea of flesh refers to the sinful nature of humanity in this fallen world. Alternate translation: “to not to give in to sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 11 x3q5 figs-metonymy τῆς ψυχῆς 1 your soul Here the word **soul** refers to a person’s spiritual life. Alternate translation: “your spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 11 q4zn figs-metaphor στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς 1 make war against your soul Peter speaks of sinful desires as soldiers that are trying to destroy the spiritual life of believers. Alternate translation: “seek to destroy your spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 12 b5nv figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἔχοντες καλήν 1 keeping your behavior among the Gentiles good The abstract noun **behavior** can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “you should behave well among the Gentiles” or “you should behave in a good way in the presence of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 12 mkt4 ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν ὑμῶν ὡς 1 in whatever they speak about you as Alternate translation: “even if they accuse you of being” -1PE 2 12 w3yn figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῶν καλῶν ἔργων ἐποπτεύοντες 1 from observing your good works The abstract noun **works** can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “they may observe the good things that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 12 s2ji figs-explicit ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς 1 in the day of visitation Alternate translation: “on the day when he comes.” This refers to the day when God will judge all people. Alternate translation: “when he comes to judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 13 c484 διὰ τὸν Κύριον 1 for the sake of the Lord This could mean: (1) By obeying human authorities, they are obeying the Lord who established those authorities. (2) By obeying human authorities, they will honor Jesus who also obeyed human authorities. -1PE 2 13 al6q βασιλεῖ ὡς ὑπερέχοντι 1 to the king as supreme Alternate translation: “to the king as the highest human authority” +1PE 2 5 z11h figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 you, like living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house Peter uses **stones** figuratively to refer to his readers, who believe in Jesus. Just as people used **stones** to build the temple in the Old Testament, God is using believers to bring together a group of people in whom he will dwell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you, like stones that are put together and built into a house, are living stones that are being brought together into a spiritual community in which God dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 5 g33x figs-simile αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες 1 you, like living stones Peters uses **stones** figuratively as if they were **living**. This emphasizes the fact that Peter’s readers have eternal life because they believe in Jesus. In this verse, **living** cannot mean to give life because only God can give life. Alternate translation: “like stones that live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 2 5 v3jw figs-activepassive οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God is building up as a spiritual house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 5 e6dm figs-explicit οἰκοδομεῖσθε 1 Here, **are being built up** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “coming to him” in the previous verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “be built up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 5 i4bn figs-metaphor εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον ἀνενέγκαι πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 a holy priesthood to offer the spiritual sacrifices Here Peter speaks of believers figuratively as if they were part of a **priesthood** and as if their good deeds and acts of worship were **sacrifices** offered to God. Just as the priests in the Old Testament offered sacrifices to God, so should believers do good deeds and worship God. If this might confuse your readers, you could expression the meaning plainly or with a synonym. Alternate translation: like the holy priesthood that offered sacrifices to God, so you are made into a group who dies good spiritual deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 5 ekkp grammar-collectivenouns εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “into a group of holy priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1PE 2 5 zf45 figs-explicit πνευματικὰς θυσίας εὐπροσδέκτους 1 This could mean: (1) the **sacrifices** are of a spiritual, rather than physical, nature. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices of a spiritual nature that are acceptable” (2) the **sacrifices** are offered by the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices by the power of the Holy Spirit that are acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 6 ibi1 figs-personification περιέχει ἐν Γραφῇ 1 it stands in scripture Here the quotation of **scripture** that occurs next in the verse is spoken of as if it were a person who **stands**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is written in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1PE 2 6 k1h0 writing-quotations περιέχει ἐν Γραφῇ 1 This phrase introduces a quotation of an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 28:16](../../isa/28/16.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what Isaiah wrote in scripture stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1PE 2 6 wdwx figs-quotemarks ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ καταισχυνθῇ. 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 28:16](../../isa/28/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 6 q7jx figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Peter quotes Isaiah using **Behold** to call his readers to pay attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 6 skrt figs-123person τίθημι 1 In this quotation from the Old Testament **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, lay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1PE 2 6 xsx8 figs-metaphor λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον 1 a cornerstone Here God refers to the Messiah figuratively as if he were not only a **stone**, but even the most important **stone** in a building, the **cornerstone**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who is like the most important stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 6 klv2 figs-distinguish λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον 1 a cornerstone, chosen, precious Here, **chosen** and **precious** show a distinction between this **cornerstone** and any other **cornerstone**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “a cornerstone that is chosen and precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1PE 2 6 lrxm figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. God uses them together to emphasize the truth of this statement. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1PE 2 7 ze1c figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 Here, **this honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 7 rdhk figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 The phrase translated **this honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 7 sj13 figs-ellipsis ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, the scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 2 7 hext figs-quotemarks λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22](../../psa/118/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner The author uses **stone** figuratively to refer to the Messiah and **builders** figuratively to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 7 ql12 figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner This phrase has the same meaning as “cornerstone” in the previous verse and refers to the most important stone in a building. Here it refers specifically to the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah, who is like a cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 8 k0dm writing-quotations καὶ 1 Here, **and** introduces a quotation of an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 8:14](../../isa/08/14.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “and Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1PE 2 8 vxhb figs-quotemarks λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:14](../../isa/08/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 8 i72g figs-metaphor λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 Peter quotes Isaiah speaking figuratively of the Messiah as if he were a **stone** or **rock** that people tripped over. He means that many people would be offended by Jesus’ teachings and reject him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “He is like a stone of stumbling and like a rock of offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 8 ydkr figs-possession λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 Peter quotes Isaiah using the possessive form twice in this sentence to describe a **stone** that causes **stumbling and a **rock** that causes **offense**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “A stone that makes people stumble and a rock that makes people feel offended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 2 8 ptx5 figs-parallelism λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 A stone of stumbling and a rock of offense These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that people will be offended by this **stone**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “a stone or a rock over which people will surely stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1PE 2 8 h7ta figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 stumble because they disobey the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message, which includes the command to repent and believe the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 8 d8ii figs-metaphor οἳ προσκόπτουσιν 1 Here, **stumble** could refer to: (1) being offended by the gospel, as it means in the rest of the verse. Alternate translation: “They get offended” (2) being judged for rejecting the gospel. Alternate translation: “They are judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 8 h6sb grammar-connect-logic-result οἳ προσκόπτουσιν τῷ λόγῳ ἀπειθοῦντες 1 Here, **disobeying the word** indicates the reason why they **stumble**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They stumble because they disobey the word” or “Because they disobey the word, they stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1PE 2 8 mh48 figs-explicit τῷ λόγῳ ἀπειθοῦντες 1 Here, **disobeying** refers to **disobeying** the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. Therefore, this **disobeying** means refusing to believe the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “refusing to believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 8 sm6s figs-activepassive εἰς ὃ καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 to which also they were appointed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to which God also appointed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 8 uwg1 figs-explicit εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **which** refers back to the previous part of this sentence. Those who do not believe in Jesus were appointed to stumble and disobey the word. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to this stumbling and disobeying the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 9 dc8m figs-quotemarks γένος ἐκλεκτόν, βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα, ἔθνος ἅγιον, λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament. The phrase **a chosen people** is from [Isaiah 43:20](../../isa/43/20.md), **a royal priesthood** and **a holy nation** are from [Exodus 19:6](../../exo/19/06.md), and **a people for possession** is from [Isaiah 43:21](../../isa/43/21.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 9 zla9 figs-activepassive γένος ἐκλεκτόν 1 a chosen people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a family whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 9 g39z figs-explicit βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 a royal priesthood This could refer to: (1) a priesthood who are also members of the king’s family. Alternate translation: “a kingly priesthood” (2) a priesthood who serve the king. Alternate translation: “a priesthood who serve the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 9 m1f8 grammar-collectivenouns βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of royal priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1PE 2 9 qk7f figs-abstractnouns λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 a people for possession If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **possession**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a people for God to possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 9 ra7z figs-explicit τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 who called you from This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 9 nvf5 figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους…εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 from darkness into his marvelous light Here, **darkness** refers figuratively to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers figuratively to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 10 pveb figs-quotemarks οὐ λαὸς…λαὸς Θεοῦ…οὐκ ἠλεημένοι…ἐλεηθέντες 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:6–10](../../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 11 jnr9 0 General Information: Peter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives. +1PE 2 11 ve9u figs-doublet παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Christians on this earth are far away from their home in heaven. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “true exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1PE 2 11 x8af figs-metaphor παροίκους 1 Peter uses **foreigners** here figuratively to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 11 hjuk figs-metaphor παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles See how you translated this word in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 11 ubn9 figs-metonymy ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν σαρκικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν\r 1 to abstain from fleshly desires Here, **fleshly** refers figuratively to a person’s sinful nature. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to abstain from satisfying your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 11 q4zn figs-personification στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς 1 make war against your soul Peter speaks of **fleshly desires** figuratively as if they were soldiers trying to destroy the spiritual life of believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will destroy your spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1PE 2 11 x3q5 figs-genericnoun τῆς ψυχῆς 1 your soul Peter is referring to each individual Christian to whom he is writing this letter, not one particular **soul**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “your souls” or “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1PE 2 12 uiwd figs-declarative τὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἔχοντες καλήν 1 Peter is using a statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for command. Alternate translation: “Keep your behavior among the Gentiles good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +1PE 2 12 b5nv figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἔχοντες καλήν 1 keeping your behavior among the Gentiles good If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “behaving well among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 12 nqql figs-metaphor ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Peter uses **Gentiles** here figuratively to refer to people who are not Christians. Just like a **Gentile** was not a member of the Jewish people, so people who are not Christians are not members of God’s people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “among those who do not believe in Jesus” or “among those who are not Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 12 mkt4 ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν ὑμῶν ὡς 1 in whatever they speak about you as Alternate translation: “with regard to what they slander you for as evildoers” or “with respect to the very things that they slander you for as evildoers” +1PE 2 12 w3yn figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῶν καλῶν ἔργων ἐποπτεύοντες 1 from observing your good works If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they may observe the good things that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 12 s2ji figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς 1 in the day of visitation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **visitation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day when he visits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 12 qspw figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom that refers to the time when God will judge all people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the day when he comes to judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 2 13 c484 figs-explicit διὰ τὸν Κύριον 1 for the sake of the Lord Here, **the Lord** refers to Jesus. This phrase could mean: (1) by obeying human authorities, Christians are following the example of Jesus who also obeyed human authorities. Alternate translation: “in order to follow the Lord’s example” (2) by obeying human authorities, Christians will honor Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 13 al6q βασιλεῖ ὡς ὑπερέχοντι 1 to the king as supreme Alternate translation: “to the king as the highest human authority” or “to the king, who has supreme human authority” +1PE 2 14 t0tc ἡγεμόσιν ὡς δι’ αὐτοῦ πεμπομένοις 1 Alternate translation: “to governors, who have been sent through him” 1PE 2 14 y1l2 figs-activepassive δι’ αὐτοῦ πεμπομένοις 1 through him having been sent If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the king has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 15 mh6s ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν 1 doing good to silence the ignorant talk of foolish people Alternate translation: “by doing good you stop foolish people from speaking about things that they do not know” -1PE 2 16 y9pg figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα…τῆς κακίας 1 as a covering for wickedness Peter speaks of their condition as free people as something that they should not use to hide sinful behavior. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 17 gwy8 τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 the brotherhood This refers to all Christian believers. -1PE 2 18 w2nc 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to people who are servants in people’s houses. -1PE 2 18 xgk8 figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 the good and gentle Here the words **good** and **gentle** share similar meanings and emphasize that such masters treat their servants kindly. Alternate translation: “the very kind masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 2 18 a6gc τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 to the perverse Alternate translation: “to the cruel ones” or “to the mean ones” -1PE 2 19 r1h1 τοῦτο…χάρις 1 this is praiseworthy Alternate translation: “this is deserving of praise” or “it is pleasing to God” -1PE 2 19 zm8e διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ, ὑποφέρει…λύπας 1 endures sorrow … because of awareness of God This could mean: (1) This person accepts suffering because he knows he is obeying God. (2) This person is able to endure unjust punishment because he knows that God knows how he is suffering. -1PE 2 20 y5ue figs-rquestion ποῖον γὰρ κλέος, εἰ ἁμαρτάνοντες καὶ κολαφιζόμενοι ὑπομενεῖτε? 1 For what kind of credit is there if, sinning and being tormented, you will endure? Peter asks this question to emphasize that there is nothing praiseworthy about suffering for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “For God will not reward you if you are punished because you sinned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1PE 2 20 pr8b figs-activepassive ἁμαρτάνοντες καὶ κολαφιζόμενοι 1 sinning and being tormented If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “while someone punishes you because you sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 20 ly9f figs-activepassive ἀγαθοποιοῦντες καὶ πάσχοντες ὑπομενεῖτε 1 doing good and suffering, you will endure If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you endure when someone punishes you for doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 21 c1jn 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues speaking to people who are servants in people’s houses. -1PE 2 21 xit1 figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο…ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called Here the word **this** refers to believers enduring while suffering for doing good, as Peter has just described. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 21 si3l figs-metaphor ὑμῖν…ἵνα ἐπακολουθήσητε τοῖς ἴχνεσιν αὐτοῦ 1 for you so that you might follow in his footsteps Peter speaks of following Jesus’ example in the way that they suffer as if one were walking on the same path that Jesus had taken. Alternate translation: “so that you would imitate his behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 14 dvmr writing-pronouns δι’ αὐτοῦ πεμπομένοις 1 Here, **him** could refer to: (1) the king mentioned in the previous verse, as in the UST. (2) God, who is the one who installs and removes all governing authorities. Alternate translation: “those being sent by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1PE 2 14 bxm9 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἐκδίκησιν κακοποιῶν, ἔπαινον δὲ ἀγαθοποιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **punishment** and **praise**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to punish evildoers and praise those who do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 15 mh6s figs-infostructure ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν 1 doing good to silence the ignorant talk of foolish people If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “to silence the ignorance of foolish people by doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 2 15 nzwv figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ignorance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good to silence the ignorant things that foolish people are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 16 zqe3 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐλεύθεροι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “Submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “Act as free people” or “Live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 2 16 y9pg figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα…τῆς κακίας 1 as a covering for wickedness Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 17 gwy8 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 the brotherhood Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 18 w2nc 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves that worked in people’s houses. +1PE 2 18 xgk8 figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 the good and gentle The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1PE 2 18 mueb figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used figuratively to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 19 r1h1 figs-explicit τοῦτο…χάρις 1 this is praiseworthy Peters assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 19 zm8e figs-abstractnouns διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 because of awareness of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **consciousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because one is aware of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 2 19 rjyf figs-possession διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **consciousness** that is about or concerning **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of having consciousness about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 2 19 kje6 figs-explicit Θεοῦ 1 Here, **God** refers to who **God** is and what he requires from his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of consciousness of who God is and what he requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 20 y5ue figs-rquestion ποῖον γὰρ κλέος, εἰ ἁμαρτάνοντες καὶ κολαφιζόμενοι ὑπομενεῖτε? 1 For what kind of credit is there if, sinning and being tormented, you will endure? Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that there is nothing praiseworthy about suffering for doing something wrong. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this sentence as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For there is no credit if, sinning and being beaten, you will endure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1PE 2 20 pr8b figs-activepassive κολαφιζόμενοι 1 sinning and being tormented If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone beats you” or “your master beats you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 20 ly9f grammar-connect-logic-result ἀγαθοποιοῦντες καὶ πάσχοντες 1 doing good and suffering, you will endure This could mean: (1) someone suffers even though that person did what is good. Alternate translation: “suffering despite doing good” (2) someone suffers because that person did what is good. Alternate translation: “suffering because of doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1PE 2 20 qii1 τοῦτο χάρις παρὰ Θεῷ 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. +1PE 2 21 c1jn figs-explicit εἰς τοῦτο 1 Here, **this** refers back to what Peter stated at the end of the previous verse. Believers are called by God to endure suffering while doing what is good. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to endure suffering when you have done what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 21 xit1 figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο…ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 21 si3l figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐπακολουθήσητε τοῖς ἴχνεσιν αὐτοῦ 1 for you so that you might follow in his footsteps Peter uses **follow in his footsteps** figuratively to refer to following Jesus’ example for enduring suffering. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might imitate his behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 22 wii5 figs-quotemarks ὃς ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἐποίησεν, οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:9](../../isa/53/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 22 tyz4 figs-activepassive οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “neither did anyone find deceit in his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 22 lw1u figs-metonymy οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth Here, **deceit** refers to words that a person speaks that are intended to deceive other people. Alternate translation: “neither did he speak any lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 23 lj4a figs-activepassive ὃς λοιδορούμενος, οὐκ ἀντελοιδόρει 1 He, being reviled, did not revile back To **revile** someone is to speak abusively to another person. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “When people insulted him, he did not insult them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 23 gqb5 παρεδίδου…τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως 1 he comitted himself to the one who judges justly Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to the one who judges justly.” This means that he trusted God to take away his shame, which had been put on him by those who treated him harshly. -1PE 2 24 k5fm 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues talking about Jesus Christ. He is still speaking to people who are servants. -1PE 2 24 k632 figs-rpronouns ὃς…αὐτὸς 1 He himself This refers to Jesus, with emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1PE 2 24 w49m figs-metonymy τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν…ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον 1 carried our sins in his body to the tree Here, **carried our sins** means he suffered the punishment for our sins. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 24 zl8e figs-metonymy τὸ ξύλον 1 the tree This is a reference to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 of whose wounds you were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has healed you because people bruised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd**. Just as a shepherd protects his sheep, Jesus protects those who trust in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
2. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Outward ornaments”

Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.

### Unity

Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to women who are wives. -1PE 3 1 cj7z ὁμοίως, γυναῖκες, ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 In the same way, wives, submit to your own husbands Just as believers are to “obey every human authority” ([1 Peter 2:13](../02/13.md)) and servants are to “be subject” to their masters ([1 Peter 2:18](../02/18.md)), wives are to **submit** to their **husbands**. The words “obey,” “be subject,” and “submit” translate the same word. -1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message. To disobey means that they do not believe. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1 Peter 2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some men do not believe the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 1 bs56 figs-idiom κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won This means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1PE 3 1 kbis figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will become believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 1 qp4q figs-ellipsis ἄνευ λόγου 1 without a word Alternate translation: “without the wife saying a word.” Here, **a word** refers to anything the wife might speak about Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1PE 3 2 zft4 figs-abstractnouns ἐποπτεύσαντες τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν 1 having seen your pure behavior with respect The abstract noun **behavior** can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “having seen that you behave sincerely and respectfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 2 ng3s τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν 1 your pure behavior with respect This could mean: (1) This refers to their sincere behavior toward them and the way that they honor them. (2) This refers to their pure behavior toward them and the way that they honor God. -1PE 3 3 p1bg 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues speaking to women who are wives. -1PE 3 4 l2yq figs-metonymy ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 the inner person of the heart Here the words **inner man** and **heart** refer to the person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 4 x6us figs-doublet ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 the inner man of the heart Here the words **inner man** and **heart** both refer to the inward character and personality of a person. Alternate translation: “what you really are on the inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 3 4 gbw9 τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 of a gentle and quiet spirit Alternate translation: “of a gentle and peaceful attitude.” Here the word **quiet** means “peaceful” or “calm.” The word **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or temperament. -1PE 3 4 j5bu figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές 1 which is precious before God Peter speaks of God’s opinion of a person as if that person were standing directly in front of him. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 6 j1tp κύριον, αὐτὸν καλοῦσα 1 called him lord saying that he was her lord, that is, her master -1PE 3 6 t3xl figs-metaphor ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα 1 whose children you have become Peter says that believing women who act as Sarah acted can be thought of as if they were her actual **children**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 7 lbc2 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to men who are husbands. -1PE 3 7 f5ay ὁμοίως 1 in the same way This refers back to how Sarah and other godly women obeyed their husbands in [1 Peter 3:5](../03/05.md) and [1 Peter 3:6](../03/06.md). -1PE 3 7 lulz figs-abstractnouns συνοικοῦντες κατὰ γνῶσιν, ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει τῷ γυναικείῳ 1 live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container The abstract noun **understanding** can also be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “live with your wife, understanding that she is the weaker partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 7 eq1z figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 as with a weaker container Peter speaks of women as if they were containers, as men are sometimes also spoken of. Alternate translation: “knowing that she is not as strong as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 7 a88w figs-abstractnouns ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life You can translate this using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “honor her because she will also receive by grace the eternal life that God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Eternal **life** is often spoken of as if it were something that people inherit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 7 dv7t grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ 1 so that Here this phrase introduces the result that will happen if husbands treat their wives well. Alternate translation: “Live with your wives in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1PE 3 7 dwm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 so that your prayers will not be hindered To “hinder” is to prevent something from happening. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” or “so that nothing will keep you from praying as you should” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 8 nk97 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak again to all of the believers. +1PE 2 22 cjai figs-metaphor οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 Peter quotes Isaiah referring to **deceit** figuratively as if it were an object that could be found inside someone’s mouth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither was deceit spoken out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 22 lw1u figs-metonymy οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth Peter quotes Isaiah figuratively describing something the Messiah would say by association with **his mouth**, which he would use to say something. In this case it is something the Messiah did not say. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “neither did he say something deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 23 lj4a figs-activepassive ὃς λοιδορούμενος, οὐκ ἀντελοιδόρει 1 He, being reviled, did not revile back If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people reviled, did not revile them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 23 gqb5 figs-explicit παρεδίδου…τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως 1 Here, **the one who judges justly** refers to God. This means that he trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 24 k632 figs-rpronouns ὃς τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν 1 He himself Peter uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Jesus alone is the one who bore our sins. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus bore our sins” or “Jesus, the very person, bore our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1PE 2 24 w49m figs-metaphor τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν…ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον 1 carried our sins in his body to the tree Peter uses **bore our sins** figuratively to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 24 zl8e figs-metonymy τὸ ξύλον 1 the tree Peter uses **tree** figuratively to refer to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 24 x7ni figs-metaphor ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι 1 Here, **having died to sins** is a metaphor that means to longer be controlled by sin. Like a dead person is free from sinning because they are no longer alive, so believers are free to stop sinning because Jesus bore the punishment for their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being no longer controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 24 fxej grammar-connect-time-sequential ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι 1 This clause refers to an event that occurs before the event in the next clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “after having died to sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +1PE 2 24 jaka figs-exclusive τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζήσωμεν 1 When Peter says **we**, he is speaking of himself and other believers in Christ and would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1PE 2 24 w69k figs-quotemarks οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 This clause is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:5](../../isa/53/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 of whose wounds you were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has healed you by means of his wounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 24 lx3n figs-synecdoche οὗ τῷ μώλωπι 1 Here, **wounds** figuratively refers to all the suffering Jesus endured when he was beaten and killed on the cross. If our readers would misunderstand this, you express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by whose suffering and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 2 24 n0l5 figs-metaphor ἰάθητε 1 Here, **healed** could mean: (1) being freed from the penalty and power of sin, which could include physical healing. Alternate translation: “you were freed from the effects of sin” (2) being forgiven for their sins and having a restored relationship with God. Alternate translation: “you were forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks figuratively about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were living aimlessly without knowing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 2 25 jkfu figs-activepassive ἐπεστράφητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has turned you back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** figuratively to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 25 z6q2 figs-synecdoche τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
2. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verses 10–12](../03/10.md).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “the spirits in prison”

[Verse 19](../03/19.md) states that Jesus went and proclaimed to “the spirits in prison” but does not mention what Jesus proclaimed or who these spirits are. [Verse 20](../03/20.md) states that these spirits disobeyed God during the time of Noah. Many scholars think that this means one of the following three meanings, each of which will be discussed in the notes for verses [19](../03/19.md) and [20](../03/20.md): (1) The spirits are demons who were imprisoned by God because they did something evil during Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../../gen/06/01.md)). [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to the place where they are imprisoned and proclaimed his victory to them at some time between his death on the cross and return to heaven. (2) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time and the prison is the realm of the dead. [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to hell and proclaimed his victory to those dead people there between his death and resurrection. (3) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, but [verse 19](../03/19.md) refers to the pre-incarnate form of Jesus indirectly preaching the gospel to them through the preaching of Noah.

### “Baptism now saves you”

In [verse 20](../03/20.md) Peter refers to the story of God rescuing Noah and his family from the flood “through water.” Then in [verse 21](../03/21.md) he states that the water is an “antitype” for baptism, which is a Christian ritual by which a person publicly identifies as a Christian. Then Peter makes the statement that baptism “now saves you.” Since the New Testament authors repeatedly state that God alone saves people and no one can do any work to be saved, Peter’s statement cannot mean that a person can be saved by being baptized. Rather, Peter uses the word “baptism” figuratively to refer to the faith in Jesus that a person publicly confesses when that person is baptized. Peter indicates later in [verse 21](../03/21.md) that he is not referring to water baptism when he says that he is not referring to “the removal of dirt from the flesh.” Peter further states that the baptism he is referring to saves “through the resurrection of Jesus Christ,” which means that a person is saved by faith in Jesus because Jesus rose from the dead. +1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: In [verses 1–6](../03/01.md) Peter gives instructions specifically to women who are wives. +1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 1 kbis figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 1 bs56 figs-idiom κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won Here, **won** is an idiom that means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers in Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 1 qp4q figs-ellipsis ἄνευ λόγου 1 without a word Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “without you saying a word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 1 b56u figs-metonymy ἄνευ λόγου 1 Here, **word** refers to the anything the wives might say to their husbands about the gospel message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without a word about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 2 rzrl grammar-connect-logic-result ἐποπτεύσαντες 1 This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving husbands would become believers in Jesus. These husbands became believers because they **observed** how their wives behaved. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they observed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1PE 3 2 zft4 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν 1 having seen your pure behavior with respect If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you behave purely and with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 2 ng3s figs-explicit τὴν…ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν 1 your pure behavior with respect This could refer to: (1) the wives’ sincere and honest behavior. Alternate translation: “your sincere behavior” (2) the wives’ sexually chaste behavior. Alternate translation: “your sexually chaste behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 3 p1bg writing-pronouns ὧν 1 Here, **whose** refers to the Christian wives to whom Peter is speaking. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1PE 3 3 ysvn figs-abstractnouns ὧν…κόσμος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **adornment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they way you adorn yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 4 oav8 = ἀλλ’ ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin this verse as a new sentence. If you do so, then you will need to repeat the subject and verb from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Rather, let your adornment be the inner man of the heart” +1PE 3 4 m2n3 figs-metonymy ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, **hidden man** and **heart** both refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 4 l2yq figs-possession ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 the inner person of the heart Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **hidden man** is the same thing as **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the hidden man, which is the heart” or “the hidden man, namely, the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 4 l1js figs-possession ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable thing** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 4 spi6 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Here,**quiet** means “peaceful” or “calm.” It does not mean the opposite of loud. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 4 gbw9 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 of a gentle and quiet spirit Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or temperament. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and quiet attitude.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 4 j5bu figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές 1 which is precious before God Peter refers to God’s opinion figuratively as if it were a person standing directly in front of him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be very precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 5 dq60 figs-metaphor ἐκόσμουν ἑαυτάς 1 Peter speaks figuratively of the attitude of the holy women as if it were something they **adorned themselves** with. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “made themselves beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 5 jbuf ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 1](../03/01.md). +1PE 3 6 kpnl translate-names Σάρρα…τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 **Sarah** is the name of a woman and **Abraham** is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1PE 3 6 t3xl figs-idiom ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα 1 whose children you have become Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has similar qualities as them. Believing women who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 6 v2so figs-doublenegatives μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν 1 The phrase **not being afraid of any** translates two negative words in Greek. Peter uses them together to emphasize that believing women should not fear anything at all. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1PE 3 7 lbc2 0 General Information: In this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands. +1PE 3 7 uddn figs-genericnoun συνοικοῦντες…τῷ γυναικείῳ 1 Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1PE 3 7 lulz figs-abstractnouns κατὰ γνῶσιν 1 live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 7 eq1z figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 as with a weaker container Here Peter refers to women figuratively as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 7 a88w figs-abstractnouns ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **heirs**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “honor them as also those who will inherit with you the grace of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Peter speaks of **the grace of life** figuratively as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 7 quba figs-possession χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 7 dwm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 so that your prayers will not be hindered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 8 nk97 0 General Information: In [verses 8–12](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers. 1PE 3 8 f5y7 ὁμόφρονες 1 be likeminded Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be” -1PE 3 8 rut5 εὔσπλαγχνοι 1 tenderhearted being gentle and compassionate towards others -1PE 3 9 z5u3 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult Peter speaks of responding to the actions of another person as remitting payment for those actions. Alternate translation: “Do not do evil to someone who does evil to you or insult someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 9 t6il figs-explicit εὐλογοῦντες 1 blessing You can clarify the object of **blessing**. Alternate translation: “continue to bless those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 9 w5df figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God called you for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 9 n3xc figs-metaphor ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε 1 so that you might inherit a blessing Peter speaks of receiving God’s **blessing** as receiving an inheritance. Alternate translation: “that you might receive God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 10 dpf2 figs-explicit 0 General Information: In these verses Peter quotes from the Psalms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 10 p9bl figs-parallelism ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to love life and to see good days These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Here experiencing good things is spoken of as seeing good things. Alternate translation: “experience good things during life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 10 t5en figs-metonymy ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 good days The word **days** refers to one’s lifetime. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 10 wq2b figs-parallelism παυσάτω τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 Let … stop his tongue from evil and his lips from speaking deceit These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the command not to lie. Alternate translation: “stop saying evil and deceitful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 3 10 rqa9 figs-synecdoche τὴν γλῶσσαν…χείλη 1 his tongue … his lips The words **tongue** and **lips** refer to the person who is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 11 n5sr figs-metaphor ἐκκλινάτω…ἀπὸ κακοῦ 1 let him turn away from evil Here, **turn away** is a metaphor that means to stop doing something. Alternate translation: “let him stop doing what is bad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 12 yn5l figs-synecdoche ὀφθαλμοὶ Κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους 1 the eyes of the Lord are upon the righteous The word **eyes** refers to the Lord’s ability to know things. Alternate translation: “The Lord knows the righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 12 m2a0 figs-metaphor ὀφθαλμοὶ Κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους 1 the eyes of the Lord are upon the righteous The Lord’s approval of the righteous is spoken of as his seeing them. Alternate translation: “The Lord approves of the righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 12 r5xf figs-synecdoche ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests The word “ears” refers to the Lord’s awareness of what people say. Alternate translation: “he hears their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 12 tytz figs-explicit ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests That the Lord hears their requests implies that he also responds to them. Alternate translation: “he grants their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 12 t22b figs-metaphor πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Opposing someone is spoken of as setting one’s face against that person. Alternate translation: “the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 12 es9n figs-synecdoche πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against The word **face** refers to the Lord’s will to oppose his enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 13 wkw4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues teaching the believers how to live Christian lives. -1PE 3 13 e1ma figs-rquestion τίς ὁ κακώσων ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ζηλωταὶ γένησθε? 1 who is the one who will harm you if you are a zealot of what is good? Peter asks this question to emphasize that it is unlikely that someone would harm them if they do good things. Alternate translation: “no one will harm you if you do good things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1PE 3 14 f6ch figs-abstractnouns πάσχοιτε διὰ δικαιοσύνην 1 you suffer because of righteousness You can translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you suffer because you do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 14 xg3m figs-activepassive μακάριοι 1 you are blessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 14 f9u8 figs-parallelism τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled These two phrases share similar meanings and emphasize that believers should not be afraid of those who persecute them. Alternate translation: “But do not be afraid of what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 3 14 yz6y τὸν…φόβον αὐτῶν 1 their fear Here the word **their** refers to anyone who might try to harm those to whom Peter is writing. -1PE 3 15 ju58 δὲ…ἁγιάσατε 1 Instead, sanctify Alternate translation: “Instead of being troubled, set apart” -1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts The phrase “sanctify the Lord Christ” is a metaphor for acknowledging Christ’s holiness. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” or “honor the Lord Christ as holy within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 15 qjg3 figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the “inner person.” Alternate translation: “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 18 me4u 0 Connecting Statement: Peter explains how Christ suffered and what Christ accomplished by suffering. -1PE 3 18 g1xd figs-metaphor ἵνα ὑμᾶς προσαγάγῃ τῷ Θεῷ 1 so that he might bring us to God Peter probably means here that Christ died in order to create a close relationship between us and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 18 j5lh figs-metaphor θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body; Christ was physically put to death. Alternate translation: “having been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 18 q9fa figs-activepassive θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “since people put Christ to death physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 18 h6v4 figs-activepassive ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 having been made alive in the spirit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God made him alive spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 18 n7nh πνεύματι 1 in the spirit This could mean: (1) This refers to a spiritual existence. (2) This refers to the Holy Spirit’s power. -1PE 3 19 hp82 ἐν ᾧ 1 in which This could mean: (1) This refers to his spiritual existence. (2) This refers to the Holy Spirit’s power. -1PE 3 19 ez3d τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν 1 to the spirits in prison Here, **spirits** could mean: (1) This refers to evil spirits. (2) This refers to spirits of the dead people. -1PE 3 20 s7qm figs-metonymy ἀπεξεδέχετο ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the patience of God The word **patience** is a metonym for God himself. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 20 qxah figs-personification ὅτε ἀπεξεδέχετο ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία 1 when the patience of God was waiting Peter writes of God’s patience as if it is a person. Alternate translation: “when God was waiting patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1PE 3 20 c6mi figs-activepassive ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε, κατασκευαζομένης κιβωτοῦ 1 in the days of Noah, while an ark was being constructed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “during the time of Noah, when he was building an ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 21 jti3 δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ Alternate translation: “because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ.” This phrase completes the thought, “This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now” -1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God To be at the **right hand of God** is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. Alternate translation: “who is beside God in the place of honor and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 22 f6jq ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ 1 after … had been subjected to him Alternate translation: “when … had submitted to Jesus Christ” +1PE 3 8 tzgc figs-gendernotations φιλάδελφοι 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1PE 3 9 z5u3 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult Peter uses **paying back** figuratively to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insult someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 9 t6il figs-explicit εὐλογοῦντες 1 blessing Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 9 w5df figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 9 wx2r figs-explicit εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε, ἵνα 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) **blessing** earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were called to bless, so that” (2) **inherit a blessing** later in the verse “to this you were called: so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 9 n3xc figs-metaphor ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε 1 so that you might inherit a blessing Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** figuratively as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 10 dpf2 writing-quotations γὰρ 1 **For** here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament ([Psalm 34:12–16](../../psa/34/12.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as David wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1PE 3 10 tce3 figs-quotemarks ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς, παυσάτω 1 From this clause through to the end of [verse 12](../03/12.md), Peter quotes from [Psalm 34:12–16](../../psa/34/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 3 10 p9bl figs-parallelism ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to love life and to see good days These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the one truly wanting to have a good life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Peter quotes David speaking figuratively of experiencing a good lifetime as **seeing good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 10 rqa9 figs-synecdoche τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 his tongue … his lips Peter quotes David using the words **tongue** and **lips** figuratively refer to the person who is speaking. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “himself from speaking evil and from speaking deceit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 3 10 y4kd figs-abstractnouns τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **deceit**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “his tongue from evil things and his lips from speaking deceitful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 11 n5sr figs-metaphor ἐκκλινάτω…ἀπὸ κακοῦ 1 let him turn away from evil Here, **turn away from** is a metaphor that means to avoid doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him avoid doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 11 fu8e figs-doublet ζητησάτω εἰρήνην καὶ διωξάτω αὐτήν 1 The phrases **seek peace** and **pursue it** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of living peacefully with other people. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Let him earnestly pursue peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1PE 3 11 qhyg figs-explicit ζητησάτω εἰρήνην 1 Here, **peace** refers to the peaceful relationships between people. If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let him seek to live peacefully with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 12 yn5l figs-idiom ὀφθαλμοὶ Κυρίου ἐπὶ δικαίους 1 the eyes of the Lord are upon the righteous Here, **eyes** being **on** someone is an idiom that refers to God acting favorably toward someone by taking care of that person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “The Lord favorably takes care of the righteous ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 12 r5xf figs-idiom ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests Here, **ears** being **toward** someone’s **request** is an idiom that refers to God listening to that person’s request. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord listens to their request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 12 tytz figs-explicit ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests The idea that the Lord listens to the requests of righteous people also implies that he responds to those requests. If this might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he listen to and grants their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 12 es9n figs-synecdoche πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **face** refers figuratively to the Lord himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But the Lord is against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 3 12 t22b figs-idiom πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **the face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “But the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 12 gw7w figs-quotemarks ποιοῦντας κακά 1 After this phrase, Peter also ends his quotation from the book of Psalms. If you decided in [verse 10](../03/10.md) to mark this as a quotation, indicate that ending here with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 3 13 wkw4 0 Connecting Statement: In [verses 13–22](../03/13.md) Peter teaches the believers how to behave when unbelievers persecute them. +1PE 3 13 e1ma figs-rquestion τίς ὁ κακώσων ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ζηλωταὶ γένησθε? 1 who is the one who will harm you if you are a zealot of what is good? Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that it is unlikely that someone would harm them if they did good things. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one will harm you if you become zealous ones of the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1PE 3 13 e8li figs-possession τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ζηλωταὶ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe people who are **zealous** about doing **good** deeds. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “ones zealous to do good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 14 f6ch figs-abstractnouns πάσχοιτε διὰ δικαιοσύνην 1 you suffer because of righteousness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you might suffer because you do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 14 xg3m figs-activepassive μακάριοι 1 you are blessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will make you blessed ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 14 j8ds figs-quotemarks τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:12](../../isa/08/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +1PE 3 14 f9u8 figs-parallelism τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled These two phrases mean the same thing. Peter states the same idea twice in order to emphasize that believers should not be afraid of people who persecute them. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “But you should not fear at all what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1PE 3 14 yz6y figs-possession τὸν…φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε 1 their fear This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** figuratively to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 15 qjg3 figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your hearts Here, **hearts** refers to the thoughts or emotions of Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 15 d69e figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἀπολογίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defense**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to defend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 15 q8i1 figs-metonymy τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον 1 Peter uses **word** figuratively to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 15 w3xw figs-abstractnouns περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning your hope” or “concerning the hope that you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 16 hzya figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **meekness** and **fear**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by being meek and fearful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 16 ctk3 figs-abstractnouns συνείδησιν ἔχοντες ἀγαθήν 1 This phrase implies not doing anything sinful that would cause a person to not have a **good conscience**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “doing nothing wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 16 wrk5 figs-infostructure ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καταλαλεῖσθε, καταισχυνθῶσιν, οἱ ἐπηρεάζοντες ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “so that the ones who are reviling your good behavior in Christ may be ashamed with respect to what you are being slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 3 16 s7mb figs-activepassive καταλαλεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people are slandering you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 16 qflw figs-explicit ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 Here, **in Christ** refers to being a Christian. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your good behavior as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 16 dvwr figs-activepassive καταισχυνθῶσιν, οἱ ἐπηρεάζοντες ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may shame the ones who are reviling your good behavior in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 17 bt09 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀγαθοποιοῦντας…κακοποιοῦντας 1 These two phrases indicate two different reasons for suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of doing good … because of doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1PE 3 17 x8qu figs-metonymy εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **the will of God** figuratively to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 18 me4u figs-explicit περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, **sins** implies the **sins** of people other than Jesus because Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the sins of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 18 q9fa figs-activepassive θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people having killed him in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 18 j5lh figs-metonymy θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body, which was made of **flesh**. Peter is saying that the body of Christ was killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 18 h6v4 figs-activepassive ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 having been made alive in the spirit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 18 n7nh figs-explicit ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 in the spirit Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made him alive spiritually” or “having been made him alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 19 hp82 figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ 1 in which Here, **which** refers to “the spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 19 ewuu figs-ellipsis ἐκήρυξεν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death that he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 19 ez3d figs-explicit τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν 1 to the spirits in prison Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls” in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 19 zpyr figs-metaphor ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Here Peter uses **prison** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) a place where God imprisoned certain evil spirits whom he will judge when he judges the whole world (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../../jud/01/06.md)). Alternate translation: “whom God had imprisoned to await judgment” (2) the place where sinful people go when they die. Alternate translation: “in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 20 qxah figs-ellipsis ἀπειθήσασίν 1 when the patience of God was waiting Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 20 s7qm figs-metonymy ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία 1 the patience of God Peter uses **patience of God** figuratively to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 20 yyth figs-metonymy ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 Here Peter uses **days of Noah** figuratively to refer to the time period when Noah was alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 20 c6mi figs-activepassive κατασκευαζομένης κιβωτοῦ 1 in the days of Noah, while an ark was being constructed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when Noah was constructing an ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 21 dqjy writing-pronouns ὃ 1 Here, **which** refers back to the “water” mentioned at the end of the last verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1PE 3 21 vxoh figs-infostructure ὃ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀντίτυπον νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “which, being an antitype for baptism, no saves you also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 3 21 tz6l figs-explicit ὃ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀντίτυπον νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα 1 Here, **antitype** refers to one thing that is an analogy for another thing. In this context the “water” from the previous verse is an analogy for baptism. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is a symbol for baptism, no saves you also” or “which is analogous to baptism, no saves you also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 21 ium3 figs-metonymy βάπτισμα 1 Here Peter uses **baptism** figuratively to refer to the faith in Jesus that believers profess when they are baptized. The Bible clearly states that God saves people by grace through faith, not any work like baptism ([Ephesians 2:8–9](../../eph/02/08.md)). See the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus demonstrated by baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 21 owi3 figs-abstractnouns οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **removal** and **appeal**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it does not remove dirt from the flesh, but appeals to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 21 hmp9 figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 Here, Peter uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to a person’s physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 21 uz0u figs-explicit συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 Here the phrase **a good conscience** means Peter’s readers do not feel guilty because they know that God has forgiven their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “an appeal to God to know that your sins have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 21 jti3 figs-infostructure καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal of a good conscience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 3 21 rixf figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through God raising Jesus Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 3 22 p5ij figs-infostructure ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ, πορευθεὶς εἰς οὐρανὸν, ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 The phrases **having gone** and **having been subjected** indicate that those two clauses describe events that occurred before the first clause in this verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “after having gone into heaven, with angels and authorities and powers having been subjected to him, he is at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God Here, Peter uses **right hand** figuratively to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 22 ldrw figs-explicit ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the **right** side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is at the place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 22 q72i figs-doublet ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 The words **angels**, **authorities**, and **powers** are all terms for the ranks of supernatural beings, both angelic and demonic. If your language does not have three different terms for rulers or authorities, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “all types of supernatural beings having been subjected to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1PE 3 22 f6jq figs-activepassive ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 after … had been subjected to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having subjected angels and authorities and powers to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)
2. The end is near (4:7–11)
3. How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom

It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do. 1PE 4 1 b8d4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ’s sufferings. 1PE 4 1 ess6 σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh Alternate translation: “in his body” diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv index 82c9a98a12..3cfd6e582d 100644 --- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv @@ -23,19 +23,20 @@ REV 1 4 apl8 figs-123person ταῖς ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς REV 1 4 y9yh translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 May grace be to you and peace from the one who is … and from the seven spirits In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming give you grace and peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) REV 1 4 lsun figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **grace** and **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 1 4 unul figs-explicit ὁ ὢν 1 These three phrases all refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God who is, and who was, and who is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -REV 1 4 qsu6 figs-metaphor ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 who is to come John uses **is coming** figuratively to say that God exists in the future. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs- metaphor]]) +REV 1 4 qsu6 figs-metaphor ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 who is to come Here, **is coming** has two possible connotations. The expression could refer to the the physical act of coming, when God will be present on earth for a final judgment. Alternatively, the phrase indicates the future tense, which seems more likely given the prior context describing the past and present times of God's existence. In other words, John uses **is coming** figuratively to state that God will exist in the future. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 1 4 x38p writing-symlanguage ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων 1 seven spirits The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) the Spirit of God, which is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit” (2) seven individual spirits who serve God, which might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) -REV 1 5 w24x καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 and from Jesus Christ The first half of this verse continues the sentence from the previous verse [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ” -REV 1 5 gz2n ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός 1 This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The expression is probably an allusion to Psalm 89, specifically to [Psalm 89:37](../../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to a portion of Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in 2 Samuel 7 and then affirmed again within Psalm 89 later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +REV 1 5 w24x καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 and from Jesus Christ The first half of this verse continues the sentence from the previous verse. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ” +REV 1 5 gz2n ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός 1 This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The expression is probably an allusion to [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), specifically to [Psalm 89:37](../../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to a portion of Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md) and then affirmed again within [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md) later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) REV 1 5 l3h8 figs-idiom ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν 1 the firstborn from the dead This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The term **firstborn** commonly refers to the first child actually to be born to parents and, therefore, the primary recipient of the parents’ inheritance. The idiomatic expression apparently alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). However, every title describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to portions of Psalm 89, including: **the faithful witness** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. If your readers would not understand the phrase **the firstborn from the dead**, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) REV 1 5 j1xp grammar-collectivenouns τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead The word **dead** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from those who are dead” or “from those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -REV 1 5 gqw8 grammar-collectivenouns καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. The expression **the ruler of the kings of the earth** alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). However, every title describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to portions of Psalm 89, including: **the faithful witness** and **the firstborn from the dead**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in 2 Samuel 7, which are then affirmed again in Psalm 89 later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -REV 1 5 ttqn τῷ ἀγαπῶντι ἡμᾶς 1 The second half of this verse begins a doxology that continues onto the next verse 1:6. The doxology directly praises Jesus Christ personally. The doxology continues throughout the entirety of verse 1:6. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to state some of the information from the following verse that will then be repeated in verse 1:6 once again. Alternate translation: “May Jesus Christ, who loves us, receive glory and power always” +REV 1 5 gqw8 grammar-collectivenouns καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. The expression **the ruler of the kings of the earth** alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). However, every title describing Jesus Christ in this verse alludes to portions of [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), including: **the faithful witness** and **the firstborn from the dead**. All the titles in this verse describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises given to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md), which are then affirmed again in\n[Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md) later. Therefore, the translator can indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +REV 1 5 ttqn τῷ ἀγαπῶντι ἡμᾶς 1 The second half of this verse begins a doxology that continues through the rest of this verse and all of the next verse. The doxology directly praises Jesus Christ personally. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to state some of the information from the following verse that will then be repeated in verse 1:6 once again. Alternate translation: “May Jesus Christ, who loves us, receive glory and power always” REV 1 5 u6v7 figs-metaphor λύσαντι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 has released us Here John uses **released** figuratively of forgiving people for their **sins**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “has forgiven us for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -REV 1 5 jpnq figs-metonymy ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 John uses **sins** figuratively to refer to the punishment for **sins**. He means that Jesus causes people who believe in him to escape eternal punishment for their sins. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has released us from the punishment for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs- metonymy]]) +REV 1 5 jpnq figs-metonymy ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 John uses **sins** figuratively to refer to the punishment for **sins**. He means that Jesus causes people who believe in him to escape eternal punishment for their sins. If this would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has released us from the punishment for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 1 5 q64f figs-metonymy τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **blood** figuratively represents the death of Christ on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 1 6 jszo writing-pronoun καὶ ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς 1 Alternate translation: “He has separated us for his rule, he has made us priests…”. The subject of the sentence, as well as of the contents of this entire verse, is Jesus Christ. Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus explicit throughout the entire verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]]) +REV 1 6 jszo writing-pronoun καὶ ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς 1 The subject of the sentence, as well as of the contents of this entire verse, is Jesus Christ. Thus, the UST makes the subject of Jesus explicit throughout the entire verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronoun]]) REV 1 6 nhfb figs-metaphor βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς 1 Here, **a kingdom, priests** is a pair of nouns functioning as two metaphors for the service that believers give to God the Father. Believers in Jesus Christ serve God like citizens serve their ruling king. Likewise, believers in Jesus also benefit God like priests attended to God in the temple or the tabernacle of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +REV 1 6 p8j5 figs-metaphor ἱερεῖς 1 Here, **a kingdom, priests** is a pair of nouns functioning as two metaphors for the service that believers give to God the Father. Believers in Jesus Christ serve God like citizens serve their ruling king. Likewise, believers in Jesus also benefit God like priests attended to God in the temple or the tabernacle of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 1 6 nesy writing-pronoun βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **kingdom**, **priests**, **glory**, and **power** in other ways. Alternate translation: “he has created us to aid him in his program and to be household custodians serving God, his Father. May Jesus have proper honor and recognized authority always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 1 6 ne7x τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ 1 his God and Father Here, **God** and **Father** refers to two persons of the Godhead, who exists in essence as a trinity of individual persons. The name **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “for God, his Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) REV 1 6 qd74 figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος 1 to him be the glory and the power This is a wish or prayer. This could mean: (1) John prays that people honor Jesus Christ in light of or with respect to his **glory** and **power**. (2) John prays that Jesus Christ will be honored and will be able to rule completely over everyone and everything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -107,14 +108,16 @@ REV 2 1 ugs3 writing-symlanguage τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν τῶν χρ REV 2 2 jg1u figs-abstractnouns οἶδα…τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου 1 I know … your hard labor and your patient endurance If your readers would misunderstand the abstract nouns **labor** and **endurance**, you can express them with the verbs “work” and “endure.” Alternate translation: “I know … that you laboured very hard and that you patiently suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 2 2 l6mv figs-youcrowd τὰ ἔργα σου, καὶ τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου, καὶ ὅτι οὐ δύνῃ βαστάσαι κακούς; καὶ ἐπείρασας τοὺς λέγοντας ἑαυτοὺς ἀποστόλους, καὶ οὐκ εἰσίν, καὶ εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς 1 The second person pronouns and the second person individuals addressed throughout this verse are all singular in their number but plural in their references. In other words, all the second person references in the verbs and the pronouns, although singular in their literal sense, are plural in their implied references to the believers of the church at Ephesus. If the singular form of the second person address and the second person verbal references would not be natural in your language, then perhaps the translator could use the plural forms of the second person, or “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) REV 2 2 sxbf figs-nominaladj κακούς 1 Here, **evil people** translates directly an adjective in the Greek that signifies simply “wicked” or **evil**. Thus, the translator must supply a noun that the adjective is describing through an assumed implication. The natural assumption for the noun to be supplied would be human individuals who were people in the surrounding community of those being addressed here. Alternate translation: “wayward people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -REV 2 2 ka9e εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς 1 you have found them to be false Alternate translation: “you have recognized that those people are false apostles” -REV 2 3 muq8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in my name” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 2 3 j46d figs-metaphor οὐ κεκοπίακες 1 you have not grown weary Being discouraged is spoken of as growing **weary**. Alternate translation: “you have not become discouraged” or “you have not quit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -REV 2 4 j7gz ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ, ὅτι 1 I have against you the fact that Alternate translation: “I disapprove of you because” or “I am angry with you because” -REV 2 4 kx98 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες 1 you have left behind your first love To stop doing something is spoken of as leaving it **behind**, and **love** is spoken of as if it is an object that can be left behind. AT “you have stopped loving me as you did at the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -REV 2 5 sfw2 figs-metaphor πόθεν πέπτωκας 1 from where you have fallen No longer loving as much as they used to is spoken of as haven **fallen**. Alternate translation: “how much you have changed” or “how much you used to love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +REV 2 2 ka9e εὗρες αὐτοὺς ψευδεῖς 1 you have found them to be false Here, **you have found them** indicates the literal translation of the Greek. However, the sense of **found** is something like "to understand" or simply to come to the knowledge about a certain reality. The understood reality is actually the falsehood of the claim of certain people to be apostles. Alternate translation: “you have recognized those people to be false apostles” +REV 2 3 nn01 figs-explicit καὶ ὑπομονὴν ἔχεις 1 Here, **and you have patient endurance** implies a missing affirmation of **I know** from the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternative translation: “I realize that you have patient endurance” or "I recognize that you have patient endurance" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +REV 2 3 muq8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ, since Jesus uses **name** here to refer to himself. The believers in Ephesus are suffering persecution and difficult circumstances for the sake of Jesus Christ as believers in him. The assembly in Ephesus suffers for the sake of the person and message of Jesus Christ within their society. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in my name” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +REV 2 3 j46d figs-metaphor οὐ κεκοπίακες 1 you have not grown weary Being discouraged is spoken of as growing **weary**. The metaphor relates the notion of quitting an action with becoming tired since often people stop an action if they are tired. Alternate translation: “you have not become discouraged” or “you have not quit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +REV 2 3 mg3z figs-litotes οὐ κεκοπίακες 1 Here, **have not grown weary** is a litotes expression that expresses emphasis by negating the opposite statement. In this case, Jesus emphasizes the act of persevering and not giving up despite obstacles by stating the opposite notion. The believers at Ephesus had persevered in trials but did not give up. Thus, they did not grow **weary** or become tired, but rather they continued to try hard. See the previous note about the metaphor in the figure of speech. Alternate translation: “you have not grown tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +REV 2 4 j7gz ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ, ὅτι 1 I have against you the fact that Here **I have against you that** indicates a negative, critical sentiment. It expresses the idea of a critical attitude in the person speaking, meaning something like: "I have something against you" or "there is something about you that I disapprove of". The Greek does not supply what Jesus is angry about, but the following clause describes the matter of contention. Alternate translation: “I disapprove of you because” or “I have a criticism to make of you" +REV 2 4 kx98 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες 1 you have left behind your first love To stop doing something is spoken of as leaving it **behind**, and **love** is spoken of as if it is an object that can be left behind. Alternate translation: “you have stopped loving me as you did at the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +REV 2 5 sfw2 figs-metaphor πόθεν πέπτωκας 1 from where you have fallen The notion of the church no longer loving as much as they used to love is spoken of as having **fallen** in the sense of "how far you have fallen from your original location". Here, "falling" from a standing location is a metaphor for abandoning an earlier love and devotion for a person, in this case Jesus. The metaphorical figure of speech describes a tremendous decline in the love for Jesus among the Christians at Ephesus. Alternate translation: “how much you have changed” or “how much you used to love me” or "how far you have fallen" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 2 5 j6p5 εἰ δὲ μή 1 Unless you repent Alternate translation: “If you do not repent” -REV 2 5 j8p5 writing-symlanguage κινήσω τὴν λυχνίαν σου 1 remove your lampstand The **lampstands** are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated “lampstand” in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) +REV 2 5 j8p5 writing-symlanguage κινήσω τὴν λυχνίαν σου 1 remove your lampstand The **lampstand** is a symbol that represents one of the seven churches. See how you translated “lampstand” in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 2 6 cvi5 translate-names τῶν Νικολαϊτῶν 1 Nicolaitans The **Nicolaitans** were people who followed the teachings of a man named Nicolaus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) REV 2 7 s3qg figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. Here, the phrase **has an ear** is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 2 7 ft48 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])